Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Contract
r.,'"vw4gxg m g MOW � yL ux f xF -. �ra T�I { zP� F`3�4+1,V.��8w +=. ' mr �z'�` � �'�t'F•„-�' '' ��'-r�' s;� ��,��,� �" ' -� �''r�'+"Y fir, � � ���r� � H` ,,.:d'*� `'•,4. -:�1 � � ;.� w �s'" •a�� �: �'�' '�*",��" P����e� ;��`�; `-,"'r� s f `� .te ,�`��' ii z'`Y�3t r'`-ay`v-� aro.? 3 : x �..•. s„; >i�"@„' #�° .�`` �.x..,'�r�� ,�`:.:'�,�°� ;�����,cd n g � ��.. r«W"'"R '" k .�,,v a ti�r��f r',�,�f�`_�,�,z gyp. 3 it a� sx t ��rs.�- se; � }y g Y a Fkl 's� s 's.,. *<, sx•at 4,4 94Fa.a � �ty t y .w a ” rs� s ,�,k a ,xt���t�''-�^ •S".�y��-,� sss�"�� ,Kr sa Y.:,. �',ro :^z ,� "�= �.�''��§s s � y z �� �° �- � "`'��a.. "^ t� �� .Y, ���� m xz. ���a - 'S r a '�•�'�, s.'3`*�v� �a '`fit^ r � g%'4 ¢,t .; k ."r,�. u zw},`� ';?. � �' �,�-��rx�t1"` "n�+�'-�i���,�v�'.�° i �(,,,*}��. n. s � y r✓ �� 8 t� ``' �,:: ��„�: �`!1r-'~?*�a-�` �� 5��. 5��� i ri,�.!^s, s ..x�s•x" 'cN.�7n z:�:x� #' r�+t`�,'r. }?s��c�"�'�,{f j x c f `�;'� i 7 �s.`S�s3 y���'.�,'S `�° t^�"r.�v��,' 7 t ISO dX Ag ra K "firFU 3p } }� mum t $Y _� S a?+w' rT y .,r? x yi.� r€rs =-'c� .,r• ,� #,,„ °„fix ,� y ,, ,� ,� a, a s. 'ficsst s t '0M. .�„ `a �. ,.� � M y in, t:`� .�` • «s :. .d � �',`�`,,� �.✓!,. `r.*ii� .',�S i `� "f„,m �� °_� �xsg ;» :f "�''”�',:u tier '��"P F-.; ,' v�.�.,. K^� rs �` s„��, x ��*�.���t �� a �., t,.wdr^! 'r - a'�y�.5+ `� § }:.. ,- „.* „."' *. tmS• e k d s' xT ,3 " i .t c -}`. o- ax as � z m _ �k 9 d��" � �,�` r y:. ^a' ��,"'fir" .li. � �.,^�,x.�`� �w,���'"'•� �Yw' 's,. r�..F �Y� M t x ar•< s'k •�,ri4�'7 e`' x' < w i2� � ,; ;'s � � ' �-. — ;,eqb �•a,�y� }; 3 �' r � `�}7 {*,�,+"{��,. �ywi..; s�Ef`,£,}� ��a dz����,, ,� 6g° t�'V. °".�w`�% ,�,«z T¢ �=Xt .,}'�;y J ,�'t,£ k- �, } •� - s ��r �g£a - �. � *' "i#�` � r ��a�t � n''�r� `"�µr '°we'' t ��s � i i ;; } &" �, .{,a '' �8':-Lrvr� t'�rr�� a���'d�' r rs s -� ''� �-� ,5. ��z Kt�y'3 :. a x k''°s # ^P �•a ;: },t ,���3,' t: ':. � �< � t ea''�`h�"'.'�,fi � `u r�,.���Rw,A' ,���`pa a�'' x:`� a•3 � z w a- Y y a F s,.,'; # �.� �.a�+'k� 4t «�"* ..�,d,,,, .^� 'a9s�,:.!ro t ,r�r s�v a,� � a ;,a�'�r '„,.� -p',,, "T a s•`�. a ,• ��; � .,� a; a vDn.a, , ".0. `i �,r s'. � �•. m -���.+es �, ���*t�'ak'u"', '� f'iv^ �s �U t>-'�st�'#'��,'*�.�` yaa}xa� �`t�` s ,,,,y r a s3' _.- � - r ,� p-�, � a - -Y �, ro "x "�>� 2F � �dd4,�t'; Y�'' .s s k �-�'��' r$ �'a ra,r, y��„*t r{ �€ .���•� y r u �.�� �..;:t�-�� k� i ���.,; �� ��'�`'' ro„�.'�q 3 w a ��`'�'z. .�"� ��'�i -:� }sus, �{ a .. ..e � � � c .r' � .�,•. Y1A`rh ' - a `'�'+ '.+ '','• .,. °S�s tl ` .� sY+ .,& �s ' 4 w ' ` p _ xis^ F; ° s t+ N. aa, .,� w .. CITY OF RENTON RENTON, WASHINGTON CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for the Stonegate Lift Station Replacement PROJECT NO. WWP-27-3473 June 2010 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS CONTRACT FORMS +�• CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS PLANS .. wtiD• S Of w b �F p�T K Wgsy'�E h i 45 16825 VAL Eix' r ® Printed on Recycled Paper e Construction Co. GENERAL CONTRACTORS .. Contact Numbers Officers: Douglas J Suzuki, President Office: (425) 483-0600 Mobile: (206) 571-3571 Alec C Andry, Secretary Treasure Mobile: (206) 571-3572 Home: (425) 357-0690 Job Foreman: Jay Brown Mobile: (206) 571-3573 Home: (425) 377-2478 Bonding Agent: Jim Binder •` Propel Insurance 925 Fourth Avenue Suite 3200 Seattle Wa 98104-1159 Office (206) 676-4204 P.O. Box 358 • Woodinville,Washington 98072 • Phone: (425)483-0600 Fax: (360) 668-5133 am SHORELINE CONSTRUCTION CO. to General Contractors SH-OR-EC'374NO (206)483-0600 Fax(360)668-5133 PO Box 358 Woodinville,WA 98072 No RESOLUTION "RESOLVED"that the President of Shoreline Construction Co., Douglas J. Suzuki and Alec Andry is authorized to sign contracts and other documents requiring a signature of an officer o the company. +r This RESOLUTION without meeting dated October 30`h 2007. Signed and sealed with the seal of the corporation this 30th day of October 2007. err rrr Secretary Signature of all members of the Board od Directors (adopted wit t ting) `rr +rr MW r rr air rrr .r 3 .CL 3 t 4 C M yd i�«, '��,�� � � n ? �t ,� ��' ���`. ��`"� 'akr,. a •;4 S�sf 3��'sy�' f " v s S6i EL 4E' CONSTRUCTIVU,,CO. 83Y'5'916TH ST SE WOODINVILLE WA 98072 Domestic Profit Corporation Renewed by Authority of Secretary of State DEPARTMENT OF LA'd'01), i NFA 1mDUS l I;i�- REGISTERED AS PROVIDED BY LAW AS I� CONST CONT GENERAL REGIST. # EXP. i DATE ,. CC01 S`HOREC*374N0 10/01/2010x' EFFECTIVE DATE 08/20/1963 rl SHORELINE CONST CO PO BOX 358 WOODINVILLE WA 98072. f f The.Ctbensee named above has been issued the business registrations or licenses f_ listed.By accepting thisdacumertt the licensee certifies the information provided 1. h-th-appltdafioh for thosd licehs�`s was complete;true,and accurate to the best . of his or her knowledge,and that business will be conducted in compliance with F all applicable Washington state,county,and city regulations. Director.Department of Licer014 r Qw rr _ rr dw rr low ow 4W ,r err to .r r do Aw 60 Business License City of lt, Expiration Date Annual, D d 04/30/2011 0 1055 South Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 (425)430-6851 a3 n.ess Location '831-5 21 T-- Issued Date: LSE � � � -nse --�—» OODIN.V1L LEWA 98072-8060 04/26/2010 BL.022527 r+. Licensee has applied for a City of Renton business license in accordance with Renton Municipal Code SHORELINE CONSTRUCTION CO (the Code), Title'V Business, Chapter. 5 Business _ PO BOX 35$ Licenses. The Licensee agrees to comply with all WOODINVILLE, WA 98072-0358 requirements of the Code, as well as State laws and rr regulations applicable to the business activity licensed. Post this License at the place of business. r ------------------------------------------------------------------ ----------------- No CITY OF RENTON wo WTR-27-3514 WWP-27-3514 go 126th Ave SE Utility Project No CONTRACT DOCUMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS Summary of Fair Practices Policy Summary of Americans with Disability Act Policy 'r Scope of Work Vicinity Map Instructions to Bidders o Call for Bids *Proposal &Combined Affidavit& Certificate Form: Non-Collusion Anti-Trust Claims Minimum Wage Form *Dept. of Labor and Industies Certificate of Registration rrr *Bid Bond Form *Schedule of Prices ❖Bond to the City of Renton r ❖Fair Practices Policy Affidavit of Compliance ❖Contract Agreement(Contracts other than Federal -Aid FHWA) ❖City of Renton Insurance Information Form ❖City of Renton Standard Endorsement Form Prevailing Minimum Hourly Wage Rates(New job classifications) Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages �r Affidavit of Prevailing Wages Paid Certificate of Payment of Prevailing Wages WSDOT Amendments Special Provisions w` Standard Plans Addendums ow Documents marked as follows must be submitted at the time noted and must be executed by the Contractor, President and Vice President or Secretary if corporation by-laws permit. All pages must be signed. In the event another person has been duly authorized to execute contracts, a copy of the corporation minutes establishing this authority must be attached to the bid document. * Submit with Bid ow ❖ Submit at Notice of Award CITY OF RENTON Planning/Building/Public Works Department r 1055 South Grady Way Renton, Washington 98057 +w rr CITY OF RENTON SUMMARY OF FAIR PRACTICES POLICY r® ADOPTED BY RESOLUTION NO. 3229 It is the policy of the City of Renton to promote and provide equal treatment and service to all citizens and to ensure equal employment opportunity to all persons without regard to race, color,national origin, ethnic background, ender, marital status religion, age or disability, when the Ci of Renton can a�' � g g � g tY� City reasonably accommodate the disability, of employees and applicants for employment and fair, non- discriminatory treatment to all citizens. All departments of the City of Renton shall adhere to the following guidelines: (1) EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES -The City of Renton will ensure all employment related activities included recruitment, selection, promotion, demotion, training, retention and separation are conducted in a manner which is based on job-related criteria which does not discriminate against women, minorities and other protected classes. Human resources decisions will be in accordance with individual performance, staffing requirements, governing civil service rules, and labor contract agreements. (2) COOPERATION WITH HUMAN RIGHTS ORGANIZATIONS - The City of Renton r will cooperate fully with all organizations and commissions organized to promote fair practices and equal opportunity in employment. (3) AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN - The City of Renton Affirmative Action Plan and Equal Employment Program will be maintained and administered to facilitate equitable representation with the City work force and to assure equal employment opportunity to all. It shall be the responsibility of elected officials, the Mayor, the Affirmative Action Officer, department administrators, managers, supervisors, Contract Compliance Officers and all employees to carry out the policies, guidelines and corrective measures set forth in the Affirmative Action Plan and Equal Employment Program. (4) CONTRACTORS' OBLIGATIONS - Contractors, sub-contractors, consultants and suppliers conducting business with the City of Renton shall affirm and subscribe to the Fair Practices and Non-discrimination policies set forth by the law and in the City's Affirmative Action Plan and Equal Employment Program. Copies of this policy shall be distributed to all City employees, shall appear in all operational r documentation of th_P City, including bid calls, and shall be prominently displayed in appropriate city facilities. CONCURRED IN by the City Council of the City of RENTON, Washington,this 7ttday of October, 1996. ,rr — CITY OF RENTON: RENTON CITY COUNCIL: +vtayor Council President o Attest: City Clerl do AW AN CITY OF RENTON rr SUMMARY OFAMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT POLICY ADOPTED BYRESOLUTIONNO. 3007 The policy of the City of Renton is to promote and afford equal treatment and service to all.citizens and to assure employment opportunity to persons with disabilities, when the City of Renton can reasonably accommodate the disability. This policy shall be based on the principle s of equal employment opportunity, the Americans With ow Disabilities Act and other applicable guidelines as set forth in federal, state and local laws. All departments of the City of Renton shall adhere to the following guidelines: ow (1) EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES - All activities relating to employment such as recruitment, selection, promotion, termination and training shall be conducted in a non- discriminatory manner. Personnel decisions will be based on individual performance, staffing requirements, and in accordance with the Americans-With Disabilities Act and other applicable laws and regulations. (2) COOPERATION.WITH HUMAN RIGHTS ORGANIZATIONS - The City of Renton will cooperate fully with all organizations and commissions organized to promote fair practices and equal opportunity for 'persons with disabilities in rwr employment and receipt.of City services, activities and programs. (3) . AMERICANS V.7111 DISABILITIES ACT•POLICY -T e..City of Renton Americans With Disabilities Act Policy will.be maintained to facilitate equitable representation ■r within the City work force and to assure equal employment opportunity and equal access to City services, activities and programs to all people with disabilities. It shall be the responsibility and the duty of all City officials and employees to carry out the policies and guidelines as set forth in this policy (4) CONTRACTORS' OBLIGATION = 'Contractors, subcontractors, consultants and suppliers conducting business with.the City of Renton shall abide by the requirements of the Americans With Disabilities Act and promote access to services, activities.and dw programs for people with disabilities. . Copies of this policy shall be distributed to all City employees, shall appear in all operational documentation of the City, including bid calls, and shall be prominently displayed in appropriate City facilities. CONCURRED IN by the City Council of the City of Renton, Washington, ow this 4th day of October 1993. CITY OF RENTON RENTON CITY COUNCIL: Mayor :" , Council President Attest: ,ow' i City Clerk my .r CITY OF RENTON W WP-27-3473 STONEGATE LIFT STATION REPLACEMENT SECTION 2 SCOPE OF WORK The work involved under the terms of this contract document shall be full and complete installation of the facilities, as shown on the plans and as described in the construction specifications, to include but not be limited to: Aw The Stonegate Lift Station Replacement project consists of abandonment of tw.o existing sewage lift station facilities, construction of one new lift station facility, and construction of the mains necessary to connect to the existing sewage system. The existing facilities to be abandoned include the Summer-wind Lift Station +0 and the existing Stonegate Lift Station. New construction shall consist of all facilities required for full operation of the new lift station including, but not limited to, the following: cast-in-place lift station wet well and overflow storage facility; submersible sewage pumps; valve vault; CMU control building; emergency, sound-attenuated, diesel generator set; gravity sewer main and force main; all electrical, mechanical control system, instrumentation, and telemetry components; a water service; concrete sidewalk; asphalt paving; landscaping; fencing, lighting, retaining wall, and related site work. rw Any contractor connected with this project shall comply with all Federal, State, County, and City codes and regulations applicable to such work and perform the work in accordance with the plans and specifications of this contract document. A total of Two Hundred Seventy (270) working days will be allowed for the �r completion of this project. wr wr wr ri. ow w. FA0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\2 BIDSPEC-Stonegate.DOC\JDMtb iW .r ABANDON EXISTING .r STONEGATE LIFT STATION AND CONSTRUCT ABANDON EXISTING NEW STONEGATE SUMMERWIND LIFTSTATION LIFT STATION NE 26TH ST +r NE 23RD ST ■ W y Q S W to Z a T Q W Z do > _W Q NE 20TH ST a W J_ Z 1 W Z Q ju J D � to Q D J W LL WI do to �E l w• im STONEGATE LIFT STATION REPLACEMENT VICINITY MAP wr �• INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. Sealed bids for this proposal will be received by the City of Renton at the office of the Renton City Clerk,Renton City Hall, until the time and date specified in the Call for Bids. At this time the bids will be publicly opened and read, after which the bids will be considered and the r award made as early as practicable. No proposal may be changed or withdrawn after the time set for receiving bids. Proposals shall be submitted on the forms attached hereto. 2 Any omissions, discrepancies or need for interpretation should be brought, in writing, to the attention of the Project Engineer. Written addenda to clarify questions that arise may then be issued. No oral statements by Owner, Engineer, or other representative of the owner shall, in any way, modify the contract documents, whether made before or after letting the contract. +ir 3 The work to be done is shown in the plans and/or specifications. Quantities are understood to be only approximate. Final payment will be based on actual quantities and at the unit price bid. The City reserves the right to add or to eliminate portions of that work as deemed necessary. 4. Plans may be examined and at the Public Works Department Office. Plans, specifications, addenda, and the plan holders list for this project are available on-line through Builders Exchange of �. Washington, Inc., at http://www.bxwa.com. Bidders shall satisfy themselves as to the local conditions by inspection of the site. 5. The bid price for any item must include the performance of all work necessary for completion of that item as described in the specifications. 6. The bid price shall be stated in terms of the units indicated and as to a total amount. In the event of errors,the unit price bid will govern. Illegible figures will invalidate the bid. M 7. The right is reserved to reject any and/or all bids and to waive informalities if it is deemed advantageous to the City to do so. 8. A certified check or satisfactory bid bond made payable without reservation to the Director of Finance of the City of Renton in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid shall accompany each bid proposal. Checks will be returned to unsuccessful bidders immediately following the decision as to award of contract. The check of the successful bidder will be returned provided he enters into a contract and furnishes a satisfactory performance bond covering the full amount of the work within ten days after receipt of notice of intention to award contract. Should he fail, or refuse to do so, the check shall be forfeited to the City of Renton as liquidated damage for such failure. 9. All bids must be self-explanatory. No opportunity will be offered for oral explanation except as the City may request further information on particular points. +rr 10. The bidder shall, upon request, furnish information to the City as to his financial and practical ability to satisfactorily perform the work. 11. Payment for this work will be made in Cash Warrants. +rtrr H:AFile Sys\WWP-WasteWaterAWWP-27-3473 Summerwind-Stonegate LS Replacement\CONSTRUCT]ON\Lift StationTontract InfoAModified Instructions to Bidders Stonegate Lift Station.DOC 12. The contractor shall obtain such construction insurance (e.g. fire and extended coverage, worker's compensation, public liability, and property damage as indicated on forms enclosed under Attachment A herein and as identified within Specification Section 1-07.18. 13. The contractor, prior to the start of construction, shall provide the City of Renton a detailed bar chart type construction schedule for the project. 14 Before starting work under this contract, the Contractor is required to supply information to the City of Renton on all chemical hazards Contractor is bringing into the work place and potentially exposing City of Renton Employees. 15. Payment of retainage shall be done in accordance with Section 1-09.9(1) "Retainage. a" 16. Basis For Approval The construction contract will be awarded by the City of Renton to the lowest, responsible, responsive wo bidder. The bidder shall bid on all bid schedules items of all schedules set forth in the bid forms to be considered responsive for award. The total price of all schedules will be used to determine the successful low responsive bidder. Partial bids will not be accepted. The owner reserves the right to award any or all schedules of the Bid to meet the needs of the City. The intent is to award to only one BIDDER. 17. Trench Excavation Safety Systems As required by RCW 39.04.180, on public works projects in which trench excavation will exceed a depth of four feet, any contract therefor shall require adequate safety systems for the trench excavation that meet the requirements of the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act, Chapter 49.17 RCW. These requirements shall be included in the Bid Schedule as a separate item. The costs of trench safety systems shall not be considered as incidental to any other contract item and any attempt to include the trench safety systems as an incidental cost is prohibited. �. 18. Payment of Prevailing Wages In accordance with Revised Code of Washington Chapters 39.12 and 49.28 as amended or supplemented herein, there shall be paid to all laborers, workmen or mechanics employed on this contract the prevailing rate of wage for an hour's work in the same trade or occupation in the area of work regardless of any contractual relationship which may exist, or be alleged to exist, between the CONTRACTOR and any laborers, workmen, mechanics or subconsultants. The most recent issue of the prevailing wage rates are included within these specifications under section titled "Prevailing Minimum Hourly Wage Rates". The Contractor is Responsible for obtaining updated issues of the prevailing wage rate forms as they become available during the duration of the contract. The wage rates shall be included as part of any subcontracts the Contractor may enter into for work on this project. 19. Pollution Control Requirements Work under this contract shall meet all local, state and federal requirements for the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of public natural resources. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct the work in accordance with all applicable pollution control laws. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with and be liable for all penalties, damages, and violations under Chapter 90.48 RCW, in H:AFile Sys\WWP-WasteWaterAWWP-27-3473 Summerwind-Stonegate LS Rep]acenen t\CONSTRUCTION\Lift StationAContract InfoNodified �' Instructions to Bidders Stonegate Lift Station.DOC air performance of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall also comply with Article 4 in the Puget Sound Air Pollution Control Agency Regulation III regarding removal and encapsulation of asbestos materials. 20. Standard Specifications it All work under this contract shall be performed in accordance with the following standard specifications except as may be exempted or modified by the City of Renton Supplemental Specifications, Special Provisions other sections of these contract documents. These standard specifications are hereby made a part of this contract and shall control and guide all activities within thisroject whether referred to directly,paragraph bparagraph,P J Yip �'ap Yor not. 1. WSDOT/APWA "2008 Standard Specifications for Road,Bridge and Municipal Construction" and"Division 1 APWA Supplement" hereinafter referred to by the abbreviated title "Standard Specifications." A. Any reference to "State," "State of Washington," "Department of Transportation," "WSDOT," or any combination thereof in the WSDOT/APWA standards shall be modified to read "City of Renton," unless specifically referring to a standard specification or test method. B. All references to measurement and payment in the WSDOT/APWA standards shall be detected and the measurement and payment provisions of Section 1-09.14,Measurement and Payment(added herein) shall govern. irr 21. A geotechnical engineering report has been completed, a copy may be obtained by contacting the project manager. The Bidders shall familiarize themselves adequately with the project site and existing subsurface condition as needed to submit their bid. Upon approval of the City, the Bidder may make such subsurface explorations and investigations as they see fit. The Bidder shall be responsible for protection of all existing facilities, utilities and other buried or surface improvements and shall restore the site to the satisfaction of the City. 22 Bidder's Checklist ❑ It is the responsibility of each bidder to ascertain if all the documents listed on the attached index are included in their copy of the bid specifications. If documents are missing, it is the sole responsibility of the bidder to contact the City of Renton to obtain the missing documents prior to bid opening time. ❑ Have you submitted, as part of your bid, all documents marked in the index as "Submit With Bid"? ❑ Has bid bond or certified check been enclosed? ❑ Is the amount of the bid guaranty at least 5 percent of the total amount of bid including sales tax? ❑ Has the proposal been signed? ❑ Have you bid on ALL ITEMS and ALL SCHEDULES? ❑ Have you submitted the Subcontractors List(If required) ❑ Have you reviewed the Prevailing Wage Requirements? r ❑ Have you certified receipt of addenda, if any? H:AFile Sys\WWP-WasteWaterAWWP-27-3473 Summerwind-Stonegate LS Replacement\CONSTRUCTION\Litt Station\Contract InfoWodified err Instructions to Bidders Stonegate Lift Station.DOC to CAG-10-087 ow CITY OF RENTON No CALL FOR BIDS Stonegate Lift Station Replacement r W W P-27-3473 Sealed bids will be received until 2:30 p.m., Tuesday,August 3, 2010, at the City Clerk's office, 7th floor, and will be opened and publicly read in conference room 511 on the fifth floor, Renton City Hall, 1055 South Grady Way for the Stonegate Lift Station Replacement project. The work to be performed within 270 working days from the date of commencement under this contract shall include, but not be limited to: Construction of a sanitary sewer lift station, valve vault, storage vault, CMU control building, and generator along with the installation of approximately 125 linear feet of 12" diameter gravity sanitary ow sewer pipe and 110 linear feet of 8" diameter force main sewer pipe and the abandonment of two existing lift stations. to The City reserves the right to reject any and/or all bids and to waive any and/or all informalities. Bid documents will be available July 13, 2010. Plans, specifications, addenda, and the plan holders list r. for this project are available on-line through Builders Exchange of Washington, Inc., at http://www.bxwa.com. Click on "bxwa.com"; "Posted Projects", "Public Works", "City of Renton" , "Projects Bidding". (Note: Bidders are encouraged to "Register as a Bidder," in order to receive .w automatic email notification of future addenda and to be placed on the "Bidders List.") If a bidder has any questions regarding the project, please contact the Project Manager,John Hobson at 1055 South Grady Way, Renton,WA 98057 or(425)430-7279. aw A certified check or bid bond in the amount of five percent(5%) of the total of each bid must accompany each bid. The City's Fair Practices, Non-Discrimination,and Americans with Disability Act Policies shall apply. &W" .J, b)azt4, Bonnie I.Walton, City Clerk Published: r Daily Journal of Commerce July 13, 2010 Daily Journal of Commerce July 20, 2010 r Daily Journal of Commerce July 27, 2010 rrr +rr rr +r AW Proposal-Page 1 to CITY OF RENTON Stonegate Lift Station Replacement WWP-27-3473 Proposal & Combined Affidavit & Certificate form TO THE CITY OF RENTON RENCON,WASHINGTON Ladies and/or Gentlemen: The undersigned hereby certify that the bidder has examined the site of the proposed work and have read and ' thoroughly understand the plans, specifications and contract governing the work embraced in this improvement, and the method by which payment will be made for said work,and hereby propose to undertake .�. and complete the work embraced in this improvement,or as much thereof as can be completed with the money available, in accordance with the said pians, specifications and contract and the following schedule of rates and prices: +rr I The undersigned certifies and agrees to the following provisions: .w I to NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT" Being duly sworn, deposes and says, that he is the identical person who submitted the foregoing proposal or bid, and that such bid is genuine and not sham or collusive or made in the interest or on behalf of any person not therein named, and further,that the deponent has not directly induced or solicited any other Bidder on the j foregoing work or equipment to put in a sham bid,or any other person or corporation to refrain from bidding, and that deponent has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure to himself or to any other person any ar advantage over other Bidder or Bidders. AND CERTIFICATION kE: ASSIGNMENT OF +rr ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER Vendor and purchaser recognize that in actual economic practice overcharges resulting from anti-trust r violations are in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore, vendor hereby assigns to purchaser any and all claims for such over-charges as to goods and materials purchased in connection with this order or contract, except as to overcharges resulting from anti-trust violations commencing after the date of the bid, quotation, or other event establishing the price under this order or contract. In addition,vendor warrants and represents that such of his suppliers and subcontractors shall assign any and all such claims to purchaser, subject to the aforementioned exception. AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT FORM I, the undersigned,having been duly sworn, deposed, say and certify that in connection with the performance of the work of this project, I will pay each classification of laborer, worlunan, or mechanic employed in the performancc of such work; not less than the prevailing rate of wage or not less than the minimum rate of wr I )vided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale wo �rw Proposal-Page 2 r wages as specified in the principal contract:that I have read the above and foregoing statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein is true to my knowledge and belief. Ww FOR: PROPOSAL, NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT, ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT Shoreline Construction Co. Name of Bidder's Firm Printed Name Douglas rr Signature i Addre : 8316th Woodinville WA 98072 i as t Names of Members of Partnership: rw I OR Name of President of Corporation Douglas J. Suzuki ow Name of Secretary of Corporation Alec C Andry Corporation Organized under the laws of Washington State 00 With Main Office in State of Washington at Woodinville Subscribed and sworn to before me on this 8th day of August 20 10 ow Notary Pub!' in an t e State o ashington "u1116010i�i aAYE y ` t1 O �� Notary{Print) Chymene R Hoadley WOT � My appointment expires: 01/08/2014 PUBUC a UP WAg�, ow F wided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale ow Department of Labor and Industries Certificate of Registration Name on Registration: Shoreline Construction Co. Registration Number: 178 072 242 Expiration Date: 03-31-2011 rrr Note:A copy of the certificate will be requested as part of contract execution when project is awarded. w. i �r �r i i w E wided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale OW ror. wr Herewith find deposit in the form of a certified check, cashier's check, cash, or bid bond in the amount of$ 5% of Bid Amount which amount is not less than fi per ent of the total bid. Sign here: Know All Men by These Presents: That we, Shoreline Construction Co., as Principal, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America as Surety, are held and firmly bound until the City of Renton, as Obligee, in the penal sum of Five Percent (5%) of Bid Amount(5%) Dollars, for the payment of which the #W Principal and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents. up The condition of this obligation is such that if the Obligee shall make any award to the Principal +m for Stonegate Lift Station Replacement according to the terms of the proposal or bid made by the Principal therefor, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a contract with the .. Obligee in accordance with the terms of said proposal or bid and award and shall give bond for the faithful performance thereof, with Surety or Sureties approved by the Obligee; or if the Principal shall, in case of failure to do so, pay and forfeit to the Obligee the penal amount of the deposit specified in the call for bids, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect and the Surety shall forthwith pay and forfeit to the Obligee, as penalty and liquidated damages, the amount of this bond. am SIGNED, SEALED AND DATED THIS 3rd DAY OF August, Sh reli uc ' Co 1W I P Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America ety Anne E. Strieby, ttorney-in-Fact Received return of deposit in the sum of$ WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER AIM POWER OF ATTORNEY TRAVELERSJ Farmington Casualty Company St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company Attorney-In Fact No. 221935 Certificate No. 003411000 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota,that Farmington Casualty Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut,that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland,that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa,and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc.,is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the"Companies"),and that the Companies do hereby make,constitute and appoint Eric Zimmerman,Karen Swanson,Brent E.Heilesen,Anne E.Strieby,James B. Binder,Peter J.Comfort,Jennifer L.Snyder, Lisa Kerstetter,Julie R.Truitt, Peggy A.Firth,Tamarie Ellingsen,Steve Marinkovich,Melinda Carlson,and Christopher Kinyon of the City of Tacoma State of Washington their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above,to sign,execute,seal and acknowledge any and all bonds,recognizances,conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons,guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Comp e have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed,this 29th day of uecember UUyy Farmington Casualty Company St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company �y St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company pASU.�� Qy��•pe•� yFIAE 44m. CSE lNy ANpRD, < HARn k o CCNN. ODHN;e1 � SBAL,•'a �, o� .......... State of Connecticut By: City of Hartford ss. Georg Thompson, enior ice President 29th December 2009 On this the day of before me personally appeared George W.Thompson,who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,and that he,as such,being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. p.TIT In Witness Whereof,I hereunto set my hand and official seal. " " )n My Commission expires the 30th day of June,2011. Marie C.Tetreault,Notary Public 0 4W 58440-4-09 Printed in U.S.A. WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc.,St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company,St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,which resolutions are now in full force and effect,reading as follows: RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President,any Second Vice President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds,recognizances,contracts of indemnity,and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking,and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company,provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that any bond,recognizance,contract of indemnity,or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when(a)signed by the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice President,any Second Vice President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary;or(b)duly executed(under seal,if required)by one or more Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the signature of each of the following officers:President,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President,any Secretary,any Assistant Secretary,and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any 1 certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents,Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I,Kori M.Johanson,the undersigned,Assistant Secretary,of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc.,St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company,St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. T IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this'fir day of � (J ,20 Kori M.Johann Assistant Secretary pA6UA p,)n•• yp\RE 6 �N I//y �NgVµ`ht P1Y ANO Y 'P9¢,4 qJ aG ,CMb CRY 4,� Q�ygppp',J P f�pR PORAL QV ... . 9 gy copPORATiP f Zb�CK" p '19�� s ` m, i Z —._ .ns m HARTFORD < 1111RTFORD.r! <Oy 1951 ,�m ��.SEAL+o� �1S8RLi � cor+a. e' caHR. e N 898,gyp sr� P RANGE °'ly.•N� °'1' ...r'P+ rd ae ��Alt) To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney,call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at www.travelersbond.com.Please refer to the Attorney-In-Fact number,the above-named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. <E t WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER CITY OF RENTON PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SCHEDULE OF PRICES Stonegate Lift Station Replacement trr 'Note: Show price per unit in figures only. Figures written to the right of the dot(decimal)in the price per unit column shall be Interpreted as cents. SEE SECTION 1.09.14 OF THE SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR INFORMATION ON BID ITEMS. ITEM ITEM WITH UNIT PRICED BID APPROX. I UNIT PRICE TOTAL AMOUNT NO. QUANTITY Dollars Cents Dollars Cents Mobilization (Not to Exceed 8%of Contract Total) 20, 000 . 00 2 0, 000 . 00 rrttt 1 May not be more than ten percent(10%)of the total amount of the bid. Lump 1 Sum Per Lump Sum 2 Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasures(SPCC) 1 1, 000 . 00 1, 000 . 00 Plan Lump Sum Per Lump Sum 3 Traffic Control 1 30, 000 . 00 3 0, 000 . 00 wr Lum Sum Per Lum Sum 4 Construction Surveying and As-Builts 1 5, 000 . 00 5, 000 . 00 Lump Sum Per Lump Sum *9 5 Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation 100 1 . 00 100 . 00 Material Ton Per Ton 6 Gravel Borrow(as required) 450 1 . 00 450 . 00 to Ton Per Ton 7 Washed Rock for Infiltration Trench 50 15 . 00 750 . 00 ,tom Ton Per Ton 8 Trench Shoring or Extra Excavation Class A and B 1 22 , 000 . 00 22, 000 . 00 Lump Sum Per Lump Sum as 11 . 00 9 Crushed Surfacing Top Course(as required) 150 1, 650 . 00 Ton Per Ton +tn 10 Crushed Surfacing Base Course 130 11 . 00 1, 430 . 00 Ton Per Ton 11 HMA Class 1/2"PG 64-22 200 98 . 00 19, 600 . 00 r' Ton Per Ton 12 Facility Coatings 1 10, 000 . 00 10, 000 . 0() trr Lump Sum Per Lump Sum 13 5-Inch Diam. PVC Storm Sewer Pipe 55 40 . 00 2, 200 . 00 Lineal Foot Per Lineal Foot �r 14 8-Inch Diam. PVC Storm Sewer Pipe 150 45 . 00 6, 750 . 00 Lineal Foot Per Lineal Foot It 15 12-Inch Diam. PVC Storm Sewer Pipe 25 66 . 00 1, 650 . 0 Lineal Foot Per Lineal Foot +rr rule D rovided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale CITY OF RENTON PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SCHEDULE OF PRICES Stonegate Lift Station Replacement Ow "Note: Show price per unit In figures only. Figures written to the right of the dol(decirnal)in the price per unit column shall be Interpreted as cents. SEE SECTION 1-09.14 OF THE SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR INFORMATION ON BID ITEMS, 4W ITEM ITEM WITH UNIT PRICED BID APPROX. UNIT PRICE TOTAL AMOUNT NO. QUANTITY Dollars Cents Dollars Cents 16 Catch Basin Type 1 and 1 P 2 1, 800 . 00 3 , 600 . 00 Each Per Each 17 Catch Basin Type 1 with Birdcage 1 2, 100 . 00 2, 100 . 00 SIN Each Per Each 18 Oil/Water Separator 1 4, 400 . 00 4, 400 . 00 Each Per Each �r 19 48-Inch Diam. Sanitary Sewer Manhole Type 1 1 10, 000 . 00 10 , 000 . 00 Each Per Each y 20 1-Inch Water Service Connection 1 2, 200 . 00 2 , 200 . 00 Each Per Each 21 8-Inch Diam. PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe 50 132 . 00 6, 600 . 00 Lineal Foot Per Lineal Foot 135 . 00 11 , 475 . 00 22 12-Inch Diam. PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe 85 Lineal Foot Per Lineal Foot +rw 23 12-Inch Diam. PVC C900 Gravity Sewer Pipe 40 168 . 00 6, 720 . 00 Lineal Foot Per Lineal Foot 24 Televison Inspection 355 3 . 00 1, 065 . 00 Lineal Foot Per Lineal Foot 75 . 00 8, 250 . 00 25 8-Inch Diam. PVC C900 Sewer Force Main 110 Lineal Foot Per Lineal Foot 26 Temporary Erosion/Sedimentation Controls 1 5, 000 . 00 5, 000 . 00 +t. Lump Sum Per Lump Sum 27 Landscaping 1 13 , 0 0 0 . 0 0 13 , 000 . 00 Lum Sum Per Lum Sum wn 28 Top Soil Type C 25 25 . 00 625 . 00 Cubic Yard Per Cubic Yard 29 Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter 90 33 . 00 2, 970 . 00 Lineal Foot Per Lineal Foot 30 Cement Concrete Driveway Entrance 20 75 . 00 1, 500 . 00 Square-Yard Per Square-Yard 31 Chain Link Fence 255 30 . 00 2, 700 . 00 Lineal Foot Per Lineal Foot No 1, 400 . 00 1, 400 . 00 32 Chain Link Gate 1 Each Per Each 33 Cement Concrete Sidewalk 50 40 . 00 2 , 000 . 00 Square-Yard Per Square-Yard 'rovided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale trr CITY OF RENTON PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SCHEDULE OF PRICES Stonegate Lift Station Replacement ■r 'Note: Show price per unit In figures only. Figures written to the right of the dot(decimal)In the price per unit column shall be Interpreted as cents. SEE SECTION 1.09.14 OF THE SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR INFORMATION ON BID ITEMS. ITEM ITEM WITH UNIT PRICED BID APPROX. I UNIT PRICE TOTAL AMOUNT NO. QUANTITY Dollars Cents Dollars Cents 34 Quarry Spalls(as required) 55 25 . 00 1, 375 . 00 r Ton Per Ton 35 Pavement Marking 1 1, 3 0 0 . 0 0 1, 300 . 00 Lump Sum Per Lump Sum tirttr 36 Gravity Block Wall 90 30 . 00 2, 700 . 00 S uare-Foot Per Square-Foot tom' 37 Ballard 4 350 . 00 1, 400 . 00 Each Per Each 38 Site Clearing and Grading 1 5, 000 . 00 5, 000 . 00 Lump Sum Per Lump Sum 39 Lift Station Excavation and Backfill 1 30, 000 . 00 0, 000 . 00 Lum Sum Per Lum Sum 40 Lift Station Shoring and Trench Safety Systems 1 25, 000 . 00 2 5, 000 . 00 Lump Sum Per Lump Sum 41 Dewatering System 1 40, 000 . 00 40, 000 . 00 Lum Sum Per Lump Sum w+ 42 144-Inch Diam. Precast Concrete Wet Well 1 75, 000 . 00 75, 000 . 00 Lump Sum Per Lump Sum 43 Precast Concrete Overflow Storage Vault 1 65, 000 . 00 6 5, 000 . 00 i ttr Lum Sum Per Lump Sum 44 Precast Concrete Flow Meter and Valve Vault 1 135, 000 . 00 135, 000 . 00 LumR Sum Per Lump Sum r,w 45 CMU Control Building with Screening Wall 1 70, 000 . 00 7 0, 000 . 00 Lump Sum Per Lump Sum to 46 Lift Station Piping 1 22, 000 . 00 2 2, 000 . 00 I Lump Sum Per Lump Sum 47 Lift Station Accessoriesow 1 18 000 . 00 18, 000 . 00 Lump Sum Per turn p Sum 5, 000 . 00 5, 000 . 00 48 Control Building Plumbing, Including Roof Drains 1 f Lump Sum Per Lump Sum 49 Mechanical Work 1 5, 000 . 00 5, 000 . 00 Lum Sum Per Lum Sum ' 50 Submersible Sewage Pumps and Motors 1 115,000 . 00 115, 000 . 00 Lump Sum Per Lump Sum IYr 51 Electrical Work 1 10 0, 0 0 0 . 0 0 100, 000 . 00 Lump Sum Per Lump Sum 1W?rovided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale CITY OF RENTON PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SCHEDULE OF PRICES Stonegate Lift Station Replacement rilii► 'Note: Show price per unit In figures only. Figures written to the right of the dot(decimal)in the price per unit column shall be interpreted as cents. SEE SECTION 1-09.14 OF THE SPECIAL_PROVISIONS FOR INFORMATION ON BID ITEMS. ITEM ITEM WITH UNIT PRICED BID APPROX, I UNIT PRICE TOTAL AMOUNT NO. I I QUANTITY Dollars Cents Dollars Cents 52 Instrument,Alarm,Telemetry and Control Work 1 14, 000 . 00 14 , 000 . 00 rrY Lum Sum Per Lump Sum 53 Standby Generator Set 1 130, 000 . 00 13 0, 000 . 00 Lump Sum Per Lump Sum r 54 Testing and Startup Services 1 5, 000 . 00 5, 000 . 00 Lump Sum Per Lump Sum i tlwr1 . 00 1, 100 . 00 55 Imported Backfill Material 1,100 Ton Per Ton i 14, 000 . 00 14 , 000 . 00 56 Existing Stonegate Lift Station Abandonment 1 Lump Sum Per Lump Sum 57 Existing Summerwind Lift Station Abandonment 1 14 , 000 . 00 14 , 000 . 00 rtr Lump Sum Per Lump Sum 1, 108, 010 . 00 Subtotal I 9.5%Sales Tax 105, 260 . 9 Total 11 - 213 , 270 . 95 irr r i tt�re err rill W W'rovided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale irr SUBCONTRACTOR LIST RCW 39.30-060 requires that for all public works contracts exceeding $1,000,000 that the bidder submit the names of all heating, ventilation and air conditioning, and plumbing subcontractors as described in chapter 18.106 RCW, and electrical subcontractors as described in chapter 19.28 RCW (this also includes the control system integrator subcontractor as well as other electrical subcontractors). ow If the subcontractors names are not submitted with the bid, or within one (1) hour after the published bid submittal time OR if two or more subcontractors are named to perform the same work, then the bid shall be considered nonresponsive and,therefore,void. Complete the following: If awarded the contract,SlIcAd 4lmAr will contract with the following r subcontractors for the performance of heating,ventilation andit conditioning,plumbing,and electrical (including automatic controls)work: .r. Bid Item(s) � � Subcontractor Name Address Phone No. 3/SD• State Contractor's License No. ` e�T�=�. .�,M r l / Bid Item(s) �fj Subcontractor Name If �+r Address / va Phone No. State Contractor's License No. ��„� Ll, rrt Bid Item(s) 4 rr Subcontractor Name _c� - I/ Address )�[p�� �� �� C� 00jqfe. �Oilr1G/ T � �� Phone No. r State Contractor's License No. W OLLPIll?Aav �ttr Bid Item(s) ai. Subcontractor Name Address me Phone No. State Contractor's License No. Bid Item(s) 'W Subcontractor Name Address >rr Phone No. State Contractor's License No. \\Penton\data\pia7za\data_center\forms\city\contracts\bidspecs\12_sub.doc t11r Revised 9/2006 ovided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale IM I September 27,2006 Page 2 Bid Item(s) Subcontractor Name Address Phone No. State Contractor's License No. ,,�(�KatiTrUXuthorized Representative of Bidder Subscribed and sworn to be before me on this 3 day of August 2010. •��,�►�pAYE yo.,, Not blic in and for the State of Washington lift ?Uwe 2= Notary(Print) Chymene R Hoadley AV •- Residing at Snohomish County 10 1 0'�j� 8 ZO OF WAg�`�``�. My appointment expires: 01/08/2014 he ift \\rentonldata\piazza\data_centerlformslcitylcontracts\bidspecs\12_sub.doc Revised 9/2006 I.-Wided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc.,St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company,St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,which resolutions are now in full force and effect,reading as follows: RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President,any Second Vice President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds,recognizances,contracts of indemnity,and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking,and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company,provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that any bond,recognizance,contract of indemnity,or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when(a)signed by the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice President,any Second Vice President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary;or(b)duly executed(under seal,if required)by one or more Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the signature of each of the following officers:President,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President,any Secretary,any Assistant Secretary,and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents,Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I,Kori M.Johanson,the undersigned,Assistant Secretary,of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc.,St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company,St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this day of 20 Kori M.Johans Assistant Secretary GI.S UA<) � JyF\RE4� O��N..�N,sG9 Jp+INSU 9r4 gJp�1V ANps 4��pEryCe �"" Y� �, 5 �"i C� `! 19� ••'`^�NIMTED m �1 MATFm #W:'COPPORATF�i 9� � 4W' 1S!IB 1 9.8 2S O y � i Z --- .�8 a HARTFO(iD, t i WiRTFOR0. �bc>'<' a 1951 �tSE AL.iof t;1.SEALa ;, coHH. oc«aHa in To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney,call I-800-421-3880 or contact us at www.travelersbond.com.Please refer to the Attorney-In-Fact number,the above-named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER +r. CITY OF RENTON + FAIR PRACTICES POLICY AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE arr Shoreline Construction Co. hereby confirms and declares that (Name of contractor/subcontractor/consultant) err I. It is the policy of Shoreline Construction Co. to offer equal (Name of contractor/subcontractor/consultant) opportunity to all qualified employees and applicants for employment without regard to the race, creed, color, sex, national origin, age, disability or veteran status. II. Shoreline Construction Co. complies with all applicable (Name of contractor/subcontractor/consultant) federal, state and local laws governing non-discrimination in employment. .r, III. When applicable, Shoreline Construction Co. will seek out and (Name of contractor/subcontractor/consultant) negotiate with minority and women contractors for the award of subcontracts. Douglas J. Suzuki Print Agent/Representative's Name President Print Agent/Representa 've's Title got Z/�Zx n sen e' ignature Douglas J. Suzuki rr 1.0-07-2010 Date Signed rr wr \\renton\Data\Piazza\DATA_Center\Forms\City\Contracts\BidSpecs\14 FAIR.DOC\ CONTRACTS OTHER THAN FEDERAL-AID FHWA THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this dzy of 04i GG ,4!010. by and rr between THE CITY OF RENTON, Washington, a municipal corporation of the State of Washington, hereinafter referred to as "CITY" and Shoreline Construction Co., hereinafter referred to as "CONTRACTOR." rr WITNESSETH: 1) The Contractor shall within the time stipulated, (to-wit: within two hundred seventy (270) r� working days from date of commencement hereof as required by the Contract, of which this agreement is a component part)perform all the work and services required to be performed, and provide and furnish all of the labor, materials, appliances, machines, tools, equipment, UL utility and transportation services necessary to perform the Contract, and shall complete the construction and installation work in a workmanlike manner, in connection with the City's Project(identified as No. CAG-10-087 for improvement by construction and installation of: it Stonegate Lift Station Replacement All the foregoing shall be timely performed, furnished, constructed, installed and completed in strict conformity with the plans and specifications, including any and all addenda issued by the City and all other documents hereinafter enumerated, and in full compliance with all applicable codes, ordinances and regulations of the City of Renton and any other governmental authority having jurisdiction thereover. It is further agreed and stipulated that all of said labor, materials, appliances, machines, tools, equipment and services shall be furnished and the construction installation performed and completed to the satisfaction and the approval of the City's Public Works Director as being in such conformity with the plans, specifications and all requirements of or arising under the Contract. The Contractor agrees to use recycled materials whenever practicable. 2) The aforesaid Contract, entered into by the acceptance of the Contractor's bid and signing of this agreement, consists of the following documents, all of which are component parts of said Contract and as fully a part thereof as if herein set out in full, and if not attached, as if hereto attached. a) This Agreement b) Instruction to Bidders c) Bid Proposal d) Specifications e) Maps and Plans ;r fl Bid g) Advertisement for Bids h) Special Provisions, if any i) Technical Specifications, if any iW yy fur 4K 3) If the Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the work or any part thereof, with such diligence as will insure its completion within the time specified in this Contract, or any extension in writing thereof, or fails to complete said work with such time, or if the ► Contractor shall be adjudged a bankrupt, or if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver shall be appointed on account of the Contractor's insolvency, or if he or any of his subcontractors should violate any of the provisions of this Contract, the City may then serve written notice upon him and his surety of its intention to terminate the Contract, and unless within ten(10) days after the serving of such notice, such violation or non-compliance of any provision of the Contract shall cease and satisfactory arrangement for the correction thereof be made, this Contract, shall, upon the expiration of said ten (10) day period, cease and terminate in every respect. In the event of any such termination, the City shall immediately serve written notice thereof upon the surety and the Contractor and the surety shall have the right to take over and perform the Contract, WL provided, however, that if the surety within fifteen (15) days after the serving upon it of such notice of termination does not perform the Contract or does not commence performance thereof, the City itself may take over the work under the Contract and prosecute the same to completion by Contract or by any other method it may deem advisable, for the account and at the expense of the Contractor, and his surety shall be liable to the City for any excess cost or other damages occasioned the City thereby. In such event, the City, if it so elects, may, without liability for so doing, take possession of and utilize in completing said Contract such materials, machinery, appliances, equipment, plants and other properties belonging to the Contractor as may be on site of the project and useful therein. 4) The foregoing provisions are in addition to and not in limitation of any other rights or remedies available to the City. 5) Contractor agrees and covenants to hold and save the City, its officers, agents, representatives and employees harmless and to promptly indemnify same from and against any and all claims, actions, damages, liability of every type and nature including all costs and legal expenses incurred by reason of any work arising under or in connection with the Contract to be performed hereunder, including loss of life, personal injury and/or damage to property arising from or out of any occurrence, omission or activity upon, on or about the premises worked upon or in any way relating to this Contract. This hold harmless and indemnification provision shall likewise apply for or on account of any patented or Vii unpatented invention, process, article or appliance manufactured for use in the performance of the Contract, including its use by the City, unless otherwise specifically provided for in this Contract. Ok The Contractor agrees to name the City as an additional insured on a noncontributory primary basis. In the event the City shall, without fault on its part, be made a party to any litigation commenced by or against Contractor, then Contractor shall proceed and hold the '�" City harmless and he shall pay all costs, expenses and reasonable attorney's fees incurred or paid by the City in connection with such litigation. Furthermore, Contractor agrees to pay all costs, expenses and reasonable attorney's fees that may be incurred or paid by City in the enforcement of any of the covenants, provisions and agreements hereunder. Nothing herein shall require the Contractor to indemnify the City against and hold harmless the City, from claims, demands or suits based solely upon the conduct of the City, its officers or employees and provided further that if claims or suits are caused by or result from the concurrent negligence of(a)the Contractor's agents or employees and(b)the City, 2 _2009 illi OK to its agents, officers and employees, and involves those actions covered by RCW 4.24.115, this indemnity provision with respect to claims or suits based upon such concurrent negligence shall be valid and enforceable only to the extent of the Contractor's negligence Am or the negligence of the Contractor's agents or employees. Should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this agreement is subject to RCW aw 4.24.115,then, in the event of liability for damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or damages to property caused by or resulting from the concurrent negligence of the contractor and the city, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers, the contractor's liability ON hereunder shall be only to the extent of the contractor's negligence. It is further specifically and expressly understood that the indemnification provided herein constitute the contractor's waiver of immunity under the Industrial Insurance Act, Title 51 RCW, solely for the purposes of this indemnification. This waiver has been mutually negotiated by the 906, parties. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this agreement. all 6) Any notice from one party to the other party under the Contract shall be in writing and shall be dated and signed by the party giving such notice or by its duly authorized representative of such party. Any such notice as heretofore specified shall be given by personal delivery ML thereof or by depositing same in the United States mail, postage prepaid, certified or registered mail. 7) The Contractor shall commence performance of the Contract no later than 10 calendar days after Contract final execution, and shall complete the full performance of the Contract not later than two hundred seventy (270) working days from the date of commencement. For each and every working day of delay after the established day of completion, it is hereby stipulated and agreed that the damages to the City occasioned by said delay will be the sum of per Section 1-08.9 of Standard Specifications as liquidated damages (and not as a penalty) for each such day, which shall be paid by the Contractor to the City. 8) Neither the final certificate of payment not any provision in the Contract nor partial or entire use of any installation provided for by this Contract shall relieve the Contractor of liability in respect to any warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. The Contractor shall be under the duty to remedy any defects in the work and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which shall appear within the period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the work, unless a longer period is specified. The City will give notice of observed defects as heretofore specified with reasonable promptness after discovery thereof, and Contractor shall be obligated to take immediate steps to correct and remedy any such defect, fault or breach at the sole cost and expense of Contractor. Defective or Unauthorized Work. The City reserves its right to withhold payment from Contractor for any defective or unauthorized work. Defective or unauthorized work includes, without limitation: work and materials that do not conform to the requirements of this Agreement; and extra work and materials furnished without the City's written approval. If Contractor is unable, for any reason, to satisfactorily complete any portion of the work, the City may complete the work by contract or otherwise, and Contractor shall be liable to the City for any additional costs incurred by the City. "Additional costs" shall mean all reasonable costs, including legal costs and attorney fees, incurred by the City beyond the maximum Contract price specified above. The City further reserves its right to deduct the cost to complete the Contract work, including any Additional Costs, from any and all amounts due or to become due the Contractor. The Contractor agrees the above one year limitation shall not exclude or diminish the City's rights under any law to obtain damages and recover costs resulting from defective and unauthorized work discovered after one year but prior to the expiration of the legal time period set forth in RCW 4.16.040 limiting actions upon a contract in writing, or liability expressed or implied arising out of a written agreement. Final Payment: Waiver of Claims. THE CONTRACTOR'S ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT (EXCLUDING WITHHELD RETAINAGE) SHALL CONSTITUTE A WAIVER OF CONTRACTOR'S CLAIMS, EXCEPT THOSE PREVIOUSLY AND PROPERLY MADE AND IDENTIFIED BY CONTRACTOR AS UNSETTLED AT THE TIME FINAL PAYMENT IS MADE AND ACCEPTED. 9) The Contractor and each subcontractor, if any, shall submit to the City such schedules of quantities and costs, progress schedules, payrolls, reports, estimates, records and miscellaneous data pertaining to the Contract as may be requested by the City from time to time. 10) The Contractor shall furnish a surety bond or bonds as security for the faithful performance of the Contract, including the payment of all persons and firms performing labor on the au construction project under this Contract or furnishing materials in connection with this Contract; said bond to be in the full amount of the Contract price as specified in Paragraph 12. The surety or sureties on such bond or bonds must be duly licensed as a surety in the State of Washington. 11) The Contractor shall verify, when submitting first payment invoice and annually thereafter, possession of a current City of Renton business license while conducting work for the City. The Contractor shall require, and provide verification upon request, that all subcontractors participating in a City project possess a current City of Renton business license. The Contractor shall provide, and obtain City approval of, a traffic control plan prior to conducting work in City right-of-way. 12) The total amount of this contract is the sum of $ 1,213,270.95 numbers One million Two hundred Thirteen thousand Two hundred Seventy and 95/100 written words including Washington State Sales Tax. Payments will be made to Contractor as specified in +�c the "Special Provisions" of this Contract. 13) INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. The parties intend that an Independent Contractor- Employer Relationship will be created by this Agreement and that the Contractor has the ability to control and direct the performance and details of its work, the City being interested only in the results obtained under this Agreement. 14) LIMITATION OF ACTIONS. CONTRACTOR MUST, IN ANY EVENT, FILE ANY LAWSUIT ARISING FROM OR CONNECTED WITH THIS AGREEMENT WITHIN 120 CALENDAR DAYS FROM THE DATE THE CONTRACT WORK IS COMPLETE OR CONTRACTOR'S ABILITY TO FILE THAT CLAIM OR SUIT SHALL BE FOREVER BARRED. THIS SECTION FURTHER LIMITS ANY APPLICABLE STATUTORY LIMITATIONS PERIOD. 15) Non-Waiver of Breach. The failure of the City to insist upon strict performance of any of the covenants and agreements contained in this Agreement, or to exercise any option ri conferred by this Agreement in one or more instances shall not be construed to be a waiver or relinquishment of those covenants, agreements or options, and the same shall be and remain in full force and effect. 16) Written Notice. All communications regarding this Agreement shall be sent to the parties at the addresses listed on the signature page of the Agreement, unless notified to the contrary. sw Any written notice hereunder shall become effective three(3)business days after the date of mailing by registered or certified mail, and shall be deemed sufficiently given if sent to the addressee at the address stated in this Agreement or such other address as may be hereafter specified in writing. 17) Assignment. Any assignment of this Agreement by either party without the written consent of the non-assigning party shall be void. If the non-assigning party gives its consent to any assignment, the terms of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect and no further assignment shall be made without additional written consent. w 18) Modification. No waiver, alteration, or modification of any of the provisions of this Agreement shall be binding unless in writing and signed by a duly authorized representative of the city and Contractor. 19) Compliance with Laws. The Contractor agrees to comply with all federal, state, and municipal laws, rules, and regulations that are now effective or in the future become applicable to Contractor's business, equipment, and personnel engaged in operations covered by this Agreement or accruing out of the performance of those operations. 20) Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall constitute an original, and all of which will together constitute this one Agreement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City has caused these presents to be signed by its Mayor and attested by its City Clerk and the Contractor has hereunto set his hand and seal the day and year first above-written. Aw T CT RCITY OF RE TON i F President dz,r 4siartne er Douglas J. Suzuki Mayor Denis Law " ATTEST ) Secretary Alec C. Andry Bonnie I . Walton, City Clerk dba Shoreline Construction Co. Firm Name check one ❑ Individual ❑ Partnership ® Corporation Incorporated in Woodinville Washington 5 C l -2't:lq)�>� nr Attention: If business is a CORPORATION, name of the corporation should be listed in full and both President and Secretary must sign the contract, OR if one signature is permitted by corporation by-laws, a copy of the by-laws shall be furnished to the City and made a part of the contract document. ,. If business is a PARTNERSHIP, full name of each partner should be listed followed by d/b/a (doing business as)and firm or trade name; any one partner may sign the contract. to If business is an INDIVIDUAL PROPRIETORSHIP, the name of the owner should appear followed by d/b/a and name of the company. ML AL Y o��,p o� City of Renton f1 + Human Resources & Risk Management Department Insurance Information Form srr FOR:Shoreline Construction Co. PROJECT NUMBER:CAG-10-087 STAFF CONTACT: John Hobson r Certificate of Insurance indicates the coverages/limits specified in [+ZYes ❑ No contract? ..r Are the following coverages and/or conditions in effect? Yes ❑ No The Commercial General Liability policy form is an ISO 1993 [yYes ❑ No Occurrence Form or Equivalent? ALI (If no,attach a copy of the policy with required coverages clearly identified) CG 0043 Amendatory Endorsement provided?* 'l n C1 -, n t✓V U �,❑ Yes [2-INo wr General Aggregate provided on a"per project basis(CG2503)?* 1-2-'Yes ❑ No Additional Insured wording provided?* 0-`Yes ❑ No Wr Coverage on a primary basis and non-contributing basis?* Yes ❑ No Waiver of Subrogation Clause applies?* [ryes ❑ No err Severability of Interest Clause(Cross Liability)applies? aYes ❑ No Notice of Cancellation/Non-Renewal 1. !es ❑ No amended to 45 days per RCW 48.18.290?* .■ *To be shown on certificate of insurance* AM BEST'S RATING FOR CARRIER , j GL Auto A + } 11 Umb At, A Professional _jV This Questionnaire is issued as a matter of information. This questionnaire is not an insurance policy and does not amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies indicated on the attached CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. The CITY OF RENTON, at its option, shall obtain copies of the policies and/or specific declaration pages FROM awarded bidder prior to execution of contract. --Prooe ( Zn5 U tir'anr P ) Skcarn P( f aco ri)S Agency/$roker Completed By(Type o rmt Name) Address Corr} eted By(Signature) a m e. t."-) n's -253 - 3 t1 O - Name of person to contact Telephone Number NOTE: THIS QUESTIONNAIRE MUST BE COMPLETED FOR Et2CH' LINE OF COVERAGE AND ATTACHED TO CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE err rr Client#: 111944 SHORCONS1 ACORD,. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 9DATE(MM/D /30/2010 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION do Propel Insurance ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE Tacoma Commercial Insurance HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. 1201 Pacific Ave,Suite 1000 Tacoma,WA 98402 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# i0rl INSURED INSURER A: Travelers Indemnity Company 19046 Shoreline Construction Co. INSURER B: Travelers Property Casualty Co P.O.Box 3INSURERc: American International Spec'Ity Woodinvillee,,WA 98072 INSURER D: Travelers Indemnity Co INSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED.NOTWITHSTANDING �W ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTR NSR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION E MMIDD DATE(MM/DDIYYYY) LIMITS wall A GENERAL LIABILITY 4TC00751P930IND10 10/01/2010 10/01/2011 EACH OCCURRENCE $1000000 nXX COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PREMDAMAGSES(E.E TO RENTEDnoe $300,000 CLAIMS MADE �OCCUR MED EXP(Any one person) $10,000 PD Ded:$5,000 PERSONAL 8 ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE s2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 POLICY 7X PRO LOC JECT ilk D AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY BA0751 P93010CNS 10101/2010 10/01/2011 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT X ANY AUTO (Ea accident) $1,000,000 ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) kw X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ X NON-OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY-EA ACCIDENT $ ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $ AUTO ONLY: AGG $ wo B EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY DTSNCUP0751P930TIL 10/01/2010 10/01/2011 EACH OCCURRENCE $4000000 X OCCUR 7 CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE S4,000,000 IYM DEDUCTIBLE $ HX RETENTION $$10,0 0 $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND WC STATU- OTH- TORYEMPLOYERS'LIABILITY I ER A ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE4TCO0751P9301ND10 10/01/2010 10/01/2011 E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1000000 Wrl OF SIC tory In HFI EXCLUDED? n(WA Stop Gap) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEEI$1 000,000 If yes,describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 C OTHER Pollution CP02458084 10/01/2010 10/01/2011 $1,000,000 limit trr $10,000 deductible DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS RE:Stonegate Lift Station Replacement City of Renton their elected or appointed officers,officials,employees subconsultants,and volunteers are additional insured,per the attached endorsement.Coverage is Primary and (See Attached Descriptions) CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION 10 Days for Non-Payment SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION City of Renton DATE THEREOF,THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL —A$_ DAYS WRITTEN wrr Public Works Department NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL 1055 South Grady Way IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER,ITS AGENTS OR Renton,WA 98057 REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ACORD 25(2009/01)1 Of 3 #S517451/M514958 ® 1988-2009 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD BEB00 1p rr �r IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). 1W If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). w DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s),authorized representative or producer,and the certificate holder,nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. so wr ire err w to w w w wnr ACORD 25(2009/01) 2 of 3 #S517451/M514958 w DESCRIPTIONS (Continued from Page 1) to Non-contributory.Waiver of Subrogation applies per the attached endorsement.Per Project Aggregate endorsement attached.Contractual liability is included per CG0001 10/01. w w to r err wr at wr as so w No rr AMS 25.3(2009/01) 3 of 3 #S517451/M514958 err ++� Shoreline Construction Co. 41`CO0751P9301ND10 r t• COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED (CONTRACTORS) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART 1. WHO IS AN INSURED—(Section II) is amended c) The insurance provided to the additional in- to include any person or organization that you sured does not apply to "bodily injury" or agree in a "written contract requiring insurance" "property damage" caused by "your work" to include as an additional insured on this Cover- and included in the "products-completed op- age Part, but: erations hazard" unless the "written contract rrr a) Only with respect to liability for"bodily injury", requiring insurance" specifically requires you "property damage"or"personal injury";and to provide such coverage for that additional insured, and then the insurance provided to b) If, and only to the extent that, the injury or the additional insured applies only to such damage is caused by acts or omissions of "bodily injury" or "property damage" that oc- you or your subcontractor in the performance curs before the end of the period of time for of "your work" to which the "written contract which the "written contract requiring insur- requiring insurance" applies. The person or ance" requires you to provide such coverage wr organization does not qualify as an additional or the end of the policy period, whichever is insured with respect to the independent acts earlier. or omissions of such person or organization. 3. The insurance provided to the additional insured 2. The insurance provided to the additional insured by this endorsement is excess over any valid and wrr by this endorsement is limited as follows: collectible "other insurance", whether primary, a) In the event that the Limits of Insurance of excess, contingent or on any other basis, that is this Coverage Part shown In the Declarations available to the additional insured for a loss we exceed the limits of liability required by the cover under this endorsement. However, if the rr "written contract requiring insurance", the in- "written contract requiring insurance" specifically surance provided to the additional insured requires that this insurance apply on a primary shall be limited to the limits of liability re- basis or a primary and non-contributory basis, quired by that "written contract requiring in- this insurance is primary to "other insurance" surance". This endorsement shall not in- available to the additional insured which covers crease the limits of insurance described in that person or organization as a named insured Section III—Limits Of Insurance. for such loss, and we will not share with that wo b) The insurance provided to the additional in- "other insurance". But the insurance provided to sured does nota I to "bodily injury", the additional insured by this endorsement still is apply y' ry , "prop- excess over any valid and collectible "other in- erty damage" or "personal injury" arising out surance", whether primary, excess, contingent or of the rendering of, or failure to render, any on any other basis, that is available to the addi- professional architectural, engineering or sur- tional insured when that person or organization is veying services, including: an additional insured under such "other insur- i. The preparing, approving, or failing to ance". prepare or approve, maps, shop draw- 4. As a condition of coverage provided to the ings, opinions, reports, surveys, field or- additional insured by this endorsement: ders or change orders, or the preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or ap- a) The additional insured must give us written prove, drawings and specifications; and notice as soon as practicable of an "occur- ii. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or rence" or an offense which may result in a claim. To the extent possible, such notice engineering activities. should include: wri CG D2 46 08 05 ®2005 The St. Paul Travelers Companies, Inc. Page 1 of 2 rr +r. Shoreline Construction Co. 4TC00751 P9301ND10 „w, COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 1. How, when and where the 'occurrence" any provider of"other insurance"which would to or offense took place; cover the additional insured for a loss we I!. The names and addresses of any injured cover under this endorsement. However, this persons and witnesses; and condition does not affect whether the insur- ance provided to the additional insured by err iii. The nature and location of any injury or this endorsement is primary to 'other insur- damage arising out of the"occurrence"or ance" available to the additional insured offense. which covers that person or organization as a b) If a claim is made or"suit' is brought against named insured as described in paragraph 3. the additional insured, the additional insured above. must: 5. The following definition is added to SECTION V. I. Immediately record the specifics of the —DEFINITIONS: r claim or"suit'and the date received; and "Written contract requiring insurance" means €€. Notify us as soon as practicable. that part of any written contract or agreement The additional insured must see to it that we under which you are required to include a ow receive written notice of the claim or"suit'as person or organization as an additional in- sured on this Coverage Part, provided that soon as practicable. the "bodily injury" and "property damage"oc- c) The additional insured must immediately curs and the "personal injury" is caused by an send us copies of all legal papers received in offense committed: 00 connection with the claim or"suit', cooperate with us in the investigation or settlement of a. After the signing and execution of the the claim or defense against the "suit', and contract or agreement by you; otherwise comply with all policy conditions. b. While that part of the contract or +� d) The additional insured must tender the de- agreement is in effect; and fense and indemnity of any claim or "suit' to c. Before the end of the policy period. r vw► rr r wr w ■r Page 2 of 2 ©2005 The St. Paul Travelers Companies, Inc. CG D2 46 08 05 +wr ... ... . . . ...... Shoreline Construction Co. 4TC00751 P9301ND10 +r COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. CONTRACTORS XTEND ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART �r GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF COVERAGE—Provisions A.-H. and J.-N.of this endorsement broaden coverage, and provision I. of this endorsement may limit coverage. The following listing is a general coverage description only. Limitations and exclusions may apply to these coverages. Read all the PROVISIONS of this endorsement carefully to determine rights, duties, and what is and is not covered. A. Broadened Named Insured H. Additional Insured—State or Political Subdivisions B. Extension of Coverage—Damage To Premises 1. Other Insurance Condition Rented To You J. Increased Supplementary Payments • Perils of fire,explosion, lightning, smoke,water • Cost of bail bonds increased to$2,500 • Limit increased to$300,000 • Loss of earnings increased to$500 per day C. Blanket Waiver of Subrogation K. Knowledge and Notice of Occurrence or Offense D. Blanket Additional Insured—Managers or Lessors L. Unintentional Omission of Premises E. Incidental Medical Malpractice M. Personal Injury—Assumed by Contract F. Extension of Coverage—Bodily Injury N. Blanket Additional Insured—Lessor of Leased Equipment G. Contractual Liability—Railroads +rr PROVISIONS 3. This Provision A. does not apply to any per- A. BROADENED NAMED INSURED son or organization for which coverage is ex- 1. The Named Insured in Item 1. of the Declara- cluded by endorsement. tions is as follows: B. EXTENSION OF COVERAGE — DAMAGE TO The person or organization named in Item 1. PREMISES RENTED TO YOU of the Declarations and any organization, 1. The last paragraph of COVERAGE A. BOD- other than a partnership,joint venture or lim- ILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE Lk ited liability company, of which you maintain ABILITY (Section I — Coverages) is deleted ownership or in which you maintain the major- and replaced by the following: ity interest on the effective date of the policy. Exclusions c.through n, do not apply to dam- However, coverage for any such additional age to premises while rented to you, or tem- organization will cease as of the date, if any, porarily occupied by you with permission of during the policy period, that you no longer the owner, caused by: maintain ownership of, or the majority interest in,such organization. a. Fire; 2. WHO IS AN INSURED (Section II) Item 4.a. b. Explosion; err is deleted and replaced by the following: c. Lightning; a. Coverage under this provision is afforded d. Smoke resulting from such fire, explosion, only until the 180th day after you acquire or lightning; or wr or form the organization or the end of the e. Water. policy period,whichever is earlier. A separate limit of insurance applies to this coverage as described in Section III Limits Of Insurance. CG D3 16 07 04 Copyright,The Travelers Indemnity Company, 2004 Page 1 of 6 +rr 4W Shoreline Construction Co. 4TCO0751 P9301ND10 +rr. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 4 2. This insurance does not apply to damage to 5. This Provision B. does not apply if coverage premises while rented to you, or temporarily for Damage To Premises Rented To You of occupied by you with permission of the COVERAGE A. BODILY INJURY AND owner, caused by: PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY(Section I-- ,,,,� a. Rupture, bursting, or operation of pres- Coverages)is excluded by endorsement. sure relief devices; C. BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION b. Rupture or bursting due to expansion or We waive any right of recovery we may have qW swelling of the contents of any building or against any person or organization because of structure, caused by or resulting from wa- payments we make for injury or damage arising ter; out of: premises owned or occupied by or rented c. Explosion of steam boilers, steam pipes, or loaned to you; ongoing operations performed +rr steam engines, or steam turbines. by you or on your behalf, done under a contract 3. Paragraph 6. of LIMITS OF INSURANCE with that person or organization; "your work"; or "your products". We waive this right where you (Section III) is deleted and replaced by the have agreed to do so as part of a written contract, following: executed by you before the "bodily injury" or Subject to 5. above, the Damage To Prem- "property damage" occurs or the "personal injury" ises Rented To You Limit is the most we will or"advertising injury"offense is committed. pay under COVERAGE A. for the sum of all D. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED — MANAG- damages because of "property damage" to ERS OR LESSORS OF PREMISES any one premises while rented to you, or temporarily occupied by you with permission WHO IS AN INSURED (Section II) is amended to of the owner, caused by:fire; explosion; light- include as an insured any person or organization ning; smoke resulting from such fire, explo- (referred to below as "additional insured") with sion, or lightning; or water. The Damage To whom you have agreed in a written contract, exe- Premises Rented To You Limit will apply to all cuted before the "bodily injury" or "property dam- "property damage" proximately caused by the age" occurs or the "personal injury" or "adverts- same 'occurrence", whether such damage ing injury' offense is committed, to name as an results from: fire; explosion; lightning; smoke additional insured, but only with respect to liability resulting from such fire, explosion, or light- arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use ,w ning; or water; or any combination of any of of that part of any premises leased to you, subject these causes. to the following provisions: The Damage To Premises Rented To You 1. Limits of Insurance. The limits of insurance Limit will be the higher of: afforded to the additional insured shall be the +' limits which you agreed to provide in the writ- e. $300,000; or ten contract, or the limits shown on the Decla- b. The amount shown on the Declarations rations,whichever are less. for Damage To Premises Rented To You 2. The insurance afforded to the additional in- Limit. sured does not apply to: 4. Paragraph a. of the definition of"insured con- a. Any "bodily injury" or "property damage" tract' (DEFINITIONS — Section V) is deleted that occurs, or"personal injury" or"adver- wr and replaced by the following: tising injury" caused by an offense which a. A contract for a lease of premises. How- is committed, after you cease to be a ten- ever, that portion of the contract for a ant in that premises; lease of premises that indemnifies any b. Any premises for which coverage is ex- person or organization for damage to cluded by endorsement;or premises while rented to you, or tempo- rarily occupied by you with permission of c. Structural alterations, new construction or the owner, caused by: bre; explosion; demolition operations performed by or on lightning; smoke resulting from such fire, behalf of such additional insured. explosion, or lightning; or water, is not an 3. The insurance afforded to the additional in- "insured contract"; sured is excess over any valid and collectible Page 2 of 6 Copyright,The Travelers Indemnity Company, 2004 CG D3 16 07 04 ow ow IN Shoreline Construction Co. 4TCO0751 P9301ND10 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY "other insurance" available to such additional together with all related acts or omissions in ft insured, unless you have agreed in the writ- the furnishing of the services described in ten contract that this insurance must be pri- paragraph 1. above to any one person will be mary to, or non-contributory with, such "other deemed one"occurrence". rr insurance". 5. This Provision E. does not apply if you are in E. INCIDENTAL MEDICAL MALPRACTICE the business or occupation of providing any of 1. The following is added to paragraph 1. Insur- the services described in paragraph 1. above. ing Agreement of COVERAGE A. — BODILY 6. The insurance provided by this Provision E. INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABIL- shall be excess over any valid and collectible ITY(Section I—Coverages): "other insurance" available to the insured, "Bodily injury" arising out of the rendering of, whether primary, excess, contingent or on or failure to render, the following will be any other basis, except for insurance that you deemed to be caused by an"occurrence": bought specifically to apply in excess of the Limits of Insurance shown on the Declara- a. Medical, surgical, dental,laboratory,x-ray tions of this Coverage Part. or nursing service, advice or instruction, or the related furnishing of food or bever- F. EXTENSION OF COVERAGE — BODILY IN- ages; JURY b. The furnishing or dispensing of drugs or The definition of "bodily injury" (DEFINITIONS — medical, dental, or surgical supplies or Section V) is deleted and replaced by the follow- appliances; mg: c. First aid;or "Bodily injury" means bodily injury, mental an- guish, mental injury, shock, fright, disability, hu- miliation, sickness or disease sustained by a per- this Provision E., "Good Samaritan ser- son, including death resulting from any of these at vices" are those medical services ren- any time. dered or provided in an emergency and for which no remuneration is demanded G. CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY—RAILROADS or received. 1. Paragraph c. of the definition of"insured con- t. Paragraph 2.a.(1)(d) of WHO IS AN IN- tract" (DEFINITIONS — Section V) is deleted on SURED (Section II) does not apply to any and replaced by the following: registered nurse, licensed practical nurse, c. Any easement or license agreement; emergency medical technician or paramedic 2. Paragraph f.(1) of the definition of "insured employed by you, but only while performing contract" (DEFINITIONS — Section V) is de- W the services described in paragraph 1. above leted. and while acting within the scope of their em- ployment by you. Any "employees" rendering H. ADDITIONAL INSURED — STATE OR POLITI- "Good Samaritan services" will be deemed to CAL SUBDIVISIONS—PERMITS im be acting within the scope of their employ- WHO IS AN INSURED (Section 11)is amended to ment by you. include as an insured any state or political subdi- 3. The following exclusion is added to paragraph vision, subject to the following provisions: 08 2. Exclusions of COVERAGE A. — BODILY 1. This insurance applies only when required to INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABIL- be provided by you by an ordinance, law or ITY(Section I—Coverages): building code and only with respect to opera- (This insurance does not apply to:) "Bodily in- tions performed by you or on your behalf for jury' or 'property damage" arising out of the which the state or political subdivision has is- willful violation of a penal statute or ordinance sued a permit. relating to the sale of pharmaceuticals com- 2. This insurance does not apply to: mitted by or with the knowledge or consent of a. "Bodily injury," "property damage," "per- the insured. sonal injury" or"advertising injury" arising 4. For the purposes of determining the applica- out of operations performed for the state ble limits of insurance, any act or omission or political subdivision;or CG D316 07 04 Copyright,The Travelers Indemnity Company, 2004 Page 3 of 6 w Shoreline Construction Co. 4TCO0751 P9301ND10 wr COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY b. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" in- insured under any other policy, #W cluded in the "products-completed opera- including any umbrella or excess tions hazard". policy. I. OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION When this insurance is excess, we to A. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CON- will have no duty under Coverages A DITIONS (Section IV), paragraph 4. (Other or B to defend the insured againstany "suit" if any provider of"other in- Insurance) is deleted and replaced by the fol- surance" has a duty to defend the in- to lowing: sured against that "suit". If no pro- 4. Other Insurance vider of "other insurance" defends, If valid and collectible"other insurance" is twee will undertake dhe d nsu a but we awr available to the insured for a loss we cover under Coverages A or B of this against all those providers of "other Coverage Part, our obligations are limited insurance". as follows: When this insurance is excess over do a. Primary Insurance other insurance", we will pay only our share of the amount of the loss, if This insurance is primary except any,that exceeds the sum of: when b. below applies. If this insur- (1) The total amount that all such ante is primary, our obligations are "other insurance" would pay for wo not affected unless any of the "other the loss in the absence of this in- insurance" is also primary. Then, we surance; and will share with all that "other insur- ance" The total of all deductible and by the method described in c. (2) •+ below. self-insured amounts under that "other insurance". b. Excess Insurance This insurance is excess over any of We will share the remaining foss, if any,with any"other insurance"that is the "other insurance", whether of mnot described in this Excess Insur- ary, excess, contingent or on any ance provision. other basis: (1) That is Fire, Extended Coverage, c. Method Of Sharing Builder's Risk, Installation Risk, If all of the "other insurance" permits or similar coverage for "your contribution by equal shares, we will work"; follow this method also. Under this ar (2) That is Fire insurance for prem- approach each provider of insurance ises rented to you or temporarily contributes equal amounts until it has occupied by you with permission paid its applicable limit of insurance or none of the loss remains, which- of the owner, ever comes first. (3) That is insurance purchased by you to cover our liability as a if any of the "other insurance" does y y y not permit contribution by equal tenant for "property damage" to shares, we will contribute by limits. premises rented to you or tempo- s, Under this method, the share of each rarily occupied by you with per- provider of insurance is based on the mission of the owner; or ratio of its applicable limit of insur- (4) If the foss arises out of the main- ance to the total applicable limits of w tenance or use of aircraft, insurance of all providers of insur- "autos", or watercraft to the ex- ance. tent not subject to Exclusion g.of B. The following definition is added to DEFINITIONS Section I — Coverage A— Bodily (Section V): aw Injury And Property Damage Li- ability; or "Other insurance": (5) That is available to the insured a. Means insurance, or the funding of losses, err when the insured is an additional that is provided by,through or on behalf of: Page 4 of 6 Copyright,The Travelers Indemnity Company, 2004 CG D316 07 04 +r WX Shoreline Construction Co. 4TCO0751 P9301ND10 ,wr COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY (1) Another insurance company; 2. Notice of an "occurrence" or of an offense cow (2) Us or any of our affiliated insurance com- which may result in a claim will be deemed to panies, except when the Non cumulation be given as soon as practicable to us if it is of Each Occurrence Limit section of given in good faith as soon as practicable to Paragraph 5 of LIMITS OF INSURANCE your workers' compensation insurer. This ap- (Section III)or the Non cumulation of Per- plies only if you subsequently give notice of sonal and Advertising Injury limit sections the "occurrence" or offense to us as soon as of Paragraph 4 of LIMITS OF INSUR- practicable after you, one of your "executive w ANCE(Section 111)applies; officers"(if you are a corporation),one of your partners who is an individual (if you are a (3) Any risk retention group; partnership), one of your managers(if you are (4) Any self-insurance method or program, a limited liability company), or an "employee" other than any funded by you and over (such as an insurance, loss control or risk which this Coverage Part applies;or manager or administrator) designated by you (5) Any similar risk transfer or risk manage- to give such notice discovers that the "occur- ment method. rence"or offense may involve this policy. b. Does not include umbrella insurance, or ex- 3. This Provision K. does not apply as respects cess insurance,that you bought specifically to the specific number of days within which you apply in excess of the Limits of Insurance are required to notify us in writing of the shown on the Declarations of this Coverage abrupt commencement of a discharge, re- Part. lease or escape of "pollutants" that causes "bodily injury" or "property damage" which J. INCREASED SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS may otherwise be covered under this policy. r Paragraphs 1.b. and i.d. of SUPPLEMENTARY L. UNINTENTIONAL OMISSION PAYMENTS—COVERAGES A AND B (Section 1 —Coverages)are amended as follows: The following is added to COMMERCIAL GEN- ERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS (Section IV), +r. 1. In paragraph i.b., the amount we will pay for paragraph 6.(Representations): the cost of bail bonds is increased to$2500. The unintentional omission of, or unintentional 2. In paragraph 1.d., the amount we will pay for error in, any information provided by you which loss of earnings is increased to$500 a day. we relied upon in issuing this policy shall not K. KNOWLEDGE AND NOTICE OF OCCUR- prejudice your rights under this insurance. How- RENCE OR OFFENSE ever, this Provision L. does not affect our right to 1. The following is added to COMMERCIAL collect additional premium or to exercise our right sir GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS (Section of cancellation or nonrenewal in accordance with IV), paragraph 2. (Duties In The Event of Oc- applicable state insurance laws, codes or regula- currence, Offense, Claim or Suit): tions. Notice of an "occurrence" or of an offense M. PERSONAL INJURY — ASSUMED BY CON- which may result in a claim must be given as TRACT soon as practicable after knowledge of the 1. The following is added to Exclusion e. (1) of "occurrence" or offense has been reported to Paragraph 2., Exclusions of Coverage B. you, one of your "executive officers" (if you Personal Injury, Advertising Injury, and are a corporation), one of your partners who Web Site Injury Liability of the Web XTEND is an individual (if you are a partnership), one Liability endorsement: of your managers (if you are a limited liability Solely for the purposes of liability assumed in company), or an "employee" (such as an in- an "Insured contract", reasonable attorney surance, loss control or risk manager or ad- fees and necessary litigation expenses in- ministrator) designated by you to give such curred by or for a party other than an insured .rr notice. are deemed to be damages because of"per- Knowledge by any other "employee" of an sonal injury"provided: "occurrence" or offense does not imply that (a) Liability to such party for, or for the cost you also have such knowledge. of, that party's defense has also been as- CG D316 07 04 Copyright,The Travelers Indemnity Company, 2004 Page 5 of 6 aw +rr Shoreline Construction Co. 4,TCO0751 P9301ND10 err COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY sumed in the same "insured contract"; N. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED — LESSOR and OF LEASED EQUIPMENT (b) Such attorney fees and litigation ex- WHO IS AN INSURED (Section II) is amended to penses are for defense of that party include as an insured any person or organization against a civil or alternative dispute reso- (referred to below as "additional insured") with lution proceeding in which damages to whom you have agreed in a written contract, exe- which this insurance applies are alleged. cuted before the "bodily injury" or"property dam- 2. Paragraph 2.d. of SUPPLEMENTARY PAY- age" occurs or the "personal injury" or "advertis- '"" MENTS—COVERAGES A AND B (Section i Ing injury" offense is committed, to name as an — Coverages) is deleted and replaced by the additional insured, but only with respect to their li- following: ability for"bodily injury", "property damage", "per- sonal injury" or "advertising injury" caused, in d. The allegations the "suit" and the in- whole or in part, by your acts or omissions in the formation we know about the "occur- maintenance, operation or use of equipment rence"or offense are such that no conflict leased to you by such additional insured, subject appears to exist between the interests of to the following provisions: ' the insured and the interests of the in- demnitee; 1. Limits of Insurance. The limits of insurance afforded to the additional insured shall be the 3. The third sentence of Paragraph 2 of SUP- limits which you agreed to provide in the writ- PLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — COVERAGES ten contract, or the limits shown on the Decla- A AND B (Section I — Coverages) is deleted rations,whichever are less. and replaced by the following: 2. The insurance afforded to the additional in- Notwithstanding the provisions of Paragraph sured does not apply to any "bodily injury" or 2.b.(2) of Section I—Coverage A—Bodily In- "property damage" that occurs, or "personal jury And Property Damage Liability, or the injury" or"advertising injury" caused by an of- provisions of Paragraph 2.e.(1) of Section I— fense which is committed,after the equipment Coverage B—Personal Injury,Advertising In- lease expires. jury And Web Site Injury Liability, such pay- ments will not be deemed to be damages for 3. The insurance afforded to the additional in- "bodily injury" and "property damage", or sured is excess over any valid and collectible damages for"personal injury", and will not re- "other insurance" available to such additional duce the limits of insurance. insured, unless you have agreed in the writ- ten contract that this insurance must be pri- 4. This provision M. does not apply if coverage maty to, or non-contributory with, such "other for "personal injury" liability is excluded by insurance". "'� endorsement. to aw Page 6 of 6 Copyright,The Travelers Indemnity Company, 2004 CG D3 16 07 04 irrr E $ C R ,.;fid i^��"ry`„�'#'' ''y'° �'S'`f ��'�'`'Y�"'1•�`� ,E,. .�:sfi'� �`''*¢{�,,{�•.�p-f"#"��� ���;�.�a���^�'��� �Y�'y„R' �n f 'fit a*+r S �-r x u � p *`'° w #�� °�"- ,�{ R I. �., ;K7"Y.^�,. �'�* z'�, s " � `mak#�' � d�}'�. �`�°;�.«�� �,^"�;�#.c�S��7x�"�.,, a �h.�•�ie. r �"x �"�,�,��.,�,.e., Y"��,�:. s2 zx r=�'�` ark§� � '� - G r � � tFx~ti �t a�'? t f f 3 I �a <p t t ° tr� ^* �. Y 3 p°�Wr'x �' t ;`k x'z z'�. :ice t'" �r } r• F �- � ,.-� �,st >cr a & ,� s r�?� i� .�. p xa����y� ux ;: a P a`±.r �N k �' fa s�s* y '� , �'• ' { - -� ��'x.n-y,:Y 6 "€ �` '. s x{ - £�gur "� ��,�'x ���L��� ��+"sa,���.%a✓'u�,,�'��fi "Y ,2>,�'�' ���`"`� 3�'k���, � #` ,� 'n ' ��" � � i � "t fi a�"L`��ti,.t -�.� �fi.'.��v+� s�''t-' �->�t�g� •_"" gar s � xF ':. sy.,�x ;�, -�. t r ,4" 3 �'�� 5.«�s'�°- `,..a,' �`�'x'✓ '� g, � fi� ifs'*: r �' °� State of Washington DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES Prevailing Wage Section-Telephone(360)902-5335 PO Box 44540,Olympia,WA 98504-4540 Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates For Public Works Contracts The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On public works projects,workers'wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code Key. KING COUNTY EFFECTIVE 3-03-2010 r ********************************************************************************************************** (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $40.03 1H 5D ow BOILERMAKERS JOURNEYLEVEL $56.53 1C 5N BRICK MASON BRICK AND BLOCK FINISHER $39,49 1M 5A to JOURNEY LEVEL $46.35 1M 5A BUILDING SERVICE EMPLOYEES JANITOR $17.98 2F 5S TRAVELING WAXER/SHAMPOOER $18.39 2F 5S WINDOW CLEANER(NON-SCAFFOLD) $22.65 2F 5S WINDOW CLEANER(SCAFFOLD) $23,51 2F 5S CABINET MAKERS (IN SHOP) JOURNEY LEVEL $16.67 1 CARPENTERS ACOUSTICAL WORKER $48.60 1H 5D BRIDGE, DOCK AND WARF CARPENTERS $48.47 1 H 5D CARPENTER $48.47 1 H 5D CREOSOTED MATERIAL $48.57 1H 5D DRYWALL APPLICATOR $48,74 1H 5D 10 FLOOR FINISHER $48.60 1H 5D FLOOR LAYER $48.60 1H 5D FLOOR SANDER $48.60 1H 5D MILLWRIGHT AND MACHINE ERECTORS $49.47 1H 5D PILEDRIVERS,DRIVING,PULLING,PLACING COLLARS AND WELDING $48.67 1H 5D SAWFILER $48.60 1H 5D SHINGLER $48.60 1H 5D STATIONARY POWER SAW OPERATOR $48.60 1H 5D STATIONARY WOODWORKING TOOLS $48.60 1H 5D CEMENT MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $49.15 1M 5D DIVERS&TENDERS DIVER $100.28 1M 5D 8A DIVER ON STANDBY $56.68 1M 5D DIVER TENDER $52.23 1M 5D SURFACE RCV&ROV OPERATOR $52.23 1M 5D SURFACE RCV&ROV OPERATOR TENDER $48.85 1 B 5A DREDGE WORKERS ASSISTANT ENGINEER $49.57 1T 5D 8L ASSISTANT MATE(DECKHAND) $49.06 1T 5D 8L BOATMEN $49.57 1T 5D 8L ENGINEER WELDER $49.62 1T 5D 8L Page 1 r KING COUNTY EFFECTIVE 3-03-2010 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code LEVERMAN,HYDRAULIC $51.19 1T 5D 8L MAINTENANCE $49.06 1T 5D 8L MATES $49.57 1T 5D 8L OILER $49.11:9 1T 5D 8L DRYWALL TAPERS JOURNEY LEVEL $48.79 1E 5P ► ELECTRICAL FIXTURE MAINTENANCE WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $25.3.4 1E 5L ELECTRICIANS-INSIDE CABLE SPLICER $61.95 2W 5L CABLE SPLICER(TUNNEL) $66.57 2W 5L CERTIFIED WELDER $59.85 2W 5L CERTIFIED WELDER(TUNNEL) $64.25 2W 5L �Ir CONSTRUCTION STOCK PERSON $31.83 2W 5L JOURNEY LEVEL $57.74 2W 5L JOURNEY LEVEL(TUNNEL) $61.95 2W 5L we ELECTRICIANS-MOTOR SHOP CRAFTSMAN $15.37 2A 6C JOURNEY LEVEL $14.69 2A 6C ELECTRICIANS-POWERLINE CONSTRUCTION nrll CABLE SPLICER $59.79 4A 5A CERTIFIED LINE WELDER $54.59 4A 5A GROUNDPERSON $39.07 4A 5A HEAD GROUNDPERSON $41.22 4A 5A HEAVY LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $54.59 4A 5A JACKHAMMER OPERATOR $41.22 4A 5A JOURNEY LEVEL LINEPERSON $54.59 4A 5A No LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $46.32 4A 5A POLE SPRAYER $54.59 4A 5A POWDERPERSON $41.22 4A 5A ELECTRONIC TECHNICIANS so ELECTRONIC TECHNICIANS JOURNEY LEVEL $31.00 1 ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS MECHANIC $67.91 4A 6Q MECHANIC IN CHARGE $73.87 4A 6Q FABRICATED PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $13.60 2K 5B FENCE ERECTORS 1611 FENCE ERECTOR $15.18 1 FLAGGERS JOURNEY LEVEL $33.93 1H 5D GLAZIERS JOURNEY LEVEL $48.61 1Y 5G HEAT&FROST INSULATORS AND ASBESTOS WORKERS MECHANIC $50.28 1S 5J HEATING EQUIPMENT MECHANICS MECHANIC $59.32 1E 6L HOD CARRIERS&MASON TENDERS JOURNEY LEVEL $41.28 1H 5D INDUSTRIAL ENGINE AND MACHINE MECHANICS MECHANIC $15.65 1 lrlf Page 2 wr KING COUNTY EFFECTIVE 3-03-2010 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code INDUSTRIAL POWER VACUUM CLEANER rrr JOURNEY LEVEL $9.24 1 INLAND BOATMEN CAPTAIN $48.39 1K 513 COOK $45.36 1K 5B DECKHAND $45.36 1K 5B ENGINEER/DECKHAND $46.25 1K 5B MATE,LAUNCH OPERATOR $47.35 1K 5B 1YI11 INSPECTION/CLEANING/SEALING OF SEWER&WATER SYSTEMS BY REMOTE CONTROL CLEANER OPERATOR,FOAMER OPERATOR $31.49 1 GROUT TRUCK OPERATOR $11.48 1 HEAD OPERATOR $24.91 1 TECHNICIAN $19.33 1 TV TRUCK OPERATOR $20.45 1 INSULATION APPLICATORS JOURNEYLEVEL $48.47 1M 5D IRONWORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $54.27 10 5A LABORERS ASPHALT RAKER $41.28 1H 5D BALLAST REGULATOR MACHINE $40.03 1H 5D BATCH WEIGHMAN $33.93 1H 5D itr BRUSH CUTTER $40.03 1H 5D BRUSH HOG FEEDER $40.03 1H 5D BURNERS $40.03 1H 5D CARPENTER TENDER $40.03 1H 5D dw CASSION WORKER $41.28 1 H 5D CEMENT DUMPER/PAVING $40.77 1 H 5D CEMENT FINISHER TENDER $40.03 1H 5D sw CHANGE-HOUSE MAN OR DRY SHACKMAN $40.03 1 H 5D CHIPPING GUN(OVER 30 LBS) $40.77 1H 5D CHIPPING GUN(UNDER 30 LBS) $40.03 1H 5D CHOKER SETTER $40.03 1H 5D CHUCKTENDER $40.03 1H 5D CLEAN-UP LABORER $40.03 1 H 5D CONCRETE DUMPER/CHUTE OPERATOR $40.77 1H 5D Y1�c CONCRETE FORM STRIPPER $40.03 1 H 5D CONCRETE SAW OPERATOR $40.77 1 H 5D CRUSHERFEEDER $33,93 1H 5D CURING LABORER $40.03 1H 5D dDEMOLITION,WRECKING&MOVING(INCLUDING CHARRED MATERIALS) $40.03 1H 5D DITCH DIGGER $40.03 1H 5D DIVER $41.28 1H 5D DRILL OPERATOR(HYDRAULIC,DIAMOND) $40.77 1 H 5D DRILL OPERATOR,AIRTRAC $41.28 1H 5D DUMPMAN $40.03 1 H 5D EPDXY TECHNICIAN $40.03 1H 5D EROSION CONTROL WORKER $40.03 1H 5D FALLER/BUCKER,CHAIN SAW $40.77 1H 5D FINAL DETAIL CLEANUP(i.e.,dusting,vacuuming,window cleaning;NOT $30.84 1 H 5D construction debris cleanup) Page 3 �1r 1111 KING COUNTY EFFECTIVE 3-03-2010 ********************************************************************************************************** (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code FINE GRADERS $40.03 1H 5D FIRE WATCH $33.93 1H 5D FORM SETTER $40.03 1H 5D GABION BASKET BUILDER $40.03 1H 5D GENERAL LABORER $40.03 1H 5D GRADE CHECKER&TRANSIT PERSON $41.28 1H 5D GRINDERS $40.03 1H 5D GROUT MACHINE TENDER $40.03 1H 5D GUARDRAIL ERECTOR $40.03 1H 5D ■f HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL A $41.28 1 H 5D HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL B $40.77 1H 5D HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL C $40.03 1H 5D HIGH SCALER $41.28 1H 5D HOD CARRIER/MORTARMAN $41.28 1H 5D JACKHAMMER $40.77 1H 5D LASER BEAM OPERATOR $40.77 1H 5D Illi MANHOLE BUILDER-MUDMAN $40.77 1H 5D MATERIAL YARDMAN $40.03 1 H 5D MINER $41.28 1H 5D NOZZLEMAN,CONCRETE PUMP,GREEN CUTTER WHEN USING HIGH $40.77 1H 5D PRESSURE AIR&WATER ON CONCRETE&ROCK,SANDBLAST, GUNITE,SHOTCRETE,WATER BLASTER PAVEMENT BREAKER $40.77 1H 5D PILOT CAR $33.93 1 H 5D PIPE POT TENDER $40.77 1 H 5D PIPE RELINER(NOT INSERT TYPE) $40.77 1 H 5D PIPELAYER&CAULKER $40.77 1H 5D PIPELAYER&CAULKER(LEAD) $41.28 1 H 5D PIPEWRAPPER $40.77 1H 5D POT TENDER $40.03 1H 5D POWDERMAN $41.28 1H 5D POWDERMAN HELPER $40.03 1H 5D POWERJACKS $40.77 1H 5D RAILROAD SPIKE PULLER(POWER) $40.77 1H 5D RE-TIMBERMAN $41.28 1H 5D RIPRAP MAN $40.03 1H 5D RODDER $40.77 1H 5D SCAFFOLD ERECTOR $40.03 1H 5D IrIW SCALE PERSON $40.03 1H 5D SIGNALMAN $40.03 1H 5D SLOPER(OVER 20") $40.77 1H 5D SLOPER SPRAYMAN $40.03 1 H 5D SPREADER(CLARY POWER OR SIMILAR TYPES) $40.77 1 H 5D SPREADER(CONCRETE) $40.77 1H 5D STAKE HOPPER $40.03 1H 5D STOCKPILER $40.03 1H 5D TAMPER&SIMILAR ELECTRIC,AIR&GAS $40.77 1H 5D TAMPER(MULTIPLE&SELF PROPELLED) $40.77 1H 5D TOOLROOM MAN(AT JOB SITE) $40.03 1H 5D TOPPER-TAILER $40.03 1H 5D TRACK LABORER $40.03 1H 5D TRACK LINER(POWER) $40.77 1H 5D Page 4 SII. KING COUNTY EFFECTIVE 3-03-2010 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code TRUCK SPOTTER $40.03 1H 5D M TUGGER OPERATOR $40,77 1H 51D VIBRATING SCREED(AIR,GAS,OR ELECTRIC) $40.03 1H 5D VIBRATOR $40.77 1H 5D 40VINYL SEAMER $40.03 1H 5D WELDER $40.03 1H 51D WELL-POINT LABORER $40.77 1H 5D LABORERS-UNDERGROUND SEWER&WATER so GENERAL LABORER&TOPMAN $40.03 1H 5D PIPE LAYER $40,77 1H 5D LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION IRRIGATION OR LAWN SPRINKLER INSTALLERS $13.56 1 ow LANDSCAPE EQUIPMENT OPERATORS OR TRUCK DRIVERS $28.17 1 LANDSCAPING OR PLANTING LABORERS $17.87 1 LATHERS fim JOURNEY LEVEL $48,74 1H 5D MARBLE SETTERS JOURNEYLEVEL $46.35 1M 5A METAL FABRICATION(IN SHOP) FITTER $15.86 1 LABORER $9,78 1 MACHINE OPERATOR $13.04 1 PAINTER $11.10 1 �r WELDER $15.48 1 MODULAR BUILDINGS CABINET ASSEMBLY $11.56 1 ELECTRICIAN $11.56 1 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE $11.56. 1 PLUMBER $11.56 1 PRODUCTION WORKER $9,40 1 TOOL MAINTENANCE $11.56 1 UTILITY PERSON $11.56 1 WELDER $11.56 1 PAINTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $34.87 2B 6Z PLASTERERS JOURNEY LEVEL $46.63 1R 5B YIr PLAYGROUND&PARK EQUIPMENT INSTALLERS JOURNEY LEVEL $8.55 1 PLUMBERS&PIPEFITTERS ar JOURNEYLEVEL $66.44 1G 5A POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS ASPHALT PLANT OPERATOR $50.39 1T 5D 8P ASSISTANT ENGINEERS $47.12 1T 5D 8P r�r BACKHOE,EXCAVATOR SHOVEL,OVER 50 METRIC TONS TO 90 METRIC $50.94 1T 5D 8P TONS BACKHOE,EXCAVATOR SHOVEL,OVER 90 METRIC TONS $51.51 1T 5D 8P BACKHOE,EXCAVATOR,SHOVEL,OVER 30 METRIC TONS TO 50 $50.39 1T 5D 8P w METRIC TONS BACKHOE,EXCAVATOR,SHOVEL,TRACTORS UNDER 15 METRIC TONS $49,48 1T 5D 8P BACKHOE,EXCAVATOR,SHOVEL,TRACTORS:15 TO 30 METRIC TONS $49.90 1T 5D 8P BARRIER MACHINE(ZIPPER) $49:90 1T 5D 8P Page 5 11b rlrr KING COUNTY EFFECTIVE 3-03-2010 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code BATCH PLANT OPERATOR,CONCRETE $49.90 1T 5D 8P BELT LOADERS(ELEVATING TYPE) $49.48 1T 5D 8P BOBCAT(SKID STEER) $47.12 1T 5D 8P BROKK-REMOTE DEMOLITION EQUIPMENT $47,12 1T 5D 8P BROOMS $47.12 1T 5D 8P BUMP CUTTER $49,90 1T 5D 8P CABLEWAYS $50.39 1T 5D 8P CHIPPER $49.90 1T 5D 8P COMPRESSORS $47.12 1T 5D 8P CONCRETE FINISH MACHINE-LASER SCREED $47,12 1T 5D 8P CONCRETE PUMPS $49.48 1T 5D 8P CONCRETE PUMP-TRUCK MOUNT WITH BOOM ATTACHMENT $49,90 1T 5D 8P CONCRETE PUMP-TRUCK MOUNT WITH BOOM ATTACHMENT OVER 42 $50.39 1T 5D 8P METERS CONVEYORS $49.48 1T 5D 8P CRANE,FRICTION 100 TONS THROUGH 199 TONS $51.51 1T 5D 8P CRANE, FRICTION OVER 200 TONS $52,07 1T 5D 8P CRANES, THRU 19 TONS,WITH ATTACHMENTS $49,48 1T 5D 8P CRANES, 20-44 TONS,WITH ATTACHMENTS $49.90 1T 5D 8P CRANES, 45 TONS-99 TONS, UNDER 150 FT OF BOOM(INCLUDING JIB $50.39 1T 5D 8P Ali WITH ATACHMENTS) CRANES, 100 TONS-199 TONS,OR 150 FT OF BOOM(INCLUDING JIB $50.94 1T 5D 8P WITH ATTACHMENTS) CRANES,200 TONS TO 300 TONS,OR 250 FT OF BOOM(INCLUDING JIB $51.51 1T 5D 8P 1 WITH ATTACHMENTS) CRANES,A-FRAME, 10 TON AND UNDER $47.12 1T 5D 8P CRANES,A-FRAME,OVER 10 TON $49,48 1T 5D 8P CRANES,OVER 300 TONS,OR 300'OF BOOM INCLUDING JIB WITH $52,07 1T 5D 8P ATTACHMENTS CRANES,OVERHEAD,BRIDGE TYPE(20-44 TONS) $49.90 1T 5D 8P CRANES,OVERHEAD,BRIDGE TYPE(45-99 TONS) $50.39 1T 5D 8P CRANES,OVERHEAD,BRIDGE TYPE(100 TONS&OVER) $50.94 IT 5D 8P CRANES,TOWER CRANE UP TO 175'IN HEIGHT,BASE TO BOOM $50.94 1T 5D 8P CRANES,TOWER CRANE OVER 175'IN HEIGHT,BASE TO BOOM $51.51 1T 5D 8P CRUSHERS $49,90 1T 5D 8P DECK ENGINEER/DECK WINCHES(POWER) $49,90 1T 5D 8P DERRICK,BUILDING $50.39 1T 5D 8P DOZER,QUAD 9,D-10,AND HD-41 $50.39 1T 5D 8P DOZERS,D-9&UNDER $49,48 1T 5D 8P Illi DRILL OILERS-AUGER TYPE,TRUCK OR CRANE MOUNT $49.48 1T 5D 8P DRILLING MACHINE $49.90 1T 5D 8P ELEVATOR AND MANLIFT,PERMANENT AND SHAFT-TYPE $47.12 1T 5D 8P EQUIPMENT SERVICE ENGINEER(OILER) $49.48 1T 5D 8P FINISHING MACHINE/BIDWELL GAMACO AND SIMILAR EQUIP $49,90 1T 5D 8P FORK LIFTS,(3000 LBS AND OVER) $49.48 1T 5D 8P FORK LIFTS,(UNDER 3000 LBS) $47.12 1T 5D 8P GRADE ENGINEER $49.90 1T 5D 8P GRADECHECKER AND STAKEMAN $47,12 1T 5D 8P GUARDRAIL PUNCH $49.90 1T 5D 8P HOISTS,OUTSIDE(ELEVATORS AND MANLIFTS),AIR TUGGERS $49.48 1T 5D 8P HORIZONTAL/DIRECTIONAL DRILL LOCATOR $49,48 1T 5D 8P HORIZONTAL/DIRECTIONAL DRILL OPERATOR $49,90 1T 5D 8P HYDRALIFTS/BOOM TRUCKS(10 TON&UNDER) $47,12 1T 5D 8P Page 6 KING COUNTY EFFECTIVE 3-03-2010 (See Benefit Code Key) Over rr PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code HYDRALIFTS/BOOM TRUCKS(OVER 10 TON) $49,48 1T 5D 8P LOADERS,OVERHEAD(6 YD UP TO 8 YD) $50.39 1T 5D 8P LOADERS,OVERHEAD(8 YD&OVER) $50.94 1T 5D 8P LOADERS,OVERHEAD(UNDER 6 YD),PLANT FEED $49,90 1T 5D 8P LOCOMOTIVES,ALL $49,90 1T 5D 8P MECHANICS,ALL $50.94 1T 5D 8P MIXERS,ASPHALT PLANT $49,90 1T 5D 8P MOTOR PATROL GRADER(FINISHING) $50.39 1T 5D 8P MOTOR PATROL GRADER(NON-FINISHING) $49.48 1T 5D 8P tf1 MUCKING MACHINE,MOLE,TUNNEL DRILL AND/OR SHIELD $50.39 1T 5D 8P OIL DISTRIBUTORS,BLOWER DISTRIBUTION AND MULCH SEEDING $47,12 1T 5D 8P OPERATOR PAVEMENT BREAKER $47,12 1T 5D 8P PILEDRIVER(OTHER THAN CRANE MOUNT) $49,90 1T 5D 8P PLANT OILER(ASPHALT,CRUSHER) $49,48 1T 5D 8P POSTHOLE DIGGER,MECHANICAL $47,12 1T 5D 8P POWER PLANT $47.12 1T 5D 8P PUMPS,WATER $47.12 1T 5D 8P QUICK TOWER-NO CAB, UNDER 100 FEET IN HEIGHT BASED TO BOOM $47.12 1T 5D 8P REMOTE CONTROL OPERATOR ON RUBBER TIRED EARTH MOVING $50.39 1T 5D 8P EQUIP RIGGER AND BELLMAN $47.12 1T 5D 8P ROLLAGON $50.39 1T 5D 8P ROLLER,OTHER THAN PLANT ROAD MIX $47,12 1T 5D 8P rMi ROLLERS,PLANTMIX OR MULTILIFT MATERIALS $49.48 IT 5D 8P ROTO-MILL, ROTO-GRINDER $49,90 1T 5D 8P SAWS,CONCRETE $49,48 1T 5D 8P oft SCRAPERS-SELF PROPELLED,HARD TAIL END DUMP,ARTICULATING $50.39 1T 5D 8P OFF-ROAD EQUIPMENT(45 YD AND OVER) SCRAPERS, CONCRETE AND CARRY ALL $49,48 IT 5D 8P SCRAPER-SELF PROPELLED,HARD-TAIL END DUMP,ARTICULATING $49.90 1T 5D 8P wo OFF-ROAD EQUIPMENT(UNDER 45 YARDS) SHOTCRETE GUNITE $47.12 1T 5D 8P SLIPFORM PAVERS $50.39 1T 5D 8P SPREADER,TOPSIDER&SCREEDMAN $50.39 1T 5D 8P No SUBGRADE TRIMMER $49,90 1T 5D 8P TOWER BUCKET ELEVATORS $49,48 1T 5D 8P TRACTORS,(75 HP&UNDER) $49,48 1T 5D 8P TRACTORS,(OVER 75 HP) $49,90 1T 5D 8P TRANSFER MATERIAL SERVICE MACHINE $49,90 1T 5D 8P TRANSPORTERS,ALL TRACK OR TRUCK TYPE $50.39 1T 5D 8P TRENCHING MACHINES $49,48 1T 5D 8P ill�1 TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER(UNDER 100 TON) $49,48 1T 5D 8P TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER(100 TON&OVER) $49.90 1T 5D 8P TRUCK MOUNT PORTABLE CONVEYER $49.90 1T 5D 8P WELDER $50.39 1T 5D 8P err WHEEL TRACTORS,FARMALL TYPE $47.12 1T 5D 8P YO YO PAY DOZER $49.90 1T 5D 8P POWER LINE CLEARANCE TREE TRIMMERS go JOURNEY LEVEL IN CHARGE $40,79 4A 5A SPRAY PERSON $38.73 4A 5A TREE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $39.25 4A 5A owTREE TRIMMER $36.50 4A 5A Page 7 +1r KING COUNTY EFFECTIVE 3-03-2010 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code TREE TRIMMER GROUNDPERSON $27.55 4A 5A REFRIGERATION&AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS MECHANIC $37.91 1 RESIDENTIAL BRICK MASON JOURNEYLEVEL $46.35 1M 5A RESIDENTIAL CARPENTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $23.47 1 RESIDENTIAL CEMENT MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $22.64 1 Ali RESIDENTIAL DRYWALL TAPERS - JOURNEYLEVEL $48.79 1E 5P RESIDENTIAL ELECTRICIANS JOURNEYLEVEL $26.24 1 W RESIDENTIAL GLAZIERS JOURNEYLEVEL $34.54 1H 5G RESIDENTIAL INSULATION APPLICATORS JOURNEYLEVEL $17.60 1 RESIDENTIAL LABORERS JOURNEYLEVEL $23.03 1 RESIDENTIAL MARBLE SETTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $24.09 1 RESIDENTIAL PAINTERS JOURNEYLEVEL $24.46 1 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBERS&PIPEFITTERS JOURNEYLEVEL $34.69 1 RESIDENTIAL REFRIGERATION&AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS JOURNEY LEVEL $62.56 1G 5A RESIDENTIAL SHEET METALWORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL(FIELD OR SHOP) $35.25 1R 6L RESIDENTIAL SOFT FLOOR LAYERS JOURNEY LEVEL $39.19 2X 5A go RESIDENTIAL SPRINKLER FITTERS(FIRE PROTECTION) JOURNEYLEVEL $36.81 2R 5C RESIDENTIAL STONE MASONS JOURNEYLEVEL $46.35 1M 5A RESIDENTIAL TERRAZZO WORKERS JOURNEYLEVEL $45.26 1M 5A RESIDENTIAL TERRAZZO/TILE FINISHERS JOURNEYLEVEL $21.46 1 RESIDENTIAL TILE SETTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $25.17 1 ROOFERS JOURNEY LEVEL $40.05 1R 5A USING IRRITABLE BITUMINOUS MATERIALS $43.05 1R 5A SHEET METALWORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL(FIELD OR SHOP) $59.32 1E 6L SHIPBUILDING&SHIP REPAIR BOILERMAKER $32.56 1H 6W CARPENTER $33.59 1B 6X ELECTRICIAN $33.45 1B 6X HEAT&FROST INSULATOR $50.28 1S 51 LABORER $32.17 1B 6X Page 8 w KING COUNTY EFFECTIVE 3-03-2010 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code MACHINIST $33.28 1B 6X OPERATOR $35.61 1B 6X PAINTER $33.21 16 6X PIPEFITTER $33.18 1B 6X RIGGER $33.17 1B 6X SANDBLASTER $32.16 16 6X SHEET METAL $33.19 16 6X SHIPFITTER $33.17 1B 6X TRUCKER $33.04 1B 6X WAREHOUSE $33.09 1B 6X WELDER/BURNER $33.17 113 6X SIGN MAKERS&INSTALLERS(ELECTRICAL) SIGN INSTALLER $22.92 1 SIGN MAKER $21.36 1 SIGN MAKERS&INSTALLERS (NON-ELECTRICAL) SIGN INSTALLER $27.28 1 SIGN MAKER $33.25 1 SOFT FLOOR LAYERS JOURNEYLEVEL $39.19 2X 5A SOLAR CONTROLS FOR WINDOWS JOURNEYLEVEL $12.44 1 5S SPRINKLER FITTERS(FIRE PROTECTION) JOURNEYLEVEL $64.29 1X 5C Yin STAGE RIGGING MECHANICS(NON STRUCTURAL) JOURNEYLEVEL $13.23 1 STONEMASONS air JOURNEYLEVEL $46.35 1M 5A STREET AND PARKING LOT SWEEPER WORKERS JOURNEYLEVEL $19.09 1 SURVEYORS 0 CHAIN PERSON $9.35 1 INSTRUMENT PERSON $11.40 1 PARTY CHIEF $13.40 1 TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIANS 00 TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIANS JOURNEY LEVEL $22.76 1 TELEPHONE LINE CONSTRUCTION-OUTSIDE CABLE SPLICER $32.27 2B 5A go HOLE DIGGER/GROUND PERSON $18.10 2B 5A INSTALLER(REPAIRER) $30.94 2B 5A JOURNEY LEVEL TELEPHONE LINEPERSON $30.02 2B 5A SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER 1 $32.27 2B 5A ' SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER II $31.62 2B 5A TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR(HEAVY) $32.27 2B 5A TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR(LIGHT) $30.02 2B 5A 1rr TELEVISION GROUND PERSON $17.18 2B 5A TELEVISION LINEPERSON/INSTALLER $22.73 26 5A TELEVISION SYSTEM TECHNICIAN $27.09 2B 5A TELEVISION TECHNICIAN $24.35 2B 5A TREE TRIMMER $30.02 2B 5A TERRAZZO WORKERS JOURNEYLEVEL $45.26 1M 5A wrr Page 9 ilk KING COUNTY EFFECTIVE 3-03-2010 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code TILE SETTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $21.65 1 TILE,MARBLE&TERRAZZO FINISHERS FINISHER $39.09 1B 5A TRAFFIC CONTROL STRIPERS JOURNEY LEVEL $38.90 1K 5A TRUCK DRIVERS ASPHALT MIX(TO 16 YARDS) $45.63 1T 5D 8L ASPHALT MIX(OVER 16 YARDS) $46.47 1T 5D 8L lrli DUMP TRUCK $45.63 1T 5D 8L DUMP TRUCK&TRAILER $46.47 1T 5D 8L OTHER TRUCKS $46.47 1T 5D 8L TRANSIT MIXER $23.45 1 WELL DRILLERS&IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLERS IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLER $17.71 1 OILER $12.97 1 WELL DRILLER $18.00 1 11111 Page 10 1 wr BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECTIVE 03-03-2010 +rr OVERTIME CODES OVERTIME CALCULATIONS ARE BASED ON THE HOURLY RATE ACTUALLY PAID TO THE WORKER. ON PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS,THE HOURLY RATE MUST BE NOT LESS THAN THE PREVAILING RATE OF WAGE MINUS THE HOURLY RATE OF THE COST OF FRINGE BENEFITS ACTUALLY PROVIDED FOR THE WORKER. 1. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT(8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. A. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL ALSO BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. B. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. �1 C. THE FIRST TWO(2)HOURS AFTER EIGHT(8)REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST TEN(10) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL OTHER OVERTIME HOURS AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE r HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. D. THE FIRST TWO (2) HOURS BEFORE OR AFTER A FIVE - EIGHT(8) HOUR WORKWEEK DAY OR A FOUR- TEN(10) HOUR WORKWEEK DAY AND THE FIRST EIGHT(8) HOURS WORKED THE NEXT DAY AFTER EITHER WORKWEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL ADDITIONAL HOURS WORKED AND ALL WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. E. THE FIRST TWO(2)HOURS AFTER EIGHT(8) REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL OTHER HOURS WORKED MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY,AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. F. THE FIRST TWO(2)HOURS AFTER EIGHT(8)REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST TEN(10) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL OTHER OVERTIME HOURS WORKED,EXCEPT LABOR DAY,SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT THREE TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. G. THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS WORKED ON A FIFTH CALENDAR WEEKDAY IN A FOUR - TEN HOUR SCHEDULE, SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF TEN (10) HOURS PER DAY MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. H. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF WORK IS LOST DUE TO INCLEMENT WEATHER CONDITIONS OR EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY OVER TWELVE (12) HOURS AND ALL HOURS Illi WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. J. THE FIRST TWO(2)HOURS AFTER EIGHT(8)REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST TEN(10) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED OVER TEN (10) HOURS MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. K. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. L. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF TEN(10) HOURS PER DAY MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. do M. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF WORK IS LOST DUE TO INCLEMENT WEATHER CONDITIONS)SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. N. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS(EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS)SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE w HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. 0. THE FIRST TEN(10)HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS, HOLIDAYS AND AFTER TWELVE (12) HOURS, MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY,AND AFTER TEN(10)HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ow P. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF CIRCUMSTANCES WARRANT) AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. go rr BENEFIT CODE KEY-EFFECTIVE 03-03-2010 -2- 1. Q. THE FIRST TWO (2) HOURS AFTER EIGHT (8) REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND UP TO TEN(10) Ili HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF TEN(10) HOURS PER DAY MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS(EXCEPT CHRISTMAS DAY)SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON CHRISTMAS DAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. R. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. S. THE FIRST TWO(2)HOURS AFTER EIGHT(8)REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS AND ALL OTHER OVERTIME HOURS WORKED, EXCEPT LABOR DAY, SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT THREE TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. Ilii T. WORK PERFORMED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT(8)HOURS OF STRAIGHT TIME PER DAY,OR TEN(10)HOURS OF STRAIGHT TIME PER DAY WHEN FOUR TEN(10)HOUR SHIFTS ARE ESTABLISHED, OR FORTY(40) HOURS OF STRAIGHT TIME PER WEEK,MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY,OR OUTSIDE THE NORMAL SHIFT,AND ALL WORK ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TIME AND ONE-HALF THE STRAIGHT TIME RATE. HOURS WORKED OVER TWELVE HOURS (12) IN A SINGLE SHIFT AND ALL WORK PERFORMED AFTER 6:00 PM SATURDAY TO 6:00 AM MONDAY AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE STRAIGHT TIME RATE OF PAY. THE EMPLOYER SHALL HAVE THE SOLE DISCRETION TO ASSIGN OVERTIME WORK TO EMPLOYEES. PRIMARY CONSIDERATION FOR OVERTIME WORK SHALL BE GIVEN TO EMPLOYEES REGULARLY ASSIGNED TO THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED ON OVERTIME SITUATIONS. AFTER AN EMPLOYEE HAS WORKED EIGHT(8)HOURS AT AN APPLICABLE OVERTIME RATE,ALL ADDITIONAL HOURS SHALL BE AT THE APPLICABLE OVERTIME RATE UNTIL SUCH TIME AS THE EMPLOYEE HAS HAD A BREAK OF EIGHT(8) HOURS OR MORE. ow U. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS(EXCEPT LABOR DAY)SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT THREE TIMES THE HOURLYRATE OF WAGE. 11111 V. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS(EXCEPT THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. W. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS(EXCEPT MAKE-UP DAYS DUE TO CONDITIONS BEYOND THE CONTROL OF THE EMPLOYER)) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. X. THE FIRST FOUR (4) HOURS AFTER EIGHT (8) REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST TWELVE(12)HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED OVER TWELVE (12) HOURS MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. WHEN HOLIDAY FALLS ON SATURDAY OR SUNDAY, THE DAY BEFORE SATURDAY, FRIDAY, AND THE DAY AFTER SUNDAY, MONDAY, SHALL BE CONSIDERED THE go HOLIDAY AND ALL WORK PERFORMED SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. Y. ALL HOURS WORKED OUTSIDE THE HOURS OF 5:00 AM AND 5:00 PM(OR SUCH OTHER HOURS AS MAY BE AGREED UPON BY ANY EMPLOYER AND THE EMPLOYEE)AND ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER 40 DAY(10 HOURS PER DAY FOR A 4 X 10 WORKWEEK)AND ON SATURDAYS AND HOLIDAYS(EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.(EXCEPT FOR EMPLOYEES WHO ARE ABSENT FROM WORK WITHOUT PRIOR APROVAL ON A SCHEDULED WORKDAY DURING THE WORKWEEK SHALL BE PAID AT THE STRAIGHT-TIME RATE UNTIL THEY HAVE WORKED 8 HOURS IN A DAY(10 IN A 4 X 10 WORKWEEK) OR 40 HOURS DURING THAT WORKWEEK.)ALL HOURS WORKED MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY OVER TWELVE Ali (12) HOURS AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. Z ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY Intl RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID THE STRAIGHT TIME RATE OF PAY IN ADDITION TO HOLIDAY PAY. 2. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT(8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. A. THE FIRST SIX (6) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF SIX(6)HOURS ON SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. B. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ow C. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. BENEFIT CODE KEY-EFFECTIVE 03-03-2010 —3— D. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT STRAIGHT TIME IN ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT(8)HOURS ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. E. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS OR HOLIDAYS(EXCEPT LABOR DAY)SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS OR ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. F. THE FIRST EIGHT(8)HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT THE STRAIGHT HOURLY RATE OF WAGE IN ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT(8)HOURS ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. G. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON PAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE INCLUDING HOLIDAY PAY. H. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS ilYt WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. 2. I. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE- HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. J. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON PAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE, INCLUDING THE HOLIDAY PAY. ALL HOURS WORKED ON UNPAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. K. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE IN ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY. L. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (OR ON THE REGULAR DAY OFF DURING A WORKWEEK OTHER THAN MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY) AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE, EXCEPT LABOR DAY WHICH SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE. ALL HOURS WORKED MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY OVER TWELVE (12) HOURS AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. �r M. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS,SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. 0. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. P. THE FIRST EIGHT(8)HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT 8) HOURS ON SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ane Q. ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. R. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS AND ALL HOURS WORKED OVER SIXTY (60) IN ONE WEEK �a SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. S. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE, EXCEPT THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING,THE DAY AFTER CHRISTMAS AND A FLOATING HOLIDAY,WHICH SHALL BE PAID AT THE STRAIGHT TIME RATE IF WORKED,IN ADDITION TO HOLIDAY PAY. T. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF PAY, AND THIS RATE SHALL INCLUDE HOLIDAY PAY. U. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED OVER 12 HOURS IN A DAY, OR ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. V. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND ON MAKE-UP DAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. wr rlrl BENEFIT CODE KEY-EFFECTIVE 03-03-2010 -4- W. THE FIRST TWO(2) HOURS AFTER EIGHT(8) REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST EIGHT(8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL OTHER HOURS WORKED MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY,AND'ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ON A FOUR-DAY, TEN-HOUR WEEKLY SCHEDULE, EITHER MONDAY THRU THURSDAY OR TUESDAY THRU FRIDAY SCHEDULE, ALL HOURS WORKED AFTER TEN SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. THE FIRST EIGHT(8) HOURS WORKED ON THE FIFTH DAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL OTHER HOURS WORKED ON THE FIFTH, SIXTH, AND SEVENTH DAYS AND ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. X. ALL HOURS WORKED MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY BETWEEN THE HOURS OF 6:00 P.M.AND 6:00 A.M. AND ALL HOURS ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. VIII 4A. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT(8)HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY(40)HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS,SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. HOLIDAY CODES 5. A. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY,MEMORIAL DAY,INDEPENDENCE DAY,LABOR DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY,FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(7). B. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY,MEMORIAL DAY,INDEPENDENCE DAY,LABOR DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY,FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(8). IIII C. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(8). D. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AND SATURDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(8). E. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, PRESIDENTIAL ELECTION DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY,THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(8). VIII F. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MARTIN LUTHER KING JR, DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, VETERANS' DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(11). G. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE LAST WORK DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(7). H. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY AFTER at THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS(6). I. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY(6). e111 J. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,CHRISTMAS EVE DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(7). go K. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS,AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9) �rll L. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MARTIN LUTHER KING JR. DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY,FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(8). M. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MARTIN LUTHER KING JR. DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR 1111 DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY,FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS AND CHRISTMAS DAY(9). Illi N. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY,PRESIDENTS'DAY,MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY,LABOR DAY,VETERANS' DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY,THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(9). P. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY,MEMORIAL DAY,INDEPENDENCE DAY,LABOR DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY AND SATURDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9). IF A HOLIDAY FALLS ON SUNDAY,THE FOLLOWING MONDAY SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS A HOLIDAY. BENEFIT CODE KEY-EFFECTIVE 03-03-2010 -5- lkw Q. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY(6). R. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,ONE-HALF DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY.(7 1/2). rs 5. S. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY,PRESIDENTS'DAY,MEMORIAL DAY,INDEPENDENCE DAY,LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(7). T. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY,THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,CHRISTMAS DAY,AND THE DAY BEFORE OR AFTER CHRISTMAS(9). U. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MARTIN LUTHER KING JR. DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY,LABOR DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(8). V. PAID HOLIDAYS: SIX(6)PAID HOLIDAYS. YN W. PAID HOLIDAYS: NINE(9)PAID HOLIDAYS. X. HOLIDAYS: AFTER 520 HOURS-NEW YEAR'S DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY. AFTER 2080 HOURS - NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,CHRISTMAS DAY AND A FLOATING HOLIDAY(8). Y. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY,MEMORIAL DAY,INDEPENDENCE DAY,LABOR DAY,PRESIDENTIAL ELECTION DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,THE FRIDAY FOLLOWING THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(8). w► Z. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, VETERANS DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(8). 6. A. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, dw THANKSGIVING DAY,THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(8). B. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S EVE DAY, NEW YEAR'S DAY. MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR.DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,CHRISTMAS EVE'S DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(9). to C. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,THE LAST WORK DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(9). D. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,CHRISTMAS DAY,THE DAY BEFORE OR THE DAY AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY(9). E. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY,DAY BEFORE OR AFTER NEW YEAR'S DAY,PRESIDENTS DAY,MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY,LABOR DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY,DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,CHRISTMAS DAY,AND A HALF-DAY ON CHRISTMAS EVE DAY. (9 1/2). F. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MARTIN LUTHER KING JR. DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY,VETERANS'DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY(11). G. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MARTIN LUTHER KING JR. DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, VETERANS' DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY,AND CHRISTMAS EVE DAY(11). H. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY,NEW YEAR'S EVE DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,CHRISTMAS DAY,THE DAY AFTER CHRISTMAS,AND A FLOATING HOLIDAY(10). I. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY,MEMORIAL DAY,INDEPENDENCE DAY,LABOR DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY,FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(7). J. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY,MEMORIAL DAY,INDEPENDENCE DAY,LABOR DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, THE DAY AFTER CHRISTMAS, AND A FLOATING HOLIDAY(9). 1 L. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY,MEMORIAL DAY,INDEPENDENCE DAY,LABOR DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE LAST WORKING DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY.(8) Q. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY,MEMORIAL DAY,INDEPENDENCE DAY,LABOR DAY,VETERANS DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY(8). UNPAID HOLIDAY: PRESIDENTS'DAY. BENEFIT CODE KEY-EFFECTIVE 03-03-2010 -6- T. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,THE LAST WORKING DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(9). U. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, DAY BEFORE NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY,CHRISTMAS DAY(9). V. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY,INDEPENDENCE DAY,LABOR DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS EVE DAY,CHRISTMAS DAY, AND ONE DAY OF THE EMPLOYEE'S CHOICE(9). W. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, DAY BEFORE NEW YEAR'S DAY,PRESIDENTS DAY,MEMORIAL DAY, IIW INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY,DAY BEFORE OR AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY(10). X. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, DAY BEFORE OR AFTER NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,CHRISTMAS DAY,DAY BEFORE OR AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY,EMPLOYEE'S BIRTHDAY(11). Y. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS'DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, AND A FLOATING HOLIDAY(9). Z. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY,INDEPENDENCE DAY,LABOR DAY,THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY,AND CHRISTMAS DAY(7). IF A HOLIDAY FALLS ON SATURDAY,THE PRECEDING FRIDAY SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS THE HOLIDAY. IF A HOLIDAY FALLS ON SUNDAY, THE FOLLOWING MONDAY SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS THE HOLIDAY. NOTE CODES g. A. IN ADDITION TO THE HOURLY WAGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PREMIUMS APPLY TO DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET OR MORE: OVER 50'TO 100'-$2.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 50 FEET OVER 100'TO 150'-$3.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET OVER 150'TO 220'-$4.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 150 FEET OVER 220'-.$5.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 220 FEET C. IN ADDITION TO THE HOURLY WAGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PREMIUMS APPLY TO DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET OR MORE: OVER 50'TO 100'-$1.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 50 FEET OVER 100'TO 150'-$1.50 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET OVER 150'TO 200'-$2.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 150 FEET OVER 200'-DIVERS MAY NAME THEIR OWN PRICE D. WORKERS WORKING WITH SUPPLIED AIR ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE AN ADDITIONAL$1.00 PER HOUR. L. WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS-LEVEL A:$0.75,LEVEL B:$0.50,AND LEVEL C:$0.25. M. WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS: LEVELS A & B: $1.00, LEVELS C&D:$0.50. N. WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS-LEVEL A:$1.00,LEVEL B:50.75,LEVEL C:$0.50,AND LEVEL D:$0.25 P. WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS - CLASS A SUIT: $2.00, CLASS B SUIT:$1.50, CLASS C SUIT:$1.00,AND CLASS D SUIT$0.50. 11111 r epang a `•"`'nrand Industries STATEMENT OF INTENT TO Prevailing Wage ���,STer�°� (360)902-53" PAY PREVAILING WAGES to «nvw.lni.wa.gov/fl'radesLicensing/PrevailingWage s ,_ Public Works Contract $25.00.Filin Fee Re•uired • This form must be typed of printed in ink. Project Name Contract# Large,bold numbers match-instructions on back of form. • Please allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing. Contract Awarding Agency(public agency-not federal or private) • Once approved xour form will be ustdd online at the above website. garP OVED'F *• T Address Contractor,company or agency name,address,city,state&ZIP+4 City State ZIP+4 Awarding Agency Project Contact Person Phone# County where work was performed- City where work-was performed Bid due date (mm/dd/yy) Date contract awarded (mm/dd/yy)' Will all work be subcontracted? Do you intend to use subcontractors? ❑ Yes ❑ No ❑ Yes ❑ No Prime contractor(has contract with the public agency) Contractor Registration# Expected job start date(mm/dd/yy) Do you intend to use apprentices? INS ❑ Yes ❑ No Craft/trade/occupation(Do NOT list apprentices}.. Estimated no. Rate of Rate of hourly fringe Indicate number of.owners expected to perform work., of workers hourly paybenefits WN aw err trrlt aro Company name Indicate total dollar amount of your contract or time and materials if applicable. $ Address I hereby certify that the above information is correct and that All wrc workers I employ on this Public Works Project will be paid no less City State ZIP+4 than the Prevailing Wage Rate(s) as determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries Contractor Registration No. UBI Title Signature aw industrial Insurance Account Number 1r Email address Phone number -_ __— - For L&[Use CSnly . _- _--_ Check Number: ❑ $25 or $ For L&f Use Only Issued By: APPROVED: Department of Labor and Industries IWr By Industrial Statistician F700-029-.000 statement of intent to pay prevailing wages 12-04W After APPROVAL,send white copy to Awarding Agency. Canary copy-L&I tltl • Department of Labor and Industries Prevailing Wage aT�e AFFIDAVIT OF WAGES PAID �''� i (360)902-5335 Public Works Contract do http://www.Ini.wa.gov/TradesLicensing/PrevaiIingWage .p� „w°Y° $25.00 Filing Fee Required • This form must be typed or printed in ink. Project Name Contract x • Fill in all blanks or form will be returned for correction see back. as • Please allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing. Contract Awarding Agency(public agency-not federal or private) • Once approved, our form will be posted online at the website above. " pQT? 4 kB Address Contractor,company or agency name,address,city,state&ZIP+4 its City State ZIP+4 Awarding Agency Project Contact Person Phone M i� County where work was performed City where work was performed Bid due date(mm/dd/yy) Date contract awarded (mm/dd/yy) tail Date work completed (mm/dd/yy) Date Intent filed (mm/dd/yy) Was all work subcontracted? Did you intend to use subcontractors? Prime contractor(has contract with the public agency) Contractor Registration No. ❑ Yes ❑ No L3 Yes ❑ No Job start date(mm/dd/yy) Craft/trade/occupation and apprentices.(For apprentices,give name,registration#, Number Total M of hours Rate of Rate ofHouriy trade,dates of work on project,stage of progression,wage and fringe.) of Workers worked—ea.trade' Hourly Pay Fringe Benefits Indicate number of owners that performed work. ilm Aw ttltl rlr. oft Company name Indicate total dollar amount of your contract. Address I hereby certify that the above information is correct and that all OR workers I employed on this Public Works Project were paid no less City State ZIP+4 than the Prevailing Wage Rate(s) as determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries Ala Contractor Registration No. UBI Title Signature Industrial Insurance Account Number ilr Email address Phone number A '_ ti ;s' ,y' ' "�'•?• Check Number. ❑ $25 or $ .,iatsL.•;-%�..... /;.� .tom- t.,_ - �* r x. Issued By: APPROVED: Department of Labor and Industries By Industrial Statistician F700-007-000 affidavit of wages 10-06 After APPROVAL,send white copy to Awarding Agency. Canary copy—L&I arri . CERTIFICATION OF PAYMENT OF PREVAILING WAGES Date: .r. Project: Stonegate Lift Station Conveyance Improvements Contract No.: WWP-27-3473 This is to certify that the prevailing wages have been paid-to our employees and our subcontractors' employees for the period from through in accordance with the Intents to Pay Prevailing Wage filed with the Washington State Department of Labor&Industries. This form will be executed and submitted prior to or with the last pay request. rr Company Name rr By: Title: r �r srr +r. r FA00 15\000 18.001\DESIGN(28245)\Specs\Specs for Conveyance-12-2-2008\FinaM BIDSPEC-Stonegate.docx trw rri s„ * � a iZ°Y,+ *f�$`5' �` r Y z- > i'x•; t'' ,,' x 6 2 L"., ",€�` ,t,. 2 $.., �ryr x �`.. a� .., �; .s& 7 �; �:6.'§r ak t r3 � '� � r ".`�✓ x t S' 'jlMm � S a a ySiEx E .ra ;, Axl y ,� { *Z"m'C ?5 $ 3aF L '3 ` +l r' '� "c s''Y^u _ 'Y „,�, 5"� h p f{e. *u �, .:-£E •�. 4 1 y #` ; ,y� . x,'ds p .s F�'s 'r*.zYr .,r ,� F '.- ' ;;wC,,+ x „„4� .,,� g "`:sv .` .t '"`', '2°°.�*s,�' �,• ''z``'* r i c °.:i � r. Y .F �, s ..:ia, e. � `g„4sµ Ta*#--.r- +:..z "�";+s',r ,✓s` ,�,``" -• ,v' L�`�`r .u�" `rr"„�z-z ' S i"`-” '' f F x, ` s a { t 5-+`" ��i".ev`` n� ���, �x'$,.4'°3 s,'+'2 �a y2 q� k'�'� r� �'t-'�, 3s:�y$a sa&, .� ~fir" 4� �-•t' : r. Y 7 `�' c'�J�'v. w -'4" t ;8� tr �Kf�` d"� � :Re �,�,w r'µ �`"f�: �"' 'e"a=�.v' &a�,'�1 •k „�ld'.d��'. 3 `� s'�i g,^, �k � ,�:. ' rf.,.nyd. � P*e-� � '�><4�, �. r k'=t' Yx ,,a `��°" :�, ^sc'-,s� t s� s k ""�r"� �St� k r .r� �v, r•�- n s '�- �e.. S , t } k Y �2 «' au k.,l isx '6iV zl' + } _ "�w,�,b.r,,r^�"yxg. r^F,.=s z:, .g.- i,v ,,.. .. a't,�ag; `"°,4t.".,•' '`�3 � .: i �,ra a'w kr�,�z' �t ,:�� h+ #''r`e^'` `. a; zxr 'r s _- � r= ,. M .F✓ *Ag , � :a-{ z.rg •„ +-,�.4t"+ N„.* '?�.t2 ' Z- 3, �* r `fr „� ' - „'*r4;e 4 r• j^��,f a::rur WaY � �> ,`°5�Nxf x,,��Fv`'�' - 4-��a�3t€'^, �r 5> 5�” ''� .. ,'�N; W Ef ^; a �x ' r �.�' 't ,�`.` `x ,x `U, ��€; , �' .�,� + ah`�, � ^� t �r�. �t a• `as': � r3 e�, A,5,- ,;_ �,. �` t�,��°"o� ,: s.: ,t �#" ,;i•,sem y 'T.�'=ar '+M:: �' „s.,z.�r r' �.;3� r T'"�i�� *�?� '�"�t2�' r r. ,rtea5x '�, :a *m r *?� 1'€1� `3�" "�! =z¢.i Lt .*;=�5 s. y s' s*'.-.,i' ',g .5xYs` �' 'F.*,•.x{ J n, +t �="" y »{ .'xat`',.i •,h Y'r s rc ',st xh =' � 'e` ¢ `s i '�fi� s t Y'4 - a 5 4 MIT y`' '' U2, �.3r. ria m rs- t ust"' e 6,4 i,71.,-.x. 70", F ,� c'7 `` v .'" M '" 21 h, iv.s#�" '' °+`� -s � ,4t'a� ?z ��`�`*�-`,•,'�q 3`3 .m:+.`.�'� � 3r,�4'.x .,}k �+�'*,`� '� a � � Y �£?�det-�x"�'x '`�, 'x ✓n 1„ � , �'�' _ ��"� r w„ �� �:,m�,�:"�"u. ac�'.'..- ��,`� >«• '. °,°. �`r'c� „.z.�+.. �'z'�*�Y d�� : ,r, � F.: - x x- a. INTRODUCTION TO SPECIAL PROVISIONS STONEGATE LIFT STATION REPLACEMENT r The specifications for this Contract include Divisions in two different fonnats: Divisions 1-9 which contain the City of Renton Special Provisions to the 2008 WSDOT Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Constructions and Division 10 of the Special Provisions which is written in CSI format. Section 10.00000 contains an introduction to the numbering used within Division 10. Though in a different format, Division 10 may use materials and/or construction methods from Divisions 1-9. The General Requirements for the entire Contract are provided in Division 1 of the City of Renton Special Provisions. The Work to be performed within Divisions 1-9 of the Special Provisions shall generally include, but not be limited to the following: • Mobilization; • Sanitary sewer gravity main, force main, and manhole outside of the wet well, overflow storage vault and valve vault structures area(see below); r� • Sanitary sewer gravity main to connect the abandoned Summerwind lift station to the existing manhole; • Storm water pipe, catch basins, oil/water separator, and dispersion system; • Water service from the main to the backside of the meter; • Asphalt grinding and paving, including overlay; • Cement concrete sidewalk and driveway entrance; • Landscaping, fencing, and keystone block wall; • Traffic Control, Mobilization, Property Restoration, and Construction Surveying; • Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control Facilities; • All dewatering, excavation, shoring, import backfill materials, and haul as required to perform the work listed within Divisions 1-9. rr The Work to be performed within Division 10 shall be paid by Lump Sum bid items and shall generally include, but not be limited to the following: err • Constructing the wet well manhole, precast overflow storage vault and the precast valve vault, control building and screening wall, including coating the structures; • Site clearing and grading; • All plumbing including water service from the meter through the Control Building, irrigation, down spouts and footing drains; ar • All electrical and mechanical work to install the generator set, pumps, motors, drives, control system, instrumentation, alarms, telemetry system, lighting, and power to the facility, including testing and startup; • All force main and gravity sewer main installed between the wet well, overflow storage vault and valve vault, including piping between the lift station and valve vault will be incidental to the lump sum bid items, however, the materials and installation requirements shall be pursuant to Divisions 1-9 unless otherwise noted; • Abandoning the existing Stonegate and Summerwind lift stations; �w r.. • All dewatering, excavation, shoring, import backfill materials, and haul as required to perform the work listed within Division 10. .�r w w rSPECIAL PROVISIONS.............................................................................................................11 1-01 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS........................................................................................12 rr, 1-01.1 General.......................................................................................................................12 1-01.3 Definitions..................................................................................................................12 rr 1-02 BID PROCEDURES AND CONDITIONS....................................................................14 1-02.6 Preparation of Proposal............................................................................................. 14 1-02.6(1) Proprietary Information.................................................................................14 1-02.12 Public Opening of Proposals....................................................................................14 1-03 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT............................................................14 +rrr 1-03.1 Consideration of bids.................................................................................................. 14 1-03.2 Award of Contract....................................................................................................... 15 to 1-03.3 Execution of Contract........:........................................................................................ 15 1-04 SCOPE OF WORK.........................................................................................................15 aw 1-04.2 Coordination of Contract Documents, Plans, Special Provisions Specifications, and Addenda...................................................................................................................... 15 1-04.3 Contractor-Discovered Discrepancies........................................................................16 aw 1-04.4 Changes...................................................................................................................... 16 1-04.8 Progress Estimates and Payments.............................................................................. 16 aw 1-04.11 Final Cleanup ...................................................... 16 1-05 CONTROL OF WORK...................................................................................................17 aw 1-05.4 Conformity With and Deviation from Plans and Stakes..............................................17 1-05.4(3) Contractor Supplied Surveying..................................................................... 18 1-05.4(4) Contractor..................................................................................................... 19 1-05.7 Removal of Defective and Unauthorized Work........................................................... 19 1-05.8 Guarantees.................................................................................................................. 19 err1-05.11 Final Inspection.........................................................................................................20 1-05.11(1) Substantial Completion Date........................................................................20 1-05.11(2) Final Inspection Date..................................................................................21 ..� 1-05.11(3) Operational Testing.....................................................................................21 1-05.12 Final Acceptance.......................................................................................................21 1-05.14 Cooperation with Other Contractors.........................................................................21 1-05.18 Contractor's Daily Diary...........................................................................................22 1-06 CONTROL OF MATERIAL..........................................................................................23 1-06.1 Approval of Materials.................................................................................................23 1-06.2(1) Samples and Tests for Acceptance................................................................23 1-06.2(2) Statistical Evaluation of Materials for Acceptance.......................................25 1-07 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES TO THE PUBLIC .....................25 wr 1 ww 1-07.1 Laws to be Observed...................................................................................................25 1-07.6 Permits and Licenses..................................................................................................26 1-07.9(5) Required Documents.....................................................................................26 1-07.11(11) City of Renton Affidavit of Compliance...................................................26 1-07.12 Federal Agency Inspection.......................................................................................26 1-07.13(l) General........................................................................................................27 rrr 1-07.15 Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion Control...................................................27 1-07.16(1) Private/Public Property...............................................................................27 1-07.17 Utilities and Similar Facilities..................................................................................28 do 1-07.17(1) Interruption of Services...............................................................................30 1-07.18 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance....................................................30 1-07.18(1) General................................ ...30 'rr ..................................................................... 1-07.18(2) Coverages....................................................................................................30 1-07.18(3) Limits..........................................................................................................32 1-07.18(4) Evidence of Insurance:................................................................................33 1-07.22 Use of Explosives......................................................................................................33 1-07.23(1) Construction Under Traffic.........................................................................33 1-07.24 Rights of Way............................................................................................................34 1-08 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS..............................................................................35 1-08.0 Preliminary Matters....................................................................................................35 1-08.0(1) Preconstruction Conference..........................................................................35 1-08.1 Subcontracting............................................................................................................36 „o 1-08.1(2) Hours of Work...............................................................................................36 1-08.1(3) Reimbursement for Overtime Work of Contracting Agency Employees.....37 1-08.2 Assignment..................................................................................................................37 go 1-08.3 Progress Schedule.......................................................................................................37 1-08.4 Notice to Proceed and Prosecution of the Work.........................................................38 go 1-08.5 Time For Completion..................................................................................................39 1-08.6 Suspension of Work.....................................................................................................40 No 1-08.9 Liquidated Damages...................................................................................................40 1-08.11 Contractor's Plant and Equipment...........................................................................40 1-08.12 Attention to Work......................................................................................................41 1-09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .............................................................................41 1-09.1 Measurement of Quantities.........................................................................................41 1-09.3 Scope of Payment........................................................................................................42 1-09.7 Mobilization................:...............................................................................................43 'rr 1-09.9 Payments ....................................................................................................................43 1-09.9(1) Retainage....................................................................................................43 1-09.9(2) Contracting Agency's Right to Withhold and Disburse Certain Amounts.44 1-09.9(3) Final Payment............................................................................................45 2 wo to1-09.11(2) Claims........................................................................................................46 1-09.11(3) Time Limitations and Jurisdiction..............................................................46 1-09.13(3)B Procedures to Pursue Arbitration ...............................................................46 1-09.14 Payment Schedule.......................................................................................................46 1-09.14(A) Scope..........................................................................................................47 1-09.14(B) Mobilization(Not to Exceed 8% of Contract Total) (Bid Item 001) .........47 ++� 1-09.14(C) Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasures(SPCC) Plan (Bid Item 002)............................................................................................47 1-09.14(D) Traffic Control (Bid Item 003)...................................................................47 1-09.14(E) Construction Surveying and As-builts(Bid Item 004)...............................47 1-09.14(F) Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material, Including Haul (Bid Item 005)...................................................................................48 .r� 1-09.14(G) Gravel Borrow, Including Haul (As Required)(Bid Item 006) ..................48 1-09.14(H) Washed Rock, Including Haul for Infiltration Trench(Bid Item 007).......48 1-09.14(I) Trench Shoring or Extra Excavation Class A and B (Bid Item 008)..........49 1-09.14(J) Crushed Surfacing Top Course(As Required) (Bid Item 009)..................49 1-09.14(x) Crushed Surfacing Base Course (Bid Item 010)........................................49 1-09.14(L) HMA Class 1/2"PG 64-22 (Bid Item 011)..................................................49 1-09.14(M) Furnish and Install 6-Inch Diam. PVC. Storm Sewer Pipe (Bid Item 0 12)50 1-09.14(N) Furnish and Install 8-Inch Diam. PVC. Storm Sewer Pipe (Bid Item 0 13)51 1-09.14(0) Furnish and Install 12-Inch Diam. PVC. Storm Sewer Pipe (Bid Item 014).........................................................................................51 ar 1-09.14(P) Furnish and Install Catch Basin Type 1P(Bid Item 015)...........................51 1-09.14(Q) Furnish and Install Catch Basin Type 1 with Birdcage(Bid Item 016) .,...51 1-09.14(R) Furnish and Install Oil/Water Separator(Bid Item 017)............................52 1-09.14(5) Furnish and Install 48-Inch Diam. Sanitary Sewer Manhole Type 1 (Bid Item 018) .............................................................................................52 1-09.14(T) Lift Station Coatings (Bid Item 019)..........................................................52 1-09.14(U) 1-Inch Water Service Connection (Bid Item 020)......................................52 �r 1-09.14(V) Furnish and Install 8-Inch Diam. PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe (Bid Item 02 1)............................................................................................53 1-09.14(W) Furnish and Install 12-Inch Diam. PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe rrr (Bid Item 022)............................................................................................53 1-09.14(X) Furnish and Install 12-Inch Diam. PVC C900 Gravity Sewer Pipe (Bid Item023)....................................................................................................53 1-09.14(Y) Television Inspection(Bid Item 024).........................................................53 1-09.14(Z) 54Furnish and Install 8-Inch Diam. PVC C900 Sewer Force Main...........54 (Bid Item 025)............................................................................................54 . 1-09.14(AA) Temporary Erosion/Sedimentation Controls (Bid Item 026).....................54 1-09.14(BB) Landscaping(Bid Item 027) ......................................................................54 1-09.14(CC) Topsoil Type C (Bid Item 028) ..................................................................54 1-09.14(DD) Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter(Bid Item 029)....................................55 1-09.14(EE) Cement Concrete Driveway Entrance(Bid Item 030)...............................55 1-09.14(FF) Chain Link Fence(Bid Item 03 1) ..............................................................55 1-09.14(GG) Chain Link Gate(Bid Item 032)................................................................55 1-09.14(HH) Cement Concrete Sidewalk (Bid Item 033)...............................................55 1-09.14(I1) Quarry Spalls(As Required) (Bid Item 034).............................................55 1-09.14(JJ) Pavement Marking(Bid Item 035) ............................................................56 1-09.14(KK) Gravity Block Wall (Bid Item 036)........................................... . 1-09.14(LL) Bollard(Bid Item 037)...............................................................................56 .r 3 ow 1-09.14(MM)Site Clearing and Grading(Bid Item 038)..................................................56 1-09.14(NN) Lift Station Excavation and Backfill (Bid Item 039).................................56 1-09.14(00) Lift Station Shoring and Trench Safety Systems (Bid Item 040)...............57 1-09.14(PP) Dewatering System(Bid Item 04 1)............................................................58 1-09.14(QQ) 144-Inch Diam. Precast Concrete Wet Well (Bid Item 042)......................59 1-09.14(RR) Precast Concrete Overflow Storage Vault(Bid Item 043).........................59 1-09.14(SS) Precast Concrete Flow Meter and Valve Vault(Bid Item 044)..................60 g 1-09.14(TT) CMU Control Building with Screening Wall(Bid Item 045) ....................60 1-09.14(UU) Lift Station Piping (Bid Item 046).............................................................61 1-09.14(VV) Lift Station Accessories (Bid Item 047).....................................................62 1-09.14(WW)Control Building Plumbing, Including Roof Drains (Bid Item 048) ........62 1-09.14(XX) Mechanical Work(Bid Item 049)...............................................................63 1-09.14(YY) Submersible Sewage Pumps and Motors (Bid Item 050) ..........................63 1-09.14(ZZ) Electrical Work (Bid Item 051) ...........63i ....................................................... 1-09.14(AAA)Instrument,Alarm,Telemetry, and Control Work(Bid Item 052).............64 1-09:14(BBB)Standby Generator Set(Bid Item 053).......................................................64 1-09.14(CCC)Testing and Startup Services (Bid Item 054) .............................................65 w 1-09.14(DDD)Imported Backfill Material (Bid Item 055)...............................................65 1-09.14(EEE)Existing Stonegate Lift Station Abandonment(Bid Item 056) ..................66 1-09.14(FFF) Existing Summerwind Lift Station Abandonment(Bid Item 057).............66 1-10 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL..........................................................................67 1-10.1 General ....................................................................................................................67 1-10.2(1)B Traffic Control Supervisor..........................................................................68 1-10.2(2) Traffic Control Plans.....................................................................................69 1-10.3 Flagging, Signs, and All Other Traffic Control Devices.............................................69 1-10.3(3) Construction Signs........................................................................................69 1-10.4 Measurement...............................................................................................................69 1-10.5 Payment 1-11 RENTON SURVEYING STANDARDS..........................................................................70 1-11.1(1)Responsibility for Surveys.................................................................................70 "r 1-11.1(2)Survey Datum and Precision..............................................................................70 1-11.1(3)Subdivision Information.....................................................................................71 1-11.1(4)Field Notes.........................................................................................................71 sur 1-11.1(5)Comers and Monuments....................................................................................71 1-11.1(6)Control or Base Line Survey..............................................................................72 1-11.1(7)Precision Levels.................................................................................................72 „, 1-11.1(8)Radial and Station -- Offset Topography............................................................73 1-11.1(9)Radial Topography.............................................................................................73 1-11.1(10)Station--Offset Topography..............................................................................73 rrr 1-11.1(11)As-Built Survey................................................................................................73 1-11.1(12)Monument Setting and Referencing.................................................................73 1-11.2 Materials .................................................................................................................... 74 err 1-I1.2(1)Property/Lot Corners..........................................................................................74 1-11.2(2)Monuments.........................................................................................................74 1-I1.2(3)Monument Case and Cover................................................................................74 .r 1-11.3 Measurement............................................................................................................... 74 4 ri w to1-11.4 Payment .................................................................................................................... 74 2-01 CLEARING, GRUBBING,AND ROADSIDE CLEANUP...........................................75 ro2-01.1 Description.................................................................................................................. 75 2-01.2 Disposal of Usable Material and Debris..................................................................... 75 rr2-01.4 Measurement................................................................................................................ 75 2-01.5 Payment....................................................................................................................... 75 2-02 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURE AND OBSTRUCTIONS..............................................75 no 2-02.3(3) Removal of Pavement, Sidewalks, and Curbs ...............................................75 2-02.5 Payment....................................................................................................................... 76 2-03 ROADWAY EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT ........................76 . ............................ 2-03.2 Materials.................................................................................................................. 76 wr 2-03.3 Construction Requirements.......................................................................................... 76 2-03.4 Measurement................................................................................................................ 77 00 2-03.5 Payment....................................................................................................................... 77 2-04 HAUL.................................................................................................................................78 2-04.5 Payment....................................................................................................................... 78 2-06 SUBGRADE PREPARATION ........................................................................................78 to 2-06.5 Measurement and Payment..........................................................:.............................. 78. 2-09 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION.........................................................................................78 2-09.1 Description.................................................................................................................. 78 *a 2-09.3(1)D Disposal of Excavated Material..................................................................79 2-09.4 Measurement................................................................................................................ 79 to2-09.5 Payment....................................................................................................................... 79 5-04 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT.........:.................................................................80 No5-04.2 Materials....................................................................................................................80 5-04.3 Construction Requirements...........................................................................................80 5-04.3(5) Conditioning the Existing Surface...................................................................80 so 5-04.3(5)A Preparation of Existing Surface.....................................................................80 5-04.3(7)A Mix Design....................................................................................................81 5-04.3(8)A Acceptance Sampling and Testing-HMA Mixture......................................81 5-04.3(10)B Control.........................................................................................................81 5-04.5(1)A Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA ........................................................81 5-04.5(1)A Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA Compaction.....................................82 rr�r 6-12.3 Construction Requirements.........................................................................................87 6-12.3(1) Rockery Backfill............................................................................................87 6-12.3(2) Drain Pipe......................................................................................................87 r 6-12.3(3) Rejection Of Material ....................................................................:...............87 6-12.4 Measurement................................................................................................................87 im 5 be 6-12.5 Payment.......................................................................................................................87 +rri 7-01 DRAINS.............................................................................................................................87 7-01.2 Materials......................................................................................................................87 7-01.3 Construction Requirements..........................................................................................87 7-01.4 Measurement................................................................................................................87 7-02 CULVERTS.......................................................................................................................88 7-02.2 Materials......................................................................................................................88 7-04 STORM SEWERS............................................................................................................88 7-04.2 Materials......................................................................................................................88 7-04.4 Measurement................................................................................................................88 7-04.5 Payment.......................................................................................................................89 7-05 MANHOLES,INLETS,AND CATCH BASINS89 ........................................................... 7-05.2 Materials...................................................................................................................89 7-05.3 Construction Requirements..........................................................................................89 +rr� 7-05.3(1) Adjusting Manholes and Catch Basins to Grade............................................90 7-05.3(2) Abandon Existing Manholes..........................................................................91 7-05.3(3) Connections to Existing Manholes ................................................................91 7-05.3(5) Facility Coatings............................................................................................91 7-05.4 Measurement................................................................................................................91 7-05.5 Payment.......................................................................................................................92 7-08 GENERAL PIPE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS..............................................92 7-08.3(1)C Bedding the Pipe.........................................................................................92 +w 7-08.3(2)A Survey Line and Grade................................................................................92 7-08.3(2)B Pipe Laying—General.................................................................................92 7-08.3(2)E Rubber Gasketed Joints...............................................................................93 7-08.3(2)H Sewer Line Connections .............................................................................93 7-08.3(2)J Placing PVC Pipe.........................................................................................94 7-08.4 Measurement................ ..........94 ...................................................................................... 7-08.5 Payment.......................................................................................................................94 7-12 VALVES FOR WATER MAINS......................................................................................94 7-12.3(1) Installation of Valve Marker Post...................................................................94 7-12.3(2) Adjust Existing Valve Box to Grade..............................................................94 7-12.4 Measurement................................................................................................................95 7-12.5 Payment.......................................................................................................................95 7-15 SERVICE CONECTIONS...............................................................................................95 7-15.3 Construction Details....................................................................................................95 rr► 7-15.5 Payment.......................................................................................................................95 7-17 SANITARY SEWERS......................................................................................................96 go 6 r7-17.2 Materials......................................................................................................................96 7-17.3(1) Protection of Existing Sewerage Facilities ................................................96 7-17.3(2)H Television Inspection .................................................................................96 7-17.4 Measurement........:..................................................................... ...........96 ....................... 7-17.5 Payment.......................................................................................................................96 war 7-20 HEAT SHRINKABLE MANHOLE WRAP ..................................................................97 7-20.1 Description.........................................................................................................97 7-20.2 Materials............................................................................................................97 �r 7-20.3 Construction Requirements..........................................................................................97 7-20.4 Measurement................................................................................................................97 war 7-20.5 Payment.......................................................................................................................97 7-21 SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAIN..............................................................................98 wr 7-21.1 Description.................................................................................................................98 7-21.2 Materials.....................................................................................................................98 wr 7-21.3 Construction Requirements..........................................................................................98 7-21.4 Measurement................................................................................................................98 w7-21.5 Payment.......................................................................................................................98 8-02 ROADSIDE RESTORATION........................................................................................99 wo8-02.1 Description.................................................................................................................99 8-02.2 Materials....................................................................................................................99 8-02.3(1) Responsibility During Construction...........................................................99 8-02.3(2)B Weed Control .............................................................................................99 8-02.3(5) Planting Area Preparation ..........................................................................99 8-02.3(8) Planting.................................................................................................... 100 8-02.3(9) Pruning, Staking, Guying and Wrapping................................................. 100 8-02.3(11) Bark or Wood Chip Mulch....................................................................... 100 8-02.3(13) Plant Establishment.................................................................................. 100 8-02.4 Measurement............................................................................................................ 101 8-02.5 Payment.................................................................................................................... 101 rr 8-09 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS...............................................................................102 8-09.5 Payment..................................................................................................................... 102 8-13 MONUMENT CASES....................................................................................................102 8-13.1 Description................................................................................................................102 8-13.3 Construction Requirements:....................................................................................... 102 Yr 8-13.4 Measurement............................................................................................................. 102 8-13.5 Payment.................................................................................................................... 102 so 8-14 CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALKS .......103 ................................................................. 8-14.3(4) Curing........................................................................................................... 103 4 7 to 8-14.4 Measurement..............................................................................................................103 8-14.5 Payment..................................................................................................................... 103 8-17 IMPACT ATTENUATOR SYSTEMS ..........................................................................103 8-17.5 Payment..................................................................................................................... 103 8-20 ILLUMINATION, TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS,AND ELECTRICAL..............103 8-20.2(1) Equipment List and Drawings...................................................................... 103 8-20.3(2) Excavating and Backfilling..........................................................................104 8-22 PAVEMENT MARKING107 ............................................................................................... 8-22.1 Description................................................................................................................ 107 8-22.3(5) Installation Instructions...........................................................................108 8-22.4 Measurement................................................................................ ...........................108 8-22.5 Payment..................................................................................................................... 109 of 8-23 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS..................................................................109 8-23.5 Payment.....................................................................................................................109 9-03.8(2) HMA Test Requirements.......................................................................... 109 9-03.8(7) HMA Tolerances and Adjustments........................................................... 109 9-05 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, CULVERTS,AND CONDUITS.................................110 9-05.7(2)A Basis for Acceptance(RC)....................................................................... 110 9-05.12(3) CPEP Sewer Pipe..................................................................................... 110 9-05.12(4) Sanitary Sewer Force Main...................................................................... 110 9-05.14 ABS Composite Sewer Pipe..........................................................................I.......... 110 9-14 EROSION CONTROL AND ROADSIDE PLANTING............................................. 111 +rr 9-14.3(1) Fertilizer................................................................................................... 111 9-14.4(3) Bark or Wood Chips................................................................................. 111 9-14.4(8) Compost................................................................................................... 111 9-14.6(2) Quality...................................................................................................... 112 9-14.6(7) Temporary Storage..................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. 9-15 IRRIGATION SYSTEM.....................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. r ► 9-15.4 Sprinkler Heads........................................................... Error!Bookmark not defined. 9-15.5 Valve Boxes and Protective Sleeves............................. Error!Bookmark not defined. 9-15.7(1) Manual Control Valves............................... Error! Bookmark not defined. 9-15.7(2) Automatic Control Valves.......................... Error.! Bookmark not defined. 9-15.8 Quick Coupling Equipment.......................................... Error!Bookmark not defined 9-15.17 Electrical Wires and Splices.................................................................................... 112 9-15.20 General.................................................................................................................... 112 9-23 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS AND ADMIXTURES....................................112 9-23.9 Fly Ash (RC).............................................................................................................. 112 9-30 WATER DISTRIBUTION MATERIALS.....................................................................112 8 9-30.1(1) Ductile Iron Pipe(RC)................................................................................. 112 9-30.3(1) Gate Valves (3 inches to 12 inches) ............................................................. 112 9-30.3(5) Valve Marker Posts...................................................................................... 113 rr. 9-30.5 Hydrants.................................................................................................................... 113 9-30.5(1) End Connections (RC)................................................................................. 113 9-30.6(4) Service Fittings............................................................................................ 113 i„ 9-30.6(5) Meter Setters................................................................................................ 113 SECTION 10.0: INTRODUCTION ar 10.00000 Introduction SECTION 10.01: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS rw 10.01190 Seismic Requirements 10.01660 Testing, Startup, and Operation 10.01730 Operation and Maintenance Information to SECTION 10.02: SITE WORK 10.02050 Demolition and Salvage 10.02230 Site Clearing Or 10.02240 Dewatering 10.02250 Shoring 10.02310 Grading r. 10.02320 Structural Excavation and Backfill 10.02605 Precast Manholes and Vaults SECTION 10.03: CONCRETE 10.03200 Reinforcing Steel 10.03300 Cast in Place Concrete 10.03350 Concrete Finishes (Structural) SECTION 10.04: MASONRY 10.04050 Basic Masonry Materials and Methods 10.04220 Concrete Unit Masonry SECTION 10.05: METALS ++ +� 10.05090 Structural Metal Fasteners 10.05100 Structural Metal Framing 10.05500 Metal Fabrications (Miscellaneous Metal) +rr 10.05726 Architectural Metal Work (Stainless Steel) SECTION 10.06: WOOD AND PLASTICS 10.06100 Rough Carpentry 10.06178 Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses 10.06600 Fiberglass Fabrications err SECTION 10.07: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 10.07190 Water Repellent Sealer 10.07200 Insulation am 10.07410 Metal Roofing 10.07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal aw 9 as ii 10.07900 Joint Sealants SECTION 10.08: DOORS AND.WINDOWS 10.08110 Steel Door and Frames 10.08305 Access Doors 10.08700 Finish Hardware 4W SECTION 10.09: FINISHES 10.09250 Gypsum Wallboard 10.09900 Painting SECTION 10.10: SPECIALTIES 10.10050 Building Specialties 10.10200 Louvers 10.10400 Identifying Devices SECTION 10.11: EQUIPMENT 10.11002 Electric Motor Drives 10.11300 Submersible Sewage Pumps 10.11349 Sump Pump SECTION 10.15: MECHANICAL 10.15070 Pipe, Fittings and Pressure Gauges 10.15400 Plumbing 10.15800 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning SECTION 10.16: ELECTRICAL 10.16010 General Electrical Requirements 10.16110 Conduit, Raceways and Fittings 10.16120 Low Voltage Wire and Cable 10.16124 Signal Cable 10.16130 Boxes 10.16140 Wiring Devices 10.16160 Panelboards 10.16180 Protective Devices and Switches 10.16205 Standby Diesel Engine-Generator Set .s 10.16250 Automatic Transfer Switch 10.16402 Underground Electrical Work 10.16450 Electrical Grounding No 10.16460 Dry Type Transformers 10.16500 Lighting 10.16920 Motor Control Center 10.16955 Control Devices SECTION 10.17: INSTRUMENTATION 10.17010 Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements 10.17120 Flow Measurement 10.17140 Level Measurement 10 �w wr SPECIAL PROVISIONS wo a 11 +trw 1-01 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS rr 1-01.1 General Section 1-01.1 is supplemented with: (******) Whenever reference is made to the State, Commission, Department of Transportation, Secretary of Transportation, Owner, Contracting Agency or Engineer, such reference shall be deemed to mean the City of Renton acting through its City Council, employees, and duly authorized representatives for all contracts administered by the City of Renton. 1-01.3 Definitions Section 1-01.3 is revised and supplemented by the following: Act of gods "Act of God" means an earthquake, flood, cyclone, or other cataclysmic phenomenon of nature. A rain,windstorm, high water or other natural phenomenon of unusual intensity for the specific locality of the work,which might reasonably have been anticipated from historical records of the general locality of the work, shall not be construed as an act of god. Consulting Engineer The Contracting Agency's design consultant,who may or may not administer the construction as program for the Contracting Agency. Contract Price Either the unit price, the unit prices, or lump sum price or prices named in the proposal, or in properly executed change orders. Dates do Bid Opening Date: The date on which the Contracting Agency publicly opens and reads bids. rl Award Date: The date of the formal decision of the Contracting Agency to accept the lowest responsible and responsive Bidder for the work. Contract Execution Date: The date the Contracting Agency officially binds the agency to the Contract. Notice to Proceed Date: The date stated in the Notice to Proceed on which the Contract time begins. at Contract Completion Date: The date by which the work is contractually required to be completed. Final Acceptance Date: The date the Contracting Agency accepts the work as complete per the contract requirements. Day Unless otherwise designated, day(s) as used in the Contract Documents, shall be understood to mean working days. 12 �r+r Engineer The City Engineer or duly authorized representative, or an authorized member of a licensed consulting firm retained by Owner for the construction engineering of a specific public works project. rir Inspector Owner's authorized representative assigned to make necessary observations of the work performed or being performed, or of materials furnished or being furnished by Contractor. w� Or Equal Where the term "or equal" is used herein, the Contracting Agency, or the Contracting Agency on recommendation of the engineer, shall be the sole judge of the quality and suitability of the proposed substitution. w� The responsibility and cost of furnishing necessary evidence, demonstrations, or other information required to obtain the approval of alternative materials or processes by the Owner shall be entirely borne by the Contractor. Owner The City of Renton or its authorized representative also referred to as Contracting Agency. 1W Performance and Payment Bond Same as "Contract Bond"defined in the Standard Specifications. Plans Im The contract plans and/or standard plans which show location, character, and dimensions of prescribed work including layouts,profiles, cross-sections, and other details. Drawings may either be bound in the same book as the balance of the Contract Documents or bound in separate sets, and are a wo part of the Contract Documents,regardless of the method of binding. The terms "Standard Drawings" or"Standard Details" generally used in specifications refers to drawings bound either with the specification documents or included with the Plans or the City of Renton Standard Plans. to Points Wherever reference is made to Engineer's points, this shall mean all marks,bench marks, reference points, stakes, hubs, tack, etc., established by Engineer for maintaining horizontal and vertical control of the work. Provide Means "furnish and install"as specified and shown in the Plans. Secretary, Secretary of Transportation The chief executive officer of the Department and other authorized representatives. The chief executive officer to the Department shall also refer to the Department of Planning/Building/Public Works Administrator. r Shop Drawings Same as "Working Drawings" defined in the Standard Specifications. Special Provisions Modifications to the standard specifications and supplemental specifications that apply to an individual.project. The special provisions may describe work the specifications do not cover. Such work shall comply first with the special provisions and then with any specifications that apply. The Contractor shall include all costs of doing this work within the bid prices. wr 13 rw State The state of Washington acting through its representatives. The State shall also refer to The City of Renton and its authorized representatives where applicable. Supplemental Drawings and Instructions Additional instructions by Engineer at request of Contractor by means of drawings or documents necessary, in the opinion of Engineer, for the proper execution of the work. Such drawings and instructions are consistent with the Contract Documents. Utility Public or private fixed improvement for the transportation of fluids, gases,power, signals, or communications and shall be understood to include tracks, overhead and underground wires, cables, pipelines, conduits, ducts, sewers, or storm drains. 1-02 BID PROCEDURES AND CONDITIONS 1-02.6 Preparation of Proposal The third paragraph is revised as follows: All prices shall be in legible figures and words written in ink or typed. The proposal shall include: 1. A unit price for each item (omitting digits more than four places to the right of the decimal point), each unit price shall also be written in words; where a conflict arises the written words shall prevail. 1-02.6(1) is a new section. , 1-02.6(1) Proprietary Information Vendors should, in the bid proposal, identify clearly any material(s) which constitute "(valuable) formula, designs drawings, and research data" so as to be exempt from public disclosure, RCW 42.17.310, or any materials otherwise claimed to be exempt, along with a Statement of the basis for such claim of exemption. The Department(or State)will give notice to the vendor of any request for disclosure of such information received within 5 (five)years from the date of submission. Failure to so label such materials or failure to timely respond after notice of request for public disclosure has been given shall be deemed a waiver by the submitting vendor of any claim that such materials are, in fact, so exempt. 1-02.12 Public Opening of Proposals Section 1-02.12 is supplemented with the following: The Contracting Agency reserves the right to postpone the date and time for bid opening. Notification to bidder will be by addenda. 1-03 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT 1-03.1 Consideration of bids Section 1-03.1 is supplemented with the following: 14 W All bids will be based on total sum of all schedules of prices. No partial bids will be accepted unless so stated in the call for bids or special provisions. The City reserves the right however to award all or any schedule of a bid to the lowest bidder at its discretion. rr 1-03.2 Award of Contract Section 1-03.2 is supplemented with the following: The contract, bond form, and all other forms requiring execution, together with a list of all other forms or documents required to be submitted by the successful bidder, will be forwarded to the successful bidder within 10 days of the award. The number of copies to be executed by the Contractor shall be determined by the Contracting Agency. 1-03.3 Execution of Contract rr Section 1-03.3 is revised and supplemented as follows: Within 10 calendar days after receipt from the City of the forms and documents required to be completed by the Contractor, the successful bidder shall return the signed Contracting Agency- prepared contract, an insurance certification as required by Section 1-07.18, and a satisfactory bond as required by law and Section 1-03.4. Before execution of the contract by the Contracting Agency, the successful bidder shall provide any pre-award information the Contracting Agency may require under Section 1-02.15. rr. Until the Contracting Agency executes a contract, no proposal shall bind the Contracting Agency nor shall any work begin within the project limits or within Contracting Agency-furnished sites. The wr. Contractor shall bear all risks for any work begun outside such areas and for any materials ordered before the contract is executed by the Contracting Agency. If the bidder experiences circumstances beyond their control that prevents return of the contract documents within 10 calendar days after the award date, the Contracting Agency may grant up to a maximum of 10 additional calendar days for return of the documents, provided the Contracting Agency deems the circumstances warrant it. dw The Contracting Agency is prohibited by RCW 39.06.010 from executing a contract with a Contractor who is not registered or licensed as required by the laws of the state. In addition, the 40 Contracting Agency requires persons doing business with the Contracting Agency to possess a valid City of Renton business license prior to award. wr When the Bid Form provides spaces for a business license number, a Washington State Contractors registration number, or both the Bidder shall insert such information in the spaces provided. The Contracting Agency requires legible copies of the Contractor's Registration and business license be submitted to the Engineer as part of the Contracting Agency's post-award infonnation and evaluation activities. 1-04 SCOPE OF WORK 1-04.2 Coordination of Contract Documents, Plans, Special Provisions Specifications, and Addenda Revise the second paragraph to read: err 15 w Any inconsistency in the parts of the contract shall be resolved by following this order of precedence (e.g., 1 presiding over 2, 2 over 3, 3 over 4, and so forth): 1. Addenda, r 2. Proposal Form, 3. Special Provisions, 4. Contract Plans, 5. Amendments to Division 1-99 APWA Supplement 6. Amendments to the Standard Specifications, 7. Division 1-99 APWA Supplement 8. WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction. 9. Contracting Agency's Standard Plans (if any) 10. WSDOT/APWA Standard Plans for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction Section 1-04.3 is a new section: rr�lr 1-04.3 Contractor-Discovered Discrepancies Upon receipt of award of contract, Contractor shall carefully study and compare all the components of the Contract Documents and other instructions, and check and verify all field measurements. Contractor shall,prior to ordering material or perfonning work,report in writing to Engineer any error, inconsistency, or omission in respect to design or mode of construction, which is discovered. If Contractor, in the course of this study or in the accomplishment of the work, finds any discrepancy between the Plans and the physical condition of the locality as represented in the Plans, or any such errors or omissions in respect to design or mode of construction in the Plans or in the layout as given by points and instructions, it shall be Contractor's duty to inform Engineer immediately in writing, and Engineer will promptly check the same. Any work done after such discovery,until correction of Plans or authorization of extra work is given, if Engineer finds that extra work is involved, will be done at Contractor's risk. If extra work is involved, the procedure shall be as provided in Section 1- 04.4 of the Standard Specifications. aw 1-04.4 Changes The last two paragraphs are replaced with the following: (******) Renton does not have a formal policy or guidelines on cost reduction alternatives, but will evaluate such proposals by the Contractor on a case-by-case basis. art 1-04.8 Progress Estimates and Payments Section 1-04.8 is supplemented as follows: The Contractor is encouraged to provide to the Engineer prior to progress payments an estimate of lump sum work accomplished to date. The Engineer's calculations and decisions shall be final in regard to the actual percentage of any lump sum pay item accomplished and eligible for payment unless another specific method of calculating lump sum payments is provided elsewhere in the specifications. 1-04.11 Final Cleanup Section 1-04.11 is supplemented as follows: fit 16 to No All salvage material as noted on the plans and taken from any of the discarded facilities shall, at the engineer's discretion, be carefully salvaged and delivered to the City shops. Any cost incurred in salvaging and delivering such items shall be considered incidental to the project and no compensation 00 will be made. The contract price for "Finish and Cleanup, lump sum," shall be full compensation for all work, equipment and materials required to perform final cleanup. If this pay item does not appear in the contract documents then final clean up shall be considered incidental to the contract and to other pay item and no further compensation shall be made. 1-05 CONTROL OF WORK 1-05.4 Conformity With and Deviation from Plans and Stakes wr. Section 1-05.4 is supplemented with the following: rr If the project calls for Contractor supplied surveying, the Contractor shall provide all required survey work, including such work as mentioned in Sections 1-05.4(1) and 1-05.4(2), 1-11 and elsewhere in these specifications as being provided by the Engineer. All costs for this survey work shall be included in "Construction Surveying and Asbuilts," per lump sum. The Engineer or Contractor supplied surveyor will provide construction stakes and marks establishing �. lines, slopes, and grades as stipulated in Sections 1-05.4 and will perform such work per Section 1-11. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for detailed dimensions, elevations, and excavation slopes measured from the Engineer or Contractor supplied surveyor furnished stakes and marks. rrr The Contractor shall provide a work site which has been prepared to permit construction staking to proceed in a safe and orderly manner. The Contractor shall keep the Engineer or Contractor supplied surveyor informed of staking requirements and provide at least 48 hours notice to allow the Engineer or Contractor supplied surveyor adequate time for setting stakes. The Contractor shall carefully preserve stakes,marks, and other reference points, including existing monumentation, set by Contracting Agency forces. The Contractor will be charged for the costs of replacing stakes, markers and monumentation that were not to be disturbed but were destroyed or damaged by the Contractor's operations. This charge will be deducted from monies due or to become due to the Contractor. Any claim by the Contractor for extra compensation by reason of alterations or reconstruction work a* allegedly due to error in the Engineer's line and grade, will not be allowed unless the original control points set by the Engineer still exist, or unless other satisfactory substantiating evidence to prove the error is furnished the Engineer. Three consecutive points set on line or grade shall be the minimum points used to determine any variation from a straight line or grade. Any such variation shall, upon discovery, be reported to the Engineer. In the absence of such report the Contractor shall be liable for any error in alignment or grade. r The Contractor shall provide all surveys required other than those to be performed by the Engineer. All survey work shall be done in accordance with Section 1-11 SURVEYING STANDARDS of these +rw specifications. wr 17 rr The Contractor shall keep updated survey field notes in a standard field book and in a format set by ad the Engineer, per Section 1-11.1(4). These field notes shall include all survey work performed by the Contractor's surveyor in establishing line, grade and slopes for the construction work. Copies of these field notes shall be provided the Engineer upon request and upon completion of the contract work the field book or books shall be submitted to the Engineer and become the property of the Contracting Agency. If the survey work provided by the Contractor does not meet the standards of the Engineer, then the Contractor shall, upon the Engineer's written request,remove the individual or individuals doing the survey work and the survey work will be completed by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. Costs for completing the survey work required by the Engineer will be deducted from monies due or to become due the Contractor. All costs for survey work required to be performed by the Contractor shall be included in the prices 4W bid for the various items which comprise the improvement or be included in the bid item for "Construction Surveying and As-builts" per lump sum if that item is included in the contracts. 40 Section 1-05.4(3) is a new section: so 1-05.4(3) Contractor Supplied Surveying When the contract provides for"Construction Surveying and As-builts", the Contractor shall supply the survey work required for the project. The Contractor shall retain as a part of the Contractor Organization an experienced team of surveyors under the direct supervision of a professional land surveyor licensed by the State of Washington. All survey work shall be done in accordance with Sections 1-05.4 and I A 1. err The Contractor and/or Surveyor shall inform the Engineer in writing of any errors, discrepancies, and omissions to the plans that prevent the Contractor and/or Surveyor from constructing the project in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. All errors, discrepancies, and omissions must be corrected to the 40 satisfaction of the Engineer before the survey work may be continued. The Contractor shall coordinate his work with the Surveyor and perform his operations in a manner to rye protect all survey stakes from harm. The Contractor shall inform the Surveyor of the Contractor's intent to remove any survey stakes and/or points before physically removing them. do The surveyor shall be responsible for maintaining As-Built records for the project. The Contractor shall coordinate his operations and assist the Surveyor in maintaining accurate As-Built records for the project. If the Contractor and Surveyor fail to provide, as directed by the Engineer and/or these plans and specifications, accurate As-Built records and other work the Engineer deems necessary, the Engineer may elect to provide at Contractor expense, a surveyor to provide all As-Built records and other work go as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer shall deduct expenses incurred by the Engineer-supplied surveying from moneys owed to the Contractor. as Payment per Section 1-04.1 for all work and materials required for the full and complete survey work required to complete the project and as-built drawings shall be included in the lump sum price for "Construction Surveying and As-builts." rw 18 r Section 1-05.4(4) is a new section: do 1-05.4(4) Contractor Provided As-Built Information It shall be the Contractors responsibility to record the location prior to the backfilling of the trenches, we by centerline station, offset, and depth below finish grade of surface, of all existing utilities uncovered or crossed during his work as covered under this project. r It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to have his surveyor locate by offset and elevation each major item of work done under this contract per the survey standard of Section 1-11. Major items of work shall include but not be limited to: manholes, storm drainage system and associated rim appurtenances, valves, site piping including force main and gravity sewer, vertical and horizontal bends, water meter service, major changes in design grade,poles, fence and gate, existing wet well, transformer, cleanouts, and electrical cabinets. Readily identifiable improvements, located above .r grade, may be located in the horizontal plane by field measurements taken by the Contractor and locations by the surveyor will not be required. After the completion of the work covered by this contract, the contractors surveyor shall provide to the City the hard covered field book(s) containing the,as-built notes and one set of white prints of the project drawings upon which he has plotted the notes of the contractor locating existing utilities, and one set of white prints of the project drawings upon which he has plotted the as-built location of the ow new work as he recorded in the field book(s). This drawing shall bear the surveyors seal and signature certifying its accuracy. Ow All costs for as-built work shall be included in the contract item "Construction Surveying and As- builts," lump sum. o 1-05.7 Removal of Defective and Unauthorized Work Section 1-05.7 is supplemented as follows: wr Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute work by Contractor forces, in accordance with the intent of the Contract and without expense to Owner, and shall bear the expense of making good all work of other contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove such condemned work and materials and commence re-execution of the work within 7 calendar days of notice from Engineer, Owner may correct the same as provided in the Standard Specifications. In that case, Owner may store removed material. If Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within 10 calendar days from the date of the notice to Contractor of the fact of such removal, Owner may, upon an additional 10 calendar days'written notice, sell such materials at public or private sale, and deduct all costs and expenses incurred from moneys due to Contractor, including costs of sale, and accounting to Contractor for the net proceeds remaining. Owner may bid at any such sale. Contractor shall be liable to Owner for the amount of any deficiency from any funds otherwise due Contractor. 1-05.8 Guarantees Section 1-05.10 is supplemented as follows: ,.r 19 rr If within one year after the Acceptance Date of the Work by the Contracting Agency, defective and/or unauthorized Work is discovered, the Contractor shall promptly,upon written order by the Contracting Agency, return and in accordance with the Engineer's instructions, either correct such Work, of if such Work has been rejected by the Engineer, remove it from the Project Site and replace it with non-defective and authorized Work, all without cost to the Contracting Agency. If the Contractor does not promptly comply with the written order to correct defective and/or unauthorized Work, or if an emergency exists, the Contracting Agency reserves the right to have defective and/or unauthorized Work corrected or removed and replaced pursuant to Section 1-05.8 "Owners Right to Correct Defective and/or Unauthorized Work." The Contractor agrees the above one year limitation shall not exclude or diminish the Contracting Agency's rights under any law to obtain damages and recover costs resulting from defective and/or unauthorized work discovered after one year but prior to the expiration of the legal time period set forth in RCW 4.16.040 limiting actions upon a contract in writing, or liability expressed or implied arising out of a written agreement. The Contractor shall warrant good title to all materials, supplies, and equipment purchased for, or incorporated in the Work. Nothing contained in this paragraph, however, shall defeat or impair the ++w right of persons furnishing materials or labor, to recover under any bond given by the Contractor for their protection, or any rights under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the Contractor in the hands of the Contracting Agency. The provisions of this paragraph shall be inserted in all subcontracts and material contracts, and notice of its provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the Work when no formal contract is entered into for such materials. 1-05.11 Final Inspection 1-05.11(1) Substantial Completion Date When the Contractor considers the work to be substantially complete, the Contractor shall so notify the Engineer and request the Engineer establish the Substantial Completion Date. To be considered substantially complete the following conditions must be met: I. The Contracting Agency must have full and unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities both from the operational and safety standpoint. This shall include the following: • Release or approval of all regulatory agency-related permits/requirements including the approval of the electrical work by the Department of Labor and Industries • Training of the Owner's personnel • Testing and startup 2. Only minor incidental work, replacement of temporary substitute facilities, or ad correction of repair work remains to reach physical completion of the work. The Contractor's request shall list the specific items of work in subparagraph two above that remains to be completed in order to reach physical completion. The Engineer may also establish the Substantial Completion Date unilaterally. dr If after this inspection, the Engineer concurs with the Contractor that the Work is substantially complete and ready for its intended use, the Engineer, by written notice to the Contractor, will set the rrr 20 rrr. "rr Substantial Completion Date. If, after this inspection the Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete and ready for its intended use, the Engineer will,by written notice, so notify the Contractor giving the reasons therefore. err Upon receipt of written notice concurring in or denying substantial completion,whichever is applicable, the Contractor shall pursue vigorously, diligently and without unauthorized interruption, the Work necessary to reach Substantial and Physical Completion. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a revised schedule indicating when the Contractor expects to reach substantial and physical completion of the work. The above process shall be repeated until the Engineer establishes the Substantial Completion Date and the Contractor considers the work physically complete and ready for Final Inspection. �., 1-05.11(2) Final Inspection Date When the Contractor considers the Work physically complete and ready for Final Inspection, the Contractor, by Written Notice, shall request the Engineer to schedule a final inspection. The Engineer will set a date for Final Inspection. The Engineer and the Contractor will then make a final Inspection and the Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing of all particulars in which the Final Inspection reveals the Work incomplete or unacceptable. The Contractor shall immediately take such corrective measures as are necessary to remedy the listed deficiencies. Corrective work shall be pursued vigorously, diligently, and without interruption until physical completion of the listed deficiencies. This process will continue until the Engineer is satisfied the listed deficiencies have been corrected. If action to correct the listed deficiencies is not initiated within 7 days after receipt of the Written Notice listing the deficiencies, the Engineer:nay, upon Written Notice to the Contractor, take whatever steps are necessary to correct those deficiencies pursuant to Section 1-05.8. r Upon correction of all deficiencies, the Engineer will notify the Contractor and the Contracting Agency, in writing, of the date upon which the Work was considered physically complete, that date shall constitute the Physical completion date of the Contract, but shall not imply all the obligations of the Contractor under the Contract have been fulfilled. 1-05.11(3) Operational Testing Unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall give Engineer a minimum of 3 working days' notice of the time for each test and inspection. If the inspection is by an authority other than Engineer, Contractor shall give Engineer a minimum of 3 working days' notice of the date rrr fixed for such inspection. Required certificates of inspection by other authority than Engineer shall be secured by Contractor. 1-05.12 Final Acceptance The third and fourth sentences in paragraph 1 are deleted and replaced with: The Final Acceptance date shall be that date in which the Renton City Council formally approves acceptance of the Contract. 1-05.14 Cooperation with Other Contractors Section 1-05.14 is supplemented as follows: o.. 21 rir wl Contractor shall afford Owner and other contractors working in the area reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their respective work and shall properly connect and coordinate Contractor's work with theirs. Other utilities, districts, agencies, and contractors who may be working within the project area are: 1. Puget Sound Energy (gas and electric) 44 2. AT&T Broadband 3. QWest Communications 4. City of Renton (water, sewer, transportation) 5. King County Water District No.90 06 6. Private contractors employed by adjacent property owners The Contractor shall coordinate with City of Renton on tying into any existing electrical service 40 cabinet. 1-05.18 Contractor's Daily Diary Section 1-05.18 is a new section: Contractor and subcontractors shall maintain and provide to Engineer a Daily Diary Record of this Work. This Diary will be created by pen entries in a hard-bound diary book of the type that is commonly available through commercial outlets. The Diary must contain the Project and Number; if 4* the Diary is in loose-leaf form,this information must appear on every page. The Diary must be kept and maintained by Contractor's designated project superintendent(s). Entries must be made on a daily basis and must accurately represent all of the project activities on each day. , At a minimum, the diary shall show on a daily basis: 1. The day and date. 2. The weather conditions, including changes throughout the day. 3. A complete description of work accomplished during the day with adequate references to the Plans and Contract Provisions so that the reader can easily and accurately identify said work in the Plans. Identify location/description of photographs or videos taken that day. 4. An entry for each and every changed condition, dispute or potential dispute, incident, accident, or occurrence of any nature whatsoever which might affect Contractor, Owner, or any third party in any manner. i 5. Listing of any materials received and stored on- or off-site by Contractor for future installation, to include the manner of storage and protection of the same. 6. Listing of materials installed during each day. 7. List of all subcontractors working on-site during each day. 8. Listing of the number of Contractor's employees working during each day by category of employment. 9. Listing of Contractor's equipment working on the site during each day. Idle equipment on the site shall be listed and designated as idle. 10. Notations to explain inspections, testing, stake-out, and all other services furnished by Owner or other party during each day. 11. Entries to verify the daily (including non-work days) inspection and maintenance of traffic control devices and condition of the traveled roadway surfaces. Contractor shall not allow any conditions to develop that would be hazardous to the public. 12. Any other information that serves to give an accurate and complete record of the nature, quantity, and quality of Contractor's progress on each day. '* 13. Plan markups showing locations and dimensions of constructed features to be used by Engineer to produce record drawings. rr 22 r 14. All pages of the diary must be numbered consecutively with no omissions in page numbers. 15. Each page must be signed and dated by Contractor's official representative on the project. Contractor may use additional sheets separate from the diary book if necessary to provide a complete diary record,but they must be signed, dated, and labeled with project name and number. It is expressly agreed between Contractor and Owner that the Daily Diary maintained by Contractor shall be the "Contractor's Book of Original Entry" for the documentation of any potential claims or disputes that might arise during this Contract. Failure of Contractor to maintain this Diary in the manner described above will constitute a waiver of any such claims or disputes by Contractor. Engineer or other Owner's representative on the job site will also complete a Daily Construction w• Report. 1-06 CONTROL OF MATERIAL 1-06.1 Approval of Materials MW Prior to Use Section 1-06.1 is supplemented as follows: ow The materials and equipment lists submitted to Engineer at the Preconstruction Conference shall include the quantity, manufacturer and model number, if applicable, of materials and equipment to be installed under the Contract. This list will be checked by Engineer as to conformity with the Contract VW Documents. Engineer will review the lists within 10 working days, noting required corrections. Contractor shall make required corrections and file 2 corrected copies with Engineer within one week after receipt of required corrections. Engineer's review and acceptance of the lists shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for suitability for the intended purpose, nor for deviations from the Contract Documents. aw Samples and Tests for Acceptance Section 1-06.2(1) is supplemented a follows: +�r The finished Work shall be in accordance with approved samples. Approval of samples by Engineer does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for perfonnance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Shop drawing and submittals are required for all items installed on this Contract. The terms `shop drawing' and `submittal' shall be considered synonymous as regards to the procedures set forth herein. Submit 7 copies of each shop drawing and submittal to: City of Renton 1055 South Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 No Attn: John Hobson low 23 Items that are installed in the Work that have not been approved through the shop drawing and submittal process may be rejected and shall be removed and an approved product shall be furnished, all at the Contractor's expense. 40 Shop drawing review will be limited to general design requirements only, and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions, or responsibility for consequences due to deviations from the contract documents. No changes may be made in any submittal after it has been reviewed except with written notice and approval from the Owner. Shop drawings shall contain the following information for all items: 1. Item identification including Project name and Owner's name. 2. Shop or equipment drawings, dimensions, and weights. 3. Catalog information. 4W 4. Manufacturer's specifications. 5. Special handling instructions. 6: Maintenance requirements. 7. Wiring and control diagrams. 8. List of contract exceptions. 9. Specification section number. 10. Identification of those items which are substitutions or contain deviations from the Specifications. 11. Identification of those items which require other jurisdictional agency review and approval, if applicable. 12. A stamp showing that the Contractor has checked the equipment for conformance with the contract requirements, coordination with other work on the job, and dimensional suitability. 13. A place for the Engineer to stamp. aw Submittals that do not comply with these requirements may be returned to the Contractor for re- submittal. Acceptable submittals will be reviewed as promptly as possible, and transmitted to the 40 Contractor not later than 15 working days after receipt by the Engineer. Revise and submit as necessary. Delays caused by the need for re-submittal shall not be a basis for an extension of contract time or delay damages. Three sets of shop drawings will be returned to the Contractor after review. The Owner will pay the costs and provide review services for a first and second review of each submittal item. Additional reviews shall be paid by Contractor by withholding the appropriate go amounts from each payment estimate. The Contractor is responsible: .0 L For identifying the shop drawings and submittals required for this Project. 2. Being responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in each submittal. 3. Verifying that the material and equipment described in each submittal conforms to the requirements of the Contract prior to submittal. 4. Ensuring that the material, equipment and methods of Work used shall be as described in the submittal. 5. Ensuring there is no conflict with other submittals and notifying the Engineer where such submittal may affect the Work of another submittal. 6. Ensuring coordination of submittals among the suppliers, related crafts, Subcontractors, and with the planned Work. 7. Calling out deviations from the Contract and noting where in the body of the submittal. ad 24 ■r rn �r. Substitutions: r 1. Any product that does not meet these specifications will be considered a substitution. Substitutions must be approved prior to their installation or use on this project. Any product that does not meet these specifications will be considered a substitution. Substitutions must be approved prior to their installation or use on this project. 2. Before opening Bids, the Owner may consider written requests from product suppliers or prime bidders for substitutions. All requests for substitution must be received by Owner r and the Engineer a minimum of 7 working days prior to Bid opening. Requests shall be accompanied by drawings and specifications in sufficient detail to allow the Owner to determine whether or not the substitute proposed is equal to that specified. All requests shall include a listing of any significant variations in material or methods from those specified. If there are no variations, a statement to that fact shall be included in the request for approval. The determination as to whether or not a proposed substitute is acceptable shall rest solely with the Owner. Approval of substitutions will be only by Addendum. The Bidder shall include, in the proposal, all costs for any modifications required to adopt the substitute. 3. Within 10 working days after the date of the contract,the Owner shall consider formal requests from the Contractor for a substitution of products in place of those specified. Submit two copies of each request for a substitution. Data shall include the necessary change in construction methods, including a detailed description of the proposed method and related drawings illustrating the methods. An itemized comparison of each proposed substitution with product or method specified shall be provided. 4. In making a request for a substitution, the Contractor represents that they have investigated the proposed product or method and has determined that it is equal or superior to the product specified. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of accepted substitutions into the work, making changes that may be required for the work to be completed. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to substitutions. 1-06.2(2) Statistical Evaluation of Materials for Acceptance dw Section 1-06.02(2) is supplemented by adding the following: Unless stated otherwise in the special provisions, statistical evaluation will not be used by the City of Renton. 1-07 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES TO THE PUBLIC �r 1-07.1 Laws to be Observed Section 1-07.1 is supplemented as follows: Contractor shall erect and properly maintain, at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the work, all necessary safeguards for protection of workers and the public; shall post danger signs warning against known or unusual hazards; and shall designate as Safety Supervisor a responsible employee on the construction site whose duty shall be the enforcement of safety. The name and wv+ position of such person so designated shall be reported in writing to Engineer by Contractor. MW 25 No >Mt Contractor shall, at all times, enforce strict discipline and good order among all employees and shall not employ any person unfit or not skilled in the work assigned to him/her. Necessary sanitation conveniences for the use of the workers on the job,properly secluded from public observation, shall be provided and maintained by Contractor. 1-07.6 Permits and Licenses Section 1-07.6 is supplemented as follows: The permits, easements, and right of entry documents that have been acquired are available for inspection and review. 4W Contractor shall be required to comply with all conditions of the permits, easements, and rights of entry, at no additional cost to Owner. Contractor is required to indemnify Owner from claims on all easements and rights of entry. All other permits, licenses, etc., shall be the responsibility of Contractor. Contractor shall comply with the special provisions and requirements of each. rli Permits,permission under franchises, licenses and bonds of a temporary nature necessary for and during the prosecution of the work, and inspection fees in connection therewith shall be secured and paid for by Contractor. If Owner is required to secure such permits,permission under franchises, licenses and bonds, and pay the fees, the costs incurred by Owner thereby shall be charged against Contractor and deducted from any funds otherwise due Contractor. 1-07.9(5) Required Documents 00 Delete the first sentence of the third paragraph, and replace it with the following: o1 Contractor must submit weekly-certified payrolls for the Contractor and all subcontractors and lower tier subcontractors, regardless of project's funding source. 1-07.11(11) City of Renton Affidavit of Compliance Section 1-07.11(11) is new: Each Contractor, Subcontractor, Consultant, and or Supplier shall complete and submit a copy of the "City of Renton Fair Practices Policy Affidavit of Compliance". A copy of this document will be bound in the bid documents. 40 1-07.12 Federal Agency Inspection Section 1-07.12 is supplemented with the following: Required Federal Aid Provisions The Required Contract Provisions Federal Aid Construction Contracts (FHWA 1273) and the amendments thereto supersede any conflicting provisions of the Standard Specifications and are made a part of this contract; provided,however, that if any of the provisions of FHWA 1273, as amended, are less restrictive than Washington State Law, then the Washington State Law shall prevail. 26 sw ` The provisions of FHWA 1273, as amended, included in this contract require that the Contractor insert the FHWA 1273 and amendments thereto in each subcontract, together with the wage rates which are part of the FHWA 1273, as amended. Also, a clause shall be included in each subcontract requiring the subcontractors to insert the FHWA 1273 and amendments thereto in any lower tier subcontracts, together with the wage rates. The Contractor shall also ensure that this section, REQUIRED FEDERAL AID PROVISIONS, is inserted in each subcontract for subcontractors and �.. lower tier subcontractors. For this purpose, upon request to the Project Engineer, the Contractor will be provided with extra copies of the FHWA 1273, the amendments thereto, the applicable wage rates, and this Special Provision. 1-07.13(1) General Section 1-07.13(1) is supplemented as follows: wr During unfavorable weather and other conditions, the Contractor shall pursue only such portions of the work as shall not be damaged thereby. No portion of the work whose satisfactory quality or efficiency will be affected by unfavorable conditions shall be constructed while these conditions exist, unless by special means or precautions acceptable to the engineer, the Contractor shall be able to overcome them. 1-07.1 S Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion Control Delete the first paragraph, and replace it with the following: In an effort to prevent, control, and stop water pollution and erosion within the project,thereby us protecting the work, nearby land, streams, and other bodies of water, the Contractor shall perform all work in strict accordance with all Federal, State, and local laws and regulations governing waters of the State, as well as permits acquired for the project. %* 1-07.16(1) Private/Public Property Section 1-07.16(1) is supplemented by adding the following: as The Contracting Agency will obtain all easements and franchises required for the project. The Contractor shall limit his operation to the areas obtained and shall not trespass on private property. „w The Contracting Agency may provide certain lands, as indicated in connection with the work under the contract together with the right of access to such lands. The Contractor shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with his equipment or materials. �r. The Contractor shall provide, with no liability to the Contracting Agency, any additional land and access thereto not shown or described that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials. He shall construct all access roads, detour roads, or other temporary work as required by his operations. The Contractor shall confine his equipment, storage of material, and operation of his workers to those areas shown and described and such additional areas as he may provide. +rr A. General. All construction work under this contract on easements, right-of-way, over private property or franchise, shall be confined to the limits of such easements, right-of-way or franchise. All work shall be accomplished so as to cause the least amount of disturbance and a minimum amount of damage. The contractor shall schedule his work so that trenches across easements shall not be left open during weekends or holidays and trenches shall not be open for more than 48 hours. B. Structures. The ontractor shall remove such existing structures as may be necessary for the performance of the work and, if required, shall rebuild the structures thus removed in as 27 err good a condition as found. He shall also repair all existing structures which may be damaged as a result of the work under this contract. C. Easements, cultivated areas and other surface improvements. All cultivated areas, either agricultural or lawns, and other surface improvements which are damaged by actions of the contractor shall be restored as nearly as possible to their original condition. Prior to excavation on an easement or private right-of-way, the contractor shall strip top soil from the trench or construction area and stockpile it in such a manner that it may be replaced by him, upon completion of construction. Ornamental trees and shrubbery shall be carefully removed with the earth surrounding their roots wrapped in burlap and replanted in their original positions within 48 hours. All shrubbery or trees destroyed or damaged, shall be replaced by the contractor with material of equal quality at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency. In the event that it is necessary to trench through any lawn area, the sod shall be carefully cut and rolled and replaced after the trenches have been backfilled. The lawn area shall be cleaned by sweeping or other means, of all earth and debris. The Contractor shall use rubber wheel equipment similar to the small tractor-type backhoes ► used by side sewer contractors for all work, including excavation and backfill, on easements or rights-of-way which have lawn areas. All fences,markers, mailboxes, or other temporary obstacles shall be removed by the Contractor and immediately replace, after the trench is backfilled, in their original position. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Agency and property Owner at least 24 hours in advance of any work done on easements or rights-of-way. Damage to existing structures outside of easement areas that may result from dewatering and/or other construction activity under this contract shall be restored to their original condition or better. The original condition shall be established by photographs taken and/or inspection made prior to construction. All such work shall be done to the satisfaction of the 40 property Owners and the Contracting Agency at the expense of the contractor. D. Streets. The Contractor will assume all responsibility of restoration of the surface of all streets (traveled ways) used by him if damaged. In the event the Contractor does not have labor or material immediately available to make necessary repairs, the Contractor shall so inform the Contracting Agency. The Contracting Agency will make the necessary repairs and the cost of such repairs shall be paid by the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for identifying and documenting any damage that is pre-existing or , caused by others. Restoration of excavation in City streets shall be done in accordance with the City of Renton Trench Restoration Requirements,which is available at the Public Works Department Customer Services counter on the 6th floor, Renton City Hall, 1055 South Grady Way. 40 1-07.17 Utilities and Similar Facilities Section 1-07.17 is supplemented by adding: Existing utilities indicated in the Plans have been plotted from the best information available to Engineer. Information and data shown or indicated in the Contfact Documents with respect to existing underground utilities or services at or contiguous to the project site are based on information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others, and Owner and Engineer do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof. It is to be understood that other aboveground or underground facilities not shown in the Plans may be encountered during the course of the work. ori 28 +�r All utility valves, manholes, vaults, or pull boxes which are buried shall be conspicuously marked in a fashion acceptable to the Owner and Engineer by the Contractor to allow their location to be w. determined by the Engineer or utility personnel under adverse conditions, (inclement weather or darkness). Where underground main distribution conduits, such as water, gas, sewer, electric power, or telephone, are shown on the Plans, the Contractor, for the purpose of preparing his bid, shall assume that every property parcel will be served by a service connection for each type of utility. r Contractor shall check with the utility companies concerning any possible conflict prior to commencing excavation in any area. Contractor shall resolve all crossing and clearance problems with the utility company concerned. No excavation shall begin until all known facilities, in the aw vicinity of the excavation area, have been located and marked. In addition to Contractor having all utilities field marked before starting work, Contractor shall have vlw all utilities field marked after they are relocated in conjunction with this project. Call Before You Dig The 48 Hour Locators "r' 1-800-424-5555 At least 2 and not more than 10 working days prior to commencing any excavations for utility 0M potholing or for any other purpose under this Contract,Contractor shall notify the Underground Utilities Location Center by telephone of the planned excavation and progress schedule. Contractor is also warned that there may be utilities on the project that are not part of the One Call system. They wo must be contacted directly by Contractor for locations. Contractor shall make arrangements 48 hours in advance with respective utility owners to have a ter representative present when their utility is exposed or modified, if the utility chooses to do so. Existing utilities for telephone,power, gas, water, and television cable facilities shall be adjusted or relocated by the appropriate utility company unless otherwise noted in the Plans. These adjustments ' may be completed before Contractor begins work, or may be performed in conjunction with the contract work. Contractor shall be entirely responsible for coordination with the utility companies and arranging for the movement or adjustment, either temporary or permanent, of their facilities within the project limits. See also Section 1-05.14 of these Special Provisions. If or when utility conflicts occur, Contractor shall continue the construction process on other aspects of the project whenever possible. No additional compensation will be made to Contractor for reason of delay caused by the actions of any utility company and Contractor shall consider such costs to be incidental to the other items of the contract. ar .Utility Potholing Potholing may be included as a bid item for use in determining the location of existing utilities in advance of the Contractor's operations. If potholing is not included as a bid item then it shall be considered incidental to other work. The Contractor shall submit all potholing requests to the Engineer for approval, at least 2 working days before potholing is scheduled. Additionally, the Contractor shall provide potholing at Engineer's request. ,rr .rr 29 In no way shall the work described under Utility Potholing relieve Contractor of any of the responsibilities described in Section 1-07.17 of the Standard Specifications and Special Provisions, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. .1-07.17(1) Interruption of Services Section 1-07.17(1) is a new section: .rr 'Whenever in the course of the construction operation it becomes necessary to cause an outage of utilities, it shall be Contractor's responsibility to notify the affected users and Engineer not less than 48 hours in advance of such outage. Contractor shall make reasonable effort to minimize the duration of outages, and shall estimate the length of time service will be interrupted and so notify the users. In the case of any utility outage that has exceeded or will exceed four hours, user contact shall again be made. Temporary service, if needed,will be arranged by Contractor at no cost to Owner. Overhead lighting outages shall not exceed 24 hours. All cost to Contractor for providing temporary overhead lighting to meet above requirements shall be incidental to.the various unit and lump sum rtw items of the Contract; no separate payment will be made. 1-07.18 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance Section 1-07.18 is deleted replaced by the following new section and subsections: 1-07.18(1) General 'The Contractor shall obtain and maintain in full force and effect, from the Contract Execution Date to the Completion Date, public liability and property damage insurance with an insurance company(ies) or through sources approved by the State Insurance Commissioner pursuant to RCW 48. 'The Contractor shall not begin work under the Contract until the required insurance has been obtained and approved by the Contracting Agency. Insurance shall provide coverage to the Contractor, all M subcontractors, Contracting Agency and the Contracting Agency's consultant. The coverage shall protect against claims for bodily injuries,personal injuries, including accidental death, as well as claims for property damages which may arise from any act or omission of the Contractor or the subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. If warranted work is required the Contractor shall provide the City proof that insurance coverage and limits established under the term of the Contract for work are in full force and effect during the period of warranty work. 'The Contracting Agency may request a copy of the actual declaration pages(s) for each insurance policy effecting coverage(s)required on the contract prior to the date work commences. Failure of the Contractor to fully comply during the term of the Contract with the requirements described herein will be considered a material breach of contract and shall be caused for immediate termination of the Contract at the option of the Contracting Agency. 1-07.18(2) Coverages As part of the response to this proposal, the Contractor shall submit a completed City of Renton Insurance Information form which details specific coverage and limits for this contract. All coverage provided by the Contractor shall be in a form and underwritten by a company acceptable to the Contracting Agency. The City requires that all insurers: 30 r. . ++► I. Be licensed to do business within the State of Washington. 2. Coverage to be on an "occurrence" basis(Professional Liability and Pollution coverage are acceptable when written on a claims-made basis). The City may also require proof of professional liability coverage be provided for up to two (2)years after the completion of r" the project. 3. The City may request a copy of the actual declaration page(s)for each insurance policy affecting coverage(s) required by the Contract prior to the date work commences. 4. Possess a minimum A.M. Best rating ofAVII (A rating of XII or better is preferred.) If any insurance carrier possesses a rating of less than AVII,the City may make an exception. The City reserves the right to approve the security of the insurance coverage provided by the insurance company(ies), terms, conditions, and the Certificate of Insurance. Failure of the Contractor to fully comply during the term of the contract with these requirements will be considered a material breach of contract and shall be cause for immediate termination of the contract at the option of the City. The Contractor shall obtain and maintain the minimum insurance coverage set forth below. By requiring such minimum insurance, the City of Renton shall not be deemed or construed to have assessed the risks that may be applicable to the Contractor. The Contractor shall assess its own risks and if it deems appropriate and/or prudent, maintain higher limits and/or broader coverage. it Coverage shall include: A. Commercial General Liability - ISO 1993 Form or equivalent. Coverage will be written on an occurrence basis and include: • Premises and Operations (including CG2503; General Aggregate to apply per project, if applicable). • Explosion, Collapse and Underground Hazards • Products/Completed Operations • Contractual Liability (including Amendatory Endorsement CG 0043 or equivalent which includes defense coverage assumed under contract) .�r • Broad Form Property Damage • Independent Contractors • Personal/Advertising Injury • Stop Gap Liability B. Automobile Liability including all • Owned Vehicles • Non-Owned Vehicles .r • Hired Vehicles C. Workers' Compensation • Statutory Benefits (Coverage A) - Show Washington Labor& Industries Number D. Umbrella Liability (when necessary) Excess of Commercial General Liability and Automobile Liability. Coverage should be as broad as primary. E. Professional Liability - (whenever the work under this Contract includes Professional Liability, (i.e. architectural, engineering, advertising,or computer programming) the Contractor shall maintain professional liability covering wrongful acts, errors and/or omissions of the Contractor for damage sustained by reason of or in the course of operations under this Contract. F. The Contracting Agency reserves the right to request and/or require additional coverages as may be appropriate based on work performed (i.e. pollution liability). Contractor shall name the City of Renton, and its officers, officials, agents, employees and volunteers as Additional Insured(ISO Form CG 2010 or equivalent). The Contractor shall provide the City of Renton Certificates of Insurance prior to commencement of work. The City reserves the right to 31 ow 44 request copies of insurance policies, if at their sole discretion it is deemed appropriate. Further, all policies of insurance described above shall: A. Be on a primary basis not contributory with any other insurance coverage and/or self- insurance carried by the City of Renton. B. Include a Waiver of Subrogation Clause. C. Severability of Interest Clause(Cross Liability) D. Policy may not be non-renewed, canceled or materially changed or altered unless forty-five (45) days prior written notice is provided to the City of Renton. Notification shall be provided to the City of Renton by certified mail. 1-07.18(3) Limits LIMITS REQUIRED Providing coverage in these stated amounts shall not be construed to relieve the contractor from liability in excess of such limits. The Contractor shall carry the following limits of liability as required below: SII Commercial General Liability General Aggregate* $2,000,000 ** Products/Completed Operations $2,000,000 ** Aggregate Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 Personal/Advertising Injury $1,000,000 Fire Damage (Any One Fire) $50,000 Medical Payments (Any One $5,000 Person) Stop Gap Liability $1,000,000 General Aggregate to apply per project (ISO Form CG2503 or equivalent) *Amount may vary based on project risk Automobile Liability Bodily Injury/Property Damage $1,000,000 (Each Accident) Workers'Compensation Statutory Benefits-Coverage A Variable (Show Washington Labor and Industries Number) Umbrella Liability Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 General Aggregate Limit $1,000,000y Products/Completed Operations $1,000,000 Aggregate Professional Liability (If required) Each Occurrence/Incident/Claim $1,000,000 Aggregate $2,000,000 The City inay require the Contractor to keep professional liability coverage in effect for up to two (2) years after completion of the project. The Contractor shall promptly advise the City of Renton in writing in the event any general aggregate or other aggregate limits are reduced. At their own expense, the Contractor will reinstate the aggregate to comply with the minimum limits and requirements as stated in Section 1-07.18(3) and shall furnish the City of Renton a new Certificate of Insurance showing such coverage is in force. ad 32 �r 1-07.18(4) Evidence of Insurance: Within 20 days of award of the contract the CONTRACTOR shall provide evidence of insurance by submitting to the CONTRACTING AGENCY the following: 1. City of Renton Insurance Information Form(attached herein) without modification. 2. Certificate of Insurance(Accord Form 25s or equivalent) conforming to items as specified in wr► Sections 1-07.18(1), 1-07.18(2), and 1-07.18(3) as revised above. Other requirements are as follows: A. Strike the following or similar wording: "This Certificate is issued as a matter of information only and confers no rights upon the Certificate Holder"; B. Strike the wording regarding cancellation notification to the City: "Failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon the company, its agents or representatives". C. Amend the cancellation clause to state: "Policy may not be non-renewed, canceled or materially changed or altered unless 45 days prior written notice is provided to the City". Notification shall be provided to the City by certified mail. For Professional Liability coverage only, instead of the cancellation language specified above, the City will accept a written agreement that the consultant's broker will provide the required notification. 1-07.22 Use of Explosives Section 1-07.22 is supplemented by the following: r�r Explosives shall not be used without specific authority of the Engineer, and then only under such restrictions as may be required by the proper authorities. Explosives shall be handled and used in ,,,,,,, strict compliance with WAC 296-52 and such local laws, rules and regulations that may apply. The individual in charge of the blasting shall have a current Washington State Blaster Users License. wr► The Contractor shall obtain, comply with, and pay for such permits and costs as are necessary in conjunction with blasting operations. 1-07.23(1) Construction Under Traffic �. Section 1-07.23(1) is supplemented by adding the following: The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling dust and mud within the project limits and on any street which is utilized by his equipment for the duration of the project. The Contractor shall be prepared to use watering trucks,power sweepers, and other pieces of equipment as deemed necessary by the engineer, to avoid creating a nuisance. Dust and mud control shall be considered as incidental to the project, and no compensation will be made for this section. r Complaints of dust, mud, or unsafe practices and/or property damage to private Ownership will be transmitted to the Contractor and prompt action in correcting them will be required by the Contractor. VW Contractor shall maintain the roads during construction in a suitable condition to minimize affects to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. All cost to maintain the roads shall be borne by Contractor. to At least one-way traffic shall be maintained on all cross-streets within the project limits during working hours. One lane shall be provided in each direction for all streets during non-working hours. ow 33 WN Contractor shall provide one driveable roadway lane and maintain convenient access for local and commuter traffic to driveways, businesses, and buildings along the line of Work throughout the course of the project. Such access shall be maintained as near as possible to that which existed prior to the commencement of construction. This restriction shall not apply to the paving portion of the construction process. Contractor shall notify and coordinate with all property owners and tenants of street closures, or other ;restrictions which may interfere with their access—at least 24 hours in advance for single-family :residential property, and at least 48 hours in advance for apartments, offices, and commercial property. Contractor shall give a copy of all notices to Engineer. When the abutting owners' access across the right-of-way line is to be eliminated and replaced under the Contract by other access, the existing access shall not be closed until the replacement access facility is available. All unattended excavations shall be properly barricaded and covered at all times. Contractor shall not open any trenches that cannot be completed and refilled that same day. Trenches shall be patched or covered by a temporary steel plate, at Contractor's expense, except in areas where the roadway remains closed to public traffic. Steel plates must be anchored. 1-07.24 Rights of Way Section 1-07.24 is supplemented by adding the following: Street right of way lines, limits of easements and limits of construction permits are indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor's construction activities shall be confined within these limits unless arrangements for use of private property are made. Generally, the Contracting Agency will have obtained, prior to Bid opening, all rights of way and easements, both permanent and temporary, necessary for carrying out the completion of the Work. Exceptions to this are noted in the Contract Documents or brought to the Contractor's attention by a duly issued Addendum. Whenever any of the Work is accomplished on or through property other than public right of way, the Contractor shall meet and fulfill all covenants and stipulations of any easement agreement obtained by the Contracting Agency from the owner of the private property. Copies of the easement agreements are included in the Contract Provisions or made available to the Contractor as soon as practical after they have been obtained by the Engineer. Whenever easements or rights of entry have not been acquired prior to advertising, these areas are so noted on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with any portion of the Work in areas where right of way, easements, or rights of entry have not been acquired until the Engineer certifies to the Contractor that the right of way or easement is available or that the right of entry had been received. If the Contractor is delayed due to acts of omission on the part of the Contracting Agency in obtaining at easements, rights of entry of right of way, the Contractor will be entitled to an extension of time. The Contractor agrees that such delay shall not be a breach of contract. irr Each property owner shall be given 48 hours notice prior to entry by the Contactor. This includes entry onto easements and private property where private improvements must be adjusted. 34 to rrs The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, without expense or liability of the Contracting Agency, any additional land and access thereto that the Contractor may desire for temporary construction facilities, storage of materials, or other Contractor needs. However,before using any private property, whether adjoining the Work or not, the Contractor shall file with the Engineer a written permission of the private property owner, and,upon vacating the premises, a written release from the property owner of each property disturbed or otherwise interfered with by reasons of construction pursued under this Contract. The statement shall be signed by the private property owner, or proper authority acting for the owner of the private property affected, stating that permission has been granted to use the property and all necessary permits have been obtained or, in the case of a release, that the restoration of the property has been satisfactorily accomplished. The statement shall include the parcel number, address and date of signature. Written releases must be filed with the Engineer before the Completion Date will be established. wrr 1-08 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS Section 1-08.0 is a new section with subsection: 1-08.0 Preliminary Matters 1-08.0(1) Preconstruction Conference The Engineer will furnish the Contractor with up to 5 copies of the Contract Documents. Additional documents may be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. Prior to undertaking each part of the Work the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown therein and all applicable field measurements. The Contractor shall promptly report in writing to the Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which the Contractor may discover. After the Contract has been executed, but prior to the Contractor beginning the Work, a err preconstruction conference will be held between the Contractor,the Engineer and such other interested parties as may be invited. The Contractor shall prepare and submit at the preconstruction meeting: 4 Contractors plan of operation and progress schedule (3+copies) 4 Approval of qualified subcontractors (bring list of subcontractors if different from list submitted with Bid) 4 List of materials fabricated or manufactured off the project -+ Material sources on the project 4 Names of principal suppliers Detailed equipment list, including "Rental Rate Blue Book" hourly costs (both working and standby rates) 4 Weighted wage rates for all employee classifications anticipated to be used on Project 4 Cost percentage breakdown for lump sum bid item(s) -* Shop Drawings (bring preliminary list) 4 Traffic Control Plans (3+ copies) 4 Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion Control Plan ow In addition, the Contractor shall be prepared to address: Bonds and insurance Project meetings—schedule and responsibilities Provision for inspection for materials from outside sources Responsibility for locating utilities Responsibility for damage Time schedule for relocations, if by other than Contractor wr 35 aw r Compliance with Contract Documents Acceptance and approval of work Labor compliance, payrolls, certifications Safety regulations for Contractors'and Owner's employees and representatives Suspension of work, time extensions Change order procedures Progress estimates -procedures for payment Special requirements of funding agencies Construction engineering, advance notice of special work Any interpretation of the Contract Documents requested by Contractor Any conflicts or omissions in Contract Documents Any other problems or questions concerning the work 40 Processing and administration of public complaints Easements and rights of entry Other contracts The franchise utilities may be present at the preconstruction conference, and Contractor should be prepared for their review and discussion of progress schedule and coordination. 1-08.1 Subcontracting Section 1-08.1 is supplemented as follows: Written requests for change in subcontractors shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer at least 7 calendar days prior to start of a subcontractor's work. Contractor agrees that s/he is fully responsible to Owner for the acts and omissions of all subcontractors and lower-tier subcontractors, and persons either directly or indirectly employed by the subcontractors, as well as for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by Contractor. Contractor shall be required to give personal attention to the work that is sublet. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between any subcontractor and Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for making sure all subcontractors submit all required documentation, forms, etc. 1-08.1(2) Hours of Work Except in the case of emergency or unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Agency, the normal straight time working hours for the contract shall be any consecutive 8-hour period between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. of a working day with a maximum 1-hour lunch break and a 5-day work week. The normal straight time 8-hour working period for the contract shall be established at the preconstruction conference or prior to the Contractor commencing the Work. No work will be allowed within 50 feet of the intersection of NE 26`h Street and Nile Ave NE or the adjacent 50 feet north of the NE 26`h Street right of way before 9 a.m. or between 2:30 p.m. and 4:30 p.m. All bus routes must remain clear and accessible at all times. No interference with the school or Metro bus stops will be allowed. If a Contractor desires to perform work on holidays, Saturdays, Sundays, or before 7:00 a.m. or after 6:00 p.m. on any day, the Contractor shall apply in writing to the Engineer for permission to work such times. Permission to work longer than an 8-hour period between 7:00 a.m. an 6:00 p.m. is not required. Such requests shall be submitted to the Engineer no later than noon on the working day w prior to the day for which the Contractor is requesting permission to work. wr 36 1W rr. Permission to work between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. during weekdays and between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. on weekends or holidays may also be subject to noise control requirements. Approval to continue work during these hours may be revoked at any time the ywr Contractor exceeds the Contracting Agency's noise control regulations or complaints are received from the public or adjoining property owners regarding the noise from the Contractor's operations. The Contractor shall have no claim for damages or delays should such permission be revoked for these reasons. Permission to work Saturdays, Sunday, holidays of other than the agreed upon normal straight time working hours Monday through Friday may be given subject to certain other conditions set forth by ` the Contracting Agency or Engineer. These conditions may include but are not limited to: requiring the Engineer or such assistants as the Engineer may deem necessary to be present during the Work; requiring the Contractor to reimburse the Contracting Agency for the cost of engineering salaries paid UW Contracting Agency employees who worked during such times; considering the Work performed on Saturday and holiday as working day with regards to the Contract Time; and considering multiple work shifts as multiple working days with respect to Contract Time even though the multiple shifts to occur in a single 24-hour period. Assistants may include, but are not limited to, survey crews; personnel from the Contracting Agency's material testing lab; inspectors; and other Contracting Agency employees when in the opinion of the Engineer such work necessitates their presence. "" 1-08.1(3) Reimbursement for Overtime Work of Contracting Agency Employees Where the Contractor elects to work on a Saturday, Sunday, or other holiday, of longer than an 8-hour work shift on a regular working day, as defined in the Standard Specifications, such work shall be considered as overtime work. On all such overtime work an inspector will be present, and a survey crew may be required at the discretion of the Engineer The Contractor shall reimburse the Contraction Agency for the full amount of the straight time plus overtime costs for employees of the wr Contracting Agency required to work overtime hours. The Contractor by these Specifications does hereby authorize the Engineer to deduct such costs from the amount due or to become due the Contractor. 1-08.2 Assignment Aw The second paragraph of Section 1-08.2 is modified as follows: Contractor shall not assign any moneys due or to become due to Contractor hereunder without the prior written consent of Owner. The assignment, if approved, shall be subject to all setoffs, withholdings, and deductions required by law and the Contract. 1-08.3 Progress Schedule Section 1-08.3 is supplemented as follows: The progress schedule for the entire project shall be submitted 7 calendar days prior to the Preconstruction Conference. The schedule shall be prepared using the critical path method (CPM), preferably using Microsoft Project or equivalent software. The schedule shall contain this information, at a minimum: 1. Construction activities, in sufficient detail that all activities necessary to construct a r complete and functional project are considered. Any activity that has a scheduled duration exceeding 30 calendar days shall be subdivided until no sub-element has a duration exceeding 30 calendar days. 37 �r The schedule shall clearly indicate the activities that comprise the critical path. For each activity not on the critical path, the schedule shall show the float, or slack time. 2. Procurement of material and equipment. 3. Submittals requiring review by Engineer. Submittal by Contractor and review by Engineer shall be shown as separate activities. 4. Work to be performed by a subcontractor, agent, or any third party. 5. Allowances for delays that could result from normal inclement weather(time extensions due to inclement weather will not be allowed). go 6. Allowances for the time required by utilities (Owner's and others) to locate, monitor, and adjust their facilities as required. Engineer may request Contractor to alter the progress schedule when deemed necessary in the opinion ` of Engineer—in the interest of public safety and welfare or of Owner, or for coordination with any other activity of other contractors, the availability of all or portions of the job site, or special provisions of this Contract, or to reasonably meet the completion date of the project. Contractor shall Provide such revised schedule within 10 days of request. If, at any time, in the opinion of Engineer, the progress of construction falls significantly behind schedule, Contractor may be required to submit a plan for regaining progress and a revised schedule indicating how the remaining work items will be completed within the authorized Contract time. Contractor shall promptly report to Engineer any conditions which Contractor feels will require revision of the schedule and shall promptly submit proposed revisions in the progress schedule for acceptance by Engineer. When such changes are accepted by Engineer, the revised schedule shall be followed by Contractor. N* Weekly Schedule. Contractor shall submit a weekly progress schedule to Engineer which sets forth specific work to be performed the following week, and a tentative schedule for the second week. vM Failure to Maintain Progress Schedule. Engineer will check actual progress of the work against the progress schedule a minimum of two times per month. Failure, without just cause, to maintain progress in accordance with the approved schedule shall constitute a breach of Contract. If, through no fault of Contractor,the proposed construction schedule cannot be met, Engineer will require Contractor to submit a revised schedule to Engineer for acceptance. The approved revisions will thereafter, in all respects, apply in lieu of the original schedule. Failure of Contractor to follow the progress schedule submitted and accepted, including revisions thereof, shall relieve Owner of any and all responsibility for furnishing and making available all or any portion of the job site, and will relieve Owner of any responsibility for delays to Contractor in the performance of the work. The cost of preparing the progress schedule, any supplementary progress schedules, and weekly schedules shall be considered incidental to the Contract and no other compensation shall be made. at 1-08.4 Notice to Proceed and Prosecution of the Work Section 1-08.4 is supplemented as follows: (******) di Notice to Proceed will be given after the Contract has been executed and the Contract bond and evidence of insurances have been approved and filed by the Owner. The Contractor shall not commence the Work until the Notice to Proceed has been given by the Engineer.The Contractor shall commence construction activities on the Project Site within ten days of the Notice to Proceed Date. 38 err! The Work thereafter shall be prosecuted diligently, vigorously, and without unauthorized interruption. until physical completion of the Work. There shall be no voluntary shutdowns or slowing of operations b the Contractor without prior approval of the Engineer. Such approval shall not relieve +wr the Contractor from the Contractual obligation to complete the Work within the prescribed Contract Time. r 1-08.5 Time For Completion The first five paragraphs of Section 1-08.5 are deleted and replaced with the following: r. The Work shall be physically completed in its entirety within the time specified in the Contract Documents or as extended by the Engineer. The Contract Time will be stated in"working days", shall begin on the Notice To Proceed Date, and shall end on the Contract Completion Date. A nonworking day is defined as a Saturday, a Sunday, a day on which the contract specifically suspends work, or one of these holidays: January 1, Memorial Day, July 4, Labor Day, November 11, Thanksgiving Day, the day after Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day. The day before Christmas shall be a holiday when Christmas Day occurs on a Tuesday or Friday. The day after Christmas shall be a holiday when Christmas Day occurs on a Monday, Wednesday, or Thursday. When Christmas Day occurs on a Saturday, the two preceding working days shall be observed as holidays. When Christmas day occurs on a Sunday, the two working days following shall be observed as holidays. When holidays other than Christmas fall on a Saturday, the preceding Friday will be counted as a w non-working day and when they fall on a Sunday,the following Monday will be counted as a non- working day. The Contract Time has been established to allow for periods of normal inclement weather which, from historical records, is to be expected during the Contract Time, and during which periods, work is anticipated to be performed. Each successive working day, beginning with the Notice to Proceed Date and ending with the Physical Completion Date, shall be charged to the Contract Time as it occurs except a day or part of a day which is designated a nonworking day or an Engineer r� determined unworkable day. The Engineer will furnish the Contractor a weekly report showing(1) the number of working days charged against the Contract Time for the preceding week; (2) the Contract Time in working days; (3) the number of working days remaining in the Contract Time; (4) the number of nonworking days; and (5) any partial or whole days the Engineer declared unworkable the previous week. This weekly report will be correlated with the Contractor's current approved progress schedule. If the Contractor elects to work 10 hours a day and 4 days a week(a 4-10 schedule) and the fifth day of the week in which a 4-10 shift is worked would ordinarily be charged as a working day then the fifth day of that week will be charged as a working day whether or not the Contractor works on that day. The Contractor will be allowed 10 calendar days from the date of each report in which to file a written protest of an alleged discrepancy in the Contract Time as reported. Otherwise, the report will be deemed to have been accepted by the Contractor as correct. The requirements for scheduling the Final Inspection and establishing the Substantial Completion, Physical Completion, and Completion Dates are specified in Sections 1-05.11 and 1-05.12. Section 1-08.5 is supplemented as follows: r 39 Within 10 calendar days after execution of the Contract by the Contracting Agency, Contractor shall " provide the Contracting Agency with copies of purchase orders for all equipment items deemed critical by the Contracting Agency, including but not limited to signal controller materials, lighting standards, and signal standards required for the physical completion of the contract. Such purchase orders shall disclose the estimated delivery dates for the equipment. All items of Work which can be performed without delivery of the critical items shall start and be completed as soon as possible. At that time, Engineer may suspend the work upon request of Contractor until the critical items are delivered to Contractor, if the Contracting Agency received a purchase order within 10 calendar days after execution of the Contract by the Contracting Agency. Contractor will be entitled to only one such suspension of time during the performance of the Work and during such suspension shall not perform any additional Work on the project. Upon delivery of the critical items, Contract time will resume and continue to be charged in accordance with Section 1- 08. lot 1-08.6 Suspension of Work Section 1-08.6 is supplemented as follows: Owner may at any time suspend the Work, or any part thereof,by giving notice to Contractor in writing. The Work shall be resumed by Contractor within 14 calendar days after the date fixed in the written notice from Owner to Contractor to do so. Contractor shall not suspend Work under the Contract without the written order of Owner. �i l:f it has been determined that Contractor is entitled to an extension of time,the amount of such extension shall be only to compensate for direct delays and shall be based upon Contractor's diligently pursuing the Work at a rate not less than that which would have been necessary to complete the original Contract Work on time. 1-08.9 Liquidated Damages Section 1-08.9 is supplemented as follows: In addition, Contractor shall compensate Owner for actual engineering, inspection, and supervision costs and any other expenses and legal fees incurred by Owner as a result of such delay. Such labor costs will be billed to Contractor at actual costs, including administrative overhead costs. .In the event that Owner is required to commence any lawsuit in order to enforce any provision of this Contract or to seek redress for any breach thereof, Owner shall be entitled to recover its costs, :including reasonable attorneys fees, from Contractor. 1-08.11 Contractor's Plant and Equipment 'The Contractor alone shall at all times be responsible for the adequacy, efficiency, and sufficiency of :his and his subcontractor's plant and equipment. The Owner shall have the right to make use of the Contractor's plant and equipment in the performance of any Work on the site of the Work. 'The use by the Owner of such plant and equipment shall be considered as extra work and paid for accordingly. No 40 No trlr Neither the Owner nor the Engineer assumes any responsibility, at any time, for the security of the site from the time Contractor's operations have commenced until Final Acceptance of the Work by • the Engineer and the Owner. The Contractor shall employ such measures as additional fencing, barricades, and watchmen service, as he deems necessary for the public safety and for the protection of the site and his plant and equipment. The Owner will be provided keys for all fenced, secured areas. 1-08.12 Attention to Work rw Section 1-08.12 is a new section: r The Contractor shall give his personal attention to and shall supervise the Work to the end that it shall be prosecuted faithfully, and when he is not personally present on the work site, he shall at all times be represented by a competent superintendent who shall have full authority to execute the same, and to supply materials, tools, and labor without delay, and who shall be the legal representative of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be liable for the faithful observance of any instructions delivered to him or to his authorized representative. 1-09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1-09.1 Measurement of Quantities rr� Section 1-09.1 is supplemented by adding the following: Lump Sum. The percentage of lump sum work completed, and payment will be based on the cost percentage breakdown of the lump sum bid price(s) submitted at the preconstruction conference. The Contractor shall submit a breakdown of costs for each lump sum bid item. The breakdown shall list the items included in the lump sum together with a unit price of labor, materials, and equipment for each item. The summation of the detailed unit prices for each item shall add up to the lump sum VW bid. The unit price values may be used as a guideline for determining progress payments or deductions or additions in payment for ordered work changes. Cubic Yard Quantities. Contractor shall provide truck trip tickets for progress payments only in the following manner. Where items are specified to be paid by the cubic yard, the following tally system shall be used. All trucks to be employed on this Work will be measured to determine the volume of each truck. Each truck shall be clearly numbered, to the satisfaction of Engineer, and there shall be no duplication of numbers. Duplicate tally tickets shall be prepared to accompany each truckload of material delivered on the project. All tickets received that do not contain the following information will not be processed for payment: 1. Truck number 2. Quantity and type of material delivered in cubic yards 3. Drivers name, date and time of delivery 4. Location of delivery, by street and stationing on each street 5. Place for Engineer to acknowledge receipt rr 41 wr 6. Pay item number 7. Contract number and/or name It will be Contractor's responsibility to see that a ticket is given to Engineer on the project for each truckload of material delivered. Pay quantities will be prepared on the basis of said tally tickets. Loads will be checked by Engineer to verify quantity shown on ticket. Quantities by Ton. It will be Contractor's responsibility to see that a certified weight ticket is given to the Inspector on the project at the time of delivery of materials for each truckload delivered. Pay quantities will be prepared on the basis of said tally tickets, delivered to Inspector at time of delivery No of materials. Tickets not receipted by Inspector will not be honored for payment. Each truck shall be clearly numbered to the satisfaction of Engineer and there shall be no duplication of numbers. ]Duplicate tickets shall be prepared to accompany each truckload of material delivered to the project. All tickets received that do not contain the following information will not be processed for payment: 1. Truck number :2. Truck tare weight(stamped at source) :3. Gross truck load weight in tons (stamped at source) 4. Net load weight(stamped at source) 5. Driver's name, date, and time of delivery 6. Location for delivery by street and stationing on each street 7. Place for Engineer to acknowledge receipt 8. Pay item number 'a. Contract number and/or name 1-09.3 Scope of Payment Section 1-09.3 is supplemented by adding the following: Unless modified otherwise in the Contract Provisions,the Bid Items listed or referenced in the wr "Payment"clause of each Section of the Standard Specifications, will be the only items for which compensation will be made for the Work described in or specified in that particular Section when the Contractor performs the specified Work. Should a Bid Item be listed in a"Payment"clause but is: 1. Not in the Proposal Form; 2. Work performed for that item by the Contractor; 3. Work that is not stated as included in or incidental to a pay item in the Contract; 4. Not Work that would be required to complete the intent of the Contract per Section 1-04.1; then payment for that Work will be made as for Extra Work pursuant to a Change Order. The words"Bid Item," "Contract Item," and"Pay Item,"and similar terms used throughout the Contract Documents are synonymous. If the"payment" clause in the Specifications relating to any unit Bid Item price in the Proposal Form requires that said unit Bid Item price cover and be considered compensation for certain work or r material essential to the item,then the work or material will not be measured or paid for under any other Unit Bid Item which may appear elsewhere in the Proposal Form or Specifications. ■r 42 nrr ww Pluralized unit Bid Items appearing in these Specifications are changed to singular form. rr Payment for Bid Items listed or referenced in the"Payment"clause of any particular Section of the Specifications shall be considered as including all of the Work required, specified, or described in that particular Section. Payment items will generally be listed generically in the Specifications, and specifically in the bid form. When items are to be"furnished"under one payment item and "installed" under another payment item, such items shall be furnished FOB project site, or, if specified in the Special Provisions, delivered to a designated site. Materials to be"furnished,"or"furnished and installed"under these conditions, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor with regard to storage until such items are incorporated into the Work or, if such items are not to be incorporated into the Work, delivered to the applicable Contracting Agency storage site when provided for in the Specifications. Payment for material "furnished,"but not yet incorporated into the Work, may be made on monthly estimates to the extent allowed. 1-09.7 Mobilization Section 1-09.7 is supplemented as follows: Mobilization shall also include, but not be limited to, the following items: the movement of Contractor's personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the project site; the establishment of an office,buildings, and other facilities necessary for Work on the project;providing sanitary ,rr facilities for Contractor's personnel;and obtaining permits or licenses required to complete the project not furnished by Owner. This item shall also include providing Engineer and Inspectors with access to telephone, facsimile machine, and copy machine during all hours Contractor is working on the jobsite; and a table and chair for their use when needed. Payment will be made for the following bid item(s): "Mobilization,"Lump Sum. 1-09.9 Payments Section 1-09.9 is supplemented as follows: Applications for payment shall be itemized and supported to the extent required by Engineer by receipts or other vouchers showing payment for materials and labor,payments to subcontractors, and other such evidence of Contractor's right to payment as Engineer may direct. Contractor shall submit a progress report with each monthly request for a progress payment. The progress report shall indicate the estimated percent complete for each activity listed on the progress schedule(see Section 1-08.3). 1-09.9(1) Retainage Section 1-09.9(1) is supplemented as follows: The retained amount shall be released as stated in the Standard Specifications if no claims have been filed against such funds as provided by law and if Owner has no unsatisfied claims against Contractor. In the event claims are filed, Owner shall withhold,until such claims are satisfied, a sum rrr 43 tri sufficient to satisfy all claims and to pay attorney's fees. In addition, Owner shall withhold such amount as is required to satisfy any claims by Owner against Contractor, until such claims have been finally settled. No Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage shall become due until Contractor, if :requested, delivers to Owner a complete release of all liens arising out of this Contract, or receipts in full in lieu thereof, and, if required in either case, an affidavit that so far as Contractor has knowledge rfr or information, the release and receipts include all labor and materials for which a lien could be filed: but Contractor may, if any subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or receipt in full, furnish a bond satisfactorily to Engineer to indemnify Owner against the lien. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all W payments are made, Contractor shall reimburse to Owner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable Engineer's and attorney's fees. 1-09.9(2) Contracting Agency's Right to Withhold and Disburse Certain Amounts .rr Section 1-09.9(2) is a new section: In addition to monies retained pursuant to RCW 60.28 and subject to RXW 39.04.250, RCW 39.12 and RCW 39.76, the Contractor authorizes the Engineer to withhold progress payments due or deduct an amount from any payment or payments due the Contractor which, in the Engineer's opinion, may be necessary to cover the Contracting Agency's costs for or to remedy the following situations: 1. Damage to another contractor when there is evidence thereof and a claim has been filed. 2. Where the Contractor has not paid fees or charges to public authorities of municipalities which the Contractor is obligated to pay. 3. Utilizing material, tested and inspected by the Engineer, for purposes not connected with the Work(Section 1-05.6) 4. Landscape damage assessments per Section 1-07.16. 5. For overtime work performed by City personnel per Section 1-08.1(4) 6. Anticipated or actual failure of the Contractor to complete the Work on time: a. Per Section 1-08.9 Liquidated Damages; or tri b. Lack of construction progress based upon the Engineer's review of the Contractor's approved progress schedule which indicates the Work will not be complete within the Contract Time. When calculating an anticipated time overrun, the Engineer will make allowances for weather delays, approved unavoidable delays, and suspensions of the Work. The amount withheld under this subparagraph will be base upon the liquidated dames amount per day se forth in Contract Documents multiplied by the number of days the Contractor's approved progress schedule, in the opinion of the Engineer, indicates the Contract may exceed the Contract Time. 7. Failure of the Contractor to perform any of the Contractor's other obligations under the Contract, including but not limited to: a. Failure of the Contractor to provide the Engineer with a field office when required by the Contract Provisions. b. Failure of the Contractor to protect survey stakes, markers, etc., or to provide adequate survey work as required by Section 1-05.5. c. Failure of the Contractor to correct defective or unauthorized work(Section 1-05.8). d. Failure of the Contractor to furnish a Manufacture's Certificate of Compliance in lieu of material testing and inspection as required by Section 1-06.3. e. Failure to submit weekly payrolls, Intent to Pay Prevailing Wage forms, or correct underpayment to employees of the Contractor or subcontractor of any tier as required by Section 1-07.9. f Failure of the Contractor to pay worker's benefits(Title 50 and Title 51 RCW) as required by Section 1-07.10. ■o g. Failure of the Contractor to submit and obtain approval of a progress schedule per Section 1-08.3. 44 rl in i The Contractor authorizes the Engineer to act as agent for the Contractor disbursing such funds as have been withheld pursuant to this section to a party or parties who are entitled to payment. at Disbursement of such funds, if the Engineer elects to do so will be made only after giving the Contractor 15 calendar days prior written notice of the Contracting Agency's intent to do so, and if prior to the expiration of the 15-calendar day period, 1. No legal action has commenced to resolve the validity of the claims, and 2. The Contractor has not protested such disbursement. A proper accounting of all funds disbursed on behalf of the Contractor in accordance with this section will be made. A payment made pursuant to this section shall be considered as payment make under the terms and conditions of the Contract. The Contracting Agency shall not be liable to the r�. Contractor for such payment make in good faith. 1-09.9(3) Final Payment do Section 1-09.9(2) is a new section: ML Upon Acceptance of the Work by the Contracting Agency the final amount to be paid the Contactor will be calculated based upon a Final Progress Estimate made by the Engineer. Acceptance by the Contractor of the Final Payment shall be and shall operate as a release: err 1. to the Contracting Agency of all claims and all liabilities of the Contractor, other than claims in stated amounts as may be specifically excepted in writing by the Contractor; 2. for all things done or furnished in connection with the Work; 3. for every act and neglect by the Contracting Agency; and 4. for all other claims and liability relating to or arising out of the Work. A payment(monthly, final, retainage, or otherwise) shall not release the Contractor or the Contractor's Surety from any obligation required under the terms of the Contract Documents or the Contract Bond; nor shall such payment constitute a waiver of the Contracting Agency's ability to investigate and act upon findings of non-compliance with the WMBE requirements of the Contract; nor shall such payment preclude the Contracting Agency from recovering damages, setting penalties, or obtaining such other remedies as may be permitted by law. Before the Work will be accepted by the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall submit an affidavit, on the form provided by the Engineer, of amounts paid to certified disadvantaged (DB), +�•r minority (MBE) or women business enterprises (WBE)participating in the Work. Such affidavit shall certify the amounts paid to the DB, MBE or WBE subcontractors regardless of tier. On Federally-funded projects the Contractor may also be required to execute and furnish the Contracting Agency an affidavit certifying that the Contractor has not extended any loans, gratuity or gift and money pursuant to Section 1-07.19 of these Specifications. If the Contractor fails, refuses, or is unable to sign and return the Final Progress Estimate or any other documents required for the final acceptance of the Contract, the Contracting Agency reserves the right to establish a completion date and unilaterally accept the Contract. Unilateral acceptance will occur only after the Contractor has been provided the opportunity,by written request from the Engineer, to voluntarily submit such documents, If voluntary compliance is not achieved, formal 45 w notification of the impending unilateral acceptance will be provided by certified letter from the Engineer to the Contractor which will provide 30 calendar days for the Contractor to submit the necessary documents. The 30-calendar day deadline shall begin on the date of the postmark of the certified letter from the Engineer requesting the necessary documents. This reservation by the +w Contracting Agency to unilaterally accept the Contract will apply to contracts that are completed in accordance with Section 1-08.5 or for contracts that are terminated in accordance with Section 1- 08.10. Unilateral acceptance of the Contract by the Contracting Agency does not in any way relieve aril the Contractor of the provisions under Contract or of the responsibility to comply with all laws, . ordinances, and regulations—Federal, State, or local—that affect the Contract. The dated the Contraction Agency unilaterally signs the Final Progress Estimate constitutes the final acceptance we date(Section 1-05.12). 1-09.11(2) Claims ]Paragraph 5 is revised as follows: ;'Failure to submit with the Final Application for Payment such information and details as described in this section for any claim shall operate as a waiver of the claims by the Contractor as provided in Section 1-09.9. .1-09.11(3) Time Limitations and Jurisdiction M :Paragraph 1, Sentence 1 is revised as follows: ...such claims or causes of action shall be brought in the Superior Court of the county where the work is performed. 1-09.13(3)B Procedures to Pursue Arbitration Section 1-09.13(3)B is supplemented by adding: 'The findings and decision of the board of arbitrators shall be final and binding on the parties, unless the aggrieved party, within 10 days, challenges the findings and decision by serving and filing a petition for review by the superior court of King County, Washington. The grounds for the petition for review are limited to showing that the findings and decision: 1. Are not responsive to the questions submitted; 2. Is contrary to the terms of the Contract or any component thereof; 3. Is arbitrary and/or is not based upon the applicable facts and the law controlling the issues submitted to arbitration. The board of arbitrators shall support its decision by setting forth in writing their findings and conclusions based on the evidence adduced at any such Imi hearing. The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the statutes of the State of Washington and court decisions governing such procedure. The costs of such arbitration shall be borne equally by the City and the Contractor unless it is the board's majority opinion that the Contractor's filing of the protest or action is capricious or without reasonable foundation. In the latter case, all costs shall be borne by the Contractor. 1-09.14 Payment Schedule Section 1-09.14 is a new section. w 46 arr rr GENERAL 1-0914(A) Scope r , A. Payment for the various items of the Bid Sheets, as further specified herein, shall include all compensation to be received by the Contractor for furnishing all tools, equipment, supplies, and manufactured articles, and for all labor, operations, and incidentals appurtenant to the items of work being described, as necessary to complete the various items of the work all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including all appurtenances thereto, and including all costs of compliance with the regulations of public regulations of public agencies having jurisdiction, including Safety and Health Administration of the U.S. Department of Labor(OSHA). Separate payment rrr will not be made for any item that is not specifically set forth in the Bid schedules, and all costs therefore shall be included in the prices named in the Bid schedules for the various appurtenant items of Work. rr B. The Owner shall not pay for material quantities that exceed the actual measured amount used and approved by the Engineer. 1-09.14(B) Mobilization (Not to Exceed 8% of Contract Total) (Bid Item 001) Measurement for Mobilization, shall be based on the requirements specified in Section 1-09.7 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. Payment for Mobilization will be made at the lump sum amount for Bid(NOT to exceed 8% of total amount Bid for this item prior to completion of construction) based on the percent of completed Work as defined in Section 1-09.7 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions for Mobilization. Payment for the remaining 20%will be made upon completion and final clean-up of the construction site. Such payment will be complete compensation for all mobilization of employees, equipment and materials, preparation of all necessary submittals bonds insurance, site improvements, clean-up etc. all in conformance with the Contract Documents. 1-0914(C) Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasures (SPCC) Plan (Bid Item 002) Measurement for Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasures (SPCC) Plan, shall be based on the requirements specified in Section 1-07.15(1) of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. Payment for Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasures(SPCC) Plan will be made based upon the following schedule. Payment will be made for 25%of the bid amount after the SPCC Plan has been accepted by the Engineer. Payment for 50%of the bid amount will be made after features of the Plan have been constructed onsite and are in place. Payment for the remaining 25% will be made upon substantial completion of the Contract. Such payment will be complete compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, preparation of all necessary submittals, clean-up etc. to plan and maintain all Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasures to conform with Section 1-07.15(1). 1-09.14(D) Traffic Control (Bid Item 003) Measurement shall be lump sum as specified in Section 1-10.4 in these Special Provisions. r■r Payment shall be as specified in Section 1-10.5 in these Special Provisions. 1-09.14(E) Construction Surveying and As-builts (Bid Item 004) Measurement shall be lump sum for the bid item "Construction Surveying and As-builts." wr 47 WW Payment shall be as specified in Section 1-11.4 in these Special Provisions and supplemented with the following: Payment for"Construction Surveying and As-builts"will be made at the measured percentage amount for the pay period times the lump sum amount Bid, said payment will be complete compensation for all Work, labor, equipment, and materials to establish lines, grades, and depths for construction of the sewage lift station wet well, valve vault, overflow storage vault, control building, manholes, existing facilities, site grading, sewer force main, sewer gravity main and other improvements to the line and grade as shown on the Drawings, and to provide the required construction and as-constructed field (as-built infonnation) notes and drawings, etc. required to complete this item of Work in conformance with the Contract Documents as specified in the applicable provisions of Sections 1-05.4(3), 1-05.4(4), and 1-11. The cost of any restaking as may be required for any reason shall be incidental to this bid item and no additional costs for restaking will be paid by the Owner. No more than 50% of the Bid amount for this item shall be paid prior to the review and acceptance of the as-constructed information by the Engineer. 1-09.14(F) Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material(Bid Item 005) Measurement for"Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material" shall be measured in Tons based on the placed weight of material installed. Placement of foundation material will be measured only for the area(s) authorized by the Engineer. Certified weight tickets shall accompany each load, a copy of tickets shall be given to the Engineer daily. Wasted materials will not be included in the measurement or payment. Payment for"Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material"will be made at the amount Bid per ton, which payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 2- 03 for all labor, materials, equipment, excavation, foundation materials,haul, placement, water, compaction, removal and disposal of waste material, etc. required to complete this item of Work in conformance with the Contract Documents. Work shall also include sawcut,removal, and disposal of wir existing asphalt. 1-09.14(G) Gravel Borrow (As Required)(Bid Item 006) Measurement for"Gravel Borrow (As Required)"shall be measured in Tons based on the weight of material installed into the work. Certified weight tickets shall accompany each load, a copy of tickets shall be given to the Engineer daily. Wasted materials will not be included in the measurement or payment. Only materials placed within the pay limits shown will be considered for payment. Material placed outside of the pay limits shown on the plans or as approved by the Engineer will be deducted from the certified tickets. Payment for"Gravel Borrow (As Required)" will be made for Work specified in Section 2-03.5 and made at the amount Bid per ton,which payment will be complete compensation for all labor, materials, equipment, hauling, placement, water, compaction, removal and disposal of waste materials, etc. required to complete this item of Work in conformance with the Contract Documents. 1-09.14(H) Washed Rock for Infiltration Trench (Bid Item 007) Measurement for"Washed Rock for Infiltration Trench" shall be measured in Tons based on the weight of material installed into the work. Certified weight tickets shall accompany each load, a copy of tickets shall be given to the Engineer daily. Wasted materials will not be included in the measurement or payment. Only materials placed within the pay limits shown will be considered for + payment. Material placed outside of the pay limits shown on the plans or as approved by the Engineer will be deducted from the certified tickets. 48 r rr Payment for"Washed Rock for Infiltration Trench"will be made for Work specified in Section 2- 03.5 and made at the amount Bid per ton, which payment will be complete compensation for all labor, r.r materials, equipment, hauling, placement, water, compaction, removal and disposal of waste materials, etc. required to complete this item of Work in conformance with the Contract Documents. 1-09.14(1) Trench Shoring or Extra Excavation Class A and B (Bid Item 008) o'" Measurement shall be per lump sum for"Trench Shoring or Extra Excavation Class A and B" and per the cost breakdown percentage requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. �r Payment for"Trench Shoring or Extra Excavation Class A and B"will be made by the percentage of Work complete. Payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 2-09 for all Wrr equipment, labor, materials, hauling, planning, design, engineering, submittals, furnishing and constructing and removal and disposal of such temporary sheeting, shoring, and bracing complete as required under the provisions of any permits and in the requirements of OSHA and RCW Chapter 49.17, etc. required to complete construction of all gravity pipes, force mains, manholes, oil/water separator, storm water pipe, and infiltration trenches in conformance with the Contract Documents. Shoring and Excavation for wet well, overflow storage vault, and valve vault will be paid under other �.r Bid items in the Contract. 1-09.14(J) Crushed Surfacing Top Course (As Required) (Bid Item 009) Measurement for"Crushed Surfacing Top Course"shall be measured in tons based on the weight of material installed into the work. Certified weight tickets shall accompany each load, a copy of tickets shall be given to the Engineer daily. Wasted materials will not be included in the measurement or payment. Only materials placed within the pay limits shown will be considered for payment. .r Material placed outside of the pay limits shown on the plans or as approved by the Engineer will be deducted from the certified tickets. Payment for"Crushed Surfacing Top Course"will be made at the amount Bid per ton, which payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 4-04 for all labor, materials, equipment, hauling, placement, water, compaction, removal and disposal of waste materials, etc. required to complete this item of Work in conformance with the Contract Documents. 1-09.14(x) Crushed Surfacing Base Course (Bid Item 010) rrr Measurement for"Crushed Surfacing Base Course" shall be measured in tons based on the weight of material installed into the work. Certified weight tickets shall accompany each load, a copy of tickets shall be given to the Engineer daily. Wasted materials will not be included in the measurement or payment. Only materials placed within the pay limits shown will be considered for payment. Material placed outside of the pay limits shown on the plans or as approved by the Engineer will be deducted from the certified tickets. Payment for"Crushed Surfacing Base Course"will be made at the amount Bid per ton, which payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 4-04 for all labor, materials, equipment, hauling, placement, water, compaction, removal and disposal of waste materials, etc. +rr required to complete this item of Work in conformance with the Contract Documents. 1-09.14(L) HMA Class %"PG 64-22 (Bid Item 011) Measurement for"HMA Class '/2" PG 64-22" shall be measured in tons based on the weight of material installed into the Work. Certified weight tickets shall accompany each load, a copy of tickets shall be given to the Engineer daily. Wasted materials will not be included in the rr 49 measurement or payment. Only materials placed within the pay limits shown will be considered for payment. Material placed outside of the pay limits shown on the plans or as approved by the Engineer will be deducted from the certified tickets. Payment for"HMA Class '/2" PG 64-22"will be made at the amount Bid per ton. Payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 5-04 fof all labor,materials, haul, surface preparation, compaction, water, pavement saw cutting, grinding, disposal of waste materials, asphaltic materials,tack oil, placement, asphalt pad around catch basin,cleanup, etc. required to complete this item of Work in conformance with the Contract documents. No additional payment will be made for work necessary to correct HMA not installed in accordance with specifications. 1-09.14(M) Facility Coatings (Bid Item 012) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Facility Coatings" and per the cost percentage breakdown requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these go Special Provisions. The lump sum Bid price shall constitute full compensation for all Work, labor,materials, and equipment necessary to furnish and apply the protective interior coatings, including coatings for ductile iron pipe and steel, and exterior coatings to the 48"manhole, 144-Inch Diam. Precast, Concrete Wet Well, Precast Concrete Overflow Storage Vault, and Precast Concrete Flow Meter and Valve Vault as described in Section 6-07. This shall also include surface preparation,removal and disposal of blast aggregate and waste, and applying all coats for the applicable structure. This shall include but not be limited to coating all pipes, fittings, structural steel, and other miscellaneous appurtenances. This bid item shall also include placement and removal of all scaffolding or other equipment required for access to all surfaces both for cleaning and coating by the Contractor. Coatings used as materials for this bid item shall be the Tnemec products listed in Section 6-07 or an approved equal. Coatings shall be from only one manufacturer. This Bid item shall include all disposal costs and fees, including but not be limited to, disposal of all blast aggregate, hazardous and non-hazardous waste,paint, materials handling, transportation and regulatory compliance costs and all costs associated with submitting a disposal plan for review. rf Coatings for the CMU Control Building shall be paid under the bid item"CMU Control Building with Screening Wall." 1-09.14(N) 6-Inch Diam. PVC. Storm Sewer Pipe (Bid Item 013) Measurement for"6-Inch Diam. PVC Storm Sewer Pipe"will be based on lineal footage measured horizontally over the centerline of the installed pipe. Both 6-Inch Solid Pipe and 6-Inch Perforated pipe will be measured by this bid item. Payment for"6-Inch Diam. PVC Stor n Sewer Pipe" will be made at the amount Bid per linear foot, which payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 7-04 for all labor, materials, equipment, to furnish and install the pipe, including but not limited to hauling, excavation, dewatering, bypass pumping, removal and disposal of waste material,pipe of the size and type required,gaskets, fittings and adaptors, installation, laying and jointing pipe and fittings,bedding, and pipe zone fill material, appurtenances,placement of subsequent backfill (native)materials, compaction, water,grading, cleaning, and testing(exfiltration or low pressure air test and deflection testing), etc. required to complete the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Payment will be complete compensation for all labor,materials, equipment to furnish and place the Geotextile Liner and level spreader as required by the Plans. 50 rw 1-09.14(0) 8-Inch Diam. PVC. Storm Sewer Pipe (Bid Item 014) rr Measurement for"8-Inch Diam. PVC Storm Sewer Pipe"will be based on lineal footage measured horizontally over the centerline of the installed pipe. Both 8-Inch Solid Pipe and 8-Inch Perforated pipe will be measured by this bid item. Payment for"8-Inch Diam. PVC Storm Sewer Pipe" will be made at the amount Bid per linear foot, which payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 7-04 for all labor, materials, equipment, to furnish and install the pipe, including but not limited to hauling, excavation, dewatering, bypass pumping, removal and disposal of waste material,pipe of the size and type required, gaskets, fittings and adaptors, installation, laying and jointing pipe and fittings,bedding, and pipe zone fill material, appurtenances, placement of subsequent backfill (native)materials, compaction, water, grading, cleaning, and testing (exfiltration or low pressure air test and deflection testing), etc. required to complete the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. I-09.14(P) 12-Inch Diam. PVC. Storm Sewer Pipe (Bid Item 015) Measurement for"12-Inch Diam. PVC Stor n Sewer Pipe" will be based on lineal footage measured horizontally over the centerline of the installed pipe. Both 12-Inch Solid Pipe and 12-Inch Perforated pipe will be measured by this bid item. rrr Payment for"12-Inch Diam. PVC Storm Sewer Pipe"will be made at the amount Bid per linear foot, which payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 7-04 for all labor, materials, equipment,to furnish and install the pipe, including but not limited to hauling, excavation, dewatering, bypass pumping, removal and disposal of waste material,pipe of the size and type required, gaskets, fittings and adaptors, installation, laying and jointing pipe and fittings, bedding, and pipe zone fill material, appurtenances, placement of subsequent backfill (native)materials, compaction, water, grading, cleaning, and testing(exfiltration or low pressure air test and deflection testing), etc. required to complete the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. �r 1-09.14(Q) Catch Basin Type 1 and IP(Bid Item 016) Measurement for"Catch Basin Type 1 and 1 P" will be per each installed in conformance with the Contract Documents. Measurement shall be for Type 1 and Type 1P catch basins. Payment for"Catch Basin Type 1 and 1 P"will be made at the unit price Bid per each, which payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 7-05 and in City of Renton Standard Plan for Catch Basin Type 1 P (Std. Plan-200.20), and Catch Basin Type I (Std. Plan-200.00) for all labor, equipment, to furnish and install the catch basin, including but not limited to materials hauling, dewatering, excavation, removal and disposal of waste material, foundation material, catch basin, gaskets, coating system (sealer), frame and lid, installation, adjustment of frames to grade, ladder and rungs, appurtenances, connections, channeling, connection of storm sewer pipes,placement of subsequent backfill (native) materials, compaction, water, cleaning,placement and removal of temporary pavement patching, and testing, etc. required to complete all catch basins in conformance with the Contract Documents. 1-09.14(R) Catch Basin Type I with Birdcage (Bid Item 017) rr Measurement for"Catch Basin Type 1 with Birdcage"will be per each installed in conformance with the Contract Documents. Payment for"Catch Basin Type 1 with Birdcage" will be made at the unit price Bid per each, which Ow payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 7-05 and as shown on the drawings, for all labor, equipment, to furnish and install the catch basin and birdcage, including but Ow 51 Nr not limited to materials hauling, dewatering, excavation, removal and disposal of waste material, foundation material, catch basin, gaskets, coating system (sealer), frame and birdcage grate, installation, adjustment of frames to grade, ladder and rungs, appurtenances, connections, channeling, connection of storm sewer pipes, placement of subsequent backfill (native)materials, compaction, water, cleaning,placement and removal of temporary pavement patching, and testing, etc. required to complete all catch basins in conformance with the Contract Documents. Tide-Flex TF1 Check Valve is incidental to this bid item and will not be measured separately. 1-09.14(S) Oil/Water Separator (Bid Item 018) Measurement for" Oil/Water Separator"will be per each installed in conformance with the Contract Documents. Payment for"Oil/Water Separator"will be made at the unit price Bid per each, which payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 7-05 for all labor, equipment, to furnish and install the separator, including but not limited to materials hauling, dewatering, excavation, removal and disposal of waste material, foundation material, oil/water separator vault of type specified, rI1 gaskets, coating system(sealer), frame and lid, installation, adjustment of frames to grade, ladder and rungs, appurtenances, connections, channeling, connection of storm sewer pipes,placement of subsequent backfill (native)materials, compaction,water,cleaning, and testing, etc. required to complete the oil/water separator in conformance with the Contract Documents. 1-09.14(T) 48-Inch Diam. Sanitary Sewer Manhole Type I (Bid Item 019) Measurement for"48-Inch Diam. Sanitary Sewer Manhole Type 1"will be per each for each type manhole installed in confonnance with the Contract Documents. No measurement will be made for vertical depths in excess of 10 feet. Payment for"48-Inch Diam. Sanitary Sewer Manhole Type 1"will be made at the unit price Bid per each, which payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 7-05 for all labor, equipment, to furnish and install the manhole, including but not limited to,materials hauling, pavement cutting, dewatering, excavation, removal and disposal of waste material, foundation material, concrete base,precast concrete manhole sections, gaskets, connecting sanitary sewer pipes, coating system (sealer), heat shrinkable manhole wrap, manhole frame and lid, installation, adjustment of frames to grade, ladder and rungs, appurtenances, connections, channeling, reconnection of existing sewer(s),placement of subsequent backfill (native)materials, compaction, water, cleaning,placement and removal of temporary pavement patching,and testing, etc. required to complete all manholes in conformance with the Contract Documents. to Manhole coatings will be paid separately under the bid item "Lift Station Coatings. 1-09.14(U) 1-Inch Water Service Connection (Bid Item 020) Measurement for"1-Inch Water Service Connection" will be per each. Payment for"1-Inch Water Service Connection" will be made at the amount Bid per each, which ai payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 7-15 for all labor, materials, equipment, to furnish and install the service connection, including but not limited to hauling, pavement cutting, asphalt concrete pavement removal, cement concrete pavement removal, excavation, dewatering,removal and disposal of waste material, bedding, and pipe zone fill material, tapping water main, all fittings and appurtenances,pipe, PVC sleeve, placement of subsequent backfill (native) materials, compaction,water, grading, cleaning,placement and removal of temporary pavement patching, coordination with King County Water District No. 90 and testing, etc. 52 rwr required to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and applicable King County Water District No. 90 standards. + ► Pipe and work required to connect the backside of the meter to the RPBA in the Control Building will be paid separately under the Bid Item "Control Building Plumbing, Including Roof Drains/Footing Drains." 1-09.14(V) 8-Inch Diam. PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe (Bid Item 021) Measurement for"8-Inch Diam. PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe" will be based on lineal footage measured horizontally over the centerline of the installed pipe. �r. Payment for"8-Inch Diam. PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe"will be made at the amount Bid per linear foot, which payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 7-17 for all labor, materials, equipment, to furnish and install the pipe including hauling, excavation, dewatering, bypass pumping, removal and disposal of waste material, pipe of the size and type required, gaskets, fittings and adaptors, installation, laying and jointing pipe and fittings,bedding, and pipe zone fill material, appurtenances, placement of subsequent backfill (native) materials, compaction,water, grading, cleaning, placement and removal of temporary pavement patching, and testing(exfiltration or low pressure air test and deflection testing), etc. required to complete the Work in accordance with the +r. Contract Documents. 1-09.14(1) 12-Inch Diana. PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe (Bid Item 022) Measurement for" 12-Inch Diam. PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe"will be based on lineal footage measured horizontally over the centerline of the installed pipe. Payment for"12-Inch Diam. PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe" will be made at the amount Bid per linear foot, which payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 7-17 for all labor, materials, equipment, to furnish and install the pipe including hauling, excavation, dewatering, bypass pumping, removal and disposal of waste material,pipe of the size and type required, gaskets, fittings and adaptors, installation, laying and jointing pipe and fittings,bedding, and pipe zone fill material, " appurtenances, placement of subsequent backfill (native) materials compaction, water, grading, cleaning, placement and removal of temporary pavement patching, and testing (exfiltration or low pressure air test and deflection testing), etc. required to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1-09.14(X) 12-Inch Diam. PVC C900 Gravity Sewer Pipe (Bid Item 023) Measurement for"12-Inch Diam. PVC C900 Gravity Sewer Pipe" will be based on lineal footage measured horizontally over the centerline of the installed pipe. Payment for"12-Inch Diam. PVC C900 Gravity Sewer Pipe"will be made at the amount Bid per *a linear foot, which payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 7-21 for all labor, materials, equipment, to furnish and install the pipe including hauling,pavement cutting, asphalt concrete pavement removal, cement concrete pavement removal, excavation, dewatering, aw bypass pumping, removal and disposal of waste material, pipe of the size and type required, gaskets, fittings and adaptors, restraint fittings, thrust blocking, installation, laying and jointing pipe and fittings, bedding, and pipe zone fill material, appurtenances, placement of subsequent backfill (native) r materials, compaction, water,grading, cleaning, placement and removal of temporary pavement patching, and testing(pressure testing) etc., required to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1-09.14(Y) Television Inspection (Bid Item 024) 53 Ow Measurement for"Television Inspection"of the new sewers will be based on the lineal feet of pipe inspected. Payment for"Television Inspection" of the new sewers in accordance with specification section 7- 17.3(2)H will be made at the amount Bid per lineal foot, which payment will be considered complete compensation for all labor,materials, equipment to perform television inspection and prepare videotape record of all new sewers constructed as part of the project. 1-09.14(Z) 8-Inch Diam. PVC C900 Sewer Force Main (Bid Item 025) Measurement for"8-Inch Diam. PVC C900 Sewer Force Main" will be based on lineal footage measured horizontally over the centerline of the installed pipe. Payment for"8-Inch Diam. PVC C900 Sewer Force Main"will be made at the amount Bid per linear foot, which payment will be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 7-21 for all labor, materials, equipment,to furnish and install the pipe including hauling, pavement cutting, asphalt concrete pavement removal, cement concrete pavement removal, excavation, dewatering, bypass pumping,removal and disposal of waste material,pipe of the size and type required, gaskets, fittings and adaptors,restraint fittings, thrust blocking, installation, laying and jointing pipe and fittings, bedding, and pipe zone fill material, appurtenances, placement of subsequent backfill (native) materials,compaction,water, grading, cleaning, placement and removal of temporary pavement ,rte patching, and testing(pressure testing) etc., required to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1-09.14(AA) Temporary Erosion/Sedimentation Controls (Bid Item 026) ' Measurement for"Temporary Erosion/Sediment Controls"will be based on the percentage of total Work complete,by dollar value, at the time of measurement. Payment for"Temporary Erosion/Sediment Controls"will be at the lump sum amount Bid, which payment shall be complete compensation for Work specified in Section 8-01 for all labor, materials, equipment, filter fabric and construction fencing, quarry spalls, straw-bale dikes,plastic sheeting, inlet protection, seeding, street cleaning, tire wash, ESC Lead, temporary sediment ponds, Baker Tank(s), temporary construction entrance, etc. required to complete this item of Work in conformance with Contract Documents. 1-09.14(BB) Landscaping (Bid Item 027) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Landscaping" and per the cost breakdown percentage requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these err Special Provisions. Payment for"Landscaping" will be considered complete compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment to perform the Work as described in Section 8.02, including soil preparation; providing and placing compost; hauling and disposing of waste materials; providing and planting trees; shrubs, and ground covers; and providing and placing bark mulch; staking, pruning, fertilizing, weeding, cleanup, pest control,watering, maintenance, protection and replacement of plants through the plant establishment period. 1-09.14(CC) Topsoil Type C(Bid Item 028) .r Measurement shall be per Cubic Yard of material placed for"Topsoil Type C"per 8-02.5. Payment for"Topsoil Type C"will be considered complete compensation for all labor, materials, and No equipment to perform the Work as described in Section 8.02, including soil preparation;providing 54 w and amending with compost per King County standards; hauling and disposing of waste materials; placement and compaction, and hydroseeding. 1-09.14(DD) Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter (Bid Item 029) Measurement for"Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter" will be based on lineal footage measured for both Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter and for Type 3 Extruded Curb per 8-04.4. Payment for"Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter"will be considered complete compensation for Work as specified in Section 8-04 for all labor, materials, and equipment to place Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter and Type 3 Extruded Curb where shown on Plans or as directed by the Engineer. 1-09.14(EE) Cement Concrete Driveway Entrance (Bid Item 030) Measurement for"Cement Concrete Driveway Entrance"will be per 8-06.4. r Payment for"Cement Concrete Driveway Entrance"will be considered complete compensation for Work as specified in Section 8-06 for all labor,materials, and equipment to place"Cement Concrete Driveway Entrance"where shown on Plans or as directed by the Engineer. +r► 1-09.14(FF) Chain Link Fence (Bid Item 031) Measurement for"Chain Link Fence"will be per linear foot of completed fence along the ground �.r line, exclusive of openings. Payment for"Chain Link Fence"will be considered complete compensation for Work for all labor, materials, and equipment to perform the Work in Section 8-12, including providing all fencing, posts, concrete footings, and appurtenances required to construct the fencing as shown on Plans or as directed by the Engineer. 1-09.14(GG) Chain Link Gate (Bid Item 032) Measurement for"Chain Link Gate"will be per each furnished and installed. +r Payment for"Chain Link Gate" will be considered complete compensation for Work for all labor, materials, and equipment to perform the Work in Section 8-12, including providing all the gate, fencing, posts, concrete footings, chain links, welding, latch mechanism, and appurtenances required to construct the gate and gate lock as shown on plans. rrr 1-09.14(HH) Cement Concrete Sidewalk (Bid Item 033) Measurement for"Cement Concrete Sidewalk will be per square yard placed and accepted. Payment for"Cement Concrete Sidewalk"will be considered complete compensation for Work as specified in Section 8-14 for all labor,materials, and equipment including excavation and haul, rr compaction, placing foundation materials, forming,placing, brushing, etc. required to provide "Cement Concrete Sidewalk" where shown on Plans or as directed by the Engineer. 1-09.14(II) Quarry Spalls (As Required) (Bid Item 034) .r Payment for"Quarry Spalls (As Required)"will be considered complete compensation for Work as specified in Section 8-15 for all labor, materials, and equipment required to provide"Quarry Spalls (As Required)" where shown on Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Measurement for"Quarry Spalls (As Required)" shall be measured in Tons based on the weight of material installed into the work. Certified weight tickets shall accompany each load, a copy of tickets or shall be given to the Engineer daily. Wasted materials will not be included in the measurement or payment. Only materials placed within the pay limits shown will be considered for payment. +rr 55 Material placed outside of the pay limits shown on the plans or as approved by the Engineer will be too deducted from the certified tickets. Payment for"Quarry Spalls (As Required)"will be made for Work specified in Section 8-15.5 and " made at the amount Bid per ton, which payment will be complete compensation for all labor, materials, equipment, hauling, placement, water, compaction, removal and disposal of waste materials, etc. required to complete this item of Work in conformance with the Contract Documents. 1-09.14(JJ) Pavement Marking (Bid Item 035) Measurement shall be per lump sum for"Pavement Marking" and per the cost percentage breakdown as specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. Payment for"Pavement Marking"will be considered complete compensation for Work as specified in Section 8-22 for all labor,materials, and equipment including preparation of road surface, providing lines and turn arrows, providing"Right Lane Must Turn" sign, and placing markings as required to provide pavement markings where shown on Plans or as directed by the Engineer. 1-09.14(KK) Gravity Block Wall(Bid Item 036) Measurement shall be per square foot of face of completed wall in place for"Gravity.Block Wall." Payment for"Gravity Block Wall"will be considered complete compensation for Work as specified in Section 8-24 for all labor, materials, and equipment including gravity wall blocks, gravel backfill for drains,4-Inch perforated PVC pipe, and geotextile liner as required to construct a gravity block wall where shown on Plans or as directed by the Engineer. 1-09.14(LL) Bollard(Bid Item 03 7) Measurement for"Bollard" shall be per each placed and accepted by the Engineer. Payment for"Bollard"will be considered complete compensation for all Work as shown in City of 46 Renton Standard Detail H020 including all labor,materials, and equipment. 1-09.14(MM) Site Clearing and Grading(Bid Item 038) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Site Clearing and Grading"and per the cost breakdown percentage requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. .r The lump sum Bid item for"Site Clearing and Grading" shall include all costs associated with tree protections and removal, clearing and grubbing, removal, hauling, and disposal of existing surface materials, and all grading required to construct the facilities to the lines and grades shown. Fill material as required to establish final grades shall be paid for under the bid item"Imported Backfill Material." 1-09.14(NN) Lift Station Excavation and Backfill(Bid Item 039) Measurement shall be lump sum for the wet well,valve vault, and overflow storage for"Lift Station Excavation and Backfill" and per the cost breakdown percentage requirements specified in Section I- 09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. The percentage cost breakdown shall also conform to the requirements described below. The lump sum Bid for"Lift Station Excavation and Backfill" constitutes full compensation for all Work, labor, materials, and equipment associated with excavating, storing and handling the native 56 r material for subsequent use as backfill,backfilling with native material if it meets required specifications, furnishing, hauling,and installing imported select material within the defined vertical prism if native material does not meet the required specifications, removal, loading, and hauling excess or unsuitable native material to an approved disposal site, disposal, and compacting all backfill. The lump sum Bid shall also include all costs associated with placing and compacting backfill materials around the wet well, valve vault, overflow storage and associated appurtenances. r The mud mat(foundation gravel or lean concrete beneath base slab) used to support the concrete foundation for the wet well, overflow storage, or valve vault shall be paid under this Bid item. Contractor shall be responsible for determining the required earthwork quantities associated with this lump sum Bid price. The Engineer reserves the right to classify any native soil as unsuitable if the soil does not appear to meet the gradation requirements or becomes unsuitable because of moisture, contamination, or separation. The Contractor shall remove, load,haul, and dispose of said material and replace with imported material meeting the requirements herein at his cost. Contractor may dispute the declaration of a material as unsuitable by obtaining soil tests on the material at his cost. If the material is found to be suitable,then the City will reimburse the Contractor for the cost of the OW soils testing. Any costs related to caisson construction, should the Contractor elect to construct the wet well using the sunken-caisson method, shall be paid for under this bid item. All backfill shall be tested for compaction. The City shall pay for the initial compaction testing. Contractor shall pay all costs associated with any retesting where initial compaction does not meet Specification requirements. Partial payment shall be made as follows: WO (1) Excavation complete 50%of lump sum price Bid. r (2) Backfill, compaction, 50%of lump sum price Bid. and testing complete All backfill of native and import materials, import of select material, compaction, and dewatering required when excavation beyond the defined vertical prism is used in lieu of shoring and cribbing for compliance with WISHA, Chapter 49.17 RCW shall be paid under the Bid item for"Lift Station Shoring and Trench Safety Systems." �r► Excavation, backfill, and import of select material associated with the control building shall be paid under separate Bid items. wr Excavation, backfill, and import of select material associated with the gravity sewer or force mains shall be paid under separate Bid items. Clearing, grubbing, removal of structures and obstructions and other preparatory work is covered under the Bid item"Site Clearing and Grading." I-09.14(00) Lift Station Shoring and Trench Safety Systems (Bid Item 040) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Lift Station Shoring and Trench Safety Systems" and per the cost breakdown percentage requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. 57 r The lump sum Bid price for"Lift Station Shoring and Trench Safety Systems"shall include all shoring activities associated with the excavation for the overflow storage vault,wet well, and valve vault. The shoring system shall maintain a vertical excavation that is free of excessive movement and of the size needed to construct the overflow storage vault,wet well, valve vault, and appurtenances. W Work shall consist of designing, constructing, maintaining, operating, and removing shoring; sheeting; cribbing; backfill and compaction; and other Work required for compliance with WISHA, Chapter 49.17 RCW. This bid item shall also include all excavation, backfill, compaction, and +rri dewatering required when excavation beyond a vertical excavation is used in lieu of shoring and cribbing for compliance with WISHA, Chapter 49.17 RCW. Contractor shall obtain written approval from Owner if Contractor wants to leave any shoring in place as permanent shoring. All costs associated with obtaining said approval and leaving shoring in place shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Costs for WISHA compliance for the excavation of the overflow storage vault, wet well, and valve vault shall not be incidental to any other bid items. rrr This item shall include all shoring and trench safety measures necessary to comply with the requirements of the permits and permitting agencies. Contractor shall pay for all special inspections as required for the installation of tie-backs and lagging utilized in shoring wall construction. Any costs related to shoring and safety systems, should the Contractor elect to construct the wet well using the sunken-caisson method, shall be paid for under this bid item. rri Shoring required for abandonment of the Summerwind or Stonegate lift stations,pipe trenching, and manhole construction shall be paid under the bid item "Shoring or Extra Excavation, Class A." 1-09.14(PP) Dewatering System (Bid Item 041) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Dewatering System" and per the cost breakdown percentage requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. The lump sum Bid price for the"Dewatering System" shall include all dewatering activities associated with the excavation for the overflow storage vault, wet well, manhole, valve vault, and pipe systems. Work under this bid item shall include all dewatering activities associated with removing any additional water which enters the excavation through and/or resulting from the existing and proposed gravity sewer and force main trenches. The lump sum bid for this item shall constitute full compensation for all Work, labor, materials, and equipment involved in installation and operation of all dewatering facilities described on the Drawings and necessary to maintain "dry" conditions without impacting any neighboring structures including houses and roadways. The lump sum bid shall include, but not be limited to, drilling any well-points or deep wells, furnishing, maintaining, and removing any temporary piping, pumps, Baker Tanks or other water quality treatment facilities, accessories, and preparation, installation and operation of the dewatering dispersal area. The lump sum bid for this item shall also constitute full compensation for all Work, labor,materials, and equipment necessary to abandon all existing on site exploratory borings and groundwater monitoring wells per the applicable portions of the WAC, including wells or borings on the site installed before and during this contract. 58 �r Any costs related to dewatering, should the Contractor elect to construct the wet well using the sunken-caisson method, shall be paid for under this bid item. . 4W 1-09.14(QQ) 144-Inch Diam. Precast Concrete Wet Well(Bid Item 042) Measurement shall be lump sum for"144-Inch Diam. Precast Concrete Wet Well" and per the cost breakdown percentage requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as No supplemented in these Special Provisions. The lump sum Bid price for"144-Inch Diam. Precast Concrete Wet Well"shall constitute full No compensation for all Work, labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the construction of the wet well including, but not limited to, the following: • Purchase, delivery, and installation of the 144-Inch Diam. Precast Concrete Wet Well including temporary storage as necessary; • Furnishing, erecting, and removing any required forms, supports, caissons, or r structural shoring; • Furnishing and installing all structural steel reinforcing; • Furnishing, installing, and finishing the Portland Cement Concrete; wr • Furnishing, installing, and finishing Portland Cement Concrete and structural steel around exterior as shown on Plans; • Furnishing and installing PVC water stops and pre-molded joint filler; • Furnishing and heat shrinkable wrap; • Forming the concrete channels, sumps, and walls within the station as shown on the Drawings; irr • Furnishing and installing all structural supports and beams; • Furnishing and installing the air vent, including piping and fittings; • Furnishing and installing one Uni-Hoist core mounted sleeve; arr Imported backfill shall be paid for under the bid item Imported Backfill Material. 1-09.14(RR) Precast Concrete Overflow Storage Vault (Bid Item 043) r Measurement shall be lump sum for"Precast Concrete Overflow Storage Vault"and per the cost breakdown percentage requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. rr The lump sum Bid price for"Precast Concrete Overflow Storage Vault" shall constitute full compensation for all Work, labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the construction of the vault aw including,but not limited to, the following: • Purchase, delivery and installation of the precast concrete overflow storage vault including temporary storage as necessary; Wr • Furnishing, erecting, and removing any required forms, supports, or structural shoring; OW • Furnishing and installing all structural steel reinforcing; Furnishing, installing, and finishing the Portland Cement Concrete; • Furnishing, installing, and finishing Portland Cement Concrete and structural steel around exterior as shown on Plans; • Furnishing and installing PVC water stops and pre-molded joint filler; wr 59 • Forming the concrete channels, sumps, and walls within the station as shown on the No Drawings; • Connecting 12-inch gravity sewers; • Furnishing and installing all structural supports and beams; to • Furnishing and installing the air vents • Furnishing and installing two Uni-Hoist core mounted sleeves; Imported backfill shall be paid for under the bid item Imported Backfill Material. 1-09.14(SS) Precast Concrete Flow Meter and Valve Vault (Bid Item 044) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Precast Concrete Flow Meter and Valve Vault" and per the cost percentage breakdown requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. The lump sum Bid price for"Precast Concrete Flow Meter and Valve Vault" shall constitute full compensation for all Work, labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the construction of the vault including,but not limited to, the following: • Purchase, delivery and installation of the precast concrete flow meter and valve vault including temporary storage as necessary; ' • Furnishing, erecting, and removing any required forms, supports, or structural shoring; • Furnishing and installing all structural steel reinforcing; • Furnishing, installing, and finishing the Portland Cement Concrete; • Furnishing, installing, and finishing Portland cement concrete footing and support blocks; • Furnishing and installing pipe connections and penetrations at the walls; • Furnishing and installing all structural supports and beams; • Furnishing and installing the sump pump, aluminum sump grating with drain knockout, and sump pump force main from the valve vault to the discharge within the wet well, including penetrations and associated hardware„ • Furnishing and installing two Uni-Hoist core mounted sleeves; Dewatering shall be paid for under the bid item Dewatering System. Imported backfill shall be paid for under the bid item Imported Backfill Material. 1-09.14(TT) CMU Control Building with Screening Wall (Bid Item 045) Measurement shall be lump sum for"CMU Control Building with Screening Wall" and per the cost percentage breakdown requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Conditions. The lump sum Bid price shall constitute full compensation for all Work, labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the"CMU Control Building with Screening Wall" as described herein, as shown on the Drawings, and as necessary to provide a complete, weatherproof building meeting all applicable codes. Items paid for under this section include, but are not limited to the following: • Excavation and backfill below subgrade, including removal, loading, and hauling of excess materials; 60 rrr OW • Foundation preparation, including subgrade preparation,crushed rock, vapor barrier, and sand; • Concrete slab, footings, and equipment pads(including slopes to drain, finishes, NOW coatings, and sealants); • Reinforced CMU walls (and Non-Reinforced CMU walls as applicable) for building and adjacent screening wall, including caps for screening wall; +w • Interior walls, ceiling and wall framing, including gypsum wall board and finishing; • Ceiling/Attic access panels; • Roof trusses and Roof Deck, including blocking; 4r • Steel roofing, ridge, ridge vent, end treatments, and trim; • Fascia, soffit, flashing, trim, and end treatments; • Numerals indicating site address; AN • Gutters and downspouts; • Interior trim, doors, and hardware; • Insulation and weatherstripping; rr • Interior and Exterior Paint and Coatings; • Fire Extinguishers (Sub-Section 10.10050); • Building Switchboard Mats (Sub-Section 10.10050); am • Louvers (Sub-Section 10.10200); • Identifying Devices for all structures (Sub-Section 10.10400); • Building permit testing coordination; am Work related to the Control Building but not included in this Bid item and paid for elsewhere includes: No • Electrical power and control equipment; • Lighting; • HVAC equipment(Mechanical Work); fm • Control Building Plumbing; • Roof and Footing Drains. 1-09.14(UU) Lift Station Piping (Bid Item 046) +y Measurement shall be lump sum for"Lift Station Piping" and per the cost percentage breakdown requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. +ris The unit lump sum bid price for"Lift Station Piping"shall be full compensation for all Work, labor, materials, and equipment necessary to install gravity sewer and force main from the flexible coupling on the inlet gravity sewer near the exterior wall of the wet well, through the wet well and flow meter and valve vault, to the flexible coupling on the exterior wall of the flow meter and valve vault. Also included are the flexible couplings, fittings, and gate valves including valve boxes and covers, and valve extensions, between the wet well and overflow storage vault and on the sewer bypass system ` between manhole and overflow storage vault. Items paid for under this section include, but are not limited to the following: aw • Trench excavation, bedding, laying and jointing the pipe and fittings; • Removal, haul and disposal of the excavated trench material; • Ductile iron gravity sewer pipe, PVC gravity sewer pipe, PVC C900 force main, ductile iron force main, and fittings; 61 w • All brackets, bracing,pipe stands; me • Restraining joints and fittings and retainer glands; • All valves, including check valves and gate valves; • Flow meter; • Pressure gauges; • All flexible couplings, flanged coupling adapters, bends,tees, reducers, and spools; • Concrete thrust blocking and support blocking; • Utility marking tape; • Connections to the gravity sewer main and the sewer force main; .rr The 12-inch PVC C900 pipe for sewer bypass between manhole and overflow storage vault shall be paid for under the bid item Furnish and Install 12-inch Diam. PVC C900 Gravity Sewer Pipe. All 12-inch PVC gravity sewer pipe shall be paid for under the bid item Furnish and Install 12-inch PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe. Imported backfill shall be paid for under the bid item Imported Backfill Material. 1-09.14(VV) Lift Station Accessories (Bid Item 047) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Lift Station Accessories" and per the cost percentage breakdown requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. The lump sum Bid price shall constitute full compensation for all Work, labor,materials, and equipment necessary to furnish and install all"Lift Station Accessories", including but not limited to the safety grating and supports, safety rails, ladders and steps, and access hatches and hatch drains, ,rWr including plumbing drains as shown in the wet well, overflow storage vault and flow meter and valve vault. The Work shall also include installing the submersible pressure sensors and the wet well float switches, along with any conduit or other necessary appurtenances as shown on the Drawings. aW All nuts, bolts, and brackets used in the wet well and overflow storage vault are to be stainless steel. 1-09.14(YfJP) Control Building Plumbing, Including Roof Drains (Bid Item 048) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Control Building Plumbing, Including Roof Drains"and per the cost percentage breakdown requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions including the applicable requirements of Sub-Section 10.15400. The lump sum Bid price shall be full compensation for all Work, labor, equipment and materials required to complete the Work as described herein. The following items are considered incidental to the components of the respective Bid items in this section: • Excavation, backfill with native or imported material, removing, loading, hauling and disposing of excess or unsuitable materials; r • All piping and fittings between the respective fixtures, components and assemblies, including pipe insulation,pipe labels, and tracer wire, as required by the UPC and as shown on the Drawings; ' • Unions and water hammer arrestors adjacent to components as described herein and on the Drawings; rrr 62 rr rr "�"' • Isolation valves. The following items are covered under the Bid item Control Building Plumbing, Including Roof rr Drains: • The water service piping from the service setter into the Control Building including PVC OW sleeve; • All other supply and drainage, waste, and vent piping in the control building, including the Reduced Pressure Backflow Assembly (RPBA) and the various assemblies as shown dw on the supply plumbing schematic on the Drawings. • Hose bib and piping; • Connection of drains to other facilities as shown on the plans. Imported backfill shall be paid for under the bid item Imported Backfill Material. 1-09.14(XX) Mechanical Work (Bid Item 049) sw Measurement shall be lump sum for"Mechanical Work" and per the cost percentage breakdown requirements specified in Sectionl-09.1of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. go The lump sum bid item for"Mechanical Work" shall include all Work associated with the installation of other mechanical appurtenances and accessories as shown and as required in the control building. Mechanical Work includes the HVAC work specified in Sub-Section 10.15800. The power and control wiring, conduit, etc. required for electrically operated mechanical equipment shall generally be considered as part of the bid item for"Electrical Work." 1-09.14(YY) Submersible Sewage Pumps and Motors (Bid Item 050) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Submersible Sewage Pumps and Motors"and per the cost percentage breakdown requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. The lump sum Bid price for the"Submersible Sewage Pumps and Motors" shall constitute full ` compensation for all Work, labor,materials, and equipment necessary to furnish and install pumps, motors, cables, and appurtenances, including but not limited to: • Furnishing and installing wet well pumps and motors as specified; • Furnishing guide rails, bolts,wiring, cables, and appurtenances; • Preparing an O&M Manual for operation and repair of pumps and motors; The following items are covered under other Bid items in this Contract: �• • Installation of force main piping, fittings, and valves; • Installation of drives, wiring, and connection to controls; • Testing and startup; lrrr 1-09.14(ZZ) Electrical Work (Bid Item 051) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Electrical Work"and per the cost percentage breakdown +Yr requirements specified in Sectionl-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. .rN 63 wr The lump sum bid item shall include all Work associated with the"Electrical Work"and making the lift station operational as specified in Section 10.16 except for Sub-Sections 10.16205 and 10.16250, which are covered under other Bid items. The Work in this bid item shall include but not be limited to bringing in electrical power to and from the new transformer,providing temporary and new service, all lighting(interior and exterior), conduit, hand holes, wiring, electrical connections, power and control wiring,breakers, internal transformers, electrical devices, electrical panels and cabinets as called out on the Drawings and specified herein. The Work in this bid item generally shall include rr providing power, conduits, wiring, and electrical devices as necessary to all applicable components of the Project including but not limited to the wet well, overflow storage vault,the control building, flow meter and valve vault, and exterior site components. , This bid item shall also include payment for all work related to Contractor obtaining L&I approval, including any necessary corrections. err 1-09.14(AAA) Instrument,Alarm, Telemetry, and Control Work (Bid Item 052) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Instrument,Alarm,Telemetry, and Control Work" and per the cost percentage breakdown requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as rr supplemented in these Special Provisions and shown on the Drawings. This Bid item shall include all Work associated with furnishing, installing, configuring,programming, and preliminary testing the"Instrument,Alarm,Telemetry and Control Work" for the lift station and related equipment including but not limited to the main controls, alarms, intrusion switches, flood switches, smoke detectors, radio antenna, magnetic flow meter, float switches, and submersible pressure transmitter, and required training as specified in Section 10.17 and as shown on the I series Drawings and portions of the E series Drawings. Also included in this Bid item shall be the work required to be performed by a I&C Subcontractor meeting the qualifications specified in Sub-Section 10.17010. Furnishing and installing the radio transmitter and programming of the City's SCADA system will be done by others outside of this Contract. 1-09.14(BBB) Standby Generator Set (Bid Item 053) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Standby Generator Set" and per the cost breakdown percentage requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. The percentage cost breakdown shall also conform to the requirements described below. The unit Bid price shall constitute full compensation for all Work, labor,material, and equipment required to furnish, install, and test the generator systems and transfer switches as specified in Sub- Sections 10.16205 and 10.16250 of these Specifications. This Work shall also include but not be „r limited to providing the specified warranty, training on the operation and maintenance of the generator systems, supplying operation and maintenance manuals for the generators including all related software and programs, and providing maintenance support as described in Sub-Section 10.16205 of these Specifications. Contractor shall obtain and pay for any additional permits required for installation of the generator sets. This Work shall also include compliance with the noise restriction, including the services of an independent acoustical engineer or acoustician. rr Partial payment shall be made as follows: Installation complete: 90% of Lump Sum Bid Price Testing and startup complete: 10%of Lump Sum Bid Price err 64 *a to Alternatively,the Contractor may send the Engineer written confirmation that this Bid item may be paid in one lump sum with no partial payments until after all associated Work has been successfully completed. r. 1-09.14(CCC) Testing and Startup Services (Bid Item 054) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Testing and Startup Services" and per the cost percentage breakdown requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented OW in these Special Provisions. Testing and Startup Services shall be fully completed before Substantial Completion as specified in Section 1-05.11(1). +W The lump sum Bid shall constitute full compensation for all Work, labor, material, and equipment required to successfully test and startup all systems described above. This Work shall include furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment as required by the motor, control, and standby generator 40 set manufacturers to successfully test and startup all the systems described above. Contractor shall coordinate the Work with all required parties. to Initial testing and startup of individual systems shall be included as part of the associated Bid items except as noted herein. In general, initial testing is defined as the detailed start-up and testing of the individual systems (and coordination between systems as necessary)by the Contractor to the Contractor's satisfaction, including required electrical and systems testing. Initial start-up and testing of individual systems shall be coordinated with the Engineer. The City may participate at the City's discretion. Final start-up and testing will be observed and accepted by the City. All the requirements for final start-up and testing are delineated in Sub-Section 10.01660. r. Work shall include coordination with the City,Engineer, Control System Integrator, Electrician, Generator Manufacturer, and Telemetry subcontractor, to verify all components are operational and 4W ready to perform correctly during testing and start-up, and that agents of said parties are present on- site during the testing and start-up procedures. Also included in the Work for final system start-up and testing are: • Final testing of the entire system using both the electrical service and the standby generators; • Preparation and submittal of all O&M manuals, including revisions as necessary for manuals to be accepted by the City; rr • Completion of final punch list items related to testing and startup requirements; • Training of City's personnel; • Final permit inspections; rr • The Work shall be performed as described herein in this and other sections of the Specifications and according to applicable standards, permit requirements, and laws and regulations. The lump sum Bid shall include filling new and existing force mains as necessary prior to performing pumping tests. 1-09.14(DDD)Imported Backfill Material(Bid Item 055) Measurement for"Imported Backfill Material" shall be measured in tons based on weight tickets, and shall not include any additional backfill material associated with an excavation beyond a vertical excavation as used in-lieu-of shoring and cribbing for compliance with WISHA, Chapter 49.17 RCW, which is paid as part of the"Lift Station Shoring and Trench Safety Systems"Bid item. irr 65 r The unit price bid per ton for"Imported Backfill Material" shall constitute full compensation for all Work, labor, materials, and equipment necessary to furnish, install and compact"Imported Backfill Material" as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the City. Included in this bid item shall be hauling and disposal of existing materials where otherwise not included in another bid item and final grading prior to placement of scheduled surface restoration items such as concrete slab, etc. 1-09.14(EEE) Existing Stonegate Lift Station Abandonment_(Bid Item 056) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Existing Stonegate Lift Station Abandonment"and per the cost percentage breakdown requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. r The lump sum bid price for"Existing Stonegate Lift Station Abandonment" shall be full compensation for all Work, labor, material, and equipment required to abandon the existing Stonegate lift station, convert the wet well into a sanitary sewer manhole, including but not limited to, the following: • The removal of the existing top section, interior piping, and appurtenances; • Demolition and removal, as required, of electrical and telephone conduit and other associated appurtenances as described in Sub-Section 10.02050; • Plugging the existing force main outlet and abandoning existing valve; • Replacing the top section with risers and manhole lid or concrete slab as required to meet grade; • Filling the bottom of the wet well with CDF and rechanneling the wet well with grout between the gravity sewers; • Connection of new gravity sewer, including cutting and sealing penetration and Romac 501 coupling; • All earthwork as required to complete the work as shown on the plans; • All costs of salvaging of existing identified equipment items to the City; • Draining existing force main; • Temporary sewer bypass; • Dewatering; • Site restoration including providing topsoil and other backfill materials . 1-09.14(FFF) Existing Summerwind Lift Station Abandonment (Bid Item 057) Measurement shall be lump sum for"Existing Summerwind Lift Station Abandonment" and per the cost percentage breakdown requirements specified in Sections 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented in these Special Provisions. The lump sum bid price for"Existing Summerwind Lift Station Abandonment" shall be full compensation for all Work, labor, material, and equipment required to abandon the existing Summerwind lift station and convert the wet well into a sanitary sewer manhole, including but not limited to, the following: • The removal of the existing top section, interior piping, and appurtenances; .r 66 �i yrs "�" • Demolition and removal, as required, of electrical and telephone conduit and other associated appurtenances as described in Sub-Section 10.02050; .r • Plugging and abandoning, including draining and disposing of sewage within existing mains, the existing force main and overflow outlets; • Replacing the top section with risers and manhole lid or concrete slab as required to meet grade; • Filling the bottom of the wet well with sand and/or CDF and rechanneling the wet well with grout between the gravity sewers; rr. • Connections of new gravity sewer, to existing station and existing manhole, including cutting and sealing penetration, and rechanneling.; • Providing Romac 501 couplings; • Closing and abandoning valve between wet well and overflow storage; • Removing and disposing of the top section of the overflow storage; • Drilling holes in the bottom of the overflow storage; w Filling the overflow storage with sand, including haul and furnishing material; • All earthwork as required to complete the work as shown on the plans; • All costs of salvaging,of existing identified equipment items to the City; • Dewatering; r • Temporary sewer bypass; • Site restoration including providing topsoil and other backfill materials. 8-Inch PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe will be paid under other bid items. rr 1-10 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL 1-10.1 General Section 1-10.1 is supplemented by adding the following: When the bid proposal includes an item for"Traffic Control," the work required for this item shall be all items described in Section 1-10, including, but not limited to: +ir 1. Furnishing and maintaining barricades, flashers, construction signing and other channelization devices, unless a pay item is in the bid proposal for any specific device and the Special Provisions specify furnishing, maintaining, and payment in a different manner for that device; 2. Furnishing traffic control labor, equipment, and supervisory personnel for all traffic control labor; 3. Furnishing any necessary vehicle(s) to set up and remove the Class B construction signs and other traffic control devices; 4. Furnishing labor and vehicles for patrolling and maintaining in position all of the construction signs and the traffic control devices, unless a pay item is in the bid proposal to ow specifically pay for this Work; and wr 67 No 5. Furnishing labor, material, and equipment necessary for cleaning up,removing, and replacing of the construction signs and the traffic control devices destroyed or damaged during the life of the project. 6. Removing existing signs as specified or a directed by the Engineer and delivering to the , City Shops or storing and reinstalling as directed by the Engineer. 7. Preparing a traffic control plan for the project and designating the person responsible for traffic control at the work site. The traffic control plan shall include descriptions of the traffic control methods and devices to be used by the prime Contractor, and subcontractors, r shall be submitted at or before the preconstruction conference, and shall be subject to review and approval of the Engineer. 8. Contacting police, fire, 911, and ambulance services to notify them in advance of any work that will affect and traveled portion of a roadway. 9. Assuring that all traveled portions of roadways are open to traffic during peak traffic periods, 6:30 a.m. to 8:30 a.m., and 3:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m., or as specified in the special provisions,or as directed by the Engineer. rr► 10. Promptly removing or covering all nonapplicable signs during periods when they are not needed. If no bid item"Traffic Control" appears in the proposal then all work required by these sections will be considered incidental and their cost shall be included in the other items of Work. If the Engineer requires the Contractor to furnish additional channelizing devices, pieces of equipment, or services which could not be usually anticipated by a prudent Contractor for the maintenance and protection of traffic,then a new item or items may be established to pay for such items. Further limitations for consideration of payment for these items are that they are not covered by other pay items in the bid proposal, they are not specified in the Special Provisions as incidental, and the accumulative cost for the use of each individual channelizing device,piece of equipment, or service must exceed$200 in total cost for the duration of their need. In the event of disputes, the Engineer will determine what is usually anticipated by a prudent Contractor. The cost for these items will be by agreed price, price established by the Engineer. Additional items required as a result of the Contractor's modification to the traffic control plan(s) appearing in the Contract shall not be covered by the provisions in this paragraph. If the total cost of all the work under the Contract increases or decreases by more than 25 percent, an equitable adjustment will be considered for the item "Traffic Control" to address the increase or decrease. Traffic control and maintenance for the safety of the traveling public on this project shall be the sole ] responsibility of Contractor and all methods and equipment used will be subject to the approval of Owner. Traffic control devices and their use shall conform to City of Renton standards and the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. Contractor shall not proceed with any construction until proper traffic control has been provided to the satisfaction of Engineer. Any days lost due to improper traffic control will be charged against P Contractor's allowable Contract time, and shall not be the cause for a claim for extra days to complete the Work. ' 1-10.2(1)B Traffic Control Supervisor Paragraphs 1 and 2 are revised as follows: No 68 erre A TCS shall be on the project whenever traffic control labor is required or as authorized by the Engineer. .rr The TCS shall assure that all the duties of the TCS are performed during the duration of the Contract. During nonwork periods, the TCS shall be able to be on the job site within a 45-minute time period after notification by the Engineer. 1-10.2(2) Traffic Control Plans Section 1-10.2(2) is supplemented as follows: w The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that traffic control is installed and maintained in conformance to established standards. The Contractor shall continuously evaluate the operation of the traffic control plan and take prompt action to correct any problems that become evident during operation. „r„ 1-10.3 Flagging, Signs, and All Other Traffic Control Devices Section 1-10.3 is supplemented as follows: At the end of each working day, provisions shall be made for the safe passage of traffic and pedestrians during non-working hours. " Barricades shall be reflectorized as specified in Part VI of the MUTCD, and shall be 3M diamond grade or equivalent approved by Engineer. Barricades shall also be equipped with flashers. r, 1-10.3(3) Construction Signs Section 1-10.3(3) paragraph 4 is supplemented as follows: No separate pay item will be provided in the bid proposal for Class A or Class B construction signs. All costs for the work to provide Class A or Class B construction signs shall be included in the unit Wo contract price for the various other items of the work in the bid proposal. 1-10.4 Measurement Section 1-10.4 is replaced with: �w No specific unit of measurement will apply to the lump sum item of"Traffic Control". No adjustment in the lump sum bid amount will be made for overtime work or for use of relief .r flaggers. 1-10.5 Payment Section 1-10.5 is replaced with: r Payment for all labor, materials, and equipment described in Section 1-10 will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid items when included in the proposal: wr ' 69 JW "Traffic Control," lump sum. The lump sum Contract price shall be full pay for all costs not covered by other specific pay items in the bid proposal for furnishing, installing, maintaining, and removing traffic control devices required by the Contract and as directed by the Engineer in confonnance with accepted standards and in such a 40 manner as to maximize safety, and minimize disruption and inconvenience to the public. Progress payment for the lump sum item"Traffic Control"will be made as follows: ow 1. When in initial warning signs for the beginning of the project and the end of construction signs are installed and approved by the Engineer, 30 percent of the amount bid for the item will be paid. 2. Payment for the remaining 70 percent of the amount bid for the item will be paid on a prorated basis in accordance with the total job progress as determined by progress payments. The item"Traffic Control"will be considered for an equitable adjustment per Section 1-04.6 only when the total contract price increases or decreases by more than 25 percent. The Lump Sum Contract price shall be full pay for all costs involved in furnishing the pilot car(s), pilot car driver(s), and the appropriate pilot car sign(s) for any pilot car operation. Any necessary flaggers will be paid under the item for traffic control. The Lump Sum Contract price shall be full pay for all costs for the labor provided for performing those construction operations described in Section 1-10.3(1) and as authorized by the Engineer. 40 The Lump Sum Contract price shall be full pay for all costs for performing the Work described in Section 1-10.3(3) and Section 1-10.3(4). This payment will include all labor, equipment, and vehicles go necessary for the initial acquisition, the initial installation of Class A signs, and ultimate return of all Contracting Agency-furnished signs + The Lump Sum Contract price shall be full pay for all costs involved when a person performs the duties described in Section 1-10.2(1)B including when perfonning traffic control labor duties. The Lump Sum Contract price shall be full pay for all costs involved in furnishing the vehicle or vehicles for the work described in Sections 1-10.2(1)B and 1-10.3(2). 1-11 RENTON SURVEYING STANDARDS The following is a new section with new subsections: 1-11.1(1) Responsibility for Surveys All surveys and survey reports shall be prepared under the direct supervision of a person registered to practice land surveying under the provisions of Chapter 18.43 RCW. All surveys and survey reports shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements established by the Board of Registration for Professional Engineers and Land Surveyors under the provisions of Chapter 18.43 RCW. + 1-11.1(2) Survey Datum and Precision The horizontal component of all surveys shall have as its coordinate base: The North American Datum of 1983/91. 70 rrr All horizontal control for projects must be referenced to or in conjunction with a minimum of two of the City of Renton's Survey Control Network monuments. The source of the coordinate values used will be shown on the survey drawing per RCW 58.09.070. 9W The horizontal component of all surveys shall meet or exceed the closure requirements of WAC 332- 130-060. The control base lines for all surveys shall meet or exceed the requirements for a Class A m survey revealed in Table 2 of the Minimum Standard Detail Requirements for ALTA/ACSM Land Title Surveys jointly established and adopted by ALTA and ACSM in 1992 or comparable classification in future editions of said document. The angular and linear closure and precision ratio to of traverses used for survey control shall be revealed on the face of the survey drawing, as shall the method of adjustment. The horizontal component of the control system for surveys using global positioning system "� methodology shall exhibit at least 1 part in 50,000 precision in line length dependent error analysis at a 95 percent confidence level and performed pursuant to Federal Geodetic Control Subcommittee Standards for GPS control surveys as defined in Geometric Geodetic Accuracy Standards & me Specifications for Using GPS Relative Positioning Techniques dated August 1, 1989 or comparable classification in future editions of said document. 4W The vertical component of all surveys shall be based on NAVD 1988, the North American Vertical Datum of 1988, and tied to at least one of the City of Renton Survey Control Network benchmarks. If there are two such benchmarks within 3000 feet of the project site a tie to both shall be made. The benchmark(s) used will be shown on the drawing. If a City of Renton benchmark does not exist within 3000 feet of a project, one must be set on or near the project in a permanent manner that will remain intact throughout the duration of the project. Source of elevations (benchmark)will be shown rr on the drawing, as well as a description of any bench marks established. 1-11.1(3) Subdivision Information Those surveys dependent on section subdivision shall reveal the controlling monuments used and the .r subdivision of the applicable quarter section. Those surveys dependent on retracement of a plat or short plat shall reveal the controlling rrr monuments, measurements, and methodology used in that retracement. 1-11.1(4) Field Notes Field notes shall be kept in conventional format in a standard bound field book with waterproof pages. In cases where an electronic data collector is used field notes must also be kept with a sketch and a record of control and base line traverses describing station occupations and what measurements were made at each point. rr Every point located or set shall be identified by a number and a description. Point numbers shall be unique within a complete job. The preferred method of point numbering is field notebook,page and Ow point set on that page. Example: The first point set or found on page 16 of field book 348 would be identified as Point No. 348.16.01, the second point would be 348.16.02, etc. AW Upon completion of a City of Renton project, either the field notebook(s)provided by the City or the original field notebook(s)used by the surveyor will be given to the City. For all other Work, surveyors will provide a copy of the notes to the City upon request. In those cases where an electronic data collector is used, a hard copy print out in ASCII text format will accompany the field notes. 1-11.1(5) Corners and Monuments 71 Corner: A point on a land boundary, at the juncture of two or more boundary lines. A monument is usually set at such points to physically reference a corner's location on the ground. Monument: Any physical object or structure of record which marks or accurately references: A corner or other survey point established by or under the supervision of an individual per section 1-11.1(1) and any corner or monument established by the General Land Office and its successor the Bureau of Land Management including section subdivision corners down to and including one-sixteenth corners; and Any permanently monumented boundary,right of way alignment, or horizontal and vertical control points established by any governmental agency or private surveyor including street intersections but excluding dependent interior lot corners. 1-11.1(6) Control or Base Line Survey Control or Base Line Surveys shall be established for all construction projects that will create permanent structures such as roads, sidewalks, bridges, utility lines or appurtenances, signal or light poles, or any non-single family building. Control or Base Line Surveys shall consist of such number of permanent monuments as are required such that every structure may be observed for staking or"as- builting" while occupying one such monument and sighting another such monument. A minimum of two of these permanent monuments shall be existing monuments, recognized and on record with the City of Renton. The Control or Base Line Survey shall occupy each monument in turn, and shall satisfy all applicable requirements of Section 1-11.1 herein. The drawing depicting the survey shall be neat, legible, and drawn to an appropriate scale. North orientation should be clearly presented and the scale shown graphically as well as noted. The drawing must be of such quality that a reduction thereof to one-half original scale remains legible. If recording of the survey with the King County Recorder is required, it will be prepared on 18 inch ad by 24 inch mylar and will comply with all provisions of Chapter 58.09 RCW. A photographic mylar of the drawing will be submitted to the City of Renton and,upon their review and acceptance per the specific requirements of the project, the original will be recorded with the King County Recorder. ► If recording is not required, the survey drawing shall be prepared on 22 inch by 34 inch mylar, and the original or a photographic mylar thereof will be submitted to the City of Renton. The survey drawings shall meet or exceed the requirements of WAC 332-130-050 and shall confonn to the City of Renton's Drafting Standards. American Public Works Association symbols shall be used whenever possible, and a legend shall identify all symbols used if each point marked by a symbol is not described at each use. An electronic listing of all principal points shown on the drawing shall be submitted with each drawing. The listing should include the point number designation(corresponding with that in the field notes), a brief description of the point, and northing, easting, and elevation(if applicable) values, all in ASCII format, on IBM PC compatible media. ► 1-11.1(7) Precision Levels Vertical Surveys for the establishment of bench marks shall satisfy all applicable requirements of section 1-05 and 1-11.1. Vertical surveys for the establishment of bench marks shall meet or exceed the standards, specifications and procedures of third order elevation accuracy established by the Federal Geodetic Control Committee. 4W 72 96 Bench marks must possess both permanence and vertical stability. Descriptions of bench marks must be complete to insure both recoverability and positive identification on recovery. 1-11.1(8) Radial and Station -- Offset Topography Topographic surveys shall satisfy all applicable requirements of section IA 1.1 herein. All points occupied or back sighted in developing radial topography or establishing baselines for err station-- offset topography shall meet the requirements of section 1-11.1 herein. The drawing and electronic listing requirements set forth in section 1-11.1 herein shall be observed for all topographic surveys. 1-11.1(9) Radial Topography Elevations for the points occupied or back sighted in a radial topographic survey shall be determined either by 1) spirit leveling with misclosure not to exceed 0.1 feet or Federal Geodetic Control Committee third order elevation accuracy specifications, OR 2)trigonometric leveling with elevation differences determined in at least two directions for each point and with misclosure of the circuit not to exceed 0.1 feet. 1-11.1(10) Station--Offset Topography Elevations of the baseline and topographic points shall be determined by spirit leveling and shall satisfy Federal Geodetic Control Committee specifications as to the turn points and shall not exceed 0.1 foot's error as to side shots. As-Built Survey All improvements required to be "as-built" (post construction survey)per City of Renton Codes, TITLE 4 Building Regulations and TITLE 9 Public Ways and Property,must be located both horizontally and vertically by a Radial survey or by a Station offset survey. The "as-built" survey must be based on the same base line or control survey used for the construction staking survey for the improvements being "as-built". The "as-built" survey for all subsurface improvements should occur prior to backfilling. Close cooperation between the installing Contractor and the"as-builting" surveyor is therefore required. All "as-built" surveys shall satisfy the requirements of section 1-11.1(1)herein and shall be based upon control or base line surveys made in conformance with these Specifications. The field notes for"as-built" shall meet the requirements of section 1-11.1(4) herein and submitted err with stamped and signed "as-built" drawings which includes a statement certifying the accuracy of the "as built". The drawing and electronic listing requirements set forth in section 1-11.1(6)herein shall be observed for all "as-built" surveys. 1-11.1(12) Monument Setting and Referencing All property or lot corners, as defined in 1-11.1(5), established or reestablished on a plat or other recorded survey shall be referenced by a permanent marker at the corner point per 1-11.2(1). In situations where such markers are impractical or in danger of being destroyed, e.g., the front corners wr of lots, a witness marker shall be set. In most cases, this will be the extension of the lot line to a tack in lead in the curb. The relationship between the witness monuments and their respective corners shall be shown or described on the face of the plat or survey of record, e.g., "Tacks in lead on the extension of the lot side lines have been set in the curbs on the extension of said line with the curb." In all other cases the corner shall meet the requirements of section 1-11.2(1) herein. vwr 73 r All non corner monuments, as defined in 1-11.1(5), shall meet the requirements of Section 1-11.2(2) herein. If the monument falls within a paved portion of a right of way or other area, the monument shall be set below the ground surface and contained within a lidded case kept separate from the monument and flush with the pavement surface,per section 1-11.2(3). In the case of right of way centerline monuments all points of curvature(PC),points of tangency (PT), street intersections,center points of cul-de-sacs shall be set. If the point of intersection, PI, for + ► the tangents of a curve fall within the paved portion of the right of way, a monument can be set at the PI instead of the PC and PT of the curve. For all non corner monuments set while under contract to the City of Renton or as part of a City of Renton approved subdivision of property, a City of Renton Monument Card(furnished by the city) identifying the monument; point of intersection (PI),point of tangency (PT), point of curvature (PC), one-sixteenth corner,Plat monument, street intersection, etc., complete with a description of the monument, a minimum of two reference points and NAD 83/91 coordinates and NAVD 88 elevation shall be filled out and filed with the City. 1-11.2 Materials 1-11.2(1) Property/Lot Corners Corners per 1-1 l.l(5) shall be marked in a permanent manner such as 1/2 inch diameter rebar 24 inches in length,durable metal plugs or caps, tack in lead, etc. and permanently marked or tagged with the surveyor's identification number. The specific nature of the marker used can be determined by the surveyor at the time of installation. 1-11.2(2) Monuments Monuments per 1-11.1(5) shall meet the requirements as set forth in City of Renton Standard Plans r page H031 and permanently marked or tagged with the surveyor's identification number. 1-11.2(3) Monument Case and Cover Materials shall meet the requirements of section 9-22 and City of Renton Standard Plans page H031. 1-11.3 Measurement No specific unit of measurement will apply to the lump sum item of"Construction Surveying and As- builts". 1-11.4 Payment The lump sum bid item of"Construction Surveying and As-builts" shall include all labor,material, and equipment to stake all easements, right-of-ways, property corners, buffers, and other boundaries required to perform the work as shown on the plans, including the as-built survey. w�► 74 w, 2-01 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND ROADSIDE CLEANUP 2-01.1 Description `w Section 2-01.1 is supplemented as follows: The limits of clearing and grubbing(construction limits) shall be defined as being the construction limit lines as shown in the Plans. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, any trees abutting or adjacent to the limits of clearing and grubbing are damaged and require removal, the Contractor shall wiw remove such trees. Any trees flagged by the Engineer to remain within the clearing and grubbing limits shall be left undamaged by the Contractor's operations. Any flagged trees which are damaged shall be replaced in kind at the Contractor's expense. r Existing landscaping outside the construction limits, including but not limited to, sod, rockeries, beauty bark, decorative gravel or rock, bushes, and shrubbery shall be protected from damage. .�r Existing sod around existing Stonegate lift station and in easement between existing and proposed lift station shall be removed and saved for restoration once Work is complete. Any damaged sod shall be replaced with like sod at Contractor's expense. Hydroseeding of these areas will not be allowed. The property owners shall be responsible for removing and/or relocating irrigation equipment, trees, shrubs, curbing, ornamental plants, and any other decorative landscaping materials within the +w construction limits that they wish to save. The Contractor shall give property owners 10 days' written notice prior to removing landscaping materials. All landscaping materials that remain in the construction limits after that time period shall be removed and disposed of, by the Contractor, in accordance with Section 2-01 of the Standard Specifications, these Special Provisions, and the Plans. The Contractor shall receive approval from the Engineer prior to removal. 2-01.2 Disposal of Usable Material and Debris Section 2-01.2 is supplemented as follows: The Contractor shall dispose of all debris by Disposal Method No. 2—Waste Site. ' 2-01.4 Measurement Section 2-01.4 is replaced with the following: No measurement for"Clearing and Grubbing" shall be made. 2-01.5 Payment rrr Section 2-01.5 is replaced with the following: All work performed for"Clearing and Grubbing" shall be incidental to the lump sum bid item "Site Clearing and Grading." 2-02 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURE AND OBSTRUCTIONS 2-02.3(3) Removal of Pavement, Sidewalks, and Curbs Section 2-02.3(3) is revised and supplemented as follows: +�r 75 .r Item"1." is revised as follows: In removing pavement, sidewalks, driveways, and curbs, the Contractor shall haul broken-up pieces to an approved off-project disposal site. The section is supplemented as follows: ,rrt► When an area where pavement, sidewalk, or driveway has been removed is to be opened to traffic before pavement patching has been completed, temporary mix asphalt concrete patch shall be required. Temporary patching shall be placed to a minimum depth of 2 inches immediately after backfilling and compaction are complete, and before the road is opened to traffic. MC cold mix or MC hot mix shall be used at the discretion of the Engineer. 2-02.5 Payment Section 2-02.5 is supplemented by adding: rwi All costs related to the removal and disposal of structures and obstructions including saw cutting, excavation,backfilling and temporary asphalt shall be considered incidental to and included in the bid item"Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material, Including Haul." 'iat 2-03 ROADWAY EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT tot 2-03.2 Materials Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections. Washed Rock 9-03.12(4) 2-03.3 Construction Requirements Section 2-03.3 is supplemented by adding the following: Roadway excavation shall include the removal of all materials excavated from within the limits art shown on the plans. Suitable excavated material shall be used for embankments, while surplus excavated material or unsuitable material shall be disposed of by the Contractor. Earthwork quantities and changes will be computed, either manually or by means of electronic data processing equipment,by use of the average end area method. Any changes to the proposed work as directed by the Engineer that would alter these quantities shall be calculated by the Engineer and lei submitted to the Contractor for his review and verification. Any excavation or embankment beyond the limits indicated in the Plans, unless ordered by the Engineer,will not be paid for. All work and material required to return these areas to their original conditions, as directed by the Engineer, shall be provided by the Contractor at his sole expense. All areas shall be excavated, filled, and/or backfilled as necessary to comply with the grades shown on the Plans. In filled and backfilled areas, fine grading shall begin during the placement and the compaction of the final layer. In cut sections, fine grading shall begin within the final six (6) inches of cut. Final grading shall produce a surface which is smooth and even, without abrupt changes in grade. 76 wr Excavation for curbs and gutters shall be accomplished by cutting accurately to the cross sections, grades and elevations shown. Care shall be taken not to excavate below the specified grades. The Contractor shall maintain all excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, brush, sticks, rw trash and other debris until final acceptance of the Work. Following removal of topsoil or excavation to grade and before placement of fills or base course, the Ow subgrade under the roadway shall be proof-rolled to identify any soft or loose areas which may warrant additional compaction or excavation and replacement. The Contractor shall provide temporary drainage or protection to keep the subgrade free from go standing water. Acceptable excavated native soils shall be used for fill in the area requiring fills. Care shall be taken "w to place excavated material at the optimum moisture content to achieve the specified compaction. Any native material used for fill shall be free of organics and debris and have a maximum particle size of 6 inches. rrr It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prevent the native materials from becoming saturated with water. The measures may include sloping to drain, compacting the native materials, and diverting runoff away from the materials. If the Contractor fails to take such preventative measures, any costs or delay related to drying the materials shall be at his own expense. If the native materials become saturated, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to dry the materials, to the optimum moisture content. If sufficient acceptable native soils are not available to complete construction of the roadway embankment, Gravel Borrow shall be used. If subgrade trimmer is not required on the project, all portions of Section 2-03 shall apply as though a subgrade trimmer were specified. 011 If sufficient acceptable native soils, as determined by the Engineer, are not available to complete construction of the roadway embankment, Gravel Borrow meeting the requirements of Section 9- 03.14 of the Standard Specifications shall be used. Work shall also include sawcutting and removing existing paving. WW 2-03.4 Measurement Section 2-03.4 is supplemented by adding the following: rr At the discretion of the Engineer, roadway excavation, borrow excavation, and unsuitable foundation excavation- by the cubic yard (adjusted for swell)may be measured by truck in the hauling vehicle at the point of loading. The Contractor shall provide truck tickets for each load removed. Each ticket .r shall have the truck number, time and date, and be approved by the Engineer. 2-03.5 Payment Section 2-03.5 is revised as follows: r .r. 77 Payment for embankment compaction will not be made as a separate item. All costs for embankment compaction shall be included in other bid items involved. Payment will be made for the following bid items when they are included in the Proposal: "Roadway Excavation Including Haul," Per Cubic Yard y "Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material, Including Haul,"Per Ton "Gravel Borrow Including Haul," Per Ton When the Engineer orders excavation below subgrade payment will be in accordance with the item "Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material,Including Haul". ,rr The unit Contract price per cubic yard for"Roadway Excavation Including Haul" shall be full pay for excavating, loading,placing, or otherwise disposing of the material. The unit Contract price per ton for"Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material, Including Haul" shall be full pay for excavating, loading, and disposing of the material. Payment for embankment compaction will not be made as a separate item. All costs for embankment compaction shall be included in other bid items involved. Payment for Work specified in Section 2-03 will be paid under the bid item"Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material, Including Haul." 2-04 HAUL 2-04.5 Payment Section 2-04.5 is revised and supplemented as follows: ad All costs for the hauling of material to, from, or on the job site shall be considered incidental to and - included in the unit price of other units of work. 2-06 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 2-06.5 Measurement and Payment Sec*on j-06.5 is supplemented by adding the following: * Subgrade preparation and maintenance including watering shall be considered as incidental to the construction and all costs thereof shall be included in the appropriate unit or lump sum Contract bid prices. 2-09 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION 2-09.1 Description Section 2-09.1 is supplemented by adding the following: we This work also includes the excavation, haul, and disposal of all unsuitable materials such as peat, rl muck, swampy or unsuitable materials including buried logs, stumps, boulders and oversized rocks. r 78 2-09.3(1)D Disposal of Excavated Material Section 2-09.3(1)D is revised as follows: The second paragraph is replaced with: All costs for disposing of excavated material within or external to the project limits shall be included awr in the unit Contract price for structure excavation, Class A or B. The third paragraph is replaced with: If the Contract includes structure excavation, Class A or B, including haul, the unit Contract price shall include all costs for loading and hauling the material the full required distance, otherwise all such disposal costs shall be considered incidental to the Work. 2-09.4 Measurement Section 2-09.4 is revised and supplemented as follows: .w All excavation and backfill for gravity sewer, force mains, manholes, oil/water separator, storm water pipe, and infiltration trenches will be included under the lump sum bid item"Trench Shoring or Extra to Excavation Class A and B." All other excavation and backfill will be included under"Lift Station Excavation and Backfill", "Lift Station Shoring and Trench Safety Systems", and/or"Imported Backfill Material." Gravel backfill. Gravel backfill except when used as bedding for culvert, storm sewer, sanitary sewer, manholes, and catch basins,will be measured by the cubic yard in place determined by the neat lines required by the Plans or by the ton as measured in conformance with section 1-09.2. .�r 2-09.5 Payment When gravel backfill is paid by the ton, the Contractor shall take care to assure to the satisfaction of the Engineer that such per ton backfill is only being used for the specified purpose and not for purposes where backfill is incidental or being paid by cubic yard. Evidence that per ton gravel backfill is not being used for its designated purpose shall be grounds for the Engineer to deny payment for such load tickets. rr rr rr r . 79 J6 5-04 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 5-04.2 Materials 5-04.2 is supplemented by adding the following: The performance grade of asphalt installed for overlay shall be shall be PG 64-22. to 5-04.3 Construction Requirements Section 5-04.3 is supplemented as follows: 5-04.3(5) Conditioning the Existing Surface Section 5-04.3(5) is supplemented as follows: The Contractor shall maintain the existing surface contours during patching,unless otherwise instructed by City Engineer. 5-04.3(5)A Preparation of Existing Surface Section 5-04.3(5)A is supplemented as follows: The Contractor shall provide his own mechanical sweeping equipment. The sweeper will be on the project prior to the start of paving, to insure the streets to be paved are clean before the tack coat is applied. The sweeper will keep the streets clean ahead of the paving machine and clean the streets behind the empty trucks that have dumped their loads into the paving machine. The sweeper must sweep all streets made dirty by the Contractor's equipment. If the paving machine is"walked" from one site to another, the sweeper must sweep up behind paving machine. The sweeper shall not leave the overlay site until given permission by the City's inspector. All utilities shall be painted with a biodegradable"soap"to prevent the tack and ACP from sticking to the lids. Diesel shall not be used. After the application of soap, catch basins must be covered to prevent tack and ACP from getting into catch basins. Preparation of existing surface shall be done as outlined in this section and a tack coat shall be applied at the rate of 0.02 to 0.08 gallons per square yard. Payment for preparation of the surface and application of the tack coat shall be considered incidental to the paving and no separate payment shall be made. The Contractor shall locate all utilities for access immediately after any paving and mark the location by means of painting a circle around the location and scooping a portion of asphalt 4" - 6" in diameter and the depth of the overlay from the center of the utility location. The Contractor shall locate and completely expose gas and water valves for access immediately after final rolling. The day following the start of application of ACP, utility adjustments must begin. The Contractor shall have an adjustment crew adjusting utilities every workable working day until adjustments are complete. rw During the adjustment of any utility, existing concrete bricks or grouting material that has been broken or cracked shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. W 80 r Utility adjustments must be completed within 15 working days after overlay is complete, and within the specified working days. r Payment for utility adjustments includes all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary to complete the adjustments and is incidental to pay items for Asphalt Patch and Asphalt Overlay. 5-04.3(7)A Mix Design .. Item 2 is deleted and replaced with: 1. Nonstatistical HMA Evaluation. The Contractor shall submit a certification that the mix design submitted meets the requirements of Sections 9-03.8(2) and 9-03.8(6). The Contractor must submit the mix design using DOT Form 350-042 EF. Verification of the mix design by the Contracting Agency is not needed. The Project Engineer will determine anti-strip requirements for the HMA. The mix design will be the initial job mix formula (JMF) for the class of mix. Any nr additional adjustments to the JMF will require the approval of the Project Engineer and may be made per Section 9-03.8(7). 5-04.3(8)A Acceptance Sampling and Testing—HMA Mixture Item 1 is deleted and replaced with: 1. General. Acceptance of HMA shall be as provided under nonstatistical or commercial evaluation. Nonstatistical evaluation will be used for the acceptance of HMA. Commercial evaluation will be used for Commercial HMA and for other classes of-HMA in the following applications: sidewalks, road approaches, ditches, slopes, paths, trails, gores, prelevel, and pavement repair. Other nonstructural applications as approved by the Project Engineer. Sampling and testing of HMA accepted by commercial evaluation will be at the option of the Engineer. The proposal quantity of HMA that is accepted by commercial evaluation will be excluded from the quantities used in the determination of nonstatistical evaluation. Item 7 is deleted 5-04.3(10)B Control Replace Section 5-04.3(10)B with the following: Sub-base shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum density by the Modified Proctor Test Method, ASTM D 1557. Compact asphalt concrete patch and paving to 95%of maximum compaction. 5-04.5(1)A Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA .. Section is deleted and replaced with: 81 +r Statistical analysis of quality of gradation and asphalt content will be performed based on Section 1- 06.2 using the following price adjustment factors: Table of Price Adjustment Factors Constituent Factor"f" All aggregate passing: 1 '/z", 1", 3/", ' 'i/2", 3/8"and No. 4 sieves 2 All aggregate passing No. 8, No 16, No. 30,No. 50, No. 100 3 �1 All aggregate passing No. 200 sieve 20 Asphalt binder 52 A pay factor will be calculated for sieves listed in Section 9-03.8(7) for the class of HMA and for the asphalt binder. 1. Nonstatistical Evaluation. Each lot of HMA produced under Nonstatisical Evaluation and having all constituents falling within the tolerance limits of the job mix formula shall be accepted at the unit contract price with no further evaluation. When one or more constituents fall outside the nonstatistical acceptance tolerance limits in Section 9-03.8(7), the lot shall be evaluated in accordance with Section 1-06.2 to determine the appropriate CPF. The nonstatistical tolerance limits will be used in the calculation of the CPF and the maximum CPF shall be 1.00. When less than three sublots exist, backup samples of the existing sublots or samples from the street shall be tested to provide a minimum of three sets of results for evaluation. 2. Commercial Evaluation. If sampled and tested, HMA produced under Commercial rr Evaluation and having all constituents falling within the tolerance limits of the job mix formula shall be accepted at the unit Contract price with no further evaluation. When one or more constituents fall outside the commercial acceptance tolerance limits in Section 9- p 03.8(7), the lot shall be evaluated to determine the appropriate CPF. The commercial tolerance limits will be used in the calculation of the CPF and the maximum CPF shall be 1.00. When less than three sublots exist, backup samples of the existing sublots or samples from the street shall be tested to provide a minimum of three sets of results for evaluation. For each lot of HMA produced under Nonstatistical or Commercial Evaluation when the calculated CPF is less than 1.00, a Nonconforming Mix factor(NCFM) will be determined. THE NCFM equals the algebraic difference of CPF minus 1.00 multiplied by 60 percent. The Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment will be calculated as the product of the NCMF, the quantity of HMA in the lot in tons, and the unit contract price per ton of the mix. If a constituent is not measured in accordance with these Specifications, its individual pay factor will be considered 1.00 in calculating the composite pay factor. illi 5-04.5(1)A Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA Compaction Section is deleted and replaced with: The maximum CPF of a compaction lot is 1.00 For each compaction lot of HMA when the CPF is less than 1.00, a Nonconforming Compaction Factor(NCCF) will be determined. THE NCCF equals the algebraic difference of CPF minus 1.00 82 rr tM multiplied by 40 percent. The Compaction Price Adjustment will be calculated as the product of the NCFF, the quantity of HMA in the lot in tons and the unit contract price per ton of the mix. r rr Ot r+r O it rr OW No .r war 83 +rr lr 6-07 PAINTING 6-07.1 Description Section 6-07.1 is supplemented by adding the following: This Section shall also be known as Facility Coatings. 6-07.3 Construction Requirements Section 6-07.3 is supplemented by adding the following: ; Coating Schedule Precast 144 inch Diameter Wet Well and new 48 inch Manhole: The following coating system specifications shall be used for coating (sealing) the precast concrete surfaces of the station wet well and 48"manhole: as Interior Concrete Surfaces: Surface Preparation: Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days or until passing the ASTM D4263 Plastic Mat test. Prepare all surfaces to be coated SSPC SP 13 to meet ICRI CSP5 surface profile. Surface shall be clean, dry and free of contaminants. Surfacer/Filler: Tnemec Series 218 Mortar Clad applied at 1/32"minimum, fill surface voids flush to plain, to ensure finish is monolithic and pinhole free. Primer: Tnemec Series 435 Penma-Glaze applied at 20.0 to 25.0 mils dry film thickness. Finish: Tnemec Series 435 Penma-Glaze applied at 20.0 to 25.0 mils dry film thickness. Note: Upon full cure,the installed lining system shall be checked by high voltage spark detection in accordance with NACE RPO 188-90 to verify a pinhole-free surface. Exterior Concrete Surfaces: Surface Preparation: Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days or until passing the ASTM D4263 Plastic Mat test. SSPC SP 13 to meet ICRI CSP5 surface profile all surfaces to be coated. Surface shall be clean, dry and free of contaminants. �Iv Finish: Tnemec Series 141 PotaPox applied at 16.0 mils dry film thickness. Steel/Ductile Pipe: Surface Preparation: Steel; SP 10 Near White Metal Blast, 3 mill profile min. Ductile; SP 10 Gray White Metal Blast Shop Holding Primer: Tnemec Series N69 Epoxoline mat Applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils dry film thickness or to cover profile. 84 rl ' Intermediate: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze on the prepared shop primed steel, applied at 15.0 to 20.0 mils dry film thickness. r.r Finish: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze applied at 15.0 to 20.0 mils dry film thickness. ,w Overflow Storage Vault: The following coating system specifications shall be used for coating (sealing) the precast concrete surfaces of the station overflow storage vault: Interior Concrete Surfaces: Surface Preparation: SSPC SP 13 Abrasive Blast or High Pressure wash to meet a ICRI CSP5 profile all surfaces to be coated. Surface shall be clean, dry and free of contaminants. Note: For repair, mechanically abrade 100%of the surface area to be coated. rr Surfacer/Filler: Tnemec Series 218 Mortar Clad applied at 1/32"minimum, fill surface voids flush to plain, to ensure finish is monolithic and pinhole free. ++rr Primer: Tnemec Series 446 PermaShield MCU applied at 7.0 to 9.0 mils dry film thickness. �r Finish: Tnemec Series 446 Pe_rmaShield MCU applied at 7.0 to 9.0 mils dry film thickness. Note: Upon full cure, the installed lining system shall be checked by high voltage spark detection in accordance with NACE RPO 188-90 to verify a pinhole-free surface. Exterior Concrete Surfaces: Surface Preparation: Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days or until passing the ASTM D4263 Plastic Mat test. SSPC SP 13 to meet ICRI CSP5 surface profile all surfaces to be coated. Surface shall be clean, dry and free of contaminants. Finish: Tnemec Series 141 PotaPox applied at 16.0 mils dry film thickness. Steel/Ductile Pipe: aw Surface Preparation: Steel; SP 10 Near White Metal Blast, 3.0 mil profile min. Ductile; SP10 Gray White Metal Blast w Shop Holding Primer: Tnemec Series N69 Epoxoline applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils dry film thickness or to cover profile. Intermediate: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze on the prepared shop primed steel applied at 15.0 to 20.0 mils dry film thickness. Finish: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze applied at 15.0 to 20.0 mils dry film thickness. �r 85 rr Valve Vault: The following coating system specifications shall be used for coating(sealing) the precast concrete surfaces of the station valve vault: Interior Concrete Surfaces: Surface Preparation: Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days or until passing the ASTM D4263 Plastic Mat test. Surface shall be clean, dry and free of contaminants. Primer: Tnemec Series N69F Hi-Build Epoxoline applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils dry film thickness. Finish: Tnemec Series N69F Hi-Build Epoxoline applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils air dry film thickness. Exterior Concrete Surfaces: Surface Preparation: Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days or until passing the ASTM D4263 Plastic Mat test. SSPC SP 13 to meet ICRI CSPS surface profile all surfaces to be coated. Surface shall be clean, dry and free of contaminants. Finish: Tnemec Series 141 PotaPox applied at 16.0 mils dry film thickness. Steel/Ductile Pipe: Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-6 Commercial Blast Primer: Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane applied at 2.5 to 3.5 mils dry film thickness. Finish: Tnemec Series 73 Endura-Shield applied at 3.0 to 5.0 mils dry film thickness. All weld seams and angles shall be stripe coated with the applicable primer prior to applying primer coat to ensure proper millage and a pinhole free film. Air and surface temperatures shall be within limits prescribed by the manufacturer for the coating being applied and work areas shall be reasonably free of airborne dust at the time of application and while the coating is drying. The blasting process shall be completed with clean, dry air and dry abrasives. All blasting equipment shall be sufficiently sized for the Work and have operable moisture and oil separators. All dust and excess blast material shall be removed by clean, dry, compressed air or vacuum. During the blasting process, the environment on the interior of the structure shall be maintained as required in the Humidity and Temperature Control section of these specifications. The Contractor may delay coating of the blasted surfaces as long as these surfaces are in conformance with the manufacturer surface preparation requirements. Prior to coating, the blasted surfaces shall be inspected, and if found not to be in compliance, shall be re-blasted as needed. In general this will require re-blasting a section of the oldest blasted areas and comparing the old and the new. The Contractor shall submit a disposal plan for review by the Engineer and Owner for safe removal of all blast aggregate, hazardous and non-hazardous waste. The plan shall be in compliance with all 86 rpt local, state and federal regulations for disposal of the waste. In addition, the Contractor shall provide a submittal for the disposal facility and submit to the Engineer an affidavit from the disposal facility upon completion of disposal activities that all material was disposed of in compliance with r all local, state, and federal regulations. 6-07.4 Measurement + r Section 6-07.4 is supplemented by adding the following: No Measurement shall be made for the lump sum bid item "Facility Coatings". 6-07.5 Payment low Section 6-07.5 is supplemented by adding the following: rr "Facility Coatings", lump sum. 7-01 DRAINS 7-01.2 Materials The second paragraph of Section 7-01.2 is revised as follows: Drain pipes may be concrete, zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron with Asphalt Treatment 1, aluminum coated (aluminized) corrugated iron with Asphalt Treatment 1, zinc coated(galvanized) steel with Asphalt Treatment I, corrugated aluminum alloy, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), or corrugated polyethylene(PE) at the option of the Contractor unless the Plans specify the type to be used. 7-01.3 Construction Requirements Section 7-01.3 is revised as follows: The second paragraph is revised as follows: PVC drain pipe shall be jointed with a bell and spigot joint using a flexible elastomeric seal as described in Section 9-04.8. The bell shall be laid upstream. PE or ABS drain pipe shall be jointed with snap-on, screw-on, or wraparound coupling bands as recommended by the manufacturer of the .r tubing. The sixth paragraph is revised as follows: PVC underdrain pipe shall be jointed using either the flexible elastomeric seal as described in Section 9-04.8 or solvent cement as described in Section 9-04.9, at the option of the Contractor unless otherwise specified in the Plans. The bell shall be laid upstream. PE or ABS drainage tubing underdrain pipe shall be jointed with snap-on, screw-on, or wraparound coupling bands, as recommended by the manufacturer of the tubing. 7-01.4 Measurement Section 7-01.4 is supplemented adding the following: 87 rr When the contract does not include "structure excavation Class B" or"Structure excavation Class B including haul" as a pay item all costs associated with these items shall be included in other contract pay items. 7-02 CULVERTS 7-02.2 Materials ' The second paragraph of Section 7-02.2 is revised and supplemented as follows: Where steel or aluminum are referred to in this Section in regard to a kind of culvert pipe, pipe arch, or end sections, it shall be understood that steel is zinc coated(galvanized)with Asphalt Treatment I or aluminum coated(aluminized) corrugated iron or steel, and aluminum is corrugated aluminum alloy as specified in Sections 9-05.4 and 9-05.5. Where plain or reinforced concrete, steel, or aluminum are referred to in Section 7-02 it shall be understood that reference is also made to PVC. vi 7-04 STORM SEWERS 7-04.2 Materials r Section 7-04.2 is supplemented by adding the following: Ductile Iron Storm Sewer Pipe, Class 52 9-05.13 The second paragraph of Section 7-04.2 is revised as follows: Where steel or aluminum are referred to in this Section in regard to a kind of storm sewer pipe, it shall be understood that steel is zinc coated(galvanized), Asphalt Treatment I Coated corrugated iron or steel and aluminum is corrugated aluminum alloy as specified in Sections 9-05.4 and 9-05.5. iv The Contractor shall require pipe suppliers to furnish certificates signed by their authorized representative, stating the specifications to which the materials or products were manufactured. The Contractor shall provide 2 copies of these certifications to the Engineer for approval. Certificates showing nonconformance with the Contract shall be sufficient evidence for rejection. Approval of certificates shall be considered only as tentative acceptance of the materials and products, and such action by Engineer will not relieve Contractor of his/her responsibility to perform field tests and to replace or repair faulty materials, equipment, and/or workmanship and Contractor's own expense. 7-04.4 Measurement The first paragraph of Section 7-04.4 is revised as follows: The length of storm sewer pipe will be the number of linear feet of completed installation measured along the invert and will include the length through elbows,tees, and fittings. The number of linear feet will be measured from the center of manhole or from the center of catch basin to center of catch basins and similar type structures. 88 rrr. 7-04.5 Payment The second and third paragraphs of Section 7-04.5 are revised as follows: rr The unit Contract price per linear foot for storm sewer pipe of the kind and size specified shall be full pay for all Work to complete the installation, including adjustment of inverts to manholes and catch AN basins. Pipe bedding, as shown in the standard plans, shall be considered incidental to the pipe and no additional payment shall be made. Testing of storm sewer pipe, if required by the Engineer, shall be considered incidental to and included in the unit Contract prices for other items. Cost of connecting pipe to structures shall be included in the various unit Contract prices for storm sewer pipe, and no additional compensation will be allowed. Abandonment and plugging of pipe shall be incidental to other items in this Contract. 7-05 MANHOLES, INLETS, AND CATCH BASINS 7-05.2 Materials Section 7-05.2 is supplemented by adding the following: Heat shrinkable wrap around sleeve system shall be Wrapid Seal as manufactured by Canusa of Houston, Texas or accepted equal. Wrapid Seal shall consist of a two-piece sleeve (backing and , . adhesive) with a closure system and a G-type primer. It shall consist of irradiated cross-linked polyolefin sheeting, pre-coating with a layer of anti-corrosion adhesive and shall be designed to provide excellent resistance against mechanical damage during construction and in service. The overall thickness of an applied Wrapid Seal sleeve shall nominally measure 0.100 inch. Oil/water separator shall be Utility Vault Model 25-CPS or equal. Exterior vault dimensions shall be 5'-2.5"L x 2'-3"W x 2'-7.5"H(to top of the cover). The cover shall be Utility Vault No. 38/25-TA .r with double door, galvanized diamond plate cover. All baffles and weirs shall be constructed of precast concrete. Structural Notes: Concrete: 28-day compressive strength f c=4500 psi Rebar: ASTM A-615 Grade 60 w Mesh: ASTM A-185 Grade 65 Design: ACI-318-02 Building Code ASTM C-857 "Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility ON Structures" Loads: H-20 Truck Wheel with 30% Impact per AASHTO on Tideflex check valve shall be Model TF1 or accepted equal. 7-05.3 Construction Requirements oft Section 7-05.3 is supplemented by adding the following: w 89 air art All manholes, excluding wet well, shall have eccentric cones and shall have ladders. All manhole and wet well joints shall be sealed with a heat shrinkable wrap around sleeve system such as Wrapid Seal by Canusa-CPS (Shawcor, Inc.) of The Woodlands, Texas(281-367-8866) or st accepted equal. Wrap system shall be applied at least 72-hours after wet well joints have been grouted or as recommended by the manufacturer. The heat shrinkable wrap shall be applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Sanitary sewer pipe to manhole connections shall be "Kor-n-Seal"boot, "Link-seal" or approved equal. Wr► For the oil/water separator: the Contractor shall supply and install all piping and sampling tees; grout in all pipes; fill with clean water prior to start-up of the system; and verify all blockout sizes and locations. 7-05.3(1) Adjusting Manholes and Catch Basins to Grade Section 7-05.3(1) is replaced with: Where shown in the Plans or where directed by the Engineer,the existing manholes, catch basins, or ad inlets shall be adjusted to the grade as staked or otherwise designated by the Engineer. The existing cast iron ring and cover on manholes and the catch basin frame and grate shall first be removed and thoroughly cleaned for reinstalling at the new elevation. From that point,the existing structure shall be raised or lowered to the required elevation. The Contractor shall construct manholes so as to provide adjustment space for setting cover and casting to a finished grade as shown on the construction plans, Manhole ring and covers shall be adjusted to the finished elevations per standard detail BR29, SP Page 13074,prior to final acceptance of the Work. Manholes in unimproved areas shall be adjusted to 6 inches above grade. In unpaved streets: Manholes, catch basins and similar structures in areas to be surfaced with crushed rock or gravel shall be constructed to a point approximately eight inches below the subgrade and covered with a temporary wood cover. Existing manholes shall be cut off and covered in a similar manner. The Contractor shall carefully reference each manhole so that they may be easily found upon completion of the street Work. After placing the gravel or crushed stone surfacing, the manholes and manhole castings shall be constructed to the finished grade of the roadway surface. Excavation necessary for bringing manholes to grade shall center about the manhole and be held to the minimum area necessary. At the completion of the manhole adjustment, the void around the manhole shall be backfilled with materials which result in the section required on the typical roadway section, and be thoroughly compacted. Adjustment of inlets: The final alignment and grade of cast iron frames for new and old inlets to be adjusted to grade will be established from the forms or adjacent pavement surfaces. The final adjustment of the top of the inlet will be performed in similar manner to the above for manholes. On asphalt concrete paving projects using curb and gutter section, that portion of the cast iron frame not embedded in the gutter section shall be solidly embedded in concrete also. The concrete shall extend a minimum of six inches beyond the edge of the casting and shall be left 2 inches below the top of the frame so that the wearing course of asphalt concrete pavement will butt the cast iron frame. The existing concrete pavement and edge of the casting shall be painted with hot asphalt cement. 90 got VW Adjustments in the inlet structure shall be constructed in the same manner and of the same material as that required for new inlets. The inside of the inlets shall be mortared and plastered. Monuments and cast iron frame and cover: Monuments and monument castings shall be adjusted to grade in the same manner as for manholes. Valve box castings: Adjustments of valve box castings shall be made in the same manner as for manholes. 7-05.3(2) Abandon Existing Manholes Section 7-05.3(2) is revised as follows: wr Where it is required that an existing manhole be abandoned, the structure shall be broken down to a depth of at least 4 feet below the revised surface elevation, all connections plugged, the manhole base shall be drilled through to prevent standing water, and the manhole filled with sand and compacted to 90 percent density as specified in Section 2-03.3(14)C. Debris resulting from breaking the upper part of the manhole may be mixed with the sand subject to the approval of the Engineer. The ring and cover shall be salvaged and all other surplus material disposed of. 7-05.3(3) Connections to Existing Manholes Section 7-05.3(3) is supplemented by adding the following: Ow Where shown on the plans, new drain pipes shall be connected to existing line,catch basin, curb inlets and/or manholes. The Contractor shall be required to core drill into the structure, shape the new O pipe to fit and re-grout the opening in a workmanlike manner. Where directed by the Engineer or where shown on the Plans, additional structure channeling will be required. Connections to existing sanitary sewer manholes shall be core drilled. Couplings shall be equal to �" "Kor-n-Seal"boots or"Link-seals". Existing sanitary sewer manholes shall be cleaned, repaired, and rechanneled as necessary to match the new pipe configuration and as shown on the construction plans. +r A "connection to existing" item will be allowed at any connection of a new line to an existing structure, or the connection of a new structure to a existing line. No "connection to existing" will be rr accepted at the location of new installation, relocation and adjustment of line manholes, catch basins or curb inlets. Any damage to existing pipe or structure that is to remain in place resulting from the Contractor's operations shall be repaired or replaced at his own expense. +rr. The unit bid price per each shall be full compensation for all labor, materials and equipment required. 7-05.4 Measurement Section 7-05.4 is revised and supplemented as follows: Manholes will be measured per each. Measurement of manhole heights for payment purposes will not be made. 91 �r Adjustments of new structures and miscellaneous items such as valve boxes shall be considered incidental to the unit Contract price of the new item and no further compensation will be made. No measurement for adjustment of existing structures and miscellaneous items such as valve boxes will be made. Measurement for connection to existing pipes and structures will not be made. ! No measurement will be made for the lump sum bid item "Lift Station Coatings." 7-05.5 Payment Section 7-05.5 is supplemented as follows: If no bid item for Structure Excavation Class A or Structure Excavation Class B is included in the schedule of prices then the work will be considered incidental and its cost should be included in the cost of the pipe. 7-08 GENERAL PIPE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS id 7-08.3(1)C Bedding the Pipe Section 7-08.3(1)C is supplemented by adding the following: (******) to Pipe bedding for PVC sewer pipe shall consist of clean, granular pea gravel consistent with section 9- 03.12(3). It shall be placed to a depth of 6" over and 6" under the exterior walls of the pipe. Hand compaction of the bedding materials under the pipe haunches will be required. Hand compaction shall be accomplished by using a suitable tamping tool to firmly tamp bedding material under the haunches of the pipe. Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of the pipe during the compaction effort. Pipe bedding shall be considered incidental to the pipe and no further compensation shall be made. 7-08.3(2)A Survey Line and Grade Section 7-08.3(2)A is replaced with: (******) err Survey line and grade control shall be provided in accordance with Sections 1-05.4, 1-05.5 and 1-11 in a manner consistent with accepted practices. Ai The Contractor shall transfer line and grade into the trench where they shall be carried by means of a laser beam using 50 foot minimum intervals for grade staking. Any other procedure shall require the written approval of the Engineer. 7-08.3(2)B Pipe Laying— General Section 7-08.3(2)B is supplemented by adding the following: Checking of the invert elevation of the pipe may be made by calculations from measurements on the top of the pipe, or by looking for ponding of 1/2" or less, which indicates a satisfactory condition. At manholes,when the downstream pipe(s) is of a larger size,pipe(s) shall be laid by matching the 92 (eight-tenihs) flow elevation,unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, or as shown on the Drawings. ++ All pipe, fittings, etc. shall be carefully handled and protected against damage, impact shocks, and free fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner which will protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the trench site or elsewhere. No pipe shall be installed where the lining or coating show defects that may be harmful as determined by the Engineer. Such damaged lining or coating shall be repaired, or a new undamaged pipe shall be furnished and installed. The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting prior to installation to insure that there are not damaged portions of the pipe. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe shall be repaired or replaced. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe before lowering into position in the trench. Pipe shall be kept clean during and after laying. Allopenings in the pipe line shall be closed with-water tight expandable type sewer plugs at the end of each day's operation or whenever the pipe openings are left unattended. The use of burlap,wood, or other similar temporary plugs will not be permitted. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or other causes, the rr Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades. Except for short runs which may be permitted by the Engineer, pipes shall be laid uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe which is laid on a downhill grade shall be blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished by the following pipe to prevent movement. Unless otherwise required, all pipe shall be laid straight between the changes in alignment and at uniform grade between changes in grade. For concrete pipes with elliptical reinforcement, the pipe shall be placed with the minor axis of the reinforcement in a vertical position. Immediately after the pipe joints has been made,proper gasket placement shall be checked with a feeler gage as approved by the pipe manufacturer to verify proper gasket placement. 7-08.3(2)E Rubber Gasketed Joints wrr Section 7-08.3(2)E is supplemented as follows: Care shall be taken by the Contractor to avoid over pushing the pipe and damaging the pipe or joint system. Any damaged pipe shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 7-08.3(2)H Sewer Line Connections Section 7-04.3(2)H is supplemented by adding the following: All connections not occurring at a manhole or catch basin shall be done utilizing pre-manufactured tee connectors or pipe sections approved by the Engineer. Any other method or materials proposed for use in making connections shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, all connections of lateral sewers to existing mains shall be made through a cast iron saddle secured to the sewer main with stainless steel bands. When the existing main is constructed of vitrified clay, plain or reinforced concrete, cast or ductile iron pipe, the existing main shall be core drilled. 93 �w Connections (unless booted connections have been provided for) to existing concrete manholes shall be core-drilled, and shall have an "O" ring rubber gasket meeting ASTM C-478 in a manhole coupling equal to the Johns-Manville Asbestos-Cement collar, or use a conical type flexible seal equal to Kor-N-Seal or Link-seal. PVC pipe connection shall consist of tee,nipple and couplers as approved by the Engineer. Section 7-08.3(2)J is an added new section: 7-08.3(2)) Placing PVC Pipe In the trench,prepared as specified in Section 7-02.3(1) PVC pipe shall be laid beginning at the lower end,with the bell end upgrade. Pea gravel will be used as the bedding material and extend from 6" below the bottom of the pipe to 6" above the top of the pipe. When it is necessary to connect to a structure with a mudded joint a rubber gasketed concrete adapter-collar will be used at the point of urs connection. 7-08.5 Payment Section 7-08.5 is replaced with: rr Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1 for each of the following bid items that are included in the proposal: All costs associated with furnishing and installing bedding and backfill material within the pipe zone in the.installation of culvert, storm sewer, water, and sanitary sewer pipes shall be included in the unit contract price for the type and size of pipe installed. 7-12 VALVES FOR WATER MAINS 7-12.3(1) Installation of Valve Marker Post +art► Section 7-12.3(1) has been revised as follows: wri Where required, a valve marker post shall be furnished and installed with each valve. Valve marker posts shall be placed at the edge of the right-of-way opposite the valve and be set with 18 inches of the post exposed above grade. rti The rest of this section is deleted. Section 7-12.3(2) is a new section: 7-12.3(2) Adjust Existing Valve Box to Grade Valve boxes shall be adjusted to grade in the same manner as for manholes, as detailed in Section 7- 05.3(1) of the Renton Standards. Valve box adjustments shall include, but not be limited to, the locations shown on the Plans. Existing roadway valve boxes shall be adjusted to conform to final finished grades. The final installation shall be made in accordance with the applicable portions of Section 7-12. rr rr 94 In the event that the existing valve box is plugged or blocked with debris, the Contractor shall use whatever means necessary to remove such debris, leaving the valve installation in a fully operable condition. rr The valve box shall be set to an elevation tolerance of one-fourth inch(1/4") to one-half inch (1/2") below finished grade. 7-12.4 Measurement Section 7-12.4 is supplemented by adding the following: Adjustment of existing valve boxes to grade shall be measured per each, if included as a separate pay item in the Contract; if not a separate pay item but required to complete the work, then value box adjustment shall be considered incidental. Hydrant auxiliary gate valve will be included in the measurement for hydrant assembly and will not be included in this measurement item. 7-15 SERVICE CONECTIONS 7-15.3 Construction Details Section 7-15.3 is supplemented as follows: Pipe materials shall be 1"copper. Materials and installation shall conform to the requirements of the water purveyor, King County Water District No. 90, whose Standard Details are included in the Drawings from the connection in Nile Avenue NE to the water meter. Materials and construction from the water meter to the control building shall conform to the Drawings. r. Where installation is in existing paved streets, the service lines shall be installed by a trenchless percussion and impact method (hole-hogging). If the trenchless percussion and impact method fails, regular open trench methods may be used. 7-15.5 Payment orr Section 7-15.5 is revised as follows: Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid item when it is included in the proposal: w "Service Connection In. Diam.", per each. The unit Contract price per each for"Service Connection In. Diam." shall be full pay for all work to install the service connection, including but not limited to, excavating or(hole-hogging), tapping the main, laying and jointing the pipe and fittings and appurtenances,backfilling, testing, flushing, and disinfection of the service connection. Connection from back of meter through the Control Building will be paid under the Bid item "Control Building Plumbing, Including Roof Drains." 95 r1 7-17 SANITARY SEWERS 7-17.2 Materials Section 7-17.2 is replaced with the following: Pipe used for sanitary sewers may be: Rigid Thermoplastic Ductile Iron PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) irri All sanitary sewer pipe shall have flexible gasketed joints unless otherwise specified. It is not intended that materials listed are to be considered equal or generally interchangeable for all applications. The Engineer shall determine from the materials listed those suitable for the project, and shall so specify in the plans. Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections. Solid Wall PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe 9-05.12(1) Profile Wall PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe 9-05.12(2) PVC(C900) 9-05.12(4) Ductile Iron Sewer Pipe 9-05.13 All pipe shall be clearly marked with type, class, and thickness. Lettering shall be legible and permanent under normal conditions of handling and storage. 7-17.3(1) Protection of Existing Sewerage Facilities Section 7-17.3(1) is supplemented by adding the following: When extending an existing sewer, the downstream system shall be protected from construction debris by placing a screen or trap in the first existing manhole downstream of the connection. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to maintain this screen or trap until the new system is placed in service and then to remove it. Any construction debris which enter the existing downstream system, shall be removed by the Contractor at his expense, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. When the first manhole is set, it's outlet shall be plugged until acceptance by the Engineer. 7-17.3(2)H Television Inspection Section 7-17.3(2)H is supplemented by adding the following: (******) Once the television inspection has been completed the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the written reports of the inspection plus the video tapes. Said video tapes are to be in color and compatible with the City's viewing and recording systems. The City system accepts 1/2" wide high density VHS Tapes. The tapes will be run at standard speed SP (1 5/16 I.P.S.). 7-17.5 Payment Section 7-17.5 is revised and supplemented as follows: (******) rel rrr 96 The unit Contract price per linear foot for sewer pipe of the kind and size specified shall be full pay for furnishing, hauling, and assembling in place the completed installation including all wyes, tees, special fittings,joint materials, bedding material, and adjustment of inverts to manholes for the completion of the installation to the required lines and grades. "Testing Sewer Pipe",per linear foot. r The unit Contract price per linear foot for"Testing Sewer Pipe" shall be full pay for all labor, material and equipment required to conduct the leakage tests required in Section 7-17.3(2). If no unit price for"Testing Sewer Pipe" is included it shall be considered incidental to the pipe items. "Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Material", will be paid under the Bid item "Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material". "Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill Sewer", will be paid under the Bid item"Gravel Borrow(As Required)". "Television Inspection",per linear foot. 7-20 HEAT SHRINKABLE MANHOLE WRAP Section 7-20 is a new section: 7-20.1 Description This Work consists of wrapping manholes with a heat shrinkable manhole wrap as determined in the field by the ENGINEER to provide a watertight seal. 7-20.2 Materials Heat shrinkable wrap around sleeve system shall be Wrapid Seal as manufactured by Canusa-cps (Shawcor, Inc.) of The Woodlands,Texas (281-367-8866) or accepted equal. Wrapid Seal shall consist of a two piece sleeve(backing and adhesive) with a closure system and a G-type primer. It shall consist of irradiated cross-linked polyolefin sheeting, pre-coated with a layer of anti-corrosion adhesive and shall be designed to provide excellent resistance against mechanical damage during construction and in service. The overall thickness of an applied Wrapid Seal sleeve shall nominally measure 0.100 inch. 7-20.3 Construction Requirements The joints between the manhole base and all successive risers shall be sealed with a heat shrinkable ' wrap around sleeve system such as Wrapid Seal by Canusa or accepted equal at the Engineer's discretion. The Engineer's decision will be based on the water table conditions as found in the field and as anticipated in the future. The heat shrinkable wrap shall be applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 7-20.4 Measurement Measurement shall be per each manhole regardless of size. 7-20.5 Payment The unit bid price per each shall constitute full compensation for all Work, labor, materials, and equipment necessary to furnish and install the manhole wrap around each manhole as required by the Engineer regardless of the size of the manhole. 97 u 7-21 SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAIN Section 7-21 is a new section: 7-21.1 Description This Work consists of constructing sanitary sewer force main in accordance with the Plans, these Specifications, and the Standard Plans, as staked. 7-21.2 Materials .r1 Pipe used for sanitary sewer force mains shall be: PVC(C900) 9-05.12(4) Fittings shall be full bodied ductile iron conforming to ANSI/AWWA A21.10/C110 and ANSI/AWWA A21.11/C111. Compact body fittings are not acceptable. 7-21.3 Construction Requirements Work shall be as described in Section 7-08.3, 7-09.3, 7-17.3 Replace the first sentence in the first paragraph of Section 7-9.3(23) with the following: The sewer force main and appurtenances shall be tested in sections of convenient length. Test r pressure for the force main shall be 225-psi. Hydrostatic pressure testing in accordance with Section 7-09.3(23) shall be done after backfill compaction has met specified densities but before placement of the permanent surface. The Contractor shall provide all Work, labor, equipment, materials, gauges, pumps, temporary blow-offs, and incidentals required to complete all necessary pressure tests. Contractor shall coordinate with King County Water District#90 to provide water required for testing, and shall be responsible for filling new force main prior to testing. Delete Section 7-17.3(2)A in its entirety. r Minimum depth of cover on force mains shall be 48-inches 7-21.4 Measurement Measurement of"8-Inch Diam. PVC C900 Sewer Force Main"will be determined by the number of linear feet of completed installation measured along the invert and will include the length through elbows, tees, and fittings between the outside of the south wall of the Valve Vault and the connection to existing force main. 7-21.5 Payment "8-Inch Diam. PVC C900 Sewer Force Main", per linear foot. The unit Contract price per linear foot for sewer force main of the kind and size specified shall be full pay for furnishing, hauling, and assembling in place the completed installation including all fittings, special fittings,joint materials,bedding material for the completion of the installation to the required lines and grades. The completed installation includes all connections to existing force mains. 98 ei �r ` 8-02 ROADSIDE RESTORATION 8-02.1 Description Section 8-02.1 is modified by replacing the first paragraph with the following: This Work shall consist of planting trees, shrubs, and ground covers, soil preparation, mulching, installing tree stakes and wiring, and coordinating coir matting and irrigation installation. 8-02.2 Materials Section 8-02.2 is supplemented as follows: Fertilizer 9-14.3(1) Compost 9-14.4(8) Plant Materials 9-14. 6 8-02.3(1) Responsibility During Construction Section 8-02.2 is supplemented as follows: Cleanup shall be performed continuously during the work and completed immediately following the work in a given area. Remove all litter and debris of any nature from the site at least once each month, or more often if directed by the Engineer. Cleanup shall include removing all clippings, trimmings, leaves and all other plant litter and debris. Planting areas shall be neatly dressed and finished; walks and paved areas kept clean. All work under this section will be considered incidental to other bid items. 8-02.3(2)B Weed Control Section 8-02.3(2)B is supplemented as follows: Remove non-native and invasive plants (excluding plants required under this Contract) as needed,but not less frequently than monthly. 8-02.3(5) Planting Area Preparation Section 8-02.3(5) is replaced with the following: 4r Soil preparation shall consist of cultivating and amending the existing soil to the required depths and dressing the amended soil surface. Remove clods, hard lumps, rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter and all other debris. Cultivation shall consist of tilling, plowing,ripping, or otherwise thoroughly breaking up the existing +. soil to a depth of 12", so as to produce a uniformly loosened soil to the required depths over the areas to be cultivated. Equipment passes shall be spaced closely enough to loosen all the soil. Amendment shall consist of tilling two, three-inch deep layers of compost into the cultivated soil, each to a depth of 12". The first layer of compost shall be thoroughly incorporated into the cultivated soil before placing and incorporating the next layer. Soil amendment shall not be performed when r 99 cultivated soil or the amendment materials are frozen, excessively wet, or in the opinion of the Engineer,would preclude the ability to establish a well blended, friable soil. Furnishing and placing compost in lifts will be considered incidental to the"Landscaping"bid item. 8-02.3(8) Planting Section 8-02.3(8) is supplemented as follows: Where the drainage of planting holes is limited or non-existent due to compacted glacial till, heavy clay, hard pan or rock, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to advise the Engineer who will determine if the drainage is adequate for planting. The Engineer shall determine the method and extent of improved drainage required. All trees and shrubs shall be water settled during planting. Sufficient water shall be applied to eliminate air pockets in the planting hole without over saturation as determined by soil percolation. Contractor shall provide a list of all plant material indicating source of supply, order invoice, size and quantity for each species or variety. 8-02.3(9) Pruning, Staking, Guying and Wrapping Section 8-02.3(8) is supplemented as follows: Tree trunks shall not be wrapped. Wrapping that was applied prior to plant delivery shall be removed before plant material inspection. All tree ties shall be kept intact and effective in maintaining firm support. Remove tree stakes and ad fasteners after the first year of the plant establishment period or as directed by the Engineer. 8-02.3(11) Bark or Wood Chip Mulch Section 8-02.3(11) is supplemented as follows: Bark mulch shall be considered incidental to the"Landscaping"bid item. 8-02.3(13) Plant Establishment Section 8-02.3(13) is supplemented as follows: The plant establishment period for this project shall be one year immediately following the Final Acceptance Date. The plant establishment plan shall show the scheduling, frequency, dates, materials, and equipment to be used for all plant establishment activities, including but not limited to the following: rf 1. Weed Control for planting areas; 2. Fertilizing; 3. Watering; 4. Litter and Debris Removal; 5. Pruning; 6. Insect and Disease Control; 7. Tightening and repair of tree guying/staking; rwi 100 I. Cleanup of material deposited on sidewalks, streets, and gutters, including plant debris, mulch, and soil; 2. Tightening and repair of tree guying/staking; + 3. Replanting plants that have tilted out of the upright position or that have been removed from their planting holes. +r. The Contractor shall remove weeds from all planting areas as needed during the growing season (April 1 to October 1), but not less frequently than monthly under any circumstances. All weeds and prunings shall be disposed of by the Contractor off the project site, at Contractor expense. Mulch and soil shall not be allowed onto paved areas. Water all plants as needed to maintain healthy growth. The Contractor shall provide all tools and �r equipment needed during the plant establishment period. The Contractor is responsible for contacting City sewer maintenance personnel no less than five (5) working days in advance of planned maintenance to arrange for access to the station during the plant establishment period. 8-02.4 Measurement Section 8-02.2(4) is with the following: +�+ No unit of measurement will be made for the lump sum bid item "Landscaping." 8-02.5 Payment Wr Section 8-02.5 is replaced with the following: The lump sum contract price"Landscaping" shall be full pay for all labor, materials, tools, and equipment needed for cultivating, amending, and dressing the areas designated for each type of soil preparation; furnish compost and place the material in the required lifts and depths over the designated areas; to furnish and install trees, shrubs, and groundcovers in all planting areas, including, but not limited to loading,hauling,placement, installation of bark mulch, staking,pruning, fertilizing, weeding, cleanup, pest control, watering,maintenance,protection and replacement of plants through the end of the plant establishment period. w Following the completion of initial planting in all planting areas, 50 percent of the lump sum contract price for"Landscaping" will be paid. Payment will be increased to the percentages shown in the following table upon accomplishment of the following phases of plant establishment. 6 months after completion of initial planting 75% Completion of 1 st year plant establishment 100% err Partial payments shall only be made after replacement of all plants that are not healthy, vigorous plants. Payments at any stage shall not constitute acceptance of plants, nor shall the ownership or title transfer to the City of Renton. Materials found not acceptable at any stage shall be rejected and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Previous partial payments made for materials rejected or missing will be'deducted from future payments due the Contractor. �rw 101 +rw wr 8-09 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS 8-09.5 Payment Section 8-09.5 has been revised as follows: Payment will be made for each of the following bid items that are included in the proposal: "Raised Pavement Marker Type I", per each. "Raised Pavement Marker Type 2",per each. "Raised Pavement Marker Type 3- In.",per each. "Recessed Pavement Marker", per each. The unit Contract price per each for"Raised Pavement Marker Type I", "Raised Pavement Marker Type 2", and"Raised Pavement Marker Type 3- In."and"Recessed Pavement Marker" shall be full pay for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for furnishing and installing the markers in accordance with these Specifications. w 8-13 MONUMENT CASES 8-13.1 Description Section 8-13.1 is revised and supplemented as follows: This Work shall consist of furnishing and placing monument cases and covers, in accordance with the Standard Plans and these Specifications, in conformity with the lines and locations shown in the Plans or as staked by the Engineer or by the Contractor supplied surveyor. rrr 8-13.3 Construction Requirements Paragraphs 2 and 3 of Section 8-13.3 is revised and supplemented as follows: (******) The monument will be furnished and set by the Engineer or by the Contractor supplied surveyor. When existing monuments will be impacted by a project,the Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that a registered surveyor references the existing monuments prior to construction. After construction is complete,the monuments shall be re-established by the surveyor in accordance with RCW58.09.130. 8-13.4 Measurement Section 8-13.4 is supplemented by adding the following: r All costs for surveying and resetting existing monuments impacted by construction shall be considered incidental to the Contract unless specifically called out to be paid as a bid item. 8-13.5 Payment Section 8-13.5 is supplemented by adding the following: 102 "Reset Existing Monument" per each. r Resetting an existing monument impacted by construction shall be incidental unless included as a pay item in the Schedule of Prices. 8-14 CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 8-14.3(4) Curing Section 8-14.3(4) is replaced with: err The curing materials and procedures outlined in Section 5-05.3(13) of the Standard Specifications shall prevail, except that white pigmented curing compound shall not be used on sidewalks. The curing agent shall be applied immediately after brushing and be maintained for a period of 5 days. The Contractor shall have readily available sufficient protective covering, such as waterproof paper or plastic membrane,to cover the pour of an entire day in the event of rain or other unsuitable weather. During the curing period, all traffic, both pedestrian and vehicular, shall be excluded. Vehicular traffic shall be excluded for such additional time as the Engineer may specify. The Contractor shall be responsible for barricading,patrolling, or otherwise protecting the newly Placed concrete to prevent damage. Damaged, vandalized discolored stained, or unsightly concrete shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 8-14.4 Measurement Section 8-14.4 is supplemented by adding the following: If the Contract does not provide a pay item for"Curb Ramp, Cement Concrete," but the plans call for such installation, then quantities shall be measured with and paid for under the bid items for"Curb irr and Gutter"and "Cement Concrete Sidewalk." When curb ramps,are to be constructed of asphalt concrete, the payment shall be included in the pay item for "HMA Class ''/z"PG 64-22." 8-17 IMPACT ATTENUATOR SYSTEMS 8-17.5 Payment Section 8-17.5 is supplemented by the following: If no pay item is included for temporary impact attenuators then all costs to provide and install shall be considered a part of the pay item for"Traffic Control." 8-20 ILLUMINATION, TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS,AND ELECTRICAL 8-20.2(l) Equipment List and Drawings Paragraphs four of Section 8-20.2(1) are revised and supplemented with the following: err 103 The Contractor shall submit for approval six sets of shop drawings for each of the following types of standards called for on this project: 1. Light standards with or without pre-approved plans. 2. Signal standards with or without pre-approved plans. 3. Combination Signal and lighting standards. 4. Metal Strain Poles. Paragraph five of Section 8-20.2(1) is deleted. Paragraph six of Section 8-20.2(1) is deleted. Section 8-20.2(1) is supplemented as follows: The Contractor also shall submit either on the signal standard shop drawings or attached to the signal standard shop drawings all dimensions to clearly show the specific mast arm mounting height and signal tenon locations for each signal pole to be installed, 8-20.3(2) Excavating and Backfilling Section 8-20.3(2)has been supplemented by adding the following: CITY OF RENTON TRENCH RESTORATION AND STREET OVERLAY REQUIREMENTS Amended April 4, 2005 by Ordinance 5131 SECTION 1 PURPOSE The purpose of this code section is to establish guidelines for the restoration of City streets disturbed by installation of utilities and other construction activities. Any public or private utilities, general contractors, or others permitted to work in the public right-of-way will adhere to the procedures set forth in this policy. SECTION 2 DEFINITIONS Engineer: The term Engineer shall denote the City Project Manager, Inspector and/or plan reviewer, or their designated representative. SECTION 3 HOURS OF OPERATIONS Hours for work within the roadway for asphalt overlays or trench restoration shall be as directed by the Traffic Control Plan requirements and as approved by the Traffic Operations Engineer. SECTION 4 APPLICATION 1. The following standards shall be followed when doing trench or excavation work within the paved portion of any City of Renton right-of-way. 2. Modifications or exemptions to these standards may be authorized by the Planning/Building/Public Works Administrator, or authorized representative, upon written request by the permittee, their Contractor or Engineer and demonstration of an equivalent alternative. SECTION 5 INSPECTION The Engineer may determine in the field that a full street-width (edge-of-pavement to edge-of- pavement) overlay is required due to changes in the permit conditions such as, but not limited to the following: 1. There has been damage to the existing asphalt surface due to the Contractor's equipment. 104 rr 2. The trench width was increased significantly or the existing pavement is undermined or damaged. 3. Any other construction related activities that require additional pavement restoration. SECTION 6 CITY OF RENTON STANDARDS 1. All materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with the City of Renton Standard and Supplemental Specifications (current adopted version) except where otherwise noted in these Standards. Materials and workmanship are required to be in conformance with standards for the Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction prepared by the Washington State Chapter of the American Public Works Association (APWA) and the Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT) and shall + + comply with the most current edition, as modified by the City of Renton Supplemental Specifications. An asphalt paver shall be used in accordance with Section 5-04.3(3) of Standard Specifications.A "Layton Box" or equal may be used in place of the power-propelled paver. Rollers shall be used in accordance with Section 5-04.3(4) of the Standard Specifications. "Plate Compactors" and "Jumping Jacks"SHALL NOT be used in lieu of rollers. 2. Trench backfill and resurfacing shall be as shown in the City of Renton Standard Details, unless modified by the City Permit. Surfacing depths shown in the Standard Details are wr minimums and may be increased by the Engineer to meet traffic loads or site conditions. SECTION 7 REQUIREMENT FOR PATCHING, OVERLAY, OVERLAY WIDTHS All trench and pavement cuts shall be made by sawcut or by grinding. Sawcuts or grinding shall be a minimum of one foot(1')outside the trench width. The top two inches (2") of asphalt shall be ground down to a minimum distance of one foot(P)beyond the actual outside edges of the trench and shall be replaced with two inches (2") of Class B asphalt, per City of Renton Standards. At the discretion of the engineer, a full street width overlay may be required. Lane-width or a full street-width overlay will be determined based upon the location and length of the proposed trench within the roadway cross-section. Changes in field conditions may warrant implementation of additional overlay requirements. 1. Trenches (Road Crossings): a. The minimum width of a transverse patch (road crossing) shall be six and one-half feet(6.5'). See City of Renton Standard Plan Drawing#HR—23 (SP Page: H032A). b. Any affected lane will be ground down two inches (2") and paved for the entire width of the lane. c. Patch shall be a minimum of one foot(1') beyond the excavation and patch length .r shall be a minimum of an entire traveled lane. d. If the outside of the trenching is within three feet(3') of any adjacent lane line, the entire adjacent traveled lane affected will be repaved e. An area including the trench and one foot(1') on each side of the trench but not less than six and one half feet(6.5')total for the entire width of the affected traveled lanes will be ground down to a depth of two inches (2"). A two-inch(2") overlay of Class B asphalt will be applied per City standards. 2. Trenches Running Parallel With the Street: a. The minimum width of a longitudinal patch shall be four and one-half feet (4.5'). See City of Renton Standard Plan Drawing #HR-05 (SP Page H032). w b. If the trenching is within a single traveled lane, an entire lane-width overlay will be required. c. If the outside of the trenching is within three feet(3') of any adjacent lane line, the entire adjacent traveled lane affected will be overlaid. r d. If the trenching is greater than, or equal to 30%of lane per block(660-foot maximum block length), or if the total patches exceed 12 per block,then the lanes affected will be overlaid. Minimum overlay shall include all patches within the block section. lie 105 e. The entire traveled lane width for the length of the trench and an additional ten feet (10') at each end of the trench will be ground down to a depth of two inches (Y). A two-inch(2") overlay of Class B will be applied per City standards. 3. Potholing: Potholing shall meet the same requirements as trenching and pavement restoration. Potholing shall be a minimum of one foot(1') beyond the excavation. All affected lanes will be ground down to a depth of two inches (2") and paved not less than six and one half feet(6.5')wide for the entire width of the lane. Potholes greater than five feet(5') in ,rri length,width or diameter shall be restored to trench restoration standards. In all cases, potholes shall be repaired per Renton Standard Plan#HR05 (SP Page H032). Restoration requirements utilizing vactor equipment will be determined by the Engineer. 66 SECTION 8 PAVEMENT REMOVAL IN LIEU OF GRINDING The Contractor in all cases can remove the pavement in the replacement area instead of grinding out the specified two inches (2") of asphalt. Full pavement replacement to meet or exceed the existing pavement depth will be required for the area of pavement removal. SECTION 9 TRENCH BACKFILL AND RESTORATION CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 1. Trench restoration shall be either by a patch or overlay method, as required and indicated on City of Renton Standard Plans#HR-05, HR-23, and HR-22 (SP Pages#H032, H032A, and H033). 2. All trench and pavement cuts, which will not be overlaid, shall be made by sawcut or grinding. Sawcuts shall be a minimum of two feet(2') outside the excavated trench width. 3. All trenching within the top four feet(4') shall be backfilled with crushed surfacing materials conforming to Section 4-04 of the Standard Specifications. Any trenching over four feet(4') in depth may use materials approved by the Engineer or Materials Lab for backfilling below the four-foot(4') depth. If the existing material (or other material) is determined by the Engineer to be suitable for backfill,the contractor may use the native material, except that the top six inches (6") shall be crushed surfacing top course material. The trench shall be compacted to a minimum ninety-five percent(95%) density, as described in Section 2-03 of the Standard Specifications. In the top six feet(6') of any trench,backfill compaction shall be performed in eight to 12-inch(8-12") lifts. Any trench deeper than six feet(6) may be compacted in 24-inch lifts, up to the top six-foot (6) zone. All compaction shall be performed by mechanical methods. The compaction tests may be performed in maximum four-foot(4')vertical increments. The test results shall be given to the Engineer for review and approval prior to paving. The number and location of tests required shall be determined by the Engineer. 4. Temporary restoration of trenches for overnight use shall be accomplished by using MC ,r mix (cold mix),Asphalt Treated Base(ATB), or steel plates, as approved by the Engineer. ATB used for temporary restoration may be dumped directly into the trench,bladed out and rolled. After rolling,the trench must be filled flush with asphalt to provide a smooth riding surface. If the temporary restoration does not hold up, the Contractor shall repair the patch rr within eight hours of being notified of the problem by the City. This requirement applies 24 hours per day, seven days a week. In the event that the City determines to repair the temporary patch, the Contractor shall reimburse the City in an amount that is double the City's cost in repairing the patch,with the second half of the reimbursement to represent City overhead and hidden costs. 5. Asphalt Concrete Class E or Class B shall be placed to the compacted depth as required and indicated on City of Renton Standard Plans#HR-05, HR-23, and HR-22 (SP Pages #H032, H032A, and H033) or as directed by the Engineer. The grade of asphalt shall be AR- 4000W. The materials shall be made in conformance with Section 9-02.1(4) of the Standard Specifications. 6. Tack coat shall be applied to the existing pavement at edge of saw cuts and shall be emulsified asphalt grade CSS-1, as specified in Section 9-02.1(6) of the Standard 106 1rr Specifications. Tack shall be applied as specified in Section 5-04 of the Standard Specifications. 7. Asphalt Concrete Class E or Class B, shall be placed in accordance with Section 5-04 of the Standard Specifications; except those longitudinal joints between successive layers of asphalt concrete shall be displaced laterally a minimum of twelve inches (12"), unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Fine and coarse aggregate shall be in accordance with Section 9-03.8 of the Standard Specifications. rrr All street surfaces, walks or driveways within the street trenching areas shall be feathered and shimmed to an extent that provides a smooth-riding connection and expeditious drainage flow for the newly paved surface. Feathering and shimming shall not decrease the minimum vertical curb depth below four inches (4") for storm water flow. The Engineer may require additional grinding to increase the curb depth available for storm water flow in areas that are inadequate. Shimming and feathering, as required by the Engineer, shall be accomplished by raking out the oversized aggregates from the Class B mix as appropriate. Surface smoothness shall be per Section 5-04.3(13)of the Standard Specifications. The paving shall be corrected by removal and repaving of the trench only. Asphalt patch depths will vary based upon the streets being trenched. The actual depths of asphalt and the work to be performed shall be as required and indicated on City of Renton Standard Plans#HR- 05, HR-23, and HR-22 (SP Pages#H032, H032A, and H033). Compaction of all lifts of asphalt shall be a minimum ninety-two percent(92%) of density as determined by WSDOT Test Method 705. The number of tests required shall be determined by the Engineer. Testing shall be performed by an independent testing lab with the results being supplied to the Engineer. Testing is not intended to relieve the Contractor from any liability for the trench restoration. It is intended to show the Inspector, and the City, that the restoration meets these specifications. 8. All joints shall be sealed using paving asphalt AR-4000W. r. 9. When trenching within the unpaved roadway shoulder(s), the shoulder shall be restored to its original condition, or better. 10. The final patch or overlay shall be completed as soon as possible and shall not exceed fifteen (15) working days after first opening the trench. This time frame may be adjusted if delays are due to inclement paving weather or other adverse conditions that may exist. However, delaying of final patch or overlay work is subject to the Engineer's approval. The Engineer may deem it necessary to complete the work within the fifteen (15)working day time frame and not allow any time extension. Should this occur, the Contractor shall perform the necessary work, as directed by the Engineer. 11. A City of Renton temporary Traffic Control Plan(from Renton Transportation Engineering) shall be submitted and approved by the Engineer a minimum of three (3) ,rr working days prior to commencement of work. SECTION 10 REMOVAL OF UTILITY LOCATE MARKINGS FROM SIDEWALKS REQUIRED The Permittee will be required to remove utility locate marks on sidewalks only within the Downtown Core Area. The permittee shall remove the utility locate marks within 14 days of job completion. ,rw 8-22 PAVEMENT MARKING rr 8-22.1 Description The following item in Section 8-22.1 is revised as follows: 107 stir Crosswalk Stripe A SOLID WHITE line, 8 inches wide and 10-feet long, installed parallel to another crosswalk stripe and parallel to the direction of traffic flow and centered in pairs on lane lines and the center of lanes. See detail sheet. Skip Center Line (Replacement) A BROKEN YELLOW line 4 inches wide. The broken or"skip"pattern shall be based on a 24-foot unit consisting of a 9-foot line and a 15-foot gap. Skip center strip is used as center line delineation on two-lane or three-lane, two-way highways. Double Yellow Center Line(Replacement) Two SOLID YELLOW lines, each 4 inches wide, separated by a 4-inch space. Double yellow center stripe is used as center line delineation on multilane, two-way highways and for channelization. Approach Line (New) A SOLID WHITE line, 8 inches wide,used to separate left and right turning movements from through movements, to separate high occupancy vehicle lanes from general purpose lanes, for islands, hash marks, and other applications. Hash mark stripes shall be placed on 45-degree angle and 10 feet apart. Lane Line(Replacement) A BROKEN WHITE line, 4 inches wide, used to delineate adjacent lanes traveling in the same direction.The broken or"skip"pattern shall be based on a 24-foot unit consisting of a 9-foot line and a 15-foot gap. Two Way Left Turn Line(Replacement) A SOLID YELLOW line, 4 inches wide, with a BROKEN YELLOW line, 4 inches wide, separated by a 4-inch space. The broken or"skip"pattern shall be based on a 24-foot unit consisting of a 9-foot line and a 15-foot space. The solid line shall be installed to the right of the broken line in the direction of travel. Crosswalk Line(Replacement) A SOLID WHITE line, 8 inches wide and 10 feet long, installed parallel to another crosswalk stripe and parallel to the direction of traffic flow and centered in pairs on lane lines and the center of lanes. See detail sheet. Stop Line(Replacement) A SOLID WHITE line 12, 18, or 24 inches wide as noted on the Contract plans. 8-22.3(5) Installation Instructions Section 8-22.3(5) is revised as follows: (******) ur A manufacturer's technical representative need not be present at the initial material installation to approve the installation procedure. 8-22.4 Measurement Section 8-22.4 is replaced with the following: (******) 108 riY wr wr No measurement shall be made for the lump sum bid item"Pavement Marking." 8-23 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS 8-23.5 Payment Section 8-23.5 is supplemented with the following: If no pay item is included in the Contract for installation or for removal of temporary pavement markings then all costs associated with these items are considered incidental to other items in the Contract or included under "Traffic Control," if that item is included as a bid item. (January 5, 2004) 9-03.8(2) HMA Test Requirements it Section 9-03.8(2) is supplemented with the following: ESAL's The number of ESAL's for the design and acceptance of the HMA shall be 4 million. 9-03.8(7) HMA Tolerances and Adjustments Item 1 is deleted and replaced with: 1. Job Mix Formula Tolerances. After the JMF is determined as required in 5-04.3(7)A, the r constituents of the mixture at the time of acceptance shall conform to the following tolerances: Nonstatistical Commercial Evaluation Evaluation Aggregate, percent passing 1", '/", ''/2", and 3/8" sieves ±6% ±8% irr U.S. No. 4 sieve ±6% ±8% U.S. No. 8 sieve ±6% ±8% U.S. No. 16 sieve ±4% ±6% Wo U.S. No. 30 sieve ±4%0 +6% U.S. No. 50 sieve ±4% +6%" U.S. No. 100 sieve ±3%0 +5% +r�r U.S. No. 200 sieve ±2,0% ±3.0% Asphalt Binder ±0.5%0 ±0.7% VMA 1.5% below minimum value in 9-03.8(2) VFA min. and max. as listed in 9-03.8(2) Va 2.5% minimum and 5.5%maximum These tolerance limits constitute the allowable limits as described in Section 1-06.2. The tolerance limit for aggregate shall not exceed the limits of the control points section, except the tolerance limits for sieves designated as 100%passing will be 99-100. rr 109 +rr 9-05 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, CULVERTS, AND CONDUITS 9-05.7(2)A Basis for Acceptance (RC) Section 9-05.7(2)A is supplemented by the following: All pipe shall be subject to (1) a three-edge-bearing strength(D-load)test in accordance with ASTM C76; and (2) a hydrostatic test of rubber gasket joints in accordance with ASTM C361 or AWWA C302 except test pressure shall be 5 psi. 9-05.12(3) CPEP Sewer Pipe Section 9-05.12(3) is a new additional section: CPEP - Smooth interior pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from high density polyethylene resin which shall meet or exceed the requirements of Type 111, Category 4 or 5, Grade P33 or P34, Class C per ASTM D 1248. In addition,the pipe shall comply with all material and stiffness requirements of AASHTO M294. Section 9-05.12(4) is a new additional section: 9-05.12(4) Sanitary Sewer Force Main PVC pipe for sanitary sewer force mains shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C900. PVC pipe shall have the same outside dimensions as ductile iron pipe. PVC pipe shall be a minimum of SDR 18. Pipe shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 9-05.14 ABS Composite Sewer Pipe Section 9-05.14 is deleted 9-05.21 Sanitary Sewer Gate Valve sand Fittings Section 9-05.21 is a new additional section: Sanitary sewer gate valves shall be rated for sewer service. Valve shall have a ductile iron body and bonnet and have an o-ring stuffing box. All flange faces shall be machined and drilled to straddle the vertical centerline. Valve stem extensions are required where the operating nut is more than 4 feet below the finished surface. Extensions shall have a plate welded to operating nut. The valve stem extension top shall be installed within 18 inches to 24 inches below finish grade. Valve stem extensions shall have a 2-inch square operating nut and self-centering rock-plate support. Lock down set screws shall not be used uw on valve operating nut extensions. Valve boxes shall be cast iron with lid marked "SEWER" as approved by OWNER, with tapered valve box covers. Each box shall be adjusted to match the finish grade at the valve location. All valve box covers shall be painted green as designated by the OWNER. Orient the valve box so the "Ears" are set the same as the pipe direction. Provide 2 inch thick by 4 foot-wide asphalt or concrete collar around valve box covers in unimproved areas, landscape areas and easements. Fittings shall be lined with Sewpercoat or approved equal. r 110 9-14 EROSION CONTROL AND ROADSIDE PLANTING 9-14.3(1) Fertilizer Section 9-14.3(1) is supplemented as follows: Fertilizer shall the following or equivalent approved by Engineer: Nutricote 18-6-8 plus micronutrients controlled release NPK fertilizer Manufacturer: Plantco, Inc. 314 Orenda Road Brampton, Ontario L6T 161 (416) 793-8000 Osmocote Pro 18-5-9 Manufacturer: Scotts-Sierra Horticultural Products Company. err 14111 Scottslawn Road Maryville, Ohio 43041 (800)492-8255 The selected fertilizer shall contain these micro-nutrients: Magnesium (Mg) Copper(Cu) Iron (Fe) Manganese(Mn) �. Zinc (Zn) - at least 40 to 50% water-soluble The controlled release period shall_be greater than 6 months. 9-14.4(3) Bark or Wood Chips Section 9-14.4(3) is modified as follows: r�r Bark shall be coarsely ground Douglas fir, spruce, or hemlock species. Pine bark will not be allowed. Particle size range shall be 95 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and no more than 55 percent passing a '/-inch sieve by loose volume. Wood chips will not be allowed in lieu of bark. 9-14.4(8) Compost Section 9-14.4(8) is supplemented as follows: Compost shall be a commercially available, recycled, mature, stable, decomposed organic yard waste + + from Cedar Grove Composting or equal. It shall be the result of accelerated, aerobic biodegradation and stabilization under controlled commercial conditions. The result shall be a uniform, dark, soil- like appearance. Acceptance of compost shall be based on the following submittals by the Contractor: 1. A request for approval of material source. 2. A manufacturer's certificate verifying that the compost meets all requirements of 9-14.4(8). �wr 111 9-14.6(2) Quality Section 9-14.6(2) is supplemented as follows: r Cold storage plants will not be permitted. Potted and container stock shall be well rooted and vigorous enough to ensure survival and healthy as growth. Container plants shall have grown therein a minimum of six months to a maximum of two years, with roots filling the containers but not showing evidence of being or having been root bound. No grafted plants will be accepted. Trees: Provided untapped, straight, single leader trees, except for multiple stem (clump) trees. Trees shall have full crowns and balanced branching. Plant material shall be free from disfiguring knots, swollen grafts, sunscale injuries,bark abrasions, evidence of improper pruning, and other objectionable disfigurement. Trees and shrubs shall have well-developed branch systems; shrubs shall be full foliaged, and not "leggy". Measurements, caliper,branching, grading, quality, balling, and burlapping shall follow the Code of Standards of the American Association of Nurserymen in the American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI 260.1, latest edition. Measurements shall be taken with all branches in their normal growing position. Plants shall not be pruned prior to their delivery to the site. Names on plant tags shall conform to the standardized names of the American Joint Committee on Horticulture, latest edition. 9-23 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS AND ADMIXTURES mid 9-23.9 Fly Ash (RC) Section 9-23.9 is revised as follows: Wi Fly ash shall not be used around water lines. 9-30 WATER DISTRIBUTION MATERIALS 9-30.1(1) Ductile Iron Pipe (RC) i7 Section 9-30.1(1) is revised as follows: Ductile iron pipe shall be centrifugally cast and meet the requirements of AWWA C151. Ductile iron pipe shall have a cement-mortar lining meeting the requirements of AWWA C104. . All other ductile iron pipe shall be Standard Thickness Class 52 or the thickness class as shown in the Plans. 9-30.3(1) Gate Valves (3 inches to 12 inches) Section 9-30.3(1)is replaced with: 112 �r Gate valves shall be of the size and type indicated on the Drawings with bronze-mounted resilient seat wedging devices and shall meet the following requirements: Valves shall conform to AWWA C515-01 (Ductile Iron Body and Bonnet) and C550-05. • Manufacturer shall provide catalog data, net weight, and assembly drawings of all valves to be purchased and installed for this Project as well as an affidavit of compliance. • Valve shall have an o-ring stuffing box. • All flange faces shall be machined and drilled to straddle the vertical centerline. All valves shall have a water working pressure rating equivalent to the full rated • pressure of the pipe on which they are installed, with a minimum 2:1 safety factor in any nominal pipe size. +r Valve stem extensions are required where the operating nut is more than 4 feet below the finished surface. Extensions shall have a plate welded to operating nut. The valve stem extension top shall be installed within 18 inches to 24 inches below finish grade. Valve stem extensions shall have a 2-inch square operating nut and self-centering rock-plate support. Lock down set screws shall not be used on valve operating nut extensions. rr Valve boxes shall be cast iron with lid marked "WATER", Rich Manufacturing Company, Series 940 or as approved by OWNER, with tapered valve box covers. Each box shall be adjusted to match the finish grade at the valve location. All valve box covers shall be painted blue as designated by the OWNER. Orient the valve box so the "Ears" are set the same as the pipe direction. Provide 2 inch thick by 4 foot-wide asphalt or concrete collar around valve box covers in unimproved areas, landscape areas and easements. 9-30.3(5) Valve Marker Posts Section 9-30.3(5) has been deleted and replaced with the following: Valve marker posts shall be furnished and installed as directed. Marker posts shall be concrete with 4 inches minimum square section,42-inch length, and shall be reinforced with one No. 3 - 39" long reinforcing steel bar Grade 60. Markers shall be placed as directed by the ENGINEER. Markers shall be set so as to leave 18 inches exposed above grade. The exposed position of the marker posts shall be painted with two coats of Farwest paint case yellow PN No. X3472. Two inch high letters r shall be stenciled with black exterior masonry paint on the face of the post giving the following information: the size of the valve (e.g. 6-inch gate valve), and the distance in feet and inches to the valve. 9-30.6(4) Service Fittings Section 9-30.6(4) has been revised as follows: Fittings used for copper tubing shall be compression type with gripper ring. 113 rr WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.00000 Introduction Page 1 of 1 err SUB-SECTION 10.00000 INTRODUCTION +rr Sub-Section 10.00000 describes the numbering format used within Division 10 of the Special Provisions (Part II). Division 10 is in CSI format and some modifications have been made to the typical numbering system used in CSI. A 10.x has been added to all of the CSI numbering in Division 10 in order to separate items in this Section from the rest of the WSDOT Division numbering in the Special Provisions (Part 1). Furthermore, a DIVISION in CSI is equivalent to a SECTION in the Special Provisions (Part II) and the 5-digit CSI Section number now becomes a Sub-Section. The following table shows the typical CSI numbering on the left and the new numbering on the right: CSI Standard Numbering Format Special Provisions (Part 11) Numbering Format rr (No CSI Standard) DIVISION 10 DIVISION 1 SECTION 10.01 01190 Seismic Requirements 10.01190 Seismic Requirements DIVISION 2 SECTION 10.02 02085 Vaults/Manholes 10.02085 Vaults/Manholes 02301 Earthwork 10.02301 Earthwork r END OF SUB-SECTION r rr W1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.00000.DOC 6116/2010 WWP-27-3473 Division 10—Special Provisions (Part II) Certification Page Page 1 of 1 STONEGATE LIFT STATION REPLACEMENT CERTIFICATION /SEALS The engineering material and data contained in Division 10 — Special Provisions (Part II) were prepared under the supervision and direction of the undersigned, whose seals as registered professional engineers are affixed below. SUB-SECTION 10.01190 AND SECTIONS 10.03 THROUGH 10.06 SECTIONS 10.07 THROUGH 10.10 lir 7L.1 7 Irr FEIGrREAAZ TECT DANIEL �'fiRIGHT �,; STA EO GF 'YVASHINGTGN ONAL I4 V. ills SUB-SECTIONS 10.15400 AND 10.15800 SUB-SECTION 10.11002 AND SECTIONS 10.16 AND 10.17 f 1, , b 1 r it 6/11/2010 Ill. .. WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.01190 Seismic Requirements Page 1 of 4 SUB-SECTION 10.01190 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Sub-Section is applicable to the following secondary structural system elements, non-structural components, and/or equipment supported by structures. 1. Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing equipment and appurtenances. 2. Conduit, piping, cable trays, raceways, ducts, and similar systems. 3. Tanks and vessels (include contents), including support systems. 4. Storage racks, suspended ceilings, light fixtures, raised floors, partitions, storefront, windows, louvers, architectural features, and other non-structural components. B. This Sub-Section is applicable to the following elements of the primary structural system: 1. Cold formed steel load bearing framing 2. Metal plate connected wood trusses r 3. Precast, pre-stressed concrete members. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Civil Engineers Standard ASCE 7-05, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, Chapters 11, 13, and 15. irr B. International Building Code 2006 Edition with Amendments adopted by the Washington State Building Code Council. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Engineer of Record: The Engineer responsible for the preparation of Contract Documents. B. Specialty Engineer: Structural or Civil Engineer provided by the Contractor licensed in the State where the project is being built responsible for specific elements of the primary structural system, the secondary structural system, non-structural elements and/or equipment supported by structures. "" 1.04 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor is responsible for producing designs that resist the total seismic forces in accordance with the seismic design criteria. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating between the Engineer of Record and the Specialty Engineer. B. The seismic design for non-structural components and equipment shall be in accordance with the IBC 2006 Section 1613, and the required coefficients and factors for determining the total design seismic forces are provided in the Seismic rr Design Criteria in Paragraph D below. Aw W:1200810897003_City-oi-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100%_Specs Jun2010110.01190rev2.Jan18.doc 6/11/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.01190 Seismic Requirements Page 2 of 4 C. Coordinate the layout so that adequate space is provided between items for relative motion. Provide additional supports and restraints between items of different systems when necessary to prevent seismic impacts or interaction. �r D. Total seismic forces shall be determined in accordance with the following seismic design criteria coefficients for elements of structures, non-structural components, equipment supported by structures, and non-building structures: 1. Spectral Acceleration 1-Second Period, SDI = 0.48 per IBC 2006 Section 1613.5.4 2. Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Period, SDs = 0.933 per IBC 2006 Section 1613.5.4 3. Seismic Design Category = D per IBC 2006 Section 1613.5.6 4. Importance Factor, I = 1.25 per ASCE 7 Table 11.5-1 5. Component Importance Factor, Ip, per ASCE 7 Section 13.1.3 6. Components Coefficients, ap and Rp, per ASCE 7 Tables 13.5-1 and 13.6-1 7. Non-building Structure Coefficients, R, 00, and Cd, per ASCE 7 Tables 15.4-1 and 15.4-2. E. Design anchorages of all elements of structures, non-structural components, equipment supported by structures, and non-building structures to resist static and dynamic operational loads, plus total seismic loads specified in IBC 2006, ASCE 7-05 Chapters 13 and 15, and as follows: 1. For suspended equipment, multiply dead load by 1.2 and add 0.2SDS to account for vertical seismic effects in the downward direction. 2. For anchorage uplift, multiply dead load by 0.9 and subtract 0.2SDS if used to reduce vertical seismic effects. F. Design anchorages utilizing a Component Coefficient, RP = 1.5, unless supporting documentation for embedment length, showing compliance with Section 13.4.2 of ASCE 7, is provided for expansion anchor bolts, chemical anchors, or cast-in-place anchors. .�i 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING, CONDUIT, AND DUCTS A. The Contractor is responsible for producing designs for support of piping, conduit, duct or other systems to resist total seismic forces based on the seismic design criteria coefficients specified above, unless shown on the Contract Documents. Except where the technical specifications give specific exemption from resistance of r seismic forces, all supports shall be designed to meet seismic criteria. Support systems for piping, conduit, duct, or other systems greater than 5 inches in diameter are shown on the Contract Documents. , 1.06 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR UNDERWATER ITEMS A. To allow for water sloshing, design rigid items such as piping or equipment supports for twice the lateral force, computed as if the item were above water. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. W:1200 810 8 9 7 0 0 3 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.01190rev2.Jan18.doc 6/11/2010 an WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.01190 Seismic Requirements Page 3 of 4 B. Shop Drawings: Submit signed and sealed structural calculations and detailed drawings where required in Sections 10.02 through 10.17 of the primary structural system and their attachments, the secondary structural system and their r attachments, permanent non-structural components and their attachments, and the attachments and anchorage for permanent equipment supported by the structure. C. Structural calculations and detailed drawings shall be prepared by a Specialty Engineer licensed in the state where the project is being built. D. Structural calculations and detailed drawings shall clearly show the total design aw seismic forces which will be transferred from the elements of the structural system, non-structural components, and/or equipment and their attachments to the primary structure. E. The Engineer's review of items within a Specification Sub-Section cannot be completed until all related items have been coordinated and submitted for review. ow F. Quality Assurance Submittals 1. Test Reports: Submit test reports for tension testing of anchors. do 2. Where required in the equipment specifications in Sections 10.02 through 10.17, submit certification that the equipment itself is designed to resist all internal seismic forces based on the seismic design criteria for the project. 3. Where required in the equipment specifications in Sections 10.02 through 10.17, submit signed and sealed structural calculations and detailed drawings from a specialty Structural or Civil Engineer licensed in the State where the project is being built for the attachments and anchorage to the primary structure. 4. Where required in the equipment specifications in Sections 10.02 through 10.17, submit certification that the attachments and anchorage are designed to resist all seismic forces based on the seismic design criteria for the project. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: The Contractor is responsible for submitting signed and sealed structural calculations and detailed drawings from a Specialty Structural or Civil Engineer licensed in the State where the project is being built. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the State with Jurisdiction adopted and amended versions of the International Building Code (IBC 2006) Section 1613, the referenced sections of ASCE 7 plus clarifications and additions specified in this Sub-Section. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL MW A. Site Tests: Tension testing of expansion or adhesive anchors utilized for anchorage shall be done in the presence of the inspector and a report of the test results shall be submitted. See Specification Sub-Section 10.05100 for additional requirements. W9200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010110.01190 nev2.Jan 18.doc 6/16/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.01190 No Seismic Requirements Page 4 of 4 err B. Inspection: Special inspection shall be provided for high strength bolting or bolts installed in concrete. See Specification Sub-Section 10.05100 for additional requirements. at END OF SUB-SECTION ON wr r W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.01190rev2.Jan18.doc 6/11/2010 W* +rw WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.01660 Testing, Startup, and Operation Page 1 of 3 SUB-SECTION 10.01660 TESTING, STARTUP, AND OPERATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCHEDULE A. The placing of all improvements in service shall consist of three parts: `testing', `startup', and 'operation'. Not less than 14 days before the anticipated time for +Ir beginning the testing, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner for approval, a complete plan in writing for the following: 1. Schedules for tests. 2. Detailed schedule of procedures for startup. 3. Complete schedule of events to be accomplished during testing. 4. An outline of work remaining under the Contract that will be carried out rr concurrently with the operation phases. 1.2 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor shall conduct all testing and startup. Testing and startup shall not be a cause for claims for delay by the Contractor and all expenses for testing and startup shall be incidental to this contract. The Contractor shall make arrangements for all materials, supplies, and labor necessary to efficiently complete the testing, startup, and operation. B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner's control system integrator as necessary to accomplish the testing and startup. C. The Contractor shall coordinate with all suppliers and subcontractors whose attendance is required for testing, startup, and operation. 1.3 TESTING A. The Contractor may periodically request preliminary testing for items that must be covered or tested before other work can proceed. In these cases, the work shall not be tested or covered up without timely notice to the Owner of its readiness for testing. Should any work be covered up without notice, approval, or consent, it must, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense. Where work is to be tested, all necessary equipment shall be set up and the work given a preliminary test so that any and all defects may be discovered and repaired prior to calling out the Owner for the test. rr B. The Contractor shall coordinate with King County Water District No. 90 to obtain water to fill the wet well and the force main as many times as needed during ,111, testing and pay for the District's fees. The length of the 8-inch diameter force from the property line of the Stonegate Lift Station at NE 26th Street to the high point of the force main is approximately 3,500 lineal feet. The Contractor shall w supply sufficient diesel fuel to operate the generator during test conditions. At some point in the testing process, it may become feasible to use sewage in the wet well. The use of sewage will only be permitted with the written authorization of the Owner and, as a minimum, shall not occur until no further physical entry into the wet well is required. FA0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.01 General Requirements\10.01660.docx 6/25/2010 M WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.01660 Testing, Startup, and Operation Page 2 of 3 C. The Contractor shall test equipment prior to final testing in order to provide some i certainty that final testing will be successful without troubleshooting by the Owner or Engineer. Final testing shall consist of individual tests and checks made on equipment intended to provide proof of performance of unit and proper operation of unit control together with necessary tests to show system operation. Assure proper alignment, size, condition, capability, strength, proper adjustment, lubrication, pressure, hydraulic test, leakage test, and all other tests deemed necessary by the Engineer to determine that all materials and equipment are of specified quality, properly situated, anchored, and in all respects, ready for use. Any certificates required by these specifications by the manufacturer's representatives shall be supplied to the Engineer prior to startup. D. All piping shall be tested as required by specifications and applicable codes. Tests on individual items of equipment, such as pipelines, structures, controls, and other items shall be as necessary to show proper system operation. Final testing will be done by the Contractor in the presence of the Owner. During testing, the Contractor shall correct any defective work discovered. Startup shall not begin until all tests required by these specifications have been completed and approved by the Owner. E. Testing of the entire system shall be performed using both the utility electrical service and the standby generator. F. Final permit inspections shall be included and completed prior to or in conjunction with the testing phase. 1.4 STARTUP A. Startup shall consist of a simulated operation of all equipment and controls. The purpose of startup shall be to check that all equipment will function under operating conditions, that all interlocking controls and sequences are properly set, and that the facility will function as an operating unit. B. Technically qualified factory representatives shall be present for the startup phase. All representatives shall be trained, qualified, and have experience in troubleshooting and fixing field issues. The startup shall continue until it is demonstrated that all functions, controls, and machinery are functioning correctly. C. Training of the Owner's personnel shall be included. A minimum of 1/2 day shall be allotted for training of each of the major components of the system (for ► example, the generator set), with the appropriate manufacturer's representatives, with a return visit as necessary. 1.5 OPERATION A. At the time that the facility is ready to be put into operation, the Contractor is to conduct an operation and maintenance training meeting with the Owner to explain in detail the operation and maintenance requirements of each of the facility's components. The training meeting shall not occur on the same date(s) as a startup, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. Qualified personnel shall provide the training, with an allotment minimum time of 1/2 day, with a return visit to complete the training as necessary. B. Operation of the facility shall commence immediately after completion of testing, startup, and Owner training and after satisfactory repairs and adjustments have been made. F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.01 General Requirements\10.01660.docx 6/25/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.01660 Testing, Startup, and Operation Page 3 of 3 +rr END OF SUB-SECTION rrr .r dr an +rr ar o F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.01 General Requirements\10.01660.docx 6/25/2010 wo WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.01730 Operation and Maintenance Information Page 1 of 3 SUB-SECTION 10.01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 The Contractor shall prepare Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O&M Manuals) for the materials and equipment incorporated into the Work. Payment for these documents shall be incidental to the respective Bid items within this Contract. The Owner reserves the.right to withhold payment for a portion of the respective bid items under this Contract .ri► until the completed documents are both received and accepted by the Engineer. 1.2 Within one month of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall provide a Schedule of the products and equipment to be included in the O&M Manuals. The Engineer will review this schedule and notify the Contractor of additional equipment to be covered in the O&M Manuals, if any. As a minimum, the O&M Manuals shall include all equipment associated with the following systems: • Precast Concrete Structures—Wet Well, • Louvers Overflow Storage Vault, and Valve Vault • Building Structural Information + • Sewage Pumps and Motors • Roofing Materials • Seals • Doors • Pressure Gauges • Metal Fabrications, Ladder, etc. • Sump Pump • FRP Grating • All Valves including Check Valves and • Heater Gate Valves • Blower • Protective Coatings for Wet Well, Storage • Electrical Control System Vault, and Valve Vault (Interior and • Standby Generator Set and Exterior) Appurtenances • Control Building Coatings • Alarm and Telemetry Systems • Hatches • Flow Meter and Signal Converter • Level Transducer • Lighting System • Float Switches • Backflow Preventer • Wall Hydrant, Hose Bibs .r 1.3 MANUALS A. The Contractor shall provide four, three-inch, three-ring notebooks organized in a logical manner. The covers shall have a clear plastic pocket on the front and the spine into which the Contractor shall insert title pages labeled as follows: "City of Renton " "Stonegate Lift Station Replacement," "Project No. WWP-27-3473", "Contractor's Name, "Operation and Maintenance Manual" "Volume 1 of X, 2 of X, etc" (where X is the total number of O&M Manual notebooks). Each separate piece of equipment shall be preceded with a tabbed divider indexed to a cover sheet listing the equipment contained therein. Drawings sized 11" X 17" may be punched to fit the three rings. Drawings sized greater than 11" X 17" shall be inserted into a plastic pocket. FA0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)1Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.01 General Requirements\10.01730.docx 6/25/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.01730 Operation and Maintenance Information Page 2 of 3 B. Following the title page (use as many pages as necessary) shall be a list of Subcontractors indicating their Work area responsibility, addresses, phone numbers, and contact person names. A similar list shall be provided for the suppliers of major equipment items. The list of suppliers shall include the names of the equipment Manufacturer and the local sales representatives/suppliers and the addresses, phone numbers, and contact person names for the local sales representatives/suppliers. C. The Contractor shall compile the necessary O&M Manual data as defined herein, including in the Manuals the required information provided by the equipment manufacturers. The requirements delineated herein pertain to the general O&M Manual requirements applicable to all equipment. Refer also to other specification requirements herein the Special Provisions for additional requirements pertaining to specific equipment items. D. The O&M Manuals shall contain manufacturer's "cut sheets" and detailed err diagrams and/or instructions for each piece of equipment installed as part of the Work. The O&M Manual shall contain all the information needed to operate, service, and maintain all systems and equipment provided. It shall list the part numbers of all subcomponents of the equipment and adequate information to order replacement parts, as well as a complete listing of manufacturer's recommended spare parts. The information provided shall be for the exact piece of equipment installed and shall not be the complete "product line" of the manufacturer. If the exact information on the installed equipment appears on a page(s) with equipment not used in the project, the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly indicated on the pages and the unused equipment effectively crossed off. E. The information provided shall include but not be limited to the following: • Equipment manufacturer, model number, sizes, nameplate data, dimensional and performance data, etc. • Supplier's name, address, phone number, and reference order numbers. • Description of equipment configurations and operational relationships with other equipment, electrical and controls schematics, etc. •w0 Preventative maintenance procedures, lubrication and servicing data, a listing of specialty tools and testing equipment required for servicing. • Troubleshooting. Calibration and testing. • Complete parts lists including reordering information and recommended spare parts. As-built shop drawings and wiring diagrams. • Copy of field and factory test results. • Electronic data, if available from a Manufacturer, on a compact disc in *W Windows compatible format, including related software and programs. F. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a draft of the proposed O&M Manual. Within two weeks of the submittal, the Engineer will return the wr proposed draft of the O&M Manual to the Contractor with comments, if any, to be incorporated for completion. The Contractor shall make the first submittal with rrr F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.01 General Requirements\10.01730.docx 6/25/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.01730 Operation and Maintenance Information Page 3 of 3 adequate time remaining in the Contract to allow the Engineer's review, revisions by the Contractor, and subsequent reviews by the Engineer so as not to delay the Contract. END OF SUB-SECTION + w► rrr FA0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.01 General Requirements\10.01730.docx 6/25/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02050 Demolition and Salvage Page 1 of 2 SUB-SECTION 10.02050 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE r.l PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. General: Demolition and Salvage shall include the removal of the existing pumping equipment and appurtenances at both the Stonegate and Summerwind Lift Stations. B. Drawings: Conform to the applicable requirements shown on Drawing Sheets C10 and C11. C. Utilitly: Coordinate with local utility for removal of secondary conductors from �. existing utility transformer. 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Sub-Section 10.02230 Site Clearing B. Sub-Section 10.02310 Grading C. Sub-Section 10.02320 Structural Fill and Backfill PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION aw 3.1 GENERAL A. Notify Owner prior to beginning Work so that the proper salvage items are identified and the condition of the salvage item can be documented. aw B. Prior to beginning Work, the bypass plan, including the bypass pumping system, shall be in place and operational. Bypass pumping requirements are shown on the Drawings. Bypass pump(s) shall be critically silenced diesel-drive unit(s). r 3.2 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES A. Start and complete Work in order or precedence as established by the approved ow schedule. B. Take precautions necessary to prevent damage to existing remaining Work or to adjacent facilities. Execute Work using methods that will prevent interference as with use of remaining and adjacent facilities by Owner. C. Operation of the bypass system shall be monitored at all times while in operation. 3.3 SALVAGE PROCEDURES 40 A. The following items shall be removed and salvaged from both lift stations: • Package lift station equipment mounted on the wet wells. • The existing wet well lids. am • All electrical panels including the internal wiring and components. • Pole mounted antenna, pole, and guy wires. B. The removed and salvaged items as described in A. above shall be delivered to (and unloaded) the City Maintenance Yard at: 3555 NE 2nd Street Renton, WA 98056 F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site WorM10.02050.doc 6/25/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02050 Demolition and Salvage Page 2 of 2 C. All other materials to be removed as shown on the Drawings and not designated for salvage to the District shall be removed and disposed of, including the top sections of the lift station manholes and the upper 4 feet•of the storage structure at Summerwind. 3.4 CLEANUP A. Remove debris, rubbish and materials resulting from the demolition and salvage operations. B. Remove electrical and telephone conduit and wire and other associated appurtenances not otherwise designated for salvage: C. Transport these materials and legally dispose of off site. END OF SUB-SECTION F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02050.doc 6/25/2010 ww WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02230 Site Clearing Page 1 of 2 SUB-SECTION 10.02230 SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 8-01 Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control B. Sub-Section 10.02310 Grading C. Sub-Section 10.02320 Structural Excavation and Backfill r D. Drawings: Sheets C3, C4 and C5. 1.2 PROTECTION A. Streets, roads, adjacent property and other Work to remain shall be protected throughout the Work. 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. All Work included in this section shall be incidental to other portions of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be at the Contractor's option. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of Section 2-01 in the Standard Specifications and as modified and supplemented herein these Special Provisions. 3.2 CLEARING A. Clearing work shall be performed with the confines of the clearing limits shown on the Drawings, or in the Specifications. B. Stockpiling of construction materials and storage of construction equipment shall not be allowed outside the designated clearing limits and easements without the permission of Owner. C. Debris resulting from said clearing shall be disposed of offsite. D. Remove all rock and stones in excess of four inches diameter, debris, and all obstructions of whatever kind or character whether natural or artificial encountered in the Work. No logs, stumps, rocks, etc. shall be left without specified written approval by Owner. E. No trees or shrubbery in public right-of-way shall be cut except by approval of the Owner. 3.3 GRUBBING A. All stumps within the clearing limits shall be removed. B. Grubbing shall include removal from the ground of all brush, stumps, roots, logs, other vegetation, and all decayed organic matter not otherwise provided for and the removal and disposal of the refuse. 3.4 DISPOSAL F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02230.doc 6/2512010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02230 Site Clearing Page 2 of 2 A. Contractor may sell any saleable material. +�+ B. Material not sold or otherwise reused shall be hauled to an approved disposal site and disposed in conformance with all applicable local regulations. END OF SUB-SECTION ■w rri wig FA0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02230.doc 6/25/2010 + + WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02240 Dewatering Page 1 of 3 wr SUB-SECTION 10.02240 DEWATERING ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE wr A. Sub-Section 10.02320 Structural Excavation and Backfill B. Geotechnical Report and Addendum: Appendix 1.2 QUALITY CONTROL A. It shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to control the rate and effect of the dewatering in such a manner as to avoid all objectionable settlement and subsidence. B. Contractor shall employ an independent qualified Professional Engineer or Licensed Hydrogeologist with experience in similar dewatering situations to review and approve the Contractor's proposed method of dewatering. Submit the reviewed and approved dewatering control plan in writing, stamped and signed by the Professional Engineer or Licensed Hydrogeologist, to Owner prior to start of construction. C. The dewatering system shall be installed by an experienced dewatering contractor. D. Where critical structures or facilities exist immediately adjacent to areas of proposed dewatering, reference points should be established and observed at frequent intervals to detect any settlement, which may develop. Should 1, significant settlement be observed, immediately take corrective action to prevent further settlement. E. The cost of repairing any damage to adjacent structures caused by the Contractor's operations shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. F. Contractor shall include a contingency budget for additional dewatering wells and/or larger pumps should his dewatering design not meet the dewatering .dr requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Dewatering plan per the above. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ■r 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Before operations begin, have available on the site of Work sufficient pumping equipment and/or other machinery to assure that the operation of the dewatering system can be maintained. B. Provide electrical utility service used for groundwater control systems separate from other Contractor electrical requirements and dedicated solely to the operation of the dewatering system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 METHODS F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02240.doc 6/25/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02240 Dewatering Page 2 of 3 A. The Contractor shall generally follow the recommendations presented in the Geotechnical Report and Addendum which are located in the Appendix of the Contract. The Addendum also provides considerations applicable for constructing the wet well using the sunken-caisson method if that method is wr chosen by the Contractor. If the sunken-caisson method is chosen by the Contractor, the Contractor from shall conform to all the applicable requirements of this Contract. B. Maintain groundwater levels a minimum of two feet below the bottom of all excavations at all times and under all conditions and as necessary to maintain the undisturbed state of natural soil except where advised against in the geotechnical report due to structural stability of adjacent properties. Provide continuous operation of the dewatering and monitoring systems unless written permission from the Owner is obtained. C. Dewatering shall be accomplished prior to excavation and placing of the bedding or foundation material. The dewatering operation shall be carried out so that it does not destroy or weaken the strength of the soil under or alongside the excavation. The control of groundwater shall be such that softening of the bottom of excavations or formation of"quick" conditions or"boils" during excavation shall be prevented and no soil shall be eroded into the excavation from the sides of excavation. Dewatering systems shall be designed and .r operated so as to prevent removal of the natural soils. D. Contractor shall have on hand at all times sufficient pumping equipment and machinery in good working condition for all ordinary emergencies, including power outages, and shall have available at all times competent workers for the operation of said equipment. E. Develop all wells and well points after installation to remove all fines from jetting, drilling, and installation. Develop the wells until the sand content of the discharge water does not exceed 10 parts per million. Discharge all development water to settlement settling tanks. Development water shall not discharge directly to the ground surface or a surface water body. F. Contractor shall supply appropriate sedimentation removal facilities such as Baker Tanks, sediment ponds, or other approved measures as necessary to remove sediment and other debris from the dewatering effluent prior to releasing said effluent. Said facilities shall remove sediment and other debris from the effluent as required to meet the standards in Title 173 WAC. Dewatering effluent shall be released at a controlled rate to avoid impacts to the environment, err including any wetlands or other sensitive areas. Contractor shall be responsible for establishing an acceptable dewatering effluent discharge location, including any necessary coordination with the adjacent property owners. All dewatering effluent shall pass through an energy dissipater, level spreader, diffuser, aerator, and/or similar facility as necessary to prevent disturbance of the soil or vegetation at the release point. G. Wells shall be sandpacked and/or other means used to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface. A continual check shall be maintained to ensure that the subsurface soil is not being removed by the dewatering operation. H. Construction of temporary facilities to dispose of water shall be incidental to the construction. I. Permanent piping systems shall not be incorporated in the dewatering system. 1D FA0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\FinaI Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02240.doc 6/25/2010 rr WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02240 Dewatering Page 3 of 3 J. Contractor shall control surface runoff so as to prevent entry or collection of water in excavations. Contractor shall maintain the undisturbed state of the foundation soils and allow the placement of any backfill to the required density. K. Contractor shall be responsible for complying with all permit requirements and provisions for monitoring and managing water discharged from the excavation. L. The release of groundwater to its static level shall be performed in such a manner as to maintain the undisturbed state of the natural foundation soils, prevent disturbance of compacted backfill, and prevent flotation or movement of structures and pipelines. M. Decommission all dewatering wells and well points, including existing ground water monitoring well shown on plans in accordance with WAC Chapter 173-160. END OF SUB-SECTION r aw rw r r+ rw err+ FA0015\00018.0010ESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)1Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02240.doc 6/25/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02250 Shoring Page 1 of 2 SUB-SECTION 10.02250 ► SHORING - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Sub-Section 10.02240 Dewatering B. Sub-Section 10.02320 Structural Excavation and Backfill C. Geotechnical Report and Addendum: Appendix D. Washington State Department L&I Safety Standards — Part N: Excavation, Trenching, and Shoring —Appendix C. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE trr A. Contractor's sheeting and shoring plans and calculations shall be designed and stamped by a professional structural engineer licensed in the State of Washington with relevant experience in the Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Sheeting and shoring plans conforming to the requirement described herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TRENCHES AND EXCAVATIONS A. Materials used shall be at the Contractor's option. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall generally follow the recommendations presented in the Geotechnical Report and Addendum which are located in the Appendix of this Contract: 3.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Shoring shall be placed in accordance with federal, state and local safety requirements. Any excavation exceeding four feet in depth shall be provided with adequate safety systems meeting the requirements of the Washington State Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA), Chapter 49.17 RCW, and all regulations adopted pursuant thereto. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for worker safety and the Owner and the Engineer assume no responsibility. 3.3 CRIBBING AND SHEETING A. The Contractor shall provide all cribbing and sheeting needed to protect the Work, adjacent property and improvements, utilities, pavement, etc., and to wr► provide safe working conditions in the trenches and excavations. B. Removal of any or all cribbing and sheeting from the trenches and excavations shall be accomplished in such a manner as to fulfill all of the above requirements and shall also be accomplished in such a manner as to prevent any damage to the Work. C. Damages resulting from improper cribbing or from failure to crib shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. w F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02250.doc 612512010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02250 Shoring Page 2 of 2 D. Whether cribbing and sheeting shall be left in place or removed shall be at the option of the Contractor, provided that removal of any and all sheet piling, sheeting or cribbing used in trench or structure excavation shall be accomplished .r in the manner as to prevent the settlement of the pipes or other Work and to prevent increased backfill loading which might overload the pipe or walls of the structure. E. Should the Owner order that any sheeting or cribbing be left in place, the Contractor shall not remove the same but will receive payment for the materials left in place at the market value thereof. F. The Contractor shall provide special inspection of the tiebacks and lagging of the shoring system, if the elected shoring systems utilize either of these systems. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with the results of all testing conducted on the shoring system. 3.4 CAISSON CONSTRUCTION A. Construction of the wet well by the sunken-caisson method, if chosen by the Contractor, shall be in accordance with the considerations outlined in the Addendum to Geotechnical Report which is located in the Appendix. 3.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FLEXIBLE PIPE A. Shoring to be removed, or moveable trench shields or boxes, shall be located at least 2-1/2 pipe diameters away from the pipe if the bottom of the shoring, shield or box extends below the top of flexible pipe, unless a satisfactory means of reconsolidating the bedding or side support material disturbed by shoring removal can be demonstrated. B. Damages resulting from improper shoring or failure to shore shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. END OF SUB-SECTION Ali► +rr +rr F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02250.doc 6/25/2010 VW1IP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02310 Grading Page 1 of 3 SUB-SECTION 10.02310 •N► GRADING wr PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE B. Section 8-01 Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control C. Site Clearing: Sub-Section 10.02230 Site Clearing D. Sub-Section 10.02320 Structural Excavation and Backfill E. Geotechnical Report and Addendum: Appendix 1.2 QUALITY CONTROL ASSURANCE A. Soils and Backfill: Moisture density standard ASTM D1557 or AASHTO T-180 method unless otherwise specifically approved. B. In-place Density Determination: Sandcone method ASTM D1556 or Nuclear method ASTM D2922. C. Classification of Soils: ASTM D2487. D. Quality control monitoring of subgrade backfill and embankment materials and construction by certified independent laboratory secured and paid for by the Owner unless otherwise noted. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Import backfill gradation. B. import embankment material gradation. C. Certification of gradations and compliance with reference standards. r PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 IMPORT MATERIAL FOR EMBANKMENT A. Conform to Sub-Section 10.02320 for Backfill Gravel. 2.2 WASTE MATERIAL wre A. Foreign materials, buried rubble, abandoned pipes and native soil materials that cannot be processed to uniform moisture, gradation, and texture necessary to achieve specified densities shall be disposed of by the Contractor at an appropriate waste site. B. Waste site shall be provided by the Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORK SEQUENCE A. Notify Owner of any discrepancies between contractual requirements and site conditions prior to start of Work. B. Maintain backfill embankment and subgrade zones or lifts open until approval of testing is secured from the Owner. Any Work covered up prior to approval shall . be excavated and reconstructed at Contractor's expense. C. Prior to pipe installation construct embankments a minimum of 12 inches above pipe crowns and trench for all pipelines. Mounding over pipelines will not be permitted. D. Work in inclement wet weather at Contractor's risk. FA0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02310.doc 6/25/2010 06 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02310 Grading Page 2 of 3 to E. Any materials which become unstable as the result of improper selection of techniques, equipment, or operations during inclement wet weather shall be replaced at Contractor's expense with imported material for embankment. aw F. Excavations and embankment shall be accomplished in such a manner that positive drainage is maintained at all times. 3.2 STOCKPILING. NATIVE MATERIALS FOR REUSE A. Material suitable for topsoil shall be deposited in protected, maintained piles separate from other materials and readily available. B. Upon completion, all material storage areas shall be restored to substantially their original condition. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. Remove all materials'required regardless of type or character. B. Excavate to lines and grades shown on the Drawings. C. Transport all materials to embankment areas or to waste as required. wr 3.4 PREPARATION OF GROUND SURFACE FOR FILL A. All vegetation, such as roots, brush, heavy sods, heavy growth of grass, and all IIS decayed vegetable matter, rubbish, and other unsuitable materials including existing concrete within the area upon which fill is to be placed, shall be stripped or otherwise removed before the fill is started. B. Sloped ground surfaces steeper than one vertical to four horizontal on which fill is �"' to be placed, shall be plowed, stepped (benched), or broken up in such manner that the fill material will bond with the existing surface. C. The original ground surface shall be plowed or scarified to a depth of at least six to (6) inches and compacted as specified herein. D. Soft, wet soils shall be excavated and replaced or allowed to dry before placing fill. to 3.5 EMBANKMENT A. Construct of materials specified, conditioned to proper moisture and texture ev necessary to assure specified densities. B. Loose horizontal thickness lifts not to exceed 8 inches. C. Maintain drainage at all times. t. D. Construct to grades shown on the Drawings. 3.6 COMPACTION A. Compact each lift to 95% of maximum density at optimum moisture content per No ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor). B. Compaction shall be by mechanical means only. an 3.7 FINISH ELEVATIONS A. Contours illustrated are intended as a general guide to achieve proper aesthetics and drainage control. 4W B. Control grid and spot elevations to be established by Contractor. C. Vary control grid spacing to accurately define slope, rounding of mounds and depressions. YI. D. Field staking of certain intermediate grid points at locations where slopes are uniform may, at Owner's discretion, be eliminated. aw F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02310.doc 6/25/2010 M WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02310 so Grading Page 3 of 3 E. Finished surface shall be smooth, compacted and free from irregular surface ,rr► change so as to drain readily. F. The degree of finish shall be that ordinarily obtainable from blade-grader operations, except as otherwise specified. The finished surfaces not to be paved shall be not more than 0.15 feet above or below the established grade or approved cross section. All areas to be paved shall be finished as required for pavement subgrade. 3.8 DENSITY TEST FREQUENCY PLAN A. Foundation embankment under structures and pipelines, top two feet of road subgrade, and 10 foot wide backfill zone around structures for each one foot of vertical embankment or backfill height: one test for every 300 square feet. B. Other embankment same as above, except substitute 600 square feet for 300 square feet. C. Additional tests as required by the Owner, if tests indicate compaction deficiency. Required retesting shall be paid for by the Contractor. END OF SUB-SECTION ori irr F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02310.doc 6/25/2010 +l rr WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02320 Structural Excavation and Backfill Page 1 of 4 go SUB-SECTION 10.02320 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 'o PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 4W A. Section 8-01 Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control B. Sub-Section 10.02230 Site Clearing C. Sub-Section 10.02240 Dewatering w D. Sub-Section 10.02250 Shoring E. Sub-Section 10.02310 Grading F. Geotechnical Report and Addendum: Appendix 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Complete all excavation, removal, stockpiling, disposal and backfilling of whatsoever nature necessary for construction of all structures. B. Provide all construction and subsequent removal of all shoring, cribs and cofferdams that may be necessary for protection of existing structures, excavation, removal, construction of structures, placement and compaction of backfill. 1.3 CLASSIFICATION A. All excavation is unclassified unless separate Bid item is included in the Proposal. B. The terms earthwork or excavation include all materials excavated or removed w. regardless of material characteristics. C. The Contractor shall make his own estimate of the kind and extent of materials which will be encountered in the excavation. r 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL ASSURANCE A. Soils and Backfill: Moisture density standard ASTM D1557 or AASHTO T-180 method unless otherwise specifically approved. B. In-place Density Determination: Sandcone method ASTM D1556 or Nuclear method ASTM D2922. C. Classification of Soils: ASTM D2487. D. Quality control monitoring of subgrade backfill and embankment materials and construction by certified independent laboratory secured and paid for by the Owner unless otherwise noted. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Import backfill and structural fill gradations. B. Import embankment and foundation gravel gradations. C. Certification of gradations and compliance with referenced standards. D. At any time the Contractor shall change the source and/or stockpile from which materials are obtained, certificates of gradation for these new sources will also be required. The Contractor shall include expenses incurred in having this certification in his Bid price. No additional compensation will be allowed. E. During construction, the Owner may elect to have further gradation testing completed on the materials being furnished by the Contractor. This testing will be at the expense of the Owner, however, the Contractor shall provide material ,rr F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02320.doc 6/25/2010 i WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02320 Structural Excavation and Backfill Page 2 of 4 samples as may be necessary to complete this testing and these material samples will be furnished from material available on the Project site or from the Contractor's source and/or supplier. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKFILL GRAVEL AND STRUCTURAL FILL A. Imported material only; to be free of vegetation and debris, and contain no rocks or lumps larger than 3 inches nominal diameter. . B. Shall meet the following gradation requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM Test Method C 136. Screen size (Square Opening) Percent Passing bV Weight 3-inch 100 No. 4 40 - 100 No. 200 < 5 C. Shall possess a plasticity index of no greater than 15 when tested in accordance with ASTM Test method D4318. D. Shall be uniformly moisture conditioned to within 3 percent of the optimum moisture content. 14 2.1 DRAIN GRAVEL A. 100% passing 3/-inch sieve and 0-3% passing the No. 4 sieve (percentage by weight). B. Washed thoroughly to remove clay, silt, organic matter or other deleterious material. 2.2 FILTER FABRIC A. Reference Standard: Standard Specifications Section 9-33. B. Properties: 1. Moderate Survivability, Table 1 except grab tensile strength 350 lbs. 2. AOS: #100 sieve maximum opening. 3. Water Permittivity: 1.5 sec' minimum. 40 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL EXCAVATION REQUIREMENTS A. Exercise care and caution in performing the Work so as not to cause any slide or slip beyond the limits of the structure excavation. B. Be responsible for damages to abutting improvements and properties resulting from any slide or slip, whatever the cause. 1. Remove the loose material and backfill or repair the slide or slip area with granular material, lean concrete, or by other method or means with the approval of the Owner. C. All excavated material shall be removed from the Project site to a dumpsite. D. The excavation shall be dewatered as described in Sub-Section 10.02240 during excavation, construction of structures and placement and compaction of backfill. E. Slope excavation back sufficiently to prevent sliding of shoring. F. Excavations shall extend a sufficient distance from walls and footings to allow for placing and removal of forms, installation of services, and for inspection, except where concrete is specified to be placed directly against excavated surfaces. F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02320.doc 6/25/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02320 Structural Excavation and Backfill Page 3 of 4 G. Ground shall not be dug by machinery nearer than 3 inches from any finished subgrade. The last 3 inches shall be removed without disturbing the subgrade. 3.2 FOUNDATION PREPARATION A. Should the excavation be carried below the lines and grades specified on the Drawings or should the bottom of the excavation be disturbed because of the Contractor's operations and require over excavation and backfill, the Contractor shall refill such excavated space to the proper elevation with foundation gravel or structural fill. B. Foundation shall be dug to final grade so that subgrade is not disturbed. C. If the ground surface, after excavating to planned subgrade elevations appears to be loose, it shall be compacted to a non-yielding condition. Areas observed to pump or weave during compaction shall be reworked to structural fill �r. specifications or over-excavated and replaced with compacted structural fill or quarry spalls. D. If significant groundwater seepage is encountered in the excavation, compacting the loose subgrade shall be avoided and the loose material shall be over- excavated down to firm subgrade and replaced with crushed rock. E. Base slabs shall be installed on a compacted 6-inch layer of crushed surfacing on top of a compacted 12-inch layer of quarry spalls or 2-inch diameter railroad ballast unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. F. Compact top 6-inch minimum layer and bottom 12-inch minimum layer to a minimum density of 95% Modified Proctor. w 3.3 REVIEW Bl' OVJ All, A. Notwithstanding the other review and testing provisions herein Sub-Section • 10.02320, the Contractor shall give the Owner at least 3 days notice, excluding weekends and holidays, to allow for review by the Owner's geotechnical engineer of all subgrades below footings and concrete slabs prior to the placement of the first lift of backfill. B. During the course of excavation, the Owner may stop the Work and make bearing tests or test borings, and the Contractor shall give any assistance the Owner may need in making such tests and shall receive no extra compensation for such stoppages. Materials and labor furnished by the Contractor for such tests will be considered as incidental to the Work. C. When the foundation excavation is completed, the Contractor shall notify the Owner who will review the Work before any additional Work or structure is placed thereon. D. Contractor shall additionally notify the Owner on completion of placement of Foundation Gravel. The Owner will then review and make compaction tests before any additional Work or structure is placed thereon. 3.4 BACKFILLING A. The Contractor shall provide and place all backfill necessary to bring the site to grades shown on the Drawings. B. Structural backfill shall not be placed until the subgrade portions of the structure have been reviewed by the Owner. C. No backfill material shall be deposited against concrete structures until the concrete has developed a compressive strength of not less than 3000 pounds per square inch, or until the concrete has been in place for 28 days, whichever occurs first. F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02320.doc 6/25/2010 V& WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02320 as Structural Excavation and Backfill Page 4 of 4 D. Backfill material shall be placed in uniform lifts up to eight (8) inches thick + maximum and shall be brought up uniformly on all sides of the structure. E. Backfill material shall be compacted to 95% of the modified Proctor Maximum Dry Density test procedure (ASTM D1557). . F. Mechanical or power tampers shall be used in compacting the backfill material; however, no equipment or tamper may be used which by its weight or movement will damage, move or tilt out of alignment any part of the structure above or below the ground surface. G. Contractor shall be responsible for any such damages and shall make necessary corrections and repairs at his own expense. H. Unless otherwise specified, backfill around and above pipelines within the excavation line of any structure shall be the same as that specified for structures 3.5 DENSITY TEST FREQUENCY PLAN A. Backfill zone around structures for each one-foot of vertical embankment or backfill height: one test for every 300 square feet. B. Additional tests as required by the Owner, if tests indicate compaction deficiency. Required retesting shall be paid for by the Contractor. END OF SUB-SECTION r rf ar F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02320.doc 6/25/2010 +r. WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02605 Precast Manholes and Vaults Page 1 of 4 SUB-SECTION 10.02605 PRECAST MANHOLES AND VAULTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY +� A. This Section specifies the precast concrete manhole and vaults to be used for the wet well, overflow storage vault, and valve vault. The 48-inch diameter manhole for the gravity influent line is specified in Section 7-05. rr� 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 7-05 Manholes, Inlets, and Catch Basins B. Section 7-20 Heat Shrinkable Manhole Wrap C. Sub-Section 10.02240 Dewatering D. Sub-Section 10.02250 Shoring E. Sub-Section 10.06600 Fiberglass Fabrications F. Drawings: Sheets C12, C13, C14, and C15 G. Owner's Standard Sewer Details 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural calculations shall be submitted to the Owner, demonstrating that the wet well, overflow vault, and valve vault resist the anticipated loads without I. failure, prepared and stamped by a structural engineer licensed in the state of Washington. Buoyancy calculations shall also be submitted based on a groundwater table at a level 2 feet below the proposed ground surfaces. If necessary, the Contractor shall provide anti-flotation measures in the construction as recommended by the structural engineer and as shown on the Drawings. These measures will be incorporated at no additional cost to the Owner. Owner will perform cursory check of these calculations, but Contractor/Manufacturer alone shall be responsible for the structural integrity of these precast structures. Structural calculations and buoyancy calculations shall also be required should the Contractor elect to construct the wet well using the sunken-caisson method. B. Certification: The Contractor shall provide written certification from the manufacturer that the manholes and vaults provided meet or exceed the �* Specifications and that the materials used in the construction of a manhole and vault are in accordance with the Specifications. A Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance shall be provided for each manhole and vault delivered to the Project WA site and shall include the manufacturer's name and address, reference to the applicable Project specifications being used, the design mix and 28-day strength of the cement concrete used, drawings indicating reinforcing steel details, such as size and location, results of materials testing conducted by the manufacturer and the signature of a responsible corporate official of the manufacturer. C. Final Acceptance: The Owner may test manholes, vaults, and materials used at + . any time, including after installation, and any manhole, vault, or material not conforming to the Specifications shall be rejected by the Owner and replaced with a conforming manhole, vault or material provided and installed by the Contractor. 1.3 SUBMITTALS err F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02605.doc 6/25/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02605 to Precast Manholes and Vaults Page 2 of 4 A. Product data: Wet Well Ladders Grout Access Hatches and Safety Nets Vaults and Appurtenances Coatings and Heat Shrinkable Wrap PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WET WELL MANHOLE (144-INCH DIAMETER) A. Conform to the applicable requirements of Section 7-05 of the Standard Specifications as modified in these Special Provisions. B. Conform to the requirements shown on the Drawings. C. All manhole joints shall be watertight and shall be confined O-ring type with butyl sealant strips. In addition to the O-ring rubber gaskets, all new manhole joints shall be sealed with a flexible butyl joint sealant conforming to ASTM C990-96 and Federal Specification SS-S-210. Joint sealant shall be Henry RN103 - Ram- Nek or approved equal. D. The base sections and risers of the manholes shall be arranged so no pipes pass through the manhole joints. E. Manhole sections shall be placed and aligned so as to provide vertical sides and vertical alignment of the ladder steps. The completed manhole shall be rigid, true to dimension and be watertight. The ladders shall be rigidly attached to the side of the manhole. F. Steel lifting loops or hooks for precast manhole components shall be removed to a minimum depth of one (1) inch below the surface and the remaining hole "W packed with grout. Precast sections with damaged joint surfaces or with cracks or other damage that may permit infiltration will not be allowed. G. Minimum H-20 wheel loading, no soil cover. Loading shall account for the potential of both front and back vehicle axle loads being potentially parked on the lid of the structure. H. Manufacturer: Hanson Pipe and Products, or approved equal. .rf 2.2 HEAT SHRINKABLE WRAP A. Apply to all wet well manhole joints and to the overflow storage vaults joints as feasible. B. Heat Shrinkable Wrap: Materials and application shall be per Section 7-20 of the Standard Provisions. C. Nominal Thickness: 0.100 inch 2.3 VAULTS A. Overflow Storage Vault 38' x 20' inside dimensions, with no interior walls, assembled in sections, and located as shown on the Drawings. Utility Vault Panel Vault, or approved equal. Minimum H-20 wheel loading, no soil cover. Loading shall account for the potential of both front and back vehicle axle loads being potentially parked on the lid of the structure. B. Valve Vault: 8' x 14' inside dimensions, located as shown on the Drawings rr F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02605.doc 6/25/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02605 Precast Manholes and Vaults Page 3 of 4 Utility Vault 814-LA, or approved equal. Minimum H-20 wheel loading, no soil cover. Loading shall account for the potential of both front and back vehicle axle loads being potentially parked on the lid of the structure. 2.4 LADDERS A. Locations (as shown on the Drawings): Wet Well Manhole (2 required) Overflow Storage Vault (2 required) Valve Vault B. Materials(are either aluminum or FRP where shown on the Drawings): Aluminum ladders shall be 6061-T6, Werner Model 500-1, Type 1A Extra Heavy Duty Rating, with rungs rated for 300 pounds, or approved equal. FRP ladders shall be per the Drawings and in conformance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.06600. 2.5 MANHOLE CHANNELS A. The channels for the wet well manhole and the reconfigured existing wet well 011111 manhole shall both be constructed of commercial grade concrete, minimum Class 3000 in accordance with Section 6-02 of the Standard Specifications. B. Channel configuration shall be as shown on the Drawings. =1 2.6 GROUT A. Grout for all uses including, manholes, pick-t Toles, and adjusting rings, shall be cement based, non-shrink, non-corrosive, and nonmetallic grout conforming to an ASTM C1107, Grade C. Grout shall be Dayton 1107 Advantage Grout as provided by Dayton Superior Corporation, Oregon, IL., or approved equal. The Owner may sample and test grout to determine conformance with the o Specifications. JetSet Grout is not allowed. 2.7 LIFT HOLES r A. All lift holes shall be completely filled smooth with grout both inside and outside in order to insure water tightness. 2.8 ACCESS HATCHES AND SAFETY NETS A. Locations: Wet well (1 hatch); overflow storage vault (2 hatches), and valve vault (2 hatches), sizes as shown on the Drawings. B. Material: Fabricated aluminum. C. Door Type: Double. D. Load Rating: H-20 wheel load. E. Maximum Deflection: 1/150th of the span. wr F. General: Door leaves shall be '/" aluminum diamond plate with support beams underneath that will transfer bearing to the Y4" extruded frame that has a 1" anchor flange around the perimeter and is equipped to receive a 3/8" round neoprene gasket for a weather tight seal. A 1 Y2" aluminum drain coupling shall be integrated into the framework for water drainage. Plumb hatch drain to wall away from any landings with Schedule 40 PVC pipe per manufacturer's recommendations. Compression springs to be enclosed in the telescopic stainless steel tubes to make the opening of the hatch cover easy, smooth and controlled through both opening and closing. When the door leaves are opened FA0015100018.0011DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02605.doc 6/25/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.02605 at Precast Manholes and Vaults Page 4 of 4 in a vertical position, they are to lock automatically into place with hold opens arms equipped with a release handle. The hold open arms are to be equipped with stainless steel pins attached so that they may be inserted through the hold open arms to act as secondary insurance. The doors are to be equipped with heavy stainless steel hinges and pivots so that the covers do not protrude into the channel frame. The door latches shall shut with a stainless steel snap lock, with recessed padlock hasps. A removable turn handle shall be provided for access into the hatch covers and a threaded cover plug when it is not in use. G. Hardware: Stainless steel, 300 series. H. Factory Finish: Mill. I. Guarantee: Five (5) years against defects in material and workmanship. J. Manufacturer: LW Products, no equal Model HD-3C at the overflow storage vault and valve vault Model HD-3E at the wet well K. Roll-Out Safety Nets (Safe Approach Model 121): Match hatch sizing. L. Safety Chains: Stainless steel; Provide and install; located at every open end of all hatches. M. Man Removal Equipment: Unihoist Core Mount Sleeve to match City of Renton man-removal equipment, Model ZX 10109 with Model ZX 10552 cap. Five require, one each adjacent to each access hatch; installed per manufacturer's recommendations. 2.9 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Refer to 2.2 above for heat shrinkable manhole wrap requirements. B. Interior coating for the wet well, overflow storage vault, and valve vault shall be . per Section 6-07 of the Special Provisions. The coating system shall be applied to the interior structure concrete surfaces: walls, ceilings,floor slabs, and wet well channel. This coating system shall also be applied to the abandoned existing wet well manhole at the existing Stonegate Lift Station site.. at C. Exterior coatings shall be per Section 6-07. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Per the Drawings, Section 6-07 of the Special Provisions and manufacturer's instructions. B. Install at the elevations shown. C. Install wet well and overflow storage vault level. D. Install valve vault at a 1% slope as shown. E. Cut and fit for pipes or pipe sleeves, and seal as indicated on the Drawings. F. Slope the floor of the overflow storage vault with grout as shown. G. Grout lift holes from the inside and the outside prior to backfilling H. Apply coatings and heat shrink manhole wrap as applicable. I. Backfill around structures and pipe connections. J. Check for water tightness and seal all penetrations, holes, and other sources of indentified leakage with waterproof epoxy grout. END OF SUB-SECTION F:\0015\00018.0011 DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.02 Site Work\10.02605.doc 6/25/2010 +m WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03200 Reinforcing Steel Page 1 of 4 r1 SUB-SECTION 10.03200 REINFORCING STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing work, complete as indicated, specified and required. 2. Provide all bar and wire fabric steel reinforcing for cast-in-place concrete. is 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM) Standard Specifications: 1. ASTM A82: Steel wire, plain, for concrete reinforcement. 2. ASTM A185: Steel welded wire fabric, plain, for concrete reinforcement. 3. ASTM A497: Steel welded wire fabric, deformed, for concrete reinforcement. 4. ASTM A615: Deformed and plain billet - steel bars for concrete reinforcement. 5. ASTM A706: Low-alloy steel deformed bars for concrete reinforcement. B. American Concrete Institute: OL 1. Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement (ACI 315). 2. Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318). C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute: Manual of Standard Practice (CRSI Manual). D. International Code Council Reports (ICC Reports). 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1W A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. B. Product Data: im 1. Bar supports and chairs. 2. Mechanical bar connectors, including ICC Reports. 3. Certified mill test results on reinforcement. go 4. Tests on unidentified bars. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Bar and wire fabric layouts. 2. Bar bending diagrams. 3. Assembly diagrams, including bar lap and splice locations and mechanical connector layout. 4. Accessories and inserts layout. rw aw Im W:k2008W897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs Jun2010110.03200.doc 6/1112010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03200 Reinforcing Steel Page 2 of 4 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE as A. Material Tests: Not required for bars, delivered in bundles from the mill and tagged with valid Identification Certificate. 1. Unidentified Bars: Test samples from each five tons or fraction thereof for each size. If already delivered to site, test additional samples from each day of planned concrete placement. Perform one tension and one bend test from each sample for each size. 2. Test standard: ASTM A615. 3. Testing Laboratory: Selected by Engineer, to take samples and perform tests. Costs paid by Contractor. B. Standard: CRSI Manual, except as otherwise indicated or specified. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Bundle reinforcement and tag with suitable identification to simplify sorting and placing. Transport and store at site so material is not damaged. Store reinforcement off ground, place under cover, and keep clean. Keep an adequate supply of reinforcement at site to avoid delays. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCING BARS A. General: Deformed bars, ASTM A615, Grade 60. B. Dowels: All dowels are deformed bars unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 1. Deformed bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60. 2. Smooth bars.- ASTM A615, Grade 60. 3. Threaded bars: ASTM A572, Grade 50. go 2.02 TIE WIRE A. Annealed steel, 16-gauge minimum. so 2.03 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Type: Tension-compression. B. Strength: Develop 125% of the reinforcing yield strength in tension and compression. C. Manufacturer: 1. Tension-compression: Lenton by Erico Products, Inc., Dowel Bar Splice Systems by Richmond Screw Anchor Co., or equal. 2.04 SUPPORTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Conform to CRSI Manual Chapter 3, for Types SB, BB, BC, JC, HC, CHC, and others of standard types as required. tow W9200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngOesign110.01-Specs\100%_Specs Jun20100003200.doc 6/11/2010 ON WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03200 Reinforcing Steel Page 3 of 4 No B. Use Class "1" plastic-coated chairs and spacers at waterbearing surfaces, roofs of waterbearing structures, and at all interior or exterior surfaces exposed to view or a weather in the completed structure. Precast concrete block supports with embedded wire ties are not acceptable. C. Use precast concrete block supports with embedded wire ties or dowels for placement on grade or on membranes. Cast the blocks with concrete equal in strength, cement type, and aggregate to the parent concrete. D. Do not use aluminum or stainless steel supports or accessories. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General: CRSI Manual Chapters 6 and 7, including tolerances. B. Splice, development, and embedment lengths: Furnish bars with lap lengths equivalent to ACI 318, Section 12, Class B splices for the specified concrete strength, bar size and location, unless noted otherwise. �r C. Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of indicated size and accurately form to shapes and lengths indicated and required. Fabricate by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Reject bars with kinks or bends " not scheduled. D. Concrete Cover: Detail and fabricate the reinforcement to provide specified cover to outer edge of rebars and other installed items. E. Dowels: 1. Provide deformed reinforcing bar dowels at all construction joints, unless noted otherwise. 2. Provide smooth or threaded dowels where shown on Drawings. +o.r 3. Provide same dowel size and spacing as the reinforcing to which they are spliced, unless noted otherwise. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify bend tolerances are not exceeded. B. Verify bar end cuts are within tolerance when mechanical connectors are to be used. W PART 3 - EXECUTION %It 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: CRSI Manual Chapter 8 including placement tolerances. No reduction of so concrete cover is allowable for bars at concrete surfaces exposed in liquid or water- containing structures. to Yr W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate\10-EngOesign110.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010110.03200.doc 6/11/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03200 Reinforcing Steel Page 4 of 4 1. Cleaning: Before placing reinforcing, and again before concrete is placed, clean reinforcement of loose mill scale, dried concrete, oil, or other coating that might destroy or reduce bond. Do not allow form coatings, release agents, bond breaker, or curing compound to contact reinforcement. rrr 2. Concrete coverage: Provide coverage to the outer edge of ties, stirrups, bar spacers, hangers, and like items. 3. Securing in place: Accurately place reinforcement and securely wire tie in position, at an adequate number of points, where bars cross so as to prevent displacement. Tie stirrups to bars at both top and bottom. Bend ends of tie wire inward allowing no encroachment into the concrete cover. as 4. Bar supports: CRSI Manual, Chapter 3. 5. Field bending: Not permitted, except where specifically shown, or approved. 6. Bar spacing: Between parallel bars, no less than 1-1/2 times the maximum aggregate size and in no case less than 1-1/2 inches. At splices, bundle and wire together bars to accomplish this. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect all reinforcement installations. Provide 48 hours' notice for inspection before concrete placement. AN B. Verify placement tolerances are not exceeded. C. Mechanical Connectors: Install favorably reviewed products, following the Manufacturer's recommendations, under continuous inspection. D. Welding Reinforcement: Perform only when approved and only under continuous inspection. Notify the Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of any procedure involving welding. END OF SUB-SECTION .r W:k200B10897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.03200.doc 611 112 01 0 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 1 of 20 SUB-SECTION 10.03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. All cast-in-place concrete including bases for mechanical and electrical equipment, and swept-in grout. See Section 10.02605 for precast wet well requirements. 2. Concrete shoring, forming, patching, grouting, sealing, curing, and repairing. 3. Concrete accessories including waterstops, joint fillers, and sealants. B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.03200: Reinforcing Steel 2. Sub-Section 10.03350: Concrete Finishes 3. Sub-Section 10.07900: Joint Sealants 1.02 REFERENCES A` A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): ACI 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete ACI 350 Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures B. ASTM International (ASTM) Standard Specification or Test Method: ASTM C31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field rrr ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates ASTM C39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ASTM C40 Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete ow ASTM C42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete ASTM C87 Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar ASTM C88 Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete ASTM C131 Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM C136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM C142 Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates ASTM C143 Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete VM ASTM C150 Portland Cement ASTM C156 Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials ASTM C171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete ASTM C172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete ASTM C192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory ASTM C231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method • ASTM C260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010\10.03300.doc 6/11/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 2 of 20 ASTM C289 Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method) ASTM C309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C595 Blended Hydraulic Cements �wr ASTM C618 Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete ASTM C827 Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures ASTM C869 Foaming Agents Used in Making Preformed Foam for Cellular Concrete ASTM C881 Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete ` ASTM C920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM C1077 Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation ASTM C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink) ASTM C1240 Use of Silica Fume as a Mineral Admixture in Hydraulic-Cement Concrete, Mortar, and Grout + ASTM D882 Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting ASTM D1056 Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber ASTM D1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for „ Concrete Paving and Structural Construction ASTM D2419 Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate ASTM E96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials C. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction or°GREENBOOK" D. International Building Code 2006 Edition with Amendments adopted by the Washington State Building Code Council 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements: B. Product Data: 1. Concrete mix product certification: Submit certified laboratory test results that the mix proportions and materials comply with these Specifications. trrr a. Cementitious materials. b. Coarse and fine aggregates. c. Admixtures. d. Water. e. Ready-mix plant certification. f. Mix designs. g. Mix test results. 2. Formwork products: a. Forms, if fabricated off construction site. b. Form ties or through-bolts. c. Form coatings. d. Waterstop, including waterstop joints. e. Reshoring for suspended slabs and beams. W:1200610697003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010\10.03300.doc 611112010 "" WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 3 of 20 +r• 3. Miscellaneous products: Submit technical data including installation instructions, independent laboratory test reports (ICC), and handling and storage instructions. r. a. Curing materials and curing program. b. Joint fillers. c. Sealants. d. Epoxy compounds, including adhesives and grouts. e. Non-shrink grouts. f. Methods and materials for concrete repairs. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Construction joint layout, including waterstop placement. 2. Sequence of concrete wall and slab pours. 3. Program and method of concrete placement. D. Samples: Submit any item of Product Data not fully assembled by a single Manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE r A. Contractor Qualifications: 10 years of experience on similar facilities. B. Construction Standard: Applicable requirements of the IBC, ACI 301, ACI 318, and recommendations of ACI 350. C. Concrete Products and Materials Tests: Certified by independent commercial testing laboratories. Submit certification on cementitious products and aggregates performed within the past 6 months. D. Concrete Mix Designs: By an independent commercial testing laboratory, complying with ASTM C1077 and favorably reviewed by the Engineer. Concrete mix design proportions shall be established on the basis of field experience and trial 1+rr mixtures with the materials to be employed in accordance with ACI 318 Chapter 5. E. Concrete Mix Test Results: 1. Submit result statistics of satisfactory mix designs if available from prior projects. Comply with ACI 318 Section 5.3. 2. Submit test results of trial batches prepared for this project. Comply with ACI 318 Section 5.3. 3. Allow adequate time for review of submittals and adjustments to comply with the Specifications. F. Concrete Tests, as Placed: Performed by the Owner's Representative. 1. Test frequency: Each mix type placed, each day placed. 2. Concrete sample: ASTM C172. Provide all material required. 3. Compressive strength: A set of four standard 6-inch x 12-inch concrete cylinders will be cast for each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof. a. Making, storing, and initial cure of cylinders: ASTM C31. Provide site storage and initial cure, 16 hours minimum and 24 hours maximum. b. Final cure and tests of cylinders: ASTM C39. Testing laboratory will transport cylinders from site, cure, and test and provide report. Test two cylinders at age of 7 days, two at 28 days. W:12008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegale110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.03300.doc 6/11/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 it Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 4 of 20 4. Slump: Test will be performed on each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof. Test as each sample used for strength tests. a. Testing: ASTM C143. b. Results outside the limits indicate possible cause for rejection of concrete. rr The Engineer shall be the sole judge. 5. Air content: Test will be performed on concrete samples used for strength tests. Furnish calibrated equipment required to perform the test. a. Testing: ASTM C231. 6. Unit Weight: Test will be performed on concrete samples used for strength tests. Furnished calibrated equipment required to perform test. a. Testing: ASTM C138. G. Additional Tests: 1. General: Provide and pay for additional material and strength tests on new specimens, when test results fail to meet the specified requirements. Strength tests shall be considered satisfactory if the requirements of ACI 318 Section 5.6.3.3 are satisfied. If in the opinion of the Engineer, results of tests on concrete cylinders indicate the possibility of substandard concrete in the structure, cored samples may be required to be taken from the concrete. 2. Coring and testing: ASTM C42. The Engineer will investigate low-strength test am results in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318 Section 5.6.5; however, the requirements of Section 5.6.5.4 are not applicable. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the results of the core tests indicate that concrete has been placed which does .not meet this specification, the Owner may require defective concrete strengthened by means of additional concrete, reinforcing steel or replacement of the defective concrete at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. The Owner will pay costs of additional tests if the concrete is accepted by the Engineer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Cementitious Materials: If required at site, store immediately after delivery in a dry, weather-tight, properly ventilated structure, with adequate provisions for prevention of moisture absorption and overheating of the cement. B. Aggregates: If required at site, store in piles which afford good drainage and which tW are protected to prevent the inclusion of foreign material. Stockpile the various sizes or gradations of aggregates separately. ,at C. Lumber: Store all lumber, including plywood for forms, to prevent direct contact with the ground. Protect the stored lumber from the elements by a suitable covering, such as polyethylene film or waterproof building paper, suitably held in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL irr A. Obtain materials from an established and experienced manufacturer or supplier. Provide new materials of first-class ingredients guaranteed to perform the service required. WA200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.03300.doc 6/11/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 5 of 20 2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Materials: 1. General: Use only one brand of each cementitious material. The color shall not significantly alter the typical grey concrete color. 2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II. Comply with the requirements for low alkali cement in ASTM C150 Table 2. 3. Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Mineral Admixture Class N. 4. Blended Cement: ASTM C595 Type 1 P(MS). 5. Flyash: ASTM C618, Class F, with the following restrictions: a. Loss on Ignition: 4% maximum b. SO3 Content: 3% maximum c. Moisture Content: 1% maximum rr B. Concrete Aggregates: 1. General: ASTM C33: rr. a. Provide free from organic materials, waste products, clay balls, shale, and mica and thoroughly washed before use. b. Provide 1-1/2-inch maximum size for all concrete on the project. For thin sections, such as slabs or walls 10 inches thick or less, or for sections that require special placement due to shape, form or congestion of reinforcing, provide 1-inch maximum size. c. Provide aggregates that do not deleteriously react with the alkalies in the cement. d. Grading- ASTM C136. Submit results of sieve analysis. e. Reactivity: ASTM C289. Submit graphical data showing compliance. 2. Coarse Aggregates: a. Provide clean, hard, durable gravel, crushed gravel, crushed rock, or combinations. b. Deleterious substances: Submit compliance with ASTM C33, Table 3 and as follows: 1) Clay lumps and friable particles: ASTM C142. Not more than 5%. 2) Abrasion: ASTM C131. Not more than 45%. 3) Soundness:. ASTM C88. Not more than 10%. 4) Cleanness: ASTM D2419. For three tests, not less than 70, with an average greater than 75. c. Do not use aggregate containing more than 10% of inferior materials, flat or elongated particles, cracked or laminated rock, or rock than can be readily broken after immersion in water for one hour. 3. Fine Aggregate: a. Provide natural sand or a combination of natural and manufactured sand, of siliceous, granitic, or igneous origin, hard and durable. b. Deleterious substances: Submit compliance with ASTM C33 Table 1 and as follows: 1) Organic impurities: ASTM C40 and C87. Not less than 95% relative strength by ASTM C87. 2) Sand equivalent: ASTM D2419. For three tests not less than 70, with an average greater than 75. rrr<+ W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.03300.doc 6/11/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 "m Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 6 of 20 C. Combined Aggregates: Provide a mixture of fine aggregate and coarse aggregate w► uniformly graded between the screen sizes specified below: Percentage Passing Sieve Size 1-inch Maximum 2" 1-1/2" 100 1" 90-100 3/4" 55-100 tri 3/8" 45-75 No. 4 35-60 No. 8 27-45 No. 16 20-35 No. 30 12-25 No. 50 3-15 No. 100 0-5 No. 200 0-2 2.03 WATER A. Provide water for washing aggregates, for mixing concrete, for patching grout and for curing that is free from oil and contains not more than 1,000 parts per million (ppm) of chlorides as Cl, nor more than 1,300 ppm of sulfates as SO4. Do not allow impurities that will cause a change in the setting time of the portland cement of more than 25%, nor a reduction in the compressive strength of mortar at 14 days of more than 5%, when compared to the results obtained with distilled water. B. Do not allow impurities that cause discoloration of the concrete or produce etching of the surface. C. The Engineer may require tests of the water should there be a question of the quality. Costs of such tests would be borne by the Owner. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entraining: ASTM C260. B. Accelerating: ASTM C494, Type C or E. C. Retarding- ASTM C494, Type D. D. Water Reducing: ASTM C494, Type A. E. High Range Water Reducing: ASTM C494, Types F or G, second or third generation type. Add at the batch plant, after all other ingredients have been mixed and initial slump has been verified. F. Shrinkage Reducing: ASTM C157. Eclipse by W.R. Grace, Tetraguard AS20 by Master Builders, or equal. .r W:l200B10897003_C4-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun201010.03300.doc 611112010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 7 of 20 G. Corrosion Inhibition and Permeability Reduction (Silica Fume): ASTM C1240. Force 10,000 or 10,000D (dry) by W.R Grace, Rheomac SF 100 (dry) or 110 by Master Builders, or equal. H. When two or more admixtures are used, they must be added to the mix separately (through dispensers or manually) and must not be mixed with each other prior to adding to the concrete mix. Add admixtures to concrete mix ingredients in liquid form by a special dispensing unit, approved by the manufacturer of the admixture as suitable for accurately dispensing the admixture. Install an alarm or indicator, which will immediately inform the batch plant operator if the dispensing unit malfunctions. Dispense admixtures uniformly into the mixing water as it is added to the concrete batch. I. No admixture containing any chloride ions is acceptable. J. Manufacturers: WR Grace & Co., Master Builders, Inc., or equal. rir 2.05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. General: 1. Employ an independent commercial testing laboratory complying with ASTM C1077 and favorably reviewed by the Engineer to design all concrete mixes and carry out all necessary testing. Concrete mix design proportions shall be established on the basis of field experience and trial mixtures with the materials to be employed in accordance with ACI 318 Section 5.3. 2. If the testing laboratory has satisfactory mix designs available from prior projects, submit test record statistics to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this Sub-Section and ACI 318 Section 5.3. Include calculations for f'cr based on source quality test records. 3. If new mix designs are required, prepare a range of trial batches for each design and submit the mixes that demonstrate satisfactory test results in accordance with ACI 318 Section 5.3. r 4. Allow for the variability of concrete strength from test to test by increasing the required average compressive strength over the specified strength as specified in ACI 318 Section 5.3. 5. Design the mixes far enough ahead of concrete placement to allow completion of trial batch testing and submittal of the test results and mix design to the Engineer for review. fry 6. Take sole responsibility for selection of laboratory, submittal of materials to laboratory in time for all tests, and overall timing of all aspects of testing program, including submittals. 7. Prepare mix designs for concrete placement by the batch process and/or by pumping, as required, and state the process on the design submittal. 8. Allow for the hot or cold weather and the time required to transport the concrete from the mixer to the site and to place within the forms. If accelerating or retarding admixtures will be required for only a proportion of the concrete placements, submit test results that include the full range of options. 9. Do not exceed the water-cementitious material ratios. Vary the water-reducing admixtures to accomplish an increase in slump or workability time. 10. Proportion cementitious materials, aggregates, and water by weight. IN! MW W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegatell0-Eng Design\10.01-Specs1100%—Specs Jun2010110.03300Aoc 6/1112010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 r Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 8 of 20 11. Check periodically the weight of moisture contained within the stockpiled nr aggregates. Compensate for this water when proportioning the concrete mix and adjust when change occurs. 12. Do not use chlorides in any concrete mix. B. Mix Proportions: Concrete Type C E Specified 28-Day Compressive Strength (Ib/int) 4,000 2,500 Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size (in) 1 1 Air Content at Point of Placement (%) 4.5 4.5 Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio 0.50 0.55 Minimum Cementitious Material Content(Ib/yd3) 570 510 so C. Cementitious Material: Either portland cement, cement with fly ash, cement with natural Pozzolan, or blended cement. No D. Pozzolan or Flyash: Optional. Not less than 10%, nor more than 20% of the weight of the cementitious materials. Do not use pozzolan or flyash as an admixture in t concrete made with portland-pozzolan cement. E. Mix Test Requirements: 1. Compression: ASTM C192 for cylinder preparation. ASTM C39 for cylinder tests. Perform three tests after 7 days and three more after 28 days curing. 2. Slump: ASTM C143. Slump range is 3 to 4 inches. After high-range water reducer added, range is 6 to 9 inches. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231. Air content range is ±1%. 4. After favorable review of the mix design, no variations of the constituents are permitted during the project without prior submittal and favorable review. 2.06 READY-MIX CONCRETE A. Supply concrete for the project using truck mixers and a ready-mix plant certified by the National Ready-Mix Concrete Association. Submit certification. B. Alternatively, qualify the supplier according to ASTM C94 Sections 8 through 11, inclusive. no 2.07 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. ASTM C1107, Grade C (precision) with no shrinkage as measured by ASTM C827. Furnish a premixed product, consisting of properly proportioned amounts of non- metallic, dimensionally stable material to which water is added. 2.08 CEMENT MORTAR " A. For Repairs and Patching Concrete. B. One part portland cement, two parts fine sand (by weight) and water. Use only the amount of water needed to make the mix workable for the intended use. W:\2008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.03300.doc 611112010 No WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 9 of 20 C. Provide a mixture of white and regular cements as required to make a mortar that after curing 28 days will match the adjacent concrete. Prepare several trial batches and make test samples in an inconspicuous location for review. rirrr D. When a mix has been selected for color match, batch all mortar by weight in accordance with the formula for the selected mix. 2.09 EPDXY BONDING SYSTEM A. General: ASTM C881: 1. Provide Type I for bonding hardened concrete to hardened concrete; Type II for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete; and Type III as a binder in epoxy mortar or concrete, or for use in bonding skid-resistant materials to hardened concrete. 2. Provide Grade 1 or 2 for horizontal surfaces and Grade 3 for vertical surfaces. 3. Provide Class A if placement temperature is below 40°F; Class B if placement temperature is between 40 and 60°F; or Class C if placement temperature is above 60°F. B. Provide: Sikadur Epoxy adhesives manufactured by the Sika Chemical Corporation; Concresive compounds manufactured by Master Builders, Inc., or equal. C. For bonding new to pre-existing concrete, provide Sika Armatec 110, or equal. Specifier knows of no equal. 2.10 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER A. Miscellaneous Structures Above Grade- ASTM D1752. Supply Bondex 941 by Rubatex Corporation; equivalent product by Duraform; or equal. wr 2.11 SEALANT A. General- ASTM C920, of type, grade, and class appropriate for use. B. Exterior Exposure: Sikaflex-2c, by Sika Corp., Select Seal U-200 by Select Products Corp., or equal. C. Prepare surfaces and provide primer and sealants in strict accordance with x- manufacturer's recommendations. 2.12 CURING MATERIALS A. Cure by fog spray or by one of the following methods after discontinuance of the fog spray. Slabs shall be continuously wet cured with sheet materials or wet blankets after discontinuance of the fog spray; liquid curing compound alone is insufficient. or B. Liquid Curing Compound: A water-based membrane-forming resin suitable for exterior or interior use as a curing and hardening compound on freshly placed + concrete. r kw W:12008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Slonegate110-Eng Desi gn110.01-Specs1100%—Specs Jun2010\10.03300,doc 6/11/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 ad Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 10 of 20 1. Provide an emulsion of synthetic resinous solids dispersed in water containing 10 no waxes, paraffins, or oils. Provide the fugitive type that will oxidize and disintegrate completely within 60 days when exposed to sunlight in exterior applications or that can be removed by washing with dilute muriatic acid or TSP in interior applications. 2. Water retention requirements: ASTM C309, Type I or II, Class B, when tested in accordance with ASTM C156. 3. Use white pigmented material for exterior applications and clear material for interior applications. 4. Comply with the applicable local air quality district. 5. Exterior surfaces: Aqua Resin Cure-White by Burke; 1200-White by W.R. Meadows; or equal. 6. Interior surfaces: Spartan-Cote by Burke; Vocomp 20 by W.R. Meadows; or equal. C. Sheet Materials: ASTM C171. Waterproof paper, plastic sheeting, or white burlap- polyethylene sheet. 1. Plastic sheeting: fungus-resistant, minimum 4 mil thick, clear and free of defects, having ASTM E96 perm rating of not more than 0.5. 2. Waterproof paper: Two layers of non-staining kraft paper laminated with latex adhesive and reinforced with glass in both directions. Seal joints with 2-inch- wide tape with water resistant adhesive. D. Wet Blankets: Clean cotton mats (burlap, except for white burlap-polyethylene sheeting, is unacceptable). Provide material free from any substance that will have a deleterious effect on the concrete. Use a thickness sufficient to retain moisture between programmed applications of water. E. Evaporation Retardant: Eucobar by the Euclid Chemical Company; E-CON by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; or equal. 2.13 FORMS A. Provide forms for exposed concrete surfaces with a clean, smooth plywood or metal face. Exposed concrete surfaces include beams, columns, slabs, interior and exterior walls, and surfaces of tank, chamber and tunnel walls except those in contact with earth. B. Furnish plywood with a waterproof, synthetic resin bonded face manufactured for formwork. Furnish steel forms that incorporate reinforcement, inserts, pipe fittings, box-outs, and other details shown on the Contract Drawings without modification to these details. 2.14 FORM TIES A. Provide commercially manufactured steel rods or through-bolts, not wire, capable of withstanding applied pressures. B. Furnish ties adjustable in length or of proper fixed length, with no metal closer than 1-1/2 inch to the finished concrete surface. Leave no holes larger than 1-inch- diameter at the surface. Use a plastic cone spacer at each end of the form tie to allow a full 1-1/2-inch breakback. +rri W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.03300.doc 6/1112010 " WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 11 of 20 C. In walls resisting water or earth pressure, provide ties with waterstop washers of diameter 3/4-inch greater than the rod, bonded to rods at the wall centerline, or with other favorably reviewed water seal devices. Alternately, furnish through-bolts with a manufactured neoprene or polyurethane tapered plug to be installed at the wall centerline. r 2.15 FORM COATING COMPOUNDS A. Do not stain or impart any material or residue to the concrete surface detrimental or incompatible with any specified paint or coating system to be applied later, or unacceptable for contact with drinking water. Form coating compounds shall be biodegradable with a VOC level less than 50 grams/liter. +�+ 2.16 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Forms: Verify that components pre-assembled offsite are satisfactory for the purpose. Verify that designs, products, and samples have been submitted for Product Review. B. Concrete: 1. Verify that ready-mix batch plant delivery tickets contain all product information necessary for acceptance of the concrete delivered to site. 2. Verify that the mixing and trucking equipment have adequate capacity to deliver ,r. the concrete batches to site on time, thoroughly mixed and discharge without segregation. �r PART 3 - EXECUTION ,■. 3.01 PROPORTIONING CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Place no concrete prior to favorable review of submittals for reinforcing steel, materials specified in this Sub-Section and the mix proposed. Unfavorable results of actual pours may require a redesign of mixes. B. Make no substitutions to the constituents tested in the design of concrete mixes without favorable review of the revised mix and the new test results. 3.02 BATCHING AND MIXING CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Ready or Transit Mixed Concrete: 1. Deliver completely mixed to the project site. "" 2. Do not add mixing water during hauling. Add water after delivery only when agreed by the Engineer. Should water be added, revolve the mixing drum not less than 30 revolutions at mixing speed after adding and before commencing + discharge. 3. Deliver each load at the job site accompanied by a ticket showing mix design number, volume of concrete, the weight of cement in pounds and the total w weight of each ingredient in pounds. Also show the time at which the materials were batched and the reading of the revolution counter at the time the truck mixer was charged. aw NO W1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Slonegale110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.03300.doc 611112010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 12 of 20 4. No retempering of partially hardened material is permitted. Do not use partially hardened concrete in the work. B. Batching in Adverse Weather: 1. Cold Weather: When the atmospheric temperature is below 40°F, or is likely to fall below 40°F during the 24-hour period after placing, heat the materials before mixing, so that the temperature of the mix when deposited shall be between 65° and 80°F. Do not heat the mixing water or the cement over 160°F. Remove lumps of frozen material and ice from the aggregates before they are placed in the mixer. 2. Hot Weather: When temperatures are above 90°F, reduce the temperature of the concrete mix by using iced mixing water, and protecting aggregates and cement from direct rays of the sun. Do not place concrete exceeding 80°F. 3. Should the provisions noted in 1. and 2. above not be possible or practicable, postpone the batching until favorable weather conditions prevail. 3.03 FORMS rr A. General: 1. Take responsibility for adequacy of the form, bracing, and shoring. Satisfy ACI 347. 2. Form all concrete unless specified otherwise. 3. Construct forms confirming to the shape, line and grade specified. 4. Provide tight seams, or seal with tape, to be mortar-tight. 5. Brace and shore all forms properly to ensure stability against pressure from any source, without failure of any component part. 6. Keep the deflection of wall or slab form sheathing or framing for beams within 1/270 of the span. Consider camber in designing the supports of beams and slabs. 7. If inadequate support is provided by the forms, remove all placed concrete and replace, as directed. 8. Provide for temporary openings for cleaning out, observation, pouring and vibration of concrete. .rr 9. If the concrete mix design includes a high-range water reducing additive, design the forms with enough strength to resist the high liquid concrete pressure without distortion. B. Chamfers: 3/4-inch at all exposed outside corners, including the top edges of all walls, machinery bases, and curbs. Use mill run chamfer strips surfaced all sides. Provide rounded top edges of sidewalks, walkways and where directed. C. Formed Surfaces: 1. Ensure that the reinforcement has been favorably reviewed before closing up the wall forms. 2. Provide exposed, unpainted concrete surfaces that are uniform in appearance and color. Apply non-staining mineral oil, form coating, or form release compound before placing the forms. Remove any excess coating with cloths. Scrape and clean any reused forms before coating again. 3. Provide flush fitting caps over any unused form tie holes. 4. Do not use mineral oil on formed surfaces that are to be painted, coated, or bonded to other concrete. �i W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.03300.doc 6/11/2010 1 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 13 of 20 rr D. Form Ties and Through-Bolts: 1. Provide sufficient number and strength to prevent spreading of forms while placing concrete. 2. Remove the removable portion immediately after stripping the forms. Avoid spalling the exposed concrete surfaces. 3. Locate tapered ties, if used, with the larger diameter on the water side of the rrr form. 4. Provide a separate support system for the curtains of reinforcing, with a minimum 1 inch clearance between rebar and form ties or bolts. E. Construction Joints: 1. At ends of the first concrete pour, provide forms that positively locate any waterstop. Ensure the end forms of walls are removable without releasing the 00 side forms. Provide seals around reinforcement and waterstop to prevent mortar leaks. 2. Overlap the hardened concrete of the first pour with forms for the second pour. ■w Brace the ends of the forms against the hardened concrete to prevent joint offsets and mortar leakage. Align any exterior features required on the finished surface. 3.04 ALLOWABLE VARIATIONS FOR FORMED SURFACES rr A. Tolerances: ACI 301 and as noted below: B. Variations in Size or Thickness: 1. Footings: " .' a. Length and width:.................... ............................±1/2 inch b. Reduction in thickness. ........................................5% 2. Slabs and walls: a. Thickness of 6 inches or less: ..............................0 inch b. Thickness of more than 6 inches:.........................±1/4 inch r C. Allowable Tolerances (Location, Lines and Grades): 1. Horizontal misplacement or eccentricity......................2% of footing width of footings but not more than 1 inch to 2. Variation of horizontal dimensions at all floor levels from specified position: .....................................±1/2 inch per 100 foot 3. Variation of vertical dimensions from specified rrposition: ............................ .........................................±1/4 inch 4. Variation from level or from slopes specified for floors, ceilings, water channels and conspicuous lines:.......................................................±1/4 inch per 20 feet rr 5. Variation in location from specified position for sleeves, pits, floor and wall openings..........................±1/4 inch D. General: Set and maintain concrete forms to ensure that, after removal of the forms and prior to patching and finishing, no portion of the concrete work will exceed any of the tolerances. Measure variations in floor levels before removal of supporting shores. Accept responsibility for variations due to deflections resulting from concrete quality or curing other than that specified. The specified variation for one element of the structure will not be applicable when it will permit another element of the structure to exceed its allowable variation. W:\2008\0897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate\10-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010110.03300.doc 6/1112010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 14 of 20 3.05 REMOVAL OF FORMS r A. General: Comply with the recommendations of ACI Committee 347. Remove without damage to the concrete and with complete safety of the structure. Ensure that the concrete has hardened sufficiently and the members have attained sufficient strength to safely support the imposed loads. B. Removal Time: Minimum duration after completion of concrete placement: 1. Walls and wall or slab construction joints.............12 hours 2. Sides of beams and girders .................................12 hours 3. Columns...............................................................12 hours .r 4. Underside of suspended one-way slabs...............21 days, and full design walkways, beams and girders compressive strength verified by data from additional field + cured cylinders, if removed at less than 28 days. . rir C. Cold Weather: Engineer may increase the minimum form removal times if the temperature is 50°F or lower. D. Reshoring: Submit for favorable review, any requirement for accelerated partial stripping and reshoring of forms that may be necessary to maintain the construction program. Removal times for two-way suspended slabs are contingent on reshoring and shall be favorably reviewed by the Engineer. 3.06 REUSE OF FORMS A. Between concrete placements, inspect all form surfaces and repair to uniform texture for all concrete surfaces to be exposed. Fill all unused holes, cracks, and defects. 3.07 PLACING CONCRETE AND GROUT A. Preliminary Work: 1. Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from the inner surface of the mixing and conveying equipment. Remove all debris from the space to be occupied by the concrete. 2. Remove water from the space to be occupied by the concrete before concrete is deposited. Divert any flow of water into an excavation through proper site drainage to a sump, or by other methods. If required by the Engineer, grout up any water vent pipes and drains after the concrete has thoroughly hardened. 3. Provide satisfactory redundancy in the delivery system so that work can continue in the event of a breakdown. 4. Do not use aluminum materials in pumping lines, transfer hoppers, or chutes longer than 12 feet. Provide conveyor belts instead of chutes when the distance is longer than 50 feet. Use a storage hopper at the start of the line. 5. For pumped concrete, provide a hose with an angle-change, to create a back- pressure at the outlet. 6. Provide illumination if necessary inside the forms, so that the placed concrete will be visible from the deck at top of formwork. 7. Provide thermometer for measuring concrete temperature when weather conditions are predicted to go beyond the range 50'F to 80°F. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100% Specs_Jun2010V10.03300.doc 6111/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 15 of 20 wr B. Embedded Items: 1. Place all equipment, bolts, anchors, sleeves, inserts, structural steel members, angles, and similar items which require embedment in the concrete. 2. Hot-dip galvanize all ferrous metal sleeves, inserts, anchors, and other embedded ferrous items unless shown otherwise. Set anchor bolts for equipment in templates, carefully plumbed and checked for location and elevation with an instrument, and held in position rigidly by double nutting to the template to prevent displacement while concrete is being poured. 3. Ensure that any aluminum items inserted in the concrete are isolated by a coating of coal-tar or equivalent. °11 4. Move reinforcement bars as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items, but not so as to impair design strengths of the member. If bars are moved more than two bar diameters, submit the resulting arrangement of bars for review. 5. Inspect the installation of all embedded items and reinforcing. rrr C. Placing: 1. Transfer the concrete to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods that prevent the separation or loss of ingredients. Under no circumstances deposit partially hardened concrete in the work. Deposit concrete in the forms as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid rehandling. Maintain, until the completion of the pour, a plastic concrete surface, approximately horizontal. ` 2. Deposit concrete without segregation of the aggregate and without displacement of the reinforcement. 3. Maximum height of free fall for concrete during placement: a. Concrete with maximum 4-inch slump: ................................4 feet b. Concrete with high-range water reducing admixture and minimum 6-inch, maximum 9-inch slump: ...........................8 feet +W 4. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers 12 to 20 inches in depth so that no concrete will be deposited on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section err cannot be placed continuously as originally planned, locate construction joints during the placement. 5. Use every means to secure a dense, impervious, homogeneous concrete, free VW from voids or pockets. If honeycomb, air, or rock pockets occur, repair the structure to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer, and modify the placing method or mix design, to prevent recurrence of deficient concrete. Provide go such repairs and modifications at no additional cost. Extensive honeycomb or pockets may be cause for rejection of the work. D. Time Limit: Place all concrete in its final position in slab or forms within 1-1/2 hours of batching. Alternatively, as part of the mix design, provide admixtures that delay the initial set and state the proposed length of time in the submittal. +++� E. Temperature Limits: Place all concrete in its final position in slab or forms at: 1. Less than 90°F, measured in the mix. 2. More than 40°F, measured both in the mix and in the air, with air temperature predicted to rise above 50°F. 3. More than 50°F, measured in the mix, 40°F measured in the air, with air temperature falling. OW Refer to the vibration, concrete joints, and curing sub-sections for other requirements. no Wk200810897003 City-ot-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100% Specs_Jun201000.03300.doc 6/11/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 16 of 20 F. Precast Items: 1. Items may be cast on or off the site. 2. Apply all applicable portions of Sub-Section 10.03300, including materials, trig forms, placement, finish, and curing. 3. Take particular care when handling and placing the precast items. Lift or move after a minimum of 90% of the specified compressive strength has been attained. Use the average compressive strength of two test cylinders. 3.08 VIBRATION .r► A. Compact the concrete with high frequency, internal mechanical vibrating equipment, and when required, supplement by hand spading and tamping. Consolidate slabs 6 inches or less in depth by hand tampers, spreading and settling with a heavy leveling straightedge. B. Operate vibrators with vibratory element submerged in the concrete, with frequency between 8,000 and 12,000 impulses per minute when submerged. C. Furnish sufficient vibrators to complete the compaction as specified without causing delay in the depositing of concrete. Provide at least one spare unit for each structure when concrete is being placed and at least one vibrator for each 25 cubic yards per hour of concrete placement. D. Vibrate by direct action in the concrete for approximately 10 seconds at approximately 12-inch intervals, not against forms or reinforcements. Do not move concrete horizontally by vibration. Work the concrete around the reinforcement, and around embedded fixtures and into the corners of the forms. Penetrate 6 to 12 inches into previously poured layers as new layers are poured, provided the running vibrator penetrates by its own weight. To secure even and dense surfaces, free from aggregate pockets, honeycomb, or air pockets, supplement vibration when required by forking or spading by hand or hammering the forms lightly opposite the freshly deposited concrete. Revibrate the final layer. Stop vibrating when concrete is thoroughly compacted and has ceased to decrease in volume and give off air bubbles. E. When placing concrete with 8-inch or more slump, reduce the time of vibration to 5 seconds and follow the admixture manufacturer's recommendations for technique. 3.09 CONCRETE JOINTS A. General: 1. Provide joints: a. As shown on the Drawings and as noted below in these Specifications. b. As required for constructibility. c. After favorable review of layout, sequence and concrete placement program. 2. Provide minimum curing times before the second placement: a. 2 days after the first concrete placement at the joint. b. 10 days after each adjacent concrete placement, for infill pours or checkerboard placement pattern. W:\2006\0697003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign\10.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.03300.doc 6/11/2010 ' WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 17 of 20 3. During placement of the new concrete, ensure there are no interruptions to the 14-day curing time and 14-day load restriction plan for the adjacent pours. B. Control Joints: 1. Space typical control joints in slabs on grade or suspended slabs not exceeding 10 feet, or as shown on the Drawings. Control joints shall not be provided in water containment structures. 2. If cast-in with the concrete, positively locate the preformed joint filler and hold rigidly in place during concreting. 3. If saw-cut, use a wheeled power saw as soon as the concrete surface is firm �r enough. Saw-cut control joints must be constructed within 12-hours after concrete placement. Fill the groove with sealant over a backer rod. C. Construction Joints: 1. Produce quality concrete, with full continuity of reinforcing and water tightness across the joints. rr 2. Space typical slab joints not exceeding 20 feet in the direction of the transverse or secondary reinforcing, typically the smaller reinforcing nearer to the center of the slab thickness. Space typical vertical wall joints.no more than 30 feet apart. rr+ 3. After the first concrete placement at the joint, do not walk on or disturb any reinforcing extending into the second placement area for at least 48 hours. 4. Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete that has hardened, .r clean and roughen the entire surface of the joint exposing clean coarse aggregate solidly embedded in mortar matrix. Provide typically 1/4-inch roughness or amplitude of the concrete surface measured from the top of the exposed aggregate to the bottom of pockets between stones. 5. Drench the prepared joint with clean water and remove prior to the concrete pour. 6. Use special care in vibrating adjacent to construction joints to ensure thorough consolidation of the concrete around the waterstops and against the hardened portion of the joint. Additional hand tamping may be required. 7. For joints that are shown on architectural drawings as having a continuous reveal or recess, leave the wood form or pour strip used to create the reveal or recess in place or re-insert before roughening. Prevent the next concrete placement from filling the reveal or recess. 3.10 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Inspect all concrete surfaces immediately after carefully removing forms. Defective work includes concrete out of line, level, or plumb; cracks; poor joints-, rock pockets; honeycomb; voids; spalls and exposed reinforcing. Patch all minor defects, including form tie holes, before the concrete is thoroughly dry. Do not interrupt the curing program. Ensure that repairs match the existing surface for color and texture. B. Minor Defects: 1. Clean thoroughly, including removal of any curing compound. Cut out to solid concrete but to a depth of not less than 1 inch. Prepare the edges of the cut slightly more than perpendicular to the surface of the concrete, so as to form a key. M W:\200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegale110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.03300.doc 611112010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 18 of 20 2. Repair with cement mortar. Use minimum water, consistent with the .i requirements of handling and placing. Thoroughly compact the material into place and screed off to leave the patch flush with the surrounding surface. 3. Keep the surface damp for at least 48 hours. C. Major Defects: 1. Large areas involving voids or rock pockets extending through the section may be cause for rejection of the work. 2. If acceptable repairs can be made without adversely affecting the structural integrity of the work, cut out the section and either dry pack, or reform and repour to match the adjacent concrete. Do not cut the reinforcing but cut keyways into the adjacent sound concrete to securely fasten the patch to the original work. Prepare edges of the damaged area with a minimum of a 1 inch cut perpendicular to the concrete surface. 3. Coat all surfaces with epoxy bonding compound immediately prior to patching. Place the concrete patch before the epoxy has set. Follow the epoxy bonding manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Provide a patch with strength and modulus of elasticity compatible with the parent concrete. Cure in accordance with the following article. 3.11 CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Maintain concrete above 50°F and below 90°F in a moist condition and without external loadings for 14 days after placement. For slabs, after the specified initial moist cure, provide further moist curing, utilizing sheet materials or wet blankets for 14 days after placement. Apply liquid membrane curing after the 14-day wet curing period. For walls after the specified initial moist cure, provide further moist curing, impervious-sheeting curing, or application of liquefied membrane-curing compound, as noted. B. Slabs: 1. Initial moist cure: Provide a 36-hour uniform spray treatment immediately _ following final troweling and before the surface can dry out, but after bleeding has stopped. Use clean water and special fog spray nozzles of type and number required to keep entire surface moist. Keep all traffic off the floor surfaces. 2. Continued cure: After 36 hours, continue fog curing, or before the surface dries out, continue.curing by utilizing sheet materials or wet blankets in order to keep the surface of the slab continuously wet for the balance of the 14 days. After 14 days apply a liquid membrane curing compound: a. Place waterproof curing paper smoothly upon the moist concrete surface with all joints and edges lapped a minimum of 4 inches and continuously sealed with tape. Do not use paper that will leave an impression on the finish. Repair, replace, and reseal torn or scuffed sheets. b. Install polyethylene plastic sheeting and maintain in the same manner as for curing paper. c. Apply liquid membrane curing compound, if favorably reviewed for this purpose. Apply while slab is still damp from the fog spray. 1) Agitate compound thoroughly by mechanical means during use and apply uniformly in a two coat continuous operation by appropriate power-spraying equipment. Apply the two coats at right angles. Apply between 150 and 200 square feet per gallon of undiluted compound, W:\2008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010\10.03300.doc 6111/2010 wo WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 19 of 20 • total coverage. Form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and free from pinholes or other imperfections. Apply an additional coat immediately to areas where the film is defective. 2) Keep alternate specified covering readily available for use in the event conditions occur which prevent correct application of the compound at the proper time. 3) Respray surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied (when slab reaches a moist condition and there is no standing water) with two additional 40 coats of curing compound by the foregoing method and coverage. 4) Allow foot traffic only after 36 hours of.cure time and only when slab is protected with paper or sheeting. 5) Allow building material storage only after 14 days of cure time and only on plywood sheets and wood sleepers that spread the load and protect the finish. r C. Walls: 1. When forms are in place, keep concrete damp by spraying the outside and top of the forms with water. 2. When forms are in place, but loosened, keep concrete damp by streaming water down inside the forms. 3. When forms are removed, continue curing by one of the following methods for ow the balance of the 14 days. a. Provide continuous perforated hose sprays at the top of wall covering the entire wall, both sides, with water. b. Place water-retaining blankets continuously over the wall surfaces and "" hose periodically with water, 24 hours a day. c. Apply liquid membrane curing compound, if favorably reviewed for this purpose. Follow the procedures for slabs contained in paragraph above. �wr D. Other Surfaces: 1. Provide a curing program equivalent to either slab or wall system, as + appropriate. 2. Include construction joint surfaces when applying curing compound. 3. Cover, or protect joint openings, exposed reinforcing, surfaces to be painted and other areas where curing compound may enter and interfere with a special finish. 4. Remove curing compound sprayed on reinforcing or construction joints by MW sandblasting after curing is completed, or before placing the next pour. If the cones of tie holes are sprayed with curing compound, lightly ream prior to patching. 5. For curing of certain interior and other slabs using hardening or coloring "� compounds, refer to Sub-Section 10.03350. E. Cold Weather Requirements: Provide adequate equipment for heating the placed to concrete during freezing or near freezing weather: 1. Whenever the surrounding air temperature is below 40°F, or may fall below 40°F within the 24-hour period after pouring of concrete, maintain all freshly poured concrete at not less than 50°F for 5 days. 2. Keep the housing, covering, or other protection in place and intact at least 24 hours after the artificial heating is discontinued. ,r #W W9200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-Eng Des ign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.03300.doc 6111/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Page 20 of 20 3. Do not use manure, salt, calcium chloride, or other chemicals on the concrete to prevent freezing. F. Hot Weather Requirements: Provide additional cooling to concrete when temperatures rise above 90'F, or low humidity, wind and temperature combine to cause high surface evaporation, over 0.2 Ib/sq. ft./hour: 1. Provide additional water if curing by fog spray or ponding or saturated blankets. 2. Provide shade to surfaces exposed to direct sunlight. 3. Apply an evaporation retarder during the finishing operation, following the manufacturer's recommendation. 3.12 CONCRETE FINISHES A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.03350. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL No A. Concrete Placement: 1. Verify that forms and reinforcement are accurately placed and secured in position. Confirm that both forms and reinforcement have been favorably reviewed. 2. Verify that tie wire ends have been bent back away from the forms. 3. Verify that all sleeves, castings, pipes, conduits, bolts, anchors, and any other items required, are accurately and securely placed within or on the forms. 4. Verify adequate vibrators are available. 5. Verify construction and expansion joint faces have been prepared for the next concrete placement. 6. Check that the mix design is compatible with the method of placement of the concrete, by pump or by batch. 7. For wall placements, verify that the modified concrete mix required at construction joints is to be delivered. 8. Verify the concrete delivered to site is satisfactory, including checks on the batch tickets, quality assurance tests, and direct observation of the batches. iso B. Concrete Curing: 1. Verify procedures and equipment are available for controlling concrete temperature during hot and cold weather conditions. 2. Verify actual time of application of evaporation retardant, fog spray and curing materials for each placement. , 3.14 CLEANUP A. Upon completion of all work performed under this Sub-Section, remove from the site all excess materials, storage facilities and temporary facilities. Smooth and clean of debris all areas that were used or occupied during concrete construction operations and leave in first-class condition. END OF SUB-SECTION W:12008108g7003—City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110-01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010110.03300.dcc 6/11/2010 go 40 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03350 Concrete Finishes (Structural) Page 1 of 4 no SUB-SECTION 10.03350 CONCRETE FINISHES (STRUCTURAL) go PART 1 - GENERAL WW 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. Concrete finishes for all horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces. 2. Sealers and hardeners for concrete. B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C156 Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials 2. ASTM C309 Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete .r. 3. ASTM C1028 Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method 4. ASTM E96 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials rrw B. International Building Code (IBC). C. "Evaluation Reports" published by the International Code Council. 1.03 SUBMITTALS .w A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. B. Qualifications: A list of five projects completed by the proposed subcontractor within the most recent 3 years that have concrete finishes similar to those specified for this project. aw C. Product Data: Describe all products proposed for use. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: Use skilled cement finishers to perform all work. B Regulatory Requirements- Comply with applicable requirements in the International Building Code, adopted edition, including without limitation Chapters 10, 11, 11A, and 11 B. wr - ow W92008I0897003_City-of-Renton_Slonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100% Specs_Jun2010110.03350.doc 6/11/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03350 Concrete Finishes (Structural) Page 2 of 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CURING AND SEALING COMPOUND A. General: 1. Water-base acrylic curing, sealing and dustproofing compound. 2. Leave a protective clear transparent film on the concrete surface that is non- yellowing and resistant to deterioration due to exposure to ultraviolet light. 3. ASTM C-309, Type I, Class B. 4. AASHTO M-148, Type I, Class B. B. Manufacturers: 1. First coat Vocomp-20, second coat Vocomp-25-1315 by W. R. Meadows Inc. 2. Burke Spartan-Cote WB Cure/Seal/Hardener 3. Or equal. 2.02 MORTAR FOR FILLING VOIDS A. Mortar for filling voids: One part portland cement, two parts sand by volume mixed with only enough water to form a ball when squeezed by hand. A mixture of white and grey portland cement is required for color match (approximately 1 part white to 2 parts grey). Add mineral oxide colors as required to match colored concrete. Substitute non-reemulsifiable, acrylic bonding agent for one-third of mixing water. Test several different mixes for color match and obtain favorable review prior to proceeding. ■r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE SURFACE FINISHES FOR SLABS AND PAVING A. General: 1. Provide a surface finish on all exterior and interior horizontal concrete slabs that has a coefficient of friction when measured in accordance with ASTM C1028 not less than 0.60 for level surfaces and 0.80 for surfaces sloped 1:20 or more. 2. For all exterior paving surfaces provide a minimum slope of 1% (1/8-inch per foot) to drain surface water to catch basins, drains or edges of pavement adjacent to landscaping and drainage swales. Review grades shown and recommend any adjustments necessary to achieve minimum specified slope. 3. Slope interior floor surfaces containing floor drains to drain water to the drains. Review elevations shown on Drawings for adequate slopes before setting grades. Report any conditions that will not provide adequate drainage or that will produce excessively steep slopes before proceeding. 4. Finish slabs so they do not deviate more than 1/4-inch (6.3 mm) in 10 feet from a straight edge. Finish elevations to within 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) elevations shown or required to match adjacent existing conditions. Provide "as-built" slopes for drainage no less than those shown or specified. 5. Allowed Tolerance for individual risers and treads in any flight of stairs: a. 1/4-inch (6.3 mm) between the lowest and highest riser. b. 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) between the deepest and shallowest tread measured in the direction of travel. W:12008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.03350.doc 6/11/2010 aw WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03350 Concrete Finishes (Structural) Page 3 of 4 �. 6. Slope all treads 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) down toward the nosing for drainage. 7. Finish edges and surfaces smooth, true, and clean. 8. Apply finish to slabs as soon as the concrete can support the weight of the workmen. 9. Increase the humidity of the air directly above the concrete surface, prior to and during finishing operations by adding a fine fog mist of water to the air with mist nozzles when atmospheric conditions (temperature, humidity, and wind) are such that rapid evaporation of mixing water from the concrete is likely to occur. B. Wood or Magnesium Float Finish and Preliminary Steps For Other Finishes: 1. Applies to slab surfaces indicated to have a wood or magnesium Float finish. This finish is also the initial step for all other finishes. 2. Place and consolidate concrete. 3. Screed to grade using a strike-off board guided on accurately set screeds. 4. Work the surface with a bull or darby float to embed large aggregate, consolidate surface mortar and create a smooth true surface. 40 5. Do not overwork the surface or add dry materials such as sand or cement. 6. When surface has taken initial set and bleed water has disappeared work surface with wood floats followed by magnesium floats (if a magnesium float 10 finish is called for) to even out slight irregularities and further consolidate surface. 7. When concrete has set further so that excess water and fine material will not be brought to the surface, either begin the first steel troweling if this is the preliminary step for other finishes or work the surface with magnesium or wood float if this is the final step in a Float finish. Work the surface sufficiently to consolidate the mortar and produce a finished surface at the proper grade that """ is free of voids, ripples or other defects. Apply a final swirl texture finish in a fan pattern with the wood or magnesium float. Retool slab edges and control joints. Leave a uniform smooth border around all slab edges and each side of control joints. C. Broom Finish: w. 1. Applies to all slabs indicated to receive a Broom finish. 2. Complete work required under"Preliminary Steps for Other Finishes." 3. Apply a second and third steel troweling after the concrete has set sufficiently so mortar does not adhere to the edge of the trowel and sufficient pressure can be applied to further consolidate the surface. 4. Broom texture the surface of the slab at right angles to the normal direction of traffic. Use a stiff fiber bristled broom for Coarse Broom Finish and a fine hair broom for Fine Broom Finish. Match selected control sample. D. Detail Work: Applies to all concrete flatwork and to exposed top edges of all formed concrete. 1. Edging Slabs: Tool a 3/8-inch radius on all exposed edges of slabs, curbs and other exposed horizontal edges unless a formed chamfered edge is called for. Repeat tooling with each floating or troweling operation. 2. Apply a Trowel finish to the top of the formed walls, curbs, and machine bases. 3. Control Joints and Feature Grooves: AW a. Cut 1-inch-deep control joints with rounded edges in all paving slabs where indicated but not more than 8 feet apart in each direction. Repeat tooling with each floating or troweling operation. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_SpecsJun2010110.03350.doc 511112010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.03350 Concrete Finishes (Structural) Page 4 of 4 b. Run decorative feature grooves with a 1/4-inch-deep rounded tool before the final troweling in paving where shown. E. Cement Finishers Finish: rr 1. Use for curb faces, stair risers and other vertical formed surfaces customarily stripped and finished the same day they are placed and before the concrete fully sets. 2. Use form work specially designed for removal before the concrete sets. 3. Remove forms when concrete has achieved initial set and is stiff enough to retain its own shape but before it fully sets. 4. Work over surface with a moist wood or rubber float and cement paste to fill minor voids and consolidate the surface. Fill holes and larger voids with mortar but do not build up a coating of mortar over the entire formed surface. Finish with a fine hair brush. 3.02 SCHEDULE OF CONCRETE FINISHES A. SLABS LOCATION OF FINISH 1. Wood or 3.01 B Applies to slab surfaces indicated to receive a Float finish. This Magnesium finish is also the initial steps for all other finishes. Applies to all ► Float interior and exterior slabs scheduled to receive a bonded ceramic tile or bonded mortar finish and tank slabs to receive swe t-in- rout. 2: Broom Finish 3.01D Applies to slabs indicated to receive a"Broom Finish" and to all exterior paving, stair treads, and interior slabs in wet process areas not indicated to receive another finish. 3. Cement 3.01 F Applies to curb faces, stair risers and other vertical formed surfaces Finishers Finish customarily finished the same day they are placed and before the concrete fully sets. B. SEALING SLABS a. Apply one coat CURING AND SEALING Compound to interior building concrete intended to receive carpet or resilient flooring in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and at the recommended rate. b. Apply two coats CURING AND SEALING Compound to interior + building concrete that will receive no other finish. Apply the first coat when the concrete is wet; apply the second coat 30 days later. C. SEE SUB-SECTION 10.03300 FOR CURING FORMED CONCRETE END OF SUB-SECTION me W:k2008\0897003_C4-of-Renton Stonegatek10-EngDesign110.01-Specsll00%Specs_Jun2010\10.03350.doc 6/11/2010 to WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.04050 Basic Masonry Materials and Methods Page 1 of 5 10 SUB-SECTION 10.04050 BASIC MASONRY MATERIALS AND METHODS am PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. Basic information about mortar materials; admixtures, grout, anchors, ties, reinforcing, and other accessories used in the installation of masonry. B. Related Sub-Sections 1. Sub-Section 10.03200: Reinforcing Steel 2. Sub-Section 10.04220: Concrete Masonry Units r 3. Sub-Section 10.07900: Joint Sealants 1.02 REFERENCES +r A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C94 Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 2. C143 Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 3. C144 Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar 4. C150 Specification for Portland Cement 5. C207 Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes 6. C270 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 7. C404 Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout 8. C476 Specification for Grout for Masonry 9. C780 Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry 10. C1019 Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout 11. A615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ,. B. International Masonry Industry All Weather Council (IMIAWC): Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. C. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402) D. Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602) 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS �r. A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements: B. Product Data: Fully describe every item proposed for use. C. Samples: Submit two samples illustrating mortar color. Additional submittal requirements for mortar color are in Section 10.04420. rw'• KQ00810897003_City-of-Renton_Stone gate\10-EngDesign\10.01-Specs\100%—Specs_Jun2010\10.04050.doG 6(16/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.04050 Basic Masonry Materials and Methods Page 2 of 5 D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals 1. Design Data: Grout mix design. Design mortar mix in accordance with ASTM C270. 2. Test Reports: Inspection and test reports for mortar and grout per ASTM C780 and C1019. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: Store all material protected from moisture and from contamination by dirt, mud or other foreign material. 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1 and IMIAWC. 1. Cold Weather Requirements: When ambient temperature is below 40°F. Maintain all materials at or above 40°F during mixing, placing, and for 48 hours +r after placement. Protect materials or heat materials, protect, enclose, or heat work areas. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout below 90°F. 2. Hot Weather Requirements: When ambient temperature exceeds 90'F. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout below 90°F. Fog spray all new completed masonry work for 72 hours. arr► PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Admixtures: Not permitted unless approved by Engineer prior to construction. 4W B. Aggregate: 1. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, except that at least 4% passing No. 100 (150 mm) sieve. Uniformly grade from fine to coarse. Allow not more than 2% + ► by weight of deleterious substances. 2. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404, Table 1, Coarse Aggregate. C. Cement: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type II, and meeting the requirements of low alkali cement in conformance with Table 2 of ASTM C150. Masonry cement is not permitted. D. Flyash: ASTM C618, Class F. E. Hydrated Lime: Conform to ASTM C207, Type S. F. Reinforcing Steel: Conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60. G. Water: Potable and free from excess alkalies. H. Bonding Agent: Non-reemulsifiable polyvinyl acetate, Roplex, Acryl-60, or equal. W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Slonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100% Specs_Jun2010110.04050.doc 611 112 01 0 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.04050 Basic Masonry Materials and Methods Page 3 of 5 2.02 ACCESSORIES Not used. 2.03 MIXES A. Grout: 1. Portland cement, hydrated lime, fine aggregate and pea gravel conforming to ASTM C404 and ASTM C476. 2. Compressive strength: 2,500 psi, minimum at 28 days when tested per ASTM C1019. 3. Cement content of the grout shall be increased, as necessary to achieve the specified masonry assembly strength (fm) and adequate workability. *W 4. Proportion grout in accordance with IBC Table 2103.10. 5. Provide flyash not less than 10%, nor more than 20% of the weight of the cementitious materials. 6. Slump: 8 to 10 inches in accordance with ASTM C143. B. Mortar: Type "S" and complying with ASTM C270 and proportioned as necessary to comply with the requirements of IBC Table 2103.7(1) and Table 2103.7(2) for the strength of block used. 1. Color: as selected from the manufacturer's standard range of colors. The color ,W range shall consist of a minimum of 20 distinct colors, with a minimum of 5 in an off-white or light tan range, similar in color to the CMU. C. Pointing Mortar: Duplicate original mortar proportions and add aluminum tristearate, calcium stearate, or ammonium stearate equal to two percent of Portland cement by weight or provide a stiff mortar modified by replacing one-third of the mixing water with acrylic bonding agent. r. 2.04, SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests, Inspection: 1. Verify that ready-mix batch plant delivery tickets contain all product information necessary for acceptance of the grout delivered to site. %W 2. Verify that the mixing and trucking equipment have adequate capacity to deliver the grout batches to site on time, thoroughly mixed and discharge without segregation. 4W PART 3 - EXECUTION 4W 3.01 PREPARATION AV A. Protection: Store all material protected from moisture and from contamination by dirt, mud or other foreign material. Protect materials from adverse environmental conditions in accordance with the requirements of ACI 530.1 and IMIAWC. "' B. Surface Preparation: Sandblast concrete foundation or slab to expose aggregate. Use bonding agent to bond the first layer of mortar setting bed to the concrete slab or foundation. err ow W:120081089I003_City-ot-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—Specs_Jun2010110.O4O5O.doc 6111/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.04050 Basic Masonry Materials and Methods Page 4 of 5 3.02 MIXING MORTAR A. Mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270. Proportion mortar by volume using containers of known volume. ► B. Mix ingredients in a paddle type (plastic) mixer for at least 3 minutes. C. Add only enough water to produce a plastic mix. Do not retemper mortar, which has begun to hydrate. Any mortar that is unused within 2 hours after initial mixing shall be removed from the work. 3.03 MIXING GROUT A. Plant batch grout by weight and mix in transit in accordance with ASTM C94 or ASTM C476. Any grout that is unused within 1 '/2 hours after initial mixing shall be removed from the work. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Seal cleanout holes with masonry units after inspection and before grouting. Use a +r high-pressure jet stream of water to remove mortar fins and any foreign matter from the grout space. B. Install mortar and grout under provisions of Sub-Section 10.04220. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION A. Interface with Other Work: All embedded items (bolts, etc.) shall be secured in place prior to grouting. Embed all anchors, ties, and sleeves required to accommodate the work of others. t�1° 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL rr A. Site Tests: 1. Test grout for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C1019. 2. Make one grout sample, consisting of three specimens, for each 5,000 square so feet of wall area, but not less than one set of three specimens per project. 3. Test grout specimens in accordance with ASTM C39 at 28 days. 4. Test mortar in accordance with the following: rri a. Spread mortar on the masonry units 1/2 inch to 5/8 inch thick, and allow to stand for one minute, then remove mortar and place in a 2-inch by 4-inch cylinder in two layers, compressing the mortar into the cylinder using a flat- end stick or fingers, Lightly tap mold on opposite sides, level off and immediately cover molds and keep them damp until taken to the laboratory. After 48 hours set, have the laboratory remove molds and place them in the fog room until tested in damp condition. b. Each such mortar test specimen shall exhibit a minimum ultimate compressive strength of 1,500 psi at 28 days. 5. Make one mortar sample, consisting of three cylinders, at the beginning of the masonry work on three successive days and at one week interval thereafter. W:1200810897003 City-ot-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.04050.doc 6/11/2010 go WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.04050 Basic Masonry Materials and Methods Page 5 of 5 B. Inspection: Provide inspection during preparation and taking of test specimens, grout space prior to grouting, and grouting operations. All masonry work is to be continuously inspected during grouting operations. Submit inspection reports for all ,. work. 3.07 CLEANING .r A. Clean down all masonry by scrubbing with water masonry cleaner and bristle brushes. Do not clean with muriatic acid. Do not use high pressure cleaning equipment. B. Repair or replace all defective work including units that are smeared with mortar or grout. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Cure mortar joints by keeping masonry units and joints damp for 10 days after laying units by applying a very fine water mist spray and covering work with polyethylene sheeting. �r END OF SUB-SECTION wr rw .r r W:1200810897003_Cityof-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010\10.04050.doc 6/11/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.04220 Concrete Masonry Units Page 1 of 7 SUB-SECTION 10.04220 " CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. Manufactured concrete masonry units; both load-bearing and non-load-bearing and intended for use in masonry assemblies with mortar. 2. Related reinforcing. 3. All scaffolding, bracing, forming, and shoring required for this work. 4. Penetrating masonry sealer. B. Related Sub-Sections 1. Sub-Section 10.03200: Reinforcing Steel 2. Sub-Section 10.04050: Basic Masonry Materials and Methods 3. Sub-Section 10.07190: Water Repellant Sealer 4. Sub-Section 10.07900: Joint Sealants 1.02 REFERENCES rr A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates 2. C90 Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units 3. C140 Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units 4. C150 Specification for Portland Cement 5. C331 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units 6. C341 Test Method.for Length Change of Drilled or Sawed Specimens of Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and Concrete 7. C426 Test Method for Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Units 8. D75 Practice for Aggregates Sampling 9. E447 Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms B. International Building Code Standards 1. 21-16 Field Tests Specimens for Mortar ,rw C. "Masonry Design Manual" published by the Masonry Industry Advancement Committee. D. "2006 Design of Reinforced Masonry Structures" published by the Concrete Masonry Association of California and Nevada. E. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402) F. Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602) G. International Building Code (IBC) W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton—Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.04220.doc 6/11/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.04220 Concrete Masonry Units Page 2 of 7 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. B. Product Data: Fully describe every item proposed for use. Manufacturer's technical information for materials, systems, mixing, installation, and curing procedures. C. Shop Drawings- Submit detailed shop drawings for reinforcing steel showing the number, grade, size, length, mark, location, and bending diagrams for reinforcing w steel in accordance with the ACI Detailing Manual. D. Samples: Masonry units and mortar proposed for use on the project. Submit a minimum of 2 physical CMU samples of the color for selection. Submit grout colors in physical samples or color charts at the same time. Submit physical grout samples after initial color selections. Products that do not have a color in the desired color range may be rejected. ow E. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals 1. Test Reports: Test reports for units per ASTM C140. Inspection and test reports for CMU prisms per ASTM C1314. 2. Certificates: Manufacturer's certification that masonry units were manufactured and wet cured for 28 days (or equivalent steam cure) prior to delivery. 3. Warranty: Manufacturer's five-year warranty for penetrating masonry sealer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Use a licensed Waterproofing Specialty Contractor exclusively engaged in applying waterproofing materials, sealers and sealants to apply masonry sealer. B. Verification of f'm of concrete masonry shall be achieved by the Unit Strength Method in accordance with IBC Section 2105.2.2.1. Comply with ASTM C140. Prior to construction, submit test results on three units. Test results must comply with IBC Table 2105.2.2.1.2. Submit test results for mortar and grout in accordance with Sub-Section 10.04050. Aw C. All construction or work shall be subject to inspection by the local building official and the Owner's representative. The Contractor shall make all work or construction aw accessible and exposed for inspection of the cells and for the size and placement of reinforcement, anchors, or other imbedded items. 40 D. When 1/ allowable masonry stresses are used for design special inspection is not required. See Drawings for buildings, structures, or structural elements requiring special inspection. Special inspection shall be in accordance with IBC wr Section 1704. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 40 A. Acceptance at Site: Remove chipped,pped, cracked, and otherwise defective units from jobsite. w aw W1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate\10-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100h_Specs Jun2010110,04220.doc 6/1112010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.04220 Concrete Masonry Units Page 3 of 7 B. Storage and Protection: Store all material protected from moisture and from contamination by dirt, mud or other foreign material. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other trades whose items that require embedment into masonry. Build in items furnished under other sections as work progresses. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1 and IMIAC. See Sub-Section 10.04050. 1.08 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Provide a five-year guarantee in conformance with the Special Provisions and signed by the sealer manufacturer, sealer applicator and contractor providing ► protection against failure of the penetrating masonry sealer to prevent water intrusion through the treated masonry. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eastside Masonry, of Redmond, WA; Mutual Materials, of Bellevue, WA; or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90, Grade N, Type 1. 1. Minimum compressive strength of 1,900 psi when wet cure (or equivalent steam cure) for a minimum of 28 days before delivery to the site. 2. Maximum linear shrinkage of 0.065% from saturated to oven dry conditions, when tested in accordance with ASTM C426. 3. Lightweight aggregate in accordance with ASTM C331. 4. Manufacture units using concrete that weights between 85 and 105 pounds per .r► cubic foot when measured in accordance with ASTM C140. 5. Typical Exterior Units: 8 by 8 by 16 nominal split-face. Color: as selected from the manufacturer's standard line of colors. The manufacturers shall have an off-white (not gray) or light tan color for selection. 6. Interior Units: Matching exterior units smooth. 7. Provide all bond beam, lintel, half, pilaster, wall, cap blocks, and other special shapes and sizes required. Provide double open end, open-end, or standard basic concrete masonry units or bond beam units unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Use lintel block units where underside of lintel will be exposed. 8. Screen block inset panels: 4x12x12 matching adjacent wall units. B. Cleaning Materials: Sure Klean 600 Detergent, by ProSoCo, Inc. or equal. Efflorescence Control System (ECS), by ProSoCo, Inc. or equal. W M0810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegatell0-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.04220.doc 6/1112010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.04220 Concrete Masonry Units Page 4 of 7 C. Expansion Joint Filler: 7/16-inch Noise Stop Board, by Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp., or equal. D. Sealant Materials: As specified in Sub-Section 10.07900. E. Reinforcing Steel: Conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60. Detail and fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with the requirements for reinforcing steel in Sub-Section 10.03200 and as shown on the Drawings. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION ,r. A. Surface Preparation: 1. Coordinate the number, size, length, and location of reinforcing dowels +r between concrete work and masonry. 2. Clean reinforcement of mill scale, loose rust, oil, and coatings. 3. Sandblast concrete foundation or slab to expose aggregate. 4. Use bonding agent to bond the first layer of mortar setting bed to the concrete slab or foundation. B. Cut masonry units accurately and cleanly to size with diamond blades on power masonry saws. C. Special Units: Provide all required special units. Where special units are not available from the supplier, cut available units and fabricate required special shapes by epoxy bonding. D. Protection: Protect materials and completed work from cold and hot weather in accordance with building codes and the recommendations of the International Masonry Industry All Weather Council (IMIAWC): Recommended Practices and w Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCING A. Conform to the requirements for reinforcing steel in Sub-Section 10.03200. B. Anchor reinforcing bars in straight alignment and secure against displacement with metal positioners spaced not further apart than 200 bar diameters. C. Lap reinforcing steel 48 bar diameters minimum at splices. Stagger splices. D. Tie at intersections using 16-gauge annealed wire. E. Provide %-inch minimum clear distance between masonry and reinforcing. F. When a foundation dowel does not line up with the vertical core to be reinforced, add a full height reinforcing bar matching those used in other vertical cores. Set an additional dowel in the vertical core originally intended to be reinforced by drilling a hole in the concrete foundation or slab and setting a rebar in epoxy. Consult + Engineer for requirements for dowel size, length, location, and.embedment. a* W:120D810897003_City-of-Renton Sionegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.04220.doc 6/11/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.04220 as Concrete Masonry Units Page 5 of 7 ON 3.03 CONSTRUCTION A. General: 10 1. Install work plumb, level, and of correct dimensions and location. 2. Lay block in running bond. 3. Install reinforcing as specified and/or shown. 4. Concrete masonry units shall not be wetted. Lay masonry units so the vertical cells line up and are not obstructed by excess mortar. 5. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings provide additional vertical reinforcing bar at every corner and each side of every wall opening. 6. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings construct horizontal bond beams reinforced with one bar at the top and bottom of walls and at intermediate locations where shown, but not farther apart than 2'-0". 7. Construct bond beams over all openings reinforced as shown. 8. Set units with joints straight and uniform in width. 9. Fully bed webs and cross walls forming such cells in mortar to prevent leakage of grout. 10. Grout all cells. as B. Cleanouts: 1. Provide cleanout openings in the bottom course of cells containing vertical reinforcing. Spacing of cleanout openings shall not exceed 2'-8". Il 2. Locate cleanouts on the inside face of the exterior walls; seal cleanouts with masonry units after inspection and before grouting. 3. Use a high-pressure jet stream of water to remove mortar fins and any foreign matter from the grout space. 4. Cleanouts may be eliminated if grout pour height is reduced to a maximum of 2'-0". C. Joints: 1. Set units with 3/8-inch-thick mortar joints. Compress partially set mortar with a convex tool to produce a concave, dense, and smooth joint surface. 2. Butter head joints solid for the thickness of the face shell so that there are no voids between abutting faces. Set units in bed joints that are filled solid with mortar for the thickness of the face shell. Remove mortar fins that project more W than 3/8-inch into the grout cell. 3. If a unit is repositioned after placing, it shall be completely removed, cleaned and reset in fresh mortar. wr 4. Set lintels, capping units, and bearing plates in a full bed of mortar. 5. Locate control joints as shown on the Drawings or at 20'-0" maximum spacing where not shown but not less than 2'-0" from a jamb or opening. 6. Place bond beam reinforcing continuous through expansion and control joints, wrapping bars with 1/8-inch thick bond breaking tape 2'-0" both sides of joint. Do not splice bond beam reinforcing within 6'-0" of an expansion or control joint. 7. Apply sealant as specified in Sub-Section 10.07900. D. Grouting: 1. Limit maximum height of grout pour to 8'-0" unless otherwise favorably reviewed by the Engineer. W:1200M0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegatel10-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun20IM10.04220.doc 611 112 01 0 so WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.04220 Concrete Masonry Units Page 6 of 7 2. Place grout in the reinforced hollow concrete block wall after the units have been set for at least 24 hours. 3. Place grout using a method to avoid segregation. r„ 4. Fill all cells solid with grout. Consolidate grout by mechanical vibration. 5. Allow sufficient time between pours of two consecutive lifts of grout for the grout to consolidate and settle, and for absorption of excess moisture. The time between grout lifts shall be at least 1 hour. 6. Consolidation of the succeeding grout lift and the reconsolidation of the previous grout lift may be done in the same operation. Reconsolidate the last lift of a grout pour in a separate and distinct operation. 7. If grouting is done in multiple lifts stop the top surface of the grout of each lift 1-1/2 inches below a mortar joint, except at the top of a wall. When grouting bond beams stop the grout pour 1/2-inch below the top of the masonry unit. 8. Remove unused grout within 90 minutes after addition of mixing water. E. Interface with Other Work: 1. All embedded items (bolts, etc.) shall be secured in place prior to grouting. Provide a minimum of 1-inch grout around all bolts in masonry. Embed all anchors, ties, and sleeves required to accommodate the work of others. Build in or embed other work required to be built into masonry. 2. At openings for ducts, pipes and conduit built into masonry walls, cut to form fractional units. err F. Site Tolerances: 1. All vertical wall reinforcement placed in a direction perpendicular to the wall plane shall be placed within a tolerance of±1/2 inch. 2. All longitudinal reinforcement shall be placed within a tolerance of±2 inches. 3. Lay masonry plumb, true to line with courses level. Keep bond pattern plumb throughout. Lay masonry within Y-inch tolerance in 10-feet maximum variation in plumb in the lines and surfaces of columns and walls and in the flutes and surfaces of fluted or split face blocks. *W 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Remove from exposed surfaces surplus mortar, grout, foreign material, and stains. ■ B. Replace unevenly laid units. ON C. Replace chipped or broken masonry units. D. Point holes or defective mortar joints in exposed masonry and cut-out and re-point ON defective joints. Repoint cracks in mortar joints with a pointing mortar. E. Repair cracks wider than 4 mils. 1w 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: For each 5,000 square feet of wall area, three units are to be tested. "' Test results must comply with IBC Table 2105.2.2.1.2. Submit test results for mortar and grout in accordance with Sub-Section 10.04050. yyy W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110,01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.04220.doc 6/1112010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.04220 Concrete Masonry Units Page 7 of 7 B. Inspection: Provide inspection during preparation and taking of test specimens, foundation surfaces and rebar placement, grout space prior to grouting, and grouting operations, protection of masonry assemblage. All masonry work is to be continuously inspected during laying and grouting operations. Submit inspection reports for all work. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean down all masonry by scrubbing with water, masonry cleaner and bristle brushes. Do not clean with muriatic acid. Do not use high pressure cleaning equipment. Ant B. Clean efflorescence from masonry with specified cleaner in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Cure mortar joints by keeping masonry units and joints damp for ten days after laying units by applying a very fine water mist spray and covering work with polyethylene sheeting. B. When the possibility of rain occurs, cover the tops of walls exposed to the weather, and concrete masonry units with sheets of polyethylene film. 3.08 APPLICATION OF PENETRATING MASONRY SEALER A. Apply sealer under the supervision of the sealer manufacturer's representative. ' B. Apply sealer after the grouted masonry has cured at least 28 days, and after the masonry has been cleaned. C. Spray-apply sealer using airless spray equipment with recirculating type pump and perforated T-bar applicator recommended by the sealer manufacturer. DO NOT to USE pressure pot spray equipment. Operate at lowest possible pressures, 20 psi maximum. Do not allow fogging or bounce-off except on tension break coat. D. Protect surfaces, which are not to be coated. E. Apply sealer material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The masonry surface must appear uniformly wet, for each coat, for from 2 to 5 hours after application. 1. Rate of Application: Coverage as recommended by the manufacturer for porous concrete block but do not cover in excess of 40 square feet per gallon for the first.coat and 70 square feet per gallon for the second coat. . 2. First Coat: Apply the first coat in two passes: the first pass, a light spray to, break surface tension-, the second pass, a full flood coat applied in an overlapping pattern producing a 12-inch rundown. 3. Second Coat- After 48 hours, apply a flood coat in an overlapping pattern producing a 12-inch rundown. END OF SUB-SECTION Irl W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Slonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun20100 0.04220.doc 6/11/2010 r WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05090 Structural Metal Fasteners Page 1 of 9 rrr SUB-SECTION 10.05090 STRUCTURAL METAL FASTENERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: ► 1. All anchors, including mechanical and adhesive anchors, adhesive rebar dowels, eye bolts, turnbuckles, cable clamps, bolts, nuts, washers, inserts, and other metal fasteners not specified elsewhere. wr B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.03200: Reinforcing Steel ow 2. Sub-Section 10.03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete 3. Sub-Section 10.05100: Structural Metal Framing 4. Sub-Section 10.05500: Metal Fabrications (Miscellaneous Metals) ow 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction Specifications: d B. Research Council on Structural Connections: 1. RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, 2004 4W C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) aw D. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI B18-2-1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws 2. ANSI B18-2-2 Square and Hex Nuts 3. ANSI B18-21-1 Lock Washers 4. ANSI B18-22-1 Plain Washers E. ASTM International (ASTM) Standard Specifications: 1. ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 2. ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 3. ASTM A325 Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat-Treated 4. ASTM A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products 5. ASTM A500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 6. ASTM A525 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process wr 7. ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts 8. ASTM B633 Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel 9. ASTM E8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials 10. ASTM F436 Hardened Steel Washers 11. ASTM F844 Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use W:1200810897003_C4-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100°/,_Specs_Jun2010110.05090-STRUCTURAL FASTENERS.doc WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05090 Structural Metal Fasteners Page 2 of 9 12. ASTM F959 Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicator for Use " with Structural Fasteners 13. ASTM F1554 Anchors Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength F. International Code Council (ICC) 1. Evaluation Service Reports 2. AC 193 Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements 3. AC 308 Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements 4W G. International Building Code (IBC) 2006 Edition with Amendments adopted by the Washington State Building Code Council 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Sub-Section 10.01300. B. Product Data: 1. Adhesive anchors, reinforcing steel dowels and expansion anchors. +rr 2. Insulation between dissimilar metals. C. Samples: Manufacturer's latest standard product: Specify special or unique products. D. ICC Evaluation Service Reports for all anchors submitted demonstrating compliance with IBC and ICC AC 193 or 308 for Mechanical or Adhesive anchors respectively. E. List of all anchors to be used including: 1. Location, diameter, number and length of anchors 2. Testing plan for anchors, including percentage of anchors to be tested and allowable loads for anchors and testing loads. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. Furnish materials and fabricated items from an established and reputable manufacturer or supplier. 2. Supply all new materials and fabricated items made from first class ingredients and construction and guaranteed to perform the service required. B. Codes and Standards: 1. Bolting: a. General: AISC Specifications. C. Tests: 1. General: The Contractor will provide Special Inspection, defined by IBC Chapter 17. The Contractor will provide and pay for Special inspection for mechanical expansion and adhesive anchoring systems as required by ICC-ES. 2. Mechanical expansion and adhesive anchoring systems: a. Test required anchors to twice the allowable load for the anchor, or 0.5 times the maximum strength design (ultimate) load of the anchor. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngOesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.05090-STRUCTURAL FASTENERS.doc WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05090 Structural Metal Fasteners Page 3 of 9 b. Expansion and adhesive anchors shall be tested as follows: 1) Test 10% of anchors used for sill plate bolting applications 2) Test 50% of anchors used for non-structural applications, such as trt equipment anchorage. 3) Test 100% of anchors for applications not listed above. c. Visual inspection of layout including horizontal location, minimum embedment, minimum cover, minimum spacing, and minimum edge distance. d. Test mechanical expansion anchors by any method that will effectively measure the tension in the anchor, such as direct pull with a hydraulic jack, calibrated spring loaded devices, or a calibrated torque wrench. Displacement controlled anchors shall not be tested using a torque wrench. e. The allowable load shall be determined based on the anchor manufacturer's published literature and shall be the allowable load for the entire installation, including edge distance and spacing reductions. ow D. Additional Tests: Provide and pay for all necessary additional tests made on welds or bolts required to repair or replace faulty work performed during the original fabrication. 1W 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle, ship, and store material in a manner that will prevent distortion, rust, damage to the shop coat or any other damage. B. Store material in a clean, properly drained location out of contact with the ground. C. Ensure that dissimilar metals are not in contact with each other. + D. Replace or repair all damaged material in an approved manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL FASTENERS s A. General 1. For buried, submerged, or conditions where anchors or fasteners will be continuously or intermittently wet, except where otherwise shown or specified, �. all bolts, anchor bolts, mechanical anchors, adhesive anchors, washers, and nuts shall be 316 stainless steel . 2. For exterior or exposed conditions provide 316 stainless steel except where so otherwise shown or specified. 3. For all other exposure conditions provide hot dipped galvanized materials, except where otherwise shown or specified. 10 B . Bolting — Steel 1. Bolts: High Strength Bolts: ASTM 325, heavy hex, Type 1 (High Strength .�. Bolts) OR ASTM A307, Grade A (Regular Hexagon Bolts) 2. Nuts: ASTM A563, heavy hex, Grade DH (High Strength Nuts) OR ASTM A563, Grade A (Regular Hexagon Nuts) w till' W:1200 810 8 9 7 0 03 City-of-Renton Stonegatel10-EngDesignl10.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.05090-STRUCTURAL FASTENERS.doc WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05090 Structural Metal Fasteners Page 4 of 9 3. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened (High Strength Bolt Washers) or ASTM F 844 (Regular Bolt Circular Washers). 4. Lock Washers: ANSI B18.21.1 5. High Strength Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F959. Al 6. Dimensional Requirements: a. Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. b. Nuts: ANSI B18.2.2. C. Bolting — Stainless Steel 1. Stainless Steel Bolts: AISI 316. ASTM A193 or F593.18-8 material is not acceptable. " 2. Stainless Steel Nuts: ASTM A194 or F594. 3. Washers: AISI 316 washers meeting the dimensional requirements of ASTM F436 4. Dimensional Requirements: a. Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. b. Nuts: ANSI B18.2.2. D. Cast-in-Place Anchor Bolts 1. Headed Anchors: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, unless Grade 55 or 105 is shown on Drawings. High Strength anchors on Drawings shall be Grade 55 minimum. 2. Threaded and Nutted Anchors: ASTM F1554, Grade 36 with threaded ends and double hex nuts at the anchored end, or with washer between anchoring nuts if shown on the drawings. Use heavy hex nuts for rods 1%-inch-diameter or greater. Provide Grade 55 or 105 if shown on the Drawings and use heavy hex nuts. High Strength anchors on Drawings shall be Grade 55 minimum. 3. Welded Headed Studs or Welded Hooked Studs: AWS D1.1, Grade B, fut = 60 ksi, fy = 50 ksi. 4. Hooked Anchors (J and L Bolts): Are not allowed unless specifically shown on the Drawings as they do not provide equivalent performance. If shown, provide ASTM F1554, Grade 36, unless Grade 55 or 105 is shown on Drawings. High Strength anchors on Drawings shall be Grade 55 minimum. 5. Hooked anchor bolts shall not be used in concrete masonry unit construction. 6. Provide minimum embedment shown on the Drawings, or a minimum of eight bolt diameters. E. Mechanical Anchoring Systems (friction anchors are not acceptable) 1. Mechanical Undercut Anchoring Systems (required for overhead applications) - a. Anchor: Undercut anchor shall be of an undercut style with brazed tungsten carbides on the embedded end that perform the self-undercutting process. b. Carbon Steel Bolt and Sleeve: 1) Bolt: ISO 898, class 8.8, or SAE Grade 5. 2) Sleeve: AISI 1010. 2) Nuts: ASTM A563 Grade A and meeting the dimensional requirements of ANSI B18.2.2. 3) Washers: SAE 1005-1033 or AISI 1040 and meeting the dimensional requirements of ANSI B18.2.2 Type A Plain. 4) Plating: Zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633, SC1, Type III Fe/Zn 5. 1rr c. Stainless Steel Bolt and Sleeve: 1) Bolt: AISI 316 or 316Ti. 2) Sleeve: AISI 316 or 316Ti or Type 304 stainless steel. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.05090-STRUCTURAL FASTENERS.doc WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05090 Structural Metal Fasteners Page 5 of 9 3) Nuts: DIN 934, grade 8. 4) Washers: DIN 6796 or Type 18-8 stainless steel. d. Submit a product evaluation report by ICC-ES showing Cracked Concrete a. testing compliance perA.C.193. e. Provide embedment depth, edge distance, and anchor spacing as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for published allowable loads. f. Manufacturer: Hilti, Inc. HDA Undercut Anchor, Simpson Torq-Cut (pending ICC approval) or equal. 2. Mechanical Expansion Anchoring Systems a. Anchor: Expansion anchor shall be preassembled expanding sleeve or wedge type with a single piece three section wedge. Anchors shall meet the description of Federal Specification A-A 1923A or A-A 1922A, Type 4. Anchor will bear a length identification code that is visible after installation. Provide hex head stud style unless flat or rod coupler styles are noted on Drawings. b. Carbon Steel Anchors: 1) Anchor Body: ASTM A510 or AISI 1018 or AISI 121-14 or SAE J403. 2) Nuts: ASTM A563 Grade A and meeting the dimensional requirements of ANSI B18.2.2. 3) Washers: SAE 1005-1033 or ASTM F844 and meeting the dimensional requirements of ANSI B18.2.2 Type A Plain. 4) Plating: Zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633, SC1, Type III �i. Fe/Zn 5. c. Stainless Steel Anchors: 1) Anchor Body and Wedges: ASTM A276 or ASTM A493 with chemical composition of either AISI 304 or 316 or 316L. 2) Nuts: ASTM F594 with chemical composition of either AISI 304 or 316 or 316L. 3) Washers: ASTM A240 with chemical composition of either AISI 304 or 316 or 316L. d. Submit a product evaluation report by ICC-ES showing Cracked Concrete testing compliance per A.C. 193. e. Provide embedment depth, edge distance, and anchor spacing as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for published allowable loads. f. Manufacturer: Hilti, Inc. Kwik Bolt TZ, Simpson Strong-Bolt, Powers Fasteners, Power-Stud +SD1 or Power-Stud +SD2, or equal. F. Adhesive Anchoring Systems 1. Adhesive (Epoxy) Injection Anchoring Systems a. Adhesive: Adhesive consisting of two-component epoxy base resin and hardener material meeting the requirements of ASTM C-881 Types I and IV, Grade 3, Class C. The adhesive shall be supplied in manufacturer's standard side-by-side cartridge and dispensed through a static-mixing nozzle supplied by the manufacturer. b. Anchor Rod, Reinforcing Steel or Insert: Threaded Rod or insert with chamfered threaded end for ease of starting nut on one end and 45 degree chisel or cut point on opposite end (where insert is required by manufacturer). Furnish nuts and washers to meet the requirements of the rod or insert. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings provide hot dip galvanize rods or inserts or stainless steel. Stainless steel rods or inserts "W W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton Stonegate\10-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.05090-STRUCTURAL FASTENERS.doc WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05090 Structural Metal Fasteners Page 6 of 9 shall be provided in buried or submerged locations. Reinforcing Steel shall meet the requirements of Section 10.03200. All Reinforcing Steel indicated to be embedded in existing concrete shall be embedded using the epoxy injection systems. 1) ASTM A36 or A307 (standard carbon steel anchor). 2) ASTM A193 Grade B7 (high strength carbon steel anchor). 3) Reinforcing bars as specified in Section 10.03200 with chisel or cut point. 4) AISI 304/ASTM A276 or AISI 316UASTM A276 stainless steel meeting the mechanical requirements of ASTM F-593 (Condition CW). c. Submit a product evaluation report by ICC-ES showing Cracked Concrete testing compliance per A.C. 308. d. Provide embedment depth, edge distance, and anchor spacing as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations W for published allowable loads. e. For submerged application in potable water provide NSF/ANSI STD 61 certification. f. Manufacturer: Hilti HIT RE 500-SD Epoxy Anchoring System, Simpson Strong-Tie SET-XP Epoxy, or equal. For materials with voids and holes like hollow block provide Simpson Strong-Tie ETS screens used with SET Epoxy, or equal. 2. Adhesive (Ester) Injection Anchoring Systems (for use in CMU only) a. Adhesive: Adhesive consisting of methacrylate resin or acrylic based adhesive, hardener, cement and water. The injectionable adhesive shall consist of two components and a static mixing nozzle as recommended by the manufacturer. b. Anchor Rod or Insert: Threaded Rod or insert with chamfered threaded end "r for ease of starting nut on one end and 45 degree chisel or cut point on opposite end (where insert is required by manufacturer). Furnish nuts and washers to meet the requirements of the rod or insert. Unless noted to otherwise on the drawings provide hot dip galvanized rods or inserts or stainless steel. Stainless steel rods or inserts shall be provided in buried or submerged locations. 1) ASTM A36 or A307 (standard carbon steel anchor). 2) ASTM A193 Grade B7 (high strength carbon steel anchor). 3) Reinforcing bars as specified in Section 10.03200 with chisel or cut point. 4) AISI 304/ASTM A276 or AISI 316UASTM A276 stainless steel meeting the mechanical requirements of ASTM F-593 (Condition CW). c. Submit a product evaluation report by ICC-ES with seismic approvals. d. Provide embedment depth, edge distance, and anchor spacing as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for published allowable loads. e. For submerged application in potable water provide NSF/ANSI STD 61 certification. f. Manufacturer: Hilti HIT HY 150 MAX Injection Adhesive Anchor, Simpson Strong-Tie SET, or equal. For materials with voids and holes like hollow block provide Hilti HIT HY 20 Injection Adhesive Anchor for Masonry Construction, Simpson Strong-Tie Acrylic-Tie with ATS screens, or equal. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. All metal fasteners not specified elsewhere. T W:\200810897003_City-o4Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100°/_Specs_Jun2010110.05090-STRUCTURAL FASTENERS.doc WVVP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05090 Structural Metal Fasteners Page 7 of 9 2.03 GALVANIZING A. Hot-dip galvanize all exterior and exposed steel items, except when specified otherwise. 1. Steel hardware, nuts, bolts, washers, anchors, and threaded rods: ASTM A153. 2. Where specified, electroplate nuts, bolts and washers with zinc coating of 0.001-inch minimum thickness in accordance with ASTM B633 Class SC4. Where specified, provide a 4-mil DFT coating of zinc silicate. 3. Size nuts so that they screw on threaded bolts readily after galvanizing or coating. B. Repair Materials: Gal-Viz by Thermacote Welco, Pasadena, CA; ReGaly by Rotometals, Inc., San Francisco, CA; or equal. 2.04 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. See Sub-Section 10.03300. wr PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Structural Steel Work: 1. Connections: a. Provide anchor bolts and other connections between structural steel and foundations. b. Set all anchor bolts by template, with provisions to hold bolts rigid and in correct position with respect to plan and elevation. wr1 c. Install adhesive and expansion anchorages by personnel with satisfactory previous experience using the same Products, following the manufacturer's recommendations and in compliance with the latest ICC-ES report. d. Detail any undesigned connections in accordance with the AISC Specification. e. Do not increase any hole diameter or slot length without the Engineer's approval. f. Washers: 1) Provide washers for slotted holes. Washers shall be hardened for high-strength bolts (fy > 36 ksi) and shall be 3/8-thick plate washer for long-slotted holes. 2) Provide washers under the turned element for bolts installed with the Calibrated Wrench Pretensioning method. AS 3) Provide washers for bolts installed with the Direct-Tension-Indicator Pretensioning method. 2. Install work anchored in sleeves set in concrete with non-metallic non-shrink grout. Allow a 1/4-inch minimum clearance between items anchored and the sleeve. 3. Where metal is fastened to concrete, make the connections by anchor bolts, or by anchors embedded in concrete, such as adhesive, or expansion anchors. 4. Provide grout pads below base and bearing plates of non-shrink non-metallic grout having a minimum thickness of 3/4-inch unless otherwise noted. Do not bear directly on concrete slabs or equipment bases. W:k200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-SpecsN00%_Specs_Jun2010110.05090-STRUCTURALFASTENERS.doc WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05090 Structural Metal Fasteners Page 8 of 9 5. Provide leveling nuts on anchor bolts, below base plates, and adjust prior to W grouting. B. Mechanical Anchoring Systems: Mechanical anchoring systems shall be installed in accordance with the ICC-ES Evaluation Report for the specific anchor. 1. Mechanical Undercut Anchoring Systems (required for overhead applications) a. Drill a hole in the base material using drill bit diameter and embedment depth in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. CAUTION: Oversized holes in the base material will reduce the anchor's load capacity and cannot be used. b. Remove dust from holes with compressed air. c. Assemble the anchor with the nut and washer so the top of the nut is flush with the top of the anchor. d. Place the anchor in the fixture and drive into the hole until washer and nut are tight against the fixture. e. Install nut and washer and tighten to the required installation torque. 2. Mechanical Expansion Anchoring Systems a. Drill a hole in the base material using drill bit diameter and embedment depth in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. CAUTION: Oversized holes in the base material will reduce the anchor's load capacity and cannot be used. b. Remove dust from holes with compressed air. c. Assemble the anchor with the nut and washer so the top of the nut is flush with the top of the anchor. d. Place the anchor in the fixture and drive into the hole until washer and nut are tight against the fixture. e. Install nut and washer and tighten to the required installation torque. C. Adhesive Anchoring Systems: Adhesive anchoring systems shall be installed in accordance with the ICC-ES Evaluation Report for the specific anchor. Adhesive + anchoring systems are not allowed in overhead applications. 1. Adhesive (Ester or Epoxy) Injection Anchoring Systems a. Drill a hole to the specified depth and diameter. b. Clean hole with a wire brush. Remove dust from holes with oil-free compressed air. Jetting holes with water is not permitted. c. Install adhesives only in clean holes free of standing water. d. Dispense portion of adhesive off to the side to check for proper mixture, and consistent color before using. e. Fill hole halfway to 2/3rds, starting from bottom of hole to prevent air pockets. Withdraw nozzle as hole fills up. f. Substrate temperature should be kept above the minimum allowed temperature as specified by the manufacturer for the entire curing process. g.' Insert anchor, turning slowly until the anchor contacts the bottom of the hole. Do not disturb anchor during the specified cure time. D. Repair of Connections: The Contractor shall pay for all necessary additional tests made on weld or bolts required to repair or replace faulty work performed during the original fabrication or during erection. air W:k2008W897003 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun20lD110.05090-STRUCTURALFASTENERS.doc lot r WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05090 Structural Metal Fasteners Page 9 of 9 r E. Repair of Galvanized Coating: 1. Repair surfaces damaged by cutting or welding by the heated repair method. Repair handrails or other surfaces that will not be painted and that are field welded or damaged by the heated galvanize repair method. 2. Heat substrate to 600°F, or apply hot process touch-up material right after welding before metal has cooled below 600°F. 3. Rub bar of specified galvanize repair material over surface of hot substrate to apply a uniform coating of zinc. Wire brush hot coating with a clean wire brush to smooth out and bond zinc coating to substrate to apply a uniform coating of zinc. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Mechanical and Adhesive Anchoring Systems: 1. Anchoring systems shall be installed in accordance with the ICC-ES Evaluation Report for the specific anchor. All anchors shall be tested in accordance with dw paragraph 1.04C. 2. Set torque-controlled expansion-type anchors to the recommended installation torque using a calibrated torque wrench. Following attainment of 10% of the wr specified torque, 100% of the specified torque shall be reached within 7 or fewer complete turns of the nut. If the specified torque is not achieved within the required number of turns, the anchor shall be removed or abandoned. 3. Set displacement-controlled expansion-type anchors to the recommended displacement. If the concrete cracks during installation of the anchor, the anchor shall be removed or abandoned. 4. Anchors should exhibit no discernable movement during load testing. 1 'l 5. Holes drilled for anchors that do not set properly or fail in a tension test may not be reused, and shall be filled with non-shrink grout. B. Erection Sequence: Verify each stage is completed before proceeding to the next. C. Tolerances: AISC Standard Practice. END OF SUB-SECTION d r1 +r W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010t10.05090-STRUCTURAL FASTENERS.doc WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05100 Structural Metal Framing Page 1 of 9 irr SUB-SECTION 10.05100 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL rri 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. Structural steel, stainless steel or aluminum, such as beams, channels, angles, tees, bars, pipe, tubing and plates (connection and base plates). 2. Fabricated metal items, such as pipe supports, brackets, hangers, equipment supports, and lift hooks. 3. All anchors, eye bolts, turnbuckles, cable clamps, bolts, nuts, washers, inserts, and other metal items not specified elsewhere. 4. All structural metal framing. B. Related Sub-Sections: + 1. Sub Section 10.05090: Structural Fasteners 1. Sub-Section 10.05500: Metal Fabrications 2. Sub-Section 10.05722: Aluminum Handrails, Guardrails, and Related Items 3. Sub-Section 10.06600: Fiberglass Fabrications 1.02 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association: 1. AA Manual Aluminum Design Manual B. American Institute of Steel Construction Specifications: 1. AISC Specification Structural Steel Buildings, Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design 2. AISC A325 Joints Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts 3. AISC Standard 2000 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges 4. AISC Manual LRFD Manual of Steel Construction , 3 I Edition lit C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) D. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI B18-2-1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws 2. ANSI B18-2-2 Square and Hex Nuts 3. ANSI B18-21-1 Lock Washers 4. ANSI B18-22-1 Plain Washers 5. ANSI H35-1 Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Aluminum E. ASTM International (ASTM) Standard Specifications: 1. ASTM A36 Structural Steel 2. ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegatel10-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_3un2010110.05100.doc 6/14/2010 s WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05100 Structural Metal Framing Page 2 of 9 3. ASTM A108 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality W& 4. ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 5. ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 6. ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs 60,000 psi Tensile Strength 7. ASTM A325 Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat-Treated 8. ASTM A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of r Steel Products 9. ASTM A500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 10. ASTM A525 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process " 11. ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts 12. ASTM A992 Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing 13. ASTM B633 Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel 14. ASTM C827 Test Method for Early Volume Change of Cementitious Mixtures wr 15. ASTM C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink) 16. ASTM E8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials 17. ASTM E165 Practice for Liquid Penetrant Inspection 18. ASTM E709 Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination 19. ASTM F436 Hardened Steel Washers 20. ASTM F541 Alloy Steel Eyebolts 21. ASTM F844 Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use 22. ASTM F959 Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicator for Use with Structural Fasteners 23. ASTM F1145 Turnbuckles, Swaged, Welded, Forged 24. ASTM F1554 Anchors Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength F. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel 2. AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code -Aluminum 3. AWS D10.4 Recommended Practices for Welding Austenitic Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing 4. AWS A5.1 Mild Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes 5. AWS A5.3 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Electrodes for Shielded Metal dw Arc Welding 6. AWS A5.4 Covered Corrosion-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Welding Electrodes AW 7. AWS A5.5 Low Alloy Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes 8. AWS A5.9 Corrosion-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Base and Composite Metal Cored and Stranded Welding Electrodes an and Welding Rods 9. AWS A5.10 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Bare Welding Rods and Electrodes G. International Code Council H. International Building Code (IBC) wr W:12 0 0 8108 9 7 0 03 City-of-Renton-Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_SpeCs_Jun2010110.05100.doc � 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05100 Structural Metal Framing Page 3 of 9 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. B. Product Data: 1. Hangers, pipe and equipment supports (shelf items). 2. Stainless steel and aluminum items (not fabricated). 3. Non-shrink grout. 4. Certified mill test results on structural metals. 5. Electrode manufacturer's data. 6. Insulation between dissimilar metals. C. Shop and Erection Drawings: 1. Structural framing. 2. Field assembly or erection sequence. st D. Quality Assurance: 1. Welder performance qualification test records "welders certification". 2. Written Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) in accordance with AWS D1.1 requirements for each different welded joint proposed for use whether prequalified or qualified by testing. 3. Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) in accordance with AWS 1.1 for all procedures qualified by testing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. Furnish materials and fabricated items from an established and reputable 11 manufacturer or supplier. 2. Supply all new materials and fabricated items made from first class ingredients and construction and guaranteed to perform the service required. 3. The Contractor is responsible for preparing and submitting written Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs). WPSs for each joint type shall indicate proper AWS qualification and be available where welding is performed. WPSs shall be included with any shop drawings referencing welds. WPSs shall include the manufacturer and specific electrode. B. Codes and Standards- 1. tandards:1. Metalwork: a. Steel: AISC Specification. 2. Welding.- a. Steel: AWS D1.1. b. Stainless Steel: AWS D10.4. 3. Welders: a. Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1 for each process, position, and joint configuration. b. All welding operators are subject to examination for requalification at any time during the progress of the work. rr1 W:1200810897003 City-ot-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.05100.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05100 Structural Metal Framing Page 4 of 9 C. Tests: 1. General.- The Owner will provide Special Inspection, defined by IBC Section 1704, for welding and high-strength bolting. Visual welding inspection and nondestructive testing (NDT) shall be conducted in accordance with a written practice by personnel qualified in accordance with AISC 341 Appendix W. 2. Weld Tests: By a testing laboratory, selected by Engineer and paid by Owner. a. Visual inspection: 1) Check fit-up of joint materials. Verify satisfactory alignment of material. Verify gaps and bevels of penetration welds. 2) Check during welding. Verify satisfactory technique is used. 3) Check after welding completed and cleaned by wire brush or chipping hammer. 4) Inspect with magnification when necessary and under strong, adequate light. 5) . Inspect for the following defects: a) Surface cracking. b) Porosity. c) Excessive roughness. d) Unfilled craters. e) Gas pockets. f) Undercuts. g) Overlaps. h) Size. i) Insufficient throat and concavity. b. Nondestructive testing: Ultrasonic testing, except where not feasible due to the type or location of the weld. Magnetic particle, liquid penetrant, or radiograph tests when ultrasonic testing is not feasible. 1) Ultrasonic inspection technique and standards: AWS D1.1 Part C. 2) Particle inspection method: ASTM E709. 3) Penetrant inspection method: ASTM E165. 4) Radiography tests: AWS D1.1, Part B. c. Extent of testing: 1) Visual inspection of all welds. 2) Measurement of weld profiles for 25% of all welds at random. 3) Magnetic particle examination or liquid penetrant examination performed on root pass and on finished welds for 25% of all shear plate, stiffener plate, column base plate, gusset plate, and r miscellaneous fillet welds. 4) Ultrasonic contact examination on all complete joint penetration (CJP) welds. See Drawings for CJP welded beam or girder to column moment connections. Defective welds shall be repaired and costs of retesting defective welds shall be borne by the Contractor. w D. Additional Tests: Provide and pay for all necessary additional tests made on welds or bolts required to repair or replace faulty work performed during the original fabrication. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle, ship and store material in a manner that will prevent distortion, rust, damage to the shop coat or any other damage. slii W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegale110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—Specs_Jun2010110.O5100.doc 6/14/2010 a WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05100 Structural Metal Framing Page 5 of 9 B. Store material in a clean, properly drained location out of contact with the ground. at C. Ensure that dissimilar metals are not in contact with each other. D. Replace or repair all damaged material in an approved manner. it PART 2 - PRODUCTS ot 2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS we A. M-, S-, and HP-Shapes and Channels, Angles, Structural Tees, Plates and Similar Items: ASTM A36, fy = 36 ksi, f,, = 58 ksi. Plates connecting structural members shall meet or exceed the properties of the lesser strength of connected members. All plates used for connections in braced frames or moment frames shall be at least ASTM A572 Grade 50. . wr 2.02 STAINLESS STEEL ARTICLES A. Material: AISI Type 304, unless Type 316 is specifically specified. B. Channels, Angles, and Structural Tees: ASTM A276. w 2.03 FABRICATED ALUMINUM ITEMS A. Material: ANSI H35-1 alloy and temper 6061-T6. B. Surfaces in Contact With Concrete or Masonry: Shop prime with a zinc chromate coating. C. Bolted Connections: Provide stainless steel fasteners. 2.04 METAL FASTENINGS " A. See Section 10.05090. 2.05 WELDING ELECTRODES, FILLER METALS A. Steel: AWS A5.1 or A5.5, E70XX category. B. Stainless Steel: AWS A5.4 or A5.9. C. Aluminum: AWS A5.3 or A5.10. D. For welding dissimilar metals, submit the appropriate electrodes for Product Review. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010\10,051 OO.doc 6/1412010 ` wrr WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05100 Structural Metal Framing Page 6 of 9 2.06 GALVANIZING A. Hot-dip galvanize all exterior and exposed steel items, except when specified otherwise. 1. Products fabricated from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, plates, bars ► and strip 1/8-inch-thick or heavier: ASTM A123. 2. Structural tubing and pipe: ASTM A53. 3. Steel hardware, nuts, bolts, washers, anchors, and threaded rods: ASTM A 153. 4. Where specified, electroplate nuts, bolts, and washers with zinc coating of 0.001-inch minimum thickness in accordance with ASTM B633 Class SC4. Where specified, provide a 4-mil DFT coating of zinc silicate. 5. Size nuts so that they screw on threaded bolts readily after galvanizing or coating. 6. Grind smooth fabricated items at welded joints, edges, and corners, and galvanize after fabrication. B. Repair Materials: Gal-Viz by Thermacote Welco, Pasadena, CA; ReGaly by Rotometals, Inc., San Francisco, CA; or equal. 2.07 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. ASTM C1107, Grade C (precision) with no shrinkage as measured by ASTM C827. Furnish a pre-mixed product consisting of properly proportioned amounts of non- metallic dimensionally stable material to which water is added. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Turnbuckles: ASTM F1145 and AISI C-1035. a+ir B. Eye Bolts and Eye Nuts: ASTM F541 and AISI C-1030. C. Clevises: AISI C-1035. ON D. Threaded Rods (Tie Rods): ASTM A36. E. Furnish all items required to complete the project, but not specified herein, not specified in Sub-Section 10.05500. 2.09 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel Work: Comply with the applicable provisions of the AISC Specification, the AISC Standard Practice and AWS D1.1. Weld only in accordance with favorably reviewed WPSs, which are to be available to welders and inspectors during the production process. Provide workmanship equal to standard commercial practice in modern structural shops. 1. Fabricate and assemble in the shop to the greatest extent possible, and deliver to the project as a unit ready for installation. Coordinate the work, making all provisions necessary for the passage of all applicable work into, and attachment to, the structures. Make joints carefully and neatly, with corners mitered and spliced, bolted, screwed, or welded together. W:12 0 0810 8 9 7 00 3 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs11o0%_Specs_Jun2010\10.05100.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05100 Structural Metal Framing Page 7 of 9 2. Make proper allowance for the expansion and contraction of the metals, and of the materials to which they are fastened. 3. Make completely watertight joints on exterior work. 4. Shape all members correctly, with no kinks, twists, dents, or other blemishes prior to erection. Evenly spring all curved work. 5. Make exposed edges free of burrs, sharp edges or corners. Make corners as rounded or chamfered. Grind exposed welds smooth when specified. 6. Include supplementary parts necessary to complete each item, even though such work may not be definitely specified. Provide all such miscellaneous metalwork required by the project in accordance with good accepted standard practice. 7. Shop prime all items that are not galvanized or epoxy coated, including connection angles, using material, which is compatible with the finish coat. Provide finish paint coats as specified in Sub-Section 10.09900. B. Stainless Steel Work: 1. Use the proper type of stainless steel electrodes or welding rods complying with AWS D10.4. Grind all welded joints smooth and polished, using wheels never used on carbon steel. Provide welds that eliminate injury to stainless steel parts in appearance, strength, and resistance to corrosion. 2. Remove by grinding and polishing, all scratches, marks, pits and other blemishes on exposed surfaces incurred during fabrication of the material, until the entire surface possesses the same finish as the adjacent work. C. Aluminum Work: 1. Comply with the applicable provisions of the AA Manual and AWS D1.2. 2. Back painting: When aluminum is in contact, such as with concrete, mortar, masonry, or adsorptive materials subject to wetting, including condensation, fit give the contact surfaces a brush coat of cut-back asphaltic, or coal tar paint. Submit paint for favorable review. D. Base and Bearing Plates: Furnish under all columns, pipe supports, including rack type, supports for tanks, equipment frames and cabinets, and similar items. Provide rounded or chamfered corners. E. Dissimilar Metals: Insulate the faying surfaces with a brush coat of cut-back asphaltic or coal tar paint or by gasketing. Submit for favorable review. st F. Metals in contact with cementitous or other material: Provide finish coating prior to erection. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Material Tests: Not required for materials identified with valid mill test records. 1. Unidentified materials: Test samples from each 20 tons of each material, or fraction thereof. Perform tension and bend tests, conforming to ASTM A370 for steel. Perform tension tests conforming to ASTM E8 for aluminum. 2. Do not provide unidentified stainless steel. 3. Testing laboratory: Selected by Engineer, to take samples and perform tests. Costs paid by Contractor. W:1200810897003—City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.05100.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05100 Structural Metal Framing Page 8 of 9 wr B. Welding: 1. Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1 for each process, position, and y" joint configuration. 2. Weld only in accordance with favorably reviewed WPSs, which are to be available to welders and inspectors during the production process. r C. Tolerances: AISC Standard Practice. D. Fabrication Tests: Standard and extent: See paragraph 1.04. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Structural Steel Work: 1. Erect members in accordance with the AISC Specification, and the AISC Standard Practice except as modified. 2. Incorrect fabrication or damaged members: a. When a condition exists whereby parts cannot be assembled or fitted properly as a result of errors in fabrication, or of deformation due to handling or transportation, report the condition immediately. The method of correction must be approved before any corrective work is done. Make the corrective work in the presence of the Engineer. b. Straighten plates and angles or other shapes using approved methods. c. Do not heat already heat-treated parts for straightening. 3. Connections: a. Provide anchor bolts and other connections between structural steel and foundations. See Specification Sub-Section 10.05090 for additional connection requirements. aw b. Set all anchor bolts by template, with provisions to hold bolts rigid and in correct position with respect to plan and elevation. c. Detail any undesigned connections in accordance with the AISC Specification d. Do not increase any hole diameter or slot length without the Engineer's approval. 4. Install work anchored in sleeves set in concrete with non-metallic non-shrink + + grout. Allow a 1/4-inch minimum clearance between items anchored and the sleeve. B. Welding: 1. Weld only in accordance with favorably reviewed WPSs, which are to be available to welders and inspectors during the production process. Perform all *K welding by the shielded electric arc method in accordance with AWS D1.1. 2. Repair and make additional inspections, at the Contractor's expense, of the weld areas which have been rejected as a result of inspection. Follow this da procedure until the welds are acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1 for each process, position, and joint configuration. ov W1200810897003 City-of-Renton—Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—Specs_Jun2010110.05100.doc 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05100 Structural Metal Framing Page 9 of 9 C. Repair of Connections: The Contractor shall pay for all necessary additional tests made on weld or bolts required to repair or replace faulty work performed during the original fabrication or during erection. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Welding: 1. Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1 for each process, position, and joint configuration. 2. The Owner's testing agency will inspect shop or field welding for conformance with AWS D1.1 requirements and will verify that welds are made in accordance with favorably reviewed WPSs. B. Erection Sequence: Verify each stage is completed before proceeding to the next. C. Tolerances: AISC Standard Practice. D. Erection Tests: Standard and extent: See Paragraph 1.04. END OF SUB-SECTION ri ot W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun201000.05100.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05500 Metal Fabrications (Miscellaneous Metal) Page 1 of 7 SUB-SECTION 10.05500 WN METAL FABRICATIONS (MISCELLANEOUS METAL) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY + A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. All metal fabrications and other miscellaneous metal items together with related accessory items and fasteners, including: a. Grating support angles. b. Steel angle edgers. c. Steel channel and angle door frames. d. Steel angle corner guards. e. Custom fabricated steel connectors for wood structural framing. f. Miscellaneous hot rolled structural members used to supplement, support, or strengthen wood framing light gauge steel framing or cold formed metal framing or to support hollow metal work. g. Pipe line marker posts. h. Steel fascias, angles, and trim exposed as part of the finished structure. i. All other metal fabrications and miscellaneous metal not covered under other sub-sections. B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub Section 10.05090: Structural Fasteners 1. Sub-Section 10.05100: Structural Metal Framing " 2. Sub-Section 10.06100: Rough Carpentry - manufactured framing clips for wood framing 3. Sub-Section 10.06600: Fiberglass Fabrications r�r 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. B18.23.1 Beveled Washers ,rr B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A36 Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2. A53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated .. Welded and Seamless 3. A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 4. A153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 5. A283 Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates 6. A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength 7. A500 Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes W:\2008Q897003_City-of-Renton Slonegate110-EngDesigW0.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun20lO110,05500.doc 6/14/2010 Wit WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05500 Metal Fabrications (Miscellaneous Metal) Page 2 of 7 8. A501 Specifications for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing 9. A653 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Gavannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 10. C595 Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cement 11. F844 Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use C. Publications of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 1. "Metal Product Outline; Division 5 Metal" 2. "Metal Stair Manual" 3. "Metal Finishes Manual" 4. "Pipe Railing Manual" 5. "Metal Bar Grating Manual" D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC), Volume 2. Standards for Surface Preparation are specified by SSPC followed by SP and a number indicating the specified type of surface preparation. E. International Building Code (IBC). F. International Code Council (ICC). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. B. Product Data: Fully describe every product proposed for use. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Show dimensions, finishes, joining, attachments, inserts, and relationship of work to adjoining construction. 2. Indicate all shop and erection details including cuts, copes, connections, holes, threaded fasteners, and welds. Indicate welds using AWS "Welding Symbols." ' 3. Show field measured dimensions of this and adjacent work and location of inserts on fabrication drawings. 4. Submit a full floor plan layout and details for all gratings and grating frames. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor's Qualifications: Welding procedures, welders, and welding operations shall be qualified for the type of work required in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following codes and reference standards unless higher standards are specified, shown, or required by applicable codes: 1. "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings," of American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), latest edition. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100% Specs_Jun2010110.05500.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05500 Metal Fabrications (Miscellaneous Metal) Page 3 of 7 2. Structural Welding Code of the American Welding Society, AWS D1.1, latest edition. 3. International Building Code (IBC), adopted edition, especially 1012, Handrails. 4. Stair, guardrail, and accessibility design requirements in IBC, OSHA, and the Federal Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). C. Testing: 1. Test materials in accordance with Sub-Section 10.05100. 2. Test welding in accordance with Sub-Section 10.05100. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver anchorage devices that will be embedded in the work of other trades in sufficient time to permit their timely installation. Provide proper setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation. B. Store materials above ground on platforms, skids or other supports. Store all fasteners and welding electrodes in a weathertight and dry location until ready for use. Store packaged materials in their original labeled containers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL ` A. Standard Structural Steel Shapes, Bars and Plates: ASTM A36. B. Architectural and Miscellaneous Steel Items: ASTM A283, Grade A. C. Steel Tubing.- ASTM A500, (cold formed) Grade A, or ASTM A501 (hot formed), welded or seamless. D. Aluminum: ASTM 8483, Alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T5 or T6. E. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A. F. Plain Washers: ASTM F844. G. Beveled Washers: ANSI B18.23.1. H. Anchorages to Concrete and Masonry: 1. Refer to Sub-Section 10.05100 for anchors carrying shear or tension loads 400 lbs. or more. 2. Provide cast-in-place, expansion or bonded anchorages with minimum size 3/8-inch-diameter, 3-inch embedment. 3. Provide a satisfactory evaluation report by ICC. 4. Do not load the anchorage in excess of half the ICC values without inspection by Engineer. 5. Material: Galvanized steel, as noted. 6. Do not use for loads in tension or withdrawal or for loads subject to vibration. n W1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—Specs_Jun2010110.05500.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05500 Metal Fabrications (Miscellaneous Metal) Page 4 of 7 I. Non-Shrink Grout: See Sub-Section 10.05100. J. Fusion Epoxy Coating: 1. Fusion epoxy coating material shall be 100% dry powder epoxy resin as manufactured by Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company "Scotchkote No. 203," Michigan Chrome and Chemical Company "Miccron No. 650," or equal. 2. Field touchup of the epoxy coating with Scotchkote No. 306, equivalent Miccron system, or equal, as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.02 GALVANIZING rw A. Hot-dip galvanize all exterior ferrous metal work and all interior ferrous metal work so noted. B. Hot-dip galvanize all sheet steel, plain or shaped in accordance with ASTM A653, G-90 Commercial Grade. C. Hot-dip galvanize all products fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip 1/8-inch thick or heavier, in accordance with ASTM A123. D. Hot-dip galvanize all steel hardware, nuts, bolts, washers, anchors, and threaded rods in accordance with ASTM A153. Size thread clearance to allow for galvanized coating; rerun threads after galvanizing, if required, to assure a smooth fit. 2.03 GALVANIZING REPAIR A. Repair damaged galvanizing by heated repair method. Repair materials: ReGaly by Rotometals, Inc., San Francisco, CA; or equal. Specifier knows of no equal. 1. Heat substrate to 600°F, or apply hot process touchup material right after welding before metal has cooled below 600°F. 2. Rub bar of specified galvanize repair material over surface of hot substrate to apply a uniform coating of zinc. Wire brush hot coating with a clean wire brush to smooth out and bond zinc coating to substrate. 2.04 SHOP PRIMING A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.09900 for surface preparation, pretreatment, primers, and application techniques. B. Apply one shop coat of rust inhibiting primer in accordance with Sub-Section 10.09900 to all steel fabrications not scheduled to be galvanized. 1. Apply two coats of primer to surfaces not in contact but inaccessible after assembly. 2.05 ISOLATION COATINGS A. Aluminum pigmented asphalt paint for aluminum in contact with other metals. B. Asphalt or bituminous mastic for aluminum in contact with concrete or plaster. 001 W:\2008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign\10.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.05500.doc - 6/14/2010 to WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05500 ®r Metal Fabrications (Miscellaneous Metal) Page 5 of 7 2.06 FABRICATIONS 1 A. Channel and Angle Door Frames: 1. Construct channel and angle door frames using hot-rolled steel channels and +rr bars or steel angles and bars. Provide single piece head members and jamb members without splices or joints. 2. Fabricate anchors from steel bars or plate, welded to frames. DO NOT USE welding studs (Nelson studs) to anchor members to concrete. 3. Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap frames to receive finish hardware. Coordinate detailing of frames with finish hardware requirements (Sub-Section 10.08700) prior to fabrication of frames. 4. Hot-dip galvanize all channel and angle door frames after fabrication. Retap screw holes after galvanizing. Miter weld and grind smooth door frame corners. Fabricate door frames too large to permit galvanizing as a single unit as separate head and jamb members with concealed bolted connections at top corners. 5. Deliver door frames as shop-fabricated single-piece units when possible. B. Steel Angle Edgers: Provide steel angle edgers detailed and sized as shown, with anchors welded to the angle. Galvanize after fabrication in place. Secure angle edgers that will be cast in concrete in the forms so that when the forms are stripped, the concrete and edgers will be flush. �.. C. Grating Support Frames: 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Provide grating support angles for all gratings. Fabricate grating support angles in complete, closed frames that will lie completely flat in a true plane. ` Install grating frames so they will support the grating with even, uniform, non- rattling bearing. 3. Design and fabricate grating frames as required to prevent twisting due to anylarge ratio of length to width. Restrict the length of each closed section of long narrow grating frames to 10 feet maximum. D. Stainless Steel Access Plate: Alloy 316 stainless steel plate and alloy 316 angle frame with stainless steel fasteners. rr„ E. Architectural Metal Fabrications: 1. Meet the highest standards of detailing, workmanship and finish intended for architectural metal work of an ornamental nature as used on institutional projects. 2. Grind all welds flush or to a smooth consistent radius fillet and sand with progressively finer grades of abrasive finishing with 80 grit. 3. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication. 2.07 ATTACHMENTS A. Metal Anchors: Provide metal anchors required to secure all frames and other items rigidly in place and detailed for installation into concrete forms prior to placing concrete. 4W Illf W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—Specs_Jun2010110.05500.doc 6/14/2010 so WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05500 Metal Fabrications (Miscellaneous Metal) Page 6 of 7 10 B. Anchor Bolts: Full diameter hot-dip galvanize steel unless otherwise shown. DO NOT USE welding studs (Nelson studs) to anchor members to concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Conform to straight plumb and horizontal lines which also form a true flat plane to within 1/8-inch in 2 feet and 1/4-inch in 10 feet and 1/2 maximum overall. B. Curved surfaces shall conform to a true arc of a circle to within 1/8-inch in 12 inches and 1/4-inch maximum overall. 3.02 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. Fabricate and pre-fit metal work in the shop, in transportable components ready for field erection. B. Make proper allowance for expansion and contraction of the metals and of the materials to which they are fastened. C. Where metal is fastened to concrete, make the connection by means of sleeves and fastenings embedded in concrete or by expansion shield anchor bolts or wedge anchor bolts. Wood plugs, plastic plugs, or powder driven studs are not acceptable. rrr D. Construct steel work in accordance with AISC Standard practices to withstand the forces normally applied and in compliance with IBC and OSHA requirements. E. Grind welds smooth on all metal work exposed to view. Provide work that has: 1. Surfaces that are flat, straight, square, plumb, and level. 2. Smooth curves, free of flat spots, and of uniform radius or, if intended to be of changing radius, follow a flowing fair curve. 3. Make transitions between curved and straight portions of work at tangent points to achieve smooth and free flowing lines and surfaces without flat spots or abrupt changes in direction. F. Provide 1/8-inch radius corners and edges on all exposed work. G. Perform all welding in accordance with AWS Code D1.1. Employ methods and techniques to achieve strength and good appearance. H. Field Assembly: Set members to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust members before making permanent connections. I. Galvanized Metal Repair: Repair damaged galvanized metal by the heated substrate method as specified in paragraph 2.03. J. Touchup Painting (Ferrous Metals): After field assembly, clean all bare metal and all abrasions to shop coat, and spot paint with same primer used in the shop. W:1200810897003_City-ol-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010\10.05500.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05500 Metal Fabrications (Miscellaneous Metal) Page 7 of 7 3.03 GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES ++ A. Install support frames so that gratings and floor plates have continuous support and so gratings and floor plates will sit in their frames without rattling or rocking in any direction including across diagonal corners. 3.04 MISCELLANEOUS A. Furnish the following for field installation: 1. Custom fabricated steel connectors for wood beams and other rough carpentry work. +r 2. Door frames made of structural steel shapes for installation in the concrete pour. Provide all anchors and connectors. 3. Miscellaneous metal work not specified in other sections. 3.05 REPAIRS A. Repair or replace all defective work including: 1. Unsightly welds. 2. Discontinuous welds. 3. Uneven connections. 4. Variations exceeding specified tolerances. 5. Kinks, bends. 6. Other defects affecting the quality, strength, utility and appearance of the work. 3.06 CLEANING �r A. Wash thoroughly using clean water and detergent. B. Do not use acid solutions, steel wool, or other abrasives. C. Remove stubborn grease stains with mineral spirits. END OF SUB-SECTION r r it•II W:\2008\0897003 City-o(-Renton Stonegate\10-EngDesign\10.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010110.05500.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05726 Architectural Metal Work (Stainless Steel) Page 1 of 5 rr1 SUB-SECTION 05726 �i+l ARCHITECTURAL METAL WORK (STAINLESS STEEL) as PART 1 - GENERAL 46 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Sub-Section includes items of stainless steel used for functional and/or ornamental purposes where appearance of the finished product is of primary .rt concern. Work in this Sub-Section requires the highest level of workmanship, skill, and care and may require specialized manufacturing equipment and techniques. B. Items Covered in This Sub-Section: 1. Stainless steel handrails, guardrails, and ladders. C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Sub-Section 10.05100: Structural Metal Framing - structural steel 2. Sub-Section 10.05500: Metal Fabrications (Miscellaneous Metal) - all other miscellaneous metal work 1.02 REFERENCES A. International Building Code, 2006 Edition (IBC) B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM). 1. "Pipe Railing Manual," 2001 edition. 2. "Metal Finishes Manual," 2006 edition. err 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Sub-Section 10.01300. B. Submit shop drawings showing dimensions, materials, alloys, finishes, joining, attachments, field splices, control joints, inserts, and relationships of work to adjoining construction. 1. Indicate all shop and erection details including cuts, copes, connections, slip joints, holes, threaded fasteners, and welds. Indicate welds using AWS "Welding Symbols." 2. Show field measured dimensions of this and adjacent work and field measured location of cans and inserts. C. Submit a full-size section of railing showing the intersection of a post and top rail at an exterior 90-degree corner, and the intersection of at least two mid rails with the post. Grind, sand, and finish all welds. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following regulatory standards: 1. International Building Code (IBC), adopted edition, especially Chapters 17 and 33. 2. Stair and Guardrail design requirements of OSHA. .r W:\2008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Slonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010110.05726_ArchilecturalMetalWork.StainlessSteel.doc 6116/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05726 Architectural Metal Work (Stainless Steel) Page 2 of 5 +wr B. A sample illustrating the required level of workmanship for- 1. or-1. Grinding and finishing welds and for, ' 2. Approved sample will be used in the field as a means of verifying quality control +r 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. The fabricator and installer must be a State Licensed Specialty Contractor regularly engaged in custom fabrication and installation of fully welded and properly finished architectural railings. Acceptable fabricators are: 1. C.E. Toland, 5300 industrial Way, Benicia, California, (707) 747 1000. 2. Tuttle Aluminum & Bronze, Inc., 120 Shadow Lawn Drive, Fishes, Indiana 46060, (317) 842-2420 3. Or equal. B. Welding procedures, welders, and welding operations shall be qualified for the type of work required in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide inserts, sleeves and anchorage devices in time to be incorporated in other work. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation. B. Store materials above ground on platforms, skids or other supports. Store all fasteners and welding electrodes in a weathertight and dry place. Store packaged materials in their original containers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Stainless Steel Handrails, Guardrails and Stair Rails: 1. 1-1/-inch stainless steel pipe: Schedule 10, 0.109 in wall thickness, 1.90- to 2.0-inch outside diameter, Type 316. 2. 1—%4-inch stainless steel pipe: Schedule 10, 1.66-inch outside diameter, Type 316. 3. Steel tube: Seamless carbon steel, cold drawn mechanical tubing, 1—%-inch o.d., 0.219 wall thickness weighing 2.411 pounds per lineal foot. 4. Bent pipe ells and other fittings: Roll or die formed, smooth bends free of deformed or puckered surfaces, R&B Wagner; J.G. Braun Company- Julius �r Blum & Company; or equal. B. Sleeve inserts for guardrail posts set in concrete: 16-gauge galvanized steel sleeves, 1-inch larger than post diameter x 6 inches deep with closed bottom and removable slip-on plastic covers, or a removable void forming device of the same size. R&B Wagner, Inc.; J.G. Braun Company; Julius Blum & Company Inc.; or equal. C. Round bars, flat bars and plates- Type 316 stainless steel, annealed and cold drawn, conforming to ASTM A276. i� W:\2008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.05726_ArchitecturalMetalWork.StainlessSteel.doc 6!14/2010 Y� WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05726 Architectural Metal Work(Stainless Steel) Page 3 of 5 D. Expansion shield anchor bolts and drive pins for attaching items to concrete or masonry, stainless steel AISI Type 316: 1. Expansion anchor bolts shall be stainless steel machine bolts inserted in separate double metal wedge lead expansion shields. Minimum bolt size /z-inch-diameter. Minimum embedment in concrete or masonry 3 inches. Do not load in excess of 1/4 of certified test value. RAWL doubles; Keystone Double Wedge; or equal. Use where noted and for a. Loads of 1,000 pounds or over. b. To attach all machines and devices with moving parts. 1.tii C. For all loads in tension or withdrawal. 2. Wedge anchor bolts, special stainless steel machine bolts with built-in expanding wedge. Minimum size: 3/8-inch-diameter by 3-inch embedment in concrete or masonry. Do not load in excess of 1/4 of certified test value. Phillips Red Head Wedge Anchors WS series; Wej-it expansion bolts; or equal. Use where noted and for: a. Loads less than 1,000 pounds. b. Loads in shear only. E. Grout: Hydraulic quick-setting cement, non-shrinking, unaffected by water after „ setting and conforming to ASTM C595. Super Por-Rock; or equal. F. Wall Brackets for Stainless Steel Handrails: 1. For attachment to concrete or masonry wall: Cast stainless steel, drilled for ■r screw attachment to handrail and with 7/16-inch-diameter hole for 3/8-inch expansion anchor bolt to wall, 3-inch offset, Wagner 1772; Julius Blum; or equal. 2. For attachment to gypsum board wall: Cast stainless steel, drilled for screw attachment to handrail and with three '/4—inch-diameter countersunk bolt holes with filler plate for anchoring to backing through 5/8-inch gypsum board wall, 3-1/8-inch offset, Wagner Style P-3; Julius Blum; or equal. G. Structural Epoxy Adhesive: Scotch-Weld 3M Company; Devon; or equal. 2.02 FABRICATION OF HANDRAILS, GUARDRAILS, AND STAIR RAILS A. General: Railings shall be shop fabricated in the largest practical sections. They shall have closely fitted, continuously and fully welded connections, and shall have +�+ the welds ground smooth and blended into adjacent surfaces. Stainless steel parts shall be given a NAAMM No. 7 mirror polished finish (NAAMM No. 4 satin finish). All carbon steel parts are to be given a NAAMM medium satin 180-grit finish. B. Connections: 1. All shop joints shall be fully and continuously welded all around at all contact edges on the outside with groove or fillet welds using a gas shielded electric "r arc process. Welds shall be at least the minimum size, after grinding, required to develop the full strength of the members joined. Use weld filler material that will provide a close color match to the base material. Grind and sand all groove welds flush. Grind all fillet welds to a uniform radius, tangent to the members joined. Sand with progressively finer grits of abrasive cloth removing all tool marks, imperfections and scratches before proceeding to wr the next finer grit. Finish with 180-grit. Finished welds shall be an imperceptible match to the adjacent pipe. Form corners or changes in direction with tight radius pipe bends or manufactured elbows. Miters not permitted. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.05726_kchitecturalMetalWork.StainlessSteel.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05726 Architectural Metal Work (Stainless Steel) Page 4 of 5 2. At wall returns, custom bend the pipe rail or weld in manufactured formed or bent pipe ells having a 2-inch inside radius. Custom bends shall be made on a roll type hydraulic tubing bender and shall be free of buckles, puckers or deformed surfaces. Manufactured formed or bent ells shall be groove welded, ground and sanded flush and smooth. +r. 3. At all cross and tee intersections, accurately cope members for a tight fit and continuously butt or fillet weld all around. Grind weld to a uniform radius tangent with the joined members and sand smooth. 4. Cap ends of pipes except wall returns with a 1/8-inch or thicker disc. Weld all around and grind smooth. Return wall rails to within 1/8-inch of the wall. C. Finishing: + . 1. Give all welds a uniform medium satin directional textured finish with progressive grits of aluminum oxide abrasive cloth. 2. Finish stainless steel with finer grits and finally polish to a NAAMM No. 7 mirror finish. (NAAMM No. 4 satin finish.) 3. On carbon steel, finish with 180-grit meeting the requirements of an AA-M32 medium satin finish as defined by the "Metal Finishes Manual," NAAMM. Finish fillets with an abrasive charged felt wheel. Blend textured areas into adjacent pipe so that the entire assembly will have the same overall appearance and that the welds and adjacent smoothed areas will be indistinguishable from the rest of the rail. Remove all tool marks and irregularities from grinding and previous operations. Round or bevel all exposed edges to a 1/8-inch radius. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL err A. Insofar as possible, fabricate and fit metal work in the shop, in transportable components ready for field erection. +r B. Finished work shall conform to a straight line or flat plane to within 1/8-inch in 8 feet and to within 1/4-inch total deviation. C. Curved surfaces shall conform to a true arc of a circle to within 1/16-inch. .r D. Make proper allowance for expansion and contraction of the metals and of the materials to which they are fastened. �• E. Where metal is fastened to concrete, make the connection by means of embedding at least 6 inches deep in sleeves set in concrete or by expansion shield anchor bolts. Wood plugs, plastic plugs or powder driven studs are not acceptable. F. Construct work to withstand the forces required by IBC and OSHA. G. All work subjected to contact by personnel shall have all corners rounded or chamfered, all edges ground smooth. H. Perform all welding in accordance with AWS manual. Employ methods and techniques to achieve the full strength of the members joined and architectural 4W appearance. I. Field assembly: Set members to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust members before making permanent connections. or W:k200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110 01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110,05726_ArchitecturalMetalWork.StainlessSteel.doc 6/14/2010 �1 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.05726 Architectural Metal Work (Stainless Steel) Page 5 of 5 3.02 GUARDRAILS AND HANDRAILS A. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality performed by mechanics skilled in executing high quality architectural metal work. B. Set shop fabricated guardrail sections into position and align the top rail so that it is true to specified tolerances. Do field joining with slip joint. C. Support guardrails with temporary braces and shoring to maintain true alignment until all final connections and grouting are completed. Build surface of grout up at post, '/4-inch higher than surrounding surfaces to direct water away from post. 3.03 REPAIRS A. Replace all defective work including: 1. Unsightly welds. 2. Discontinuous welds. 3. Uneven connections, surfaces, finishes or coatings. 4. Variations exceeding specified tolerances. 5. Kinks, bends, tool marks, grinding marks. 6. Other defects affecting the quality, strength, utility and appearance of the work. 3.04 CLEANING A. Wash thoroughly using clean water and detergent. B. Do not use acid solutions, steel wool, or other abrasives. C. Remove stubborn grease stains with mineral spirits. END OF SUB-SECTION w W:12008\0897003_C4-of-Renton_Stonegate\10-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100°/_Specs_Jun2010\10.05726_ArchitecturalMetalWork.StainlessSteel.doc 6/14/2010 rw WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06100 Rough Carpentry Page 1 of 7 "' SUB-SECTION 10.06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 40 PART 1 - GENERAL do 1.01 SUMMARY go A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. Rough carpentry. 2. Stock manufactured framing hardware and fasteners. 3. Blocking, backing, grounds, inserts and similar supports for work provided °" under other sub-sections. 4. Furring required to supporting finishes to conceal work provided under other sub-sections. S. Wood trim B. Related Sub-Sections: �. 1. Sub-Section 10.03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete - concrete formwork 1.02 REFERENCES err A. American Plywood Association (APA) "Plywood Design Specifications." B. International Code Council (ICC) Evaluation Service Reports or National Evaluation Report (NER). C. U.S. Department of Commerce Voluntary Produce Standard PS 56-73 with Amendments. D. Bolted Connections: "2005 National Design Specification® (NDS) for Wood Construction and 2005 Special Design Provisions for Wind and Seismic (SDPWS). E. American Wood Preservers Association: (AWPA) "User Specification for Treated Wood," U1-07 and M4-08. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. 'B. Product Data: Fully describe all items proposed for use. C. Shop Drawings: For stock and custom manufactured items: 1. Show shop and erection details required for fabrication and installation of Glued Laminated structural units and I-Beam Joists. Include location, type, size, and extent of all connections and fastenings; camber; material grades; and combination. Indicate deviations from the design specified herein. 2. For Glued Laminated members and I-Beam Joists submit: Glue type, lamination type and grading report and reports of physical tests of random samples of production units. w. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110,01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun201000.06100-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06100 Rough Carpentry Page 2 of 7 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory and Specified Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable portions of the 2006 edition of the International Building Code (IBC) including adopted Washington amendments. 2. Lumber Grading Rules And Wood Species: Conform to applicable standards referenced in the IBC, American Softwood Lumber Standard PS 20-05 and "Standard Grading and Dressing Rule No. 17" of the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 3. Plywood: Conform to requirements of U.S. Product Standard PS1-07 and be manufactured by members of the American Plywood Association (APA). 4. Grade Marks: a. Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade mark or provide inspection certificates from appropriate grading and inspecting agencies. ` b. Do not place grade mark on exposed faces. B. U.S. Department of Commerce Voluntary Produce Standard PS 56 with go Amendments. C. American Wood Preservers Association: (AWPA) "Preservative Treatment by the ori Pressure Processes and Quality Control Standards. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING , A. Immediately upon delivery to job site, place materials in area protected from weather. ,w B. Protect all lumber stored on site from rain and excessive sun, stack lumber above the ground on sleepers blocked up to create a plane surface, and stack lumber in neat piles and in such fashion as to prevent twisting and warping. Use "stickers" to bind subsequent layers and provide uniform air circulation. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Install work under environmental conditions recommended by applicable trade associations, standards and manufacturers or material providers' rr► recommendations. 1.07 SEQUENCE SCHEDULING, COOPERATION AND COORDINATION A. Before work is commenced, verify lines and levels shown on plans and report any discrepancies required to the Owner. Have adjustments made prior to proceeding with the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Framing and Structural Materials: 1. Maximum moisture content: 19% and grade stamped S-Dry except that items designated MC15 shall be 15% or 12% averaged grade stamped MC-15. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs11 00%_Specs_Jun2010110.06100-Revision.doc 6/1 412 01 0 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06100 Rough Carpentry Page 3 of 7 2. Specified lumber dimensions are nominal. All lumber shall be dressed S4S to WCLIB paragraph 250 sizes. +r Item Species and Grade Grading Rules Studs, blockings, furring, Douglas Fir"construction" grade WCLIB 122-b plates err Joists, Planks Douglas Fir"No. 2 or better" WCLIB 123-c Beams & Headers Douglas Fir"No. 1 Structural' WCLIB 123-b free of heart center(FOHC). w Plywood Sheathing Douglas Fir "Structural#1 APA-CC-EXT CC-EXT Soffits, Fascias and Trim Clear Western Red Cedar or RI_S1 03 Redwood "Clear All Heart' B. Wood-Preservative Treatment: 1. Pressure-treat with waterborne preservative complying with IBC Chapter 23 and AWPC Standards referenced in para. 1.02F. 2. After treatment, kiln-dry all lumber to maximum 15% moisture content. 3. Pressure preservative treat all wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, roof nailing strips, and curbs, and similar members in contact with concrete or soil. C. Sealer: "Woodlife," "Penta-WR," or "Woodtax" or equal, penetrating liquid water- repellent preservative. ■r D. Rough Hardware: Furnish all nails, spikes, bolts, screws, and framing connectors of standard manufacture required to complete the work: 1. Hot dip galvanize all items exposed to moisture or weather. 2. Nails: FF-N-101 common or box type sizes as shown or as required by IBC Chapter 25. 3. Bolts and screws ASTM A307: Hex head machine bolts, carriage bolts with hex nuts, hex head lag screws and wood screws; provide cut washers unless malleable washers indicated. 4. Joist hangers and framing connectors: Simpson, Silver Metal Products; or equal, complete with required fasteners. Catalog numbers of the first named manufacturer are used on Drawings to indicate size and function. 5. Expansion bolts: Size as listed or required for imposed loads. Embedment as required to develop full strength. Rawl Bolt; Hilti Kwik-Bolt; or equal. rw PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION +rr A. General: 1. Coordination and Layout: Before starting work, review proposed mechanical and electrical systems with other trades. Make required adjustments in framing to facilitate installation of systems with least possible cutting. Report possible discrepancies for clarification and adjustments to the Owner. 2. Accurately cut and solidly fit together all work to provide strong, rigid joints, with full bearing for all members. W:1200810897003_City-ofRenton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.06100-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06100 Rough Carpentry Page 4 of 7 3. Obtain Engineer's written approval before cutting, drilling or notching framing members to permit the installation of utilities, ductwork, or other items. 4. Reinforce members damaged by cutting or boring with steel straps acceptable to Engineer. ++ 5. Split, warped, curled, or otherwise defective material or careless or improper workmanship will not be accepted. The Owner reserves right to reject and have replaced at Contractor's expense split studs and joists as well as any twisted or warped studs or joist that are not in alignment with rest of wall or roof. 6. Erect all work with surfaces level, plumb and true. 7. Provide all accessories and install as per manufacturer's specifications. B. Vertical and Horizontal Controls: Establish and maintain necessary benchmarks, lines, or controls throughout the execution of the work. C. Tolerances: Design, construct, set, and maintain framing to ensure completed work is within tolerance limits of 1/8-inch. D. Fit closely and set accurately all framing lumber and other rough carpentry. Install work at the required lines and levels and secure in place in a rigid and substantial manner. Drive spikes and nails with the heads flush with the surfaces of the outer members. Draw bolts tight upon installation and re-tightened immediately prior to closing the work with finishes. E. Sill Plates: 1. Set in uniform, solid 1/2-inch-thick latex bonded mortar bed. Set perfectly level with engineer's level. Set outside edge straight to a stretched string or laser beam. 2. Bolt all sills to foundation at 4'-0" o.c. and within 9 inches of each end unless otherwise noted on Drawings. Minimum two bolts per member. 3. Treat all cuts and holes with a concentrated preservative compatible with that used for pressure treatment. F. Stud Wall Framing: 1. Cut studs and posts with square ends, unless otherwise shown, and erect plumb. 2. Select studs for straightness and set plumb, true and in alignment. 3. Place studs in walls with the shortest dimension parallel to the run of the wall: a. Provide studs or as indicated on Drawings, spaced 16 inches on center, unless otherwise closer spacing is shown. b. Use full length studs from sill or bottom plate to top plate. 4. Use double studs on each side of all openings, unless more studs are called as for. 5. Provide triple studs at corners unless more studs are shown. Arrange framing at corners to provide a bearing surface for sheathing and/or finishes. Frame solids corners where stud wall or partitions meet. 6. Frame openings in stud walls and partitions with headers across the top with a minimum size of a full stud depth x stud width resting on cripple studs, unless greater bearing area is shown. W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.06100-Revision.doc 6114/2010 to WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06100 Rough Carpentry Page 5 of 7 40 7. Provide double top plates; set one at a time; and provide single bottom plates secured as shown: a. Install double top plates in the greatest length available and lap splices a wr minimum of 4 feet. Lapped double plates at corners. b. Obtain Engineer's written approval prior to drilling, cutting or notching plates. Where openings are cut through plates, install 16-gauge steel strap ties 1-1/4 inches wide at single plate and 2-5/16 inches wide at double plates extending at least 9 inches past each cut. 8. Frame walls and partitions containing plumbing, heating, or other pipes as required to give proper clearances for piping without notching, cutting or boring �. studs. 9. Reinforce holes through framing as shown. 10. Provide 2 x fire stops the full depth of the studs as required by the IBC and asindicated on Drawings. Install blocking for miscellaneous items as required for the support of such items. aw G. Joist Framing: 1. Install joists and beams in accurate straight alignment: a. Position and space as shown. „r b. Coordinate with other framing and other trades prior to actual construction in order to avoid cutting joist or headers. c. Provide solid 2-inch full depth blocking at all supports. 1) Over all supports. 2) At intermediate span points as shown, but not less frequently than required by IBC Chapter 23. 2. Place all joists and beams spanning between two supports with crown up. Framing members with the ends projecting beyond the supports shall be set with the crown down unless otherwise shown. 3. Maximum spacing of repeating members: 16 inches, unless closer spacing shown. 4. Joists and beams shall have full bearing over entire plate width: a. Splice only over supports or plates. aw b. Lap and nail overlapping ends. H. Cutting and Blocking: as 1. Provide and install wood blocking, furring strips, or grounds as shown or required to provide anchorage for finishes, accessories, fixtures, etc.: a. Blocking and/or backing shall be securely bolted or otherwise anchored in aw place. 2. Obtain the Engineer's written approval before cutting wood girders, beams, or joists. Limit cutting and drilling for electrical conduits and mechanical pipes to the top of beams and to a depth of one-fifth of the beam depth and located not further from the support than three times the beam depth and not closer to the support than the beam depth: a. Cuts in excess of this or single bored holes with diameter of more than 1-inch are not permitted without special provisions for reinforcing the beams, acceptable to Engineer. 1W I. Construct Bolted Connections in accordance with the provisions of the "National Design Specification for Stress-Grade Lumber and Its Fastenings," latest edition. w W:12 00 8108 9 7 00 3 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesignl10.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.06100-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06100 ` Rough Carpentry Page 6 of 7 J. Nailing: 1. Conform to IBC nailing in accordance with Nailing Tables in Chapter 23 of IBC, unless otherwise shown. 2. Use only common nails, unless otherwise noted: Where required, predrill to .w prevent splitting. K. Light Gauge Metal Framing Connectors: Install patented joist hangers and framing connectors according to manufacturer's recommendations. Fill all nail holes with required nails. r L. Replace structurally and/or architecturally objectionable split members. 3.02 BACKING AND BLOCKING A. Provide wood blocking and backing in partitions and elsewhere for the attachment of fixtures and equipment: In metal stud partitions, provide fire-treated wood backing. B. Obtain templates or drawings from fixture and equipment suppliers showing type and location of backing required. Install backing before wall finishes are in place. No C. Fit backing tightly between studs and secure to studs using at least two nails or screws through studs and into each end of backing member: In metal stud partitions, notch or kerf backing to the depth of return flanges of "C" studs, allowing the face of backing to be installed flush with face of studs. 3.03 PLYWOOD STRUCTURAL ROOF SHEATHING A. Roof: Apply plywood with the face grain perpendicular to the framing and with the end joints staggered. Allow 1/16-inch spacing between panels at ends and 1/8-inch spacing between panels at the edges. Provide blocking at unsupported panel edges. Nail as shown, but not less than required by applicable IBC Nailing Table. w B. Drive fasteners with the heads flush with the plywood surface. Fasteners that are over driven and cause rupture of the surface veneer will be reiected and will require replacement of the plywood panel. 3.04 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Anchor Bolts: Set anchor bolts in the forms and secure in position prior to placement of concrete. Installing anchor bolts by inserting them in fresh concrete will not be permitted. B. Framing Devices: Install framing devices in conformance with, and using the fastenings indicated in, the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 NAILERS AND GROUNDS A. Provide wood nailers and grounds for fastening wood trim, finish materials and other materials where required. Install grounds in proper alignment to create flat level and plumb surfaces. Test grounds with 8-foot straight edge; correct deviations that exceed 1/8-inch in 10 feet. W:1200810897003_C4-of-Renton_Stonegale110-EngOesign110.01-Specs1100 k_Specs_Jun2010110.06100-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 WN WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06100 Rough Carpentry Page 7 of 7 rr 3.06 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS A. Provide temporary bracing and shoring required to support rough carpentry work during construction. wr END OF SUB-SECTION irr riw + �1r +r. 6W ,r 40 W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Sionegate110-EngDesign110.01-SpecW00%_Specs_Jun2010110.06100-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06178 Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses Page 1 of 4 SUB-SECTION 10.06178 METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL wr 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. Design, furnish, install, and brace all light metal plate connected wood trusses. B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.06100: Rough Carpentry -wood roof sheathing, sills, fascias and related wood framing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Truss Plate Institute: 1. ANSI/TPI 1-2002 National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected rr Wood Truss Construction with Commentary and Appendices 2. DSB-89 Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses 3. BWT-76 Bracing Wood Trusses: Commentary and Recommendations 4. TPI-85 Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses (Roof) 5. HET-80 Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses: Commentary and Recommendations 6. QST-88 Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses r B. American Forest & Paper Association: "ASD/LRFD National Design Specification for Wood Construction." C. Wood Truss Council of America: 1. In-Plant Quality Procedure Manual for MPC Wood Trusses 2. Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Handbook. wr 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION err A. Design Requirements: 1. Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses: Designed by the metal connector plate manufacturer and manufactured by a truss manufacturer licensed or authorized by the connector plate manufacturer. 2. Provide engineering drawings and calculations for metal plate connected wood trusses that are prepared, sealed, and signed by a Professional Engineer Registered in the state where his work will be installed. B. Design Criteria: 1. IBC Chapter 16. 2. Minimum roof live load of 20 psf and 2,000 Ib point load with no reduction for area or slope. 3. SDS = 0.933, SD1 = 0.484 W:1200810697003 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.06176.doc 611412010 (AW WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06178 Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses Page 2 of 4 as 4. Basic Wind Speed: 85 mph, exposure C, Net Uplift = 17 psf 5. Bottom Chord Deflection: Not to exceed L/360. 6. Roof snow load = 26 psf .r 7. Roof dead load 15 psf top chord, 10 psf bottom chord C. Design Standard: Comply with applicable provisions of the National Design Specifications for Wood Construction by the National Forest Products Association, Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses by the Truss Plate Institute and Design and Manufacturing Specifications of the Wood Truss Council of America. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. B. Product Data: Fully describing all items proposed for use. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Custom-prepared detailed elevation drawings showing location of each truss r, type and method of attachment. 2. Installation drawings showing location of each truss type and method of attachment. 3. Bracing drawings showing brace locations, construction, and attachment. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Design Data: Engineering design drawings and calculations prepared, signed, and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer. 2. Test Reports: Validating the design assumptions. 3. Manufacturer's Certificates: Signed by the metal connector plate manufacturer and the truss manufacturer certifying that trusses meet specified requirements and are manufactured in plants inspected at least quarterly by Timber Products Inspection, Portland, Oregon; Product Fabrication Service (PFS); CBO or r. CABO Certified Inspection Service; or equal. 4. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicating required preparation, installation procedures, attachment, and bracing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Manufactured in a plant that is inspected at least quarterly by Timber Products Inspection Service (TPI) for compliance with ICC standards, manufacturing tolerance and lumber grades, and uses plate connectors and truss designs prepared in accordance with the standards of ICC, the Truss Plate Institute and the Wood Truss Council of America. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of Building Code including without limitation Chapters 16 and 23. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING r A. Deliver trusses strapped together in bundles by truss type and labeled indicating installed location. �r ICU W12008\0897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate\10-EngDesign\10.01-Specs1100% Specs_Jun2010110,06178.doc 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06178 Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses Page 3 of 4 B. Store trusses elevated above the ground on wood sleepers. Cover trusses with tarpaulins to protect from rain and sun. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Truss Design and Metal Connector Plate Manufacturer: Alpine Engineered Products Inc.; Mitek Industries; or equal. B. Truss Manufacturer/Installer: Cal Asia Truss Engineering Services Inc.; Anderson Truss; Wood Fabricators Inc.; or equal. 2.02 METAL PLATE CONNECTORS A. Provide metal connector plates designed and tested in accordance with Truss Plate Institute Criteria. B. Connector Plates: 16-, 18- and 20-gauge steel ASTM A-446, Grade C Structural, hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A525-G60. C. Code Approval: ICC, Evaluation Report. D. Quality Control: In-house quality control program by inspectors certified quarterly by PFS. Monitor all phases of production: steel thickness, galvanized coating, yield and tensile strength as well as nail bend ductility, sharpness, and holding value, to be equal to requirements of ICC and Truss Plate Institute. 2.03 LUMBER A. Grade, species, and moisture content as required by truss design. B. Defects including wane or knots occurring in the connector plate area most not affect more than 10% of required plate area or number of effective teeth required for each truss member. 2.04 TRUSS MANUFACTURER .sire A. Cut all members for accurate fitting joints. Comply with joint tolerance requirements in QST-86 by the Truss Plate Institute. asci B. Apply connector plates to both faces of truss by hydraulic press or roller. Seat plates firmly against wood truss members. C. Maintain joint fit tolerance and connector plate installation tolerance in accordance with ICC and Wood Truss Council requirements. D. Quality Control: At least quarterly, plant and sample project run inspection by third party ICC-certified inspectors: Timber Products Inspection, Portland, Oregon; or equal. Inspection to cover without limitation: compliance with approved engineering drawings, connector plate size, gauge and type, lumber species, grade ad W. 00810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegatel1 O-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.06178.doc 6/14/2010 to WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06178 Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses Page 4 of 4 w and moisture content, location of lumber defects clear of connector plate area, accuracy of fit of truss members, installation of connector plates driven up tight against wood members.. E. Source Quality Control: 1. Provide a special in-plant inspection of all Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses for this project by a third party ICC-Certified Inspector, such as Timber Products Inspection. Cover as a minimum all of the aspects required by ICC as well as those listed in the preceding paragraph. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Truss Installation: Install trusses by or under the direct supervision of the truss manufacturer. Install and attach trusses in accordance with requirements of ICC, Truss Plate Institute and Wood Truss Council of America unless more restrictive requirements are shown. Follow erection recommendations in "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses" by the Truss Plate Institute. B. Bracing: Comply with requirements for temporary bracing during construction and permanent installation bracing contained in "Bracing Wood Trusses" BWT-76 by the Truss Plate Institute. Provide erection bracing adequate to hold trusses straight and plumb in safe conditions until decking and permanent bracing is in place. " Complete all permanent truss bracing before applying any loads to roof. Provide permanent bracing in accordance with truss designer's drawings and Contract Drawings. END OF SUB-SECTION ■ w 9r rr� W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—Specs Jun2010110.06178.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06600 Fiberglass Fabrications Page 1 of 5 SUB-SECTION 10.06600 so FIBERGLASS FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. Fiberglass grating, fiberglass structural members, fiberglass ladders, and fiberglass miscellaneous items. B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub Section 10.05090: Structural Fasteners 1. Sub-Section 10.05100: Structural Metal Framing 2. Sub-Section 10.05500: Metal Fabrications 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) B. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. ASTM D635 Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position 2. ASTM D638 Tensile Properties of Plastics 3. ASTM D696 Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between 30°C and 30°C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer 4. ASTM D790 Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials 5. ASTM D2344 Short-Beam Strength of Polymer Matrix Composite Materials and Their Laminates 6. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) D. 2006 International Building Code (IBC) with Washington State Amendments at 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. B. Product Data: Fully describe all products proposed for use. Include data on physical, chemical, and structural engineering properties. In addition for grating, provide manufacturer's published literature including structural design data, structural properties data, grating load/deflection tables, corrosion resistance tables, certificates of compliance, and test reports as applicable. C. Shop Drawings: Custom prepared project specific shop drawings showing dimensions, joints locations, and connection details. In addition for grating, furnish manufacturer's shop drawings clearly showing material sizes, types, styles, part or catalog numbers, complete details for the fabrication and erection of components including, but not limited to, location, lengths, type, and sizes of fasteners, clip angles, member sizes, and connection details. W:12008I0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-En9Design110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.06600.DOC 611 412 01 0 1rr WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06600 Fiberglass Fabrications Page 2 of 5 • D. Calculations: Design calculations for systems not sized or designed in the contract documents. AW 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE all. A. Qualifications: Provide work fabricated and installed by a licensed specialty contractor who has been exclusively engaged in fiberglass fabrication work of the type required for the past 5 years. to B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with the 2006 IBC with Washington State amendments, especially Chapter 26, Plastic. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Inspect all items delivered to the site for damage. Replace items that have splintered or suffered surface damage. W& B. Store in a clean area without adding other concentrated or distributed loads above the items. tt C. Store in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GRATING A. Provide fiberglass grating manufactured by Fibergrate Corporation; Chemgrate Corporation; or equal. B. Size grating as shown on Drawings. Where not shown, grating shall be size for 100 pounds per square foot superimposed load with a grating deflection not to exceed 1% of span or 1/4 of an inch, whichever is less. Fiberglass is to be manufactured by the molded process. C. Grating shall be of a one piece molded construction with tops and bottoms of ,., bearing bars and cross bars in the same plane. Grating shall have a rectangular mesh pattern providing unidirectional strength. Install grating flush with adjacent concrete or other walking surfaces. D. Provide grating panels that are absolutely flat, correctly sized, and fabricated to lie in their frames with uniform, non-rattling bearing on all supporting surfaces. E. Provide stainless steel type AISI 316 hold-down clips and other connection devices as required by manufacturer or Drawings. F. Band ends of all fixed and removable grating section with banding bars of the same thickness and the same depth as the main bearing bars to the ends of all bearing and cross bars. G. Leave "split" openings in the gratings when required for the passage of pipes, +++� valve stems or other devices. SII W1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010\10.06600,DOC 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06600 Fiberglass Fabrications Page 3 of 5 H. Provide "fixed" grating for all operating grating platforms. Bolt "fixed" grating to support members with stainless steel saddle clips and stud bolts. I. Where required for access or where noted, provide removable grating sections sized to limit the weight of any one section to 50 pounds. Bolt removable sections in place by the same method used for fixed grating. Mark removable sections by painting the banding bars red. �i J. Provide a non-skid walking surface to the top of the grating. 2.02 GRATING FASTENINGS A. Provide stainless steel type AISI 304 hold-down clips and other connection devices as required by manufacturer or Drawings. .w 2.03 FIBERGLASS LADDERS A. All ladder side rails, rungs, ladder mounting brackets and cage straps are to be FRP structural shapes manufactured by the pultrusion process. Cage hoops and brackets shall be produced by the open molded hand lay-up method. All structural shapes shall be composed of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in qualities, quantities, properties, arrangements and dimensions as necessary to meet the design requirements and dimensions as specified in the Contract Documents. B. Fiberglass reinforcement shall be a combination of continuous roving, continuous strand mat, bi-directional roving mat and surfacing veil in sufficient quantities as needed by the application and/or physical properties required. C. All finished surfaces of FRP items and fabrications shall be smooth, resin-rich, free go of voids and without dry spots, cracks, crazes or unreinforced areas. All glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering. lot D. The ladder side rail shall be 1-3/4-inch square tube with a wall thickness of 1/4 inch or greater. The rungs shall be 1-1/4-inch-diameter pultruded structural shapes, continuously fluted to provide a non-slip surface. Rungs that are gritted as a secondary operation shall not be permitted. Ladder wall and floor mount shall be fabricated from pultruded angles, 3/8-inch minimum thickness. E. The ladder cage vertical bars shall be 1.5-inch wide by 5/8-inch pultruded I-beam shapes to offer protection to workers from exposed hardware. Cage hoops and cage brackets shall be manufactured by the open mold hand lay-up process. All cage hoops shall be 3-inch wide by Y4-inch thick minimum. trrr F. All rungs shall be both mechanically attached to the ladder with stainless steel rivets and chemically bonded with epoxy. G. Provide structural shapes with minimum ultimate tensile (ASTM D638) and bending strength (ASTM D790) of 30,000 pounds per square inch in the longitudinal direction and short beam shear of 4,500 pounds per square inch (ASTM D2344). H. Type 316 stainless steel bolts shall be provided for attaching ladder cage vertical bars to hoops, ladder hoops to brackets, ladder cage brackets to the ladder, and wall brackets to the ladder. All fasteners used in the ladder system are to be 316 SS. Rivets will be 18-8 stainless steel. Ali W:\20D8\0897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.06600.DOC 6/14/2010 to WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06600 Fiberglass Fabrications Page 4 of 5 2.04 FIBERGLASS GUARDRAILS AND HANDRAILS A. All posts and rails are to be structural shapes manufactured by the pultrusion process. The structural shapes shall be composed of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in qualities, quantities, properties, arrangements and dimensions as necessary to meet the design requirements and dimensions specified in the Contract Documents. r B. Fiberglass reinforcement shall be a combination of continuous roving, continuous strand mat, and surfacing veil in sufficient quantities as needed by the application rrr and/or physical properties required. C. Resins shall be an isophthalic polyester with chemical formulation necessary to provide the corrosion resistance, strength and other physical properties as required. D. All finished surfaces of FRP items and fabrications shall be smooth, resin-rich, free of voids and without dry spots, cracks, crazes or unreinforced areas. All glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering. E. Top and bottom rails are to be 1.75-inch x 0.125-inch wall square tube, the posts are to be 2.125-inch x 0.1875-inch wall square tube and kickplate is to be 1/2-inch deep by 4-inch wide with two reinforcing ribs. F. Provide structural shapes with minimum ultimate tensile (ASTM D638) and bending strength (ASTM D790) of 30,000 pounds per square inch in the longitudinal direction and short beam shear of 4,500 pounds per square-inch (ASTM D2344). G. The completed handrail installation shall meet the following load requirements with a minimum factor of safety of 2.0: 1. Concentrated Load: 200 Ib applied in any direction at the top rail. 2. Uniform Load: 50 Ib/If of the top rail in any direction. r 3. Loads need not act concurrently. H. All fasteners used in the ladder system are to be 316 SS. Rivets will be 18-8 stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION rrr 3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabricate all grating assemblies and structural components in the shop to the greatest extent possible. �r B. Sealing: All shop fabricated cuts or drilling shall be coated with vinyl ester resin to provide maximum corrosion resistance. All field fabricated cuts or drilling shall be coated similarly by the contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Gratings: 1. Install support frames so that gratings have continuous support and will sit in their frames without rattling or rocking in any direction including across diagonal corners. D. Ladders: 1. All ladders and cages shall be designed and laid out in strict accordance with OSHA 1910.27. The ladder shall also be capable of supporting a concentrated vertical load of 1,200 pounds applied at the mid-span of the rung. Manufacturer shall be required to provide supporting test data for rung capacity. W:1200810897003_City-ot-Renlon Stonegatell0-EngDesign110.01-Specs000%_Specs_Jun20IW0.06600.DOC 6/14/2010 r>rf WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.06600 Fiberglass Fabrications Page 5 of 5 2. All rungs shall penetrate the wall of the tube side rails and shall be connected to the rails with both epoxy.and rivets to provide both a chemical and mechanical lock, respectively. 3. Ladders shall be fully shop assembled. Ladder cages shall be test assembled and drilled to ensure a proper fit in the field. Ladder cage brackets shall remain attached to the ladder for shipping, but ladder cage components shall be disassembled, packaged, and shipped separately to ensure the lowest freight costs and to prevent damage in transit. Cage components shall be bundled with each respective ladder. 4. The hoop brackets shall be shop attached to the ladder with bolts. The hoops shall be field attached to the hoop brackets. 5. All cut or machined edges, holes and notches shall be sealed to provide maximum corrosion resistance. All field fabricated cuts shall be coated similarly by the contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. E. Guardrails and Handrails: 1. The handrail post/rail connection is to be fabricated such that the rails are unbroken and continuous through the post without the use of packs or splices. The bottom rail is to be installed through the post at a prepared hole made to fit the outside dimensions of the rail. The top rail is to fit into a machined, u-shaped pocket formed into top of the post such that the rail is located'at the center of the post. All exposed post corners are to be radiused to eliminate sharp edges. The rails are to be joined to the post through a combination of bonding and riveting. No sharp, protruding edges are to remain after assembly of the handrail. Spacing of the posts shall not exceed 6 feet-0 inch. 2. The bases of the posts are to be attached according to the contract drawings. The bases of the posts are to be reinforced to a height of 8.5 inches. 3. To avoid embrittlement at cold temperatures and loss of strength at high temperatures, PVC or CPVC connectors cannot be used as a load carrying component of the rail system. 4. All shop fabricated cuts are to be coated with a vinyl ester resin to provide maximum corrosion resistance. Field cuts are to be similarly coated by the Contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. ,rw 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set structural components accurately in position and hold with support devices until permanent anchors are secured. B. Set grating accurately in position and install all fastenings as directed by so manufacturer or Drawings. C. Repair all damaged surfaces with catalyzed resin sealant. END OF SECTION W:\200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100% Specs_Jun2010110.06600,DOC 6/14/2010 11"' WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07190 Water Repellent Sealer Page 1 of 3 SUB-SECTION 10.07190 WATER REPELLENT SEALER PART 1 - GENERAL aw 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: ■■ 1. A clear water repellent sealer application to all exposed above grade exterior concrete, precast concrete, and concrete unit masonry surfaces of structures that enclose space for human occupancy or for machinery, equipment, or storage. B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Sub-Section 10.03350: Concrete Finishes 3. Sub-Section 10.04220: Concrete Masonry Units 4. Sub-Section 10.07900: Joint Sealants 5. Sub-Section 10.09900: Painting 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. E 514 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry 2. E 96 Water Vapor Transmission 3. C 97 Reduction of Water Absorption 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements: 1. Product Data: Fully describe all products proposed for use. Include Material r Information Sheet for all products. 2. Manufacturer's five-year warranty for Water Repellent Sealer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Apply water repellent sealer by a licensed Waterproofing Specialty Contractor exclusively engaged in applying waterproofing materials, sealers and +. sealants. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with the International Building Code (IBC), 2006 edition, and. Washington State amendments. 2. Comply with regulations of the Puget Sound Clean Air Agency. C. Trade Association Recommendations: 1. Comply with recommendations on waterproofing contained in the Masonry Design Manual published by the Masonry Industry Advancement Committee. 2. Comply with the Portland Cement Association recommendations for waterproofing architectural concrete. W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.07190_WaterRepellantSealecdoc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07190 Water Repellent Sealer Page 2 of 3 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .r A. Deliver material in labeled, unopened containers. B. Store all material on raised platforms protected from moisture and from gyri contamination by dirt, mud or other foreign material. Store in compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water repellent under temperature and relative humidity conditions before, during, and after application in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow surfaces to dry for minimum 5 days after rains. B. Coordinate with other trades whose work may be damaged by sealer application. 1.07 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Apply sealer under the supervision of the sealer manufacturer's representative. B. Provide a signed five (5) year Special Guarantee in accordance with the Special Provisions, signed by the sealer applicator or Contractor against sealer's failure to prevent water intrusion through the treated masonry or concrete. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALER A. Material: 1. Waterbased penetrating clear water repellent sealer for lightweight concrete block and architectural concrete. 2. Not less than 50% solids content by weight. 3. Meet requirements of Air Quality Management District having jurisdiction. 4. Meet ASTM C67 and ASTM C14 submersion tests with a repellency rating of 97%. 5. Apply at the rate recommended by the manufacturer for the density, porosity, and texture of concrete and/or concrete block used, 6. Acceptable Manufacturers and products: Hydrozo, Clear Double 7 VOC; or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION OF CLEAR SEALER A. Apply sealer after concrete and masonry has cured at least 30 days, and after the concrete and the masonry has been cleaned. B. Prior to applying sealer clean down all masonry and architectural concrete by scrubbing with water and masonry or concrete cleaner and bristle brushes. C. Inspect surface for cracks. Rout out all cracks 5 mils and wider and fill with a high performance joint sealant having a 20-year life expectancy and recommended by the water repellent sealer manufacturer for use on substrates to be sealed with his sealer. Perform joint sealant work in accordance with Sub-Section 10.07900. W:12008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.07190 WaterRepellantSealer.doc 6114/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07190 Water Repellent Sealer Page 3 of 3 D. Spray-Apply Sealer: Use airless spray equipment with recirculating type pump and perforated T bar applicator recommended by the sealer manufacturer. DO NOT USE pressure pot spray equipment. Operate at lowest possible pressures, 20 psi maximum. Do not allow fogging or bounce-off except on tension break coat. E. Protect surfaces, which are not to be coated. Cover all glass, anodized aluminum, roll-down doors, metal and wood doors, etc. with polyethylene sheeting; continuously seal all edges with tape. F. Apply at the rate recommended by the manufacturer for the density, porosity, and wr texture of concrete and/or concrete block used. G. Apply enough sealer so that surfaces appear uniformly wet for from two to five hours after application. 1. Rate of Application: Coverage as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. First Coat: apply in two passes. The first pass, a light spray to break surface tension; the second pass, a full flood coat applied in an overlapping pattern. 3. Second Coat: Immediately after first coat is dry, apply a flood coat in an overlapping pattern. 4. Do not allow the coating to pool on the substrate surface. 3.02 LOCATIONS FOR CLEAR SEALER A. Apply sealer to the following surfaces: 1. All exterior exposed surfaces of CMU walls including and concrete curbs and stem walls. rr` END OF SUB-SECTION ; iK ,> err. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate\10-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.07190 WaterRepellantSealer.doc 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07200 Insulation Page 1 of 3 SUB-SECTION 10.07200 n INSULATION so PART 1 - GENERAL ■r 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. Building thermal insulation including the following: a. Rigid perimeter insulation b. Rigid roof insulation C. Batt roof insulation „r d. Batt wall insulation B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.09250: Gypsum Wallboard - acoustical insulation within sound rated metal stud partitions. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C209 Standard Test Methods for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board 2. C518 Test Method of Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of Heat Flow Meter 3. C578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation , 4. C612 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation 5. C665 Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing 6. C1289 Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanu rate Thermal Insulation Board 7. E84 Surface Burning Characteristics 8. E136 Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750°C. B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): ad 1. UL 723 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2. UL 1256 Fire Test of Roof Deck Construction C. Factory Mutual (FM): 1. FM Approval Guide 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. B. Product Data: Fully describe every item proposed for use. Submit UL Data Sheets for insulation required to have a flame spread rating or used as part of a fire-rated assembly. W:12 00 8108 9 7 003 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.07200_Insulation.doc 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07200 Insulation Page 2 of 3 + 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with the International Building Code (IBC), 2006 edition, and Washington State amendments. 1.05 PRODUCT, DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation materials to the job in original packages with manufacturer's "R" Values and UL flame spread ratings clearly shown. Provide certification of compliance with applicable Federal Specifications. 1.06 WARNING A. The Contractor is warned that working with fiberglass or rock wool materials may constitute a serious health hazard. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure the safety of workers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID THERMAL FOUNDATION INSULATION A. Provide foundation insulation around the entire perimeter that extends from the bottom outside edge of the footing to the top of the slab except at door openings. The foundation insulation shall be a minimum of R-10. Exposed insulation shall be protected with an aluminum trim cover 1. Polystyrene Rigid Insulation: HCFC free, closed cell extruded polystyrene foam board. Comply with the following: a. ASTM C 578-92, Type VI, density 1.8 Ib/cu. ft. min., compressive strength 40 psi (ASTM D 1621-73). b. Thermal resistance: 5-year aged R-values of 5.4 and 5.0 min., °F-ft2- h/Btu2/inch at 40°F and 75°F respectively (ASTM C 518-91). c. Water absorption: Max. 0.3% by volume (ASTM C 272-91). d. Dow Styrofoam, Owens Corning or equal. 2. Aluminum Trim Cover: Prefinished aluminum sheet metal in accordance with Sub-Section 10.07600. The trim shall extend a minimum of 2 inches below grade and be sealed to the concrete curb. Color: factory finished dark brown. 2.02 RIGID THERMAL ROOF INSULATION A. Polyisocynanurate Rigid Insulation: HCFC free, closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core bonded to universal fiberglass reinforced facers, with a minimum R-value of 6 per inch, and meeting ASTM C1289, Type Il, Class I, Grade 3. Provide total thickness as indicated on Drawings. Johns Manville ENRGY 3 25 PSI; Atlas Energy Products; or equal. 2.03 LOW DENSITY BLANKET/BATT INSULATION WALLS AND ROOF A. Thermal Batt Insulation: Glass fiber thermal insulation in 3-1/2-inch-thick R-13 wall insulation, and 9-1/2-inch R-30 roof insulation. Provide thickness as indicated on Drawings. Owens-Corning; Johns-Manville; or equal. 1. Kraft-faced ASTM C665, Type Il, Class C. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-Eng Des ign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.O7200_Insulation.doc 6114/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07200 Insulation Page 3 of 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION „ 3.01 INSTALLATION OF RIGID THERMAL FOUNDATION INSULATION A. Perimeter of foundation: 1. Install continuously around perimeter of the building. At the intersection of the building and screen wall, extend the insulation a minimum of 2 feet along each side of the screen wall. w 2. Use adhesive compatible with the insulation. Apply adhesive continuously or in spots not to exceed 8 inches on center. 3. Lay insulating units with close joints, in regular courses and with cross joints broken. When laid in more than one layer, break joints of succeeding layers with those in preceding layer. 4. Protect insulation while backfilling. 5. Install cover trim and close open ends of trim at screen wall. Seal edges to masonry. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF RIGID THERMAL ROOF INSULATION A. On Roof Deck: 1. Insulation installation and fastening system shall be in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's requirements. 2. Lay insulating units with close joints, in regular courses and with cross joints broken. When laid in more than one layer, break joints of succeeding layers of roof insulation with those in preceding layer. 3. Locate the long dimension edge joints to have solid bearing on top of deck ribs; do not cantilever over deck rib openings or flutes. w 3.03 INSTALLATION OF LOW DENSITY FIBERGLASS BLANKET/BATT THERMAL INSULATION A. In Stud Walls- 1. alls:1. Friction fit insulation blanket between studs. When faced insulation is used, the attachment flanges may be taped to the face of metal stud prior to applying the interior finish. 2. Place foil face on the interior side. B. Under Roof Deck: 1. Provide stick clips adhered to the deck, or wire or mesh supports attached to trusses at a minimum of 2 feet on center. Insulation shall fit snug between supports and deck. 2. Place foil face on the interior side and tape the joints. END OF SUB-SECTION W7200810897003—City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.07200_Insulabon.doc 611 412 01 0 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07410 Metal Roofing Page 1 of 8 SUB-SECTION 10.07410 METAL ROOFING ■ PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section includes the following: 1. Prefinished Metal Roofing System including sheet metal roofing panels and associated underlayment, vapor retarder, flashing, subgirts, sealants, fasteners, and closures necessary to form a weather-tight roof system. 2. Metal Soffit Liner Panels B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.06100: Rough Carpentry 2. Sub-Section 10.07200: Insulation 3. Sub-Section 10.07600: Flashing and Sheet Metal 4. Sub-Section 10.07900: Joint Sealants 1.02 REFERENCES A. The Aluminum Association, Inc. 1. Specification for Aluminum Structures B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process 2. A 666 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar 3. A 792 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy- Coated by the Hot-Dip process 4. B 209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and r Plate 5. E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 6. E 1592 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 7. E 1646 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 8. E 1680 Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems iro C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members D. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. ASCE-7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures 2. ASCE-8 Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless Steel Structural Members E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 263 Standard for Safety for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 2. UL 580 Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies W.1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.07410_MetalRoofing-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07410 Metal Roofing Page 2 of 8 F. Factory Mutual (FM): 1. FM 4471 Approval Standard for Class 1 Panel Roofs 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements- 1. The roof system shall match the existing metal roof system installed on similar City projects. The manufacturer and product shall be in accordance with Part 2 of this Specification. 2. Provide a structural standing seam metal roof system with vertical seam side joint and separate mechanically seamed batten with factory-applied sealant. ■r 3. Roof panel system shall be attached to the support substrate with concealed anchor clips designed to allow for thermal movement of the panels. There shall be no exposed fasteners except at panel fixing locations and flashing details or as indicated on approved panel drawings. 4. Roof panel system shall be manufactured and installed to withstand specified design loads and maintain performance requirements without defects, damage, or failure. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Design wind loads to meet the requirements of the 2006 International Building Code (IBC) and 2007 State of Washington amendments. 2. Roof panels shall be designed for a maximum deflection under positive loading of L/180. 3. Performance Testing: Tests shall be conducted by or witnessed by a recognized independent laboratory or independent professional engineer. a. Air infiltration of the roof panel system shall be limited to 0.001 CFM/ft2 at a positive pressure differential of 20 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1680. b. There shall be no uncontrolled water penetration to the building interior when the roof panel system is tested per ASTM E1646 at a positive pressure differential of 20 psf. C. Allowable uniform uplift load capacity shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E 1592. The factor of safety against ultimate failure of the rr panel, batten, or clip shall be 1.65, with no increase for wind permitted. Allowable uplift capacity for conditions of gauge, span, or loading other than those tested may be determined by interpolation of the test results. Extrapolation of conditions outside the range of the test is not permitted. d. Roof panel system shall be successfully tested in accordance with FM 4471 for Class 1 approval with a 1-90 windstorm classification and lei 1-SH hail storm classification. e. Roof panels shall withstand a 250-pound concentrated load applied to a 4 square-inch area at the center of the panel at mid-span between supports with no panel deformation, rib buckling, or panel side lap separation which will adversely affect the weather integrity of the system. f. Basic wind-speed of 85 mph per the IBC. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for all materials and fasteners, test reports, and certifications mi in accordance with the Special Provisions and the quality assurance and performance requirements specified herein. VV:k2008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Sionegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100%Specs Jun2010110.07410_MetalRoofing-Revision.doc 6/1 412 01 0 w WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07410 Metal Roofing Page 3 of 8 B. Submit panel shop drawings consisting of design and erection drawings, finish specifications, and other data necessary to clearly describe the design, materials, sizes, layouts, construction details, and erection. Submit small-scale layouts of r panels and large-scale details of edge conditions,joints, fastener and sealant placement, flashings, penetrations, and special details. Distinction must be made between factory and field assembled work. Shop drawings shall be generated by roofing system manufacturer's engineering department. Drawings shall be stamped by Civil or Structural professional engineer registered in the state of Washington, who is a full-time employee of roofing system manufacturer. C. Submit structural design calculations, in accordance with the AISI Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, for the metal roof panel system. 1. A Civil or Structural professional engineer registered in Washington shall certify the calculations. D. Samples: 1. Panel: Full panel width by 12 inches long 2. Anchor Clips: Two 3. Fasteners: Two of each type with statement of intended use 4. Closure: One metal closure and one foam closure as required 5. Underlayment and Vapor Retarder: 12 inches square 6. Color sample: (3) Three 6-inch square minimum samples of roof color on metal substrate. Color is specified in Part 2. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall have had a minimum of five (5) years experience in the successful completion of projects employing similar materials, applications, and performance requirements. +* B. Installers Qualifications: The roof systems contractor shall have had a minimum of five (5) years experience in the successful completion of projects employing similar materials, applications, and performance requirements. 1. The roof systems contractor shall provide a list of five (5) similar completed projects with addresses of the project location. C. Manufacturer's Inspections: Manufacturer shall have a full-time employee on-site inspecting and supervising roofing installation a minimum of three times per week during the roof installation and provide photographic record once per week to the Owner. D. Trade Association Standards: Comply with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) specifications for material and workmanship not otherwise specified herein. rrr 1.06 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Conduct conference at Project site at least 14 days prior to beginning of roof installation. Meet with Owner, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 1. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun201M10.07410_MetalRoofing-Revision.doc 6/1 412 01 0 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07410 Metal Roofing Page 4 of 8 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 4. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 5. Review special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered to the site in a dry and undamaged condition and unloaded per the manufacturer's instructions. The installer shall inspect materials for damage and stains upon arrival to the site. Materials shall be stored out of contact with the ground in weather-tight coverings to keep them dry per the manufacturer's recommendations. Storage accommodations shall provide good air circulation and protection from surface staining. 1.08 WARRANTIES rrr A. Material Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant that the materials and accessories furnished in accordance with these specifications shall remain free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from date of shipment. B. Material Substrate Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant that the metal roof panel substrate will not rupture or perforate due to corrosion within a period of twenty (20) years from date of shipment. C. Finish Warranty.- The manufacturer shall warrant against fading, chalking, peeling, .r cracking, checking, chipping, or erosion to base metal of the exterior panel finish for a period of ten (10) years from date of installation. D. Weather-tight Warranty: Manufacturer shall provide a standard weather-tight + warranty against water penetration of the metal roof panel system, including panel side joint and trim conditions for a period of twenty (20) years from date of substantial completion. Coverage shall be limited to material and installation. Manufacturer's liability shall be limited to the material value paid to the manufacturer. Erector's liability shall be limited to the dollar amount paid for erection. 1. The warranty shall not be pro-rated during the first 10 years of the warranty period and the prorated value shall not decrease more than 5 percent per year thereafter. In no instance shall the replacement cost be prorated more than 50 percent of the value of a new roof. 1.09 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Provide a written guarantee signed by the roofing subcontractor and the Contractor for a period of three (3) years for work done under this Sub-Section. NOTE: If the manufacturer's standard warranty requires that the installer address installation W52 008108 9 7 00 3 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100°/,_Specs_Jun2010110.07410 MetalRoofing-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07410 Metal Roofing Page 5 of 8 problems during the warranty period, the Special Guarantee shall be for 5 year period. The guarantee shall: 1. Provide for the repair or replacement of work provided or installed under this Sub-Section that leaks or shows other signs of failure. 2. Provide for the repair or replacement of adjoining work necessitated by the above. 00 3. Provide for the repair or replacement of any other portions of the entire work covered by this Contract that are damaged as a result of leaks or other failure of work covered under this Sub-Section. 40 4. The guarantee shall not be pro-rated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 40 2.01 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING PANELS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tomen Building Components, Fontana, California rr„ (909) 428-1600. B. Substitutions: Materials, accessories, and testing specified match the existing City roof systems and installation. No substitutes will be considered that do not match the existing roofing system in profile, appearance and color. C. Materials: 1. Structural standing seam metal roof profile shall be TBC 305 Series. Profile shall have 18 inches of coverage width, with vertical seam side joint, and longitudinal stiffening planks to minimize the effects of"oil canning". a. Metal roof panels shall be fabricated from zinc coated steel conforming to ASTM A 653 SQ Grade 37 with G90 coating. Material shall be minimum 22-gauge with smooth surface texture. 2. All exterior flashing and trim shall be fabricated in the same material, gauge, finish, and color as the exterior profile, unless otherwise noted. 3. Concealed anchor clips shall be one piece, 16-gauge G90 galvanized steel, designed to accommodate unlimited, unimpeded panel movement. 4. Subgirts shall be fabricated from minimum 16-gauge zinc coated steel conforming to ASTM A 653 SQ Grade 37 with G90 coating. D. Finish: • 1. Roof panel material finish shall be factory coil coated in manufacturer's standard finish and color meeting the minimum requirements below. Color to be selected from manufacturer's standard line of colors. A white color must be available in the Standard color selection. 2. Exposed exterior surface finish shall be Flourofinish, consisting of 0.2 mil primer with 0.8 mil 70% Kynar 500. 3. Color: Match Evergreen, Code no. 815G112. 4. Concealed interior surface finish shall consist of a 0.2 mil primer and 0.3 mil backer coat. E. Fabrication: 1. Roof panel system components shall be fabricated in the factory for field assembly to the greatest extent possible. o 1W W:\2008\0897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010110.07410_MetalRoofing-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07410 Metal Roofing Page 6 of 8 2.02 INSULATION A. Rigid Insulation: Furnish rigid insulation in accordance with Sub-Section 10.07200. Insulation materials shall meet the metal roofing manufacturer's requirements for the project application. ' 2.03 MOISTURE BARRIER UNDERLAYMENT A. Underlayment: ASTM D 6163 or D 6222 Type I, Grade S, Polymer modified + bitumen membrane ranging in thickness from 40 to 160 mils and reinforced with glass fibers or polyester piles. Johns Manville Dynabase; Firestone; or equal. B. Eave protection: ASTM D 2626, 40-mil-thick sheet membrane consisting of polyethylene film laminated to self-adhesive rubberized asphalt. Grace Ice and Water Shield; or equal. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Concealed anchor clip screws shall be minimum #14 diameter, self-tapping, with hex head and Roofgrip by ITW Buildex or equal, with #3 Phillips head, and modified buttress thread. 2. Exposed screws shall be minimum #14 diameter, 300 series stainless steel, self-tapping, hex head with 5/8-inch bonded neoprene and stainless steel washers coated to match the exterior panel color. 3. Concealed screws shall be minimum #14 diameter, self-tapping, carbon steel with hex head and corrosion resistant coating. B: Closures: Closures shall be combination foam and metal. Foam shall be a pre-cut profile closure of closed cell foam. Metal closures shall be fabricated from the same material, gage, finish, and color as the exterior metal panel. Ridge closures shall be factory fabricated to panel width. Hip closures shall be cut to length in the field. + C. Sealants: 1. Factory applied side lap sealant shall be a one part, non-skinning, non-drying, synthetic butyl elastomer. 2. Field applied hidden sealant at all side laps, end laps, and flashing details shall be gun grade non-skinning butyl elastomer or polymeric non-skinning butyl tape to ensure weather tightness. 3. Exposed sealant shall be one-part moisture curing, gun grade polyurethane. Color to be coordinated with panel. .r D. Thermal spacers shall be composite metal channel with foam insert. E. Mastic Tape: Black, double-sided, asphaltic, pressure-sensitive, mastic tape. Griffolyn Fab Tape; or equal. F. Self-Adhesive Repair Tape: Griffolyn Griff-Tape; or equal. G. Pipe flashings shall be pre-molded EPDM rubber with metal collar. DEKTITEO by ITW Buildex; or equal. W:\200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegale\70-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.07410_MetalRoofing-Revision.doc 611412010 `o WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07410 Metal Roofing Page 7 of 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.0.1 INSPECTION A. Installer shall inspect the building to ensure that the structure is ready for roofing installation. 1. All supports shall be in place with all bracing and connections tightened before work proceeds. 2. Field-check dimensions and support alignment with a taut string or wire. Panel misalignment may induce "oil canning" and potentially restrict panel „arr movement. a. Panel maximum out-of-plane deviation shall be limited to ±3/16 inch from control. b. Maximum deviation between adjacent panel clips shall be limited to 1/8 inch or U500, whichever is less. 3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 RIGID INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install in 1-inch thick maximum individual layers. Insulation installation and fastening system shall be in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's requirements for this project's application. 3.03 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION rrr A. Underlayment: Lay one layer of modified bitumen felt over insulation board, lapping sides 6 inches minimum, and ends 12 inches minimum. r B. Eave Protection: Extend eave protection from roof perimeters to 2 feet inside interior wall line, including rake areas. Provide 6-inch side and end laps at eave and valley locations. Stagger end laps of consecutive layers 12 inches. 3.04 METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Install metal roofing system in accordance with approved erection drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install metal roofing system so that it is weathertight without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stress, or distortions. C. All attachments shall allow for thermal expansion and contraction of the roof panels. D. Install panels in one continuous length from eave to ridge. E. Hand-crimp battens at each clip. Panels must be hand-crimped before workers can +rr stand on the panels. F. Seam panels and battens together with portable electric seaming machine supplied by the manufacturer. ` G. Metal filings caused by cutting and drilling shall be immediately removed from finished surfaces to prevent rusting and staining. H. The roof panel systems contractor shall coordinate work with other trades as required to insure proper flashing and seals with adjoining construction. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Slonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100% Specs_Jun2010110.07410_MetalRoofing-Revision.doc 614/2010 WWP-27-34731i Sub-Section 10.07410 Metal Roofing Page 8 of 8 I. Protect installed panels from abuse by other trades. The general contractor shall be responsible for protecting the roofing from wet cement, plaster, and painting operations. The installer shall provide walk boards in heavy traffic areas to prevent damage to the panels. J. Flashing: Provide flashing at all pipes and penetrations through roof. Provide flashing at vertical surfaces adjoining the roof. Install flashing as shown detailed. If not detailed, do work equal to that shown in the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal manual to obtain a weathertight and watertight installation. 1. Roof penetrations shall be located between panel seams. 2. Penetrations that require flashing to extend beyond a panel seam shall lap Nei the seam a minimum of 4 inches and follow SMACNA Figure 112. 3. Penetrations larger than the metal panel width shall be centered on a panel and use a curb system similar to SMACNA Figure 113. „ 3.05 DAMAGED MATERIAL AND CLEANING A. Damage caused by the manufacturer or roof panel systems contractor shall be repaired or replaced. B. The general contractor shall inspect and approve each completed roof area and be responsible for protecting finished work from damage by other trades. C. The roof panel systems contractor shall remove all protective materials and labels from the roof components as they are installed. D. The general contractor shall be responsible for final cleaning of the roof panel system due to any conditions that occur after the roof panel systems contractor has completed an area. Cleaning is to be done in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SUB-SECTION as W:k200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegale110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100°/_Specs_Jun2010110.07410_MetalRoofing-Revision.doe 6/14/2010 .� WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal Page 1 of 6 SUB-SECTION 10.07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: ` 1. Sheet metal flashing, counterflashing, gutters, rainwater leaders, copings, expansion joints, and all other sheet metal work not covered in other sub-sections. .r B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.07200: Insulation 2. Sub-Section 10.07410: Metal Roofing 3. Sub-Section 10.07900: Joint Sealants 4. Sub-Section 10.09900: Painting - backpriming sheet metal work 5. Sub-Section 10.10200: Louvers 6. Sub-Section 10.15800: Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning - sheet metal ductwork. wr 1.02 REFERENCES A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual rr. B. Aluminum Association (AA): 1. 35-80 Aluminum Sheet Metal Work in Building Construction (Construction Manual Series Section 5). C. Copper Development Association (CDA): 1. Contemporary Copper, A Handbook of Sheet Copper Fundamentals, Design Details and Specifications. 2. Copper Roofing, A Practical Handbook. D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A167 Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 2. A240 Standard Specification for Heat-resisting Chromium And Chromium-nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip For Pressure Vessels. 3. A525 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 5. B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 6. D226 Standard Specification For Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used In Roofing And Waterproofing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS w. A. Submit in accordance with the Special Provisions. B. Product Data- Fully describe all manufactured items to be furnished. rrr W:12008t0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100°/_Specs_Jun2010110.07600_Flashing&SheetMetal-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal Page 2 of 6 C. Shop Drawings: Show all custom-fabricated items clearly illustrating the design, dimensions, materials, methods of construction, and installation of each piece of work. D. Manufacturers' Instructions: For manufactured items. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the International Building Code (IBC), 2006 edition, especially chapter 15, and Washington State Amendments. B. Where specific details are not provided comply with applicable details in the .r SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Standards. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver all items to the job site unpainted and in sufficient time for field priming and incorporation into work of other trades. B. Store materials under dry conditions and protect from moisture and physical no damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS as 2.01 MATERIALS ow A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Sheet Steel: ASTM A525, minimum 24-gauge thick, with 1.25 ounce coating. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T42. ■r C. Aluminium sheet : ASTM B209, alloy 6061-T6 or equal, .0.04 inch thick minimum. Material not scheduled for painting shall be dark bronze anodized. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240, Type 304, soft temper, 2D finish, minimum 26 gauge thick. E. Sheet Lead: Weighing 2.5 pounds per square foot (0.039-inch thick). 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Solder: ASTM B32, low lead solder. Use special solder for stainless steel. B. Flux: Noncorrosive. C. Fasteners: ., 1. To Concrete Masonry Units and Concrete: Deformed steel wedge pins driven into lead expansion shields; RAWL, Phillips, or equal. 2. To Wood Nailers and Sills: Pan head, noncorrosive, sheet metal screws. 3. Component Fasteners: Self-drilling/self-tapping, stainless steel screws, type S 12, Buildex TEKS; Gosche Fasteners; or equal. D. Flashing Reglets and Counterflashing: 1. Surface Type Reglet: 26-gauge, minimum, galvanized steel with stainless steel drive pins and neoprene washer, Fry Sprinklok Expan-O-Seal; Superior Cushion- Lock; or equal. , 2. Recessed Type Reglet: 26-gauge, minimum, galvanized steel, Fry, type CO; Superior Cushion-Lock; or equal. W 1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.07600_Flashing&SheetMetal-Revision.doc 6114/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal Page 3 of 6 3. Counterflashing: 26-gauge, minimum, galvanized steel formed to insure a tight seal against both reglet and roofing felts, Fry Springlok Flashing; Superior Cushion-Lock; or equal. 4. Valley Flashings: 26-gauge galvanized steel with a standing "V" center water diverter and folded "L" edges to stop windblown water. r. 2.03 SEAMLESS GUTTERS, DOWNSPOUTS, AND TRIM: A. Prefinished Aluminum: Minimum 0.40-inch thick box gutter and 2-inch by 3-inch rectangular rainwater leaders with a factory finish consisting of pretreatment plus a baked on primer and finish coat. Provide welded corner trim at intersections. B. Gutter Liner: 40 mil minimum thick, black EPDM roofing membrane Firestone; or equal. C. Fascia Trim over Wood Fascia: Minimum 0.40-inch thick with a factory finish consisting of pretreatment plus a baked on primer and finish coat. Each fascia board trim shall be a single piece. Trim shall cover exposed portions of the fascia including the portion hidden by the gutter. Fasteners shall be concealed behind gutter and soffit panel. Provide welded corner trim at intersections of rake, eaves, and ridge. D. Foundation Trim over perimeter Insulation: Minimum 0.40-inch thick with a factory finish consisting of pretreatment plus a baked on primer and finish coat. 2.04 FABRICATION r A. Before fabrication, take field measurements, ascertain existing field conditions and have discrepancies corrected before proceeding with sheet metal work. B. Fabricate sheet metal items in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate using techniques and methods described in the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Standards. "W C. Make sections uniform with true, straight breaks, accurately fitted and rigidly secured. Provide overlapping tabs for soldered joints. Fabricate items in maximum lengths. `p D. Provide accessories necessary to complete installation. Provide ribs, cleats, stiffeners, sleeves, hangers, and other reinforcements required to make sections rigid and substantial, in same metal as basic unit. 10 E. Miter corner joints and reinforce with extended tabs or backing plates. F. Soldering: All soldered joints shall lap at least 1-inch. Pre-tin and sweat-solder joints ift full width. Reinforce all soldered joints with metal rivets. Do not solder aluminum. G. Lap expansion joints at least 4 inches and seal with polyurethane sealant as specified in Sub-Section 10.07900. rr 2.05 FLASHING tr A. Flashing at Vent Pipes through Roof: 1. Fabricate a 24-gauge galvanized steel conical Flashing collar with roll-formed flared bottom edge, lapped and sweat-soldered watertight to 24-gauge galvanized steel bottom flange. "r 2. Fabricate a separate sheet lead counterflashing collar to fit around vent pipe and overlap conical Flashing collar. The top of counterflashing to be bent down inside the pipe. r 40 W1200810897003_City-of-Renton Sfonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs11001/._Specs Jun2010110.07600_f1ashin9&SheetMetal-Revision.doc 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal Page 4 of 6 B. Flashing at Continuous Pipes and Conduits through Roof 1. Fabricate a conical Flashing collar same as for vent pipes (paragraph 2.03A above). 2. Fabricate a separate sheet lead counterflashing collar to fit around pipe and ■r overlap conical Flashing collar. Furnish a stainless steel draw band with stainless steel tightening bolt. Seal the joint in the lead counterflashing and the joint between the counterflashing and the pipe with polyurethane sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Install flashing and sheet metal in accordance with AA and SMACNA references, and when in connection with roofing, roofing manufacturer's specifications. B. Install sheet metal to even smooth, sound, thoroughly clean and dry surfaces, free from defects that could affect installation. C. Insure that all wood nailers have been properly installed. D. Insure that all galvanized sheet metal items are prime coat painted on all concealed and exposed surfaces, under Sub-Section 10.09900, before installation. E. Install starter, edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. F. Perform cutting, fitting, drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet metal .w required to accommodate work of other sub-sections. G. Install sealer washers under metal washers or fastener heads where weather- tightness is required. ori H. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant. I. Insert counterflashings into reglets to form tight fit. J. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only as specified. ..r K. Seal lap and seam joints. Make connections water-tight and weather-tight. L. Apply roof cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. Fit .r flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and line accurate to profiles. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP .o A. All work shall be watertight and shall drain properly. B. Make proper allowance for expansion and contraction of the metals and of the .6 materials to which they are fastened. C. Form work accurately to sizes, shapes, and dimensions indicated or necessary, with angles and lines in true alignment, straight and sharp. ` D. Erect work plumb, level, and in proper plane, without bulges, or waves. Fit metal closely and neatly to cores or framework. Cope or flange intersections to fit accurately. Reinforce heavily loaded joints with screws or rivets. E. Soldering- Pre-tin and apply flux to surfaces of sheet metal. Slowly and thoroughly apply heat to completely sweat the solder through the full width of seam. W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton Stonegatell0-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun201000.07600_Flashing&SheetMetal-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 me WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal Page 5 of 6 F. Set items in sealant or plastic cement as shown or noted; or when such application is necessary to provide a watertight job. G. Provide isolation between dissimilar metals or other materials with sealant, butyl tape, bituminous paint or asphalt saturated felt. H. Perform sealant work in conformance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.07900. 3.03 FLASHING A. Install all flashings as required to provide watertight protection. ++� B. Lap all seams in direction of water flow. C. Carry flashings around corners at least 4 inches. D. Lap joints 4 inches minimum. Apply sealant to the overlapping surfaces of the joints. E. Flashing at Vent Pipes through Roof: 1. Provide a 24-gauge galvanized steel conical Flashing collar with roll-formed bottom flange soldered to 24-gauge base flashing. The base flashing shall extend 8 inches minimum from the base of the conical collar all around. 2. Provide a separate counterflashing collar for the top of the vent pipe. F. Flashing at Round Ducts, Conduits, and Other Pipe through Roof: 1. Provide a conical Flashing collar same as for vent pipes. 2. Provide a separate counterflashing collar over the conical collar. Use a stainless steel draw band to fasten top of counterflashing around the pipe or conduit. Embed counterflashing in a 2-inch-wide bed of sealant and apply a large bead of sealant to the top exposed edge. G. Flashing at Curb Mounted Equipment, and Similar Rectangular Projections through Roof.- 1. oof:1. Provide 24-gauge galvanized steel counterflashings. Fold Flashings at least 4 inches around corners and lap in the direction of water or wind. 2. Provide a shop fabricated saddle Flashing (cricket) at the uphill side of skylights and equipment curbs installed on roofs sloping more than 1/4-inch per foot. err 3. Lap end joints 4 inches and seal with sealant. H. Roof Flashing: 1. Provide reglets and 24-gauge galvanized counterflashing at all parapets and where shown. 2. Lap joints 3 inches minimum. Lap, miter, and solder at corners. 3. Apply sealant to the top of surface mounted reglets. ` I. Provide sill and head flashing at all louvers as shown in Drawings and as required for a watertight installation. Furnish in the same metal as the louver. Louvers are specified under Sub-Section 10.10200. r J. Provide Flashing where shown in Drawings and where required for a watertight installation. 3.04 SEAMLESS GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS.- A. OWNSPOUTS:A. Gutters: Install gutters along roof edge using stainless steel fasteners. Seal joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. wr 11W W:12008\0897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.07600_FlashingSSheetMetal-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal Page 6 of 6 B. Downspouts: Install downspouts with all related fittings. Connect downspouts to rain gutters where shown using special gutter fittings with downspout sleeve. Seal all joints. Attach to building with matching prefinished straps and stainless steel fasteners. C. Gutter Membrane: Install EPDM gutter liner in 20-foot-long sections minimum. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches and seal. Seal all edges and at rainwater leader connections. Extend the membrane under the wall reglet and to the underside of the canopy metal roof crimped fitting. 3.05 CLEANUP irr A. Clean all finished surfaces, removing all solder, flux, etc. Neutralize soldering flux with a 5 to 10 percent washing soda solution, wash down all work with soap and hot water, flush with clean water, and wipe dry. B. Repair or replace all damaged or defective areas to ensure watertightness and neat appearance. END OF SUB-SECTION w W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_SpecsJun2010110.07600—Flashing&Sheebmetal-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 .r WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07900 Joint Sealants Page 1 of 4 do SUB-SECTION 10.07900 JOINT SEALANTS 4W PART 1 - GENERAL rrr 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. Sealant work required: a. For a watertight project. b. To provide sanitary conditions. "" c. Required by code and not specifically covered in another sub-section. 2. Seal between all plumbing fixtures and adjacent surfaces. 3. Minimum standards for all sealant work whether covered in this Sub-Section or in ar other sub-sections. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension. war 2. D624 Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomer. 3. C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. aw B. Federal Specifications: 1. TT-S-00-230C Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other + ► Structures) 2. TT-S-00-227E Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) 3. TT-S-00-1543A Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) �1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. B. Product Data: Fully describe all products proposed for use. C. Samples: Physical samples of cured sealants for selection of colors. r D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Application instructions for all products used. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE *W A. Qualifications: Provide sealant work performed by a licensed Specialty Sealant and Waterproofing Contractor who is exclusively engaged in sealant application work. All work to be performed by qualified journeymen proficient in the craft of sealant application. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the International Building Code (IBC), 2006 wr edition, especially Chapters 15, 24, and 25, and Washington State amendments. 4W W:12008W897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs11001/6Specs_Jun2010110.07900 JointSealants.doc 8114/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07900 Joint Sealants Page 2 of 4 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Apply sealant only when temperature and humidity conditions are at the levels recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 1.06 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Provide a written Special Guarantee in accordance with the Special Provisions covering replacement of sealant work that fails within 2 years of the date of project acceptance. Failure includes: 1. Becoming brittle or cracking due to exposure, contraction, or expansion. 2. Failure to resist abrasion of normal use and traffic. 3. Tear failure due to movement within 50% of joint width for Class A sealants. 4. Cohesive or adhesive failure due to movement within 50% of joint width for Fed. Spec. Class A sealants. "' 5. Water infiltration for joints intended to exclude water, air infiltration for joints intended to exclude air. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sealant Type "A": Exterior and interior horizontal traffic deck sealant two-part self- leveling polyurethane with a Shore "A" hardness of 30-35, conforming to Fed. Spec. TT S 00227E Class A, Type I, in color selected. Acceptable products: 1. Tremco THC 900, used with Deckline Primer 2. Pacific Polymers Elastothane 230SL with Elastothane Primer 3. Or equal. B. Sealant Type "B": Exterior and interior vertical surface sealant one-part polyurethane for use in joints in concrete, metal, and similar materials, conforming to Fed. Spec. TT S 00230C Type II, Class A, in color selected. Acceptable products are: 1. Tremco Vulkem 116 2. Sika Sikaflex 1A 3. Or equal. C. Sealant Type "C": Paintable silicone sealant suitable for sealing cracks, voids, joints, etc. in exterior or interior surfaces that are to be painted or left unpainted. Acceptable products are: 1. General Electric SCS1200 2. Dow Corning Number 795 3. Or equal. as D. Sealant Type "D": Silicone sealant for concrete expansion joints, meeting Fed. Spec. TT S 001543A, Class A. Acceptable products are- 1. Dow Corning Number 888 2. General Electric SCS1800 Series 3. Or equal. E. Sealant Type "E": Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: One part silicone sealant for sealing non-porous interior surfaces where conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes exist. Acceptable products are: 1. Tremco Tremsil 200 2. General Electric SCS1700 3. Or equal. W9200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-Eng Desi gn110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.07900 JointSealants.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07900 Joint Sealants Page 3 of 4 F. Sealant Type "F": Two-component, modified polyurethane sealant intended to resist up to five parts per million of chlorine or ozone in water, for interior and exterior use. Acceptable products are: +rw 1. Select Products Co. Select Seal U920 2. Sika Sikaflex 2C 3. Or equal. G. Sealant Type "G": Silicone glazing sealant. Acceptable products are: 1. Dow Corning Silicone Glazing Sealant 2. General Electric SCS2000 +1r 3. Or equal. H. Sealant Type "H": Polysulfide sealant, two component, chemical resistant, low viscosity, highly flexible epoxy polysulfide elastomer compound for high performance bonding; Shore "S" 45 to 50 durometers; tensile strength, 300 psi minimum; elongation, 450% minimum; joint movement, 25 percent minimum. Acceptable products are: �r 1. Master Bond Polymer System EP21TPFL-1 2. Thiokol 2282 3. Or equal. wo I. Sealant Backup: Polyethylene rod stock. Acceptable products are: 1. Dow Corning Ethafoam 2. Hercules, Inc. HBR Backer Rod me 3. Or equal. J. Sealant Tape: Resilient, nonstaining, 100% vulcanized butyl rubber, scrim reinforced, self-adhering, extruded sealant tape containing no asphalts. Acceptable products so are: 1. Protective Treatments, Inc., #303 2. Tremco 440 am 3. Or equal. PART 3 -.EXECUTION ow 3.01 CONDITION OF SUBSTRATE r A. Allow concrete and masonry to cure for at least 28 days before applying sealants. B. Inspect substrates to receive sealant work for: 1. Deviation beyond allowable tolerance for joint width and required clear joint depth. Joint width shall not be less than 1/4 inch or the width shown. 2. Presence of contaminants, which cannot be removed by normal joint cleaning. 3. Presence of moisture. Joint surfaces shall be dry. C. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Clean surfaces to which sealant is to be adhered: 1. For Concrete and Masonry: Sandblast joint surfaces taking care to protect exposed finish surfaces. 2. For Metal: Sand or scrape and solvent clean with a non-film forming solvent. 3. For Ceramic Tile: Scrape, sand, or grind. 4. For Wood: Sand or scrape. VW B. Ensure that cleaned surfaces are not contaminated before applying sealant. aw W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010110.07900_JointSealants.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.07900 Joint Sealants Page 4 of 4 3.03 APPLICATION A. Follow sealant manufacturer's published instructions. B. Install sealant backup the proper distance from face of joint for joint proportioned in wir accordance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Use polyethylene rod stock larger than joint so that backup can be firmly held in place. C. Apply primer and/or cleaner conditioner recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrate. Avoid getting primer on the face of material or on areas that will not be covered by sealant. D. Mask edges of joint with masking tape where required to avoid contamination of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint. E. Apply self-leveling sealant by pouring, pumping or with a caulking gun. When using pump or caulking gun fill joint from the bottom up to avoid air entrapment. Fill joint flush with surface of adjacent material without overfilling or spilling sealant on exposed surfaces. F. Apply vertical grade sealants by hand or power operated caulking gun. Use a caulking tip the proper width for the joint required. Fill the joint from the bottom up to insure a fully filled joint without entrapped air bubbles or voids. Use lubricant „r;M recommended by sealant manufacturer to tool joints. Force sealant against sides and bottom of joint and into all crevices; press out air bubbles and voids. Tool sealant surface smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces for butt joints or to an even, straight-sided fillet of uniform width and slope for fillet joints. G. Where the substrate or adjacent sealants are incompatible with the specified sealant, submit a sealant suitable for the required use and of equivalent life expectancy to the specified sealant. 3.04 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Apply sealant in expansion joints when the joint opening width is approximately halfway between dimensional extremes of thermal movement. B. Place sealant backer rod the proper distance from face of joint to insure that sealant bead depth is never more than half the bead width at any time between dimensional extremes of joint. wr 3.05 SEAL BETWEEN PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ADJACENT SURFACES A. Install a bead of mildew resistant silicone sealant (Sealant E) between plumbing fixtures, countertops, shower enclosures and similar items and the surfaces they are mounted on. 3.06 CLEANUP ► A. Upon completion, remove protective masking and clean any sealant from adjacent finished surfaces beyond edge of joint. END OF SUB-SECTION nrti W:1200810897003_City-oi-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun201000.07900_JointSealants.doc 611 412 01 0 40 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.08110 Steel Door and Frames Page 1 of 5 SUB-SECTION 10.08110 STEEL DOOR AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL .r 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. All hollow metal work including: a. Doors and frames B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.08700: Finish Hardware 1.02 REFERENCES err A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A151.1 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Wo Doors and Hardware Reinforcing 2. A167 Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip 3. A366 Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality 4. A569 Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent) Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality 5. A653 Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 6. A924 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. I. 7. E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. 8. E152 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 9. E413 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's (NAAMM): 1. Hollow Metal Doors HMMA 810 ++w 2. Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, HMMA 861 C. Steel Door Institute (SDI): 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames, SD1-100 1.03 SUBMITTALS ow A. Submit in accordance with the Special Provisions. B. Product Data: Fully describe all products proposed for use. Include data and details on door construction including internal reinforcement and door edge construction. C. Shop Drawings: Submit custom prepared project-specific shop drawings showing dimensions and details. Include a schedule showing locations of doors and frames complete with listing of types and styles. Field measure before ordering. Provide frames with throat opening size required by field conditions regardless of size shown on Drawings. Review of door frame submittal DOES NOT include review of throat opening dimension for compatibility with field requirements or Contract Documents. wr iii W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate\10-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.08110_Stee1Doors&Frames.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.08110 Steel Door and Frames Page 2 of 5 D. Manufacturers' Certificates of Compliance: Before delivery of doors, frames, and to accessories, submit certificates from the manufacturer attesting that doors, frames, and accessories meet the requirements of the referenced standards. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with the International Building Code (IBC), 2006 edition, and Washington State Amendments. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Inspect doors, frames, and accessories delivered to the site for damage. Unload and store with a minimum of handling. During delivery, strap door frames of so welded unit construction together in pairs with the head of one frame inverted for bracing. Replace doors and frames damaged during delivery. B. Provide a bottom spreader bar tack welded to frames to maintain jamb alignment ,r until frames are installed. C. Storage: Store doors and frames carefully on platforms under cover in dry and accessible locations, which are adequately ventilated and free from dust or water and which permit easy access for inspection and handling. Avoid the use of non- vented plastic or canvas shelters that create a humidity chamber. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS w A. Acceptable manufacturers include Forderer Hollow Metal Products; Fire Protection Products; Republic; Steelcraft; Ceco; or equal. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Frames, Galvanized: 1. Fabricate from hot dipped galvanized sheet steel meeting ASTM A653, G90. W* 2. Minimum zinc coating: 0.90 total both sides ounces per square foot of metal surface. 3. Metal thickness: 14 gauge or heavier where noted. + B. Doors, Galvanized: 1. Fabricate face sheets and edge channels from hot dipped galvanized steel sheet meeting ASTM A653, G 90. 2. Minimum Zinc Coating: 0.90 ounces per square foot of metal surface. 3. Metal Thickness: 16 gauge or heavier where noted. 4. Moldings for Glass Lights: 16-gauge galvanized steel. C. Jamb Anchors: 1. Provide the number of anchors required by the fire rating but not less than the following number for each jamb. a. Frames up to 7'-6" high, three anchors. b. Frames 7'-6" to 8'-0" high, four anchors. c. Frames over 8'-0" high, four anchors plus one additional anchor for each 2 feet or fraction thereof above 8 feet. d. Provide head anchors at 2-foot centers for openings wider than 3 feet. W:1200810897003_City-0t-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100% Specs_Jun201000.08110 Stee1Doors&Frames.d00 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.08110 Steel Door and Frames Page 3 of 5 2. Frames in Masonry Walls: Provide adjustable tee strap, jamb anchors. Metal thickness: 16-gauge minimum. D. Floor Anchors: 14-gauge minimum thickness, welded to frame at each jamb or mullion, punch for two 3/8-inch-diameter anchor bolts. Additional jamb anchors do not waive the requirement for floor anchors. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate in the shop. Accurately fit all work and fabricate in a manner to produce smooth, even surfaces free from warp, wave, buckle, and other defects. Make square corners and angles unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. Set members in proper alignment, with edges straight and clean. Make provisions for hardware at locations according to prevailing accepted standards and as shown on the Drawings. B. Galvanized Doors and Frames: All exterior doors and frames shall be galvanized. C. Preparation for Hardware: Make to hardware templates and physical hardware. Locate center of lever handles 38 inches above the floor. Locations shall be coordinated between frames and doors, as shown on the Drawings and according to wr applicable accessibility and other code requirements. Make cutouts as required for intrusion alarm switches where scheduled. Punch stops of all frames for silencers, three in latching stop for single doors, two in head of double door frames. D. Frames: Fully welded, seamless construction with no visible seams or joints, strong, rigid, and constructed so as not to bind, sag, twist, or otherwise fail in use. Provide frames with throat opening dimension required to meet field requirements regardless of throat size shown. 1. Frame members: Form each frame member from one piece of sheet steel. 2. Joints: Miter corner joints, including integral stops, reinforce and weld continuously full length of joint. Fit other joints neatly and weld continuously full length of joint. 3. Jamb anchors: Weld to inside jamb. 4. Floor anchors: Weld to bottom of door frame jambs. 5. Spreaders.- Connect removable steel channel spreader ties across bottoms of welded door frames to hold rigid during shipping and until they are secured in place in the work. 6. Hardware reinforcing: Weld in place, comply with NAAMM CH-1 standards. Shop drill and tap for template hardware. Field-drill and tap for surface mounted hardware. a. Templates: Obtain from finish hardware manufacturer. b. Hinges: 7-gauge steel, 1-1/4 inches wide by not less than 10 inches long. Prepare for full mortise hinges. ir. c. Strikes: 12-gauge steel, 1-1/2 inches wide with minimum lap of 2 inches beyond cutout. d. Closers: 12-gauge steel, length to accommodate closer. Provide reinforcing at two locations on each frame for installation of either regular or parallel arm closers whether or not closers are scheduled. e. Plaster guards: 24-gauge steel, provide at strike and hinge reinforcing. f. Flush bolts: 12-gauge steel. 7. At exterior locations and where noted, provide shop welded 16-gauge galvanized steel rain hood at head of door frame. dw W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton Sfonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.08110 SteelDoorsUrames.doc 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.08110 Steel Door and Frames Page 4 of 5 E. Doors:. 1. Type: SDI Type III, extra heavy duty, fully welded style 2 full flush hollow steel construction for interior doors and exterior doors. Doors shall have no visible joints or seams on exposed faces and vertical edges. 2. Top and bottom rails: 16-gauge channel; fully flush design, continuous welded to face sheets. 3. Face sheet (or face panel) reinforcing shall meet the requirements of ANSI A151 for twist strength. The following methods are acceptable: a. Continuous vertical stiffeners of not lighter than 22-gauge steel, spaced not to exceed 6 inches on centers and spot welded to both face sheets at intervals not greater than 6 inches. Fill all voids with insulation. b. An inner grid system consisting of vertical and horizontal members of not lighter than 18-gauge steel; welded or interlocked for maximum strength and spaced not to exceed an average of 12 inches in either direction, and spot welded to both face sheets at intervals not greater than 6 inches.-Fill all voids with insulation. c. A continuous formed sheet steel truss core, full height and width, spot welded W to face sheet at intervals not greater than 6 inches in both directions. Fill all voids with insulation. d. Doors required to have a maximum temperature rise on the protected side shall have insulating cores as required to achieve the specified performance. 4. Edge profile: Bevel vertical edges of stiles 1/8-inch in 2 inches. 5. Door thickness: 1-3/4 inches or thicker as noted. 6. Clearances: 3/32-inch clearance at jambs and head and 3/8-inch clearance at bottom; 1/4-inch clear between door and threshold where threshold occurs. Provide required clearance between door and stop to accommodate smoke gasket. 7. Exterior doors: Provide a watertight flush closing channel at the top edge. Provide weep holes in the bottom closure to permit escape of entrapped moisture. WA 8. Hardware reinforcing: Comply with NAAMM CHM-1 Standards. Shop drill and tap' for template hardware. For surface mounted hardware, drill and tap in the field. a. Hinge: 7 gauge +r+ b. Lockset: 12 gauge c. Flush bolt: 12 gauge d. Closer: 9 gauge 9. Provide reinforcement for closers both sides of all interior doors whether closers are scheduled or not. F. Astragals: Provide 1/8-inch-thick flat plate astragal welded to active leaf of paired doors unless other type of astragal is called for. 2.04 FINISHES A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.09900 for surface preparation, pretreatment, primers, and application techniques. B. Apply one shop coat of rust inhibiting primer to all ferrous metal not scheduled to be galvanized. C. Galvanized work is to be prepared and field prime painted coat and finish coat painted under Sub-Section 10.09900. DO NOT SHOP-PRIME GALVANIZED WORK. .w W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Slonegatell0-EngDesignl10.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.08110 SteelD00rsUrames.doc 6/1412010 .w WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.08110 Steel Door and Frames Page 5 of 5 2.05 GALVANIZING REPAIR A. Repair damaged galvanizing by one of the following methods in conformance with ASTM A780: 1. Zinc-Rich Solder- Galvalloy by Metalloy Products Company; Gal-Viz by Thermacote Welco; or equal. 2. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Paint: ZIRP by Duncan Galvanizing; Brite Zinc by Brite " Products; or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Frames: Set accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottom of frames securely to floors. Secure wall anchors to adjoining construction as indicated or required. B. Grouting: Fill space between door frames and wall solid with grout in poured concrete and masonry walls and elsewhere when noted. 1. Masonry walls: Fill space between door frames and block with cement mortar at the same time as masonry units are being laid up. Apply a bead of one part polyurethane sealant between the block and door frame on the exterior side of the opening per Sub-Section 10.07900. 2. Previously poured concrete walls: a. Set frames in position and apply one part polyurethane sealant all around per Sub-Section 10.07900. b. Pump grout mixture of sand, portland cement and water prepared in accordance with Masonry Specifications in Section 10.4 into the frame filling all voids solid. Wo C. Hanging Doors: Set accurately, snug against all stops, and free from hinge bind. If shimming is required use sheet brass shims. Install hardware, weather stripping, and smoketight gaskets. Adjust closing and latching speed of door closers for smooth operation, self-closing and automatic positive latching. Fasten with matching machine screws or bolts at all points where fasteners are indicated or required. Leave hardware in perfect working order. Clean and polish. D. Remove locksets, latchsets, and kickplates for field painting of doors. Replace hardware after painting work is completed. E. Repair damaged galvanizing by the heated substrate repair method using galvanized .,� touch-up material specified in Part 2 of this Sub-Section. END OF SUB-SECTION aw W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100%_SpecsJun2010t1008110_SteelDoorsUrames.doc 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.08305 Access Doors Page 1 of 2 SUB-SECTION 10.08305 ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. Ceiling Access Hatch 2. Access doors not furnished under Sections 10.15 or 10.16. 3. Requirements for access doors furnished under other sections. B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.06100: Rough Carpentry 2. Sub-Section 10.09250: Gypsum Wallboard 3. Sub-Section 10.15400: Plumbing 4. Sub-Section 10.16010: General Electrical Requirements od 1.02 REFERENCES A. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Standards: .w 1. 10B - 2008 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the Special Provisions: 1. Product Data: Fully describe all items proposed for use. Include "listing" or fire rating data sheet for all fire rated assemblies. 2. Shop Drawings: Show dimensions and details. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. Comply with the applicable sections of the International Building Code (IBC), 2006 edition, and Washington State Amendments. 2. ASTM Standard method E 119-09a and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. tot Standard 10B - 2008, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. B. Certifications: 40 1. Provide fire-rated doors and frames tested in accordance with ASTM 119-09a and UL Standard 10B and then "Listed" and labeled by an independent testing agency maintaining a re-inspection service such as Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.; Warnock Hersey; or equivalent. 2. Provide labeled assemblies. Indicate the rating and class of opening, for - example, 1-hour "B" label. Provide fire-rated assemblies acceptable to regulatory agencies having jurisdiction such as the local or State Fire Marshal. 3. Install fire-rated assemblies in accordance with the requirements of the fire rating or "listing." w W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.08305_Access Doors.doc 6114/2010 ,rtri WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.08305 Access Doors Page 2 of 2 C. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Comply with manufacturer's published recommendations for installation of material used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOORS A. Access Doors: 1. Manufacturer: Inryco/Milcore; J. L. Industries; or equal. 2. 20-inch wide by 30-inch long minimum clear opening for ceiling access hatch. Other sizes are indicated or as required for access. 3. Suitable for wall or ceiling finish and type of construction. 4. Self-latching with flush key operated cylinder locks. 5. Phosphated treat and paint metal parts with a baked on primer. Doors shall be manufactured by Inryco/Milcore; J. L. Industries; or equal. 6. Access Door Types: a. Ceiling Access Hatch: Provide fire resistive 1-1/2-inch recessed panel type access doors designed to receive one layer of 5/8-inch gypsum wallboard. 16-gauge frame and 18-gauge reinforced door panel. Door shall not be self-closing b. Equipment Access: For installation in ceilings or walls finished with gypsum rr wallboard, provide flush panel, fire-rated 1-1/2-hour "B" label access doors for installation in one-hour and two-hour fire-rated assemblies. Self-closing access doors. Frames: 16-gauge steel. Door panels: Double pan type with 20-gauge faces filled with mineral fiberboard. c. Maximum U-Value 0.13 for any door on exterior of building or between an unconditioned and conditioned space. , PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish access door to trades framing walls or installing wall finishes for installation by them. Provide installing trades with instructions for installing "listed" fire-rated doors and verify that doors installed in fire-rated assemblies are installed in accordance with the fire rating "listing" requirements of the testing agency. END OF SUB-SECTION w r iwr W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.08305_Access Doors.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.08700 Finish Hardware Page 1 of 5 SUB-SECTION 10.08700 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install all finish hardware. 2. Supervision of the coordination, preparation, and installation of Finish Hardware by a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.08110: Steel Door and Frames - preparation for hardware in hollow metal doors and frames 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/BHMA: Product standards for all specified items. ,w B. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI): 1. Basic Architectural Hardware. 2. Abbreviations and Symbols. 'r"r 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. B. Product Data: Fully describe every product proposed for use. C. Shop Drawings: Submit hardware list and schedule prepared by a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant in accordance with DHI recommendations. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: For mounting, installing, and adjusting hardware. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Hardware Supplier: 1. Engaged in supplying builder's hardware for projects of comparable size and shape for a minimum of 5 years. 2. Has a full-time certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) on staff that will prepare the hardware submittal and supervise installation of all finish hardware. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. International Building Code (IBC), 2006 edition, especially Chapter 10, and Washington State amendments. 2. Federal and State handicapped access and use requirements, including and without limitation IBC Chapter 11 and referenced ANSI 117 standards. 1.05 DELIVERY A. Deliver hardware with items for each opening packed together, complete, and ready for installation with necessary fittings, trim, fasteners and accessories. Mark packages with opening number for identification. B. Deliver templates and installation instructions. W 1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.08700 FinishHardware.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.08700 Finish Hardware Page 2 of 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide hardware that complies with applicable fire and building codes. Provide all hardware, smoke gaskets, and thresholds listed for a fire assembly of the required rating for all doors required to be fire rated. B. Provide hardware that fits perfectly, is of uniform color, and is free of imperfections affecting serviceability or marring appearance. + + C. Deliver hardware in a timely manner as required by the Contractor's Schedule. Furnish materials or templates to others when required for factory installation or preparation. D. Provide adequate functioning hardware for all doors whether scheduled or not. See paragraph 3.028 of this Sub-Section. E. Where the hardware manufacturer's product number specified does not provide hardware meeting fire codes, condition of use, function, hand, mounting conditions, strikes, stops, keepers or fasteners required for a satisfactory installation, provide items of equivalent or better quality meeting applicable project conditions. F. Coordinate with the work of other trades in furnishing and placing finish hardware. rr 2.02 HARDWARE A. Fasteners: Furnish all necessary screws, bolts or other fastenings of suitable size and type to anchor the hardware in position for heavy use and long life; provide fasteners that match the material and finish of the hardware. Where necessary, provide expansion shields, sex bolts, screws, or other anchors appropriate for substrate that the hardware is installed on. Provide machine screws and soft metal expansion shields to fasten hardware to concrete, masonry, plaster, and similar materials. Plastic or fiber inserts are not acceptable. B. Finish: Provide all hardware with the following finish: 1. US32D (630) satin stainless steel. C. Locksets: 1. Mortise Locksets: Heavy duty, with 6-pin cylinder with interchangeable core. Schlage "L" Series; Corbin 9700 Series; or equal. Provide lever handles. Design: Schlage 03; Corbin 779L; or equal. 2. Backset: 2 3/4 inches. 3. Strikes: Furnish standard strikes with extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt. Provide dust boxes. Verify whether standard or ANSI cutouts are provided in metal frames. D. Padlocks: 1. Solid brass or stainless steel, with case hardened steel shackle, 1-inch clearance, with 9-inch-long chain. 9W 2. Keying: Interchangeable core cylinder matching Owner's Best Lock keying system. E. Keys and Keying, Interchangeable Core Type: 1. All keyed locksets and padlocks shall be supplied with interchangeable core cylinders to match Owner's interchangeable core and keying system. The Owner system is a Best lock system and RW3 key. wr rill W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Sionegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.08700_FinishHardware.doc 6114/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.08700 Finish Hardware Page 3 of 5 2. All cylinders shall be supplied with temporary construction cores for Contractor's use. Permanent cores shall be delivered directly to the Owner. 3. Furnish three (3) change keys per lock. Stamp all keys, "Do Not Duplicate." 4. Furnish construction keying. Deliver two (2) extra keys directly to the Owner. Retain construction keys and cores for future lockout purposes. F. Hinges: Butts, Full Mortised. Provide nonremovable pins for all exterior outswinging doors. Provide ball bearing steel butts for interior doors and stainless steel ball bearing butts for exterior doors. Stanley Hardware FBB179 Series; or equal. 1. Unless otherwise specified, determine the size of the butts by the following table: ► a. Doors 1 3/8-inch thick to have 3 1/2-inch. b. Doors 1-3/4-inch thick and up to 41-inch wide to have 4 1/2-inch. C. Doors 1 3/4-inch thick, 42-inch to 48-inch wide to have 4-1/2-inch +r heavy. d. Doors 2-inch thick, and 1 3/4-inch doors over 48-inch wide to have 5-inch extra heavy. 2. Provide widths sufficient to clear trim projection when door swings 180 degrees. 3. Provide three (3) hinges to 90-inch high for each door leaf: a. Four (4) hinges to 120-inch high for each door leaf. b. Five (5) hinges to 150-inch high for each door leaf. C. Six (6) hinges to 180-inch high for each door leaf. G. Doorstop, Floor-Mounted: Stainless steel or solid brass plated to match hardware. Provide risers to increase height as required to suit conditions. Glynn Johnson GJFB13/14; or equal. H. Doorstop/Holder, Floor-Mounted: Provide a strike with a hinged hook that fits flush with the strike when unit is acting as a stop only. The hook is manually lifted to engage the hold-open lug. When released, the hook drops back flush with the strike. Provide in stainless steel or solid brass finished or plated to match hardware. Note: UL requirements do not permit hold-open feature on fire-rated door assemblies. Glynn Johnson GJF25; or equal. I. Kickplates: All material shall be stainless steel, bronze or brass finished to match hardware, 0.050 gauge with beveled edges, 12-inch high x 1-1/2-inch narrower than single door or 1-inch narrower than pairs of doors. 1rrt J. Thresholds: Clear aluminum thresholds. Pemko; Reese; or equal. K. Silencers: Pneumatic rubber, installed in metal frame stops. Furnish three for 40 single doors and two for pair of doors. Omit silencers where door seal occurs and for exterior doors. - L. Weatherstripping: Provide doorjamb and head seal at all exterior doors: 3/16-inch + x 1/2-inch kerf-in magnetic weatherseal 2815_M; or equal. M. Astragal Seal: Recessed double magnetic seal, Pemko 354 S or equal. This is in addition to the steel astragal mounted on the face of the active door leaf. N. Manual Flush Bolts: Provide concealed manual top and bottom flush bolts on the active leaf of pairs of doors. Provide bolts designed to be mounted in the edge of the door with concealed vertical rod activators, having a 5/8-inch throw and a 7/8-inch adjustment and a spring snap lever action. Glynn-Johnson FB30 Series; or equal. W:1200810897003_City-ot-Renton_StonegateUO-Eng Design110.01-Specs17001/6Specs_Jun2010110.08700—FinishHardware.doc 6114/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.08700 Finish Hardware Page 4 of 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Be responsible for the proper location, fit and operation of all finish hardware items under the appropriate headings. Install finish hardware according to the Drawings, Specifications, and finish hardware manufacturer's instruction. tw Place and adjust stops and or shim hinges to provide clearance for smoketight gaskets and to prevent doors from binding on stops or frames. B. Make the right-hand door or right-hand reverse door the active leaf of a pair of doors unless indicated otherwise. C. Fitting: Properly cut, drill, shape, reinforce, and otherwise fabricate items upon which finish hardware is to be installed according to templates, physical hardware and finish hardware manufacturer's instructions to insure proper attachment and function. + . D. Adjustment: Install all lock cylinders to accept keys with the teeth facing up. Adjust, shim, align all hardware to operate smoothly without binding or rubbing and so that self-closing and automatic closing doors will latch automatically. E. Doorstops/Holders/Keepers: 1. Where physical conditions do not permit installation of the specified doorstop, holder, or keeper without creating a tripping hazard, provide a suitable item of •® comparable quality that will perform the intended function and can be installed such as a wall-mounted or surface overhead door-mounted device. 2. Locate doorstops, holders, and keepers so doors will be held open in the t maximum open position. F. Defective Installation: Appearance, installation, attachment, and operation of finish hardware shall be subject to review by the Owner. Replace finish hardware found unacceptable as directed. 3.02 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The Contractor is responsible for providing all finish hardware together with all components, accessories, and fasteners necessary for a complete and smooth operating installation. B. Provide the following hardware meeting the requirements of this Specification Sub-Section as a minimum for each door or each leaf of a pair of doors whether scheduled or not. Provide: 1. Hinges (furnish ball bearing stainless steel). 2. Mortise lock with lever handle, Class Room Function unless otherwise directed. Provide lock on inactive leaf of pair of doors. 3. Doorstop. 4. Manual flush bolt on inactive leaf of each pair of doors. 5. Weatherstripping. �r W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010I0.08700_FinishHardware.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.08700 Finish Hardware Page 5 of 5 C. Items in the following hardware schedule are referenced by catalog number to the to first named manufacturer: Item 1st Manufacturer 2nd Manufacturer Butts, hinges Hagar Stanley; orequal Locksets, latches, cylinders, Schlage Corbin padlocks Closers LCN Sargent; orequal Exit devices Von Du rin Sargent; or equal Silencers, stops, holders Glynn-Johnson Builder's Brass; orequal Flush bolts, strikes Glynn-Johnson Builder's Brass; or equal Automatic door bottoms, Pemko Reese; or equal weatherseals „ Thresholds Pemko Reese; orequal D. Schedule of Hardware Groups: 1. Hardware Group#1 Each pair of doors shall have: 4 pair butt hinges 1 lockset ANSI Function F20 1 door pull on inside (no external hardware) 1 steel astragal 1 set top and bottom manual flush bolts 1 dust proof strike 1 set magnetic weather seals Qambs, head) 1 set recessed astragal seal 2 automatic drop bottoms 2 door stops with hold-open hook 2 kickplates mounted on interior 1 threshold END OF SUB-SECTION WA200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-Eng Design\10.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.08700_FinishHardware.doc 6/14/2010 a WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.09250 Gypsum Wallboard Page 1 of 5 SUB-SECTION 10.09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY wr A. Sub-Section Includes: Provide gypsum board partitions, furred walls, soffits, ceilings, and similar construction. Provide taping and finishing of gypsum board ready for paint or other finish coatings. B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.06100: Rough Carpentry - wood framing 2. Sub-Section 10.08305: Access Doors 3. Sub-Section 10.09900: Painting - preparation of gypsum board for painting 4. Sections 10.15 and 10.16: Furnishing access doors to be installed in gypsum board. o 1.02 REFERENCES A. Where sound control assemblies are shown, called for or scheduled, use A assemblies listed in the "Fire Resistance and Sound Control Design Manual", published by the Gypsum Association. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 16 1. C36 Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard. 2. C475 Standard Specification for Joint compounds and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. +r. 3. C514 Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard. 4. C557 Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard in Wood Framing. 5. C630 Standard Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. 6. C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 7. C919 Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. 8. C931 Standard Specification for Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board. 9. C1002 Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board. ,r. C. Gypsum Association: 1. GA 216 Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. W 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for Product Review in accordance with the Special Provisions. B. Submit Product Data giving manufacturer's technical data for all materials and systems proposed for use. C. For all assemblies required to be fire-rated for which a "Listed Design" is not provided in this Sub-Section, submit Drawings and Specifications of an appropriate design that has been tested and is "Listed" by a Nationally Recognized Fire w■ Testing Agency such as Underwriters Laboratory; Warnock Hersey; or equal. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Slonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs11001/6—Specs_u*0010I0.09250 GypsumWallboard.doc 6114/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.09250 Gypsum Wallboard Page 2 of 5 rr 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the more restrictive or conservative of the following. B. Comply with the following regulatory requirements: 1. International Building Code (IBC), 2006 edition, especially Chapter 47, and Washington State amendments. 2. Where fire-rated assemblies are required comply with detail specifications stated in the "Assembly Listing." C. Comply with recommendations in "Gypsum Construction Handbook", 3rd edition by United States Gypsum Company, for installation of materials used and United " States Gypsum "USG Cavity Shaft Wall Systems - Folder SA 926 Rev. 1/89" and USG-Gypsum Products, Accessories and Systems SA 919 1990." D. Where fire-rated assemblies are required comply with detail specifications for a specific assembly that has been tested in accordance with ASTM El 19 or other applicable ASTM standards and has been given a fire rating and by a nationally recognized fire testing laboratory acceptable to the Building Official, Fire Marshal and other regulating agencies having jurisdiction such as the UL Fire Resistance Directory, ICBO Evaluation Reports, or Gypsum Association "Fire Resistance and Sound Control Manual. E. Comply with Gypsum Association GA-216-89 "Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board". at F. Comply with ANSI Standard Specifications A97.1 "Applications and Finishing of Wallboard." 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand and manufacturer's name. r B. Store all materials in protected dry storage areas. Neatly stack in flat position on spacers to prevent sagging and contact with concrete slabs. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DRYWALL MATERIALS A. Gypsum Board: 5/8-inch, Type X, 1-hour fire-rated, tapered edges, 4 feet wide by longest lengths available to keep end joints to a minimum, meeting Federal Specification SS L-30D, Type III, Grade X, Class I and ASTM C36. United States Gypsum (USG) sheetrock Firecode "C"; National Gypsum (NG) Fire-shield; or equal. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Corner Bead: At all exterior corners, galvanized steel, 1 1/4 x 1 1/4 Dur-A-Bead #103; United States Gypsum; National Gypsum; or equal. B. Edge Trim: Use metal trim in exposed locations at intersection of drywall with other materials, and as shown, U.S. Gypsum "J" Mid #200A or "L" Mid #20013; National Gypsum; or equal. W:12008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010 I0.09250_GypsumWallboard.doc 6/14/2010 w WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.09250 Gypsum Wallboard Page 3 of 5 2.03 FASTENERS A. Gypsum Board to Metal Supports: ASTM C1002, self-tapping bugle head screws, 1-inch-long for single layer; 1 5/8 long for second layer. 1. Use Type S screws to 25 gauge supports. 2. Use Type S 12 screws to 20-gauge or heavier supports. B. Gypsum Board to Wood Supports. ASTM C514, cooler or wallboard nails. 1. 6d wallboard nails 0.0915-inch shank diameter, 1 7/8-inch-long, 19/64-inch head diameter, concave head, phosphate etched diamond point. 2. 6d cooler nails 0.092-inch shank diameter, 1 7/8-inch long, 1/4-inch head diameter, cement coated, flathead diamond point. 3. Type W screws 1 1/4-inch long. 2.04 JOINT TREATMENT AND FINISHING A. Reinforcing Tape: USG Perf-A-Tape; NG Gold Bond; or equal. B. Taping Compound: USG Ready-to-use joint compound-tapping; NG Gold Bond; or equal. C. Topping Compound: USG Ready-to-use joint compound-topping; NG Gold Bond; or equal. 2.05 ACOUSTICAL SPECIALTY MATERIALS ow A. Acoustical Sealant: Elastomeric acoustical sealant for use in sound rated gypsum board assemblies. USG Acoustical Sealant; Gold Bond; or equal. to PART 3 - EXECUTION aw 3.01 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board systems in accordance with ASTM C840 and GA 216. B. General: Where fire-rated partitions are required, install gypsum board in `� accordance with requirements for a fire-rated assembly that has been tested and "Listed" by a nationally recognized fire testing agency in accordance with ASTM E119. as C. Where studs extend above the top edge of gypsum board, attach the top edge of the gypsum board to horizontal stud depth backing installed between studs. D. Edge and ends of gypsum board shall be in moderate contact. Attach gypsum boards to framing members with screws and to wood member. For non-rated assemblies, space screws at 8 inches on center on edges of gypsum board for vertical surfaces and at 7 inches on center for horizontal surfaces. Space screws at 12 inches on center at intermediate members. Stagger fasteners in adjacent edges at joints. Drive fasteners until their heads are slightly below the surface of the gypsum board, but without breaking the cover. After all fasteners have been installed hammer on walls to detect loose fasteners and push on gypsum board adjacent to fasteners to detect movements. Drive loose fasteners tight or replace them with other fasteners approximately 1 1/2 inches away and remove loose fasteners. E. Install corner bead at all outside corners with fasteners 9 inches on center. Install edge trim at exposed edges, where gypsum board abuts or joins other materials and where shown. Attach edge trim with fasteners 9 inches on center. w W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.09250 GypsumWallboard.doc 6/14/2010 4 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.09250 Gypsum Wallboard Page 4 of 5 F. Cut openings for outlet boxes, pipes, and similar items with a saw, router, or other device that produces a clean, tight fitting hole without tearing the paper face or back and without fracturing the gypsum core. Outlet boxes in opposite faces of acoustical or fire-rated partitions shall be at least 24 inches apart. G. All electrical outlet boxes, panel boards, and other items larger than 4 inches square recessed in fire-rated walls that are required to have protected openings (such as corridor walls and occupancy or area separation walls) shall be protected on all five recessed sides by construction having the same fire rating as the wall. H. Install control or expansion joints as required and/or recommended by manufacturer. I. Set bottom edge of gypsum board 1/4 inch above the floor. Fill the gap between gypsum board and floor (or curb) acoustical sealant. 3.02 FINISHING AND JOINT TREATMENT A. Mix and size joint compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Spread a thin layer of compound over joint and embed tape in compound leaving sufficient compound under tape to provide proper bond. Spot nail heads. Reinforce interior angles with perforated tape neatly folded to form straight, true corner. Reinforce exterior corners with specified corner bead. Backer board shall be taped and screwheads spotted prior to installing face layer. B. Allow compound to dry overnight. Sand lightly. Cover tape with topping cement spread evenly and slightly beyond tapered edge of wallboard. Apply second coat to screwheads. Feather all edges of topping compound. C. Allow compound to dr and then sand lightly. Apply a final skim coat of topping p Y 9 Y� pp Y pp� 9 cement. Feather edges 8 inches to 10 inches each side of joint. Feather out final coat at screwheads to 10-inch-diameter. D. Sand to true even surface with very fine paper. Avoid heavy pressure that might scuff paper face of wallboard. Leave ready for painting or other wall finish. 3.03 LEVELS OF GYPSUM BOARD FINISH A. All exposed gypsum board intended to receive a painted finish shall have a Level 4 finish unless a different level of finish is indicated on the Finish Schedule. B. Description of Levels of Finish (From GA-214): 1. Level 1: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. 2. Level 2: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one separate coat of joint compound applied over all joints, �r angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Apply a skim coat of topping cement to the entire surface of all MR (GR) green moisture resistant „ gypsum board. 3. Level 3: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Note: It is recommended that the prepared surface be coated with a primer/sealer prior to the application of final finishes. See painting/wallcovering specification in this regard. W1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Slonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun201000.09250_GypsumWallboard.doc 6/14/2010 40 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.09250 Gypsum Wallboard Page 5 of 5 we 4. Level 4: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and three separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. All joint compound shall be smooth ' " and free of tool marks and ridges. Note: It is recommended that the prepared surface be coated with a primer/sealer prior the application of final finishes. See painting/wallcovering specification in this regard. 5. Level 5: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and three separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. A thin skim coat of joint compound, +�. or a material manufactured especially for this purpose, shall be applied to the entire surface. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Note: It is recommended that the prepared surface be coated with a primer/sealer prior to the application of finish paint. See painting specification in this regard. END OF SUB-SECTION ow rr No as W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_StonegateY10-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.09250_GypsumWallboard.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.09900 Painting Page 1 of 7 SUB-SECTION 10.09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL ad 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. A painter's finish on all exterior and interior surfaces, except: a. Integrally finished materials such as ceramic tile, brick, glass, concrete masonry units, concrete floors, laminated plastic, etc. b. Factory finished items such as acoustic panels, anodized aluminum, light fixtures, etc. 2. Painter's top coat or refinishing coat in a color to match adjacent surfaces on: a. Miscellaneous mechanical and electrical items that are furnished with a factory finish that does not match the color of surrounding surfaces such as panelboards, air supply or return registers, fire extinguisher cabinets, hose reel cabinets, access doors, and similar items that are located in finished walls or ceilings. 3. Prime coat paint all exposed and concealed surfaces of sheet metal flashings prior to installation including the inside of galvanized steel rainwater gutters and ,, downspouts. See Sub-Section 10.07600. B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.05100: Structural Metal Framing - metal fabrications - shop priming of structural steel 2. Sub-Section 10.05500: Metal Fabrications - shop priming of metal fabrications 3. Sub-Section 10.07600: Flashing and Sheet Metal - priming prior to installation 4. Sub-Section 10.08110: Steel Door and Frames - shop priming of hollow metal doors and frames. 1 1.02 REFERENCES A. Where standards of surface preparation are described by citing SSPC specification numbers reference is made to the "Steel Structures Painting Manual" Volume 2 published by the Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. B. Contractor Qualifications: Submit a list of at least five projects completed in the past five years where High Performance Coatings similar to those required for this project were applied by the Specialty Painting Contractor proposed for this project. C. Product Data: 1. Submit complete technical data on all materials to be used on the project for review prior to ordering material. Include manufacturer's brand name and type of material for each coat of each system to be used. Oil 2. If products manufactured by makers other than.the first named product by the first named maker listed in Part 2 of this Sub-Section are submitted, submit supporting performance test results prepared by an independent paint testing W:\2008\0897003—City-of-Renton—Stonegate\10-EngDesign\10.01-Specs\100°/_Specs Jun2010\10.09900 Painting-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 rr WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.09900 Painting Page 2 of 7 laboratory for comparison with the performance of the first named product by the first named maker. D. Manufacturer's Certification- That products furnished meet applicable Puget Sound Clean Air Agency regulations as to allowable volatile organic compound (VOC) content for the place of application and use intended. e E. Samples: For paints, submit two 8 1/2 by 11-inch brush-outs of each paint system and each color on cardboard. For stains and transparent finishes submit two complete sample finishes on 8-1/2 by 11-inch pieces of the wood that will be used on the project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE •+ A. Regulatory Requirements: All work, material, procedures, and practices under this Sub-Section shall conform to requirements of the Federal Standard 40 CFR on air quality control, and the requirements of the Puget Sound Clean Air Agency. Coatings or primers applied at locations other than the project site shall be done in accordance with local air quality regulations in effect at the place the coating is applied. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials in unopened containers with manufacturer's label. Label shall state VOC content. B. Store in assigned area. Maintain storage area clean.and fire safe. Dispose of used rags and clean buckets daily. Store solvents in closed approved storage containers. C. Submerge solvent soaked rags in water. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements.- 1. equirements:1. Provide ambient temperatures recommended by manufacturer of material to be applied. 2. Provide adequate ventilation. 3. Provide 40- to 50-foot candles of illumination on all surfaces in areas to be painted including floors, walls, and ceiling even though they do not require painting. 4. Use temporary dust barriers to close off areas being painted from areas where other work is being performed. • 1.07 COLORS AND COLOR SAMPLES A. Before starting work, obtain color schedule and samples of colors selected for this project by the Owner. The colors selected may not be standard colors for the manufacturer whose materials are being used in which case custom colors shall be mixed to match the samples provided by the Owner. "Deep tone" highly pigmented accent colors may be selected for up to 10% of the area painted. B. Colors are to be factory or machine mixed, using light-fast colorants proportioned by accurate measurement into a proper tinting base. The color formula for each color shall be submitted to facilitate future color matching. C. Exterior deep tone colors are to be factory ground into the pigment for maximum color fastness. w W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010110.09900_Painbng-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10:09900 Painting Page 3 of 7 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Coatings used shall be "top of the line" and of the type recommended by the manufacturer for the intended use and substrate. B. Applicable Puget Sound Clean Air Agency regulations prohibit the manufacture, sale rr or application of Architectural Coatings and Specialty Coatings having greater than stipulated levels of VOCs. C. The Contractor shall base his bid on using the products specified. If the products specified are not available in formulations that meet applicable Puget Sound Clean Air Agency regulations on maximum VOC levels, the,Contractor shall submit products of equivalent quality and function that comply with regulations in effect at that time. D. If the Contractor applies any coatings for which it has not submitted certificates indicating the VOC content and that the product complies with applicable Puget Sound Clean Air Agency regulations, or if it applies coatings that have been modified or thinned other than as recommended by the manufacturer, the Contractor shall be responsible for any fines, costs, remedies, or legal actions that may result. .r 2.02 SPECIALTY COATINGS: PRIMERS, STAINS, SEALERS AND CLEARS A. Products and makers listed establish type of material and level of quality. Equivalent products manufactured by ICI Dulux Paint Stores, Sherwin-Williams, or equal may be submitted for review. B. Specialty Coatings: Coatings listed under this category include primers, sealers, stains, and clear coatings. All products provided shall comply with the maximum allowable VOC limit assigned to that category of product by the Air Quality Management District having jurisdiction. 1. ALKYD RUST INHIBITING PRIMER Solvent thinned, oxide red primer Maximum allowable VOC limit 350. ICI Rust Guard 4150, Sherwin-Williams Kromik Metal Primer E41N1, Valspar 13-R-49 rri Intermediate Field Coat Primer, or equal. 2. ALKYD PHENOLIC GALVANIZED METAL PRIMER Solvent thinned, alkyd phenolic galvanized metal primer. Maximum allowable VOC limit 350. XIM Gutter Primer, Tnemec 90-97, Universal Alkyd Metal Primer, ICI Ultra-Hide 4160, or equal. 3. PVA SEALER Latex (P.V.A.) Sealer for interior gypsum wallboard. Maximum allowable VOC limit 350. PVA Wall Primer Sealer Ultra-Hide No. 1030, Sherwin-Williams, or equal. 4. LATEX BLOCK FILLER A heavy bodied latex filler for use on interior and exterior porous concrete block _3 masonry. Maximum allowable VOC limit 250.ICI Interior/Exterior Acrylic Block Filler, Bloxfill No. 4000, Sherwin-Williams, or equal. 2.03 ARCHITECTURAL COATINGS A. Coatings listed under this category consist of decorative and protective coatings used to protect surfaces and provide color for buildings and other structures. Most paints and enamels fall under this category. All products used under this category must comply with a VOC limit of 250. W:120 0 8108 97 00 3 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010\10.09900_Pain6ng-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 +rr WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.09900 Painting Page 4 of 7 B. Products and makers listed establish type of material and level of quality. Equivalent products manufactured by Glidden, Sherwin-Williams, ICI Dulux, Devoe Coatings, or equal may be submitted for review. w� 1. HIGH GLOSS EXTERIOR LATEX ENAMEL 100% acrylic latex exterior enamel with excellent color and gloss retention and excellent weather resistance. Maximum allowable VOC limit 250), Devoe Coatings Interior/Exterior Waterborne Acrylic Gloss Enamel Devflex No. 4208, Sherwin-Williams, or equal. 2. SEMI-GLOSS EXTERIOR LATEX ENAMEL 100% acrylic latex (medium gloss) exterior house and trim enamel with excellent color and gloss retention and weather resistance. Maximum allowable VOC limit 250. ICI Dulux Exterior 100% Acrylic Semi Gloss Finish 2406, VOC: 187 g/L, Sherwin-Williams, or equal. 3. EGGSHELL ACRYLIC LATEX INTERIOR ENAMEL Maximum allowable VOC limit 250. A scrubbable low sheen eggshell latex enamel. Sheen 8 to 12 at 600, ICI Dulux Interior Acrylic Wall and Trim Enamel Eggshell, Dulux Ultra No. 1403, Sherwin-Williams, or equal. �r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES TO BE PAINTED A. Examine areas to receive work of this Sub-Section. Make certain that surfaces are even, smooth, sound, clean, dry, and free from defects or substances that might affect application. ., B. Arrange for repairs or major cleaning as required. Starting work indicates acceptance of surfaces as satisfactory to achieve required result. ow 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Check that hardware, trim, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items have been removed before starting work; coordinate with work under sections installing such 1 items. Check that equipment adjacent to walls shall be disconnected and moved to permit wall surfaces to be painted before starting work under this Sub-Section. B. Wash metal surfaces with solvent or cleaner to remove dirt or grease, and clean off rust or scale with wire brush or sandpaper. C. Bare or Shop Coated Steel: Remove rust and scale by wire brushing or sandblasting; wash with solvent or cleaner. D. Galvanized Steel: Etch with phosphoric solution such as Galvaprime, Galva-prep, or equal; flush surface clean with water and allow to dry. E. Prepare all surfaces in accordance with the more stringent of the coating material manufacturer's recommendations, other requirements in this paragraph 3.02 or referenced or applicable requirements for surface preparation in the Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, published by the Steel Structures Painting Council and summarized below: 1. SSPC-SP1 - Solvent Cleaning- Removal of all oil, grease, soil, drawing err compound, cutting compound, and other soluble contaminates from the surfaces with solvents and/or commercial cleaners by wiping, dipping, steam cleaning, or vapor degreasing. ow 2. SSPC-SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning: Removal of all loose mill scale, rust, paint and other loose detrimental foreign matter by the use of non-powered hand tools. 1W W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegatell0-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100°/_Specs_Jun2010I 0.09900_Painfing-Revision.doc 6114/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.09900 ON Painting Page 5 of 7 3. SSPC-SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning: Removal of all loose mill scale, rust, paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter by the use of power-operated portable tools. 4. SSPC- SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning: Removal of all oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter by compressed air nozzle blasting, centrifugal wheels or other required methods. Remaining discoloration stains shall not exceed 33=1/3% of each square inch of surface. 5. SSPC-SP7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning: Removal of all oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose-mill scale, and loose paint by compressed air nozzle blasting. Centrifugal wheels or other required means. F. Dust all surfaces and wipe clean with a tack rag just prior to coating. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply all material in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply first coat immediately after surface preparation. r B. Do not apply coatings when temperature is below 55°F. Do not apply exterior coatings in damp or rainy weather. Do not apply exterior coatings on damp wood. C. Brush out each coat to a uniform, even coating; lay material on in one direction and brush out at right angles. Special application techniques may be required for new coatings with low VOC content. Apply such coatings in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed instructions. Allow material to dry 48 hours between coats unless longer period specified by manufacturer. D. Sand between coats for enamel and varnish finishes. E. Do necessary puttying or filling of nail holes, cracks and other blemishes after first coat has been applied. Finish putty or fill flush with adjoining surface in neat, workmanlike manner. Putty or fill nail holes in wood to be stained, with colored putty • to match finish. F. Back prime all interior and exterior wood trim before installation. Prime all exposed and concealed surfaces of sheet metal flashing prior to installation. G. Paint items and surfaces before installation that will be difficult or impossible to paint after installation. H. Coat all six surfaces of wood doors with the specified coats. Seal mortises and cutouts for locks, hinges and other hardware with varnish. I. Apply not less than the number of coats specified. Apply additional coats if required for uniform coverage and full hiding. Apply finishes in their factory original consistencies. Do not thin unless specifically recommended by the manufacturer. rr J. Finish work shall be uniform in color, full coverage, smooth and free of sags and brush marks. Varnish work shall be done so that an entire surface is coated while maintaining a wet edge so that there are no lap marks or areas of uneven color. K. Do all cutting in to a sharp, true line. Repaint if necessary to correct over runs. L. Do not paint over Underwriters' labels, fusible links, sprinkler heads, or fire alarm devices. M. Paint access panels, electrical panels, air registers and similar items prior to installation to prevent edges from peeling or chipping when panels are removed. W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.09900_Painting-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 1W WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.09900 Painting Page 6 of 7 4W N. Repaint factory finished electrical panels, air registers, and other items to match adjacent painted surfaces. 3.04 PROTECTION, CLEANING AND COMPLETION A. Protect finish work by suitable covering or other method as job progresses. B. Remove paint or varnish spots from floors, glass, and other surfaces, upon completion of work. Remove rubbish, empty containers, and other accumulated materials from premises. Leave work in clean, orderly, acceptable condition. C. Check work of this Sub-Section at completion of project. Touch-up or refinish marred or damaged surfaces. Replace glass damaged by operations under this Sub-Section. Leave entire area with finish free from imperfections. 3.05 PAINTING SYSTEMS AND SCHEDULE: ARCHITECTURAL COATING SYSTEMS A. See Finish Schedule and notes on Drawings for location of surfaces to receive paint r systems. B. Characteristics of paint materials are described in Part 2 of this Sub-Section. First- named products are listed in Paragraph 3.06 — Painting System Schedule. wr Equivalent products by other manufacturers may be submitted for review in accordance with paragraphs 1.03 and 2.02 of this Sub-Section. 3.06 PAINTING SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. System "A": EXTERIOR/INTERIOR HIGH-GLOSS LATEX ENAMEL 1. First Coat: a. Shop primed ferrous metal: Touch-up with ALKYD RUST INHIBITING PRIMER. Devoe Coatings Multi-Purpose Tank and Structural Primer (5205/5206/5207), Devguard No. 4160. b. Or, where shop prime coat is not suitable for overcoating with latex systems, re-prime entire surface with ALKYD PHENOLIC PRIMER. Devoe Coatings All Purpose Metal and Galvanized Primer Devguard No. 4120. c. Unprimed ferrous metal: ALKYD RUST INHIBITING PRIMER. wr d. Galvanized Metal: Pretreat with phosphate solution and prime with ALKYD PHENOLIC GALVANIZED METAL PRIMER. XIM Gutter Primer. e. Wood: ALKYD EXTERIOR WOOD PRIMER. ICI Dulux Exterior Alkyd Prime Coat Ultra-Hide Durus No. 2110, or ICI Dulux Exterior 100% Acrylic Latex Primer, Dulux Professional No. 2000. 2. Second and Third Coats: a. Two coats of HIGH GLOSS EXTERIOR LATEX ENAMEL. Devoe Coatings Interior-Exterior Waterborne Acrylic Gloss Enamel, Devflex No. 4208. B. System "B": SEMI-GLOSS ACRYLIC LATEX INTERIOR ENAMEL 40 1. First Coat: a. On gypsum board: PVA SEALER. ICI Dulux PVA Interior Primer Sealer General Purpose Wall Primer, Ultra-Hide No. 1030. b. On plaster: ALKYD PRIMER SEALER. Zinsser cover stain, oil-based primer- sealer stain killer, for water base ICI Dulux Aquacrylic Gripper Stain Killer Primer Sealer, Ultra-Hide No. 3210. + ++ c. Galvanized metal: Pretreat with phosphate solution in accordance with paragraph 3.02D and prime with ALKYD PHENOLIC GALVANIZED METAL PRIMER. XIM Gutter Primer, Devoe Coatings Multi-Purpose Tank and rr Structural Primer (5205/5206/5207), Devguard No. 4160. d4 W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun201000.09900Paidng-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.09900 Painting Page 7 of 7 d. ALKYD INTERIOR ENAMEL UNDERCOAT ICI Dulux Oil/Alkyd Interior Wood Under Coat, Ultra-Hide No. 1120 for water base ICI Dulux Aquacrylic Gripper Stain Killer Primer Sealer Ultra-Hide No. 3210. 2. Second and Third Coats: SEMI-GLOSS ACRYLIC INTERIOR ENAMEL. ICI wr Dulux Semi-Gloss Interior Acrylic Wall and Trim Enamel, Dulux Ultra No. 1407. C. System "C": EGGSHELL ACRYLIC LATEX INTERIOR ENAMEL 1. First Coat: a. On gypsum board: PVA SEALER. ICI Dulux PVA Interior Primer-Sealer General Purpose Wall Primer, Ultra-Hide No. 1030. b. On plaster: ALKYD PRIMER SEALER. "Zinsser" cover stain, oil-based . i primer-sealer stain killer, for water base ICI Dulux Aquacrylic Gripper Stain Killer Primer Sealer, Ultra-Hide No. 3210. c. On wood: ALKYD INTERIOR ENAMEL UNDERCOAT ICI Dulux Oil/Alkyd Interior Wood Under Coat, Ultra-Hide No. 1120 for water base ICI Dulux Aquacrylic Gripper Stain Killer Primer Sealer Ultra-Hide No. 3210 d. On metal: ALKYD RUST INHIBITING PRIMER. Devoe Coatings Multi- Purpose Tank and Structural Primer (5205/5206/5207), Devguard No. 4160. 2. Second and Third Coats: EGGSHELL ACRYLIC LATEX INTERIOR ENAMEL. ICI Dulux Eggshell Interior Acrylic Wall and Trim Enamel, Dulux Ultra No. 1403. D. System "D": NOT USED E. System "E": NOT USED END OF SUB-SECTION .rr W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100°/,Specs_Jun2010110.09900_Pain4ng-Revision.doc 6/14/2010 tw WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.10050 Building Specialties Page 1 of 2 WW SUB-SECTION 10.10050 BUILDING SPECIALTIES No PART 1 - GENERAL ow 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: r 1. Fire extinguishers 2. Rubber Switchboard mats B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.10400: Identifying Devices 1.02 SUBMITTALS ow A. Submit in accordance with the Special Provisions. B. Product Data: Fully describe all products proposed for use. C. Shop Drawings: For identifying devices. D. Manufacturers Instructions: For installation of all items. �r. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Provide as shown on drawings. B. Size and Type: Multi-purpose, minimum size of 4A60BC (nominal shipping weight 18 lbs). Shell of extinguishers shall be painted OSHA Red. All extinguishers shall be by one manufacturer and shall have a State Fire Marshal's inspection and fill tag dated within 90 days of project acceptance and issued by the Fire Marshal of the 40 State of Washington, Larsen Architectural Series; J. L. Industries; or equal. 2.02 RUBBER SWITCHBOARD MATS `w A. Provide corrugated fiber reinforced rubber mats, which conform to ASTM D178 and ANSI J6.7, Type I, oil resistant. Mats shall meet OSHA requirements. Mats for low voltage (below 1 kV) switchboards and switchgear and motor control centers shall be rated for protection for 600 volts minimum to ground. B. Mat shall be a minimum of 1/4-inch-thick and black in color with beveled edges. Mats shall extend the full width of the equipment (minimum 30 inches). Mats shall be 4 feet deep in front of low voltage equipment. Provide mats for all switchboards and motor control centers whether shown or not. C. Installation: Install in front of all switchboards and motor control centers. low W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs11009/6_Specs_Jun2010110.10050_BuildingSpecialbes.doc 6/142010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.10050 96 Building Specialties Page 2 of 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION go 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fire Extinguishers: Comply with NFPA Standard No. 10. Install cabinets and mount No extinguishers where directed or where shown. B. Install rubber switchboard mats as described in Part 2 and where directed. No END OF SUB-SECTION rr + lri ar �Ir W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.10050_BuildingSpecialtes.doc 6/1412010 ow WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.10200 Louvers Page 1 of 3 +W SUB-SECTION 10.10200 LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. Acoustic wall louvers B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.08110: Steel Doors and Frames 2. Sub-Section 10.09900: Painting - finish painting 3. Sub-Section 10.15800: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning 1W 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with the Special Provisions. or 1. Product Data: Fully describe all items proposed for use. 2. Shop Drawings: Custom prepared for this project. 3. Certified Test Data: Air and acoustic performance of louvers. sr 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with details and standards in the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). B. Air Control Division of the Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Standard 500 for measuring air performance, water penetration, and air leakage and Standard 411 for the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. +. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STATIONARY ACOUSTIC LOUVERS o A. Manufacturer: Ruskin Model ACL845; CS Group-Construction Specialties, Inc. Model A8890; or equal. to B. Design Criteria 1. Description: Frames and blades to be formed from aluminum alloy. Head, sill, jamb, mullion, and fixed blades to be 0.081 inch (2.06 mm) thick minimum. "" Interior acoustic material to be fiberglass or mineral wool acoustic insulation protected by a woven fire-retardant (self-extinguishing) 100% polyester sheeting. Provide fasteners of aluminum or stainless steel. Louvers to have framed removable mill finish aluminum bird screens secured within a 0.081 inch (2.06 mm) extruded aluminum frame. 2. Structural supports: Designed and furnished by the louver manufacturer to carry a wind load of 20 psf. 3. Louver Depth- 8 inches 4. Blade Angle: 45 degrees 5. Free Area: 26 percent when measured for a for a 4 feet by 4 feet unit. Ml W:12008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010\10.10200_louvers.doc 5/12/2009 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.10200 Louvers Page 2 of 3 6. Air Performance and Water Penetration: ► a. Penetration Ratings Standard: Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Certified Ratings Seals for air performance and water penetration ratings. b. Data: A 4 ft by 4 ft unit provides 4.30 square feet of free area and shall intake 1,046 FPM free area velocity at a static pressure drop not exceeding 0.13 inch H2O per AMCA Standard 500. 7. Acoustic Performance: a. Acoustic Ratings Standards: ASTM E90-90, "Recommended Practice for Laboratory Measurement of Airborn Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions," and E413-87, "Standard Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class." b. Acoustic Ratings Data: Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) - Free Field Noise Reduction in Decibels; 63 Hz-16 dB; 125 Hz- 17dB; 250 Hz-12dB; 500 Hz-16 dB; 1,000 Hz-22dB; 2,000 Hz-23dB; 4,000 Hz-21 dB; and 8,000 Hz- 21dB. 8. Finish: In accordance with paragraph 2.02, I. +rrp 2.02 MATERIALS/FABRICATION A. Provide acoustic louvers in the sizes shown on the Drawings. ' B. Use aluminum alloy 6063-T52 for all metal extrusions and parts. C. Provide louvers that have all joints concealed. D. Continuously weld all joints in the louver assembly using a shielded arc process. E. Provide 1/2 by 1/2 by 14 gauge aluminum bird screens in folded extruded aluminum frames. Where ductwork is attached to the interior side of louver provide holder for screen frame that can be built into ductwork and so arranged that by opening a door in duct, screen can be slid out for cleaning without disassembling ductwork. Where there is no ductwork attached to interior of louver, provide a holder for bird screen frame designed so that screen can be removed for cleaning and replaced without using tools. F. Provide all related break shape and extruded aluminum sills, flashings and sub-frames. Flashings shall be 0.050 or thicker as indicated. G. Provide matching 1/8 inch-thick dark bronze anodized aluminum backing plates to cover the rear of decorative louvers and portions of louvers outside of air intake or exhaust ductwork. H. Provide all required aluminum angles, tees, plates and other shapes required for a complete installation. I. Aluminum Finish: Spray-Applied Hylar 5000TIl/Kynar 5000: 1. Color: Selected from manufacturers full palette of standard colors. 2. Coating thickness: Four-coat 2.13-3.1 mils dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Protect all aluminum in contact with concrete, plaster, masonry, steel, or galvanized metal with a coating of bituminous paint. W:\200810897003_City-of-Renton Slonegate110-EngDesign110,01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.10200_LouversAx 5/12/2009 ®" WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.10200 Louvers Page 3 of 3 of B. Install louvers as shown in the Drawings and as shown in Figures 7.2 and 7.5 of the 6th Edition (2003) of the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal manual. C. Provide bird screens on all louvers. Install on the interior side. Use stainless steel screws throughout. D. Install sill flashing as shown detailed and as required to provide a watertight tir installation. E. Install sheet metal drip at head of louvers where shown. F. Apply sealant "B" all around frame, inside and outside in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.07900. i�. END OF SUB-SECTION r ow W r wr to to aw r W:k200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun201M10.10200—Louvers.doc 5/12/2009 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.10400 Identifying Devices Page 1 of 4 SUB-SECTION 10.10400 W IDENTIFYING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL wr 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: Signs, decals, tags, and pipe markers. B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.09900: Painting 2. Sub-Section 10.10050: Building Specialties .r� 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standard Specifications, ANSI A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems." B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 704, Standard System for the Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. B. Product Data: Fully describe all items proposed for use. C. Shop Drawings: Scaled drawings or photostats of custom-made signs, showing style and size of lettering and colors. D. Samples: Manufacturer's standard color palette for selection. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 2. International Building Code (IBC), 2006 edition, especially Chapter 11, and 2007 Washington State amendments. 3. Washington State Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA): Referenced sections, specifications for accident prevention signs and tags and exit signs. B. Comply with the manufacturer's published recommendation for installation of materials used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGNS A. Building Identifications Signs: 1. Vomar Products, Inc.; Apco Graphics; or equal. 2. Sign characteristics: a. Material: Integral color acrylic plastic sheets 1/16-inch thick, cemented together. b. Background plastic, white, 12-inch-diameter circle, for permanent adhesive back mounting. wt W9200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100°/Specs_JUn2010110.10400_ldenbi ingDevices.doc 6/16/2010 No WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.10400 Identifying Devices Page 2 of 4 r c. Individual single letter mounted to background. Plastic, black, 8-inch-high, dimensional cutout letter, Helvetica Bold letter style, as shown below. 3. Schedule of signs required: Quantity Text Location 1 Control Building Control Building 1 Wet Well Wet Well 1 Overflow Storage Overflow Structure 1 Valve Vault Valve Vault B. Exit Signs: 1. Size: 14 inches wide by 10 inches high. err 2. Material: Baked Enamel on 0.40 aluminum with a self-adhesive backing. 3. Text: a. Conforming to OSHA 1910.14S(d)(5) and 1910.37(q). or b. Red text and symbols on white field as scheduled below. C. Exit signs: 6-inch7high letters, 3/4-inch-wide principal strokes. d. Not An Exit signs: 4-inch-high letters. 4. Provide eyelet holes at each corner for mounting. 5. Schedule of signs required: Quantity Text/Symbol 1 "EXIT' C. Caution Signs: 1. Size: 14 inches wide by 10 inches high 2. Material: Baked Enamel on 0.40 aluminum with a self-adhesive backing. 3. Text, format, and color: a. Conforming to OSHA 1910.145(d)(4), Specifications for Caution Signs. b. Text as scheduled below. 4. Provide eyelet holes at each corner for mounting. 5. Schedule of signs required: Quantity Location Text • 1 Standby CAUTION Generator THIS EQUIPMENT STARTS AUTOMATICALLY 1 Standby CAUTION r. Generator EAR PROTECTION AREA D. Danger Signs: 1. Size: 14 inches wide by 10 inches high, unless otherwise scheduled. VW 2. Material: Baked Enamel on 0.40 aluminum with a self-adhesive backing. 3. Text, format, and color: a. Conforming to OSHA 1910.145(d)(2), Specifications for Danger Signs. b. Text as scheduled below. 4. Provide eyelet holes at each corner for mounting. 5. Schedule of signs required: Quantity Text 1 DANGER wr HIGH VOLTAGE ow W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton—Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100°/_Specs Jun2010110.10400_IdentifyingDevices.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.10400 Identifying Devices Page 3 of 4 E. Informational Signs: at 1. Size: 14 inches wide by 10 inches high. 2. Material: Baked Enamel on 0.40 aluminum with a self-adhesive backing. 3. Text, format, and color: a. Conforming to OSHA 1910.145 (d)(9), Specifications for Informational Signs. b. Text as scheduled below. 4. Provide eyelet holes at each corner for mounting. 5. Where scheduled, provide AB Marine grade plywood backing and wood post, sealed and painted. 6. Schedule of signs required: Quantity Text 1 NOTICE AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY 2.02 TAGS rrr A. Accident Prevention Tags: 1. Seton Nameplate Company; W.H. Brady Company; or equal. 2. Size: Approximately 3 inches by 6 inches. 3. Material: Write-on matte finish plastic laminate, metal reinforced eyelet. Provide nylon or wire-tie fasteners. 4. Conform to OSHA 1910.145(F), Specifications for Accident Prevention Tags. 5. Text as scheduled below: Quantity Text 5 DANGER - DO NOT START 5 OUT OF ORDER 2.03 PIPE MARKERS A. Seton Nameplate Company; SetMark, W.H. Brady Company; Piper Marker „ System 1; or equal. B. Pipe Markers conforming to ANSI A13.1. See paragraph 3.03 for required locations. C. Material: Acrylic plastic snap-around type or pressure sensitive vinyl, temperature tolerance range of-40°F to 250°F, non-fade, colored fields, lengths as shown below. D. Text: Non-fade ink, lettering size, as shown below: „ Outside Diameter of Pipe Length of Color Field Size of Letters Inches Inches Inches 3/4 to 1-1/4 8 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 8 3/4 E. Provide directional arrows to indicate flow direction. See paragraph 3.03. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100°/,_Specs_Jun2010110,10400_IdentifyingDevices.doc 6/14/2010 +m WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.10400 Identifying Devices Page 4 of 4 ,y„ F. Pipe Marker Schedule: Text Field Color Letter Color r Potable Water Yellow Black Non-Potable Water Yellow Black Vent-to-Roof Yellow Black 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION wr 3.01 SIGN INSTALLATION A. Install signs where directed by the Owner. ow B. Install signs after painting surfaces to receive signs. Follow manufacturer's written installation instructions. C. Use fasteners as follows: 1. To concrete and masonry materials: 4-1/4-inch-diameter expansion anchors. 2. To sheet metal (gauges 28 to 6) #10 sheet metal screws. 3. To gypsum board: Adhesive backing tape. 4. To chain link fencing: Wire ties at each corner. 5. To plywood backing boards: #10 wood screws. 6. To machinery: Fasteners as suitable. D. Set sign posts in concrete. 3.02 TAGS wr . A. Deliver to the Owner in properly identified boxes or envelopes. o 3.03 PIPE MARKERS A. Pipe Markers shall be applied where piping enters or leaves the wall or floor of a structure, adjacent to tanks or other hydraulic containments, at each valve, at each +rw piping change in direction, and shall be applied along piping runs not exceeding 16 feet on center. B. Directional Arrows: Point in the direction of flow. C. Locate pipe markers for easy reading. Where pipes are located above normal line of vision, the lettering and directional arrows shall be placed below the horizontal centerline of the pipe. Where pipes are below normal line of vision, lettering and "" directional arrows shall be above the horizontal centerline of the pipe. END OF SUB-SECTION 4r tail' W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100 o Specs_Jun2010110,10400_Iden6fyingDevices.d0c 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11002 Electric Motor Drives Page 1 of 7 SUB-SECTION 10.11002 ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: Provide motors to drive equipment specified in other Sub- Sections, including, but not limited to, Sections 10.11, 10.15, and 10.16. Refer to rr+ driven equipment sections for additional requirements. Requirements of the driven equipment Specifications shall take precedence over the requirements of this Sub- Section, where conflict occurs. This Sub-Section applies to all electric motors furnished for.this project, unless otherwise noted. B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.11300: Submersible Sewage Pumps 2. Sub-Section 10.11349: Sump Pump 2. Sub-Section 10.15800: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning 3. Sub-Section 10.16010: General Electrical Requirements 4. Sub-Section 10.16920: Motor Control Centers 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standard: 1. MG 1 Motors and Generators +r B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Standard: 1. 112 Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Publication: Recognized Component Directory 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. For each motor, include the following data in the shop drawing submittal for the driven equipment: 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Manufacturer's type and frame designation. 3. Horsepower output. 4. Time rating. 5. Maximum ambient temperature rating. 6. Insulation system designation. 7. Rpm at full load. 8. Voltage, number of phases, frequency, and full load amperes. 9. Code letter for locked rotor kVA. .r 10. Service factor at 40°C ambient. 11. NEMA design letter. 12. Enclosure type. 13. Lubrication requirements, including type and frequency. 14. KW input power and power factor at 75% and 100% of rated horsepower output. W1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.11002.DOC 6/14/2010 to WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11002 Electric Motor Drives Page 2 of 7 ow 15. Guaranteed minimum efficiency and nominal efficiency per MG1-12.55. 16. Nominal efficiency. B. Provide installation, operation and maintenance instructions, and renewal parts list `"`� as in accordance with Sub-Section 10.01730. 1.04 COORDINATION to A. General: Coordinate motors with driven equipment requirements. Unless otherwise specified, equipment manufacturers or suppliers shall select and provide motors for their equipment in conformance with these Specifications. Give particular attention to coordination of requirements for: 1. Power. .r� 2. Starting torque. 3. Speed. 4. Bearing load. 5. Ambient temperature. 6. Frequency of starting. 7. Moisture exposure. rrr 8. Adjustable speed control, where applicable. B. Suppliers of motors to be used with adjustable speed systems shall: 1. Provide all relevant motor data to the adjustable speed control manufacturer for analysis. Provide motors in conformance with and compatible with the adjustable speed control manufacturer's equipment and requirements. 2. Provide all relevant motor data to the pump manufacturer for vibration, reed critical frequency, and other required analyses. 1.05 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS A. The following motor characteristics are specified with the driven equipment in all cases: 1. Speed. 2. Horsepower or supplier responsibility to determine. 3. Horizontal or vertical arrangement. 4. Indoor or outdoor location. a B. Additional motor characteristics are specified with the driven equipment only where the required motor differs from the typical characteristics described below or where additional properties or characteristics are required that are not specified in this Sub-Section. 1w PART 2 - PRODUCTS aw 2.01 GENERAL A. Motors shall be designed, built, and installed in the driven equipment, to provide long, trouble-free life in industrial service and shall be rated in conformance with NEMA MG1. Motors rated 100 horsepower or less and rated 600V or less shall be listed in UL Recognized Component Directory or shall be listed and labeled by other organizations acceptable to the authority having code enforcement jurisdiction. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs11001%_Specs_Jun2010\10.11002.DOC 6/14/2010 iilY WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11002 Electric Motor Drives Page 3 of 7 B. Unless otherwise specified with the driven equipment, provide motors with the following typical characteristics: 1. Motors shall be single speed, and designed for continuous duty and full voltage starting. Motors shall provide standard starting torque. 2. Voltage Ratings: a. 1/2 horsepower or less: 115 volts, single-phase, 60 Hz, capacitor start. Small fan motors may be split phase or shaded pole type if standard for the equipment. b. Above 1/2 horsepower: 460 volts, three-phase, 60 Hz, squirrel cage induction motors. ' 3. All motors shall have a service factor of 1.15 in an ambient temperature of 40°C. a. Exceptions: Motors, which have special enclosures or winding configurations, may carry a Unity (1.0) Service Factor. Examples are totally enclosed, explosion proof, or submersible motors. 4. Windings shall be copper. 5. Provide ground lug inside the terminal box. 6. . Provide lifting eye on each motor weighing more than 50 pounds. 7. Each motor shall be suitable for six starts per hour (5 minutes on and 5 minutes off, continuously) when powering the specific driven equipment required for this project. 8. Each motor shall have an overall sound power level at no load not greater than given in NEMA MG1-12.49. 9. Motors, which have special operating characteristics such as multi-speed, high torque/high slip, short time intermittent ratings shall be nameplated to show how these characteristics differ from standard design. C. Motors used with adjustable frequency drives shall have inverter duty complying with NEMA MG-1, Section IV, Part 31. err 2.02 NAMEPLATE .r A. Provide stainless steel nameplate for each motor, attached to the motor by stainless steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall indicate clearly the information required by NEMA MG1, Part 10 and Part 12. 2.03 ENCLOSURE TYPE BY LOCATION A. Unless otherwise specified with the driven equipment, provide motors with the following typical enclosures: 1. Indoors: Horizontal motors shall be open, drip-proof; vertical motors shall be drip-proof with guard. 2. Outdoors: Vertical motors shall be weather-protected type I. Horizontal motors shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled. All motors shall have the following features: a. Bearing protection. b. Anti-corrosion treatment of external hardware and internal metal parts. c. Weatherproof terminal box with gaskets between the motor, terminal box and terminal box cover. d. Guard screens on ventilation openings. W:12006106g7003_C4-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.11002.DOC 6/14/2010 g. WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11002 Electric Motor Drives Page 4 of 7 wo e. Moderate moisture resistant insulation, specified hereinafter. f. Interior and exterior corrosion protection coatings. g. Special attention to leads into terminal box. wo B. When specifically called for in the Specifications for the driven equipment or required by Code, provide the following enclosure types: 1. Hazardous locations: Motors shall be explosion-proof and shall be UL listed for as Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D locations; motors shall bear the UL label. 2. Severe duty: Motors shall have the following features: a. Totally enclosed, fan cooled enclosure. b. Stainless steel nameplate. c. Cast iron housing, bearing brackets and fan guard. d. Cast iron conduit box with threaded conduit entrance. e. Corrosion resistant fan. f. Corrosion resistant hardware. g. Automatic breather/drain. h. Ground lug. i. Regreasable bearings. j. Provision for excluding water and dust from bearings. k. Class F insulation. I. Service factor of 1.15. m. Epoxy coating on all external surfaces. 3. Submersible: Submersible motors shall comply with the following: a. Air filled or oil filled squirrel cage induction type. b. Service factor of 1.15 or better. c. Class F insulation, Class B temperature rise. d. Rated for 6 starts per hour. e. Listed by either UL or FM for Class 1, Division 1, Groups C and D hazardous locations. wr f. Suitable for operating in free air continuously (i.e., not submerged in sewage). g. Bearing B10 life 18,000 hours minimum. h. Tungsten carbide seals. i. Lower bearings of either the ball or roller type. j. If required by the manufacturer to not void the motor warranty, provide a moisture detection system and a motor winding thermostat system. These systems shall be complete, including all necessary interfaces, control panels, conduits, and wires, even though these may not be shown on the wr Drawings. 2.04 INSULATION A. Unless otherwise specified with the driven equipment, provide motors with Class B or F insulation, non-hygroscopic. In single phase motors 1/2 horsepower or smaller, provide Class A insulation or better. B. Where called for in the Specifications for the driven equipment, provide the following type of insulation: • 1. Moderate Moisture Resistant: Provide extra dip and bake of epoxy or polyester varnish to resist somewhat higher than normal moisture in the atmosphere. �1. ice' W1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesignl10.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.11002.DOC 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11002 Electric Motor Drives Page 5 of 7 2.05 MOTOR HORSEPOWER A. The maximum permissible motor loading: 1. Motors with service factor 1.15 or greater: 100% of nameplate horsepower. ad 2. Motors with service factor less than 1.15: 90% of nameplate horsepower. TABLE 10.11002-1 MOTOR NOMINAL EFFICIENCIES AT FULL LOAD rel HP 900 RPM 1,200 RPM 1 1,800 RPM 3,600 RPM Open Drip-Proof and Weather Protected Type 1 Motors 1 78.5 78.5 82.5 80.0 1.5 80.0 80.0 84.0 81.5 2 85.5 82.5 82.5 85.5 3 85.5 82.5 82.5 84.0 10 5 86.5 86.5 85.5 86.5 7.5 87.5 89.5 87.5 88.5 10 90.2 90.2 89.5 86.5 15 90.2 91.7 90.2 89.5 20 91.7 91.7 91.0 90.2 25 91.7 92.4 91.7 90.2 rr 30 92.4 93.0 92.4 92.4 40 91.7 93.0 93.6 93.6 50 93.0 93.0 93.6 93.6 60 93.6 93.6 94.1 94.1 75 94.1 93.6 94.1 93.6 100 94.5 94.5 94.5 94.1 125 94.5 95.0 95.0 94.1 150 95.0 94.5 95.0 94.1 200 95.0 95.0 95.0 94.1 250 94.5 95.0 95.0 94.5 300-500 95.0 95.8 95.8 94.5 Total Enclosed Fan Cooled Motors 1 78.5 78.5 82.5 80.0 1.5 80.0 80.0 84.0 81.5 2 85.5 82.5 82.5 85.5 3 86.5 86.5 82.5 84.0 5 88.5 87.5 85.5 86.5 7.5 89.5 90.2 87.5 88.5 10 90.2 91.0 89.5 90.2 15 90.2 92.4 91.0 91.7 20 91.7 92.4 91.0 91.7 25 91.7 93.0 92.4 92.4 30 92.4 93.0 93.0 93.0 40 92.4 93.6 94.1 94.1 50 93.6 93.6 94.1 94.1 60 93.6 94.1 94.1 94.1 W:1200810897003-City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.11002.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11002 Electric Motor Drives Page 6 of 7 rr HP 900 RPM 1,200 RPM 1,800 RPM 3,600 RPM 75 94.1 94.1 94.1 94.5 100 94.5 95.0 95.0 94.5 ow 125 94.5 95.0 95.4 95.0 150 94.5 95.0 95.4 95.4 200 95.0 95.0 95.4 95.4 WN 250 95.0 95.4 95.8 95.8 300-500 95.0 95.8 95.8 95.8 to B. Probable motor horsepower ratings have been specified or shown on the Drawings. Changes from the specified horsepower may be accepted, if necessary to assure that motors do not exceed their maximum permissible loading, as defined above, No under normal operation. Motor horsepowers shall not be less than those specified in driven equipment sub-sections. If a larger horsepower rating is required by the driven equipment, provide all changes required to motor starting and control r equipment and to the conduit and wiring system without any additional cost to the Owner. 2.06 EFFICIENCY A. For motors 1 Horsepower and Larger: 1. Provide premium efficiency motors unless otherwise specified. Premium efficiency motors shall have nominal efficiencies at full load not less than those listed in Table 10.11002-1. 2. Guaranteed minimum efficiencies of premium efficiency motors shall aw correspond to nominal values as tabulated in NEMA MG-1, Table 12-8. B. Efficiencies shall be determined by using the IEEE 112, Test Method B using r segregated loss determination. C. Single-phase fractional horsepower motors 1/4 HP through 3/4 HP motors shall be high-efficiency split-capacitor types having minimum efficiency ratings of not less than 64% and power factors of not less than 94.5%. 2.07 LOCKED ROTOR KVA - CODE LETTER A. Provide motors with locked rotor kVA values less than or equal to those r corresponding to the following: Horsepower Code Letter w. <5 M 7-1/2-10 H >_15 G err 2.08 THERMAL PROTECTION 1W A. In each motor to be used with adjustable speed drives, in all motors 60 horsepower and larger, or where called for in the Specifications for the driven equipment, provide integral thermostats or other approved devices to protect the motor from AIM W:\200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesignl10.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.11002.DOC 6114/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11002 Or Electric Motor Drives Page 7 of 7 overheating. Thermostats or other devices shall be normally closed and rated ► 125 Vac, 1 amp. 2.09 SPACE HEATERS ,it A. Where called for in the Specifications for the driven equipment, provide space heaters or solid state motor winding heating systems for motors. Heaters shall be 120 or 240 volts, single-phase, as required by the control circuit voltage or be of the SCR voltage controlled type. Heater wattage and voltage ratings shall be indicated on motor nameplate. 2.10 FACTORY TESTS A. Conduct factory tests on all motors in conformance with NEMA MG 1-12.55. All tests shall be made in accordance with IEEE Standard 112. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install motors in driven equipment in conformance with motor manufacturer's recommendations and requirements. Motor nameplate shall be visible when installed on the driven equipment. END OF SUB-SECTION us .r re W:12008%0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign%l0.01-Specs%100%_Specs_Jun2010110.11002.D0C 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11300 Submersible Sewage Pumps Page 1 of 6 SUB-SECTION 10.11300 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Sub-Section 10.01660 Testing, Startup and Operation B. Sub-Section 10.15070 Pipe and Fittings C. Sub-Section 10.11002 Electric Motor Drives ow D. Drawings: Sheets C13 and C14 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Submersible Pumps and Appurtenances B. Maintenance Data: Per Sub-Section 10.01730 trr PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER AND MODEL A. Pumps shall be ITT Flygt NP3301.180-HT, no equal. 6-inch suction and discharge 85-HP motors, three phase, 60 Hz, 460 Volts, 7 wire B. One pump shall be equipped with a Flygt Mix-Flush system with 90 degree elbow as shown on the Drawings. C. Contact: Bill Carson, Whitney Equipment at(425) 486-9499. "• 2.2 OPERATING CONDITIONS A. Each pump shall be capable of delivering 425 gpm at 172 feet of TDH (initial). B. With an impeller change, each pump shall also be capable of being upgrades to 775 gpm at 200.5 feet of TDH. C. Maximum allowable speed shall be 1800 rpm. D. Minimum efficiency at either of the two operating points described above shall be 40%. 2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Furnish and install two submersible wastewater pumps. Each pump shall be equipped with 40 feet (minimum) of submersible cable (SUBCAB) suitable for submersible pump applications. The power cable shall be sized according to NEC and ICEA standards and have P-MSHA Approval. The pumps shall be supplied with a mating cast iron 6-inch discharge connection. Each pump shall be fitted with one-foot of stainless steel chain and stainless steel 1W guide cable, length as necessary based on Drawings, for pump retrieval using a Grip-eye system. The working load of the lifting system shall be 50% greater than the pump unit weight. �r B. Pump Design: The pumps shall be automatically and firmly connected to the discharge connection, each guided by no less than two guide bars extending from the top of the station to the discharge connection. There shall be no need for personnel to enter the wet-well for pump maintenance. Sealing of the pumping unit to the discharge connection shall be accomplished by a machined F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\FinaI Specs\Section 10.11 Equipment\10.11300.doc 6/25/2010 fill WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11300 Submersible Sewage Pumps Page 2 of 6 metal-to-metal watertight contact. Sealing of the discharge interface with a diaphragm, O-ring or profile gasket will not be acceptable. No portion of the pump shall bear directly on the sump floor. 4W C. Pump Construction: Major pump components shall be of gray cast iron, ASTM A- 48, Class 3513, with smooth surfaces devoid of blow holes or other irregularities. All exposed nuts or bolts shall be AISI type 304 stainless steel. All metal surfaces coming into contact with the pumpage, other than stainless steel or brass, shall be protected by a factory applied spray coating of acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer with a polyester resin paint finish on the exterior of the pump. Sealing design shall incorporate metal-to-metal contact between machined surfaces. Critical mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with Nitrile or Viton rubber O-rings. Fittings will be the result of controlled compression of rubber O-rings in two planes and O-ring contact of four sides without the requirement of a specific torque limit. ' Rectangular cross-sectioned gaskets requiring specific torque limits to achieve compression shall not be considered as adequate or equal. No secondary sealing compounds, elliptical O-rings, grease or other devices shall be used. D. Cooling System: Each unit shall be provided with an integral motor cooling system. A motor cooling jacket shall encircle the stator housing, y g j g, providing for dissipation of motor heat regardless of the type of pump installation. An impeller, integral to the cooling system and driven by the pump shaft, shall provide the necessary circulation of the cooling liquid through the jacket. The cooling liquid shall pass about the stator housing in the closed loop system in turbulent flow providing for superior heat transfer. The cooling system shall have one fill port and one drain port integral to the cooling jacket. The cooling system shall provide for continuous pump operation in liquid temperature of up to 104 Degrees F. Operational restrictions below 104 Degrees F are not acceptable. Fans, blowers, or auxiliary cooling systems that are mounted external to the pump motor are not acceptable. E. Cable Entry Seal: The cable entry seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements to insure a watertight and submersible seal. The cable entry shall consist of a single cylindrical elastomer grommet, flanked by washers, all having a close tolerance fit against the cable outside diameter and the entry inside diameter. The grommets shall be compressed by the cable entry unit, thus providing a strain relief function. The assembly shall provide ease of changing the cable when necessary using the same entry seal. The cable entry junction chamber and motor shall be sealed from each other, which shall isolate the stator housing from foreign material gaining access through the pump top. Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary sealing systems shall not be considered acceptable. ■r F. Motor: The pump motor shall be a NEMA B design,induction type with a squirrel cage rotor, shell type design, housed in an air filled, watertight chamber. The stator windings shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class H insulation rated for 180 C (356 F). The stator shall be insulated by the trickle impregnation method using Class H monomer-free polyester resin resulting in a winding fill F10015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.11 Equipment\10.11300.doc 6/2512010 rir WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11300 Submersible Sewage Pumps Page 3 of 6 factor of at least 95%. The motor shall be inverter duty rated in accordance with NEMA MG1, Part 31. The stator shall be heat-shrink fitted into the cast iron stator housing. The use of multiple step dip and bake-type stator insulation r process is not acceptable. The use of bolts, pins, screws or other fastening devices used to locate or hold the stator and that penetrate the stator housing is not acceptable. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty handling pumped media of 40 C (104 F). The motor shall be capable of no less than 15 evenly spaced starts per hour. The rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be made of aluminum. Three thermal switches shall be embedded in the stator lead coils, one per phase, to monitor the stator temperature. These thermal switches shall be used in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor overload protection and shall be connected to the control panel. The junction chamber shall be sealed off from the stator housing and shall contain a terminal board for connection of power and pilot sensor cables using threaded compression type terminals. The use of wire nuts or crimp-type connection devices is not acceptable. The motor and pump shall be produced by the same manufacturer. ir+ The motor service factor (combined effect of voltage, frequency and specific gravity) shall be a minimum of 1.15. The motor shall have a voltage tolerance of +�► plus or minus 10%. The motor shall be designed for operation up to 40 C (104 F) ambient and with a temperature rise not to exceed 80 C. A performance chart shall be provided upon request showing curves for torque, current, power factor, input/output kW and efficiency. This chart shall also include data on starting and no-load characteristics. The power cable shall be sized according to the NEC and'ICEA standards and shall be of sufficient length to reach the junction box without the need of any splices. The outer jacket of the cable shall be oil resistant chloroprene rubber. +w. The motor horsepower shall be adequate so that the pump is non-overloading throughout the entire pump performance curve from shut-off through run-out. The motor and cable shall be capable of continuous submergence underwater without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of 65 feet. G. Bearings: The integral pump/motor shaft shall rotate on two bearings. The motor bearings shall be sealed and permanently grease lubricated with high temperature grease. The upper motor bearing shall be a two row angular contact ball bearing. The lower bearing shall be a two row angular contact ball bearing to handle the axial thrust and radial forces. The minimum 1_10 bearing life shall be 50,000 hours at any usable portion of the pump curve. H. Mechanical Seal: Each pump shall be provided with positively driven dual, �.. tandem mechanical shaft seal system consisting of two seal sets, each having an independent spring. The lower, primary seal, located between the pump and the seal chamber, shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating corrosion resistant tungsten-carbide ring. The upper, secondary seal unit, located between the seal chamber and the seal inspection chamber, shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating corrosion resistant r tungsten-carbide seal ring. All seal rings shall be individual solid sintered rings. Each seal interface shall be held in place by its own spring system. The seals shall not depend upon direction of rotation for sealing. Mounting of the lower F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.11 Equipment\10.11300.doc 6/25/2010 ill@ � WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11300 Submersible Sewage Pumps Page 4 of 6 seal on the impeller hub is not acceptable. Shaft seals without positively driven rotating members or conventional double mechanical seals containing either a common single or double spring acting between the upper and lower seal faces are not acceptable. The seal springs shall be isolated from the pumped media to prevent materials from packing around them, limiting their performance. Each pump shall be provided with a lubricant chamber for the shaft sealing system. The lubricant chamber shall be designed to prevent overfilling and shall provide capacity for lubricant expansion. The seal lubricant chamber shall have one drain and one inspection plug that are accessible from the exterior of the motor unit. The seal system shall not rely upon the pumped media for lubrication. rrrr The area about the exterior of the lower mechanical seal in the cast iron housing shall have cast in an integral concentric spiral groove. This groove shall protect the seals by causing abrasive particulate entering the seal cavity to be forced out away from the seal due to centrifugal action. A separate seal leakage chamber shall be provided so that any leakage that may occur past the upper, secondary mechanical seal will be captured prior to entry + ► into the motor stator housing. Such seal leakage shall not contaminate the motor lower bearing. The leakage chamber shall be equipped with a float type switch that will signal if the chamber should reach 50% capacity. I. Pump Shaft: Pump and motor shaft shall be a single piece unit. The pump shaft is an extension of the motor shaft. Shafts using mechanical couplings shall not be acceptable. The shaft shall be made of ASTM/AISI Type 431 stainless steel. Shaft sleeves will not be acceptable. J. Impeller: The impeller shall be of gray cast iron, ASTM A-48 Class 3513, dynamically balanced, semi-open, multi-vaned, back swept, screw-shaped, non- clog design. The impeller leading edges shall be mechanically self-cleaned automatically upon each rotation as they pass across a spiral groove located on r the volute suction. The screw-shaped leading edges of the impeller shall be hardened to Rc 45 and shall be capable of handling solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge and other matter found in wastewater. The screw shape of the impeller inlet shall provide an inducing effect for the handling of up to 5% sludge and rag-laden wastewater. The impeller to volute clearance shall be readily adjustable by the means of a single trim screw. The impeller shall be locked to the shaft and held by an impeller bolt. K. Volute/Suction Cover: The pump volute shall be a single piece gray cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B, non-concentric design with smooth passages of sufficient size to pass any solids that may enter the impeller. Minimum inlet and discharge size shall be as specified. The volute shall have a replaceable volute insert ring containing spiral-shaped, sharp-edged groove(s). The spiral groove(s) shall provide the relief path and sharp edge(s) across which each impeller vane leading edge shall cross during rotation so to remain unobstructed. The internal volute bottom shall provide effective sealing between the multi-vane semi-open r► impeller and the volute. The insert ring shall be cast of(ASTM A-48 Class 35B cast iron or ASTM A 532 (Alloy III A), 25% chrome cast iron). FA0015\00018.0011 DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.11 Equipment\10.11300.doc 612 512 01 0 to WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11300 Submersible Sewage Pumps Page 5 of 6 VW L. Protection: Each pump motor stator shall incorporate three thermal switches, one per stator phase winding and be connected in series, to monitor the temperature 0W of the motor. Should the thermal switches open, the motor shall stop and activate an alarm. A float switch shall be installed in the seal leakage chamber and will activate if leakage into the chamber reaches 50% chamber capacity, signaling the need to schedule an inspection. The thermal switches and float switch shall be connected to a Mini CAS control and status monitoring unit. The Mini CAS unit shall be designed to be mounted in the pump control panel. M. Wet Well Automatic Cleaning Pump Attachment: The manufacturer shall ar incorporate one automatic cleaning valve for the wet well. The automatic cleaning system will be compatible with the explosion proof requirements of sewage lift station, will be completely automatic, require no regular maintenance WIN and have a 10 to 50 second adjustment. The cleaning attachment shall be a Flygt mixed flush valve. N. Pump Retrieval System: The lift station will have a pump retrieval system for each pump consisting of an ITT Flygt Grip-Eye positive-recovery system. The Grip-eye system shall consist of a length of Type 304 stainless steel guide cable connected to a short length (approximately ten links long) of Type 304 stainless steel chain of the required capacity, connected to the lifting eye or lifting bail of the submersible pump. Mount Type 304 schedule 40 stainless steel guide rails (3-inch) as shown on the Drawings with stainless steel upper and intermediate guide bar rail brackets (lower brackets are on the discharge elbows). A forged "Grip-eye" of wrought alloy steel shall be provided. When used, the Grip-eye device is attached to the lifting device (portable hoist or truck mounted hoist), the guide cable is detached from its hook located at the top of the hatch cover and the Grip-eye is allowed to slide down the taut cable to the pump chain. By slackening the guide cable the tooth on the Grip-eye is allowed to snag or engage the link on the pump chain. Once the Grip-eye engages the pump chain the pump is then lifted from the wet well. Replacement of the pump is accomplished in the reverse order. All components of the pump retrieval system shall be of sufficient strength for the specific pumps used for this project, including guide rails, chain sling, guide cables, and all attachment and mounting hardware. All components shall be stainless steel unless otherwise specified. 2.4 SPARE PARTS A. Two repair kits shall be provided (one for each pump), consisting of inner and outer seals, O-rings, and bearings. 2.5 WARRANTY A. In addition to the manufacturer's standard warranty, a five-year warranty shall also be provided for the pumps, motors, mixed-flush valve, and all related components. The warranty shall be a comprehensive warranty with no deductibles, covering parts and labor. Upon completion of startup and test and Owner acceptance, the F10015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.11 Equipment\10.11300.doc 6/2512010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11300 Submersible Sewage Pumps Page 6 of 6 system shall be registered for the manufacturer's 5-year warranty. Certificates and evidence of coverage shall be provided to the Owner. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Pumps shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 TESTING A. After completion of installation, field test pumps in accordance with Sub-Section 10.01660. B. Testing shall include demonstration of the pump retrieval system. 3.3 START-UP/FIELD SERVICES A. A qualified service engineer shall perform two days, if necessary, of on-site wr► start-up assistance and operator training. Start-up/field services shall include inspection and testing of the completed installations for lubrication, alignment, free operation, etc. END OF SUB-SECTION �r «rr at Mr F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.11 Equipment\10.11300.doc 6/25/2010 go WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11349 Sump Pump Page 1 of 2 +w SUB-SECTION 10.11349 SUMP PUMP aar PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE go A. Sub-Section 10.01660 Testing, Startup and Operation B. Sub-Section 10.15070 Pipe and Fittings C. Drawings: Sheet C15 1W 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: arra Pump and Appurtenances B. Maintenance Data: Per Sub-Section 10.01730 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER AND MODEL A. Pump shall be Zoeller Pump Co. Model 57 or approved equal; 115V, single phase, UL listed. B. Oil-lubricated upper sleeve and lower ball bearing running in bath of oil. C. Non-clogging vortex impeller design, passes 1/2" spherical solids. D. Motor— 60 Hz, 1550 RPM, oil filled, hermetically sealed, automatic reset, thermal overload protected. E. Corrosion resistant powder coated epoxy finish. F. Automatic operation. G. Solid buoyant polypropylene float. H. The pump shall have the approximate following operational characteristics at a water temperature of 60 degrees F. Operating Point Discharge `Q" (gpm) Head `TDH' (feet) rr 1 0 19 2 20 14.5 3 40 7 r 2.2 REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA .r A. Drawing: Dimensional drawings showing outline dimensions, overall sizes, and pump rotation. B. Performance Curves: Curves shall show output in gallons per minute versus total dynamic head in feet, pump efficiency, and net positive suction head required. C. Electrical Data: Motor data and full load amperage draw. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION F10015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.11 Equipment\10.11349.doc 6/25/2010 am WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.11349 Sump Pump Page 2 of 2 A. General: Install sump pump in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the Drawings. B. Location: Valve vault. C. Field test pump to check operational performance. sir END OF SUB-SECTION ,rr rr to .r 1W x g F:\0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.11 Equipment\10.11349.doc 6/25/2010 "" WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.15070 Pipe, Fittings and Pressure Gauges Page 1 of 4 SUB-SECTION 10.15070 PIPE, FITTINGS AND PRESSURE GAUGES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 7 Drainage Structures, Storm Sewers, Sanitary Sewers, Water Mains, and Conduits B. Division 9 Materials C. Sub-Section 10.01660 Testing, Startup and Operation D. Drawings: Sheets C12 through C16 w. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Pipe Materials ow Fittings Flexible Coupling Adapters Pipe Supports Pipe Brackets and Braces Stilling Well Pressure Gauges 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. This Sub-Section applies to pipe-related materials to be installed in the wet well, overflow storage facility, and valve vault. •► B. Pipe-related materials interior to the control building are specified elsewhere in Sub-Section 10.15. C. Pipe-related material installed exterior to structures are specified in Divisions 7 and 9. PART 2 - PRODUCTS .r 2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Refer to Divisions 7 and 9. B. Pipe for flanged joints and fittings shall be Class 53. C. Fittings shall be flanged for non-buried pipe, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 2.2 FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS A. Flanged Coupling Adapter: 1. Use for ductile iron pipe 12-inches in diameter and smaller to connect plain end pipe to flanged pipe or equipment. 2. Body: Gray iron ASTM A126 Class B or malleable iron ASTM A47. Bolt circle, bolt size and spacing conform to ANSI 150 pound flange w■ drilling. 3. Follower: Malleable iron ASTM A47 Grade 32510 or ductile iron ASTM A536. VW 4. Gasket: Grade 30 specially compounded rubber of all new materials. 5. O-Ring: Grade 60. +w FA0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.15 Mechanical\10.15070.doc 6/25/2010 ! WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.15070 Pipe, Fittings and Pressure Gauges Page 2 of 4 6. Cross and tee bolts: Ductile iron ASTM A536, malleable iron ASTM so A47 or high strength low allow steel to AWWA C111 (ANSI-A21.11) standards. 7. Ford, Romac, or approved equal, with anchor studs. 2.3 PIPE SUPPORTS A. Standon Model S96 Flanged Cradle Pipe Support or approved equal. 2.4 PIPE BRACKETS AND BRACES A. Materials, including the bolts and fasteners, shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel unless otherwise shown B. Dimensions, physical configurations, and locations shall be as shown on the Drawings. C. Brackets shall be of sturdy construction sufficient to bear the supported weights and to eliminate vibration. Any modifications required to eliminate vibration shall be borne by Contractor at no cost to the Owner. D. Where not specifically detailed on the Drawings, Contractor shall provide shop „( drawings for review by Engineer. 2.6 STILLING WELL A. PVC D3034 Sewer Pipe B. Install in the wet well as shown on the Drawings. 2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES A. 0 — 150 psig pressure gauges (2 required in the valve vault) with diaphragm seals and isolation valves. B. Stainless steel tubing and appurtenances as shown on the detail in the ► Drawings. 3. EXECUTION 1W 3.1 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR PIPE A. Complete installation to present neat orderly appearance. ,W B. Do not block openings or passageways with piping. C. Run piping parallel to walls, floors or ceiling of building. D. Keep piping free from contact with structure or installed items. E. Allow clearances for expansion and contraction of pipe. F. Placement of Vertical Piping: 1. Secure at sufficiently close intervals to keep pipe in alignment and to support weight of pipe and contents. Ail 2. Install supports at each floor or vertically at intervals of not more than 10 feet. 3. If piping is to stand free of support, or if no structural element is +�+� available for support during construction, secure in position with wooden stakes or braces fastened to pipe. G. Placement of Horizontal Piping: ar 1. Support at sufficiently close intervals to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. 2. Install supports at ends of runs or branches and at each change of direction or alignment. No FA001 5\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.15 Mechanical\10.15070.doc 6/25/2010 at ow WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.15070 Pipe, Fittings and Pressure Gauges Page 3 of 4 to 3. Support spacing shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendations nor as listed below: Maximum Support Spacing Aw Pipe Feet Ductile Iron rr Under 4" 8 4" and Over 16 PVC Under 2-1/2" 4 2-1/2" and Over 6 H. Support at Equipment: Install to not induce strain on equipment during or subsequent to the installation of pipe Work. I. Provide flexible connection or union at all connections to equipment to facilitate removal for maintenance. 3.2 INSTALLATION AT CONCRETE WALLS AND FOOTINGS A. Watertight Wall Seals: Use Link-Seal Model "O" Modular Seal, sized to fit, or �r• approved equal; with Type 304 stainless steel bolts for all pipe 2-inches in diameter or larger. B. Wall Sleeves: Use special cast iron wall spool or steel wall sleeves for all pipe less than 2 inches in diameter and for all nonferrous pipe except concrete. C. Flexible Connections: At each exterior wall penetrations as shown on the Drawings. 3.3 BELL AND SPIGOT, PUSH-ON, AND PIPE INSTALLATION A. Push on installation: Per manufacturer's instructions. B. Set grade to meet requirements of piping system and applicable code prior to installing joint. 3.4 FLANGED PIPE INSTALLATION A. Tighten flange bolts so that gasket is uniformly compressed and sealed. B. Do not distort flanges. C. Flange bolts to project 1/8 to 3/8-inches beyond the face of nut after tightening. 3.5 THREADED JOINT INSTALLATION A. Threads: ANSI B1.201, NPT. B. Cut threads full and clean with sharp dies. C. Ream ends of pipe after threading and before assembly to remove burrs. D. Leave not more than three pipe threads exposed at each connection. E. Joint Sealer—Teflon thread tape. 3.6 PVC PIPE INSTALLATION 1. Cutting: a. Cut pipe with a knife or hand saw. b. Make cuts square with pipe. c. Remove burrs by smoothing edges with a knife, file, or sandpaper. 2. Solvent Joints: VW FA001 5\0001 8.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.15 Mechanical\10.15070.doc 6/25/2010 Am WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.15070 Pipe, Fittings and Pressure Gauges Page 4 of 4 a. Clean joint surfaces. wi b. Coat with solvent cement and join. c. Hold joint together until cement takes hold. d. Use sufficient cement so that a bead of cement is formed between pipe and fitting at socket entrance. 3. Threaded Joints: Tighten by strap wrench to not more than one full turn beyond hand tight. 3.7 TESTING A. General: 1. All pipe and fittings shall be pressure-tested as specified herein. 2. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment, and labor for testing and retesting the piping system. 3. Each system may be tested as a unit or in sections, but each complete system shall successfully meet the requirements specified herein before acceptance by the Owner. 4. Should any defects appear in the pipe or fittings, the necessary repair shall be made, and the line retested until it shall meet the requirements. 5. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent any joints from drawing while the pipelines and their appurtenances are being tested and he shall at his own expense repair any damage to the pipes and their appurtenances or to any other structures or equipment resulting from or caused by these tests. 6. The Contractor shall inform the Owner at least two days in advance of the time set for testing the piping system. B. Sewage and Water: 1. All piping shall be hydrostatically pressure tested as specified herein. + Test pressure for sewage and water piping shall be 150 psi. 2. The test shall be made by closing valves or providing bulkheads or plugs and filling the pipeline with water. Provisions shall be made for rwir release of all air in the lines. Lines may be filled with water sometime before testing to allow for absorption of water by pipe or joint material. The test pressure must be maintained a minimum of one hour or sufficiently longer to permit the Owner to make a review of the system. During the test, pipe, fittings, and joints shall be completely tight. C. Air Piping and Fittings: 1. All vent piping, interior and exterior shall be air tested at a pressure of 25 psi. 2. The test shall be made by closing valves or providing bulkheads or plugs as required. The test pressure must be maintained a minimum of one hour or sufficiently long to permit the Owner to make a review of the system. The Contractor shall test all joints in the system with a soapy solution while the line is under test pressure and all joints shall ' be completely tight. END OF SUB-SECTION w FA0015\00018.001\DESIGN(28245)\Lift Station Design(28579)\Specs\Final Specs\Section 10.15 Mechanical\10.15070.doc 6/25/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.15400 Plumbing Page 1 of 4 w► SUB-SECTION 10.15400 PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sub-Section Includes: 1. Plumbing fixtures and accessories 2. Plumbing piping. �* B. Related Sub-Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.07900: Joint Sealants ow 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Standards: 1. U.L. 174 Standards for Safety B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 1. Seismic Restraint Manual, Guidelines for Mechanical Systems. C. All state and local building codes including plumbing, mechanical, fire, building, and electrical. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with the Special Provisions. B. Submit manufacturer's information with materials, dimensions, and data to show VW that the products conform to the specification requirements. All products in this Sub-Section shall be included in a single initial submittal. ,W C. Submit operation and maintenance manuals where available from manufacturers. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE a« A. Codes: Comply with the rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over the work specified herein, including the applicable Plumbing Code with amendments. w. B. Permits and inspections shall be in accordance with Special Provisions. "" C. The Drawings shall be taken in a sense as diagrammatic. Size of pipes and general method of running them are shown, but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. at D. ADA compliance means that the plumbing item is accessible and usable by persons with disabilities. ow Im W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.15400-Plumbing.doc 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.15400 Plumbing Page 2 of 4 1.05 SEISMIC PROTECTION A. Provide equipment and piping with seismic protection as specified and as recommended by "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and wir Plumbing Piping System," latest edition by SMACNA. Provide more rigid restraint if required by the Specification. tw PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL ;h A. Provide equipment and materials conforming to the standards and manufacturers' serial numbers shown, or equal. 2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES A. Backflow Preventer: All backflow preventers shall be approved by the Foundation for Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research at the University of Southern California. Provide straight configuration with shutoff valves and test cocks, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 1. Pressure rating: 175 psi 2. Temperature rating: 32 to 140°F 16 3. Connections: ANSI Class 125 flanges, threaded for assemblies 2-inch and less. 4. Type: a. Reduced Pressure Backflow Assembly (RPBA): Febco Model 860, Watts ` Series 909, or equal. B. Hose Bibb: 4* 1. Indoor: Nibco Model 55; Arrowhead Brass Model 353; or equal. 2. Outdoor (Non-freezing type): J.R. Smith 5913; Zurn Z-1385; or equal. 3. Hose Racks: Suitable for 50 feet of 3/4-inch hose. + ' 2.03 PIPING so A. Potable Water (PW) and Non-Potable Water (NPW) Piping < 4 inches 1. Pipe: Copper, ASTM B88. a. Buried: Type K (soft drawn). b. Exposed: Type L (hard drawn). 2. Joints: a. Buried: Soldered or flared. b. Exposed: Soldered. 3. Solder: ASTM B32, alloy grade E or HB. Solder and flux shall contain less than 0.2% lead. 4. Fittings: a. Soldered: Wrought copper, ANSI 816.22; or cast bronze, ANSI B16.18. b. Flared: AWWA C800 and ANSI B16.26. .,R irMr W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesignU0.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.15400-Plumbing.doc 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.15400 Plumbing Page 3 of 4 2.04 THERMAL INSULATION FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING A. General: �.r 1. Delivery: Deliver insulation materials to the job in original packages with manufacturer's "R" values clearly shown. Provide certification of compliance. 2. Warning: The Contractor is warned that working with fiberglass or rock wool materials may constitute a serious health hazard. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure the safety of the workers. 3. Shields: Provide insulation protection shields at all pipe supports for insulated piping. 4. The.following table summarizes the insulation system by use and service: Insulation Insulation 4M System Location Service System Thickness Inches PW (Cold Water), NPW All exposed pipe in E A 1/2-inch (Cold Water) buildings rrr For System: PW= Potable Water NPW= Non-Potable Water For Service: E = Exposed including concealed space B = Buried B. Insulation System A: 1. Material: Insulation shall be a pre-molded fiberglass with a maximum "K" factor of 0.25 at 70°F and having a factory-applied jacket. Fittings shall be insulated with insulating cement or mitered section of pre-molded fiberglass. ,■. 2. Fittings shall be covered with a Zeston, Thermazip, or equal jacket. Pipe insulation shall be Schuller "Micro-Lok 850-AP" with foil scrim kraft jacket, with laps and butt straps secured with Benjamin Foster or Arobol adhesive; Owens-Corning Fiberglas Type 25 ASJ/SSL; or equal. 3. Insulation exposed to the weather shall have, in addition, an aluminum waterproof jacket alloy 3003 (0.024-inch); Childers, Alcorjac, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION aw 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install escutcheons secured to pipe with set-screw where pipes or tubing pass Im through exposed walls or ceilings. B. Provide all fixtures with traps and vents unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Provide unions or flanges where equipment is installed in piping. Also provide dielectric unions or couplings at points of connection of ferrous to non-ferrous metal r piping. E. Provide a shut-off stop valve in the branch of every water, air, gas, or vacuum pipe service upstream of every fixture or outlet. F. Provide identification nameplates for each item of mechanical equipment. »r W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2D10110.15400-Plumbing.doc 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.15400 Plumbing Page 4 of 4 G. Furnish and install all supports, bracing and blocking required for the proper ` installation of the plumbing work specified herein. H. Water hammer arrestors shall be installed in water systems upstream of each 4* solenoid valve, quick closing valve, and emergency shower. I. Vent flashing at roof, unless otherwise shown on the Architectural Drawings, shall be a 4 Ib lead sheet extending from a 4-inch (minimum) skirt at roofline, up to the open end of vent. At the open end of vent, the lead sheet shall be turned down into the vent opening. J. Provide valves where equipment drain connections are furnished and carry the discharge pipe to the nearest floor drain, drain trench, or sump. Where no receptacle for drain exists, install drain piping to 1-inch above the floor. Drain piping and valve materials shall conform to the requirements of the system served. 3.02 TEST AND INSPECTION A. Test the systems and arrange for inspection by the proper authorities. B. Water piping shall be hydraulically tested at not less than working pressure psig and demonstrated to be leak-free for a one-hour test period or greater. as C. Waste, drain and vent piping shall be tested in conformance with the Uniform Plumbing Code with local amendments. END OF SUB-SECTION •r W1200M897003_City-of-Renton_Slonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs\l00%—Specs_Jun2010110.15400-Plumbing.doc 6/14/2010 No WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.15800 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Page 1 of 4 00 SUB-SECTION 10.15800 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Am PART 1 - GENERAL ttw 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCLUDES w, A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, services, and incidentals required to provide complete, integrated, and operating, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems for the buildings and structures in this project. Materials and equipment to be supplied shall be new, of the best quality as specified and as shown on the Drawings. B. Work Included in This Sub-Section: 1. Dampers 2. Fans 3. Electric heaters err 4. Temperature control systems 5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide shop drawings and technical literature covering all equipment and accessories being furnished under this Sub-Section in accordance with the Special Provisions. The data shall include information to demonstrate compliance with all of the requirements of these Specifications. B. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer's installation, lubrication, and maintenance manuals, bulletins and parts lists. Furnish separate list of recommended spare parts. +ww C. Affidavits: Furnish affidavits from the manufacturers stating that the equipment has been properly installed and tested and each is ready for full time operation. D. Submit fabrication drawings for ductwork, including duct supports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes: Comply with all rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over the work specified herein. B. Permits and inspection shall be in accordance with the Special Provisions. ra C. All equipment furnished under this Sub-Section shall: (1) be of a design and manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of the equipment,- and (2) be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the quality is equal to equipment made by those manufacturers specifically named herein. 40 W:1200810897003 City-oi-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100% Specs_Jun2010110.15800-HVAC.doc 6!1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.15800 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Page 2 of 4 D. The Drawings shall be taken in a sense as diagrammatic. Size of ducts and pipes including general method of running them are shown, but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. 1.04 SEISMIC PROTECTION A. Equipment specified in this Sub-Section is classified as essential for seismic protection as specified in Sub-Section 10.01190. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DAMPERS A. Backdraft Dampers: Backdraft dampers shall be of an all welded design constructed of 14-gauge aluminum. Frames shall be channel type with flanges to facilitate mounting. Blades shall pivot off center in ball bearings, double crimped " front and rear, fitted with polyurethane seals, linked to work in unison and equipped with adjustable counterweights attached to blades. Dampers shall be of size and location as shown on the Drawings. 1. Backdraft Dampers shall be Greenheck Model WD-330; Ruskin; or equal. B. Control Dampers: Control dampers shall have 4-inch frames constructed of extruded aluminum configured for installation as shown on the Drawings, and shall be of the dimensions displayed on the Architectural Drawings of the louver with which they will be mounted. Blades shall be parallel opening. Dampers shall be configured for internal actuator mounting. Greenheck Model VCD-40; Ruskin Model CD-40; or equal. 1. Damper Actuators: Actuators shall be internal mount type, 120 VAC, adequately sized for damper actuation and open the damper from a fully closed position in 25 seconds or less. Manufacturer shall be Honeywell Model MS4209; Ruskin; or equal. 2. See Control Damper Schedule on the Drawings for specific requirements. 2.02 FANS r A. Propellar Sidewall Exhaust Fans: Sidewall exhaust fans shall be factory fabricated assemblies having fan, fan motor, motor guard, and fan housing. Fan capacities, electrical characteristics, special features, and accessories shall be as indicated in the fan schedule on the Drawings. Fans shall bear the AMCA seal and shall be furnished with automatic (gravity) backdraft dampers where indicated on the Drawings. w 1. Direct drive fans shall be Greenheck Type SE1; Loren Cook Model AWD; or equal. Belt-driven fans shall be Greenheck Type SBCE; Loren Cook Model AWB; or equal. B. See the Fan Schedule on the Drawings for specific requirements. >r W:1200810897003_City-ot-Renton_Stonegale110-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010110.15800-HVAC.doc 6114/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.15800 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Page 3 of 4 ' 2.03 ELECTRIC HEATERS A. Electric Unit Heaters: Electric unit heaters shall be factory fabricated unit heater assembly bearing the Underwriters Laboratories label. Heaters shall be assembled in heavy gauge steel cabinets, shall have horizontal air flow discharge and shall be furnished with wall or ceiling mounting support brackets, contactors, relays, transformers, thermostats, internal wiring, adjustable air flow louvers, and interwiring between the components. Thermostats shall be either 24-volt or 120-volt type for remote mounting. Unit heaters shall be Reznor Model EGHB; Chromalox Model LUH; or equal. B. See Electric Heater Schedule on the Drawings for specific requirements. 2.04 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Thermostats: Provide thermostats as shown on the Drawings, and for all aw equipment identified as thermostat-controlled. Thermostats shall be wall-mounted and have a minimum 40 to 90°F temperature range. Multi-stage thermostats shall be provided whenever more than one temperature setpoint is indicated. Provide aw thermostats meeting the following requirements unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or in the Specifications. 1. Low-voltage or line-voltage thermostats shall be provided in unfinished areas. Thermostats shall include an integral room thermometer. 2. Thermostats integral with the equipment shall only be provided where noted in the Specifications. +r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Protection: Fully protect all unfinished parts of the materials and equipment against VW damage from whatever cause during the progress of the work and until final completion. All materials and equipment shall be covered while in storage and during construction in such manner that no finished surfaces shall be damaged or .n marred and all moving parts shall be kept perfectly clean and dry. B. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the best practice of the several trades and with the respective manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. rr C. Testing and Adjusting Equipment and Controls: 1. The equipment and controls of this Sub-Section shall be completely tested, adjusted, and placed in operating condition. 2. Retest equipment and controls, as necessary, during the progress of the work. No work shall be covered until it is properly tested and made tight. 3. Supply the testing apparatus and make all necessary connections for applying "r the tests. 4. When about to turn the apparatus over to the Engineer, put all parts of the apparatus in perfect working order and thoroughly clean out all parts of the Aw equipment. o' W:\2008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate\10-EngDesign\10.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.15800-HVAC.doc 6116/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.15800 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Page 4 of 4 D. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems: 1. All heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems installed under this Sub- Section shall be carefully adjusted by a qualified Air Balancing Contractor to deliver and exhaust air quantities as shown on the Drawings or described herein while maintaining the spaces served at the design temperature. A final so balancing report shall be submitted to the Engineer showing the airflow CFMs, fan statics, and motor amperages. 2. After the systems have been completely installed, all equipment shall be carefully tested and adjusted. Adjust all dampers, registers, and air diffusers for air flow and make an accurate velometer test of air quantities delivered and removed from each opening. Any readjustments in the motors, drives, units, controls, and other equipment found to be necessary in the opinion of the Engineer shall be made without additional cost and the entire system shall be placed in a satisfactory operating condition subject to the approval of the Engineer. 3. Air readings must be taken at each inlet and outlet, and fan speeds and dampers regulated until proper air volumes and diffusion are obtained at each inlet and outlet. Amperage and voltage readings shall be taken and noted, together with the nameplate amperage on the motors. 3.02 HVAC CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS A. Control Building: 1. The Control Building shall be ventilated by exhaust fan EF-1. EF-1 shall be equipped with a HAND-OFF-AUTO (HOA) hand switch interlocked with a thermostat. EF-1 may be manually operated in the HAND position and turned off in the OFF position. While in AUTO and if the outside air temperature 4W measured by the outside air temperature sensor is below the room temperature setpoint; EF-1 shall activate when the space temperature exceeds the temperature setpoint of the thermostat. EF-1 shall be interlocked with control damper CD-1. CD-1 shall open up activation of EF-1. Temperature setpoint wry shall be as shown on the Drawings. 2. The Control Building shall be heated by electric unit heater EH-1. A low temperature signal from the room thermostat shall start EH-1. Temperature setpoint shall be as shown on the Drawings. END OF SUB-SECTION rr ■r Wl200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100% Specs Jun2010110.15800-HVAC.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16010 General Electrical Requirements Page 1 of 9 SUB-SECTION 10.16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCLUDES A. Work Included: 1. Provide all required labor, project equipment and materials, tools, construction equipment, safety equipment, transportation, and test equipment, and satisfactorily complete all electrical work shown on the Drawings, included in these Specifications, or required for a complete and fully operating facility. In addition, provide wiring for the equipment that will be provided under other Sections of these Specifications. 2. Provide all conduits and wire for the Instrumentation and Controls specified in Section 10.17. Provide all Instrumentation and Control wire that is specified in Section 10.16. rr B. Work Specified in Other Sections: 1. Sub-Section 10.11002: Electric Motor Drives 2. Section 10.17: Providing instruments and other equipment specified in Section 10.17. C. Safety: Conduct operations in accordance with NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workspaces. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. General: Submit Product Review or Product information shop drawings for • materials and equipment as required under each Specification Sub-Section. 2. For Product Review submittals, submit a single, complete submittal package for all items specified in a particular Specification Sub-Section. Submittal packages shall be organized by equipment type. Include separators and tabs or other means of identifying each Specification paragraph (e.g., 2.01, 2.02,.etc.) of the submittals or other means of identifying each Section of the submittal. B. As-Built Shop Drawings: Revise manufacturer's shop drawings to show any construction changes. These drawings shall include all elementary, schematic, and wiring diagrams of all equipment, including heating and ventilation. Prior to Final Acceptance, deliver one complete set to the Engineer for review. After such review, provide copies of all CAD produced drawings on magnetic media satisfactory to the Engineer in AutoCAD DWG format. rrr C. Manuals: 1. Furnish manual for equipment where Manuals are specified in the equipment Specifications. Electrical manual shall be consolidated and submitted as a single manual. W:1200810897003_City-oi-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.16010 General Electrical Requirments.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16010 General Electrical Requirements Page 2 of 9 2. Include equipment descriptions, record shop drawings, operation and 00 maintenance instructions, parts ordering data, and ratings for the equipment furnished for this project. art D. Spare Parts: For each piece of equipment, submit a list of recommended spare parts. Include part numbers and the name, address, and telephone number of the supplier. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A: Codes: All electrical equipment and materials, including installation and testing, shall conform to the following applicable codes: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC), current edition; 2. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), current edition; 3. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) standards; 4. Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems, International Electrical Testing Association (NETA). B. Standards: Equipment shall conform to applicable standards of American National Standards Institute (ANSI), Electronics Industries Association (EIA), Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), and National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). The revisions of these standards in effect on the date of issuance of the Contract Documents shall apply. ,pit C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listing is required for all equipment and materials where such listing is offered by the Underwriters Laboratories. Safety labeling and listing by other organizations, such as ETL Testing Laboratories, may be substituted for UL labeling and listing if acceptable to the authority having code enforcement jurisdiction. Provide service entrance labels for all equipment required by the NEC to have such labels. D. Contractor's Expense: Obtain and pay for all required bonds, insurance, licenses, permits and inspections, and pay all taxes, fees, and utility charges that will be required for the electrical construction work. 1.04 DRAWINGS A. Drawings: The Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic; exact locations of electrical products shall be verified in the field with the Engineer. Except where special details are used to illustrate the method of installation of a particular piece or type of equipment or material, the requirements or descriptions in this Specification shall take precedence in the event of conflict. 1. Locations of equipment, inserts, anchors, motors, panels, pull boxes, manholes, conduits, stub-ups, fittings, lighting fixtures, power and convenience outlets, exterior lighting units, and ground wells are approximate unless dimensioned; verify locations with the Engineer prior to installation. 2. Field verify scaled dimensions on Drawings. 3. Review the Drawings and Specification Sections of other trades and perform the electrical work that will be required for the installations. 4. Should there be a need to deviate from the Electrical Drawings and Specifications, submit written details and reasons for all changes to the Engineer for review. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.16010 General Electrical Requirments.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16010 General Electrical Requirements Page 3 of 9 B. As-Built Drawings: 1. Maintain a complete and accurate record set of Drawings for the electrical construction work. w� 2. Record all work that is installed differently than shown on the Drawings. 3. Upon completion of the work, transfer all marked changes to a clean set of full- size Drawings with red ink. Mark the Drawings "RECORD DRAWINGS" and submit them to the Engineer when the electrical work is completed. 4. Locate all underground conduits by accurate field-measured dimensions from walls and corners, etc., of surrounding structures. 1.05 FACTORY TESTS A. Submit reports of factory tests and adjustments performed by equipment manufacturers to the Engineer prior to field testing and adjustment of the equipment. These reports shall identify the equipment and show dates, results of tests, measured values and final adjustment settings. Provide factory tests and adjustments for equipment where factory tests are specified in the equipment Specifications. �1r 1.06 INSPECTIONS A. The Engineer may inspect the fabricated equipment at the factory before shipment „K to job site. Provide the Engineer with sufficient prior notice so that an inspection can be arranged at the factory. B. Inspection of the equipment at the factory by the Engineer will be made after the manufacturer has performed satisfactory checks, adjustments, tests, and operations. C. Review of the equipment at the factory shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the proper installation and satisfactory startup operation of the equipment to the satisfaction of the manufacturer and the Engineer. 4 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the electrical work with the other trades, code authorities, utilities, and the Owner. B. Where connections must be made to existing installations, properly schedule all the required work, including the power and control system shutdown periods. Schedule and carry out shutdowns so as to cause the least disruption to operation of the plant and privately owned facilities. C. When two trades join together in an area, make certain that no electrical work is omitted. 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS X& A. Construction Power: 1. Make all arrangements for the required construction power. 2. When required, provide all equipment, materials and wiring in accordance with wr the applicable codes and regulations. rirt W1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16010 General Electrical Requirments.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16010 ' General Electrical Requirements Page 4 of 9 3. Upon completion of the project, remove all temporary construction power equipment, material, and wiring from the site as the property of the Contractor. B. Storage: Provide adequate storage for all equipment and materials which will become part of the completed facility so that it is protected from weather, dust, water, or construction operations. 1.09 DAMAGED PRODUCTS A. Notify the Engineer in writing in the event that any equipment or material is damaged. B. Obtain prior review by the Engineer before making repairs to damaged products. 1.10 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT A. For optional or substituted equipment, refer to Section 10.01. 1.11 LOCATIONS A. General: Use equipment, materials, and wiring methods suitable for the types of , locations in which they are located, as defined in Paragraph B. herein. B. Definitions of Types of Locations: 1. Dry Locations: All those indoor areas which do not fall within the definitions below for Wet or Damp Locations and which are not otherwise designated on the Drawings. 2. Wet Locations: All locations exposed to the weather, whether under a roof or not, unless otherwise designated on the Drawings. 3. Damp Locations: All spaces wholly or partially underground, or having a wall or ceiling forming part of a channel or tank, unless otherwise designated on the Drawings. 4. Hazardous Locations: The wastewater wet well. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARD OF QUALITY A. Products that are specified by manufacturer, trade name or catalog number establish a standard of quality and do not prohibit the use of equal products of other manufacturers provided they are approved by the Engineer prior to installation. B. It is the intent of these Specifications and Drawings to secure high quality in all materials and equipment in order to facilitate operation and maintenance of the facility. All equipment and materials shall be new and the products of reputable suppliers having adequate experience in the manufacture of these particular items. For uniformity, only one manufacturer will be accepted for each type of product. All equipment shall be designed for the service intended and shall be of rugged construction, of ample strength for all stresses that may occur during fabrication, transportation, erection, and continuous or intermittent operation. All equipment shall be adequately stayed, braced, and anchored and shall be installed in a neat W:k200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate\10-EngDesignl10.01-Specs1100%—Specs_Jun2010110.16010 General Electncal Requirments.doc 6/16/2010 "" WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16010 General Electrical Requirements Page 5 of 9 VW and workmanlike manner. Appearance and safety, as well as utility, shall be given consideration in the design of details. C. All components and devices installed shall be standard items of industrial grade, unless otherwise noted, and shall be of sturdy and durable construction suitable for long, trouble-free service. 2.02 NAMEPLATES A. For each piece of electrical equipment, provide a manufacturer's nameplate showing manufacturer's name, location, the pertinent ratings and the model designation. B. Identify each piece of equipment and related controls with a rigid laminated engraved phenolic nameplate. Engrave nameplates with the inscriptions indicated on the Drawings and, if not so indicated, with the equipment name. Securely fasten nameplates in place using two stainless steel screws or, where approved by the Engineer, with epoxy cement. Where no inscription is indicated on the Drawings, furnish nameplates with an appropriate inscription furnished by the Engineer upon %W prior request by the Contractor. C. Each control device, including pushbuttons, control switches, and indicating lights, shall have an integral legend plate or nameplate indicating the device function. me These shall be inscribed as indicated on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. List panel name and circuit number if equipment is served from panel or MCC. 2.03 FASTENERS 001 A. Fasteners for securing equipment to walls, floors and the like shall be either hot-dip galvanized after fabrication or stainless steel. Provide stainless steel fasteners in Corrosive Locations. When fastening to existing walls, floors, and the like, provide w� wedge anchors. Provide capsule anchors for bolts 3/8-inch and larger. Size anchors to meet load requirements. 2.04 PAINTING A. Equipment: Refer to each electrical equipment sub-section of these Specifications for painting requirements of equipment enclosures. Repair any final paint finish that has been damaged or is otherwise unsatisfactory, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 2.05 ENCLOSURES A. Unless otherwise noted, provide enclosures as follows: 1. Dry Locations: NEMA Type 1. 2. Wet Locations: NEMA Type 3R or 4X, as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Damp Locations: NEMA Type 4X. 4. Hazardous Locations: NEMA Type 7. 5. See additional requirements below in Paragraph 3.08, Metal Panels. ■s W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesignl10.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16010 General Electrical Requirments.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16010 General Electrical Requirements Page 6 of 9 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIREMENTS A. All electrical installations shall conform to the codes and standards outlined in this Sub-Section. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Assign a qualified representative who shall supervise the electrical construction work from beginning to completion and final acceptance. B. Perform all labor using qualified craftsmen, who have had experience on similar projects. Provide first-class workmanship for all installations. C. Ensure that all equipment and materials fit properly in their installations. D. Perform any required work to correct improperly fit installations at no additional expense to the Owner. 3.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Provide the excavations for electrical equipment foundations and trenches for conduits as shown on the Drawings. B. Exercise caution during all excavation work and avoid damage to existing underground pipes. Exercise extreme caution when working near existing electrical conduits and facilities. Field verify the location of all electrical facilities before proceeding with any nearby work. ow C. Refer to Section 10.02, Earthwork, of these Specifications for all excavation and backfilling work. 3.04 CONCRETE A. Where shown on the Drawings or specified, provide the required concrete installations for conduit encasement and equipment foundations. B. Refer to Section 10.03, Concrete of these Specifications for all concrete work. 3.05 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION A. Identify all wires and cables in conformance with the requirements of Sub-Sections 10.16120 and 10.16124. This requirement applies to all equipment provided under this contract, regardless of Section, as well as to all conductors provided or worked on during this contract. 3.06 INSTALLING EQUIPMENT it A. Provide the required inserts, bolts and anchors, and securely attach all equipment and materials to their supports. W:1200810897003 City-ot-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16010 General Electrical Requirments doc 6/1612010 """ WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16010 General Electrical Requirements Page 7 of 9 wo B. Install all floor-mounted equipment on 3-inch-high reinforced concrete pads. The Contractor, suppliers, and fabricators shall take this requirement into consideration when designing, fabricating, and installing panels, motor control centers, and other enclosures so that height above the floor of the operating handles of electrical devices meets the requirements of these Specifications and applicable codes. C. All electrical components such as fans, heaters, and instruments shall be provided with a disconnecting means as required by NEC Article 400 whether or not on the Drawings. 3.07 CUTTING, DRILLING, AND WELDING A. Provide any cutting, drilling, and welding that is required for the electrical construction work. B. Structural members shall not be cut or drilled, except when favorably reviewed by the Engineer. Use a core drill wherever it is necessary to drill through concrete or masonry. C. Provide the required welding for equipment supports. Conduits and fittings shall not be welded to structural steel. D. Perform patch work with the same materials as the surrounding area and finish to match, as specified in Sections 10.03 and 10.04 of these Specifications. 3.08 METAL PANELS A. Mount all metal panels which are mounted on or abutting concrete walls in damp locations or any outside walls 1/4-inch from the wall, and paint the back sides of the panels with a high-build epoxy primer. Film thickness shall be 10 mils minimum. 3.09 FIELD TESTS A. Perform tests in accordance with applicable procedures as described in NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications. �I. B. Give at least 7 working days notice to the Engineer prior to any test to permit witnessing the test. C. Provide all materials, equipment, labor, and technical supervision required to perform such tests and inspections. It is the intent of these tests to ensure that all electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances ` and is installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer's instructions. The tests and inspections shall determine the suitability for energization. D. The Contractor shall have a calibration program which maintains all applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy. 1. The accuracy shall be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards in an unbroken chain. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule: a. Field instruments: 6 months maximum W:1200810897003_City-ot-Renton_Stonegale110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.16010 General Electrical Requirments.doc 6116/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16010 General Electrical Requirements Page 8 of 9 b. Laboratory instruments: 12 months c. Leased specialty equipment: 12 months 2. Date calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment. E. Where testing pursuant to NETA requirements is required in these specifications, submit a test report that includes the following: 1. Name of project, name of person performing test, and date of test 2. Description of equipment tested 3. Description of test 4. List of test equipment used and calibration date 5. Test results 6. Conclusions and recommendations 7. Appendix, including appropriate test forms 8. The test report shall be bound and its contents certified. Submit the completed report directly to the Engineer no later than thirty (30) days after completion of the test unless directed otherwise. Number of reports to be submitted for review shall be the same as the number required for shop drawing submittals. F. Safety practices shall include, but are not limited to, the following requirements: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, OSHA. 2. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, Seventh Edition, National Safety Council, Chapter 4. 3. Applicable state and local safety operating procedures. G. All field tests shall be performed with apparatus de-energized except where otherwise specifically required by Section 8 of the latest Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems published by NETA. The Contractor shall have a designated safety representative who shall be present on the project and supervise operations with respect to safety. In all cases, work shall not proceed until the safety representative has determined that it is safe to do so. The Contractor shall have available sufficient protective barriers and warning signs to conduct specified test safely. H. Electrical equipment and materials furnished and installed by the Contractor, and the testing equipment listed below shall be tested in accordance with the "Inspection and Test Procedures" and "System Function Tests" (Section 8) of the latest Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems published by NETA. Tests shall not include any tests listed as optional in the aforementioned NETA Specifications unless specifically noted in respective equipment specifications for this project. I. Retesting will be required for all unsatisfactory tests after the equipment or system has been repaired. Retest all related equipment and systems if required by the Engineer. Repair and retest equipment and systems that have been satisfactorily tested but later fail, until satisfactory performance is obtained. J. Putting Equipment and Cables into Service: Submittal and favorable review of the specified factory and field tests shall occur before the Contractor is permitted to place the respective equipment or cable into service. W1200810897003—City-of-Renton_Stonegatell0-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100% Specs Jun2010110.16010 General Electrical Requirments.cloc 6/14/2010 ._.i WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16010 General Electrical Requirements Page 9 of 9 K. Miscellaneous Tests 1. Insulation Resistance, Continuity, Rotation: Perform routine insulation resistance, continuity and rotation tests for all distribution and utilization equipment including all motors 1/2 horsepower and larger prior and in addition to tests performed by the testing laboratory specified herein. Supply a suitable and stable source of test power at each test site. Notify the Engineer when equipment becomes available for acceptance tests. Work shall be coordinated to expedite project scheduling. All testing shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing all final aw settings and adjustments on protective devices and tap changes. Any system material or workmanship that is found defective on the basis of acceptance tests shall be reported directly to the Engineer. The Contractor shall maintain a written record of all tests and upon completion of project, assemble and certify �"'' a final test report. 2. Motor Current: Measure and record current in each phase for each new motor. Include measurement of the motor terminal voltages and motor currents when the motor is being operated at normal operating loads. For motors that are part of adjustable frequency drive systems, use true-RMS-reading instruments in making the measurements. +•�+ 3. Operational Tests: Operationally test all circuits to demonstrate that the circuits and equipment have been properly installed, adjusted and are ready for full- time service. Demonstrate the proper functioning of circuits in all modes of operation, including alarm conditions, and demonstrate satisfactory interfacing with the data acquisition and alarm systems. 3.10 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION A. Exercise care at all times after installation of equipment, motor control centers, etc., to keep out foreign matter, dust, dirt, debris, or moisture. Use protective sheetmetal covers, canvas, heat lamps, etc., as needed to ensure equipment protection. 3.11 CLEANING EQUIPMENT A. Thoroughly clean all soiled surfaces of installed equipment and materials. B. Clean out and vacuum all construction debris from all areas of all equipment. C. Provide and touch-up to original condition any factory painting that has been marred or scratched during shipment or installation, using paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer. 3.12 CLEANUP A. Upon completion of the electrical work, remove all surplus materials, rubbish, and debris that accumulated during the construction work. Leave the entire area neat, clean, and acceptable to the Engineer. END OF SUB-SECTION as W:1200810897003_Co-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.l6010 General Electrical Requirments.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16110 Conduit, Raceways and Fittings Page 1 of 6 SUB-SECTION 10.16110 CONDUIT, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS �t PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCLUDES A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Section 10.16010 become a part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. B. Work specified in other Sections: 1. Section 7-08: Excavation and Backfill of Trenches JAL 2. Section 10.03: Concrete Emplacement 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C80.1 Specification for Zinc Coated Rigid Steel Conduit B. Federal Specifications (FS): 1. FS W-C-1094 W-C-1094A Conduit and Conduit Fittings, Plastic, Rigid 2. FS WW-C-540 WW-C-540A Conduit, Metal, Rigid, (Electrical, Aluminum) WW-C-540C Conduit, Metal, Rigid & Coupling, Elbow & Nipple, Electrical Conduit, Aluminum 3. FS WW-C-566 WW-C-566C Flexible Metal Conduit C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. RN 1 Polyvinyl Chloride Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing 2. TC 6 PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation rr D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards: 1. 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit 2. 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Electrical Conduit 3. 651 Electrical Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit 4. 651A Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit at 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the Product Information ag submittal requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. 1.04 LOCATIONS A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16010 for definitions of types of locations. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100% Specs_Jun2010110.16110 Conduit,Raceways and Fitbngs.DOC 6/16/2010 ""' WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16110 Conduit, Raceways and Fittings Page 2 of 6 fes• PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT, RACEWAYS am A. General: 1. Rigid metallic conduit (RMC) shall be used in all conduit systems, except where flexible conduit or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit is required as shown on the Drawings. 2. The minimum size conduit or raceway shall be 3/4-inch. B. Rigid Metallic Conduit (RMC): RMC shall be rigid steel conduit, and shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. Couplings shall be threaded type. C. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall be hot-dip galvanized, conforming to NEMA RN 1, with factory-applied PVC coating 40 mils thick. D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC): Flexible metal conduit shall be liquid- tight, shall have a moisture- and oil-proof PVC jacket extruded over a galvanized, flexible steel conduit, and shall conform to UL 360. E. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC): Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be PVC Schedule 40 (PVC-40) conduit approved for underground use and for use with 90°C wires, and shall conform to UL 651. 2.02 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Supports for individual conduits shall be galvanized malleable iron one-hole type with conduit back spacer. B. Supports for multiple conduits shall be hot-dip galvanized Unistrut or Superstrut channels, or equal. All associated hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized. C. In hazardous locations, all conduit supports, steel straps, and anchors shall be stainless steel. 2.03 FITTINGS A. Fittings for use with RMC shall be hot dipped galvanized steel or galvanized cast ferrous metal; access fittings shall have gasketed cast covers and be Crouse-Hinds Condulets; Appleton Unilets; or equal. Provide threaded-type couplings and connectors; set-screw type and compression-type are not acceptable. B. Fittings for use with either rigid nonmetallic conduit or duct shall be PVC and have solvent-weld-type conduit connections. C. Fittings for flexible conduit shall be Appleton Type ST; O-Z Gedney Series 4Q; or equal. w. am W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs{100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16110 Conduit Raceways and Fitfings.DOC 611 412 01 0 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16110 Conduit, Raceways and Fittings Page 3 of 6 D. Union couplings for conduits shall be the Erickson type and shall be Appleton Type EC; O-Z Gedney 3-piece Series 4; or equal. Threadless couplings shall not be used. vi E. Bushings: 1. Bushings shall be the insulated type. 2. Bushings for rigid steel shall be hot dip galvanized insulated grounding type, O-Z Gedney Type HBLG; Appleton Type GIB; or equal. F. Conduits entering sheet metal boxes or cabinets shall be terminated with Myers hubs or equal. G. Use of "running thread" nipples is expressly forbidden. 2.04 CONDUIT SEALANTS A. Moisture Barrier Types: Sealant shall be a non-toxic, non-shrink, non-hardening, putty type hand applied material providing an effective barrier under submerged conditions. B. Fire Retardant Types: Fire stop material shall be a reusable, non-toxic, asbestos- free, expanding, putty type material with a 3-hour rating in accordance with UL 1479. Provide products indicated by the manufacturer to be suitable for the type and size of penetration. 2.05 WARNING TAPE A. Provide electrical warning tape in duct bank as shown on the Drawings. The tape shall be 6 inches wide, red with black lettering stating "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE." The tape shall be made of 6-mil polymer with 36,000-psi tensile strength and include metallic materials for locating after installation using a locator. so PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT, RACEWAY, AND FITTING INSTALLATION A. From pull point to pull point, the sum of the angles of all of the bends and offsets shall not exceed 270 degrees. B. For power, control, and signal circuits, provide conduit per Conduit Use Tables below, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings: 1. Exception- For raceways leaving a building above grade and then going below grade, provide RMC with PVC wrapped tape from a point 3 feet above grade to a point 5 feet from the building wall. C. At all boxes and equipment, provide insulated type metallic grounding bushings for metallic conduits. Bond together all conduits to provide continuity of the equipment grounding system. Size bonding conductor per NEC. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16110 Conduit,Raceways and Fithngs.DOC 6/14/2010 `o WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16110 Conduit, Raceways and Fittings Page 4 of 6 MW D. Provide flexible conduit in lengths of not more than 36 inches unless approved by the Engineer at connections to motors, valves and any equipment subject to vibration or relative movement. MW E. Conduits embedded in concrete floors on grade shall be installed between grids of reinforcing steel, or shall be encased below the floors, provided the concrete is VW thickened in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Installation of conduit below the bottom of this slab is not acceptable; embedding or encasing is required. No F. Provide galvanized rigid steel factory ells for RMC raceways. Provide RMC for offsets in RMC raceways. G. Underground Raceways: Slope all underground raceways to provide drainage; for �' example, slope conduit from equipment located inside a building to the handhole located outside the building. For additional requirements see Sub- Section 10.16402. MW H. Conduit Supports: Properly support all conduits as required by the NEC. Run all conduits exposed except where the Drawings indicate that they are to be embedded ■. in the floor slab, walls, or ceiling, or to be installed underground. 1. Exposed Conduits: a. Support exposed conduits within 1 foot of any outlet and at intervals not exceeding NEC requirements; wherever possible, group conduits together and support on common supports. Support exposed conduits fastened to the surface of the concrete structure by one-hole clamps, or with channels. MW Use conduit spacers with one-hole clamps. Coordinate conduit locations with piping, equipment, fixtures, and with structural and architectural elements. Conduits attached to walls or columns shall be as unobtrusive as possible and shall avoid windows. Run all exposed conduits parallel to building lines. b. Group together exposed conduits in horizontal runs located away from walls and support on trapeze hangers. Arrange such conduits uniformly and neatly. Trapeze hangers shall consist of channels of adequate size, suspended by means of rods or other suitable means from the ceiling or from pipe hangers. Install such runs so as not to interfere with the operation of valves or any other equipment, and keep at least 6 inches clear of any pipe, which may operate at more than 100°F. Treat cut surfaces or damaged ends with corrosion-resistant coatings such as "Devcon Z", prepared by Subox Coatings; "Galvanox Type I", prepared by Pedley-Knowles; or equal. Application shall follow manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Conduits Embedded in Concrete: Provide concrete cover at least equal to that of the reinforcing steel, space at 3 conduit diameters apart except where they cross at angles greater than 45 degrees, and install so as not to reduce the structural integrity of the concrete element. I. When expansion joints are crossed, whether conduit is embedded or exposed, provide watertight expansion fittings and bonding jumpers. In hazardous locations, " provide Crouse-Hinds UNF/UNV; Appleton; or equal. In unclassified locations, provide Crouse-Hinds XD; Appleton; or equal. wr W:12D0810897003 City-ot-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16110 Conduit Raceways and Fittings.DOC 6/14/2010 W WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16110 Conduit, Raceways and Fittings Page 5 of 6 J. Spare Raceways: After completing a conduit run between manholes, handholes, or pullboxes, prove the integrity of the conduit run. Use an air compressor to blow in a pull-line, then use the pull-line to pull a mandrel through the entire conduit run. Install a new 3/16-inch nylon, 800 pound test pull-line, which has tape measure marking every foot to indicate length. Plug the ends of the conduit, with conduit cap plugs. �r K. All penetrations through walls into or out of corrosive locations, as defined in Sub-Section 10.16010, shall be made gas-tight. In concrete walls, pour concrete after the conduit is in place if possible. If not possible, core drill concrete or CMU 4W walls, install conduit, and caulk around it with non-shrink grout. Install conduit seal in each conduit near the penetration. Mt L. All conduit penetrations through interior walls and floors shall be sealed with fire retardant type conduit sealant. M. Conduit Identification: In each handhole, pullbox, cabinet, motor control center or at other equipment enclosure, identify each conduit using the conduit number shown on the Drawings by means of a stamped brass tag affixed with stainless steel wire; where affixing a tag is not feasible, identify conduits by stenciling. Stencil all exposed conduits for identification at least once in each room. N. Conduit Seals: Moisture Seals: Provide in accordance with NEC Paragraph 300.5(g). O. Conduit in finished areas shall be installed concealed. P. Flexible conduit shall have a maximum length of 36 inches. Flexible conduit shall not be considered as a ground conductor. Flexible conduit shall only be installed in exposed or accessible locations. Q. Rigid PVC conduit shall be stored on a flat surface and shielded from the sun. CONDUIT USE TABLE 1 Inside Buildings Exposed Concealed + ! Embedded Slab In Above Circuit In On Stud Suspended Type Standard Corrosive Concrete Grade Walls Ceiling Power& 120 RMC NA RMC RMC NA NA Vac Control Signal RMC NA RMC RMC NA NA W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign\10.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010110.1611 O Condud,Raceways and Fitfings.DOC 6/14/2010 aw WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16110 Conduit, Raceways and Fittings Page 6 of 6 ow CONDUIT USE TABLE 2 Outside Buildings Transition ,r. =Ductnk Encased Within 5 Feet Circuit T pe Exposed Buried In Soiloncrete of Buildin Power& 120 Vac RMC PVC-401a, PVC-4 PVC Coated Control RMC Signal'b, RMC PVC-401a' PVC-401a) PVC Coated RMC Notes: (a) Provide ground wire sized per NEC requirements for all circuits. (b) Signal circuits are those subject to RF interference or induced current. TSPs, telephone cable, coaxial cable, and manufacturer's cables specially designed for low level signals are all presumed to be part of signal circuits. END OF SUB-SECTION MW aw 1W irr W:1200810897003—Cityof-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.16110 Conduit,Raceways and Fiffings.DOC 6/14/2010 > WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16120 Low Voltage Wire and Cable Page 1 of 5 SUB-SECTION 10.16120 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL > 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Section 10.16010 become a part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: Section 10.17. ; 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. 63-74 Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire 2. B8-77 Specification for Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Softr 3. B173-71 Specification for Rope Lay Stranded Copper Conductors Having Concentric Stranded Members B. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): 1. S-66-524 Cross-Linked Thermosetting Polyethylene Insulated Wire and Cable C. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA): 1. ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 62 Flexible Cords and Fixture Wire 2. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables 3. 510 Insulating Tape too 4. 1063 Stranded Conductors for Machine Tool Wire 1.03 SUBMITTALS dt A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. 1.04 LOCATIONS A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16010 for definitions of types of locations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS A. General: All conductors shall be copper. Wire or cable not specifically shown on the Drawings or specified, but required, shall be of the type and size required for the application and in conformance with the applicable code. All insulated conductors shall be identified with printing colored to contrast with the insulation color. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.16120 Low Voltage Wire Cable.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16120 Low Voltage Wire and Cable Page 2 of 5 iwr B. Power and Control Conductors, 600 Volts and Below: 1. Stranded copper wire shall be 600 volt Type THWN, Class B stranding, sizes #14 AWG and larger. 2. Stranded copper wire shall be 600 volt Type XHHW or RHW, Class B stranding, Sizes#8 AWG and larger. 3. Fixture wire shall be 600 volt, silicone rubber insulated, 200°C, UL Type SF-2, with stranded copper conductors. 4. Cords shall be 600 volt, 2-conductor plus ground, Type SO, hard service, of adequate length and with grounding type plug attached, rated in amperes as shown on the Drawings. 2.02 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS OF CONDUCTORS AL A. Splices: 1. Wire and Cable Splicing Materials and Applications: 10 a. For Lighting Systems and Power Outlets: Wire nuts shall be twist-on type insulated connectors utilizing an outer insulating cover and a means for connecting and holding the conductors firmly. They shall be UL listed and to suitable for connecting two to four copper conductors of#14. b. All Equipment: Crimp type connectors shall be insulated type with nylon jacket, suitable for the size and material of the wires and the number of go wires to be spliced and for use with stranded conductors. They shall be UL listed. c. Division 16 Equipment and Power Conductors: Bolted pressure connectors 0-11 shall be suitable for the size and material of the conductors to be spliced. They shall be UL listed and of the split bolt or bolted split sleeve type in which the bolt or set screw does not bear directly on the conductor. d. All Equipment: Epoxy splice kits shall include epoxy resin, hardener, and "' mold, and shall be suitable for use in wet locations and hazardous locations. 4 B. Terminations: 1. Low Voltage Terminations: a. Crimp type terminals shall be UL listed, self-insulating sleeve type with Oki nylon jacket, with ring or rectangular type tongue, suitable for the size and material of the wire to be terminated, and for use with either solid or stranded conductors. 91,,1 b. Terminal lugs shall be UL listed and of the split bolt or bolted split sleeve type in which the bolt or set screw does not bear directly on the conductor. Tongues shall have NEMA standard drilling. c. Crimp with manufacturer recommended ratchet-type tool with calibrated dies. Hand crimping tools are not acceptable. C. Tape used for splices and terminations shall be compatible with the insulation and jacket of the cable and shall be of plastic material. Tape shall conform to UL 510 and shall be Scotch 33 Plus. we W:2008k0897003_Cit-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.16120 Low Voltage Wire Cable.DOC 6/14/2010 - WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16120 to Low Voltage Wire and Cable Page 3 of 5 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION A. Provide the following types and sizes of conductors for the uses indicated for 600 volts or less: 1. Stranded Copper, Size #14 AWG and larger, individual conductors: As shown on the Drawings for the control of motors or other equipment. Size#14 shall not be used for power supplies to any equipment. 2. Stranded Copper, Sizes #12 AWG and larger: As shown on the Drawings for motors and other power circuits. 3. Solid copper, Size #14 AWG: As shown for receptacles, lighting fixtures and switches. 4. Fixture Wire: For connections to all fixtures in which the temperature may exceed the rating of branch circuit conductors. B. Color Coding: Provide color coding for all circuit conductors. Insulation color shall be white or grey for neutrals and green for grounding conductors. An isolated ground conductor shall be identified with an orange tracer in the green body. Ungrounded conductor colors shall be as follows: 1. 120/208 Volt, 3 Phase: Red, black and blue. 2. 277/480 Volt, 3 Phase: Brown, orange and yellow. 3. 120/240 Volt, 1 Phase: Red and black. 4. Control Wiring: 120 Vac: Purple. 5. Control Wiring: 24 Vdc: Any color not used above. C. Color coding shall be in the conductor insulation for all conductors #10 AWG and smaller; for larger conductors, color shall be either in the insulation or in colored plastic tape applied at every location where the conductor is readily accessible (e.g., enclosures, pullboxes, and junction boxes). D. Exercise care in pulling wires and cables into conduit or wireways so as to avoid kinking, putting undue stress on the cables or otherwise abrading them. No grease " will be permitted in pulling cables. Only soapstone, talc, or UL listed pulling compound will be permitted. The raceway construction shall be complete and protected from the weather before cable is pulled into it. Swab conduits before installing cables and exercise care in pulling, to avoid damage to conductors. E. Cable bending radius shall be per applicable code. Install feeder cables in onet, continuous length. F. Provide an equipment grounding conductor, whether or not it is shown on the Drawings, in any flexible conduit or any raceway in which all or any portion of a run consists of non-metallic duct or conduit. G. In panels, bundle incoming wire and cables, No. 6 AWG and smaller, lace at intervals not greater than 6 inches, neatly spread into trees and connect to their respective terminals. Allow sufficient slack in cables for alterations in terminal connections. Perform lacing with plastic cable ties or linen lacing twine. Where ' plastic panel wiring duct is provided for cable runs, lacing is not necessary when the cable is properly installed in the duct. W:k2008\0897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010t10.l6l2O Low Voltage Wire Cable.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16120 Low Voltage Wire and Cable Page 4 of 5 +�+ H. For cables crossing hinges, utilize extra flexible stranded wire, make up into groups not exceeding 12, and installed within a spiral wrap so that they will be protected from chafing and excess flexing when the hinged member is moved. 3.02 CONDUCTOR SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. Splices: Install all conductors without splices unless necessary for installation, as determined by the Engineer. Splices, when permitted, and terminations shall be in accordance with the splice or termination kit manufacturer's instructions. Splice or terminate wire and cable as follows: �" 1. Watertight Splices: Splices in concrete pullboxes, for any type of cable or wire, shall be watertight. Make splices in low voltage cables using epoxy resin 41111, splicing kits rated for application up to 600 volts. B. Terminations: Terminate stranded #14 wire using crimp type terminals where not terminated in a box lug type terminal. Terminals must be coordinated with type of terminal board where provided. 3.03 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION A. Except for interior lighting and receptacle circuits, identify each wire or cable at each termination and in each pullbox, junction box, handhole, and manhole using numbered and lettered wire markers. All electrically common conductors shall have the same number. Each electrically different conductor shall be uniquely numbered. Identify panelboard circuits using the panelboard identification and circuit number. Identify motor control circuits using the equipment identification number assigned to the control unit by the motor control center manufacturer and the motor control unit terminal number. Identify other circuits as shown in the circuit schedule. B. Conductor numbering shall be coordinated with the Interconnection Diagrams specified in Sub-Section 10.17010. +� C. Conductors between terminals of different numbers shall have both terminal numbers shown at each conductor end. The terminal number closest to the end of the wire shall be the same as the terminal number. D. Wire markers at wire ends shall be shrinkable sleeve type. Wire numbers shall be permanently imprinted on the markers. Wire markers shall be Brady Permasleeve, Brady Bradysleeve, or equal. E. Wire markers installed in each pullbox, junction box, and handhole shall be Brady or equal. 3.04 FIELD TESTS ` A. Insulation Resistance Tests: 'For all circuits 150 volts to ground or more and for all motor circuits over 1/2 horsepower, test cables per NETA. The insulation resistance shall be 20 megohms or more. Submit results for review. See also Sub-Section 10.16010. r , , W:120D810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.l6l2O Low Voltage Wire Cable.DOC 6114/2010 Mo WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16120 Low Voltage Wire and Cable Page 5 of 5 B. Phase Rotation: The phase rotation of all circuits shall be clockwise in sequence. The Contractor shall verify that each three-phase service, feeder, and branch circuit meets this requirement. A record shall be kept of each circuit tested and, on completion, given to the Engineer for review. END OF SUB-SECTION ow Alt IW W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegale110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—Specs_Jun2010110.16120 Low Vo@age Wire Cable.DOC 6/14/2010 `w WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16124 Signal Cable Page 1 of 3 SUB-SECTION 10.16124 SIGNAL CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCLUDES A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Section 10.16010 become a part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Sub-Section 10.17010: Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1rr A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B8 Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft, Specification for B. Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated (UL): 1. 13 Power Limited Circuit Cable Class 2, Specifications for (Bulletin) 2. 83 Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables IMP 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. 1110 PART 2 - PRODUCTS r 2.01 TWISTED SHIELDED PAIRS (TSP) w. A. Cable shall conform to UL 13 and UL 83, and shall be type PLTC cable suitable for direct burial. Each TSP shall consist of two #18 AWG, 7-strand copper conductors per ASTM B8 with 15 mils PVC insulation. Conductors shall be twisted with 2-inch or shorter lay, with 100 percent foil shielding and tinned copper drain wires. Each pair shall have a 35-mil-thick outer jacket. Cable shall be rated at 90°C and for operation of 600 volts, as noted on the Drawings. Provide Alpha; Dekoron; Belden; or equal. 2.02 TELEPHONE CABLE lift A. Telephone cables shall be 22 AWG solid copper with 3 pairs. Cable shall be Belden 8742 or equal. r W:1200810897003 City-oi-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16124 Signal Cable.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16124 Signal Cable Page 2 of 3 2.03 SPECIAL CABLES A. Use only coaxial cable recommended for specific applications such as radio antenna systems and computer networks as required by the manufacturer or wr system supplier. Deviation from manufacturer's recommended cable types is not acceptable. No PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Signal cable shall be installed by personnel who have had a minimum of 3 years experience in terminating and splicing twisted shielded conductors and coaxial cables. B. Adequate care shall be exercised by the installers to prevent cable damage or sheath distortion. Bending radius shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations. C. Cables shall be continuous from initiation to termination without splices except where specifically indicated. D. Cable shielding shall be grounded at the Control Panel (PLC) end only of the cable. Bonding shall be to a single ground point only. E. Heat shrinkable sleeving shall be installed on all cables to insulate shielding at the ungrounded cable terminations. F. Manufacturer's cable pulling tension shall not be exceeded. 3.02 CONDUCTOR SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. Splices: Install all conductors without splices unless necessary for installation, as determined by the Engineer. Splices, when permitted, and terminations shall be in accordance with the splice or termination kit manufacturer's instructions. Splice cables as follows: 1. Watertight Splices: Splices in concrete pullboxes, for any type of cable or wire, shall be watertight. Make splices in low voltage cables using epoxy resin splicing kits rated for application up to 600 volts. 2. No splicing is acceptable for coaxial cables. w B. Terminations: 1. Crimp-type terminals shall be UL listed, self-insulating, nylon sleeve type with ring or rectangular tongue, suitable for size and material of the wire to be terminated and for use with either stranded or solid wire. 2. Crimp with manufacturer's recommended ratchet-type tool with calibrated dyes. Hand crimping tools are not acceptable. 3. Coaxial cable and connectors shall be terminated in accordance with the I� manufacturer's instructions. Use manufacturer's recommended solder. The Contractor shall prevent misapplication of solder and termination. W:12 0 0 8108 9 7 003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—SpecsJun2010110.16124SignalCable.DOC 611 412 01 0 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16124 Signal Cable Page 3 of 3 3.03 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION A. Identify each wire or cable at each termination, in each pullbox, and in each r. handhole using numbered and lettered wire markers. All electrically common conductors shall have the same number. Each electrically different conductor shall be uniquely numbered. B. Conductors between terminals of different numbers shall have both terminal numbers shown at each conductor end. The terminal number closest to the end of wr the wire shall be the same as the terminal number. 3.04 FIELD TESTS A. Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance tests on all circuits. Make these tests before any equipment has been connected. Test the insulation with a 250 Vdc insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 megohms. The insulation resistance shall be 20 megohms or more. Submit results for review. END OF SUB-SECTION err rr rir W W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16124 Signal Cable.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16130 Boxes Page 1 of 3 SUB-SECTION 10.16130 so BOXES 06 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCLUDES A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Section 10.16010 become part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. B. Work Included: 1. Installation of all necessary outlet boxes for wiring devices, lighting fixtures, and signal equipment as noted on the Drawings. 2. Installation of junction boxes as required for the consolidation of conduit runs. 3. Installation of pull boxes as necessary to aid in pulling in conductor. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products rel B. Federal Specifications (FS): 1. W-C-586 Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies, and Entrance Caps, Electrical, Cast Metal 2. W-J-800 Junction Box, Extension, Junction Box Cover, Junction Box (Steel, Cadmium, or Zinc Coated) C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 50 Electrical Cabinets and Boxes 2. 514 Outlet Boxes and Fittings 1.03 SUBMITTALS rr A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULL BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: Sheet metal boxes shall conform to UL 50, with a hot-dipped galvanized finish conforming to ASTM A123. Outlet boxes and switch boxes shall be designed for mounting flush wiring devices. Boxes and box extension rings shall be provided with knockouts. Boxes shall be formed in one piece from carbon-steel sheets. Outlet boxes shall not be less than 4 inches square and 1-7/8 inches deep. Ceiling boxes shall withstand a vertical force of 200 pounds for 5 minutes. Wall boxes shall withstand a vertical downward force of 50 pounds for 5 minutes. Gangable and through-wall types are not acceptable. Boxes shall conform to FS W-J-800D and UL 514. W:k200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110,01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.l6l3OBoxes.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16130 Boxes Page 2 of 3 B. Cast Metal Boxes: Box bodies and cover shall be cast or malleable iron with a minimum wall thickness of 1/8-inch at every point, and not less than 1/4-inch at tapped holes for rigid conduit. Bosses are not acceptable. Mounting lugs shall be provided at the back or bottom corners of the body. Covers shall be secured to the box body with No. 6 or larger brass or bronze flathead screws. Boxes shall be provided with neoprene cover gaskets. Where only cast aluminum is available for certain types of fixture boxes, an epoxy finish shall be provided. Outlet boxes shall be of the FS types. Boxes shall conform to FS W-C-586C and UL 514. err C. Non-Metallic Boxes: Non-metallic boxes shall be hot-compressed fiberglass, one-piece, molded with reinforcing of polyester material, with minimum wall thickness of 1/8-inch. err D. Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes- Except where NEMA 4X fiberglass boxes are called for, all boxes shall be fabricated from carbon steel per UL 50. Boxes shall be welded construction with all seams or joints closed and reinforced. Boxes shall be galvanized after construction. Boxes intended for outdoor use shall be cast metal with threaded hubs and neoprene gasketed covers, or shall be of the fiberglass +rr reinforced polyester type of 1/8-inch minimum thickness. Cover retention shall be by corrosion resistant stainless steel screws. 1. All boxes and cabinets shall be securely fastened to building structural members so as to prevent movement in any direction. Boxes shall not be supported by lighting fixtures, suspended ceiling support wires, or freely hanging rods. a. Covers of boxes and cabinets mounted in horizontal plane (top or bottom) shall either weigh not more than 40 pounds or shall require not more than 40 pounds of force to open or close. b. Covers of boxes and cabinets mounted in vertical plane (front, back, sides) shall either weigh not more than 60 pounds or shall require not more than 60 pounds of force to open or close. All covers over 30 pounds shall be furnished with angle support at bottom to carry weight of cover for assembly. c. Covers of boxes and cabinets weighing more than 30 pounds shall be provided with lifting handles or some means of grasping other than edges. �r PART 3 - EXECUTION rr 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Outlet Boxes: 1. Provide fixture outlets with proper fixture connectors. 2. Box mounting height shall be dictated by the wiring device enclosed. 3. Blanking covers shall be installed on all unused openings. 4. Sheet metal boxes shall be used where the conduit system is routed concealed in the walls and ceilings. 5. Cast metal or molded non-metallic surface mounted boxes shall be used in exterior and/or in all wet locations. 6. Bonding jumpers shall be used around all concentric or eccentric knockouts. 7. Boxes shall be securely mounted to the building structure independent of conduits entering or exiting the boxes. W:000B10897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegatell0-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16130 Boxes.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16130 Boxes Page 3 of 3 B. Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes: " 1. Boxes shall be installed where required and where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Boxes shall be accessible. 3. Boxes shall not be installed in finished areas. 4. Pull boxes shall be provided at least every 150 feet on long straight conduit runs. Spacing shall be reduced by 50 feet for each 90 degree bend. See Sub-Section 10.16110 for maximum bends in conduit systems. Ne 5. Box dimensions shall be in accordance with size and quantity of conductors and conduits entering and leaving box per NEC Article 314 requirements. END OF SUB-SECTION rr ■ri W:12008108g7003 City-of-Renton Stonegale110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010tl0.16130Soxes.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16140 Wiring Devices Page 1 of 4 SUB-SECTION 10.16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCLUDES A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Section 10.16010 become a part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. B. Work Included: 1. Installation, connection and furnishing all single, duplex, GFI, and special purpose receptacles complete with wall plates and/or covers as shown on the Drawings. 2. Installation, connection, and furnishing of all single pole, three-way, pilot light, and momentary position toggle switches complete with wall plates and or handle operators as shown on the Drawings. rr 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C73 Plugs and Receptacles 2. C73a Plugs and Receptacles r. B. Federal Specifications (FS): 1. W-C-596 D & E General Specifications for Cable Outlet Electrical Connector 2. W-S-896 D & E General Specifications for Flush Mounted Toggle and Lock Switches C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices 2. WD 6 Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 20 General-Use Snap Switches 2. 498 Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles 3. 514 Electrical Outlet Boxes 4. 943 Class A Ground Fault Receptacle Interrupting Requirements nr 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. rr 1.04 LOCATIONS A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16010, General Electrical Requirements, for definitions of types of locations. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Slonegale110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16140 Wiring Devices.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16140 Wiring Devices Page 2 of 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RECEPTACLES + A. General: Receptacles shall be heavy duty, high abuse, grounding type conforming to NEMA configurations, NEMA WD1 and UL 514 Standards. B. Single and Duplex Receptacles: 1. Receptacles shall be of back and side wire design utilizing screw type terminals suitable for stranded wires. Receptacles shall be rated 20 ampere, two-pole, 3-wire, 120 Vac, NEMA 5-20 configuration, self-grounding. Color shall be brown in industrial areas and ivory or white in office and laboratory areas. Power contacts shall be a T-type design and shall be brass. Ground contacts shall be brass. 2. Devices shall have a nylon composition face with a nylon or melamine body. Units shall comply with Federal Specification W-C-596E and meet UL 498 test requirements. Receptacles shall be Hubbell 5362; Daniel Woodhead 5262DW; or equal. C. Special Purpose Receptacles: Receptacles shall be of the amperage, voltage and ► NEMA configuration indicated on the Drawings. Compliance to standards and tests shall be as listed in Item B above. r D. GFI Receptacles: 1. Device shall be rated 20 ampere, 2-pole, 3-wire, 120 Vac, conforming to NEMA WD1.10 configuration. Face shall be nylon composition meeting UL 498 test standards. Unit shall have test and reset push buttons. Reset push button shall have a visible indicator band to indicate the tripped condition. 2. GFCI component shall meet UL 498 Class A standards with a tripping time of 1/40 second at 5 milliamperes current unbalance. Terminations shall be suitable for stranded wires. Operating range shall extend from 31'F to 158°F. Unit shall be ceramic encapsulated for protection against moisture. 3. Provide Hubbell 5362; Daniel Woodhead; or equal. E. Corrosion Resistant Receptacles: Units shall comply with standards listed in Item B above, but shall also have tin-nickel plated brass connecting equipment and stainless steel hardware. Receptacle face color shall be yellow to identify the device as having these special qualities. Provide Hubbell Catalog No. 52CM62 and 53CM62; Daniel Woodhead; or equal. 2.02 SWITCHES A. Line Voltage Types: Switches shall be rated 20 amperes at 120 or 277 Vac only. Units shall be flush mounted, self-grounding, quiet operating toggle devices. Handle color shall be brown in industrial areas and white or ivory in office and laboratory areas. Units shall conform to Federal Specifications W-S-896 D and E, UL 20, and NEMA WD1 standards. Sierra Electric, Monumental Grade, Catalog No. 5721; Daniel Woodhead 1900 Series,- or equal. rrfl W:1200810 8 9 7 0 0 3 City-of-Renton_SlonegateY10-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16140 Winng Devices.DOC 6/1 412 01 0 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16140 Wiring Devices Page 3 of 4 2.03 PLATES A. General: Plates shall be of the style and color to match the wiring devices, and of the required number of gangs. Plates shall conform to NEMA WD1, UL 514, and ANSI C73. Plates on finished walls shall be non-metallic or stainless steel. Plates on unfinished walls and on fittings shall be of zinc plated steel or cast metal having rounded corners and beveled edges. B. Non-Metallic: Plates shall be smooth finish with contoured edges and shall be nylon or fiberglass. C. Stainless Steel: Plates shall be 0.035 inches thick with beveled edges and shall be manufactured from No. 302 alloy having a brushed or satin finish. rr� D. Galvanized: Plates shall be galvanized sheet steel raised 1/2-inch, with rounded corners. E. Cast Metal: Plates shall be cast or malleable iron covers with gaskets so as to be moisture resistant or weatherproof. F. Blank Plates: Cover plates for future telephone or television outlets shall match adjacent device wall plates in appearance. G. Damp or Wet Locations: Plates shall have weather protective double doors. Material of manufacture shall be die-cast aluminum for metallic plates or nylon for non-metallic plates. �r 2.04 TEL OUTLETS A. Provide telephone outlets as shown on the Drawings. Each outlet shall provide for one telephone connection with one RJ11 jack. Jacks and wall plates shall be Leviton, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES +rw A. Dry Locations: The device shall be installed in surface mounted boxes. B. Damp or Wet Exterior Locations: Install only wiring devices approved for outdoor service in these locations. C. Mounting Heights: Locations of wall outlets shall be measured from the finished floor to the center of the outlet box. Boxes shall be adjusted so that the front edge of the box shall not be further back from the finished wall plane than 1/4-inch. Boxes shall be adjusted so that they do not project beyond the finished wall. Height above finished floor shall be as follows: Inches From Floor Receptacles 18, except where shown otherwise Toggle Switches 44 W:t200810897003_City-of-Renton—Stonegate\10-EngDesignl10:01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16140 Wiring Devices.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16140 so Wiring Devices Page 4 of 4 D. Damp or Wet Interior Locations: Install only wiring devices approved for outdoor service. Adjust boxes so that front edge will be 1/4-inch beyond the rear edge of the finished wall. Use metal tubing sleeves to bring device mounting straps flush with the front edge of the finished wall. E. Receptacles: 1. Receptacles shall be grounded by a grounding conductor, not by a yoke or screw contact. 2. Receptacles-shall be oriented so that the grounding slot is located at the bottom of the outlet. 3. Receptacles shall be installed with connections pigtailed (spliced) to the branch circuit wiring so that removal of the receptacle will not lose neutral continuity and branch circuit power will not be lost to other receptacles on the same circuit. M 3.02 INSTALLATION OF WALL PLATES A. General: Plates shall match the style of the device and shall be plumb within 1/16-inch of the vertical or horizontal. B. Interior Dry Locations: Install plates so that all four edges are in continuous contact + with the finished wall surfaces. Plaster filling will not be permitted. Do not use oversize plates or sectional plates. C. Exterior and/or Wet Locations: Install plates with gaskets on wiring devices in such a manner as to provide a raintight weatherproof installation. Cover type shall match box type. .w D. Future Locations: Install blank cover plates on all unused outlets. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF TEL OUTLETS A. Run telephone cable as specified in Sub-Section 10.16124 from each outlet to the telephone backboard. 3.04 TESTS wr A. Receptacles: 1. Receptacles shall be tested for blade and ground plug tension prior to installation. Do not install any receptacle having less than 16 ounce individual irr blade retention. 2. After installation of receptacles, circuits shall be energized and each receptacle tested for proper ground continuity, reversed polarity, and/or open neutral condition. 3. GFI receptacles shall be tested with the circuits energized. Devices shall be tested with a portable GFI receptacle tester capable of circulating 7.5 milliamperes of current, when plugged in, between the "hot" line and "ground" to produce tripping of the receptacle. Resetting and tripping shall be checked at least twice at each GFI receptacle. END OF SUB-SECTION W:I200810897003_City-o(-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16140 Wiring Devices.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16160 Panelboards Page 1 of 3 SUB-SECTION 10.16160 PANELBOARDS ■r PART 1 - GENERAL 1wr 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCLUDES A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Section 10.16010 become a part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. Z55.1 Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment r B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. PB 1 Panelboards 2. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volt Maximum) C. Federal Specifications (FS): 1. W-P-115 Panel, Power Distribution 2. W-C-375 Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Series Service, Series Trip D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 50 Electrical Cabinets and Boxes 2. 869 Electrical Service Equipment 3. 869A Reference Standard for Device Equipment 1.03 SUBMITTALS rr► A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. �r B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard, submit manufacturer's name and data as required: 1. Panelboard type. 2. Main bus and terminal connection sizes. 3. Location of line connections. 4. Cabinet dimensions. 5. Gutter space. 6. Gauge of boxes and fronts. 7. Finish data. 8. Voltage rating. 9. Breaker types, trip ratings, and interrupting ratings. 1.04 LOCATIONS A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16010 for definitions of types of locations. .r W:I200810897003 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—Specs—Jun2010110.16160 Panelboards.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16160 Panelboards Page 2 of 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELBOARDS do A. General: All panelboards shall be the automatic circuit breaker type. The number and arrangement of circuits, trip ratings, spares, and blank spaces for future circuit breakers shall be as shown on the Drawings. All circuit breakers shall be quick- make, quick-break, thermal magnetic, bolt-on type, and 1, 2, or 3 pole as shown, each with a single operating handle. ,r 1. Each panelboard shall have a field-mounted identifying plastic nameplate giving the panel identification as shown on the Drawings. In addition, each panelboard shall have a manufacturer's nameplate showing the voltage, bus rating, phase, frequency, and number of wires. 2. For panelboards used in dry locations, finish of doors and trim shall be ANSI 61 or 49, in accordance with ANSI Z55.1. Boxes of all such panelboards shall be galvanized, field finished to match the fronts. 3. Where specified, panelboards shall have NEMA 3R/12 and/or NEMA 4X enclosures. 4. Panelboards and enclosures shall conform to NEMA PB1 and 250, UL 50 and requirements of all relevant codes. Panelboards used as service equipment shall conform to UL 869. a�f► B. Lighting Panelboards: 1. General: Lighting panelboards shall be rated as shown on the Drawings. Panelboards shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-P-115 for Type I, Class 1 panelboards with circuit breakers. 2. Lighting panelboards shall have front doors with key latch, common keying and a typed directory card and holder. Panelboard circuits shall be arranged with odd numbers on the left and even numbers on the right. 3. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be the molded case type with ratings as shown on the Drawings. Circuit breakers shall have interrupting ratings of 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 120/208 Vac. 4. Manufacturer: Panelboards shall be Cutler Hammer Pow-R-Line C; Square D NQOD; or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Panelboards shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide a panelboard directory indicating up-to-date circuits during construction. Directory shall be typed and shall indicate panelboard power source. No handwritten directory is acceptable. 3.02 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. The highest breaker operating handle shall not be higher than 72 inches above the floor. W:1200B10B97003_City-of-Renton Stonegatel10-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16160 Panelboards.DOC 6/14/2010 an WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16160 Panelboards Page 3 of 3 r 3.03 FIELD TESTS +o A. Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance tests on circuits to be energized with a line-to-neutral voltage of 120 Vac or more. Test the insulation with a 500 Vdc insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 megohms. The �,. insulation resistance shall be 20 megohms or more. Submit results for review. B. Grounding: Panelboard grounding shall conform to Sub-Section 10.16450. C. Continuity: Panelboard circuits shall be tested for continuity prior to energizing. Continuity tests shall be conducted using a DC device with a bell or buzzer. END OF SUB-SECTION w w. aw am n1 on wi W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate\10-EngOesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.16160Panelboards.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16180 Protective Devices and Switches Page 1 of 3 SUB-SECTION 10.16180 PROTECTIVE DEVICES AND SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCLUDES A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Section 10.16010 become a part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. B. Work Included: Provide all necessary labor, tools, and material to install circuit protective devices as shown on the Drawings and as described in these Specifications. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS w A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. Z55.1 Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. ICS 3 Industrial Systems 2. ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems 3. 250 Type 1 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum) C. Federal Specifications (FS): 1. W-C-375 Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Series Service, Series Trip 2. W-F-1726 Class H Cartridge Fuses D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 50 Electrical Cabinets and Boxes 2. 198C Fuses, High-Interrupting-Capacity-Current Limiting Types 3. 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 4. 698 Industrial Control Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electric Code 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. 1.04 LOCATIONS A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16010 for definitions of types of locations. W:12008\0897003_City-o(-Renton_Stonegate\10-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010\10.16180 Protective Devices and Switches.DOC 6/14/2010 10 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16180 Protective Devices and Switches Page 2 of 3 go PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Units shall be thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers in surface mounted non-ventilated enclosures conforming to the appropriate articles of NEMA 250, as follows: 1. Dry Locations: NEMA Type 1. B. Each unit shall have an external operating handle with a cover interlocking mechanism which will prevent opening of the enclosure when the operating handle is in the "ON" position. The handle shall be capable of being padlocked in either the "ON" or the "OFF" position. A breaker "tripped" position shall be clearly indicated between the "ON" and the "OFF" position. C. Where indicated on the Drawings, enclosed breakers used as service entrance equipment shall be so labeled for such service and shall contain an insulated neutral lug. The complete unit shall conform to UL 489. wr D. The circuit breakers shall be of the voltage, number of poles, frame size, and ampere rating shown on the Drawings. Units shall be manually operated, trip-free, thermal-magnetic, molded case, front mounted circuit breakers. 1. Frame sizes larger than 100 amperes shall have adjustable instantaneous magnetic elements. Minimum interrupting rating shall not be less than 10,000 amps asymmetrical and the breaker shall conform to FS W-C-375. Multiple breakers shall have a common trip single operating handle with three positions of indication. Circuit breaker shall be calibrated at 40°C (1040F). 2. Each breaker shall be completely enclosed in a molded case with the calibrated sensing element factory sealed to prevent tampering. 2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Disconnect switches for 480 Vac shall be heavy-duty non-fusible safety switches with the voltage ratings, current ratings, and number of poles as indicated by the Drawings. The switches shall be 600 volt type and horsepower rated. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings. Switches shall be Cutler Hammer DH Series; Siemens HNF Series; or equal. B. Enclosures shall be as follows: 1. Dry Locations: NEMA Type 1. C. Nameplates: Provide an engraved plastic nameplate for each disconnect switch identifying the motorized equipment it controls. Nameplate shall also indicate panel and circuit number feeding it. 2.03 MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Manual Transfer Switches for 480 Vac shall be heavy-duty non-fusible safety "i switches with the voltage ratings, current ratings, and number of poles as indicated by the Drawings. The switches shall be 600 volt type and horsepower rated. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings. Switches shall be Cutler Hammer DH Series; Siemens HNF Series; or equal. ow W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16180 Protective Devices and Switches.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16180 Protective Devices and Switches Page 3 of 3 B. Enclosures shall be as follows: 1. Dry Locations: NEMA Type 1. C. Nameplates: Provide an engraved plastic nameplate for each disconnect switch identifying the motorized equipment it controls. Nameplate shall also indicate panel and circuit number feeding it. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units plumb within 1/8-inch of vertical, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make sure that fuse ratings are as shown on the Drawings, and that breaker trip settings are per the Engineer's instructions. rr 3.02 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Disconnect switches and enclosed circuit breakers shall be centered 5'-0" above the ++ floor. 3.03 FIELD TESTS A. Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance tests on circuits to be energized with a line-to-neutral voltage of 120 Vac or more. Test the insulation with a 500 Vdc insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 megohms. The insulation resistance shall be 20 megohms or more. Submit results for review. B. Continuity Tests: Perform circuit continuity tests from a low powered DC test source to operate a buzzer or bell. Tests shall be made prior to energizing the protected circuit. END OF SUB-SECTION a �.r W:12 00 8108 9 7003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16180 Prolective Devices and Switches.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16205 Standby Diesel Engine-Generator Sets Page 1 of 10 SUB-SECTION 10.16205 STANDBY DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SETS r PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Section 10.16010 becomes a part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. B. Work Included: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, services, and incidentals required to provide a complete and operable standby diesel engine-generator system. Materials and equipment shall be new and of best quality, as specified and shown on the Drawings. The work shall include, but not be limited to: +rr 1. Standby diesel engine-generator set (hereinafter called engine-generator) complete with all appurtenances. Unit shall be complete with all standard accessories for the manufacturers and models listed in Paragraph 2.01 G in addition to those additional and special features described. 2. Fuel system including day tank assembly, fuel piping from day tank to engine, and engine-mounted fuel pump. Ow 3. Automatic starting and shutdown controls, starting batteries, battery rack, charger, and generator controls. 4. Exhaust system complete with flexible connectors, silencer, exhaust piping, and insulation and supports for silencer and exhaust pipe. 5. Radiator exhaust air duct. 6. Load bank including related equipment. 7. Sound-attenuating enclosure. C. Related Work Specified in Other Sections or Sub-Sections: 1. Section 10.02: Excavation and Backfill ,rr 2. Section 10.03: Concrete Work 3. Sub-Section 10.09900: Painting 4. Sub-Section 10.10200: Louvers 5. Sub-Section 10.16250: Automatic Transfer Switch. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE arr A. Comply with all rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over work specified herein. ` B. Permits and inspection shall be in accordance with Section 10.01 of these Specifications. w` C. The Drawings are diagrammatic. Size of equipment and pipes and general method of routing are shown, but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. am W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDeslgnY10.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16205 StandbyGeneratorSet.doc 6/16/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16205 Standby Diesel Engine-Generator Sets Page 2 of 10 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM International (ASTM) Publication: 1. A386 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products, Specifications for B. Federal Specification (FS): 1. FF-H-106C Hardware, Builders Locks and Door Trim C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publications: 1. ICS-1 General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems 2. ICS-2 Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies 3. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum) 4. MG 1 Motors and Generators D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications: 1. 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquid Code 2. 37 Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines E. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Standard: 1. 508 Electric Industrial Control Equipment 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the Special Provisions and the submittal requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and include the following information: 1. Floor layout drawings for the engine-generator and sound-attenuating enclosure, with location dimensions for all connections including electrical, fuel, and exhaust, with base dimensions and weights. 2. Composite assembly drawing of engine-generator and sound-attenuating enclosure showing location of all auxiliary equipment, dimensions, and weight. 3. Front, rear, and both side elevations of the complete engine-generator unit assembly and sound-attenuating enclosure, including radiator exhaust air duct. 4. Specification sheets with performance data and engineering details adequate to determine compliance with Specifications of: a. Engine (including engine cranking amperes at 20°F) b. Radiator c. Generator and voltage regulator d. Base assembly, housing, and vibration isolation mounts e. Control panel with all components f. Jacket water heater g. Day tank assembly h. Engine-mounted fuel pump i. Governor j. Battery system k. Exhaust silencer I. Roof thimble (for exhaust pipe) m. Battery charger n. Alarms. W5200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16205 StandbyGeneratorSetdoc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16205 Standby Diesel Engine-Generator Sets Page 3 of 10 5. Electrical interconnection diagram including generator, voltage regulator, control panel, circuit breaker, batteries, jacket heater, switches, and accessories. 6. Complete identification of all components and materials by manufacturer, model number, rating, and material. 7. Complete engine and generator voltage dip and load data. Provide err calculations to show compliance with specified performance requirements specifically prepared for this project. 8. Single-line generator power diagrams. 9. Wiring diagrams for generator excitation and regulation circuits, alarm circuits, and instrument circuits. 10. Elementary control diagram and separate wiring diagram for automatic engine starting and protective shutdown controls. These diagrams shall show a wire number for every control circuit wire. Include a comprehensive description of operation. 11. Complete surface preparation and finish data for the engine, generator, cabinet, panels, frame, housing, and other surfaces. 12. Detailed description of factory testing program, testing equipment, reporting procedure, and criteria for test passing or failing. 13. Detailed description of field testing program, including description of tests, testing equipment, reporting procedure, and criteria for test passing or failing. (This may be a separate submittal made at a later time, but not later than 30 days before the actual tests.) 14. Check the shop drawing submittal to verify that all the details and data required above are included. If the submittal is not complete, it will not be reviewed and will be returned for completion. 15. Seismic Anchorage Design, including layout and calculations, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Washington, and conforming to the requirements of Sub-Section 10.01190. C. Factory Test Report: After fabrication and testing but before shipping from the factory, submit results of the factory test for review. Do not ship any generator units until the factory test results have received favorable review. D. Field Test Report: Submit field test report for review within fifteen days of the time of completion of the field test. E. Manual: Provide in conformance with Sub-Section 10.16010. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET A. General: 1. The engine-generator shall be an EPA Tier 3 certified, factory-fabricated and assembled package of new and current equipment, and shall consist of engine, generator, controls, and other accessories as specified and as may be required for a complete and operable assembly, capable of automatic startup and shutdown. rw 1W W:1200810897003_City-ot-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16205 StandbyGeneratorSet.doc - 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16205 Standby Diesel Engine-Generator Sets Page 4 of 10 2. The engine-generator shall have only one source of supply and responsibility. The assembly and complete installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code and State of Washington including UL listing. vi B. Ratings and Performance: Install the engine-generator permanently on a welded steel base that can be anchored to a concrete base. The unit shall be capable of providing power for motors, lighting, and controls. 1. The engine-generator shall be capable of starting and operating the sequentially started loads as follows: a. With an initial load (listed in Paragraph 2.01 G) on the generator unit, the engine-generator shall be capable of starting and running the additional electrical load as listed in Paragraph 2.01G. The instantaneous voltage dip shall not exceed 18%. b. The generator will not be required to parallel any other source. c. The generator shall provide the voltage, phase, and number of wires as listed in Paragraph 2.01 G. The engine-generator speed shall not exceed that listed in Paragraph 2.01 G. The Contractor shall submit detailed calculations on voltage dip characteristics on this specific application. Generalized catalogs are not sufficient to meet this requirement. The voltage dip characteristics shall also be confirmed in the field. Failure of this field test shall constitute evidence that the equipment has not met the voltage dip criterion. The equipment shall be replaced or modified until the installed equipment operates successfully as specified herein. (See the Paragraph entitled "Testing and Run-In.") Under no circumstances will equipment with a voltage dip greater than specified be acceptable. C. Engine: 1. Type: The engine shall be 4-cycle for operation on No. 2 diesel fuel, shall be water-cooled, and include a mounted radiator, pusher-type fan, electric governor, and water pump. 2. Engine Controls: a. Normal Controls: Provide a complete automatic engine start-stop control which shall start engine on closing remote contact and initiate engine cool down and shutdown on opening contact. The engine controls shall also include a three-position selector switch with the following positions: RUN/STOP/AUTOMATIC; the STOP position shall shut the engine down + immediately, bypassing the cool down cycle. b. Safety Shutdowns: Provide a cranking limiter to open the starting circuit in approximately 45 to 60 seconds if the engine fails to start in that time. Provide sensing elements to shut the engine down immediately when conditions reach a level deemed harmful to the unit. Provide an individual signal light and alarm terminals for each condition. Provide an alarm relay and horn. Safety shutdowns shall include: 1) Low lubricating oil pressure 2) High water temperature No 3) Overspeed 4) Overcrank 5) Low coolant level 6) Low coolant temperature 7) Any additional conditions standard with the manufacturer. c. Alarm Outputs- Provide one set of normally open and one set of normally closed dry (i.e., non-energized) output contacts for connections to the W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16205 StandbyGeneratorSet.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16205 Standby Diesel Engine-Generator Sets Page 5 of 10 telemetry system as a composite "Backup Engine Trouble" alarm. The contacts shall be actuated for any one or more of the shutdown conditions or for overcurrent trip of the generator main breaker; provide alarm signal + r light for such overcurrent trip. The contacts shall remain activated during the entire period of the abnormal condition, and reset shall be automatic. The contacts shall be wired to a terminal strip inside a closed, gasketed box. Provide one set of Form C contacts to indicate that the engine is running. d. Fuel System Control: Provide auxiliary contacts for monitoring the fuel supply system as shown on the Drawings. Provide engine shutdown in the event of no fuel in the fuel tank. 3. Batteries: Provide starting batteries mounted in attached battery racks with non-conducting floor. Guarantee the batteries for one year or more and provide a new battery for any battery found defective within the guarantee period. Mount batteries above the concrete floor level. Batteries shall be the lead acid type, selected to provide cranking as specified in Paragraph 2.01C.2 above. aw Engine shall be at the temperature maintained by the jacket heater for a 20°F ambient. 4. Battery Charger: Provide a charger of the two-rate type, with current and to voltage ratings to suit the batteries. Include a do ammeter, fused ac input and do output, and charge rate selector switch. The charger shall operate on 120 VAC. Charger output shall be current limited to 140% of rated current. w 5. Jacket Water Heater: Provide single-phase jacket water heater(s) with one thermostat. Size heater to maintain 100°F in 20°F ambient. Heaters having a total wattage of 1,200 or less shall be 120 volts; larger shall be 208 volts. 6. Provide an exhaust silencer of the super critical silencing type capable of not less than 30 dB-A attenuation, sized by the engine manufacturer to provide silencing without harmful backpressure. Furnish with minimum 18-inch-long steel flexible exhaust connection sections and rain cap. Install silencer inside enclosure in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Thermally insulate flexible connection and exhaust piping. 7. Engine Exhaust: Provide Schedule 40, black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A120, with condensate drains at low points. Insulation for engine exhaust piping and accessories shall be as follow: a. Insulation shall be a 2-inch thick blanket-type system rated for 900°F continuous service. Insulation shall include a Type 304 stainless steel inner liner asbestos-free fiberglass mat insulation. Insulation exterior shall be fiberglass impregnated cloth. Thermal Energy Products "Exhaust Wrap" or equal. b. Provide insulation over flexible connections. Fabricate insulation section as necessary to allow the full rated travel of the expansion joint. 8. Fuel Supply System: Provide a fuel supply system capable of delivering the required amount of fuel to the engine even when the fuel level is down within 1 inch of the tank bottom. Provide flexible connections to the fuel supply and return lines at the engine. Flexible connections shall be UL listed and approved for diesel fuel service. 9. Initial Fills: a. Provide crankcase oil. b. Provide initial fill of engine coolant as recommended by the manufacturer to protect engine-cooling system to a minimum temperature of 20°F, and as required to inhibit corrosion in the cooling system. c. Fuel Oil: Supply the fuel oil for testing of operation. to W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton—Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16205StandbyGeneratorSetdoc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16205 Standby Diesel Engine-Generator Sets Page 6 of 10 lrr D. Generator: 1. The generator shall be four-pole and of revolving field design with temperature- compensated solid-state voltage regulator and high speed brushless rotating rectifier exciter system with permanent magnet. The stator shall be directly connected to the engine flywheel housing and rotor shall be driven through semi-flexible driving flanges to ensure permanent alignments. The insulation system shall be Class F with Class B temperature rise. The three-phase, broad range generator shall be 12-lead, reconnectable, and shall meet the requirements of NEMA Standard MG-1. 2. Generator Performance: a. Frequency regulation shall be isochronous ±1.0% from no-load to rated load. b. Steady-state voltage regulation shall be within ±2% of rated voltage, from " no-load to full rated load. Rheostats shall provide a minimum of±5% voltage adjustment from rated value. Voltage regulator shall be of the silicon controlled rectifier type. c. Preload and step load conditions are tabulated in Paragraph 2.01 H. 3. Control Panel: The alternator control panel shall be wired, tested, and shock mounted on the generating set by the manufacturer. It shall contain panel lighting, manual reset circuit breaker, frequency meter, running time meter, voltage adjusting rheostat, ac voltmeter, ac ammeter (which indicates current each phase), and voltmeter-ammeter phase selector switch with OFF position. Locate the control panel in accordance with the space requirements of NEC 110.26 and such that all external devices are not more than 6 feet above the floor. 4. Generator Main Power Circuit Breaker: Provide a 100% rated main power circuit breaker as shown on the Drawings. The breaker shall be housed within the engine/generator housing. Breaker shall be quick-make, quick-break type, with wiping contacts and arc chutes for each pole. Breaker shall be trip free and have trip indication independent of on-off positions. Locate the circuit breaker in accordance with the accessibility requirements of NEC 404.8. 5. Main Conductors: Provide necessary sets of line lugs capable of accepting from #1/0 AWG to 300 KCMIL conductors as shown on the Drawings. 6. Provide exerciser and all appurtenances for periodic automatic running of the engine-generator set. .r E. Vibration Isolation System for Engine-Generator Unit: 1. Isolation system shall be spring type, sized by generator supplier. err 2. Vibration isolation shall be greater than 95%. F. Subbase Fuel Tank Assembly- The fuel system will consist of subbase-mounted fuel tank, double-wall (rupture basin) and shall include the following: 1. UL 142 listed, double-walled steel, mounted underneath the unit, sized for 24-hour load. 2. Fuel level sight gauge. ilk 3. Flexible fuel lines for feed and return. Fuel returns from engine by gravity. Provide check valves in return and intake lines if recommended by engine supplier. 4. The fill line shall be extended through the enclosure and provided with lockable cap. r W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Slonegate110-Eng Design110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16205 SlandbyGeneratorSetdoc 6/14/2010 dw WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16205 Standby Diesel Engine-Generator Sets Page 7 of 10 wr 5. Leak detection system to monitor any leak from the tank. Provide alarm signals for connection to a PLC as shown on the Drawings. 6. 2-inch and 3-inch vent. a 7. Drain pet cock valve. 8. Fuel strainer. aw G. Engine-generator and accessories manufacturers, model numbers, and sizing data: 1. Engine-generator and accessories manufacturers: a. Cummins NW, no equal 2. Minimum standby rating: 175 KW (at 0.8 power factor) �" 3. Generator output: a. Voltage: 480Y/277 volts b. Phase: 3 "" c. Wires: 4 4. Maximum engine speed: 1,800, rpm 5. Voltage dip characteristics: to a. Initial load: 15 KVA, 1.0 PF. b. Two 85 HP submersible wastewater pumps. Motors will be started one at a time and are equipped with solid state starters. wr 2.02 LOAD BANK A. Provide a duct-mounted load bank with flanged connections and load controller. The load bank shall provide incremental resistive load steps of 25 KW each to maintain a load on the engine generator. A load bank control panel shall include a main circuit breaker, contactors, control power transformers, and other devices specified in Sub-Section 10.16955. B. Power connection to the load bank shall be 3-phase, 3-wire from a circuit breaker �r on the generator as shown on the Drawings. C. Load Indication and Control: Load indication shall consist of three remote current Nirr transformers, which are to sense total current output of the generator, an ammeter switch, and ammeter in the load bank control panel, and interconnecting wiring. A control panel shall include selector switches for each step and indicating light. D. Load Bank Ratings at 500 Feet Elevation and 104°F Ambient: 1. Capacity: 75 kW, 1.0 power factor 2. Voltage: 480 VAC, 3-phase. 3. Load step: Three steps consisting of 25 kW each; each step shall have fuse or circuit breaker protection for resistor elements. 4. Frequency: 60 Hertz. 5. Time Rating: Continuous. 6. Maximum Air Temperature Rise: 104°F. E. The system shall have a load bank control panel, which as a minimum includes the following: 1. Fuse or circuit breaker protected. 2. Voltmeter (one-phase). 3. Ammeter and ammeter switch (3-phase and off): 4. Kilowatt meter: 2% accuracy, total generator output sensing. w 5. NEMA 12 enclosure. do W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16205 StandbyGeneratorSetdoc 6/14/2010 W WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16205 Standby Diesel Engine-Generator Sets Page 8 of 10 wt 2.03 SOUND ATTENUATING ENCLOSURE A. Provide a sound attenuating, weatherproof, skin-tight dropover enclosure for the engine generator. Enclosure shall be rated for a maximum sound level of 62 dBa at 10 feet, and ambient operating temperature as high as 45° C. The enclosure shall be fabricated from 12-gauge steel, with stainless steel hinges. Maximum outside ► dimensions for the enclosure shown on the Drawings. Configure louvers, access doors, noise traps, etc. to accommodate the layout shown on the Drawings. Exhaust piping and silencer shall be located within the enclosure. rrr PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ENGINE-GENERATOR INSTALLATION A. General: Mount and anchor the engine-generator set to a concrete base pad. Provide isolator pads as specified in Paragraph 2.01-E. Design the engine- generator set anchorage and support systems to resist seismic earthquake forces in accordance with Sub-Section 10.01190. In the shop drawing submittals, include calculations to demonstrate the adequacy of the anchorage and support systems. B. Foundations, Installation, and Grouting: Furnish the necessary materials and construct suitable concrete foundations. C. Skilled mechanics shall install all such equipment in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer. D. In setting equipment, make an allowance of at least 1 inch for grout under the equipment bases. Shims used to level and adjust the bases shall be steel. Shims got may be left embedded in the grout, in which case they shall be installed neatly and as inconspicuously as possible in the completed work. Unless otherwise approved, all grout shall be an approved non-shrink, non-metallic grout. E. Non-shrink, non-metallic grout shall be a dimensionally stable, inorganic, premixed grout resistant to acids, alkalies, and salt water and shall be unaffected by water and oil. It shall have high strength even when used as a pourable mixture, and shall bond well with steel and cured concrete or be compatible with a suitable bonding agent, which shall then be used to affect the bond. It shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. It shall be similar, equivalent, and equal to "Five Star Grout" as manufactured by U.S. Grout Corporation; Bonsal Construction Grout, as manufactured by Bonsal Company-, or equal. F. Fuel and Lubricants: During testing and prior to acceptance, furnish all fuel and lubricants necessary for the proper operation of this equipment. G. Tools: For each type of equipment to be furnished by the Contractor, provide a complete set of all special tools (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) which may be necessary for the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of such equipment. H. In the vicinity of terminations, lace all power conductors to resist short circuit forces. 'w W:1200810897003 City-0f-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesignl10.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16205 StandbyGeneratorSeldoc 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16205 Standby Diesel Engine-Generator Sets Page 9 of 10 wr 3.02 TESTING AND RUN-1N A. General: Tests are to determine proper operation and capacity of the equipment and to demonstrate compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. All equipment that fails any test will be rejected, and complete re-testing will be required after the +rrt Contractor makes corrections or modifications to equipment, which has previously failed any test. All field tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. B. Factory Tests: Factory test the engine-generator and sound-attenuating enclosure to assure compliance with the Drawings, Specifications, NEMA MG-1, and the manufacturer's quality control provisions. Provide three copies of all factory test reports. Engine-generator and sound-attenuating enclosure factory test reports shall be reviewed and approved by the Owner prior to shipping. C. Field Tests: 1. General: Fully field test the engine-generator and sound-attenuating enclosure to demonstrate the units are in compliance with the Specifications and are ready for service. 2. Installation of the engine-generator shall be complete and the unit shall be serviced, tested, adjusted, and ready for use before the field tests are scheduled. w 3. Provide written notice of the scheduled dates for the field test and give to the Engineer at least ten (10) working days prior to the field test date. The notice shall include a written test schedule listing the tests, the test procedure, the criteria for a satisfactory test, ratings of load bank to be used, and description of special measurement equipment to be employed. 4. Provide load bank to simulate the initial load and motor starting load specified in Paragraph 2.01H. 5. Make repairs and adjustments as required to achieve satisfactory performance of the engine-generator unit. If repairs or adjustments are made during the tests, additional testing shall be performed as required by the Engineer, at no additional cost. 6. Make written records of the tests, and within ten (10) days submit three (3) copies of the test records to the Engineer. The test record shall indicate the test criteria and arrangement, the time of the test, the results, and pertinent data such as voltage, frequency, kilowatts, power factor, load current, oil pressure, water temperature, and ambient temperature. Pertinent data shall be recorded • for each test, and at least every thirty (30) minutes when the test requires more than thirty (30) minutes. D. Alarm, Control, and Equipment Tests: 1. Demonstrate each alarm and safety shutdown provision as being caused by the abnormal condition unless an alternative test condition has been favorably reviewed by the Engineer prior to the scheduling of the tests. 2. Operate each control circuit and device to demonstrate its proper operation. 3. Demonstrate the battery charger and jacket water heater operation successfully. E. Operational Tests: 1. Simulate a power failure in order to demonstrate the proper operation of the transfer switch and engine-generator. W:12 008108 9 7 0 0 3 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.16205 StandbyGeneratorSetdoc 6114/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16205 Standby Diesel Engine-Generator Sets Page 10 of 10 2. Demonstrate motor starting capability by applying the specified initial load and then the equivalent of starting and running the specified motor loads. Voltage dip shall be measured and recorded to demonstrate conformity to the Specifications. 3. Show that phase rotation of the engine-generator and the utility power are compatible at the site. F. Endurance Tests: 1. Operate the engine-generator for 1/2 hour at one-half its KW rating. 2. Operate the engine-generator for six (6) hours continuously at 100% of its KW and KVA ratings. 3. Measure the temperature rise of the windings of the generator using the resistance method. G. Provide load banks, fuel, test equipment, labor, materials, and all other equipment and services required for all tests. 3.03 OWNER ORIENTATION A. Provide instruction of Owner's representatives. END OF SUB-SECTION " at wti► W:\2008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—Specs_Jun2010110.16205 StandbyGeneratorSet.doc 611412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16250 Automatic Transfer Switch Page 1 of 4 AW SUB-SECTION 10.16250 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCLUDES A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Sections 10.16010 and 10.16205 become a part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. B. Work Includes: Provide automatic transfer switch (ATS) complete with controls and accessories, as shown on the Drawings at each location shown on the Drawings. C. Related Work Specified in Other Sub-Sections: r 1. Sub-Section 10.16205: Standby Diesel Engine-Generator Sets 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. Z55.1 Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. ICS 1 General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems 2. ICS 6 Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies 3. ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): aw 1. 1008 Automatic Transfer Switches (revised 1996) D. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA): �► 1. TS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. B. Submit shop drawings that include: 1. Dimensioned drawings. 2. Elementary diagrams. 3. Wiring diagrams. 4. Nameplate list. " 5. Evidence that the equipment will be provided with all specified accessories, options, features, and characteristics. 6. Certifications that the equipment is designed and manufactured in conformance with applicable codes and standards. 7. Regarding the seismic anchorage requirements of as outlined in Section 10.01: A sketch or description of the anchorage system. W:\200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesignl10.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16250 Automatic Transfer Switch Revision.DOC 6/16/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16250 Automatic Transfer Switch Page 2 of 4 C. Manual. Provide manufacturer's installation and maintenance instruction manuals in conformance with Sub-Section 10.16010. + PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH ,rr A. General. The ATS shall transfer from the normal service to a standby engine generator in the event of power failure. The switch shall transfer the system back to normal power after normal power has been restored. The switch shall include all controls and accessories. The switch shall be UL labeled, shall meet the requirements of UL Standard 1008 and shall be suitable for total system transfer including motor and lighting loads. B. Construction: 1. The ATS shall be of the mechanically held double throw type, actuated by two electrical operators momentarily energized and connected to the transfer mechanism by a simple over-center linkage. All main power contacts and auxiliary contacts shall be mechanically attached to a common shaft, shall be to double-break silver alloy with wiping action, and shall be protected by arcing contacts. Arcing contacts shall close before and open after the main contacts and shall be readily replaceable. Contact design and arrangement shall permit repeated making and breaking of full-load current, in a combination of motor and other loads, without damage to the main contacts. Provide a main transfer - mechanism utilizing rugged metal parts throughout. 2. The switch transfer shall be produced in such a way that a time delay of at least 0.4 seconds exists between the opening of the closed contacts and the closing of the open contacts. The transfer switch shall be capable of transferring in either direction with 70 percent of rated voltage applied at the switch terminals. 3. All switch and relay contacts, coils, springs, and control elements shall be serviceable or removable from the front of the mounted switch and accessory assembly without the removal of either assembly from its compartment and without disconnection of drive linkages, power conductors, or control conductors. 4. The enclosure shall be NEMA 1 construction with hinged doors on the front for ► access to the interior controls. Secure doors by a locking type latch. Provide two keys for the lock. 5. Cable connections shall be accessible from the front without removing internal .r components. 6. Safety Requirements. a. Arrange the electrical supply to each control panel to be disconnected by a Ili single switch or circuit breaker, except for necessary foreign circuits. Cover any live parts within the control panel fed from foreign control or signal circuits or arrange for them to be disconnected by one of the following methods: 1) Enclosed relays which are automatically de-energized when the main disconnecting switch is opened; or 2) Door-operated enclosed disconnect switches; or 3) Clearly identified enclosed manually operated disconnect switches, which may be located inside the control panel door, provided the operating handles are isolated or barriered from all open live parts. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—Specs_Jun2010110.16250 Automatic Transfer Switch Revision.DOC 6114/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16250 Automatic Transfer Switch Page 3 of 4 1101 b. Arrange the controls so that manipulation of control switches, adjustments to timing relays, or replacement of fuses can be done without exposure to live parts. 0 7. The ATS shall have the following features: a. Continuous rating of 480 Vac, 3-phase, with 3-poles and full neutral bus. Current rating shall be as shown on the Drawings. v b. Adequate line and load lugs for terminating the power conductors shown on the Drawings. c. A terminal strip with terminals for terminating all external control circuits. ow Number all terminals using the wire number for the wire terminated. d. Cable wiring with cable ties, secured in place and guarded where subject to mechanical injury. e. Permanent identification of each wire at each point of connection using numbered wiring sleeves. Provide electrically common wires with the same number. Uniquely number electrically different wires. C. Controls. Include the following controls and accessories: 1. Three-Phase Relay Protection. Three adjustable close differential relays, connected phase-to-phase, all set to drop out at 80 percent and to pick up at 90 percent of nominal voltage. 2. Test Switch. A test control switch which shall cause the automatic transfer switch to start the engine, transfer, retransfer, and the like, simulating a power outage. Mount this switch on the door of the transfer switch compartment. 3. Override Switch. An override control switch (1) to prevent the automatic transfer switch from transferring from the "normal" to the "standby" position and (2) to prevent the engine-generator from being signaled to start. This control JIM switch shall be mounted on the door of the transfer switch compartment. 4. Indicating Lights. One each to indicate the switch is supplying "normal" or "standby" power. Provide neon type lamps with series resistors as required, in oil-tight units with clear lenses. Label each light with plastic nameplates engraved "NORMAL" and "STANDBY", respectively. Mount lights on the door of the transfer switch compartment. 5. Engine Starting Delay. A timer which, following loss or deterioration of"normal" power, will delay closure of engine starting contact for an adjustable period up to 2 minutes, to eliminate starts during brief or momentary outages of"normal" .. power. Set delay at 5 seconds. 6. Transfer Relay. A relay to prevent the transfer to standby until the standby power voltage and frequency are 90 percent of rated values. 7. Retransfer Delay. A timer to provide an adjustable delay from 2 up to 25 minutes (minimum range) before retransfer to "normal" power. If"standby" power fails before preset delay period elapses, and if "normal" power is within set limits of voltage, override the delay and retransfer immediately. 8. Nameplates. An engraved plastic nameplate for every lamp, switch, and other control device or indicator. Identify all switch and control positions. Nameplate wording shall be subject to review by the Engineer. 9. Unloaded Generator Operation. A timer which, following retransfer to "normal" power, will maintain engine in unloaded operation for a fixed period of 5 minutes before signaling it to shut down. 10. Automatic exerciser: Provide a micorprocessor controller with programmable logic to allow automatic simulation of power failure, transfer switch operation and retransfer. Controls shall allow entry of scheduled exercising of system in a 7-day period. M W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.16250 Automatic Transfer Switch Revision.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473Sub-Section 10.16250 Automatic Transfer Switch Page 4 of 4 11. Auxiliary Contacts. Two sets of Form C contacts that change state after the engine starting delay. One of these sets is for starting the engine, the other is spare. 12. Status Auxiliary Contacts: Provide two sets of dry contacts to indicate position of ATS in "Normal" and "Standby" for plant control system connections. 13. Transfer Delay. A timer to provide an adjustable delay of 1 to 5 seconds in the closing of the open contacts after the closed contacts have opened. Provide rrr this delay for both transfer and retransfer switch operations. D. UL Label. The transfer switch shall have a UL label on the unit when it arrives at the site. Absence of the UL label shall be sufficient cause for the unit to be rejected. Provide all of the specified features, options, and accessories. If the manufacturer's standard UL unit does not have the specified features, options, or accessories, then provide alternative features, options, or accessories to accomplish the same purpose in a manner similar to that specified, while still providing a unit with a UL label. E. Current Ratings. The transfer switch shall have continuous ampere rating as shown on the Drawings and a short circuit withstand rating for 3 cycles at 480 Vac as follows: as Continuous Ampere Rating Withstand RMS Amperes, Symmetrical 100-150 40,000 225-800 40,000 800-3000 65,000 so F. Factory Tests. Assemble, wire, and test the automatic transfer switch at the factory. Conduct tests to assure that every component functions properly. Submit prototype test reports on bus bracing for the Engineer's review. G. Manufacturer: Cummins, no equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Securely anchor the transfer switch to the wall. The door shall open freely and close tightly. Repair any defect or damage to the switch, enclosure, or paint, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. Lace all power conductors to resist short circuit forces. 3.02 TESTING A. Field Tests. Perform the tests for automatic transfer switches as outlined in NETA. Submit reports for review by the Engineer. END OF SUB-SECTION W:120081089700J City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.16250 Automatic Transfer Switch Revision.DOC 6/1 412 01 0 rr WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16402 Underground Electrical Work Page 1 of 4 "' SUB-SECTION 10.16402 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCLUDES A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Section 10.16010 become a part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. 1.02 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1. Federal Specifications: a. RR-F-621 C Frames, Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump and Catch Basin, ++� Manhole b. RR-G-661 D Grating, Metal, Bar Type (Floor, except for Naval Vessels) 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI): ,+w a. 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36 Structural Steel b. A153 Specifications for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware c. A615 Deformed and Plain Billet - Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement d. C33 Concrete Aggregates e. C139 Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes, Specification for f. C150 Portland Cement g. C478 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections, Specification for h. C857 Recommended Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures i. C858 Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures 4. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. HB-13 Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges 5. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): a. C2 National Electrical Safety Code 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of �" Sub-Section 10.16010. W& W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton—Sionegate110-EngDesignU0.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16402 Underground Electdcal Work.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16402 Underground Electrical Work Page 2 of 4 B. Manufacturer's Data and Shop Drawings: 1. Handhole - Include a table of dimensions which shows proposed size of each handhole. 2. Handhole Frame and Cover 3. Sealing Material for Precast Handhole Joints C. Certificates 1. Test Reports: Submit for approval 30 days before the materials are used, copies of laboratory test reports for the following: a. Arc-proofing test for cable fireproofing materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS JW 2.01 GENERAL A. Materials and equipment shall conform to the respective specifications and standards and to the specifications herein. Electrical ratings shall be as indicated. B. Conduit: Provide per Sub-Section 10.16110. C. Wire and Cable: Provide per Sub-Section 10.16120 and Sub-Section 10.16124. 2.02 HANDHOLES A. Provide handholes of reinforced precast concrete, or injection molded composite plastic material. Handholes shall include a base, a body, extensions, and a cover. Handholes with a perimeter of 10 feet or more (e.g., 3 feet by 2 feet) shall have both pulling irons and cable racks. All hardware shall be stainless steel, or hot-dip galvanized after fabrication; cable racking hardware, however, shall be non-metallic and corrosion resistant. If no handhole size is shown on the Drawings, size units per NEC or provide 12 inches by 24 inches by 18 inches deep, whichever is larger. Structure shall be fabricated in accordance with ACI 318. B. Aggregate used in pre-cast handholes shall conform to the specifications given in ASTM C33. sir C. Cement used shall be Type 11, low alkali Portland cement and shall meet ASTM C150, Type 11. D. Reinforcing bars shall be intermediate grade billet steel conforming to ASTM A615. E. Design wheel loads for handhole covers shall be HS 20-44 as given in AASHTO HB-13. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION A. See Section 7-08. r W:V200B10897003 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—Specs Jun2010t10.l6402 Underground Electrical Work.doc 6/14/2010 10 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16402 Underground Electrical Work Page 3 of 4 AW 3.02 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION A. See Sub-Section 10.16120 and Sub-Section 10.16124. 3.03 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS WITH CONCRETE ENCASEMENT A. Provide underground raceways encased in concrete only where specifically shown on the Drawings. 1. Concrete encasement shall be minimum of 3 inches around outer walls of raceways and minimum of 2 inches between raceways. Conduits shall be PVC Type EB. 2. Concrete shall be Portland cement type with 4 sacks cement per cubic yard of concrete, maximum coarse aggregate size of 3/8-inches and shall have " minimum strength of 2,000 psi after 28 days. Amount of water shall not exceed slump required for placement. Five pounds red lead oxide shall be added per cubic yard of concrete for medium voltage raceway encasement only. ++� 3. Underground raceways shall slope toward manholes, pullboxes, etc., at minimum rate of 3 inches per 100 feet unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Raceway entrances in manholes, handholes, etc., shall be by means of bell ends and shall be sealed against entry of silt, debris, rodents, etc., into raceways. 4. Top of concrete encasement shall be minimum of 24 inches below grade. dw 5. Minimum radius of all horizontal bends in underground duct banks shall be 25 feet. Bends shall be formed of factory made sweeps or continuous assembly of bend segments or curved segments, except that polyvinyl chloride conduits may be field formed. Minimum radius of all vertical bends in underground raceways shall be ten times nominal size of conduit. Vertical bends shall be made of rigid steel or permanently coated aluminum conduit. 6. Underground raceways within roadways shall be run parallel or perpendicular to road centerline. 7. Pull wires left in underground raceways shall be 1/8-inch nylon rope or 3/16-inch polypropylene. • 8. Terminate conduits in end-bells where duct lines enter handholes. Provide structural support for concrete encased duct banks at the point where they terminate. Separators shall be of precast concrete, high impact polystyrene, .. steel, or any combination of these. Stagger the joints of the conduits by rows and layers so as to provide a duct line having the maximum strength. During construction, protect partially completed duct lines from the entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs. As each section of a duct line is completed, draw a brush through having the diameter of the duct, and having stiff bristles until the conduit is clear of all particles of earth, sand, and gravel; then immediately install conduit plugs. B. See Sub-Section 10.16110 for additional requirements. 3.04 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS WITHOUT CONCRETE ENCASEMENT A. All underground raceways shall be without concrete encasement unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings. B. Provide sand backfill 3 inches all around the raceway. r� M W1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Slonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_SpecsJun2D1D110.16402 Underground Electrical Work.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16402 Underground Electrical Work Page 4 of 4 C. Construct raceways per the applicable provisions above for underground raceways W with concrete encasement. D. See Sub-Section 10.16110 for additional requirements. + : 3.05 HANDHOLES A. Provide handholes complete with all accessories, as indicated. Identify each casting by having the manufacturer's name and address cast into an interior face or permanently attached thereto. B. Handhole or Concrete Pullbox Grounding: Ground rods installed in electrical distribution system handholes or concrete pullboxes shall be properly connected to the cable shielding, metallic sheath, and armor at each cable joint or splice by means of No. 4 AWG or equivalent braided tinned copper wire. Connections to metallic cable sheaths shall be by means of tinned terminals soldered to ground wires and to cable sheaths. Care shall be taken in soldering not to damage metallic cable sheaths or shields. Ground rods shall be protected with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive plastic tape for a distance of 2 inches above and 6 inches below concrete penetrations. Ground wires shall be protected with a double wrapping of t pressure-sensitive plastic tape for a distance of 2 inches above and 6 inches below concrete penetrations. Ground wires shall be neatly and firmly attached to handhole walls and the amount of exposed bare wire shall be held to a minimum. C. Installation of Cable in Handholes: Do not install cables utilizing the shortest route, but route along those walls providing the longest route and the maximum spare I cable lengths. Form all cables to closely parallel walls, not to interfere with duct entrances, and support on brackets and cable insulators at a maximum of 18 inches. In existing handholes and vaults where new ducts are to be terminated or where new cables are to be installed, provide cable supports and grounding as required for a neat and workmanlike installation with all cables properly arranged and supported. Support cable splices in underground structures by racks, leaving top space open for future cables, except as otherwise indicated for existing installations. Provide one spare three-insulator rack arm for each cable rack in each underground structure. Provide additional cable racks in each existing underground structure through which new cable is run. END OF SUB-SECTION r W:k200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—Specs_Jun2010110.16402 Underground Electrical Work.doc 6/14/2010 ar WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16450 Electrical Grounding Page 1 of 2 oft SUB-SECTION 10.16450 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCLUDES A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Section 10.16010 become a part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. B. Work Included- Furnish all labor, material, equipment, tools and services necessary + for the installation, connection and testing of all grounding as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARD A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B228 Copper Clad Steel Conductors Specification 2. D178 Specifications for Rubber Insulating Matting B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electric Code (NEC) C. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA): 1. ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Equipment for Power Systems .K 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The grounding systems shall consist of the ground rods, grounding conductors, ground bus, ground fittings and clamps as shown on the Drawings. 2.02 SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Ground Rods- Ground rods shall be cone pointed copper clad Grade 40 HS steel rods conforming to ASTM B228. The welded copper encased steel rod shall have a conductivity of not less than 27 percent of pure copper. Rods shall be not less than 3/-inch in diameter and 8 feet long, unless otherwise indicated. Rods longer than err 8 feet shall be made up of 8-foot units joined together with threaded couplings. The manufacturer's trademark shall be stamped near the top. ,fel W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100k—Specs_Jun2010110.16450ElectdcalGrounding.DOC 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16450 Electrical Grounding Page 2 of 2 B. Ground Conductors: Buried conductors shall be medium-hard drawn bare copper; other conductors shall be soft drawn copper. Sizes over No. 6 AWG shall be stranded. Coat all ground connections except the exothermic welds with electrical joint compound, non-petroleum type, UL listed for copper and aluminum applications. C. Ground Connections: Connection to ground rods and buried connections shall be by exothermic weld. Lugs for attachment of cables to steel enclosures shall be of the binding post type with a 1/2-13NC stud. Each post shall accommodate cables from #4 AWG to #2/0 AWG. D. Ground Rod Boxes: Boxes shall be a 9-inch-diameter precast concrete unit with hot-dip galvanized traffic covers. Units shall be 12 inches deep. Covers shall be embossed with the wording "Ground Rod." E. Ground Bus: Ground bus shall be a high conductivity copper alloy strap measuring 3/16-inch by 3/4-inch and of lengths as shown on the Drawings. Bus shall be predrilled and tapped to accept 8-32 brass machine screws on 12-inch centers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Ground all equipment for which a ground connection is required per NEC whether or not the ground connection is specifically shown on the Drawings. B. Provide a ground rod box for each ground rod so as to permit ready access for the connection and/or removal of any pressure connectors to facilitate testing. C. Where ground rods must be driven to depths over 8 feet, increase rod diameter used sufficiently to prevent the rod from bending or being damaged. D. Bond metallic water piping at its entrance into each building. Ground separately derived electrical system neutrals to the metallic water piping in addition to the system driven ground, per NEC requirements. E. Provide a ground wire in every conduit carrying a circuit of over 150 volts to ground. F. Effectively bond structural steel for buildings to the grounding system using exothermic welds. 3.02 TESTING A. Conduct ground resistance tests using a ground megohmmeter with a scale reading of 25 ohms maximum. B. Test methods shall conform to NETA Standard ATS using the three-electrode method. Conduct tests only after a period of not less than 48 hours of dry weather. C. Furnish to the Engineer a test report with recorded data of each ground rod location. END OF SUB-SECTION W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton S[onegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16450 Electrical Grounding.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16460 Dry Type Transformers Page 1 of 2 r SUB-SECTION 10.16460 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS it PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCUDES A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Section 10.16010 become a part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. 70 National Electrical Code +rr 2. C2 National Electrical Safety Code B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. ST 20 Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's name and data as required: 1. Nameplate Data: a. KVA rating. b. Nominal primary voltage. c. Tap voltages. d. Nominal secondary voltage. e. Percent impedance. f. Weight. g. Physical dimensions and mounting requirements. 2. Single Submittal:A single complete submittal is required for all products covered by this Sub-Section. 1.04 FACTORY TESTING A. Tests on transformers shall include the manufacturer's standard tests, including winding resistance, ratio, polarity, phase relation, no-load loss, impedance, full load losses, and dielectric tests. Certified copies shall show compliance with all referenced standards. 1.05 LOCATIONS A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16010 for definitions of types of locations. �r r y W:1200810897003—City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16460 Dry Type Transformers.DOC 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16460 Dry Type Transformers Page 2 of 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS A. General Purpose: Transformers for supplying lighting and small power loads shall be dry type, energy efficient, two winding, 60 Hz, copper windings, temperature rise not exceeding 80°C under full load in an ambient of 40°C with Class H, 220°C insulation. Capacity ratings and voltages shall be as shown on the Drawings. Transformers shall comply with all applicable provisions of NEMA Standard ST20 and shall have NEMA Standard taps. Transformers shall be indoor type with sound levels 5 dB below NEMA Standard. Terminal compartment shall have a temperature rise not to exceed 35°C. PART 3 - EXECUTION �r 3.01 TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION A. Transformers shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings. B. Transformers shall be connected with flexible, liquidtight flexible metallic conduit to prevent the transmission of sound through the conduit system. Potted non- ventilated types below 30 KVA shall be installed on resilient vibration-isolating mountings. C. Transformer grounding shall be sized in accordance with NEC requirements for separately derived systems and shall be connected to the nearest cold water pipe or, if available, structural steel member. Ground rod and connections shall be as detailed in Sub-Section 10.16450. Provide conduit and wire for both the ground rod and cold water pipe or structural steel member connections. D. Lace secondary conductors to resist short circuit forces. Follow manufacturer's +r recommendations. 3.02 FIELD TESTS A. Test per NETA. Submit results for review. END OF SUB-SECTION W:12008k0897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngOesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.l6460 Dry Type TransformersDOC 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16500 Lighting Page 1 of 3 + SUB-SECTION 10.16500 LIGHTING r. PART 1 - GENERAL `~ 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCLUDES A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Section 10.16010 become a part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. B. Work Included: Provide a lighting system complete, including fixtures, lamps, �. standards, bases, hangers, reflectors, glassware, lenses, auxiliary equipment, ballasts, sockets, and photoelectric cells. r 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Federal Regulations 1. Title 21 Performance Standards for Light Emitting Products CFR 1040 B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. 57 Electric Lighting Fixtures 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the submittal requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. +� B. Submit photometric curves for each fixture configuration proposed. Substitutions will not be considered unless the photometric distribution curve indicates the proposed fixture is equal to or exceeds the specified luminaire. arr C. Submit shop drawings showing proposed methods for mounting interior lighting fixtures, which are not attached directly to the ceiling or wall. 1.04 GUARANTEE A. Lamps that fail within 90 days after acceptance by the Owner shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIXTURES rr A. Fixtures shall be of the types, wattages, and voltages shown on the Drawings, comply with UL 57, and be UL classified and labeled for intended use. err B. Luminaire wire, and the current carrying capacity thereof, shall be in accordance with the NEC. W:k200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.l6500 Lighfing.doc 6114(2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16500 Lighting Page 2 of 3 C. Luminaires and lighting equipment shall be delivered to the project site complete, with suspension accessories, aircraft cable, stems, canopies, hickeys, castings, sockets, holders, ballasts, diffusers, louvers, frames, recessing boxes, and related items, including supports and braces. 2.02 BALLASTS A. Fluorescent lamp ballasts: Provide electronic ballasts. Ballasts shall be Class "P" rated, and bear the UL label. Ballasts shall be General Electric UltraMax; Advance Optanium; or equal. B. Metal Halide Ballasts: Provide electronic ballasts. Ballasts shall be Class "P" rated, and bear the UL label. Ballasts shall be Advance eVision; GE Model 11210; or equal. C. Ballasts producing excessive noise (above 36 dB) or vibration will be rejected and shall be replaced at no expense to the Owner. 2.03 LAMPS A. General: Lamps shall be new at the time of acceptance and shall be General Electric; Westinghouse; or equal. B. Fluorescent lamps shall be the rapid start type, high efficiency, 3,500 Kelvin in color. C. Metal halide lamps shall conform to 21 CFR 1040.30. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. All fixtures and luminaires shall be clean and lamps shall be operable at the arri time of acceptance. 2. Install luminaires in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, complete with lamps, ready for operation as indicated. W 3. Align, mount, and level the luminaires uniformly. 4. Avoid interference with and provide clearance for equipment. Where an indicated position conflicts with equipment locations, change the location of the luminaire by the minimum distance necessary. B. Mounting and Supports: 1. Mounting heights shall be as shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise shown, mounting height shall be measured to the centerline of the outlet box for a wall mounted fixture and to the bottom of the fixture for all other types. 2. For suspended luminaires, the mounting heights shall provide clearances between the bottoms of the luminaires and the finished floors as indicated. W:1200810897003_City-ol-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16500 Lighting.doc 6/14/2010 to WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16500 Lighting Page 3 of 3 4V 3. Luminaire supports shall be anchored to the structural slab or structural members as indicated. Supports shall maintain the luminaire positions after relamping and cleaning. 4. Surface mounted fixtures shall be rigidly bracketed from mounting surfaces. Luminaires installed in rows shall have a non-cumulative dimensional alignment tolerance of 1/16-inch. Nipples carrying wiring between luminaires shall be watertight. �. 5. Pendant luminaires shall be provided with 7/32-inch aircraft cable to assure a plumb installation and shall have a minimum 25 degree clear swing from horizontal in all directions. �.r C. Mount fluorescent fixtures level and securely support from the ceiling. Provide earthquake clips for fixtures mounted in suspended ceilings. D. Mount lamp posts and lighting standards plumb and make free of dents or other damage. E. Battery Operated Emergency Lighting Fixtures: 1. Wall mounted at designated height per manufacturer's instructions. 2. Battery disconnect switch to be left in the "off' position until building power is fully operational. w END OF SUB-SECTION trr wo W.1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—Specs Jun2010110.16500 Lighfing.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16920 Motor Control Centers Page 1 of 7 SUB-SECTION 10.16920 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PART 1 - GENERAL .r 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCLUDES A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Section 10.16010 become a part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. B. Work Included: Provide motor control centers (MCCs), complete, as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. ICS 1 General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems 2. ICS 2 Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies 3. ICS 4 Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems 4. ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems B. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA): 1. ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power and Distribution Equipment and Systems C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 845 Motor Control Centers 2. 1449 Second Edition 2007 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors 3. 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters D. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002 - IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits; C62.41.2-2002 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits; and C62.45-2002 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. E. NEC 2008, Article 285 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as specified under "Submittals" in Sub-Section 10.16010 and include the following: a wiring diagram and an elementary control diagram for each unit; an overall connection diagram for each motor control center; a dimensioned outline drawing to scale showing space for conduits, etc.; complete identification of all electrical components in each control center and their interconnections within the motor control center; all connections to external equipment and controls; bus material and ratings; wire marking scheme; W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010\10.16920 Motor Control Centers.DOC 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16920 Motor Control Centers Page 2 of 7 and method of installation to resist seismic forces. Where unit arrangement or wiring deviates in any way from that shown on the Drawings, provide a complete record and explanation of such deviations. C. Regarding the seismic anchorage requirements, submit a sketch or description of the anchorage system. D. Arrange submissions in a logical manner and use the device abbreviation identifications and equipment names as shown on the Drawings, in order to expedite and facilitate review by the Engineer. E. Spare Parts List: Submit a spare parts list showing recommended parts and quantities as well as complete ordering information for replacement components. Provide instruction books for special control devices and special equipment installed in each control center. Submit these to the Engineer prior to installation of the equipment. F. Manuals: Provide manuals as specified in Sub-Section 10.16010. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER A. General: Each motor control center shall be a free-standing, completely metal enclosed, dead front, dead rear, grouped motor control center arranged as shown on the Drawings. The motor control center shall be suitable for use on a 480Y/277-Vac, 3-phase, 4-wire radial system grounded at the supply, with a short circuit capacity of up to 42,000 amperes without a neutral conductor in the motor control center. The motor control center shall conform to all applicable requirements of current NEMA Standards ICS 1 and ICS 2 and be UL listed. Each MCC section shall bear the UL label. Equipment shall be assembled into standardized drawout units. The motor control center shall be NEMA Class I, Type B construction. B. Structure and Arrangement: ow 1. The motor control center shall consist of NEMA 1 vertical freestanding sections, each at least 20 inches wide, 20 inches deep and 90 inches high, and containing not more than six space units. A space unit shall be the space required for a Size 1 combination starter together with associated control transformer. The motor control center shall be suitable for floor mounting against a wall. Provide a horizontal wireway 6 inches high at the bottom of the motor control center, and a vertical wireway 4 inches wide in each 20-inch-wide structure. Coordinate horizontal wireway dimensions with that of the housekeeping concrete pad (see Part 3) to ensure conformance with the NEC 6' 7" rule (NEC 404.8). 2. Each cubicle shall have an individual door with concealed hinges. Doors shall be part of the structure, shall be readily interchangeable, and shall be interlocked so that the unit power is off before the door can be opened; provide door hinges on the side of the cubicle, which ensures compliance with the 30-inch rule in NEC Paragraph 110.26. In addition, each unit shall be padlockable in the off position and in the disconnected position. do W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.16920 Motor Control Centers.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16920 so Motor Control Centers Page 3 of 7 3. All components shall be within individual control cubicles, except as noted. Control components shall be as specified in Sub-Section 10.16955. 4. "Future" spaces shall be cubicles arranged for future addition of the door and unit of the size indicated on the Drawings. The vertical bus shall extend to but not be exposed within "future" spaces. 5. Arrangement and grouping of cubicles shall be substantially as shown on the Drawings. Avoid deviations from the arrangement shown, if possible; otherwise, , submit changes to the Engineer for review. Provide for future extension of each motor control center as shown on the Drawings. The number of vertical freestanding sections shown on the Drawings is the minimum required. If additional sections are needed to house all equipment, including relays and timers, indicated to be located within the motor control center: a. Provide such sections at no additional cost to the Owner, and b. Provide a sufficient number of additional sections such that the total number of future spaces is at least the number shown on the Drawings or 15 percent of the total motor control center size, whichever is smaller. C. Buses: 1. Each motor control section shall have a main 3-phase, 3-wire, horizontal insulated bus rated as shown on the Drawings. Each vertical section shall have , a rigid vertical insulated bus rated not less than 400 amperes and extending to all space units; the bus in vertical sections containing either main lugs or main breakers shall have the same ratings as the horizontal bus. Brace buses for 42,000 amperes symmetrical. 2. Provide each motor control center with a ground bus not smaller than 1/4-square inch in cross sectional area, copper equivalent, extending to all sections. Provide a solderless connector for copper cable at each end of each ground bus, sized for the grounding conductor shown on the Drawings. All solderless connectors shall be NEMA Standard. 3. All phase and ground buses shall be of copper with silverplated joints and connections. All terminal lugs shall be suitable for copper conductors. D. Wiring: rAi 1. All wiring entirely within each motor control center shall be completely factory installed and shall be thermoplastic machine tool wiring rated 600 volts. 2. Provide a control terminal block with identified terminals in each cubicle for it external control wiring associated with that cubicle. Terminal blocks, in cubicles and on doors, shall be as specified elsewhere herein under Motor Control Units. Terminal blocks shall be rated 600 Vac and at least 30 amps. These shall be either the box lug type or isolating switch type, as required. Any circuit within the unit that can be energized when the unit power is off shall have isolating switch type terminals. Provide terminals for all external connections as shown on the Drawings, and, in addition, at least 15 percent spare terminals. In no case shall there be less than six spare terminals. Permanently identify each terminal with the same number as the wire being terminated. Terminal blocks shall conform to NEMA ICS4 and shall be Allen-Bradley 1492 or equal. 3. Connections of wiring from devices on fixed surfaces to door-mounted devices shall have hinge loops of extra flexible wires securely fastened at each end to permit opening and closing the door without "working" the terminations. 4. Each control or feeder unit in the motor control sections shall be connected to the vertical bus by means of self-aligning, free-floating, silverplated copper alloy, plug-in pressure stab units. All components shall be mounted on a W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16920 Motor Control Centers.DOC 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16920 Motor Control Centers Page 4 of 7 removable pan secured by quick opening fasteners and aligned by means of guide rails. Units shall be interchangeable. �. E. Motor Control Units: 1. General: Each Full Voltage Non-Reversing unit shall consist of a motor circuit protector and a magnetic starter. Each Full Voltage Reversing unit shall consist of a motor circuit protector and two magnetic starters. The combination shall have an interrupting rating of not less than 65,000 amperes symmetrical at 480 Vac. Each unit shall have a control terminal board and other components as shown on the Drawings. 2. Motor circuit protector shall be molded case quick-make, quick-break with magnetic trip only. The motor circuit protector shall be rated 600 Vac with adjustable trip settings and interrupting rating of not less than 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. The motor circuit protector shall have the rating and trip setting as shown on the Drawings and shall be UL listed. Motor circuit protector shall be Cutler Hammer HMCP; General Electric; or equal. 3. Starters shall be magnetic air-break type complying with NEMA Standards, no smaller than Size 1, each with three ambient compensated type overload elements with externally operable manual reset. Overload relays shall have a w field adjustable trip of 85 percent to 115 percent of heater rating. Size the overload heaters to protect the motor. For submersible motors, provide fast- acting overload relays if required by the motor manufacturer. Provide two spare auxiliary contacts, one normally open and one normally closed. 4. Control power transformers shall be dry type machine tool transformers. Sizes shall be as required for the inrush and continuous current requirements of the circuits. Primary windings shall be fused in both phases. Secondaries shall be fused and grounded. 5. Pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights, control relays, elapsed time meters, and timing relays shall be as specified in Sub-Section 10.16955. .r. F. Solid State Soft Starters: 1. Requirements for Motor Control Units apply for soft starters along with the following requirements. 2. An integral bypass contactor shall be employed after the controller has brought the motor to full speed. err 3. Soft starters shall provide selectable current limit, dual ramp, and full voltage in one unit. Ramp up and down shall be selectable up to at least 60 seconds ramp time. 4. Soft starters shall provide measurement of amps, volts, kW, kWh, elapsed time, a resettable starts counter, power factor, and motor thermal capacity usage. 5. The soft start interface shall allow display and programming of the controller .. parameters and troubleshooting of system faults. G. Main and feeder circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic and of the size shown on the Drawings. Interrupting rating shall be at least 42,000 amperes symmetrical at 480 Vac. H. Nameplates and Identification: 1. Provide each motor control center with manufacturer's nameplate, which indicates voltage, phases, number of wires, frequency, and bus ratings. 2. Provide each motor control center with an identifying nameplate inscribed as 1AW shown on the Drawings. 40 W:k200810B97003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesignl10.01-SpecsY100%Specs_Jun2010110.16920MotorControlCenters.DOC 6/1412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16920 Motor Control Centers Page 5 of 7 3. On each cubicle door in each control center, provide an identifying nameplate err inscribed as shown on the Drawings. 4. In those cases where integral legend plates cannot be used, install additional special nameplates on doors to identify selector switches, pushbuttons, or other devices, as required by the Drawings or as specified herein. All integral legend plates shall be large size and shall be uniform for all control centers. 5. Identify all internal wiring using a system consistent with the terminal identification system. Each wire at each terminal shall have attached to it permanent means of identification made of moisture resistant non-fading material. Heat shrinkable sleeve type labels shall be used. 1. Finish: Paint finish shall be ANSI. J. Manufacturer: 1. The motor control center shall be standard catalog equipment modified as shown on the Drawings or specified herein as normally manufactured by the specified manufacturer. 2. The motor control center shall be as manufactured by Eaton; Allen-Bradley; or equal. All shall be factory assembled, except for shipping splits. 2.02 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. SPD shall be Listed in accordance with UL 1449 Second Edition 2007 and UL 1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters. B. SPD shall be Component Recognized in accordance with UL 1449 Second Edition, at the standard's highest short circuit current rating (SCCR) of 200 kA. . C. SPD shall be tested with the ANSI/IEEE Category C High exposure waveform (20kV-1.2/500s, 10kA-8/200s). D. SPD shall provide suppression for all modes of protection: L-N, L-G, and N-G in WYE systems. E. The manufacturer of the SPD shall be the same as the manufacturer of the service entrance and distribution equipment in which the devices are installed and shipped. twr Also, this distribution equipment shall be fully tested and certified to the following UL standards: 1. UL 67 = Panelboards 2. UL 845 = Motor Control Centers 3. UL 857 = Busway 4. UL 891 = Switchboards 5. UL 1558 = Low Voltage Switchgear. 2.03 SPD RATINGS A. Minimum surge current rating shall be 160 kA per phase (80 kA per mode) for service entrance and 80 kA per phase (40 kA per mode) for distribution applications. W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.16920MotorControlCenters.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16920 Motor Control Centers Page 6 of 7 r B. UL 1449 clamping voltage must not exceed the following: VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G 240/120 800/400V 800/400V 400V 208Y/120 400V 400V 400V 480Y/277 800V 800V 800V C. Pulse life test: Capable of protecting against and surviving 5000 ANSI/IEEE Category C High transients without failure or degradation of clamping voltage by more than 10%. D. SPD shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of not less than 115% of nominal RMS voltage. E. SPD shall be constructed of one self-contained suppression module per phase. F. Visible indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be provided. The + ► indicator lights shall indicate which phase as well as which module is fully operable. The status of each SPD module shall be monitored on the front cover of the enclosure as well as on the module. A push-to-test button shall be provided to test each phase indicator. Push-to-test button shall activate a state change of dry contacts for testing purposes. G. SPD shall be equipped with an audible alarm which shall activate when any one of �w the surge current modules has reached an end-of-life condition. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm. The switches and alarm shall be located on the front cover of the enclosure. rrr H. SPD shall be equipped with dry contacts (normally open or normally closed) to allow connection to a remote monitor or other system. The output of the dry contacts shall indicate an end-of-life condition for the complete SPD or module. I. SPD shall be equipped with dry contacts (normally open or normally closed) to allow �• connection to a remote monitor or other system. The output of the dry contacts shall indicate that the SPD has operated to protect the equipment from a surge. J. Terminals shall be provided for necessary power and ground connections. K. Manufacturers: Square D, Surgelogic IMA Series, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install each motor control center level and plumb, and secure to a 3-inch-high housekeeping concrete pad in conformance with the seismic mounting requirements. Doors shall swing freely and close tightly. B. Carefully repair any damage to the structure, components or finish to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Clean all nameplates. `r Ifll W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton Slonegate110-EngDesign11001-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.l6920MotorControlCenters.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16920 Motor Control Centers Page 7 of 7 C. Exercise care at all times after installation of motor control center to keep foreign matter, dust, dirt, debris, and moisture out of the control center. D. Lace incoming and outgoing power conductors to resist short circuit forces. .r+ Follow manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 FIELD TEST rrr A. Test the motor control center per NETA. END OF SUB-SECTION it W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.16920MotorControlCenters.DOC 6/14/2010 as WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16955 Control Devices Page 1 of 4 +�• SUB-SECTION 10.16955 CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Sub-Section 10.16010 become a part of this Sub-Section as if repeated herein. B. Work Included: Furnish and install all control devices complete, including, as +rr► applicable, enclosures, engraved escutcheons or nameplates, gaskets, lenses, lamps and mounting provisions. C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Sub-Section 10.16920: Motor Control Centers 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a" 1. ICS1 General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems 2. ICS2 Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies 3. ICS6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All control devices shall conform to applicable provisions of NEMA Standards ICS1 and ICS2. 2.02 CONTROL AND TIMER RELAYS A. General: Relays shall be provided as necessary to perform switching functions " required of control panels and other control circuits. Relays shall be of the following types (abbreviations in parentheses correspond to labels on the Drawings): 1. Relays (CR): a. Provide machine tool relays for the following applications: 1) All relays driving 120 Vac motor starters up to and including Size 3. 2) All relays driving non-motor loads up to 6 Amps (or 720 VA). b. Provide machine tool type relays with convertible contacts rated 10 Amps continuous with NEMA Rating Designation A600 for AC applications and N600 for DC applications. Coils shall be designed for continuous duty and shall have the voltage rating indicated on the Drawings. Irl W:12008\0897003_CO-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16955 Control Devices.DOC 611412010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16955 Control Devices Page 2 of 4 c. Relays shall be the magnetically held type unless designated otherwise on .r the Drawings. For each relay provide one spare Form C contact over and above the number indicated on the Drawings. In addition, for latching relays, provide coil clearing contacts as necessary. d. Manufacturer: Square D, Class 8501, Type X; General Electric CR120B-, or equal. 2. General Purpose Control (GR) Relays (plug-in): a. Provide plug-in style 2-, 3-, or 4-pole enclosed relays with integral neon or LED indicators for the following applications: 1) Relay logic (relays driving other relays, including machine tool relays) operating at voltages up to 120 Vac. at 2) Control power switching. 3) All relays driving non-motor loads up to 2 amps (240 VA) at 120 Vac. b. Provide relay sockets rated for 10 Amps, 240 Vac with screw-type barriered terminals. c. Manufacturer: Square D, Class 8501, Type R; Allen-Bradley Bulletin 700; or equal. + 3. Timing Relays (TR) and (TD): Time Delay Relays (TD): Relay shall be solid- state with multi-range programmable settings. The relays shall include a calibrated front dial and LED indicator and shall be complete with socket. Relays shall be "on delay" or"off delay" type as indicated on the Drawings. Provide an additional form C contact over and above the number indicated on the Drawings. Relay contacts shall be rated 10 Amps, 120 Vac. Relays shall be ATC Type 328; Idec Type RTEL; or equal. 4. General Requirements: a. Provide relays rated for 1 million operations at 10 Amp, 120 Vac, at power factor of 0.2. b. Where timing relays or control relays require additional contacts, provide auxiliary control relays, properly sized for the application as described previously in this Sub-Section. 2.03 CONTROL PANEL ACCESSORIES .�i A. Relays, timers and other internally mounted equipment shall be of the types specified in other Sub-Sections of these Specifications. B. Panel face mounted equipment shall be of the types specified in other Sub-Sections of these Specifications. C. Standards: All control devices shall conform to applicable provisions of NEMA Standards ICS 1 and ICS 2. wr D. Pushbuttons, Selector Switches, and Pilot Lights: Shall be heavy-duty oiltight units; each unit shall have an engraved escutcheon plate unless nameplates are indicated on the Drawings or are necessary because of length of identification. Pushbuttons and selector switches shall have contacts rated 10 Amps continuous at 300 Vac, Rating Designation A600 in conformance with NEMA ICS 2. Selector switches shall have multiple contact blocks ganged together and shall be expandable for additional contact blocks. W:12 00 810 8 9 7 003_City-of-Renton_Stonegatell0-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.16955 Control Devices.DOC 6/1 412 01 0 VIM WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16955 Control Devices Page 3 of 4 E. Multiposition control switches shall have rotary action, round knurled handle and the number of positions and stages shown on the Drawings. They shall be suitable for panel mounting. Each position shall have a positive detent. Contacts shall have a continuous current rating of 10 Amps at 300 Vac. Switches shall have integral indicator. F. Colors and Descriptions: 1. Indicating Lamps: Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, the following color code and inscriptions shall be followed for the lenses of all indicating lights. Indicating Lamp Inscription Color ON/START Green OFF/STOP Red CLOSED Red LOW Amber FAIL Amber HIGH Amber OPEN Green POWER ON White 2. Lettering shall be black on white and amber lenses. Lettering shall be white on red and green lenses. 3. Pushbuttons: Follow color-coding for indicating lamp above. 4. All unused or non-inscribed buttons shall be black. Lettering shall be black on white and yellow buttons. Lettering shall be white on black, red, and green buttons. + G. Panel Lights and Receptacles: Panels shall be internally lighted by fluorescent lamps, provided with guards and a toggle switch located convenient to each access door. One duplex GFI type receptacle shall be provided in each panel section. The rw lights and receptacles shall be wired to outgoing terminal blocks for 120 Vac, 60 Hz, single-phase supply. H. Nameplates: Unless specified otherwise in the Drawings, nameplates shall be black lamacoid with minimum 3/16-inch-high white letters for major area titles, 5/32-inch for component titles, and 1/8-inch for subtitles, and shall be fastened with a ■r permanent but dissolvable adhesive or by screws. 2.04 ELAPSED TIME METERS (ETM) A. Elapsed time meters shall be of the synchronous motor-driven type having a minimum of six (6) decimal digits where the least significant digit shall represent tenths (1/10ths) of hours. Unless specified otherwise, they shall not be equipped with a reset button. They shall be for panel mounting with a square bezel approximately 2-1/2 inches on a side. Meter voltage shall be not more than 120 Vac for meters mounted in instrumentation panels. Elapsed time meters shall + be Yokogawa Type 240; or equal. .r W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesignl10.01-Specs1100-Specs_Jun2010110.16955 Control Devices.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.16955 Control Devices Page 4 of 4 2.05 DOOR INTRUSION SWITCHES A. Magnetic switches shall be of the type customarily used for security work. The magnetic switches shall be UL listed and suitable for use on steel doors. Use one • switch for single doors and two switches for double doors. B. Manufacturer: GE Sensors 2507A or equal. 2.06 HATCH INTRUSION SWITCHES tier A. Hatch switches shall be Allen-Bradley 802MC with actuating lever, or equal. B. Hatch switches shall be NEMA 4X rated. r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Identify all control devices with engraved plastic nameplates or escutcheons, as applicable. Install control devices as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.02 INTRUSION SWITCHES A. Install intrusion switches as recommended by the manufacturer, and in the locations as shown on the Drawings. END OF SUB-SECTION ww W:1200810897003—City-ot-Renton—Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010t10.16955 Control Devices.DOC 6/14/2010 to WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17010 Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements Page 1 of 12 SUB-SECTION 10.17010 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS +rr PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: 1. Provide all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and be responsible for all labor required to complete the installation, startup, and operational testing of a complete and operable Instrumentation and Control (I&C) System as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 2. Provide all the necessary equipment components and interconnections along with the services of manufacturers' engineering representatives necessary to r ensure that the Owner receives a completely integrated and operational I&C System as herein specified. 3. Provide all terminations for wiring at field-mounted instruments, equipment enclosures, alarm, and status contacts. 4. Install the Main Control Panel/RTU to be provided by the Owner. All wiring required for the Main Control Panel/RTU will be terminated in the Main Control Panel/RTU by the Owner. 5. Provide and install a Yagi antenna on the control building. B. Work Specified in Other Divisions: 1. Process piping other mechanical work and equipment as specified in Sections 10.11 or 10.15. 2. Instruments and controls that are provided as part of a package system. 3. Section 16 work, including all instrumentation and controls conduit. Refer to Section 16 Specifications for specific requirements for wire, conduit, grounding, and other electrical equipment. nr 4. Final control elements as specified in Section 10.15. 5. General mechanical requirements as specified in Section 10.15. C. Main Control Panel/RTU- 1. Design and supply for the Main Control Panel/RTU will be provided by Owner. 2. Coordinate field testing and verification with the Engineer and the Owner. .r D. Software Development: 1. Programming for the Main Control Panel/RTU will be provided by the Owner. 2. Coordinate field testing and verification with the Engineer and the Owner. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS x A. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): 1,. Y14.15a Drafting Practice 2. C62.1 Surge Arresters W:1200810897003 City-of-Renlon_Stonegate110-Eng Des ign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun20lO110,17010Instrumentabon and Controls General Requirements Revision.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17010 Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements Page 2 of 12 B. Instrumentation Society of America (ISA): ► 1. S5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams 2. S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves 1.03 I&C SUBCONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS .r A. The Prime Contractor shall employ an I&C Subcontractor who has demonstrated experience in purchasing, calibrating, fabricating, installing and testing the Instrumentation and Control (I&C) products listed in this Specification Sub-Section. B. The I&C Subcontractor shall have been regularly engaged for a period greater than five years in performing all aspects of the type of work specified in this Sub-Section and shown on the Drawings and must be qualified as specified below. 1.04 I&C SYSTEM INTEGRATION A. General: Entire system installation including calibration, verification, startup, operation testing, and training shall be performed by qualified personnel, possessing all the necessary skills and equipment, and who have had experience performing similar installations. Instrumentation and control systems drawings are diagrammatic only; it is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain technical data, determine performance requirements, develop instrumentation detail installation designs, and coordinate the selection of specified equipment with Contractor supplied equipment to meet the design conditions stated. B. System Responsibilities: 1. Ensure that all components of the instrumentation system, including primary measuring, indicating, transmitting, receiving, recording, totalizing, controlling, and alarming devices, and all appurtenances are completely compatible and shall function as outlined. 2. Furnish and install such additional equipment, accessories, etc., as are necessary to meet these objectives at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Ensure that all components of the instrumentation system, including equipment specified under other Sections, are completely compatible and function properly as a system. Provide such additional equipment, accessories, etc., as trr are necessary to meet these objectives at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. For control components, devices, and systems specified in Sections 10.11, 10.15, 10.16, and 10.17, or shown on the Drawings. a. Provide technical advice to mechanical and electrical subcontractors as necessary regarding their installation of instruments. b. Verify the correctness of installation of all instruments. c. Verify that the proper type, size, and number of control wires with their conduits are provided. d. Verify that the proper type, size, and number of pneumatic tubes with their conduits are provided. e. Verify that proper electric power circuits provided for all components and systems. f. Resolve all manufacturer's installation discrepancies between requirements and the detail requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. m► WA2008\0897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesignh0.01-Specs\100%_Specs Jun2010110.17010Instrumentabon and Controls General Requirements Revision.DOC 6/16/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17010 Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements Page 3 of 12 aw g. Supervise final signal connections, both electric and pneumatic, to all process instrumentation and control equipment. h. Adjust, startup, and test all process instrumentation and control equipment. go i. Provide specified documentation and training. 5. While the Drawings provide sufficient information to establish the form and function of the systems and their relationships, the responsibility for system integration and performance rests solely with the Contractor. 6. Site and Instrument Inspection: Inspect site for conformance to Drawings, paying special attention to space allocation and dimensions shown or required on Drawings. Inspect each instrument and piece of equipment for damage, defects, completeness, and correct operation before installing. 7. This list is to serve as a guide and not intended to be a comprehensive list of system integration responsibilities. 1.05 SUBMITTALS .r A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings (diagrams) for review in complete bound sets indexed by Specification number, with exterior tabs marked by subject. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for each item for which shop drawings are not required. Manufacturer's catalog cuts, specifications or data sheets shall be clearly marked to delineate the options or styles to be furnished. Show dimensions, physical configurations, methods of connecting instruments together, mounting details, and wiring schematics. Drawings shall be complete with device tag numbers, wire numbers and terminal board numbers. Submit fabrication details, nameplate legends, and control panel. internal wiring and piping schematic drawings. Submit panel graphic drawings where applicable. Include material lists and/or bills of material. 1. Loop Diagrams: a. Submit Instrument Loop Diagrams per ISA S5.4 to provide necessary + detail for connection of analog instrument and control system components including those components specified in other sub-sections of these Specifications. �r b. Provide with the Instrument Loop Diagrams all instrument model numbers, ranges, set points, sizes, process fluids, specification reference numbers, and all other information listed as "desirable and optional items of information" per ISA S5.4. 2. Interconnection Diagrams: a. Submit point-to-point type interconnection diagrams conforming to ANSI Y14.15a. Include each conduit run, with wirefill noted for each run. .r Include electric panel and circuit numbers for all sources of 120 Vac power. Show conduit and wiring interconnections between each control panel, instrument, multiplexer or telemetry unit, motor control center, motor �"' combination starter, valve actuator, and other field-mounted device. Include all equipment and appurtenances provided in this contract regardless of the Section in which it is specified. to b. Add to all diagrams the instrument model numbers, instrument ranges, setpoints, sizes, process fluids, specification reference numbers, and other information listed as "desirable and optional items of information per w ISA S5.4." M W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.17010Instrumentation and Controls General Requirements Revision.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17010 Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements Page 4 of 12 3. Elementary Diagrams: Submit an elementary diagram for control, protection, and monitoring circuits. Elementary diagrams are not required for lighting, communications and those systems clearly defined on the single line diagram. Show all interconnections between power sources, apparatus, and device elements of a particular system or equipment, and all interlocks with other systems in a manner, which fully indicates circuit function and operation. Refer to the Drawings for functional and operational requirements. C. Specification Forms: 1. Submit completed Specification Forms per ISA S20, including those instrumentation and control components directly related to process control, but specified in other Sub-Sections of these Specifications. 2. Include on each form the assigned tag numbers, manufacturer's part numbers, and device data. More than one tag numbered item may be included on a sheet. D. Record Drawings: Submit a revised set of shop drawings that incorporates all change orders and modifications made during performance of the work. In addition to updated loop diagrams, interconnect diagrams, and elementary diagrams, submit other drawings as necessary to depict the "as-built" condition of equipment. Include all installed field and panel conduit and piping/tubing runs and routing, tray systems, supports, mounting details, interconnection diagrams with cable, wire, tube, and termination numbers. Coordinate all drawings with the conductor identification requirements in Sub-Sections 10.16120 and 10.16124. Submit a copy of CAD- produced drawings on magnetic media in AutoCAD DWG format. aid E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals, including Instruction Manuals and Part Lists, for equipment provided under Section 10.17. Obtain data from manufacturers, and format and bind. 1. Contents: Include in manuals not less than the following information, as applicable, for each instrument, equipment, subsystem and/or control loop: a. General, introduction and overall description, purpose, functions, simplified theory of operations, etc. b. Specifications (including equipment specification data sheet as described above under Shop Drawings), sufficiently detailed for reordering exact duplicates of the original items. c. Installation instructions, procedures, sequences, tolerances, and precautions. d. Operational procedures. r e. Shutdown procedures. f. Maintenance, calibration, and repair instructions. g. Parts list and a list of manufacturer recommended spare parts for each item specified. Refer to other sections of these Specifications. h. Calibration curves, rating tables, and any other data showing the relationship of the variable inputs and the calibrated output of all measuring devices and controlled equipment. i. Include actual calibration sheet for all instruments in the manual. See Paragraph 2.13. rt W 1200810897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate{10-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%—Specs Jun2010110.17010Instrumentation and Controls General Requirements Revision.DOC 6/14/2010 40 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17010 Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements Page 5 of 12 wr 2. Format: a. Use drawings and pictorials to illustrate the text to the extent necessary to insure a clear, concise presentation. If manuals have been written to cover ,,,,, a family of similar instruments or equipment, strike out inapplicable information in a neat fashion or emphasize applicable portion by heavily weighted arrows, circles or boxes; whichever provides the clearest and ow neatest presentation. b. Group manuals by system control panels, including field instrumentation connected or associated with the panel. Where identical instruments are used in more than one control loop or subsystem, include only one instruction manual, per panel grouping; however, an index by tag number for all instruments shall identify its location in that manual. c. Provide control loop and/or subsystem operational descriptions to identify the function of each instrument and its relation to the other instruments in the loop. 3. Binding: Bind each manual in a cover which indicates the panel or process area err to which it applies manufacturer's name, local address and telephone number, and year of purchase. Punch and bind manuals. Include system name and subcontractor's name on binding. r. F. Special Tools and Accessories: Submit special tools, instruments, and accessories for maintaining instruments and equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment as specified elsewhere herein. Also, furnish special lifting and handling devices for equipment requiring such devices. G. Test Reports: Submit the following test reports as described herein: 1. Instrument Calibration Data Sheets (Paragraph 2.11) 2. Instrument Verification Report (Paragraph 3.07.6) 3. Final Operational Testing (Paragraph 3.07.C). H. Demonstration and Final Operation Test Plan and Results: Submit a document that outlines all procedures to be used in final operational testing of instrument and control systems. Include a description of each system, the scope of testing, test methods and materials, testing instruments and recorders, a list of functional parameters to be recorded on each item, and Shop Drawings showing temporary bypasses, jumpers, and devices. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE r. A. Standard of Quality: The Contractor shall provide equipment of the types and sizes specified which has been demonstrated to operate successfully. Provide equipment which is new and of recent proven design. 1.07 INSPECTIONS aw A. The Engineer may inspect the fabricated equipment at the factory before shipment to job site. Provide the Engineer with sufficient prior notice so that an inspection can be arranged at the factory. ,rrr B. Inspection of the equipment at the factory by the Engineer will be made after the manufacturer has performed satisfactory checks, adjustments, tests, and « operations. to W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegale110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010110.170101nstrumentation and Controls General Requirements Revision.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17010 Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements Page 6 of 12 C. Favorable review of the equipment at the factory only allows the manufacturer to ship the equipment to the project site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation and satisfactory startup operation of the equipment to the N satisfaction of the manufacturer and the Engineer. 1.08 DRAWINGS A. Drawings: The Instrumentation Drawings are diagrammatic; exact locations of instrumentation products shall be determined in the field in consultation with the Engineer. Except where special details are used to illustrate the method of installation of a particular piece or type of equipment or material, the requirements or descriptions in this Specification shall take precedence in the event of conflict. 1. Locations of equipment, inserts, anchors, motors, panels, pull boxes, manholes, conduits, stub-ups, fittings, power and convenience outlets, and ground wells are approximate unless dimensioned; verify locations with the Engineer prior to installation. Field verify scaled dimensions on Drawings. 2. Review the Drawings and Specification Sections of other trades and perform the instrumentation work that will be required for the installations. 3. Should there be a need to deviate from the Instrumentation Drawings and Specifications, submit written details and reasons for all changes to the Engineer for review and comment. Deviations will only be allowed if they are approved by Engineer. 1.09 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Box, crate, or otherwise enclose and protect instruments and equipment during shipment, handling, and storage. Keep all equipment dry and covered from exposure to weather, moisture, corrosive liquids and gases or any element, which could degrade the equipment. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Notify the Engineer in writing in the event that any equipment or material is damaged. Obtain prior favorable review by the Engineer before making repairs to damaged products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS „rr 2.01 MATERIALS AND STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS A. Provide instruments, equipment, and materials suitable for service conditions and meeting standard specifications such as ANSI, ASTM, ISA, and SAMA. The intent of this Specification is to secure instruments and equipment of a uniform quality and alill manufacture throughout the plant. All instruments in the plant of the same type shall be made by the same manufacturer. 2.02 NAMEPLATES aI A. For each piece of equipment, provide a manufacturer's nameplate showing his name, location, the pertinent ratings, and the model designation. W:1200810897003_Co-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2010Ii0.17010Instrumentation and Controls General Requirements Revision.DOC 6114/2010 14 an WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17010 Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements Page 7 of 12 r B. Identify each piece of equipment and related controls with a rigid laminated engraved phenolic nameplate. Engrave nameplates with the inscriptions indicated on the Drawings and, if not so indicated, with the equipment name. Securely fasten aw nameplates in place using two stainless steel screws or, where favorably reviewed by the Engineer, with epoxy cement. Where no inscription is indicated on the Drawings, furnish nameplates with an appropriate inscription furnished by the rrr Engineer upon prior request by the Contractor. C. Each control device, including pushbuttons, control switches, and indicating lights, shall have an integral legend plate or nameplate indicating the device function. to These shall be inscribed as indicated on the Drawings or as favorably reviewed by the Engineer. D. Provide CAUTION or SAFETY nameplates to alert operators of special conditions that may result in faulty equipment operations. Devices containing batteries that must be replaced periodically must be clearly identified. Nameplates are not required if the device senses and displays a low battery warning. 2.03 NAME TAGS r A. All instrumentation and equipment items or systems shall be identified by name tags. Field equipment shall be tagged with the assigned instrumentation tag number listed in the Instrument Index. B. Name tags shall be stainless steel with engraved or stamped black characters of 3/16-inch minimum height. Tags shall be attached to equipment with a tag holder and stainless steel band with a worm screw clamping device. Use 20-gauge stainless steel wire where banding is impractical. For field panels or large equipment cases use stainless steel screws; however, such permanent attachment shall not be on an ordinarily replaceable part. 2.04 FIELD-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. All instrument and control equipment mounted outside of protective structures shall be equipped with suitable surge arresting devices to protect the equipment from damage due to electrical transients induced in the interconnecting lines from lightning discharges or nearby electrical devices. Protective devices used on 120 Vac inputs to field mounted equipment shall be secondary valve surge .r protectors conforming to the requirements of ANSI C62.1. 2.05 EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS A. All equipment shall be rated for normal operating performance with varying operating conditions over the following minimum ranges: 1. Electrical Power: 120 Vac ±10 percent, 60 Hz, unregulated, except where specifically stated otherwise on the Drawings or in the Specifications, or when two-wire, loop-powered devices are specified. 2. Field Instruments: a. a. Outdoor Areas: Ambient Temperature: -10°F to +120°F. Ambient Relative Humidity: 5 percent to 100 percent. rI. Weather: Rain and sleet. W:k20G810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110,01-Specs1100%_Specs_jun2010110.17010Instrumentation and Controls General Requirements Revision.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17010 Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements Page 8 of 12 b. Indoor Unheated Areas: Ambient Temperature: +40°F to +120°F. Ambient Relative Humidity: 5 percent to 95 percent, non-condensing. 2.06 EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS A. Provide equipment and materials suitable for the types of locations in which they ailrt are located as defined under Section 10.16. All equipment specified for field mounting shall be weatherproof and splash proof as a minimum. If electrical or electronic components are contained within the equipment, they shall be housed in NEMA 4X enclosures unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or specific item Specification. 2.07 ANALOG SIGNAL INDICATED UNITS A. For all instruments with local or remote indicators, provide indicators scaled in actual engineering units, i.e., gallons per minute, feet, psi, etc., rather than 0 to 100 percent, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or Instrument Index. 2.08 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION A. Analog: Signal transmission between electric or electronic instruments shall be 4-20 mA and shall operate at 24 VDC. Signal output from all transmitters and .rt controllers shall be current regulated and shall not be affected by changes in load resistance within the unit's rating. Where practical, milliampere signals from the field shall be converted to a voltage signal at the external terminals of each panel, and all instruments within a panel shall be parallel wired. B. Nonstandard transmission systems such as impulse duration, pulse rate, and voltage regulated will not be permitted except where specifically noted in the PLC 1/0 List or shown on the Drawings. When transmitters with nonstandard outputs do occur, their output shall be converted to 4-20 mA prior to transmission. .it C. Discrete: All alarm and status signals shall be 24 VDC unless specified otherwise. Proprietary data highway or serial bit transmissions such as RS232C shall be allowed to the extent shown on the Drawings. + 2.09 PAINTING A. Factory paint all instruments and equipment except where installed in pipelines. Where instrument panels are installed adjacent to electrical control panels provided under Section 10.16, provide instrument panels of identical color to that of electrical control panels. Paint as required in Division 10.9 for structural supports, brackets, etc. Repair damaged factory paint to satisfaction of the Engineer. Feathering, priming, and painting shall produce a reasonable match to the surrounding paint work. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-SpecsYl00%_Specs_Jun2010110.170101nstrumentation and Controls General Requirements Revision.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17010 Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements Page 9 of 12 +rrr 2.10 FASTENERS A. Fasteners for securing equipment to walls, floors and the like shall be either hot-dip galvanized after fabrication or stainless steel. Provide stainless steel fasteners in corrosive locations. When fastening to existing walls, floors, and the like, provide wedge anchors. Provide capsule anchors for bolts 3/8-inch and larger. Size capsule anchors to meet load requirements. Minimum size capsule anchor bolt is 3/8-inch. 2.11 INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION A. Each analog field instrument shall be calibrated at 0 percent and 100 percent of span and calibration checked at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of span for compliance with linearity and hysteresis accuracy. Use a test instrument to simulate inputs and read outputs that are at least 10 times greater than the specified accuracy of the instrument being calibrated. Such test instruments have accuracies traceable to the National Institute of Standards and .. Technology (NIST). Digital instruments shall be calibrated over 10 points for accuracy, linearity, and hysteresis. B. Submit a written report to the Engineer on each instrument. This report shall include a laboratory calibration sheet or the manufacturer's standards calibration sheet on each instrument and calibration reading as finally adjusted within tolerances. C. The Contractor may, at his option, choose to perform calibration on an instrument by acquiring the services of an independent test lab, or by obtaining the required test instruments and performing the calibration. D. Include calibration sheets in O&M manual specified in Paragraph 1.05E. + + 2.12 YAGI ANTENNA A. Provide and install a Yagi antenna to be mounted as shown on the Drawings: +rr 1. Gain 14.2 dBi minimum. 2. 20 dB minimum front-to-back ratio. 3. Set the antenna at the lowest height possible for reliable communication, as determined by the Owner. 4. Provide low-loss coaxial cable from the antenna to the Main Control Panel/RTU. 5. Orient the antenna as required to obtain reliable communication, as determined by the Owner. 6. Manufacturer: Walkerson, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MOUNTINGS A. Mount and install equipment as indicated. Mount field instruments on pipe mounts W. or other similar means in accordance with suppliers' recommendation. Where mounted in control panels, mount according to requirements of that Sub-Section. r.. No W.1200810897003 City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs Jun2i)10t10.170101nstrumentatlon and Controls General Requirements Revision.DOC 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17010 rrr Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements Page 10 of 12 B. Equipment specified for field mounting shall be suitable for direct pipe mounting or surface mounting, surface-mounted indicators and equipment with calibration adjustments or requiring periodic inspection shall be mounted not lower than 3 feet 6 inches nor higher than 6 feet above walkways, platforms, catwalks, and the like. C. Note that applicable specifications require detail drawings showing seismic sway bracing design and anchorage requirements for their equipment. Seismic zone requirements are specified in Section 10.01. D. All devices shall be accessible to operators for servicing, operating, reading, etc. Provide permanent platforms to assure devices are continuously accessible. 3.02 PROCESS CONNECTIONS A. Terminate connection to process lines in a service rated root valve, provided under other Divisions, which will permit removal of the element without requiring shut down of the process. Include blowdown of drip legs and valves for terminations at the instruments. B. Root valves shall be furnished and installed under other Sections of these Specifications. Instrument tubing and valve manifolds are installed as part of this Specification. 3.03 FIELD WIRING A. Ring out signal wiring prior to termination and perform surge withstand tests where required (see Sub-Section 10.16010, Part 3 for methods). Verify wire number and terminations are satisfactory as designated on the Loop and Interconnect Diagrams. Verify all terminations are tight and shields are uniformly grounded at one location. 3.04 ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) A. Construction shall proceed in a manner which minimizes the introduction of noise (RFI/EMI) into the I&C System. B. Cross signal wires and wires carrying ac power or control signals at right angles. C. Separate signal wires from wires carrying ac power or switched ac/dc control signals within control panels as much as possible. Provide the following minimum separations within such equipment unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings: Power Wiring Capacity Separation (Inches) 120 Vac or 10 Amps 12 240 Vac or 50 Amps 18 ad 480 Vac or 200 Ams 24 W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs\100%_Specs_Jun2010110.170101nstrumentation and Controls General Requirements Revision.DOC 6/16/2010 so WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17010 Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements Page 11 of 12 �. 3.05 SIGNAL GROUNDING A. Proper grounding of equipment and systems in this Sub-Section is critical if computer and associated networks and peripherals are involved. The Drawings and Section 10.16, Sub-Section 10.16450, specify safety grounding for all equipment in this Sub-Section. B. A single-point grounding system for instrument signals is required for all instrument panels. This instrument single point grounding system does not use building steel or conduit systems for its ground path. 1. Ground all signal shields, signal grounds, and power supplies at an isolated signal bus within each instrument panel, rack, or enclosure. The shields at the far ends of these signal cables must be disconnected (floated) from any ground , . to prevent ground loops. 2. Do not connect the rack or enclosure frames to the signal grounding buses. 3. Connect each isolated signal ground bus within each panel using a stranded, insulated copper wire of size 6 AWG or larger directly to a system ground rod installed per the Drawings. C. If more than one instrument panel or rack is installed side-by-side, locate an isolated system grounding plate in one of the panels. 1. Connect all the isolated signal buses in such instrument panel or rack radially to the system ground plate using a stranded, insulated copper wire of size#8 AWG or larger. 2. Do not use conduit, cable raceways, or building steel to distribute the grounding connections; use dedicated wires as specified above. Install a single conduit containing a #2 AWG insulated ground wire from the insulated grounding plate directly to a system ground rod installed per the Drawings. See Section 10.16 for conduit requirements. 3.06 PREPARATION V„ A. Ensure thatinstallation areas are clean and that concrete or masonry operations are completed prior to installing instruments and equipment. Maintain the areas in a broom-clean condition during installation operations. B. Panels shall be protected during construction to prevent damage to front panel devices and prevent dust accumulation in the intervals. Other protective measures (lamp, strip heaters, etc.) shall be included as weather conditions dictate. .w 3.07 FIELD TESTING A. General: The purpose of the field testing is to verify instruments are calibrated and operationally performing their intended function. Provide the services of factory trained and experienced engineers to perform verification and operational testing as prescribed below. Since the initial calibration of instruments may not satisfy the final operation of system, perform recalibration or adjust setpoints as required to satisfy the performance requirements of the system. Software for the PLC shall be loaded and operational before the start of the field test. Notify the Engineer and Owner in writing a minimum of 48 hours prior to the proposed date for commencing final operational testing and acceptance. W1200810897003 City-of-Renton Stonegate410-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs_Jun2010110.170101nstrumentatlon and Controls General Requirements Revision.DOC 6/1412010 ! WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17010 Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements Page 12 of 12 B. System Verification Testing: Verify that each instrument shown on the Instrument Schedule is operating and calibrated as specified in the Instrument Schedule by simulating inputs at the primary element in each system loop and verify performance at loop output devices (i.e. recorder, indicator, alarm, etc., except controllers). Simulate inputs at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of span or with on-off inputs, as applicable. During system verification: 1. Make initial or provisional settings on levels, alarms, etc. listed in the Instrument Schedule. 2. Verify controllers by observing that the final control element moves in the proper direction to correct the process variable as compared to the set point. 3. Cause malfunctions to sound alarms or switch to standby to check system operation. 4. Check all loop instruments thoroughly for correct operation. 5. Immediately correct all defects and malfunctions disclosed by tests. 6. Submit a report certifying completion of verification of each instrument system. This report shall include a data sheet on each instrument tested that indicates instrument tolerances, instrument calibration verification, data, and initial .r settings made to devices. C. Operational Testing: Operational testing shall consist of both manually and automatically controlled system tests. 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing manually controlled tests, and shall submit documentation on the results of these tests in accordance with this Specification Sub-Section. All manually controlled tests shall be successfully completed before automatically controlled tests will be started, including any required correction actions. 2. Automatically controlled tests will be performed by the Owner. The Contractor shall assist the Owner with the automatically controlled tests as necessary. 3. Testing shall include, but not be limited to: a. Making final adjustments to levels, alarms, etc. b. Optimum tuning of controllers. c. Checking all alarms, failure interlocks, and operational interlocks. d. Verifying all input and outputs are fully functional and coordinated with the Owner. e. Immediately correcting all defects and malfunctions and retesting. 4. See Sub-Section 10.01660 for additional requirements. D. Submit the witnessed test results and a transmittal letter indicating that all required systems have been tested satisfactorily and the systems meet all the functional requirements of their applicable specifications. END OF SUB-SECTION W:I200B10897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngOesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.17010 Instrumentation and Controls General Requirements Revision.DOC 6/14/2010 ' +rr WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17120 Flow Measurement Page 1 of 4 SUB-SECTION 10.17120 FLOW MEASUREMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUB-SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements of Sections 10.01 and 10.15 and Sub-Section 10.17010 form a part ' of this Sub-Section. This Sub-Section specifies flow measurement devices for process instrumentation, auxiliary equipment, and supplies directly related to the installation of and operation of these flow measurement devices, to perform the required functions in conjunction with information and equipment specified in other sub-sections of Section 10.17. B. Furnish and install flow meters and all appurtenant work suitable for wastewater, at ambient temperatures, complete and operable, and capable of continuous operation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings to be submitted in this Sub-Section shall be made in one package. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. r B. Shop Drawings: 1. In addition to the requirements of Sub-Section 10.17010, shop drawings shall include for each type of instrument: supply voltage and frequency, electrical load, accuracy, description of operation, operating instructions, and calibration procedure. 2. Furnish shop drawings for each item of mechanical equipment presenting ow sufficient data to determine compliance to these Specifications. Submit completed ISA S20 forms for each device and physical dimensions. Submit manufacturer's recommended upstream and downstream straight piping lengths, recommended location of any pressure taps, and estimates of pressure losses through the device. C. Installation Method: The proposed method of mounting sensors and instruments shall accompany all shop drawings. D. Parts List: Submit a Parts List with current net prices and a list of recommended spares. E. Factory Testing and Calibration: 1. All meters shall be factory tested. Perform a factory test and/or provide certification of calibration from an independent test laboratory. Calibration curves based on factory and/or laboratory testing (see option below) shall be provided for the Engineer's review. Furnish calibration curves in units of output (inches or rpm/gpm) versus measured flow. W.1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.17120 Flow Measurement.doc 6/16/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17120 Flow Measurement Page 2 of 4 2. As an option to laboratory testing each meter, the calibration curves of six (6) "like devices" may be substituted provided the calibration data is available from at least one identical device (pipe size, flow range, and type plus accessories such as extension registers). F. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer's installation, lubrication, operation and maintenance manuals, bulletins, and spare parts lists. G. Affidavits: Furnish affidavits from the manufacturers stating that the meters have been properly installed and tested and each is ready for full time operation. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: In addition to the requirements of Sub-Section 10.17010, flow measurement devices furnished shall be manufactured by firms regularly and currently engaged in the design and manufacture of similar equipment. All equipment furnished shall be new and of current design. W B. Maintainability: All equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and repair, and access to critical parts shall not require a major disassembly. Internal field adjustments where permitted or required herein shall be easily accessible upon removal of a panel or cover. C. Materials and Installation: Materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the current editions of referenced electrical codes and standards, and the codes and standards referred to shall be used for establishing the minimum quality of the materials and equipment supplied and installed. All equipment of the same type shall be products of the same manufacturer. Capacities of all equipment shall not be less than that indicated on the Drawings or as specified. 1.04 SEISMIC PROTECTION A. Seismic restraint for metering devices, which are integral with piping, shall be as specified for the piping system in which they are installed. Seismic design certification and anchorage descriptions are required by Sub-Section 10.01190 of Section 10.01. 1.05 INDICATING UNITS A. Provide flow indication in GPM, MGD, etc. Do not use indicators that read 0 to " 100 percent, 4-20 rhA, etc. 1.06 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17010. W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.17120 Flow MeasurementAx 6/16/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17120 Flow Measurement Page 3 of 4 r PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MAGNETIC FLOWMETER A. General: Magnetic meters shall utilize the principle of electromagnetic induction to produce an output proportional to the rate of fluid flow. A set of pulsed DC, electrically powered coils shall generate a magnetic field, which in turn induces a voltage in the flowing fluid, which is sensed by a pair of electrodes in contact with the fluid. 1. Protect coils from contact with the fluid. The electrodes shall be made of Type 316 stainless steel. The meters shall be housed in a NEMA 4 enclosure. The metering tube shall be lined with hard rubber. Meters shall be resistant to lit electrode coating. The probe sensor shall be designed to be inserted in water pipes and shall not be affected by solids, air bubbles, oil, or coating. The probe sensor wetted parts shall be of Type 316 stainless steel. 1i. 2. The meters shall be designed to operate from a 120 Vac, 60 Hz, single phase power supply. A 10 percent variation in power line voltage or frequency shall not affect the meter output accuracy in excess of 1 percent of full scale. 3. Provide magnetic flowmeters suitable for fluids with conductivities as low as 5.0 micromho/cm. 4. Each magnetic flow meter system shall have an accuracy within 1 percent of actual for flow velocities between 10 percent and 100 percent of full scale. Meters shall have a repeatability within 0.25 percent of full scale. 5. Each magnetic flow meter shall be equipped with a signal converter to transmit an analog 4-20 mADC signal proportional to flow rate. Output span and zero shall be manually adjustable. Provide span adjustment capable of producing 100 percent analog output at flow rates that are 30 percent of maximum. Signal shall be linear with flow within the accuracy specified above. The converter �. shall be remotely mounted from the meter housing. Provide sufficient length of vendor recommended cables form the meter sensor head to the signal converter. Mount the signal converter in the Control Building. rrr, 6. The signal converter shall have the capability of positive zero return for shutdown conditions. B. The magnetic flow meters shall have flanged end connections. Field coils shall be either completely encapsulated in the meter lining material or a protective shield shall be provided suitable for withstanding the scouring velocities of the process fluid at the maximum flow rates. C. Grounding: Provide a grounding circuit for each magnetic meter. Furnish and install grounding rings or protective shield when meter is installed in nonconductive line. rr D. Manufacturer: Meters and signal converters shall be an 8" Siemens Sitrans FM Magflo MAG 5100W with Siemens MAG 5000 signal converter; no equal. r► E. Special Tools: Furnish special tools, which are necessary for the replacement of parts and the adjustment of the equipment. �r M M W:IP00810897003_City-ot-Renton_Stonegate110-EngOesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.17120 Flow Measurement.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17120 Flow Measurement Page 4 of 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide installation, testing, calibration, verification, and startup instructions in accordance with Section 10.15 and Sub-Section 10.17010. 3.02 FIELD TESTING A. All flow devices are to be field tested against a secondary standard at the normal (or expected) process flow rates. B. The contractor may select at his option to either install a second flow device of known calibration in the line to verify flow device calibration or perform fluid capacity tests such as volumetric measurement per unit time. END OF SUB-SECTION W:1200810897003_City-otRenton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Speas1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.17120FlowMeasurementdoc 6/14/2010 ; wa WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17140 Level Measurement Page 1 of 3 go SUB-SECTION 10.17140 LEVEL MEASUREMENT As PART 1'- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Level measurement devices for process instrumentation, auxiliary equipment and supplies directly related to the installation of and operation of these level measurement devices, to perform the required functions in conjunction with information and equipment specified in other sub-sections of Section 10.17. Refer to the Instrument Index in Sub-Section 10.17010 for a listing of required devices. B. Requirements of Sub-Section 10.17010 form a part of this Sub-Section. 1�r C. Furnish and install level measurement instruments and all appurtenant work suitable for wastewater, at ambient temperatures, complete and operable, and capable of continuous operation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings to be submitted in this Sub-Section shall be made in one package. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16010. B. Shop Drawings: 1. In addition to the requirements of Sub-Section 10.17010, shop drawings shall include for each type of instrument: supply voltage and frequency, electrical load, accuracy, description of operation, operating instructions, and calibration procedure. wr1 2. Furnish shop drawings for each item of mechanical equipment presenting sufficient data to determine compliance to these Specifications. Submit completed ISA S20 forms for each device and physical dimensions. Submit manufacturer's recommended location. C. Installation Method: The proposed method of mounting sensors and instruments shall accompany all shop drawings. D. Parts List: Submit a Parts List with current net prices and a list of recommended spares. rr E. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer's installation, lubrication, operation and maintenance manuals, bulletins, and spare parts lists. 1r 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: In addition to the requirements of General Requirements, level measurement devices furnished shall be manufactured by firms regularly and currently engaged in the design and manufacture of similar equipment. All equipment furnished shall be new and of current design. W:120080897003_City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesigM10.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.17140 Level Measurement.doc 6/14/2010 WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17140 AN Level Measurement Page 2 of 3 B. Maintainability: All equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and repair, and access to critical parts shall not require a major disassembly. Internal field adjustments where permitted or required herein shall be easily accessible upon removal of a panel or cover. C. Materials and Installation: Materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the current editions of referenced electrical codes and standards, and the codes and standards referred to shall be used for establishing the minimum quality of the materials and equipment supplied and installed. All equipment of the same type shall be products of the same manufacturer. Capacities of all equipment shall not be less than that indicated on the Drawings or specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBMERSIBLE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER A. General: Electric-indicating type submersible pressure transmitters shall convert a differential or gauge pressure measurement to a 4-20 mAdc linear electric output signal capable of transmission into a least a 600 ohm maximum load at 24 Vdc or less. Signal and power transmission shall be provided by a single pair of wires. Allowable operating ambient temperature shall be a least -10 to 70 degrees C. B. Range: Instrument range shall be as noted on the Instrument Schedule. For factory set models that do not have an adjustable calibration, the range shall be the range nearest the Instrument Schedule range that meets the requirements of the physical installation. Engineer approval must be obtained for the ranges not matching the schedule. C. Specifications: Reference accuracy shall be 0.2% of calibrated span or better. Drift shall be not greater than 0.1% of calibrated span per year. Over range protection shall be at least 1.5 times the range with no degradation of accuracy within the over range window. The local indicator shall be scaled to read in the units specified on the Instrument Schedule. Instrument shall be rated for the class and division indicated on the Drawings. D. Construction: The sensor shall be within a sealed probe including an integral molded cable. Transmitter shall be within the sealed assembly. The sealed probe with cable is to be installed in a perforated open 2-inch PVC pipe that is attached to the sidewall of the chamber or as shown on the Drawings. Cable is to be attached to the top of the wet well with a cable hanger strain relief to allow adjustment of probe depth. Attachment location must be readily accessible for maintenance. E. Instruments shall be KPSI model 720, no equal. 2.02 LEVEL SWITCH - FLOAT TYPE, WET WELL A. Float switches shall be direct acting and consist of a Type 316 stainless steel housing, mounting clamp, flexible 3-conductor cable with a synthetic rubber jacket and a mercury switch. The float housing shall be a sphere of at least 4'/2 inches in diameter. The mercury switch shall be embedded in a metal housing inside the W:1200810897003 City-of-Renton Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%Specs—Jun2010t10.17140 Level Measurementdoc 6/14/2010 do WWP-27-3473 Sub-Section 10.17140 Level Measurement Page 3 of 3 float. The lead cable shall be#14 AWG with 105 strands per conductor, made specifically for underwater use and heavy flexing service. The mercury switch shall be connected to two of the three conductors of the cable. The third conductor shall be an internal ground and shall be colored green. The switch shall have a 20 ampere rating at 115 Vac. B. Float switches shall hang freely in the wet well as shown on the Drawings. Supply sufficient cable to allow for the connection of the float switches to the external junction box when the float switches are located as shown on the Drawings, plus 6 feet of additional length. C. Operating temperature shall be 0°F to +180° F. Weight and buoyancy shall be such that contaminants, like a cake of grease, will not result in the float switch changing r operating level more than 1 inch. D. Provide intrinsically-safe relays (IR) for switches used in hazardous locations where ,rr shown on the Drawings. E. The float switches shall be Roto-Float Type S, or accepted equal. 2.03 LEVEL SWITCH — FLOOD ALARM, GENERAL PURPOSE rig A. Flood switch in the valve vault shall be Gems Sensor model LS-3, or equal. B. Mount the flood switch as shown on the Drawings and such that the switch activates at a water level of 2" AFF. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation, testing, calibration, validation, startup, and instruction shall be in accordance with Sub-Section 10.17010. B. Connect the float switch cables to the NEMA 4X junction box as shown on the Drawings. , END OF SUB-SECTION �r irr W:1200810897003_City-of-Renton_Stonegate110-EngDesign110.01-Specs1100%_Specs_Jun2010110.17140 Level Measurementdoc 6/14/2010 .. r •+.�- arm.. r .., -:� r,tx+ �' _s a t '=fir iz � "ra` '� >�: �'" s t% ♦ z > r ' } rp�� ��'- " ,. ��,r....a ���k _' .,,,.. ,�'� .• �. r '' s'€� �_ r^x''v� ri&.;.,,� ,.� '��« € .$ 'z�� � n,� ���n�-� �y-a, u, v '¢ _ :, �t'M�sy „» .�: .�'� -°,. `, � c ;.� ter',•�,.. t �`2^ Ip �'�`�'*� �::-»;Y„€S-�'t #•' +t,�y s$ `�� "`.�.,'�s�e h':.s�„,v "�-�:,.._,,,.�' € ���3�����t,., �," ys F,u �' �x, c�':.�' ��� .~✓'� ".�,��;e"z. .a- r,i '.,x`J„.� � q `. �' .g'tz`s�.a..r L�..� *+.�,.:,* r .. ����,._ ,�, ^:� ar •�„'k�z,. � �. "r,. `� r-�.,' r ;�,::¢:, .� ,x-�.`�*°.�.•� B „� ,� a �"�'.x,,.'^ �. �a '� ,:�t` z'�., �k v<.: � � �:z#. ,. .�,. �+k� � '� �,,,x tr” s r.,.,.�='��.', ,�"`�.� .s��." l' ' •: '�.. .�-.'�'#""�>#,,•_:.. .. �..n .�`^��� ''�"'�`r �i. ua ����1 ie�a: '� .a`*" :* u� n.:�� w„a�>,°j '� -; _ �` -,�: �' ,�� ;� �' •,'k�s'�""� �'' �. „�� "z�`'�" "� `�"", � *�`,..� ��� �F? �''y �x�_sY,, # �- �� ,?;5�`�,��.r, *�`� �e ;��z ice,s; i� �y,�.}<,� ,we 3m,. +� '_ A,' '•re �E.. r='�is'�}r"' ,,z 'a,.'y"` .as ten✓:. ,'� tam: av :� ��r r a .�. �... � y � •'-:.; '*`€- 'w�xr� ^+,z�r4.,'ea a'€'"�"", >,. .....,'{".e,. ., ... �,. t .;r: '�ti -4 { �. s�•L `%�.^"k-Fs'p, .. 'r. �. °.,-'#3.�:�.�"�� i � ,. �;E.�"�.-ra ., -: t :t i; -. °� '+ p4't 2$ 3 y3. a`tif r•:: a-. .s p��'? x4` '4 z4s' `r`� yki '"�,' x. r2 5 - tr�+.i":ya,3 ,rs t=r :a,,,�'.y ,„ 'ka r:' .,,K -mm",' x :, l '�-4*.,. ��?s-;#{�S+-. �,�` � 1 �•'��x.: � § j � $ '� �+, .e{,? �� �'d7rs�'�`"<<� iy�; �,Z � t s't"' x.,,�� „� a � + y rRMr +� �,"c, �"'",,r. `s`i"Yr` � c�::r z?l�S ":,..` �• g^ ��a s �'��, � a�� � %fie � ;� t € s x a s t�" m WE Nr _ ' t`.z ,�'" .,�.�� ��_����>�#a..: �a'� '���">�. <. °�,iry�c�?"' aaa�•r. =" ,c��� ;#a' �� L�.€, - '� a 4 � 3��'�`a� d :� r> t rrE '+�' ` r 'F.r+h f `E tc x 3x: *u�•'�� '`�' .. ` � >F&,, �, z,: }�'" ... � �^ =s��c ,`M1,,.;" a''�,' .^�,,a s t a ¢� t�,* 1.. � �f :',k~`^ � ,�G ':t� .. - t- ', 3s �?..z xa ^asa�F3`v i~ *r �F�. s ✓.a { ' x Ex s tiq qXr Pon,fi>gm v x^ "f -.r;;r2�i-6g � ,�;.-a '�r�u� �y .� } :€"'z *,�g- ':para ry. , '"• �� `�'" �i :,�"- '���=fit*{ � t'ye t .z< �.� t k r. sa� `�=��t»��;�• 7+ s t_:t', u;spar` "tiz" ,,[ "�",'a,n„�`'�',<;*`"�t� r ulh.fir,a v r/S^' �;a �,k,.�ss,:���„ry r , c'n• � +�t„�S;,,rwx.�.” -� u:�' »4 -�- +�€•=frU�.,�'v w s �w a>, �;;•L >s��su."� rt "'"a'f n� � s� t� .i.,t s"k 5' ��$y�_y i�ry �z-” �„t S. mIM0 a t � a"'I s Y 3} > cy',. >, o& -a„ 5y,'z.•;r� '-,»� �i c� Ff a'�.i-°-€,...k,'. a�F„s'� ct,. a.� :.. x ', ° .' sr -' sa te5 r': fVq „, _ ',s-", ', •r .s; -�":..#^txs`"° -"Yr x;y'." .a '€ ** 3 "s3 'y .,ak'` "", f 's as.. ,� ;' �. '�m���f r � ,r,, `� a �,, �� ��".�� ,w.r,a>-:, �'���r#�„;+3`' .�,j"'�� s' x ,zs{- .'r.,�.� �"�k•�:•''a ,t',+ s�€-. nz �,-a� + { ��` ' -^rAO gaSt s av �g; .,.,v v. ,��.a �>-�'re.si,s' �. '� y f•. .tom 3 5�yt-er~ r �', ?>. 1"' �r,^+5 r � ..�,:- x T,#-5 TtSrr � "� �Yl 'f � � t� k'$- �u�+dt/�g,'-ti`aW �'�� ;'t%�3' 'Y:'�� ��.'I�fp..F>� F �`. ,� rte' % 'I'ra✓ .k f ,. 2"� 4va� : �A � '..T Y Y � §.:; - � �-„'� �`" r *���ti�''.��� r S a> �s�.Y''s � ��' � *� �' �,``�' J�,,:�,� e, �.y: ��,,:'��i � „•C �,.� ��'� r - ��,ri �r.^,rz ,t�.r, 1�a.3's�' . �'i �, •;> 'tial �. f #'�� �¢ t*� �'�, .r r}� .� - s z z a � s.�.�`s ';, s Q 5 ^-; � �` ;ar �� * a�a>�.d�ya..� .,+,e .. ma i 'ai* �,,,+t " �} ..�+' -� T "• 5's�''Rx��-°c.-k: r� > ? :� �, x s. ,x �ix; �^z. `�`.a a" >r s >?a'3 €s.-t• a' .�: .{" '} �' �t ° `iaas'py. s'+ , s : It -4�kw i " K ,� �_. �, 'ss` a -^i ���;�'•L�'+v.'t-*p..,., ,'� gvr i�:: t �,�"' 1'L�„ "�' �B,�"� �^ �i; "t���`moi"@z,�t �+�� '+� x �.�€' � fi i "w err +rr LANE LINE MARKING YrTr 3' MIN, 3' MIN. (SEE STD PLAN 110.2) VARIES: 4.5' MIN. (SEE STD PLAN 110.2) rr DEPTH OF EXISTING PAVEMENT HMA OR ACP 1' 1' CL. 'B' (SEE NOTE 2) MIN. MIN. 6" CRUSHED SURFACING TOP 2" HMA OR COURSE, COMPACT TO 95% MODIFIED PROCTOR ACP CLASS 'B' 2" SAWCUT AND REMOVE EDGE OF PAVEMENT, EDGE OR GRIND, SEAL WITH OF CURB & GUTTER, OR AR-4000W CENTER OF LANE MARKING to CRUSHED SURFACING TOP COURSE, OR NATIVE MATERIAL IF APPROVED IN WRITING WIDTH OF TRENCH AS REQUIRED BY SIZE OF BY THE ENGINEER, COMPACT TO 95% PROPOSED IMPROVEMENT (SEE WSDOT MODIFIED PROCTOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION 2-09.4) PLUS AN ALLOWANCE FOR ANY SHORING. SHORING, IF PIPE ZONE BEDDING. MATERIAL AND NEEDED, SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF COMPACTION AS REQUIRED BY THE WSDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATION 7-08.3(1)B WSDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR rrr THE TYPE OF IMPROVEMENT INSTALLED rrr NOTES: 1. UPON REQUEST OF ENGINEER, NEW ROADWAY PAVEMENT SECTION MAY BE DESIGNED USING AN APPROVED rrr METHOD FOR DETERMINING PAVEMENT THICKNESS. 2. MINIMUM THICKNESS AND MATERIAL SHALL BE: PRINCIPAL/MINOR/COLLECTOR, ARTERIAL, & INDUSTRIAL ACCESS STREETS - 6" HMA OR ACP CLASS 'B'; RESIDENTIAL ACCESS STREETS - 2" HMA OR ACP CLASS 'B'; fAw IN NO CASE SHALL THE THICKNESS BE LESS THAN THAT OF THE EXISTING PAVEMENT SECTION. 3. AT THE DISCRETION OF THE ENGINEER, A FULL STREET WIDTH OVERLAY MAY BE REQUIRED. no to S'I'D. PLAN — 110.1 PUBLIC WORKS TYPICAL LONGITUDINAL PATCH �+ DEPARTMENT AND OVERLAY FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT MAY 2009 Y K o PIPE ALLOWANCES z i 0 MAXIMUM FRAME AND VANED GRATE PIPE MATERIAL INSIDE DIAMETER REINFORCED OR 12" PLAIN CONCRETE ALL METAL PIPE 15" 3A 30" 2A 20' CPSSP* (STD.SPEC.9-05.20) 12' S• SOLID WALL PVC 5 (STD.SPEC.9-05.12(1)) 15" PROFILE WALL PVC 15" 6"OR 12" (STD.SPEC.9-05.12(2)) *CORRUGATED POLYETHYLENE STORM SEWER PIPE ONE 93 BAR HOOP FOR 6"HEIGHT TWO#3 BAR HOOPS FOR 12"HEIGHT RECTANGULAR ADJUSTMENT SECTION NOTES Q� 1. As acceptable alternatives to the rebar shown in the PRECAST BASE SECTION,fibers(placed according to the Standard Specifications),or n wire mesh having a minimum area of 0.12 square inches per foot shall be used with the minimum required rebar shown in the ALTERNATIVE PRECAST BASE SECTION. Wire mesh shall not be placed in the knockouts. #3 BAR EACH CORNER z 2. The knockout diameter shall not be greater than 20". Knockouts shall have a wall thickness of 2"minimum to 2.5"maximum. Provide a 1.5" minimum gap between the knockout wall and the outside of the pipe. After the pipe is installed,fill the gap with joint mortar in accordance #3 BAR EACH SIDE with Standard Specification 9-04.3. 3. The maximum depth from the finished grade to the lowest pipe invert shall be 5'. #3 BAR EACH WAY 4. The frame and grate must be installed with the flange down. PRECAST BASE SECTION 5. The Precast Base Section may have a rounded floor,and the walls may be sloped at a rate of 1:24 or steeper. 6. The opening shall be measured at the top of the precast base section. 7. All pickup holes shall be grouted full after the basin has been placed. 8. All grade rings and castings shall be set in mortar in accordance with Standard Specification 9-04.3. #3 BAR EACH CORNER 18"MIN. #3 BAR HOOP SEE NOTE 1 ALTERNATIVE PRECAST BASE SECTION zY + PUBLIC WORKS CATCH BASIN TYPE 1 S'I'D. PLAN - 200.00 DEPARTMENT F�/tp MARCH 2008 wr lw lr N Y K Q NOTES 1. As acceptable alternatives to the rebar shown in the PRECAST BASE FRAME AND VANED GRATE SECTION,fibers(placed according to the Standard Specifications),or wire mesh having a minimum area of 0.12 square inches per foot shall be used with the minimum required rebar shown in the ALTERNATIVE itl PRECAST BASE SECTION. Wire mesh shall not be placed in the 30. knockouts. 2A 2p' 2. The knockout diameter shall not be greater than 18". Knockouts shall have a wall thickness of 2"minimum to 2.5"maximum. Provide a 1.5" YII 5 s• minimum gap between the knockout wall and the outside of the pipe. After the pipe is installed,fill the gap with joint mortar in accordance with Standard Specification 9-04.3. s'OR 12" 3. The maximum depth from the finished grade to the lowest pipe invert shall be 5'. R ONE#3 BAR HOOP FOR T HEIGHT 4. The frame and grate must be installed with the flange down. TWO#3 BAR HOOPS FOR 12'HEIGHT 5. The Precast Base Section may have a rounded floor,and the walls may. RECTANGULAR ADJUSTMENT SECTION be sloped at a rate of 1:24 or steeper. 1W 6. The opening shall be measured at the top of the precast base section. 16��61 (SFP 22, IS��NO tior�s/ 7. All pickup holes shall be grouted full after the basin has been placed. 8. All grade rings and castings shall be set in mortar in accordance with Standard Specification 9-04.3. rM #3 BAR EACH CORNER co #3 BAR HOOP 26 0,��61 �SFF^22. m `5��� OTF6J iM c' #3 BAR EACH SIDE \ #3 BAR EACH WAYow vl\ PRECAST BASE SECTION #3 BAR EACH CORNER18'MIN. aw #3 BAR HOOP z N to \\)\ �I SEE NOTE 1 ALTERNATIVE PRECAST BASE SECTION ili► PUBLIC WORKS CATCH BASIN TYPE 1 P STD. PLAN - 200.20 to � N�o$ DEPARTMENT (FOR PARKING LOT) MARCH 2008 ow Az rn W p H n, N : W -AP oIn•OwNs s{Qoso ♦603 pinoc ♦IC°sn to 8603 LaEgD�• >4 v YrQJi I Y 44 •:tis L � - �: mi e - • F � s--'S i o Safi i y > Iz .a °c.7 • o u •oc 11 1••' 1 I .�Z � y�j.•n�a r OT r • r ; T u u to o c== c ♦ P = 0 1 o �I _• � z z ' m t� ` o o _ u J N ° o r9 c cc o 0 0 0 r r \'• d ; d N «= L m P c wr q o z °' WO ?H N E•r Wzz a N 'r" Waa W CY 0 n <v W er o t vi u o^ LLJ rw +rr o a 0- o oa ,z-7 �u L l ccCD w �umt9 m C, n„ o N Q \¢r ion Q rm 119-1Z „OI NIM ,I— no I no C L w N oo 0 inTV \— C O x 4, C mL L 4- 4 a, tD N t O O 7 O Q 4.- 0 o m L V U C C 7 O O U L CENTER LINES 3'� 30' 4 YELLOW TYPE i LINE MARKERS DOUBLE YELLOW CENTER LINE 4" YELLOW TYPE 'Ild' LINE MARKERS (REFL.) 9' 15' 3 � 4" YELLOW TYPE 'I' LINE MARKERS SINGLE SKIP YELLOW CENTER LINE 4" YELLOW TYPE 'Ild' LINE MARKERS (REEL.) TWO-WAY LEFT TURN LANE 1 • • 1 • 1 1 • • • �4„ I—— 9' — 15' I-- .ri 4" YELLOW TYPE 'Ild' LINE MARKERS (REFL.) 12' 4" YELLOW TYPE 'I' LINE MARKERS err NUMBER OF 2- WAY LEFT TURN ARROWS SPEED LIMIT 25 MPH 200' O.C. SPEED LIMIT 30-35 MPH -- 250' 0.C. '^ SPEED LIMIT 40-45 MPH -- 300' O.C. `SY O PUBLIC WORKS CHANNELIZATION PLAN — 109 � DEPARTMENT MARKERS DETAIL MAY 2009 �N'CO rIk No w o. APPROACH LINE f 3 ` 4" WHITE TYPE 24' 'i' LINE MARKERS 4" WHITE TYPE 'Ile' LINE MARKERS (REEL.) so NUMBER AND LOCATIONS OF ARROWS q APPROACH LINE LENGTH ARROW LOCATIONS �0R up 20'-50' 1 ARROW (20' BACK FROM CROSSWALK OR STOP BAR) 50'-125' 2 ARROWS (20' BACK & END OF APPROACH LINE) 125=300' 3 ARROWS (20' BACK, MIDWAY & END OF LINE) ARROWS OVER 300' AT 100' INTERVALS sir SKIP APPROACH LINE my i t ow 9' 1 S' 3' 4" WHITE TYPE 'I' LINE MARKERS 4" WHITE TYPE 'Ile' rr LINE MARKERS (REEL.) LANE LINE 4 } 9' 15' 3' 4" WHITE TYPE 'I' LINE MARKERS „w 4" WHITE TYPE 'Ile' LINE MARKERS (REFL.) to ow + PUBLIC WORKS CHANNELIZATION STD. PLAN — 109.1 DEPARTMENT MARKERS DETAIL MAY 2009 ow to 6 IN.6" SIDEWALK 12" VARIES:5'-6"MIN. 12"R. LEV� 1"R. Tv 12"R.(TYP.) CURB NOT 4 5��cpAJ a 2 MAX IN BIDD ED h ITEM D SEE RAISED i/4 PREMOLDED EDGE DETAIL JOINT FILLER NOTE:EXTEND SIDEWALK TRANSVERSE JOINTS TO INCLUDE RAISED EDGE CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALK RAISED EDGE DETAIL WITH RAISED EDGE VARIES z 1/8"TCD 1141" SIDEWALK MAY BE ADJACENT � SLOPE ROUNDING TO A WALL(SEE DETAIL) (WHEN SPECIFIED) SIDEWALK BUFFER STRIP ' VARIES:5'-0"MIN. D D 12"R.(TYP.) CURB NOT INCLUDED 2% 2%MAX, 2%MAX._ IN BID ITEM . BM ©CONTRACTION JOINT CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALK ADJACENT TO BUFFER STRIP - WALL OR BARRIER SIDEWALK VARIES SIDEWALK MAY BE ADJACENT 12"R. SLOPE ROUNDING TO A WALL(SEE DETAIL) (WHEN SPECIFIED) SIDEWALK •p' D VARIES:5'-6"MIN. 12"I 1/4"PREMOLDED (TYP.) CURB NOT INCJOINT FILLER LUDED 2% 2%MAX. IN BID ITEM v 1l4•PREMOLDED SIDEWALK ADJACENT TO WALL JOINT FILLER DETAIL CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALK ADJACENT TO CURB BROOMED FINISH 0o 4"WIDE,SMOOTH 0° 5"" TROWELED PERIMETER t5.. E 5.0" G 5 O' G CEMENT CONCRETE CURB (CURB AND GUTTER SHOWN) E NOT INCLUDED IN 81D ITEM G -CONTRACTION JOINT ,D • � D IN SIDEWALK ONLY FULL-DEPTH PREMOLDED !1:,!�EXPANSION JOINT IN BOTH CURB AND JOINT FILLER SIDEWALKfSEE STD PLAN 101.1) EO EXPANSION JOINT IJOINT AND FINISH � DETAIL NOTE:Access lids or covers will not be permitted in the sidewalk surface. See Std Plan 102.1. PUBLIC WORKS CEMENT CONCRETE STD. PLAN - 102 �FN�o$ DEPARTMENT SIDEWALK MAY 2009 LC fw v _w a.®.ao �.d O c S a c E c g am i 0 y be',�,(, o =�' N N F O _ mo ww a atom m�� ° w O16 zE �ti � �0 W m m c e m *I W5 OE Mo. N�2m - LLmO O s oy < = Z� QQ o p •� t0 �1m. m �Wo. OSo � o 1�,.� ^� 0 4 jM IL c L'v � �. n {2., W LL d Q' ,,, W w H 5t C w ..0. •C m Cm:0 0= 1��s @ S5 to z G W w 2 �f O E m Yi.�V� e t o SFV- `Vy� pFF' x a H n C U, $:� o c m o m.E o WCw, - C <E ¢dLa o2 0-. o Z Y N Cd mn 1w U'O N a trw <Q €� N GLO Wq H NHS C ^LL< a Kw 2w Wrd` W Um FGN- vi �N - � OQ Wa OQ N mm =N w Ym tJ O < Z Qi O 2 Z z O m J Z u�wl w U rrd U w = < OC Lr < O L YmN N Z JLL 00 N W < = Ir a2 R Vu ONa O 2 a- U ow N a® O n ll ll� V 2 =i i t (756Q - _ 00 o ^ �U = o _ = O 0 LL b w b w m wrz Ix F U i LU 4 N W > m LU Ow LU o Y LU og SJLf Ur J-HEJ13H DIUUVd NAJ a B49314 ONSYj ('dAJ1 .B-z w =.- .0 AL-L = J C 2 zN WZ WZW S F F W^ W^ (d)JJ LY ('dKO = XVW.Z 0-d W 'XYYY.Z A-,Z L7 O m w �u N ^ V C O NK N _ S� LL U O O lowa a a a LL W uj m o a C N p a < Ld WZ O a m 4 m ~ 4 W ¢ W NP O U W = U n. = 0 tU m F UF QU U LC R p y C f w 1- SS W S w N R O N K = mma c7® K Z wr^p. a a r K Z Z LLW U m Z mG J O O O< m W ZQN 4 w Z W =� _ ~ W Um F5• O i F- F- 'p6' m am W Z O C O W _4 _ — ___� U 7 z Q Q Z OMOdAJ VS)1 :A9 Kmvdci w LL Z J W t All j 6 d a o E a Z d lot U) S" N Q o �1 w U) a = 2 y O a U rr jµGa W W O m m K 1=- W K a O W uj J m Q O U wit © O C z dq O Z C m K _ U F F W H J O - N m = N m - }W \ U c O G O \ O O = O I1 m � � F S o a I O ALrr 6 Wy Y Z \ 0.rc WN 2 < a U K U Z z y e m z m a z 'w a>: N C a U W O m W m W Jm W C z 0 z N O N W Z N }m f. O O O F O 0 o m v p _ D d p O Wa D z m a r�► W- Ws W® U F a� Nq i Z O r- aao-q.ko vsn :.ke NmyNci O 1�1 w m W o C C0 ba�� g a r� 1�1- cF y iJ F O � �p� 'U` w> m i � �•�' add yd ^� y Z w good m � vo J d LL E$ f n dti�6 e�S5 Z p W y Q �1 - t1 O y�t e Z s Zt 0 11111l WN� w f i U ars i C Z K K < m� n o por w 9 Y O S� F z b WW f F N a< O Y 4 a Z m J z a x U (� W Oo z p aWW Ow w - -- FQZ W< xa.. OZ FU m m0 t N OJ Z m _ W m. O 1 Wd UwSC ON z z Z a Z= y Y =z mW p WK H F D c F t W m m 1- ti� a a 1 1 W <U' 0 0 .Bt Q z y be N Z Z V o J J O v W V rrir a a b c U ---- L wo z� ° G� w� W� 3 t 0 WO m m mD S< Y WZ VZ ! W 7 W U> J oI Z Fv° Oa �y z � 0 mT _ a a8 0 ` C = O $ to®1 N Y U< ~ V 1 Zw ui J Q C� o ~h = Mlfl z 0 N V N �= ni M♦ a W to�f V o Q-' >TW}W} 0 N? y? Z FF d W �' UU d_ Q O UU W 0 y F 'C W W W O z W W Q LLLL Q LL LL (y ZYY mNe tw h tL J? mK w < z a dzdz K ~ W U0,., W W U w� U 1 1 U wd m p < { z < z 1 1 m LL 66 < Z x w bb hx LL 1. Z w 2 = i7 Cl Ow m Om m S' y= Zt�11 J ZN WWQ z 2N 1- _ . O� ~U po U O O 2 = �- K o � y • F A a W yW d a w K r^ )d a a a w z a^ F F {II SCr�OW o SOW m O K z W _ d < Q m Ow =7 d < Z m Zy�j LL> U m �w w> U Q Omw 4 Z W 0 < Z m K N7U Y U wm WoZ Y a O U S zoZ Z N K U FWLL N d' 1V. �W W zQ f LL E M se Z Z LL ~ fZY U m maz V Om.-.Z y Taa ONO--UO VSII AB WYNO Y Ccz7 d %) # © k °° ~ 0 . & � E■ © %�a �� : ■ ■ [ § ®| ! \ �$ � ! ■ � & 2 /§ � � , ) [ § ! _ . -Z . . @ mmo ( L) k)!:\zo § § . ! 2 Z � - - - � 0. § l - § \ . . � ( ; ( cc ) k ( w . k 2 ` j 2 . . § o | w ± . § / am ) \ . ! ' � \ w k w [ k \ - 6 . . � § § � � 2 y ƒ z ° ) §( § 2. § §§u 2 §§w ®cc 3 02 . � § 0k a ' 7 z � f Z § CD} . § . . w § . � _.A),O m__ Fq' min z , a s"� `�c ;b t� "' = �� s��.�x.� '�S,�3=•. � a�r ''� '�������� � t .'S' " '"�',�n �'�7. r-^4�a,,. -� a ,r h as �4d #��w,� �. �-�` �` �-��'.. € x, - �;E�: `'a��. ....3 �"�� r. a� yi`^�� ��..,� �-� .�{�x���� ✓ �g,y. � �'t �a �'�,.a��tt., �*�1� fit."*, t" t �•.. ' gym.� *u a X Mr- 1 T '�•" '" * ?f' ;�,, s� 'ice � �.'rySx �. : >s���x, t��� � 'n+t�*a :�, 91`�e,v _ '^s,.i,„ •5 'P� ��` ��*rz.'S'� " �z{ss tq,vk ,. _ �' y: ,a, 3 v,�, r..:v.�,�,•,_ �p�sg a,,,��, .. r -'3 _s�� a rz� „4+`� £ars "" %a• _ �.+w `tr & k. �S"> 1'*� +::,.r' 3;tij `tt ., +: tom' i a � tz 't ° �- "�.,s��a���::�cs�'a � "��'�. "� x^% �_'� .. "�•z� `'�"��� "��� .t ,v ��'''�` �.y v* fn �` i'��t ,$ xsytw %WMA Iwo .,,�;r �'3£g�'}r-�i`�� ,'i �- a .� x � r i�•.. ''�' `��x �r $ � sa" �� � c��'�#�; �i' �, ��- # ':. x 3 .,€. ' r �w�; .�:*��'�i.�a�a'��s�`'�,'�`*�-��`" ,a; � �w � `4 :.. ��ls��,-, # ,� ...ro. `` ��s.;'TM�;�` �� �a..0�•,,ta � -w p. ca «..Tte,+,�� e�S`�'� �S"'�t,�q,.,F `' f• i��r � � �„.irr� ,aat �..�,� �� r.: '. <�S � `•f' ,aa� �� ,� �� ,,�:�� � ^�s ' 4a �`�z� �r .'t� �*� &�'�`�+ �xax h�x& ms `�,�v u..�` :xis _5=�"� r � E�e�. #'��, '•.t' ? �`5 .. si c r �` 4 i s { s h. ` U �c rc � X'w a i Y `�� MO 'e, tm ^€ 'u m`t r ,"t• t. �'`�''�"'s"`��, �''�'x.y *`� `�. �' �kY �..,�',.a.�j�a� ��Z '€- y '�'��ca����' *? +��. -i:.z``�, "' +. t5a- � ,���.,.��, ,��f'f ��,��,« } �,� � a�eg 't eek a �i��. ,.,n,� �`• g:�} .fir t,C , ,*t ,c �; 'i',+.t"• a, r €°+. - s}°�,c.: �" r xa3"'t i n v a a { i s u B:t ig x a .�c§k��zk �sn�"�"ffirk� �w✓��. '���#��"�`"�w' �Ys'��` �� �� 's��; s�s'>e' ;..5' .��-'`"r��x�'� ?i~;� ��,,'fir r. s ,,._ -.� - k ..�,S' - mom MW e. "" �t _ ,'* € s - a WK W WA @ �zY f xt €mss I Rug✓� a-Nis3� k"�"'� 'S4 Wr STONEGATE LIFT STATION WAR011834 King Co Is Date: November 16, 2005 wr Effective Date: December 16, 2005 Expiration Date: December 16, 2010 R CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER GENERAL PERMIT National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) and State Waste Discharge General Permit for Stormwater Discharges Associated With Construction Activity ow State of Washington Department of Ecology Olympia, Washington 98504-7600 In compliance with the provisions of The State of Washington Water Pollution Control Law Chapter 90.48 Revised Code of Washington •► and The Federal Water Pollution Control Act (The Clean Water Act) +r. Title 33 United States Code, Section 1251 et seq. wr Until this permit expires, is modified or revoked,Permittees that have properly obtained coverage under this general permit are authorized to discharge in accordance with the special and general conditions which follow. w David C. Peeler Manager Water Quality Program Washington State Department of Ecology aw - Page 2 of 46 TABLE OF CONTENTS SUMMARY OF PERMIT REPORT SUBMITTALS.....................................................................3 SUMMARY OF REQUIRED ON SITE DOCUMENTATION.....................................................3 SPECIAL CONDITIONS S1. PERMIT COVERAGE.....................................:..................................................................4 S3. COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS........:......................................................................9 S4. MONITORING REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................10 S5. REPORTING AND RECORDKEEPING REQUIREMENTS.........................................15 S6. PERMIT FEES...................................................................................................................18 ST SOLID AND LIQUID WASTE DISPOSAL ...............:............ .....18 S8. DISCHARGES TO 303(d) OR TMDL WATERBODIES................................................18 S9. STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN...................................................21 S 10. NOTICE OF TERMINATION..........................................................................................29 GENERAL CONDITIONS ...........................................................................................................30 G1. DISCHARGE VIOLATIONS ...........................................................................................30 G2. SIGNATORY REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................................30 fit G3. RIGHT OF INSPECTION AND ENTRY.........................................................................31 G4. GENERAL PERMIT MODIFICATION AND REVOCATION......................................31 G5. REVOCATION OF COVERAGE UNDER THE PERMIT .............................................31 G6. REPORTING A CAUSE FOR MODIFICATION............................................................32 G7. COMPLIANCE WITH OTHER LAWS AND STATUTES.............................................32 G8. DUTY TO REAPPLY.......................................................................................................32 G9. TRANSFER OF GENERAL PERMIT COVERAGE.......................................................32 G10. REMOVED SUBSTANCES.............................................................................................33 Gl 1. DUTY TO PROVIDE INFORMATION...........................................................................33 G12. OTHER REQUIREMENTS OF 40 CFR...........................................................................33 G13. ADDITIONAL MONITORING........................................................................................33 G14. PENALTIES FOR VIOLATING PERMIT CONDITIONS .............................................33 G15. UPSET ...............................................................................................................................34 G16. PROPERTY RIGHTS........................................................................................................34 P G17. DUTY TO COMPLY ........................................................................................................34 G18. TOXIC POLLUTANTS.....................................................................................................34 G19. PENALTIES FOR TAMPERING.....................................................................................35 G20. REPORTING PLANNED CHANGES..............................................................................35 G21. REPORTING OTHER INFORMATION..........................................................................35 - rr Page 3 of 46 G22. REPORTING ANTICIPATED NON-COMPLIANCE.....................................................35 G23. REQUESTS TO BE EXCLUDED FROM COVERAGE UNDER THE PERMIT..........36 G24. APPEALS...........................................................................................................................36 iwr G25. SEVERABILITY...............................................................................................................36 G26. BYPASS PROHIBITED....................................................................................................36 APPENDIX A—DEFINITIONS...................................................................................................39 APPENDIXB-ACRONYMS .....................................................................................................46 SUMMARY OF PERMIT REPORT SUBMITTALS Refer to the Special and General Conditions for additional submittal requirements. Permit Submittal Frequency First Submittal Date Section S5.A High Turbidity/Transparency Phone As Necessary Within 24 hours Reporting S5.B Discharge Monitoring Report Monthly Within 15 days after the applicable monitoring period aw S51 Noncompliance Notification As necessary Immediately S51 Noncompliance Notification—Written As necessary Within 5 Days of non- ""' Report compliance G2. Notice of Change in Authorization As necessary 4W G6. Permit Application for Substantive As necessary Changes to the Discharge G8. Application for Permit Renewal 1/permit cycle No later than 180 days before expiration G9. Notice of Permit Transfer As necessary G20. Notice of Planned Changes As necessary G22. Reporting Anticipated Non-compliance As necessary SUMMARY OF REQUIRED ON SITE DOCUMENTATION Permit Conditions Document Title " Conditions S2, S5 Permit Coverage Letter Conditions S2, S5 Construction Stormwater General Permit Conditions S4, S5 Site Log Book Conditions S9, S5 Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan SWPPP Page 4 of 46 SPECIAL CONDITIONS Sl. PERMIT COVERAGE A. Permit Area This general permit covers all areas of Washington State, except for federal and tribal ` lands specified in S l.D.3. B. Operators Required to Seek Coverage Under this General Permit: 1. Operators of the following construction activities are required to seek coverage under this permit: a. Clearing, grading and/or excavation which results in the disturbance of one or more acres, and discharges stormwater to surface waters of the state; and clearing, grading and/or excavation on sites smaller than one acre which are part of a larger common plan of development or sale, if the common plan of development or sale will ultimately disturb one acre or more, and discharges stormwater to surface waters of the state. i. This includes forest practices that are part of a construction activity that will result in the disturbance of one or more acres, and discharges to surface waters of the state (i.e., forest practices which are preparing a site for construction activities);and b. Any size construction activity discharging stormwater to waters of the state which the Department of Ecology (Ecology): i. Determines to be a significant contributor ofpollutants to waters of the state of Washington, or ii. Reasonably expects to cause a violation of any water quality standard. 2. Operators of the following activities are not required to seek coverage under this permit,unless specifically required under Condition S I.B.Lb. (Significant Contributor): a. Construction activities which discharge all stormwater and non-stormwater to ► groundwater, and have no point source discharge to surface_ water or a storm sewer system that drains to surface waters of the state; b. Construction activities covered under an Erosivity Waiver(Condition S2.C); c. Routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade, hydraulic capacity, or original purpose of a facility. Page 5 of 46 C. Authorized Discharges: 1. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity. Subject to compliance with the terms and conditions of this permit,Permittees are authorized to discharge stormwater associated with construction activity to surface waters of the state or to a e storm sewer system that drains to surface waters of the state. 2. Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activity. This permit also authorizes stormwater discharges from support activities related to the permitted construction site (e.g., off-site equipment staging yards,material storage areas, borrow areas, etc.)provided: a. The support activity is directly related to the permitted construction site that is required to have an NPDES permit; and b. The support activity is not a commercial operation serving multiple unrelated construction projects, and does not operate beyond the completion of the construction activity; and c. Appropriate controls and measures are identified in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)for the discharges from the support activity areas. .r 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges. The categories and sources of non-stormwater discharges identified below are conditionally authorized,provided the discharge is consistent with the terms and conditions of this permit: a. Discharges from fire fighting activities; b. Fire hydrant system flushing; c. Potable water including uncontaminated water line flushing(de-chlorinated); d. Pipeline hydrostatic test water; 1 e. Uncontaminated air conditioning or compressor condensate; f. Uncontaminated ground water or spring water; g. Uncontaminated excavation de-watering(in accordance with S9.D.10) VW h. Uncontaminated discharges from foundation or footing drains; i. Water used to control dust; j. Routine external building wash down that does not use detergents; and 'w k. Landscape irrigation. r Page 6 of 46 All authorized non-stormwater discharges, except for discharges from fire fighting activities, shall be adequately addressed in the SWPPP and comply with Special Condition S3. D. Limitations on Coverage +rid The Director may require any discharger to apply for and obtain coverage under an - individual permit or another more specific general permit. Such alternative coverage will be required when Ecology determines that this general permit does not provide adequate assurance that water quality will be protected; or there is a reasonable potential for the project to cause or contribute to a violation of water quality standards. rw The following stormwater discharges are not covered by this permit: 1. Post-construction stormwater discharges that originate from the site after construction activities have been completed and the site has undergone final stabilization. 2. Nonpoint source silvicultural activities such as nursery operations, site preparation, reforestation and subsequent cultural treatment, thinning,prescribed burning,pest and fire control,harvesting operations, surface drainage, or road construction and maintenance from which there is natural runoff as excluded in 40 CFR Subpart 122.27. .r 3. Stormwater from any federal project or project on federal land or land within an Indian Reservation except for the Puyallup Reservation. Within the Puyallup Reservation, any project that discharges to surface water on land held in trust by the federal government may be covered by this permit. 4. Stormwater from any site covered under an existing NPDES individual permit in which stormwater management and/or treatment requirements are included for all stormwater discharges associated with construction activity. 5. Where an applicable Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL) specifically precludes or prohibits discharges from construction activity,the operator is not eligible for coverage under this permit. S2. APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Permit Application Forms 1. Notice of Intent Form/Timeline a. Operators of new or previously unpermitted construction activities shall submit a complete and accurate permit application form [Notice of Intent(NOI)] to Ecology. Applicants are encouraged to use Ecology's internet-based electronic NOI to apply for permit coverage. b. The NOI shall be submitted on or before the date of the first public notice (see Condition S2.B below) and at least 60 days prior to the discharge of stormwater - err Page 7 of 46 from construction activities. The 30-day public comment period required by WAC 173-226-130(5)begins on the publication date of the second public notice. Unless Ecology responds to the complete application in writing,based on public comments, or any other relevant factors, coverage under the general permit will automatically commence on the thirty-first day following receipt by Ecology of a completed NOI, or the issuance date of this permit,whichever is later; unless a later date is specified by Ecology in writing. c. Applicants that discharge to a storm sewer system operated by Seattle, King County, Snohomish County, Tacoma,Pierce County, or Clark County shall also submit a copy of the NOI to the appropriate jurisdiction. 2. Transfer of Covera eg Form Current coverage under this permit may be transferred to one or more new operators, including operators of sites within a Common Plan of Development,by submitting a Transfer of Coverage Form in accordance with Condition G9. Transfers do not require public notice. B. Public Notice For new or previously unpermitted sites, the applicant shall publish a public notice at least one time each week for two consecutive weeks,with a 7-day time span between dates, in a newspaper that has general circulation in the county in which the construction is to take place. The notice shall contain the following: 1. A statement that"The applicant is seeking coverage under the Washington State Department of Ecology's Construction Stormwater NPDES and State Waste Discharge General Permit"; 2. The name,address and location of the construction site; 3. The name and address of the applicant; 4. The type of construction activity that will result in a discharge, (e.g.,residential construction, commercial construction, etc.)and the number of acres to be disturbed; 5. The name of the receiving water(s) (i.e.,the surface water(s)that the site will discharge r. to), or if the discharge is through a storm sewer system,the name of the operator of the storm sewer; and r 6. The statement: "Any person desiring to present their views to the Department of Ecology regarding this application, or interested in the Department's action on this application may notify the Department of Ecology in writing within 30 days of the last date of publication of this notice. Comments can be submitted to: Department of Ecology,P.O. Box 47696, Olympia,WA 98504-7696,Attn: Water Quality Program, Construction Stormwater". .r Page 8 of 46 ` C. Erosivi1y Waiver Operators may qualify for a waiver from the permit if the following conditions are met: 1. The site will result in the disturbance of less than 5 acres; and the site is not a portion to of a common plan of development or sale that will disturb 5 acres or greater. 2. Calculation of Erosivity"R"Factor and Regional Timeframe: a. The project's rainfall erosivity factor("R"Factor)must be less than 5 during the period of construction activity, as calculated using the Texas A&M University online rainfall erosivity calculator at: http://ei.tamu.edu/. The period of construction activity begins at initial earth disturbance and ends with final stabilization; and, in addition: b. The entire period of construction activity must fall within the following r timeframes: i. For sites west of the Cascades Crest: June 15 —September 15; or ii. For sites east of the Cascades Crest, excluding the Central Basin: June 15 — October 15; or iii. For sites east of the Cascades Crest,within the Central Basin*: no additional timeframe restrictions apply. *Note: The Central Basin is defined as the portions of Eastern Washington with mean annual precipitation of less than 12 inches. 3. Operators must submit a complete Erosivity Waiver Certification Form at least one week prior to commencing land disturbing activities. Certification must include: a. A statement that the operator will comply with applicable local stormwater requirements; and b. A statement that the operator will implement appropriate erosion and sediment control BMPs to prevent violations of water quality standards. .�w 4. This waiver is not available for facilities declared a significant contributor of pollutants as defined in Condition S I.B.Lb. rrrr 5. This waiver does not apply to construction activity which includes non-stormwater discharges listed in S 1.C.3. 6. If construction activity extends beyond the certified waiver period for any reason, the operator shall either: wr +rf► Page 9 of 46 AW a. Recalculate the rainfall erosivity"R" factor using the original start date and a new projected ending date and, if the"R"factor is still under 5 and the entire project falls within the applicable regional timeframe in S2.C.2.b, complete and submit an amended waiver certification form before the original waiver expires; or b. Submit a complete permit application to Ecology in accordance with Condition S2.A and B before the end of the certified waiver period. S3. COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS A. Discharges shall not cause or contribute to a violation of surface water quality standards (Chapter 173-201A WAC), ground water quality standards (Chapter 173-200 WAC), %W sediment management standards (Chapter 173-204 WAC), and human health-based criteria in the National Toxics Rule (40 CFR Part 131.36). Discharges that are not in compliance with these standards are not authorized. B. Prior to the discharge of stormwater and non-stormwater to waters of the state, the Permittee shall apply all known, available, and reasonable methods of prevention, ' control, and treatment(AKAR7). This includes the preparation and implementation of an adequate Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan(SWPPP), with all appropriate best management practices(BMPs) installed and maintained in accordance with the SWPPP and the terms and conditions of this permit. C. Compliance with water quality standards shall be presumed,unless discharge monitoring P data or other site specific information demonstrates that a discharge causes or contributes to a violation of water quality standards, when the Permittee is: *, 1. In full compliance with all permit conditions, including planning, sampling, monitoring, reporting, and recordkeeping conditions; and #W 2. Fully implementing stormwater BMPs contained in stormwater management manuals published or approved by Ecology, or BMPs that are demonstrably equivalent to BMPs contained in stormwater technical manuals published or approved by Ecology, including the proper selection, implementation, and maintenance of all applicable and appropriate BMPs for on-site pollution control. D. For sites that discharge to both surface water and ground water, all ground water discharges are also subject to the terms and conditions of this permit. Permittees who discharge to ground water through an injection well shall comply with any applicable rrr requirements of the Underground Injection Control (UIC)regulations, Chapter 173-218 WAC. ow +w. Page 10 of 46 S4. MONITORING REQUIREMENTS The primary monitoring requirements are summarized in Table 3 (below): Table 3. Summary of Monitoring Requirements) Size of Soil Disturbance 2 Weekly Weekly Weekly Weekly Site Sampling w/ Sampling w/ pH Inspections Turbidity Meter Transparency sampling3 Tube Sites which disturb less than 1 Not acre Required Not Required Not Required Required Sites which disturb 1 acre or Required Sampling Required —either Required more,but less than 5 acres method rr Sites which disturb 5 acres or Required Required Not Required Required more A. Site Log Book The Permittee shall maintain a site log book that contains a record of the implementation of the SWPPP and other permit requirements including the installation and maintenance of BMPs, site inspections, and stormwater monitoring. B. Site Inspections 1. Site inspections shall include all areas disturbed by construction activities, all BMPs, and all stormwater discharge points. Stormwater shall be visually examined for the 1 Additional monitoring requirements may apply for: 1)discharges to 303(d)listed waterbodies and waterbodies with applicable TMDLs for turbidity,fine sediment,high pH,or phosphorus-see Condition S8;and 2)sites required to perform additional monitoring by Ecology order—see Condition G13. 2 Soil disturbance is calculated by adding together all areas affected by construction activity. Construction Activity means clearing,grading,excavation,and any other activity which disturbs the surface of the land,including ingress/egress from the site. 3 Beginning October 1,2006,if construction activity involves significant concrete work or the use of engineered soils,and stormwater from the affected area drains to a stormwater collection system or other surface water,the Permittee shall conduct pH sampling in accordance with Condition S4.D. 4 Beginning October 1,2008,sites with one or more acres,but less than 5 acres of soil disturbance,shall conduct turbidity or transparency sampling in accordance with Condition S4.C. 5 Beginning October 1,2006,sites greater than or equal to 5 acres of soil disturbance,shall conduct turbidity sampling using a turbidity meter in accordance with Condition S4.C. Page 11 of 46 presence of suspended sediment,turbidity, discoloration, and oil sheen.Inspectors shall evaluate the effectiveness of BMPs and determine if it is necessary to install, maintain, or repair BMPs to improve the quality of stormwater discharges. Based on the results of the inspection,the Permittee shall correct the problems identified as follows: a. Review the SWPPP for compliance with Condition S9 and make appropriate revisions within 7 days of the inspection; and b. Fully implement and maintain appropriate source control and/or treatment BMPs fAw as soon as possible,but no later than 10 days of the inspection; and c. Document BMP implementation and maintenance in the site log book. 2. The site inspections shall be conducted at least once every calendar week and within 24 hours of any discharge from the site. The inspection frequency for temporarily stabilized, inactive sites may be reduced to once every calendar month. 3. Site inspections shall be conducted by a person who is knowledgeable in the principles and practices of erosion and sediment control. The inspector shall have the skills to: a. Assess the site conditions and construction activities that could impact the quality of stormwater, and b. Assess the effectiveness of erosion and sediment control measures used to control the quality of stormwater discharges. 4. Beginning October 1, 2006, construction sites one acre or larger that discharge stormwater to surface waters of the state, shall have site inspections conducted by a Certified Erosion and Sediment Control Lead(CESCL). The CESCL shall be identified in the SWPPP and shall be present on-site or on-call at all times. Certification shall be obtained through an approved erosion and sediment control 1W training program that meets the minimum training standards established by Ecology (see BMP C 160 in the Manual). 5. The inspector shall summarize the results of each inspection in an inspection report or w. checklist and be entered into, or attached to,the site log book. At a minimum, each inspection report or checklist shall include: �►. a. Inspection date and time. b. Weather information; general conditions during inspection and approximate amount of precipitation since the last inspection, and within the last 24 hours. c. A summary or list of all BMPs which have been implemented, including observations of all erosion/sediment control structures or practices. d. The following shall be noted: w► i. locations of BMPs inspected, 4W Page 12 of 46 ii. locations of BMPs that need maintenance, iii. the reason maintenance is needed, iv. locations of BMPs that failed to operate as designed or intended, and v. locations where additional or different BMPs are needed, and the reason(s)why. 3 e. A description of stormwater discharged from the site. The inspector shall note the presence of suspended sediment,turbid water, discoloration, and/or oil sheen, as applicable. f. Any water quality monitoring performed during inspection. g. General comments and notes, including a brief description of any BMP repairs, maintenance or installations made as a result of the inspection. h. A statement that, in the judgment of the person conducting the site inspection, the site is either in compliance or out of compliance with the terms and conditions of " the SWPPP and the permit. If the site inspection indicates that the site is out of compliance, the inspection report shall include a summary of the remedial actions required to bring the site back into compliance, as well as a schedule of implementation. i. Name, title, and signature of the person conducting site inspection; and the lot following statement: "I certify that this report is true, accurate, and complete, to the best of my knowledge and belief'. C. Turbidity/Transparency Sampling Requirements 1. Sampling Methods/Effective Dates a. Beginning October 1, 2006, if construction activity will involve the disturbance of 5 acres or more, the Permittee shall conduct turbidity sampling per Condition S4.C. b. Beginning October 1, 2008, if construction activity will involve greater than or equal to 1 acre,but less than 5 acres of soil disturbance, the Permittee shall err conduct transparency sampling or turbidity sampling per Condition S4.C. 2. Sampling Frequency a. Sampling shall be conducted at least once every calendar week,when there is a { discharge of stormwater(or authorized non-stormwater) from the site. Samples shall be representative of the flow and characteristics of the discharge. b. When there is no discharge during a calendar week, sampling is not required. c. Sampling is not required outside of normal working hours or during unsafe conditions. If a Permittee is unable to sample during a monitoring period, the Discharge Monitoring Report(DMR) shall include a brief explanation. Page 13 of 46 +r 3. Sampling Locations a. Sampling is required at all discharge points where stormwater(or authorized non- stormwater)is discharged off-site. b. All sampling point(s) shall be identified on the SWPPP site map and be clearly marked in the field with a flag, tape, stake or other visible marker. 4. Sampling and Analysis Methods a. Turbidity analysis shall be performed with a calibrated turbidity meter tw (turbidimeter), either on-site or at an accredited lab. The results shall be recorded in the site log book in Nephelometric Turbidity Units(NTU). wr b. Transparency analysis shall be performed on-site with a 1 3/4 inch diameter, 60 centimeter(cm) long Transparency Tube. The results shall be recorded in the site log book in centimeters (cm). Transparency Tubes are available from: + http://watermonitoringeguip.com/pages/strearn.html Analytical Sampling Benchmark Parameter Units Method Frequency Value Turbidity NTU SM2130 or Weekly, if 25 NTU EPA180.1 discharging Transparency cm Manufacturer Weekly, if 31 cm instructions, or discharging Ecology Guidance 5. Turbidity/Transparency Benchmark Values The benchmark value for turbidity is 25 NTU(Nephelometric Turbidity Units); and the benchmark value for transparency is 31 cm. a. Turbidity 26—249 NTU, or Transparency 30—7 cm: If discharge turbidity is greater than 25 NTU,but less than 250 NTU; or if discharge transparency is less than 31 cm,but greater than 6 cm, the CESCL shall: i. Review the SWPPP for compliance with Condition S9 and make appropriate revisions within 7 days of the discharge that exceeded the benchmark; and ii. Fully implement and maintain appropriate source control and/or treatment BMPs as soon as possible,but within 10 days of the discharge that exceeded the benchmark; and iii. Document BMP implementation and maintenance in the site log book. b. Turbidity 250 NTU or greater, or Transparency 6 cm or less: �r Page 14 of 46 If discharge turbidity is greater than or equal to 250 NTU; or if discharge transparency is less than or equal to 6 cm,the CESCL shall: i. Notify Ecology by phone in accordance with Condition S5.A.; and ii. Review the SWPPP for compliance with Condition S9 and make appropriate revisions within 7 days of the discharge that exceeded the benchmark; and iii. Fully implement and maintain appropriate source control and/or treatment BMPs as soon as possible, but within 10 days of the discharge that exceeded the benchmark; ,,,,,i iv. Document BMP implementation and maintenance in the site log book; and v. Continue to sample discharges daily until: 1. turbidity is 25 NTU (or lower); or 2. transparency is 31 cm(or greater); or 3. the CESCL has demonstrated compliance with the water quality standard for turbidity: a. no more than 5 NTU over background turbidity, if background is less than 50 NTU, or �r b. no more than 10% over background turbidity, if background is 50 NTU or greater; or at 4. the discharge stops or is eliminated. D. pH Monitoring: Sites with Significant Concrete Work or Engineered Soils Beginning October 1, 2006, if construction activity will result in the disturbance of 1 acre or more, and involves significant concrete work or the use of engineered soils, and stormwater from the affected area drains to surface waters of the state or to a storm sewer system that drains to surface waters of the state, the Permittee shall conduct pH monitoring as set forth below: 1. For sites with significant concrete work,the pH monitoring period shall commence when the concrete is first exposed to precipitation and continue weekly until stormwater pH is 8.5 or less. a. "Significant concrete work"means greater than 1000 cubic yards poured concrete or recycled concrete. 2. For sites with engineered soils,the pH monitoring period shall commence when the soil amendments are first exposed to precipitation and shall continue until the area of engineered soils is fully stabilized. + r r Page 15 of 46 a. "Engineered soils"means soil amendments including,but not limited,to Portland cement treated base (CTB), cement kiln dust(CKD), or fly ash. 3. During the pH monitoring period,the Permittee shall obtain a representative sample 01" of stormwater and conduct pH analysis at least once per week. 4. The Permittee shall monitor pH in the sediment trap/pond(s) or other locations that receive stormwater runoff from the area of significant concrete work or engineered soils prior to discharge to surface waters. 1, 5. The benchmark value for pH is 8.5 standard units. Any time sampling indicates that pH is 8.5 or greater,the Permittee shall: a. Prevent the high pH water(8.5 or above) from entering storm sewer systems or `" surface waters; and b. If necessary, adjust or neutralize the high pH water using an appropriate treatment +► BMP such as CO2 sparging or dry ice. The Permittee shall obtain written approval from Ecology prior to using any form of chemical treatment other than CO2 sparging or dry ice. 6. The Permittee shall perform pH analysis on-site with a calibrated pH meter,pH test kit, or wide range pH indicator paper. The Permittee shall record pH monitoring results in the site log book. S5. REPORTING AND RECORDKEEPING REQUIREMENTS A. High Turbidity Phone Reporting Any time sampling performed in accordance with Special Condition S4.0 indicates turbidity,is 250 NTU or greater(or transparency is 6 cm or less) the Permittee shall notify the appropriate Ecology regional office by phone within 24 hours of analysis. B. Discharge Monitoring Reports 1. Permittees required to conduct water quality sampling in accordance with Special Conditions SAC (Turbidity/Transparency), S4.D (pH) and/or S8 [303(d)/TMDL sampling] shall submit the results to Ecology monthly on Discharge Monitoring Report(DMR) forms provided by Ecology. • Permittees are authorized and encouraged to submit electronic DMRs using the "E- DMR Form" on Ecology's Construction Stormwater web site: http://www.ecy.wa.gov/t)rograms/wq/stormwater/construction/. 2. The Permittee shall submit DMR forms electronically or by mail to be received by Ecology within 15 days following the end of each month. If there was no discharge +�► during a given monitoring period,the Permittee shall submit the form as required with the words "no discharge" entered in place of the monitoring results. If the Permittee is unable to submit discharge monitoring reports electronically, the Permittee may mail reports to the address listed below: Page 16 of 46 Department of Ecology Water Quality Program- Construction Stormwater PO Box 47696 Olympia,Washington 98504-7696 C. Records Retention The Permittee shall retain records of all monitoring information(site log book, sampling ami results, inspection reports/checklists, etc.), Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan, and any other documentation of compliance with permit requirements during the life of the construction project and for a minimum of three years following the termination of t permit coverage. Such information shall include all calibration and maintenance records, and records of all data used to complete the application for this permit. This period of retention shall be extended during the course of any unresolved litigation regarding the discharge of pollutants by the Permittee or when requested by Ecology. D. Recording of Results For each measurement or sample taken,the Permittee shall record the following information: 1. Date,place,method, and time of sampling or measurement; 2. The individual who performed the sampling or measurement; us 3. The dates the analyses were performed; 4. The individual who performed the analyses; 5. The analytical techniques or methods used; and 6. The results of all analyses. E. Additional Monitoring by the Permittee w� If the Permittee monitors any pollutant more frequently than required by this permit using test procedures specified by Condition S4 of this permit,the results of this monitoring shall be included in the calculation and reporting of the data submitted in the Permittee's DMR. F. Noncompliance Notification 41 In the event the Permittee is unable to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this permit which may cause a threat to human health or the environment,the Permittee shall: 1. Immediately notify Ecology of the failure to comply. rw.. 2. Immediately take action to prevent the discharge/pollution, or otherwise stop or correct the noncompliance, and, if applicable,repeat sampling and analysis of any noncompliance immediately and submit the results to Ecology within five (5) days after becoming aware of the violation. Page 17 of 46 3. Submit a detailed written report to Ecology within five (5) days,unless requested earlier by Ecology. The report shall contain a description of the noncompliance, including exact dates and times, and if the noncompliance has not been corrected,the anticipated time it is expected to continue; and the steps taken or planned to reduce, eliminate, and prevent reoccurrence of the noncompliance. Compliance with these requirements does not relieve the Permittee from responsibility to maintain continuous compliance with the terms and conditions of this permit or the resulting liability for failure to comply. G. Access to Plans and Records 1. The Permittee shall retain the following permit documentation (plans and records) on- 1W site, or within reasonable access to the site, for use by the operator; or on-site review by Ecology or the local jurisdiction: r.► a. General Permit; b. Permit Coverage Letter; c. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP); and .. d. Site Log Book .2. The Permittee(s) shall address written requests for plans and records listed above (Condition S5.G.1) as follows: a. A copy of plans and records shall be provided to Ecology within 14 days of receipt of a written request from Ecology. b. A copy of plans and records shall be provided to the public when requested in writing. Upon receiving a written request from the public for the Permittee's plans and records,the Permittee shall either: i. Provide a copy of the plans and records to the requestor within 14 days of a receipt of the written request; or ii. Notify the requestor within 10 days of receipt of the written request of the location and times within normal business hours when the plans and records may be viewed, and provide access to the plans and records within 14 days of receipt of the written request; or aw iii. Within 14 days of receipt of the written request, the Permittee may submit a copy of the plans and records to Ecology for viewing and/or copying by the requestor at an Ecology office, or a mutually agreed upon location. If plans and records are viewed and/or copied at a location other than at an Ecology office, the Permittee will provide reasonable access to copying services for .. which a reasonable fee may be charged. The Permittee shall notify.the +rr Page 18 of 46 requestor within 10 days of receipt of the request-where the plans and records may be viewed and/or copied. S6. PERMIT FEES The Permittee shall pay permit fees assessed by Ecology. Fees for stormwater discharges covered under this permit shall be established by Chapter 173-224 WAC. Permit fees will continue to be assessed until the permit is terminated in accordance with Special Condition S 10 or revoked in accordance with General Condition G5. S7. SOLID AND LIQUID WASTE DISPOSAL Solid and liquid wastes generated by construction activity such as demolition debris, construction materials, contaminated materials, and waste materials from maintenance activities, including liquids and solids from cleaning catch basins and other stormwater facilities, shall be handled and disposed of in accordance with: 1. Special Condition S3, Compliance with Standards, and r 2. WAC 173-216-110, and other applicable regulations. S8. DISCHARGES TO 303(D) OR TMDL WATERBODIES +rrr A. Sampling and Numeric Effluent Limitations For Discharges to 303(d)-listed Waterbodies 1. 1.Permittees that discharge to water bodies listed as impaired by the State of Washington under Section 303(d) of the Clean Water Act for turbidity, fine sediment,high pH, or phosphorus, shall conduct water quality sampling according to the requirements of this section. 2. All references and requirements associated with Section 303(d) of the Clean Water Act mean the most current listing by Ecology of impaired waters that exists on November 16,2005, or the date when the operator's complete permit application is received by Ecology,whichever is later. B. Discharges to 303(d)-Listed Waterbodies (Turbidity,Fine Sediment, or Phosphorus) 1. Permittees which discharge to waterbodies on the 303(d) list for turbidity,fine sediment, or phosphorus shall conduct turbidity sampling at the following locations to evaluate compliance with the water quality standard for turbidity: a. Background turbidity shall be measured in the 303(d)-listed receiving water immediately upstream(upgradient) or outside the area of influence of the discharge; and b. Discharge turbidity shall be measured at the point of discharge into the 303(d) listed receiving waterbody, inside the area of influence of the discharge; or to r - ,rr " Page 19 of 46 Alternatively, discharge turbidity may be measured at the point where the discharge leaves the construction site,rather than in the receiving waterbody. 2. Based on sampling, if the discharge turbidity exceeds the water quality standard for turbidity(more than 5 NTU over background turbidity when the background turbidity is 50 NTU or less, or more than a 10% increase in turbidity when the background turbidity is more than 50 NTU), all future discharges shall comply with a numeric effluent limit which is equal to the water quality standard for turbidity: 3. If a future discharge exceeds the water quality standard for turbidity, the Permittee shall: a. Review the SWPPP for compliance with Condition S9 and make appropriate revisions within 7 days of the discharge that exceeded the standard; b. Fully implement and maintain appropriate source control and/or treatment BMPs as soon as possible,but within 10 days of the discharge that exceeded the standard; c. Document BMP implementation and maintenance in the site log book; d. Notify the appropriate Ecology Regional Office by phone within 24 hours of analysis; a. e. Continue to sample daily until discharge turbidity meets the water quality standard for turbidity. C. Discharges to waterbodies on the 303(d) list for High pH wr 1. Permittees which discharge to waterbodies on the 303(d) list for high pH shall conduct sampling at one of the following locations to evaluate compliance with the water quality standard for pH (in the range of 6.5 —8.5): a. pH shall be measured at the point of discharge into the 303(d) listed waterbody, inside the area of influence of the discharge; or rrr b.. Alternatively,pH may be measured at the point where the discharge leaves the construction site, rather than in the receiving water. 2. Based on the sampling set forth above, if the pH exceeds the water quality standard for pH (in the range of 6.5— 8.5), all future discharges shall comply with a numeric effluent limit which is equal to the water quality standard for pH. 3. If a future discharge exceeds the water quality standard for pH, the Permittee shall: +� a. Review the SWPPP for compliance with Condition S9 and make appropriate revisions within 7 days of the discharge that exceeded the water quality standard; Page 20 of 46 b. Fully implement and maintain appropriate source control and/or treatment BMPs as soon as possible,but within 10 days of the discharge that exceeded the standards; c. Document BMP implementation and maintenance in the site log book; d. Notify the appropriate Ecology Regional Office by phone within 24 hours of analysis; and e.' Continue to sample daily until discharge meets the water quality standard for pH (in the range of 6.5— 8.5) or the discharge stops or is eliminated. Parameter identified Parameter/Units Analytical Sampling Water Quality in 303(d) listing" Method Frequency Standard IN Turbidity Turbidity/NTU SM2130 or Weekly, if If background is 50 Fine Sediment EPA180.1 discharging NTU or less: 5 NTU Phosphorus over background; or If background is more than 50 NTU: 10% over background k +r1t High pH pH/Standard pH meter Weekly, if In the range of Units discharging 6.5 - 8.5 D. Sampling and Limitations For Sites Discharging to Applicable TMDLs 1. Discharges to a waterbodies subject to an applicable Total Maximum Daily Load (TMDL) for turbidity, fine sediment,high pH, or phosphorus, shall be consistent with the assumptions and requirements of the TMDL. a. Where an applicable TAML sets specific waste load allocations or requirements for discharges covered by this permit, discharges shall be consistent with any specific waste load allocations or requirements established by the applicable TMDL. ii.The Permittee shall sample discharges weekly, or as otherwise specified by the TMDL, to evaluate compliance with the specific waste load allocations or requirements. iii.Analytical methods used to meet the monitoring requirements shall conform to the latest revision of the Guidelines Establishing Test Procedures for the Analysis of Pollutants contained in 40 CFR Part 136. Turbidity and pH methods Page 21 of 46 need not be accredited or registered unless conducted at a laboratory which must otherwise be accredited or registered. b. Where an applicable TMDL has established a general waste load allocation for construction stormwater discharges,but no specific requirements have been identified, compliance with Conditions S4 (Monitoring) and S9 (SWPPPs)will be assumed to be consistent with the approved TMDL. c. Where an applicable TMDL has not specified a waste load allocation for construction stormwater discharges,but has not excluded these discharges, compliance with Conditions S4 (Monitoring) and S9 (SWPPPs)will be assumed to be consistent with the approved TMDL. d. Where an applicable TMDL specifically precludes or prohibits discharges from construction activity,the operator is not eligible for coverage under this permit. 2. Applicable TMDL means a TMDL for turbidity, fine sediment, high pH, or "� phosphorus,which has been completed and approved by EPA prior to November 16, 2005, or prior to the date the operator's complete permit application is received by Ecology,whichever is later. TMDLs completed after the operator's complete permit application is received by Ecology become applicable'to the Permittee only if they are imposed through an administrative order by Ecology, or through a modification of permit coverage. S9. STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN An adequate Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan(SWPPP) for construction activity shall be prepared and implemented in accordance with the requirements of this permit beginning with initial soil disturbance and until final stabilization. A. The SWPPP shall meet the following objectives: 1. To implement Best Management Practices (BMPs)to prevent erosion and sedimentation, and to identify,reduce, eliminate or prevent stormwater contamination' and water pollution from construction activity. 2. To prevent violations of surface water quality, ground water quality, or sediment management standards. 3. To control peak volumetric flow rates and velocities of stormwater discharges. B. General Requirements 1. The SWPPP shall include a narrative and drawings. All BMPs shall be clearly referenced in the narrative and marked on the drawings. ft The SWPPP narrative shall include documentation to explain and justify the pollution prevention decisions made for the project. Documentation shall include: �• a. Information about existing site conditions (topography, drainage, soils, vegetation, etc.); a Page 22 of 46 b. Potential erosion problem areas; c. The 12 elements of a SWPPP in S9.D.1-12, including BMPs used to address each element; d. Construction phasing/sequence and general BMP implementation schedule; e. The actions to be taken if BMP performance goals are not achieved; and ' f. Engineering calculations for ponds and any other designed structures. 2. The Permittee shall modify the SWPPP if, during inspections or investigations conducted by the owner/operator, or the applicable local or state regulatory authority, it is determined that the SWPPP is, or would be, ineffective in eliminating or significantly minimizing pollutants in stormwater discharges from the site. The Permittee shall take the following actions: wr a. Review the SWPPP for compliance with Condition S9 and make appropriate revisions within 7 days of the inspection or investigation; b. Fully implement and maintain appropriate source control and/or treatment BMPs as soon as possible,but no later than 10 days from the inspection or investigation; and c. Document BMP implementation and maintenance in the site log book. 3. The Permittee shall modify the SWPPP whenever there is a change in design, construction, operation, or maintenance at the construction site that has, or could have, a significant effect on the discharge of pollutants to waters of the state. 40 . C. Stormwater Best Management Practices WMPs) BMPs shall be consistent with: ,w 1. Stormwater Management Manual for Western Washington(most recent edition), for sites west of the crest of the Cascade Mountains; 2. Stormwater Management Manual for Eastern Washington(most recent edition), for sites east of the crest of the Cascade Mountains; or 3. Other stormwater management guidance documents or manuals which provide an equivalent level of pollution prevention and are approved by Ecology; or 4. Documentation in the SWPPP that the BMPs selected provides an equivalent level of pollution prevention, compared to the applicable Stormwater Management Manuals, including: ww rrr Page 23 of 46 wo a. The technical basis for the selection of all stormwater BMPs (scientific, technical studies, and/or modeling)which support the performance claims for the BMPs being selected; and a b. An assessment of how the selected BMP will satisfy AKART requirements and the applicable federal technology-based treatment requirements under 40 CFR part 125.3. D. SWPPP—Narrative Contents and Requirements The Permittee shall include each of the 12 elements below in S9.D.1-12 in the narrative of the SWPPP and ensure that they are implemented unless site conditions render the element unnecessary and the exemption from that element is clearly justified in the Ow SWPPP. 1. Preserve Vegetation/Mark Clearing Limits a. Prior to beginning land disturbing activities, including clearing and grading, clearly mark all clearing limits,sensitive areas and their buffers, and trees that are r. to be preserved within the construction area. b. The duff layer,native top soil,and natural vegetation shall be retained in an undisturbed state to the maximum degree practicable. 2. Establish Construction Access w, a. Construction vehicle access and exit shall be limited to one route, if possible. b. Access points shall be stabilized with a pad of quarry spalls, crushed rock, or other equivalent BMP, to minimize the tracking of sediment onto public roads. o c. Wheel wash or tine baths shall be located on site, if the stabilized construction entrance is not effective in preventing sediment from being tracked onto public roads. d. If sediment is tracked off site,public roads shall be cleaned thoroughly at the end of each day, or more frequently during wet weather. Sediment shall be removed from r. roads by shoveling or pickup sweeping and shall be transported to a controlled sediment disposal area. e. Street washing is allowed only after sediment is removed in accordance with S9.D.2.d. Street wash wastewater shall be controlled by pumping back on site or otherwise be prevented from discharging into systems tributary to waters of the 4W state. 3. Control Flow Rates "" a. Properties and waterways downstream from development sites shall be protected from erosion due to increases in the velocity and peak volumetric flow rate of stormwater runoff from the project site,as required by local plan approval `�' authority. Page 24 of 46 b. Where necessary to comply with S9.D.3.a., stormwater retention or detention facilities shall be constructed as one of the first steps in grading. Detention facilities shall be functional prior to construction of site improvements(e.g., impervious surfaces). c. If permanent infiltration ponds are used for flow control during construction,these facilities shall be protected from siltation during the construction phase. 4. Install Sediment Controls a. Stormwater runoff from disturbed areas shall pass through a sediment pond or other appropriate sediment removal BMP,prior to leaving a construction site or prior to discharge to an infiltration facility.Runoff from fully stabilized areas may be discharged without a sediment removal BMP,but shall meet the flow control performance standard of S9.D.3.a. b. Sediment control BMPs(sediment ponds,traps, filters, etc.) shall be constructed as one of the first steps in grading. These BMPs shall be functional before other land disturbing activities take place. c. BMPs intended to trap sediment on site shall be located in a manner to avoid interference with the movement of juvenile salmonids attempting to enter off- channel areas or drainages. 5. Stabilize Soils a. Exposed and unworked soils shall be stabilized by application of effective BMPs that prevent erosion. Applicable BMPs include,but are not limited to: temporary rw and permanent seeding, sodding,mulching,plastic covering, erosion control fabrics and matting, soil application of polyacrylamide(PAM),the early application of gravel base on areas to be paved, and dust control. b. Depending on the geographic location of the project,no soils shall remain exposed and unworked for more than the time periods set forth below to prevent erosion: West of the Cascade Mountains Crest During the dry season(May 1 - Sept. 30): 7 days During the wet season(October 1 -April 30): 2 days + East of the Cascade Mountains Crest, except for Central Basin* During the dry season (July 1 - September 30): 10 days During the wet season (October 1 - June 30): 5 days The Central Basin*, East of the Cascade Mountains Crest During the dry Season(July 1 - September 30): 30 days During the wet season(October 1 -June 30): 15 days *Note: The Central Basin is defined as the portions of Eastern Washington with mean annual precipitation of less than 12 inches. aw Page 25 of 46 rrr The time period may be adjusted by a local jurisdiction, if the jurisdiction can show that local precipitation data justify a different standard. c. Soils shall be stabilized at the end of the shift before a holiday or weekend if needed w. based on the weather forecast. d. Soil stockpiles shall be stabilized from erosion,protected with sediment trapping measures, and where possible,be located away from storm drain inlets, waterways, and drainage channels. 6. Protect Slopes a. Design and construct cut and fill slopes in a manner that will minimize erosion. Applicable practices include,but are not limited to,reducing continuous length of �..r slope with terracing and diversions,reducing slope steepness,and roughening slope surfaces(e.g.,track walking). b. Off-site stormwater(run-on) or groundwater shall be diverted away from slopes and disturbed areas with interceptor dikes,pipes, and/or swales. Off-site stormwater should be managed separately from stormwater generated on the site. c. At the top of slopes, collect drainage in pipe slope drains or protected channels to prevent erosion. i. West of the Cascade Mountains Crest: Temporary pipe slope drains shall handle the peak 10-minute velocity of flow from a Type IA, 10-year, 24-hour frequency storm for the developed condition. Alternatively,the 10-year, 1- hour flow rate predicted by an approved continuous runoff model, increased by a factor of 1.6,may be used. The hydrologic analysis shall use the existing land cover condition for predicting flow rates from tributary areas outside the project limits. For tributary areas on the project site, the analysis shall use the temporary or permanent project land cover condition,whichever will produce the highest flow rates. If using the WWHM to predict flows,bare soil areas should be modeled as "landscaped area." ii. East of the Cascade Mountains Crest: Temporary pipe slope drains shall handle the expected peak flow velocity from a 6-month, 3-hour storm for the 41" developed condition,referred to as the short duration storm. d. Excavated material shall be placed on the uphill side of trenches, consistent with safety and space considerations. e. Check dams shall be placed at regular intervals within constructed channels that are cut down a slope. 7. Protect Drain Inlets r.. a. All storm drain inlets made operable during construction shall be protected so that stormwater runoff does not enter the conveyance system without first being filtered or treated to remove sediment. `r Page 26 of 46 b. Inlet protection devices shall be cleaned or removed and replaced when sediment ; has filled one-third of the available storage(unless a different standard is specified by the product manufacturer). 8. Stabilize Channels and Outlets a. All temporary on-site conveyance channels shall be designed, constructed, and stabilized to prevent erosion from the following expected peak flows: i. West of the Cascade Mountains Crest: Channels shall handle the peak 10 minute velocity of flow from a Type 1A, 10-year, 24-hour frequency storm for the developed condition. Alternatively, the 10-year, 1-hour flow rate indicated by an approved continuous runoff model, increased by a factor of 1.6, may be used. The hydrologic analysis shall use,the existing land cover condition for predicting flow rates from tributary ares outside the project limits. For tributary areas on the project site, the analysis shall use the temporary or permanent project land cover condition,whichever will produce the highest flow rates. If using the WWHM to predict flows,bare soil areas should be modeled as "landscaped area." ii. East of the Cascade Mountains Crest: Channels shall handle the expected peak flow velocity from a 6-month, 3-hour storm for the developed condition, referred to as the short duration storm. «r b. Stabilization, including armoring material, adequate to prevent erosion of outlets, adjacent stream banks, slopes,and downstream reaches shall be provided at the outlets of all conveyance systems. 9. Control Pollutants a. All pollutants, including waste materials and demolition debris,that occur onsite shall be handled and disposed of in a manner that does not cause contamination of stormwater. b. Cover, containment, and protection from vandalism shall be provided for all chemicals, liquid products,petroleum products, and other materials that have the potential to pose a threat to human health or the environment. On-site fueling tanks wf shall include secondary containment. c. Maintenance, fueling,and repair of heavy equipment and vehicles shall be conducted using spill prevention and control measures. Contaminated surfaces shall be cleaned immediately following any spill incident. d. Wheel wash or tire bath wastewater shall be discharged to a separate on-site treatment system or to the sanitary sewer with local sewer district approval. e. Application of fertilizers and pesticides, shall be conducted in a mariner and at application rates that will not result in loss of chemical to stormwater runoff. Manufacturers' label requirements for application rates and procedures shall be followed. Page 27 of 46 f. BMPs shall be used to prevent or treat contamination of stormwater runoff by pH modifying sources. These sources include,but are not limited to:bulk cement, cement kiln dust, fly ash,new concrete washing and curing waters,waste streams generated from concrete grinding and sawing, exposed aggregate processes, dewatering concrete vaults, concrete pumping and mixer washout waters. Permittees shall adjust the pH of stormwater if necessary to prevent violations of water quality standards. g. Permittees shall obtain written approval from Ecology prior to using chemical treatment, other than CO2 or dry ice to adjust pH. 10. Control De-Watering a. Foundation,vault,and trench de-watering water,which have similar characteristics to stormwater runoff at the site, shall be discharged into a controlled conveyance system prior to discharge to a sediment trap or sediment pond. .r. b. Clean,non-turbid de-watering water, such as well-point ground water,can be discharged to systems tributary to, or directly into surface waters of the state, as specified in S9.D.8,provided the de-watering flow does not cause erosion or .�. flooding of receiving waters. Clean de-watering water should not be routed through stormwater sediment ponds. c. Other de-watering disposal options may include: i. infiltration ii. transport offsite in a vehicle, such as a vacuum flush truck, for legal disposal in a manner that does not pollute state waters, iii. Ecology-approved on-site chemical treatment or other suitable treatment technologies, iv. sanitary sewer discharge with local sewer district approval, if there is no other option, or v. use of a sedimentation bag with outfall to a ditch or swale for small volumes of localized de-watering. d. Highly turbid or contaminated dewatering water shall be handled separately from stormwater. 11. Maintain BMPs o a. All temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control BMPs shall be maintained and repaired as needed to assure continued performance of their intended function in accordance with BMP specifications. b. All temporary erosion and sediment control BMPs shall be removed within 30 days after final site stabilization is achieved or after the temporary BMPs are no longer needed. Page 28 of 46 12. Manage the Project a. Development projects shall be phased to the maximum degree practicable and shall take into account seasonal work limitations. b. Inspection and Monitoring All BMPs shall be inspected,maintained, and repaired as needed to assure 0 continued performance of their intended function. Site inspections and monitoring shall be conducted in accordance with S4. c. Maintaining an Updated Construction SWPPP The SWPPP shall be maintained,updated, and implemented in accordance with Conditions S3, S4 and S9. E. SWPPP—Map Contents and Requirements The SWPPP shall also include a vicinity map or general location map (e.g. USGS Quadrangle map, a portion of a county or city map, or other appropriate map)with enough detail to identify the location of the construction site and receiving waters within one mile of the site. The SWPPP shall also include a legible site map (or maps) showing the entire construction site. The following features shall be identified,unless not applicable due to site conditions: 1. The direction of north,property lines, and existing structures and roads; 2. Cut and fill slopes indicating the top and bottom of slope catch lines; 3. Approximate slopes, contours, and direction of stormwater flow before and after major grading activities; 4. Areas of soil disturbance and areas that will not be.disturbed; 5. Locations of structural and nonstructural controls (BMPs) identified in the SWPPP 6. Locations of off-site material, stockpiles, waste storage,borrow areas, and vehicle/equipment storage areas; 7. Locations of all surface water bodies, including wetlands; 8. Locations where stormwater or non-stormwater discharges off-site and/or to a surface water body, including wetlands; 9. Location of water quality sampling station(s), if sampling is required by state or local permitting authority; and . rr Page 29 of 46 10. Areas where final stabilization has been accomplished and no further construction- phase permit requirements apply. r S10. NOTICE OF TERNUNATION A. The site is eligible for termination when either of the following conditions have been met: 1. The site has undergone final stabilization, all temporary BNV1Ps have been removed, and all stormwater discharges associated with construction activity have been eliminated; or 2. All portions of the site which have not undergone final stabilization per S l O.A.1 have been sold and/or transferred(per Condition G9), and the Permittee no longer has operational control of the construction activity. B. When the site is eligible for termination, the Permittee shall submit a complete and accurate Notice of Termination (NOT) form, signed in accordance with General Condition G2,to: Department of Ecology Water Quality Program- Construction Stormwater PO Box 47696 Olympia,Washington 98504-7696 C. The termination is effective on the date the NOT form was received by Ecology, unless the Permittee is notified by Ecology within 30 days that termination request is denied because the eligibility requirements in Condition S 10.A have not been met. Y.. Page 30 of 46 GENERAL CONDITIONS G1. DISCHARGE VIOLATIONS • All discharges and activities authorized by this general permit shall be consistent with the terms and conditions of this general permit. Any discharge of any pollutant more frequent than or at a level in excess of that identified and authorized by the general permit shall constitute a violation of the terms and conditions of this permit. G2. SIGNATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All permit applications shall bear a certification of correctness to be signed: 1. In the case of corporations,by a responsible corporate officer of at least the level of vice president of a corporation; 2. In the case of a partnership,by a general partner of a partnership; 3. In the case of sole proprietorship,by the proprietor; or 010 4. In the case of a municipal, state, or other public facility,by either a principal executive officer or ranking elected official. B. All reports required by this permit and other information requested by Ecology shall be signed by a person described above or by a duly authorized representative of that person. A person is a duly authorized representative only if: 1. The authorization is made in writing by a person described above and submitted to the Ecology. 2. The authorization specifies either an individual or a position having responsibility for the overall operation of the regulated facility, such as the position of plant manager, superintendent,position of equivalent responsibility, or an individual or position having overall responsibility for environmental matters. C. Changes to authorization. If an authorization under paragraph G2.B.2 above is no longer accurate because a different individual or position has responsibility for the overall operation of the facility, a new authorization satisfying the requirements of paragraph G2.B.2 above shall be submitted to Ecology prior to or together with any reports, information, or applications to be signed by an authorized representative. D. Certification. Any person signing a document under this section shall make the following certification: "I certify under penalty of law,that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated Page 31 of 46 the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations." G3. RIGHT OF INSPECTION AND ENTRY The Permittee shall allow an authorized representative of Ecology,upon the presentation of credentials and such other documents as may be required by law: A. To enter upon the premises where a discharge is located or where any records shall be kept under the terms and conditions of this permit. B. To have access to and copy-at reasonable times and at reasonable cost- any records required to be kept under the terms and conditions of this permit. C. To inspect- at reasonable times - any facilities, equipment(including monitoring and control equipment),practices, methods, or operations regulated or required under this permit. D. To sample or monitor-at reasonable times - any substances or parameters at any location for purposes of assuring permit compliance or as otherwise authorized by the Clean Water Act. G4. GENERAL PERMIT MODIFICATION AND REVOCATION _ ,. This permit may be modified,revoked and reissued, or terminated in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 173-226 WAC. Grounds for modification, revocation and reissuance, or termination include,but are not limited to,the following: A. When a change which occurs in the technology or practices for control or abatement of pollutants applicable to the category of dischargers covered under this permit; B. When effluent limitation guidelines or standards are promulgated pursuant to the CWA or Chapter 90.48 RCW, for the category of dischargers covered under this permit; C. When a water quality management plan containing requirements applicable to the category of dischargers covered under this permit is approved; or D. When information is obtained which indicates that cumulative effects on the environment from dischargers covered under this permit are unacceptable. G5. REVOCATION OF COVERAGE UNDER THE PERMIT Pursuant with Chapter 43.21B RCW and Chapter 173-226 WAC, the Director may terminate coverage for any discharger under this permit for cause. Cases where coverage may be terminated include,but are not limited to,the following: Aw Page 32 of 46 A. Violation of any term or condition of this permit; B. Obtaining coverage under this permit by misrepresentation or failure to disclose fully all relevant facts; C. A change in any condition that requires either a temporary or permanent reduction or elimination of the permitted discharge; D. Failure or refusal of the Permittee to allow entry as required in RCW 90.48.090; E. A determination that the permitted activity endangers human health or the environment, „, or contributes to water quality standards violations; F. Nonpayment of permit fees or penalties assessed pursuant to RCW 90.48.465 and Chapter 173-224 WAC; G. Failure of the Permittee to satisfy the public notice requirements of WAC 173-226- 130(5),when applicable. The Director may require any discharger under this permit to apply for and obtain coverage under an individual permit or another more specific general permit. Permittees who have or, their coverage revoked for cause according to WAC 173-226-240 may request temporary coverage under this permit during the time an individual permit is being developed, provided the request is made within ninety(90) days from the time of revocation and is submitted along with a complete individual permit application form. G6. REPORTING A CAUSE FOR MODIFICATION The Permittee shall submit a new application, or a supplement to the previous application, whenever a material change to the construction activity or in the quantity or type of discharge is anticipated which is not specifically authorized by this permit. This application shall be submitted at least sixty(60) days prior to any proposed changes. The filing of a request by the Permittee for a permit modification,revocation and reissuance, or termination, or a notification of planned changes or anticipated noncompliance does not relieve the Permittee of the duty to comply with the existing permit until it is modified or reissued. G7. COMPLIANCE WITH OTHER LAWS AND STATUTES Nothing in this permit shall be construed as excusing the Permittee from compliance with any applicable federal, state, or local statutes, ordinances, or regulations. G8. DUTY TO REAPPLY The Permittee shall apply for permit renewal at least 180 days prior to the specified expiration date of this permit. G9. TRANSFER OF GENERAL PERMIT COVERAGE Coverage under this general permit is automatically transferred to a new discharger, including operators of lots/parcels within a common plan of development or sale, if: r�r Page 33 of 46 A. A written, signed agreement(Transfer of Coverage Form)between the current discharger (Permittee)and new discharger containing a specific date for transfer of permit responsibility, coverage, and liability is submitted to the Director; and B. The Director does not notify the current discharger and new discharger of the Director's intent to revoke coverage under the general permit. If this notice is not given, the transfer is effective on the date specified in the written agreement. When a current discharger(Permittee) transfers a portion of a permitted site,the current discharger shall also submit an updated application form(NOI) to the Director indicating the remaining permitted acreage after the transfer. When a current discharger(Permittee) transfers all portions of a permitted site to one or more new dischargers,the current discharger shall also submit a notice of termination(NOT) form to the Director. G10.REMOVED SUBSTANCES Collected screenings, grit, solids, sludges, filter backwash, or other pollutants removed in the course of treatment or control of stormwater shall not be resuspended or reintroduced to the final effluent stream for discharge to state waters. G11.DUTY TO PROVIDE INFORMATION The Permittee shall submit to Ecology,within a reasonable time, all information which Ecology may request to determine whether cause exists for modifying,revoking and reissuing, or terminating this permit or to determine compliance with this permit. The Permittee shall also submit to Ecology upon request, copies of records required to be kept by this permit [40 CFR 122.41(h)]. G12.OTHER REQUIREMENTS OF 40 CFR All other requirements of 40 CFR 122.41 and 122.42 are incorporated in this permit by reference. G13.ADDITIONAL MONITORING Ecology may establish specific monitoring requirements in addition to those contained in this permit by administrative order or permit modification. G14.PENALTIES FOR VIOLATING PERMIT CONDITIONS Any person who is found guilty of willfully violating the terms and conditions of this permit shall be deemed guilty of a crime, and upon conviction thereof shall be punished by a fine of up to ten thousand dollars ($10,000) and costs of prosecution, or by imprisonment in the discretion of the court. Each day upon which a willful violation occurs may be deemed a separate and additional violation. „. Any person who violates the terms and conditions of a waste discharge permit shall incur, in addition to any other penalty as provided by law, a civil penalty in the amount of up to ten Page 34 of 46 thousand dollars ($10,000) for every such violation. Each and every such violation shall be a , separate and distinct offense, and in case of a continuing violation, every day's continuance shall be deemed to be a separate and distinct violation. G15.UPSET Definition—"Upset"means an exceptional incident in which there is unintentional and temporary noncompliance with technology-based permit effluent limitations because of factors beyond the reasonable control of the Permittee. An upset does not include noncompliance to the extent caused by operational error, improperly designed treatment facilities, inadequate treatment facilities,lack of preventive maintenance, or careless or improper operation. An upset constitutes an affirmative defense to an action brought for noncompliance with such technology-based permit effluent limitations if the requirements of the following paragraph are met. A Permittee who wishes to establish the affirmative defense of upset shall demonstrate, through properly signed, contemporaneous operating logs or other relevant evidence that: 1) an upset occurred and that the Permittee can identify the cause(s) of the upset; 2) the permitted facility was being properly operated at the time of the upset; 3)the Permittee submitted notice of the upset as required in condition S51; and 4)the Permittee complied sit with any remedial measures required under this permit. In any enforcement proceeding,the Permittee seeking to establish the occurrence of an upset has the burden of proof. G16.PROPERTY RIGHTS This permit does not convey any property rights of any sort, or any exclusive privilege. G17.DUTY TO COMPLY The Permittee shall comply with all conditions of this permit. Any permit noncompliance constitutes a violation of the Clean Water Act and is grounds for enforcement action; for permit termination,revocation and reissuance, or modification; or denial of a permit renewal application. G18.TOXIC POLLUTANTS Y The Permittee shall comply with effluent standards or prohibitions established under Section 307(a) of the Clean Water Act for toxic pollutants within the time provided in the regulations that establish those standards or prohibitions, even if this permit has not yet been modified to incorporate the requirement. Page 35 of 46 G19.PENALTIES FOR TAMPERING The Clean Water Act provides that any person who falsifies, tampers with, or knowingly renders inaccurate any monitoring device or method required to be maintained under this permit shall, upon conviction,be punished by a fine of not more than $10,000 per violation, or by imprisonment for not more than two years per violation, or by both. If a conviction of a person is for a violation committed after a first conviction of such person under this Condition,punishment shall be a fine of not more than $20,000 per day of violation, or imprisonment of not more than four(4)years, or both. G20.REPORTING PLANNED CHANGES The Permittee shall, as soon as possible, give notice to Ecology of planned physical alterations, modifications or additions to the permitted construction activity,which will result in: A. The permitted facility being determined to be a new source pursuant to 40 CFR 122.29(b); B. A significant change in the nature or an increase in quantity of pollutants discharged, including but not limited to: for sites 5 acres or larger, a 20% or greater increase in acreage disturbed by construction activity; C. A change in or addition of surface water(s)receiving stormwater or non-stormwater from the construction activity; or aw D. A change in the construction plans and/or activity that affects the Permittee's monitoring requirements in Special Condition S4. Following such notice,permit coverage may be modified, or revoked and reissued pursuant to 40 CFR 122.62(a)to specify and limit any pollutants not previously limited. Until such modification is effective, any new or increased discharge in excess of permit limits or not specifically authorized by this permit constitutes a violation. + G21.REPORTING OTHER INFORMATION Where the Permittee becomes aware that it failed to submit any relevant facts in a permit .. application, or submitted incorrect information in a permit application or in any report to Ecology, it shall promptly submit such facts or information. w. G22.REPORTING ANTICIPATED NON-COMPLIANCE The Permittee shall give advance notice to Ecology by submission of a new application or ,., supplement thereto at least forty-five (45) days prior to commencement of such discharges, of any facility expansions,production increases, or other planned changes, such as process modifications, in the permitted facility or activity which may result in noncompliance with permit limits or conditions. Any maintenance of facilities, which might necessitate Page 36 of 46 unavoidable interruption of operation and degradation of effluent quality, shall be scheduled during non-critical water quality periods and carried out in a manner approved by Ecology. G23.REQUESTS TO BE EXCLUDED FROM COVERAGE UNDER THE PERMIT Any discharger authorized by this permit may request to be excluded from coverage under the general permit by applying for an individual permit. The discharger shall submit to the ' Director an application as described in WAC 173-220-040 or WAC 173-216-070, whichever do is applicable,with reasons supporting the.request. These reasons shall fully document how an individual permit will apply to the applicant in a way that the general permit cannot. Ecology may make specific requests for information to support the request. The Director shall either issue an individual permit or deny the request with a statement explaining the reason for the denial. When an individual permit is issued to a discharger otherwise subject to the construction stormwater general permit, the applicability of the construction stormwater ' general permit to that Permittee is automatically terminated on the effective date of the individual permit. sit G24.APPEALS A. The terms and conditions of this general permit, as they apply to the appropriate class of dischargers, are subject to appeal by any person within 30 days of issuance of this general permit, in accordance with Chapter 43.21B RCW, and Chapter 1737226 WAC. B. The terms and conditions of this general permit, as they apply to an individual discharger, are appealable in accordance with Chapter 43.21B RCW within 30 days of the effective date of coverage of that discharger. Consideration of an appeal of general permit coverage of an individual discharger is limited to the general permit's applicability or nonapplicability to that individual discharger. rw C. The appeal of general permit coverage of an individual discharger does not affect any other dischargers covered under this general permit. If the terms and conditions of this general permit are found to be inapplicable to any individual discharger(s),the matter shall be remanded to Ecology for consideration of issuance of an individual permit or permits. G25.SEVERABILITY The provisions of this permit are severable, and if any provision of this permit, or application of any provision of this permit to any circumstance, is held invalid, the application of such provision to other circumstances, and the remainder of this permit shall not be affected oil thereby. G26.BYPASS PROHIBITED A. Bypass Procedures Bypass,which is the intentional diversion of waste streams from any portion of a treatment facility, is prohibited for stormwater events below the design criteria for Page 37 of 46 stormwater management. Ecology may take enforcement action against a Permittee for bypass unless one of the following circumstances (1, 2, 3 or 4) is applicable. 1. Bypass of stormwater is consistent with the design criteria and part of an approved management practice in the applicable stormwater management manual. 2. Bypass for essential maintenance without the potential to cause violation of permit limits or conditions. Bypass is authorized if it is for essential maintenance and does not have the potential to cause violations of limitations or other conditions of this permit, or adversely impact public health. 3. Bypass of stormwater is unavoidable,unanticipated, and results in noncompliance of this permit. This bypass is permitted only if: a. Bypass is unavoidable to prevent loss of life,personal injury, or severe property damage. "Severe property damage"means substantial physical damage to property, damage to the.treatment facilities which would cause them to become inoperable, or substantial and permanent loss of natural resources which can reasonably be expected to occur in the absence of a bypass; b. There are no feasible alternatives to the bypass, such as the use of auxiliary treatment facilities, retention of untreated wastes,maintenance during normal periods of equipment downtime (but not if adequate backup equipment should have been installed in the exercise of reasonable engineering judgment to prevent a bypass which occurred during normal periods of equipment downtime or preventative maintenance), or transport of untreated wastes to another treatment facility; and c. Ecology is properly notified of the bypass as required in Special Condition S5.F of this permit. 4. A planned action that would cause bypass of stormwater and has the potential to aw result in noncompliance of this permit during a storm event. The Permittee shall notify Ecology at least thirty(30) days before the planned date of bypass. The notice shall contain: a. a description of the bypass and its cause; �. b. an analysis of all known alternatives which would eliminate, reduce, or mitigate the need for bypassing; c. a cost-effectiveness analysis of alternatives including comparative resource damage assessment; d. the minimum and maximum duration of bypass under each alternative; e. a recommendation as to the preferred alternative for conducting the bypass; Page 38 of 46 f. the projected date of bypass initiation; g. a statement of compliance with SEPA; h. a request for modification of water quality standards as provided for in WAC 173- 201A-110, if an exceedance of any water quality standard is anticipated; and i. steps taken or planned to reduce, eliminate, and prevent reoccurrence of the bypass. 5. For probable construction bypasses,the need to bypass is to be identified as early in the planning process as possible. The analysis required above shall be considered during preparation of the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan(SWPPP) and shall be included to the extent practical. In cases where the probable need to bypass is determined early, continued analysis is necessary up to and including the construction period in an effort to minimize or eliminate the bypass. Ecology will consider the following prior to issuing an administrative order for this type bypass: a. If the bypass is necessary to perform construction or maintenance-related activities essential to meet the requirements of this permit. b. If there are feasible alternatives to bypass, such as the use of auxiliary treatment facilities,retention of untreated wastes, stopping production,maintenance during normal periods of equipment down time, or transport of untreated wastes to another treatment facility. Ot c. If the bypass is planned and scheduled to minimize adverse effects on the public and the environment. After consideration of the above and the adverse effects of the proposed bypass and any other relevant factors,Ecology will approve, conditionally approve, or deny the request. The public shall be notified and given an opportunity to comment on bypass incidents of significant duration,to the extent feasible. Approval of a request to bypass will be by administrative order issued by Ecology under RCW 90.48.120. B. DILty to Mitigate The Permittee is required to take all reasonable steps to minimize or prevent any discharge or sludge use or disposal in violation of this permit that has a reasonable likelihood of adversely affecting human health or the environment. Page 39 of 46 APPENDIX A—DEFINITIONS AKART is an acronym for"all known, available, and reasonable methods of prevention, control, and treatment."AKART represents the most current methodology that can be reasonably required for preventing,controlling, or abating the pollutants and controlling pollution associated with a discharge. Applicable T11ML means a TMDL for turbidity, fine sediment, high pH, or phosphorus, which has been completed and approved by EPA prior to November 16, 2005, or prior to the date the operator's complete permit application is received by Ecology,whichever is later. Applicant means an o erator seeking coverage under this permit. Best Management Practices (BMPs)means schedules of activities,prohibitions of practices, maintenance procedures, and other physical, structural and/or managerial practices to prevent or reduce the pollution of waters of the state. BMPs include treatment systems, operating procedures, and practices to control stormwater associated with construction activity, spillage or leaks, sludge or waste disposal, or drainage from raw material storage. Bu er means an area designated by a local jurisdiction that is contiguous to and intended to protect a sensitive area Bypass means the intentional diversion of waste streams from any portion of a treatment facility. Calendar Week(same as Week)means a period of seven consecutive days starting on Sunday. Certified Erosion and Sediment Control Lead(CESCL)means a person who has current certification through an approved erosion and sediment control training program that meets the minimum training standards established by Ecology(see BMP C 160 in the SWMM). Clean Water Act(CWA)means the Federal Water Pollution Control Act enacted by Public Law 92-500, as amended by Public Laws 95-217, 95-576, 96-483, and 97-117; USC 1251 et seq. Combined Sewer means a sewer which has been designed to serve as a sanitary sewer and a storm sewer, and into which inflow is allowed by local ordinance. CommonIp an of development or sale means a site where multiple separate and distinct construction activities may be taking place at different times on different schedules,but still under a single plan. Examples include: 1)phased projects and projects with multiple filings or lots, even if the separate phases or filings/lots will be constructed under separate contract or by separate owners (e.g., a development where lots are sold to separate builders); 2) a development plan that may be phased over multiple years,but is still under a consistent plan for long-term development; and 3)projects in a contiguous area that may be unrelated but still under the same contract, such as construction of a building extension and a new parking lot at the same facility. Ow Page 40 of 46 If the project is part of a common plan of development or sale,the disturbed area of the entire plan shall be used in determining permit requirements. Composite Sample A mixture of grab samples collected at the same sampling point at different times, formed either by continuous sampling or by mixing discrete samples. May be "time- composite" (collected at constant time intervals) or "flow-proportional" (collected either as a constant sample volume at time intervals proportional to stream flow, or collected by increasing the volume of each aliquot as the flow increases while maintaining a constant time interval between the aliquots. Construction Activity means land disturbing operations including clearing, grading or excavation which disturbs the surface of the land. Such activities may include road construction, construction of residential houses, office buildings, or industrial buildings, and demolition activity. Demonstrably Equivalent means that the technical basis for the selection of all stormwater BMPs is documented within a SWPPP, including: 1. The method and reasons for choosing the stormwater BMPs selected; 2. The pollutant removal performance expected from the BMPs selected; 3. The technical basis supporting the performance claims for the BMPs selected, including any available data concerning field performance of the BMPs selected; 4. An assessment of how the selected BMPs will comply with state water quality standards; and 5. An assessment of how the selected BMPs will satisfy both applicable federal technology-based treatment requirements and state requirements to use all known, available, and reasonable methods of prevention, control, and treatment(AKART). Department means the Washington State Department of Ecology. Detention means the temporary storage of stormwater to improve quality and/or to reduce the mass flow rate of discharge. De-watering means the act of pumping ground water or stormwater away from an active construction site. Director means the Director of the Washington Department of Ecology or his/her authorized 41 representative. Discharger means an owner or operator of any facility or activity subject to regulation under Chapter 90.48 RCW or the Federal Clean Water Act. Domestic Wastewater means water carrying human wastes, including kitchen,bath, and laundry wastes from residences,buildings, industrial establishments, or other places, together with such ground water infiltration or surface waters as may be present. +rr Page 41 of 46 Engineered soils The use of soil amendments including,but not limited, to Portland cement treated base(CTB), cement kiln dust(CKD), or fly ash to achieve certain desirable soil characteristics. Eguivalent BWs means operational, source control, treatment, or innovative BMPs which result in equal or better quality of stormwater discharge to surface water or to ground water than BMPs selected from the SVRvB4. Erosion means the wearing away of the land surface by running water, wind, ice, or other geological agents, including such processes as gravitational creep. Erosion and Sediment Control BMPs means BMPs that are intended to prevent erosion and sedimentation, such as preserving natural vegetation, seeding, mulching and matting,plastic covering, filter fences, sediment traps, and ponds. Erosion and sediment control BMPs are synonymous with stabilization and structural BMPs. aw Final Stabilization (same as fuLly stabilized or full stabilization)means the establishment of a permanent vegetative cover, or equivalent permanent stabilization measures (such as riprap, r, gabions or geotextiles)which prevents erosion. Ground Water means water in a saturated zone or stratum beneath the land surface or a surface water body. Infection well means a"well"that is used for the subsurface emplacement of fluids. (see Well) Aw Jurisdiction means a political unit such as a city, town or county; incorporated for local self- government. National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)means the national program for issuing, modifying, revoking and reissuing, terminating,monitoring, and enforcing permits, and �. imposing and enforcing pretreatment requirements,under sections 307, 402, 318, and 405 of the Federal Clean Water Act, for the discharge of pollutants to surface waters of the state from point sources. These permits are referred to as NPDES permits and, in Washington State, are Aw administered by the Washington Department of Ecology. Notice of Intent(NOl)means the application for, or a request for coverage under this general permit pursuant to WAC 173-226-200. Notice of Termination (NOT)means a request for termination of coverage under this general permit as specified by Special Condition S 10 of this permit. Operator means any party associated with a construction project that meets either of the following two criteria: 1. The party has operational control over construction plans and specifications, including the ability to make modifications to those plans and specifications; or Page 42 of 46 2. The party has day-to-day operational control of those activities at a project which are necessary to ensure compliance with a SWPPP for the site or other permit conditions (e.g.,they are authorized to direct workers at a site to carry out activities required by the SWPPP or comply with other permit conditions). rpt; Ou all, means the location where stormwater leaves the site. It also includes the location where stormwater is discharged to a surface waterbody within a site,but does not include discharges to so on-site stormwater treatment/infiltration devices or storm sewer systems. Permittee means individual or entity that receives notice of coverage under this general permit. so pH means a liquid's acidity or alkalinity. A pH of 7 is defined as neutral. Large variations above or below this value are considered harmful to most aquatic life. pH Monitoring Period means the time period in which the pH of stormwater runoff from a site shall be tested a minimum of once every seven days to determine if stormwater is above pH 8.5. Point Source means any discernible, confined, and discrete conveyance, including but not limited to, any pipe, ditch, channel,tunnel, conduit,well, discrete fissure, and container from which pollutants are or may be discharged to surface waters of the state. This term does not include return flows from irrigated agriculture. (See Fact Sheet for further explanation.) Pollutant means dredged spoil, solid waste, incinerator residue, filter backwash, sewage, garbage, domestic sewage sludge (biosolids),munitions, chemical wastes,biological materials, radioactive materials,heat,wrecked or discarded equipment,rock, sand, cellar dirt, and industrial,municipal, and agricultural waste. This term does not include sewage from vessels within the meaning of section 312 of the CWA,nor does it include dredged or fill material discharged in accordance with a permit issued under section 404 of the CWA. Pollution means contamination or other alteration of the physical, chemical, or biological properties of waters of the state; including change in temperature,taste, color, turbidity, or odor of the waters; or such discharge of any liquid, gaseous, solid, radioactive or other substance into any waters of the state as will or is likely to create a nuisance or render such waters harmful, detrimental or injurious to the public health, safety or welfare; or to domestic, commercial, industrial, agricultural,recreational, or other legitimate beneficial uses; or to livestock,wild animals,birds, fish or other aquatic life. Receiving Water means the waterbody at the point of discharge. If the discharge is to a storm sewer system, either surface or subsurface,the receiving water is the waterbody that the storm sewer system discharges to. Systems designed primarily for other purposes such as for ground water drainage, redirecting stream natural flows, or for conveyance of irrigation water/return flows that coincidentally convey stormwater are considered the receiving water. Representative means a stormwater or wastewater sample which represents the flow and characteristics of the discharge. Representative samples may be a grab sample, a time- proportionate composite sample, or a flow proportionate sample. Ecology's Construction Stormwater Monitoring Manual provides guidance on representative sampling. rr. Page 43 of 46 wr Sanitary Sewer means a sewer which is designed to convey domestic wastewater. Sediment means the fragmented material that originates from the weathering and erosion of rocks or unconsolidated deposits, and is transported by, suspended in, or deposited by water. Sedimentation means the depositing or formation of sediment. Sensitive area means a waterbody, wetland, stream, aquifer recharge area, or channel migration zone. SEPA (State Environmental Policy Act)means the Washington State Law,RCW 43.21 C.020, intended to prevent or eliminate damage to the environment. Significant Amount means an amount of a pollutant in a discharge that is amenable to available and reasonable methods of prevention or treatment; or an amount of a pollutant that has a reasonable potential to cause a violation of surface or ground water quality or sediment management standards. Significant Concrete Work means greater than 1000 cubic yards poured concrete or recycled concrete. Siznificant Contributor of Pollutants means a facility determined by Ecology to be a contributor of a significant amount(s)of a pollutant(s)to waters of the state of Washington. Site means the land or water area where any "facility or activity" is physically located or conducted. Source Control BMPs means physical, structural or mechanical devices or facilities that are intended to prevent pollutants from entering stormwater. A few examples of source control :W BMPs are erosion control practices, maintenance of stormwater facilities, constructing roofs over storage and working areas, and directing wash water and similar discharges to the sanitary sewer or a dead end sump. Stabilization means the application of appropriate BMPs to prevent the erosion of soils, such as, temporary and permanent seeding,vegetative covers,mulching and matting,plastic covering and M sodding. See also the definition of Erosion and Sediment Control BMPs. Storm Drain means any drain which drains directly into a storm sewer system, usually found along roadways or in parking lots. Storm Sewer System means a means a conveyance, or system of conveyances (including roads with drainage systems, municipal streets, catch basins, curbs, gutters, ditches, manmade channels, or storm drains designed or used for collecting or conveying stormwater. This does Aw not include systems which are part of a combined sewer or Publicly Owned Treatment Works (POTW) as defined at 40 CFR 122.2. . Bili Page 44 of 46 Stormwater means that portion of precipitation that does not naturally percolate into the ground or evaporate,but flows via overland flow, interflow,pipes, and other features of a stormwater drainage system into a defined surface water body, or a constructed infiltration facility. Stormwater Mana-aement Manual(SWMM) or Manual means the technical manual published by Ecology for use by local governments that contain descriptions of and design criteria for BNIPs to prevent, control, or treat pollutants in stormwater. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) means a documented plan to implement measures to identify,prevent, and control the contamination of point source discharges of stormwater. Surface Waters of the State includes lakes,rivers, ponds, streams, inland waters, salt waters, and all other surface waters and water courses within the jurisdiction of the state of Washington. Total Maximum Daily Load(TAML) means a calculation of the maximum amount of a pollutant that a waterbody can receive and still meet state water quality standards. Percentages of the total maximum daily load are allocated to the various pollutant sources. A TNIDL is the sum of the allowable loads of a single pollutant from all contributing point and nonpoint sources. The TMDL calculations shall include a"margin of safety" to ensure that the waterbody can be protected in case there are unforeseen events or unknown sources of the pollutant. The calculation shall also account for seasonable variation in water quality. Treatment BAs means BMPs that are intended to remove pollutants from stormwater. A few examples of treatment BMPs are detention ponds, oil/water separators,biofiltration, and constructed wetlands. Transparency means a measurement of water clarity in centimeters (cm),using a 60 cm. transparency tube. The transparency tube is used to estimate the relative clarity or transparency of water by noting the depth at which a black and white Secchi disc becomes visible when water is released from a value in the bottom of the tube. A transparency tube is sometimes referred to as a"turbidity tube". Turbidi The clarity of water expressed as nephelometric turbidity units (NTU) and measured with a calibrated turbidimeter. Waste Load Allocation (WLA) means the portion of a receiving water's loading capacity that is allocated to one of its existing or future point sources of pollution. WLAs constitute a type of water quality based effluent limitation(40 CFR 130.2(h)). Water Quality means the chemical,physical, and biological characteristics of water, usually with respect to its suitability for a particular purpose. Waters of the State includes those waters as defined as "waters of the United States" in 40 CFR Subpart 122.2 within the geographic boundaries of Washington State and "waters of the state" as rr Page 45 of 46 rr defined in Chapter 90.48 RCW which include lakes,rivers,ponds, streams, inland waters, underground waters, salt waters, and all other surface waters and water courses within the jurisdiction of the state of Washington. .r Well means a bored, drilled or driven shaft, or dug hole whose depth is greater than the largest surface dimension. (see Injection Well) W Page 46 of 46 APPENDIX B—ACRONYMS AKART All Known,Available, and Reasonable Methods of Prevention, Control, and at Treatment BUT Best Management Practice At CESCL Certified Erosion and Sediment Control Lead CFR Code of Federal Regulations at CKD Cement Kiln Dust cm Centimeters CTB Cement Treated Base CWA Clean Water Act DMR Discharge Monitoring Report EPA Environmental Protection Agency ESC Erosion and Sediment Control NOI Notice of Intent NOT Notice of Termination NPDES National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System NTU Nephelometric Turbidity Unit RCW Revised Code of Washington SEPA State Environmental Policy Act SWMM Stormwater Management Manual SWPPP Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan TMDL Total Maximum Daily Load UIC . Underground Injection Control USC United States Code USEPA United States Environmental Protection Agency WAC Washington Administrative Code WQ Water Quality WWHM Western Washington Hydrology Model t �*'x w.. 3 ra .; `- z.>Fe v*' ate g' -YY 'y"`'s �`...,,„ *` # a$ ` 'a''"f zu 4^' rr +'', ,? '�3xs '��.,� '-.. ''.,a .�..Pr ,.".c'` 'r t l ;t '`.^ '# r^^""4"'.+7 `'u #�ar �s�: `:. �a'ic,:x+ -'�c ,;"-%..Y ' a w.� .�. y 4 y„ " i:. Lp`�1 a ' '�' r' i. tR '. ` ' e v�sa.� " i" 1 "` +'� e .d $fiu `' "F..c sky. r^' a. > +,mat 5 �s r #`� � s r 7� ' ° - ryt', }- " '" ` W �3F ,+ '�� ''� :. < 's +x 'Y x. i x f �"�-f z' a �*"' asp w� � wk t' r Y't $�-' �'�a*�, � 4 vwm 6111 , r r s' ' Mg.`,, Y a a *'-,xrt "i ^�s — g,10,1� �r` ," ,�,, ,,'t,��......,�,, -"',-_—, , , ,, , -�, A `�� " ,' -j, - '.' '� I WS� "`s... '" #' Y- wow WROWAN :tea' -;- ', f '� p e:: ' � k; s t" �.;r r 4c.�. A-VIRM l&w i,'-'-g. `� .,ai.�. rt a E tt€y ', "3" '�Po, ,+ :%x s#E t t F- Y P,No "t x .*� f 'N.x ,* ' e sx� s �u '� - s k t e i # fi$� -a } # xr c mai ,i '" }=v x ,�- "'s 5 t' o- z s i"IP, M o"g l 50 101 z '' c ' , `r , ,.'p z a :ton t 1+ a 3 -0,'3 ,�, zy rrt 3 ' 11 �s v a'nPa �r k � _x rMAYROM"' -Sl r M k < r� ' # v sf� £11�11-11, k t, t whomf :,I ^ai r e i, s,�, -i t Y fiF I 69 a�'. rt x ?s c"'.� ,-01"Mon-WASS-IN�` r s ., y } a + _ r % a .i sA . r 11 + �' + " fixAWTV ate ateQ§Wjow w 11� ,g. viWy�g '' ASNY x .i`'a s a _ Y r. J ,7 '.r" v f ++ „i1 ,l g 't+'i. ry n 's,. -Amulms kq i { i M 'a `. 19 J k. q 4 �„3sa, 5° `s y a i a ssi W a :* „ r x -i lf- - a �1111 `dna r n.x, s-r 1go e -'�` Maux � `k + r; S a " - ,r h, 64 a �'� _ `5ties :., 5r F :.t or irk'#" �s „^ � t a7--fajooz _ +x § r - #'x" t,t ytt '' sxt .E F Y TY q M i. � 3 3.'QQ0j3 :i t v°r� .. »�, }, ' ,Sw, ?, : s ss� n *-rH s'z•�, s" �, € r {xs r M"cP '�.5`a`' '',-k #` `�""11" �UA ss ems' k�`�"''it i" ,.�° s i 7 Y f .ems J- �}," `•M ' y , � :+",�* p4 ti's-.L�. ,L..�£ '',t^'ti r" .,Y' 3 ' '�Z L y " �. �t :tom. ,iai % j °` 7 ,�, s � 11 -11 t.` ,.�_ t `° _ ,0 S i k t a P 6 a >a F�*N"t,Z> �, �v f� s K' '- q b am W2 t rWO .5 �.� .,�` 7 `- i - 100�a } p i ' `^" ` cBMQQM t +� d s "+ A r a �, .R2 jg� X S " nY r 3 Y s 11-1 11 V#'r*,oIy3 j ,�.z� 2? r y a�q,�, g-r,s z+ >�r - „ ai �.g” h c3q,'tt`�"Sk x^,i- Si �:.ts - r 5 v z m� , .6 _�r ;r �, *.._ s�tis ^ ,.+ :.£ ,a _. � � v�#�r � �� .n< ., . . .—, Ir,.,. .. r go Addendum 1 4 CITY OF RENTON �r. Stonegate Lift Station Conveyance Improvements ADDENDUM NO. 1 Date Issued: July 22, 2010 Date of Bid Opening: August 3. 2010 NOTICE TO ALL PLAN HOLDERS The Bid Documents for the project are modified as described below. Bidders shall incorporate this Addendum into the Bid Documents. Failure to do so may subject the bidder to disqualification of his bid. THE BID DOCUMENTS ARE MODIFED AS FOLLOWS: ++ 1. Add the attached "SUBCONTRACTOR LIST"to the contract specifications. 2. Add the following language to the end of the second paragraph of Section 1-09.14(27) Electrical am Work(Bid Item 51):Included shall be all costs associated with providing and decommissioning the temporary electrical service,and all related power charges. Also Included shall be all power costs associated with any dewatering activities. rW 3. Add the following language to Section 6-07.3 Construction Requirements:All concrete coatings shall be applied during declining temperatures unless directed otherwise by Manufacturer product literature or the Manufacturer representative. 4. Revise the language in Section Sub-Section 10.16250, Part 2--Products, 2.01 Automatic Transfer Switch. G. Manufacture: Cummins, no equal or approved equal. S. Revise the first sentence of Note No. 1 under"NOTES" on Plan Sheets C12, C13, C14 and C15 to +r+ the following:All Ductile Iron Piping and Fittings Shall be E-pe"Cement Lined Class 52 Except for Flanged Spools(CL 53) or where otherwise noted on drawings. 6. Delete the item 18(4" DI 900 BEND, M1 x MJ) and item 19(4"PVC C900 PIPE x LF AS REQ'D) from the"Material List"as shown on Plan Sheets C13,C14 and C15. 7. Replace the Lighting and Fixture Schedule on Plan Sheet Ell with the attached Schedule. 8. Revise Plan Sheet E5 as follows: Change the outdoor light fixture above double door from j fixture type F2 to fixture type F5, 9, Revise the conduit routing on Plan Sheet E6 to the following: Conduit C-Vaultl should be routed from the Floats Junction Box to the Valve Vault as indicated in the Conduit and Wire Schedule on Plan Sheet Ell. I John Hoi? n, P oject Manager, Wastewater Utilities Phone:425-430-7279 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT CiFRECEI F IlDeDA Yrr 05 SIGNED: r TITL , NAME OF COMPANY:_��.�fl�> , . •� .,�Q-�p;� �j Ow H:\FileSys\WWP-Waste Water\WWP-27-3473 Summerwind-Stonegate LS Replace men t\CONSTRUCTION\LiftStation\Contract Info\AddendumI Stonegate Lift Stati an.DOC I wided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale +ir+r Addendum 2 CITY OF RENTON Stonegate Lift Station Conveyance Improvements ADDENDUM NO. 2 Date-Issued: July 29,2010 Date of Bid Opening: August 3. 2010 NOTICE TO ALL PLAN HOLDERS The Bid Documents for the project are modified as described below. Bidders shall incorporate this Addendum into the Bid Documents. Failure to do so may subject the bidder to disqualification of his bid, +rrt THE BID DOCUMENTS ARE MODIFIED AS FOLLOWS: I. Add the following to Section 1-09.14(NN) Lift Station Excavation and Backfill(Bid Item 039): "Imported Select Material"shall be paid under the bid item"Imported Backfill Material". 2. Add the following to Section 1-09.14(DDD) imported Backfill Material(Bid Item 055): Imported Backfill Material shall meet the requirements of Sub-Section 10.02320 2.1 BACKFILL GRAVEL AND STRUCTURAL FILL. j I 3. Revise the "TYPICAL GRAVITY SEWER OR FORCE MAIN TRENCH DETAIL" on Sheet C9 as follows: Delete 38"Min. trench width and Replace with 60"Max.trench width. irlr I 4. Add the following to Section 8-24.2 Materials: Gravity Block Wall shall be Keystone Standard or approved equal. f� John Hobson, Project Manager, Wastewater Utilities Phone:425-430-7279 Y I ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF RECEIPT A N rrl SIGNED: TITL rr NAME OF COMPANY:814Q 4n1tA V 00' i i r ! I so irr H:\File Sys\WWP-Wastewater\WWP-27-34735um merwind-Stonegate LS Reptacement\CONSTRUCTION\Lift Station\Contract Info\Addendum2 Stonegate Lift Station-DOC 1 gel Addendum#2 Mvided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale irn Addendum 3 CITY OF RENTON .► Stonegate Lift Station Conveyance Improvements ADDENDUM NO. 3 Date Issued: August 1,2010 bate of Bid Opening: August 3, 2010 > NOTICE TO ALL PLAN HOLDERS The Bid Documents for the project are modified as described below. Bidders shall incorporate this to Addendum into the Bid Documents. Failure to do so may subject the bidder to disqualification of his bid. THE BID DOCUMENTS ARE MODI FED AS FOLLOWS: go 1. Gravel payment clarification: Import gravels used for pipe trenches(when native is unsuitable) j shall be gravel borrow, and shall be paid by the unit price under Gravel Borrow(Bid Item 006). Graven borrow paid by the unit price shall also be used for the roadway where shown on the drawings. Pipe bedding materials and any native materials used for pipe trenches are incidental to the pipe bid items. irr Imported structural backfill for the lift station excavation and raising the grade of the site shall be I structural backfill material,and shall be paid by the unit price under Bid Item 055, Imported Backfill Material. Any use of native materials as backfill to the lift station excavation is incidental to Bid Item 039, Lift Station Excavation and Backfill. Any use of native materials for raising the site to the specified grade is incidental to Bid Item 038, Site Clearing and Grading, r 2. Revise Plan Sheet E2 as follows: Delete callout"DISCONNECT ENCLOSURES",which is located immediately north of the lift station wet well, and Replace with "TERMINATION BOXES". 3. Revise Plan Sheet E5 as follows: In the callout "TO WET WELL DISCONNECT ENCLOSURES" for the "Power Plan" detail,Delete the words"DISCONNECT ENCLOSURES"and Replace with the words "TERMINATION BOXES". i " 4. Revise Plan Sheet E9 as follows: Delete the title "DISCONNECT BOX EQUIPMENT STAND SECTION" of detail "A/E6"and Replace with "TERMINATION BOX EQUIPMENT STAND SECTION". j Joh,"obson, Project Manager, Wastewater Utilities Phone:425-430-7279 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF RECEIPT D j I + SIGNED: TITL.: ar NAME OF COMPANY: St4QM ,Wd Z0A&ZgtLd=ZZCAJ W r rr H:\File Sys\W WP-Wastewater\W W P-273473 Summerwind-Stonegate LS Replacement\CONSTRUCTION\Lift statioAcontract Info\Addendum3 Stonegate LiftStation.DOC ovided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale ,r r owAddendum 4 CITY OF RENTON M Stonegate Lift Station Conveyance Improvements ADDENDUM NO. 4 Date Issued: August 2, 2010 REVISED Date of Bid Opening: August 24, 2010 NOTICE TO ALL PLAID HOLDERS The Bid Documents for the project are modified as described below. Bidders shall incorporate this Addendum into the Bid Documents, Failure to do so may subject the bidder to disqualification of his bid. THE BID DOCUMENTS ARE MODIF'ED AS FOLLOWS: 1. The Bid Opening Date is Revised from 2:30 PM,August 3,2010 to 2:30 PM August 24,2010. John obson, Project Manager,Wastewater Utilities Phone:425-430-7279 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF RECEIPT A N SIGNED: TIT NAME OF COMPANY:Cj"gm•ms �p t ZX adrw- �r ira ar r. w H;\File Sys\WWP-Wastewater\WWP-27-3473 Summerwind-Stunegate LS Replacement\CONSTRUCTION\Lift Station\Contract Info\Addendum4 Stonegate Lift Station.DOC F amw)vided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see ww .bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale nr „o Addendum 5 CITY OF RENTON us Stonegate Lift Station Conveyance improvements ADDENDUM NO.5 Date Issued: August 17,2010, Date of Bid Opening: August 24, 2010 arr NOTICE TO ALL PLAN HOLDERS The Bid Documents for the project are modified as described below. Bidders shell incorporate this Addendum into the Bid Documents. Failure to do so may subject the bidder to disqualification of his bid, I i THE BID DOCUMENTS ARE MODIFED AS FOLLOWS: j rs 1. Revise Section 1-09.14(NN) Lift Station Excavation and Backfill (Bid Item 039)as follows: Delete the word" urnishin "'from the first sentence of the second paragraph and the words"and replace with imparted material meeting the requirements herein from the third sentence of the third paragraph. Add the following sentence after the third sentence of the third paragraph,"The l Contractor shall replace unsuitable native material with imported backfill material as specified j and paid for In Bid Item 055." 2. Add the following paragraph to Section 1-09.14(RR) Precast Concrete Overflow Storage Vault(Bid i [tem 043):`The Precast Concrete Overflow Storage Vault as described in the Special Provisions and shown on the Drawings may be constructed as a cast-in-place vault of the same Internal dimensions,provided the Contractor adheres to the applicable requirements in Sections 10.02605 and 10.03300 of the Special Provisions,submits a feasible plan for shoring and dewatering the excavation, provides stamped structural plans and computations by a +� professional engineer registered in Washington State,and provides a design rated for a minimum of H-20 loading with no soil cover, with loading also accounting for the potential of both front and back vehicle axle loads being parked on the lid of the structure." 3. Delete items 9-14.6(7)through 9-15.20 in the table of contents at the beginning of the Special Provisions. 4. Add the following language to Section 10.15070 of the Special Provisions: 2.8 SWING CHECK VALVES i A. The discharge piping for each pump shall be equipped with an AWWA C-508 non-clog swing type check valve with outside spring and[ever,Style 259 as manufactured by M&H Valve or i ar accepted equal,sized as shown on the Drawings. The external spring and lever shall be provided to accomplish quicker closing and to minimize slamming,and so that the flapper can be lifted to back- flush the pump and piping. The body shall be cast iron,ASTM A126 Class B,with class 125 flanges. The check valves shall be rated at 175 psi water working pressure,and 350 psi for hydrostatic test I pressure. The valve clapper shall be cast Iron,rubber-faced. The clapper shall swing completely clear of the waterway when the valve is fully open. Non-lubricated o-ring packing glands shall be provided. Hinge pins,bolts and hardware shall be stainless steel. The valve body interior shall have no projections or pockets to trap solids or stingy material. The valve cover shall be removable for cleaning and clapper inspection or replacement. Check valves shall be constructed to permit top arr entry for complete removal of internal components without removing the valve. Submit product data for check valve. B. Each of the check valves shall contain a limit switch with a time delay and a starter auxiliary H:\File Sys\WWP-WasteWater\WWP-27-3473 Summerwind-Stonegate LS Replace ment\CONSTRUCTION\Lift Station\Contract Info\Addendum5 Stonegate Uft.Station.DOC rovided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale Addendum 5 contact. Limit switches shall be as listed on Sheet E6 of the Drawings. Submit details of limit switch Installation for review prior to field construction. +rr 5. Clarification:Bidders are advised that it is permissible to separate the ATS and MTS enclosures from the Motor Control Center,thereby providing separate enclosures for each. Enclosures shall be floor mounted or wall mounted as determined by the contractor. Design drawings will not be re-issued prior to bid opening. If the contractor selects to provide separate enclosures, all design changes In the control building,and all wires and conduit required between the enclosures,shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 6. Delete the"power conduit"shown crossing Nile Avenue NE on the following drawings:C3,C5,C6, C7,C8 and C12.Also Delete the cailout, "BORE POWER UNDER NILEAVE. NE".Refer to Drawing E2 ++� for the layout of the power conduit. 7. Replace page 3 of the"Schedule of Prices"with the attached,revised page 3. (Note:the revised I page 3 is to change the unit designation for Bid Item 36, Gravity Black Wall,from Square Yard to .r i Square Foot). j 8. Revise the last sentence of note on Drawing C3 under the GEOTECNICAL REPORT heading to the following: "THIS REPORT AND ADDENDUM ARE AVAILABLE FOR REFERENCE AND DESIGN PURPOSES ONLY,AND ARE AVAILABLE AT THE CITY OF RENTON PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT OR ONLINE AT THE BUILDER'S EXCHANGE WEBSITE FOR REVIEW". John,J-fo son,Project Manager,Wastewater Utilities Phone:425-430-7279 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF RECEIPT OFD SIGNED: ir TIT NAME OF COMPANY: s rr I r. H:\FileSys\WWP-WasteWater\W WP-27.3473 Summerwind-Stonegate LS Replacement\CONSTRUCTION\L'ift Station\Contract Info\Addendurn5 Stonegate Lift Station.DOC ovided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale